378 volume 2 part i civil specifications

8/16/2019 378 Volume 2 Part I Civil Specifications

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/378-volume-2-part-i-civil-specifications 1/514

Proposed B + G + 5 floors Residential Building

Plot no. IC3-B37, International City Phase-3, Dubai – UAE

For

SHEIKH JASSIM FAISAL M. T. AL-THANI

Represented by

Mr. JAMAL M.M. YASIN ABUHIJLEH

VOLUME 2 PART I

CIVIL & ARCHITECTURE SPECIFICATION

TENDER DOCUMENTS

MAY 2014



M. E. Engineering Consultants

Contents

SECTION 1: GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 4

SECTION1a: SPECIALIST CONTRACTOR‘S DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 37

SECTION 2: DEMOLITION & SITE CLEARANCE ............................................................................................ 44

SECTION 3: EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS ........................................................................................... 46

SECTION 4: CONCRETE WORK ...................................................................................................................... 53

SECTION 5: SHORING ..................................................................................................................................... 89

SECTION 6: DE-WATERING............................................................................................................................. 94

SECTION 7: PILING .......................................................................................................................................... 97

SECTION 8: MASONRY .................................................................................................................................. 107

SECTION 9: WATER PROOFING ................................................................................................................... 119

A. BASEMENT WATERPROOFING................................................................................................. 119B. FOUNDATION WATERPROOFING FOR BURIED FOOTINGS, TIE BEAMS, NECK COLUMNS,

SLAB ON GRADE etc. ................................................................................................................. 123C. WET AREAS W ATERPROOFING ............................................................................................... 126D. CONCRETE ROOFS .................................................................................................................... 128E. WATERSTORAGE TANKS WATERPROOFING ......................................................................... 132F. DAMPROOFING BEHIND EXTERNAL CLADDING .................................................................... 134G. PODIUM DECKS, LANDSCAPE AREA ABOVE BASEMENT SLAB, PLANTERS BOX,

SWIMMING POOL WALL & FLOOR AND INVERTED ROOF WATERPROOFING SYSTEM ... 136SECTION 9A: CAR PARK DECK COATING SYSTEM ................................................................................... 140

A. CAR PARK DECK COATING SYSTEM NOT EXPOSED TO UV ................................................ 142B. CAR PARK DECK COATING SYSTEM EXPOSED TO UV ........................................................ 142

SECTION 9B: CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM ........................................................................ 143

A. INTEGRAL-CRYSTALLINE-WATERPROOFING-OF-CONCRETE-ADMIXTURE ...................... 143B. CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE WATERSTOP ......................................................................... 149C. DURABILITY ENHANCING ADMIXTURE FOR MASONRY MORTAR & CONCRETE MASONRY

UNITS ........................................................................................................................................... 155D. CONCRETE RESTORATION AND PROTECTION ..................................................................... 158

SECTION 10: CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY ..................................................................... 161

SECTION 11: METAL WORK .......................................................................................................................... 192

SECTION 12: FINISHINGS.............................................................................................................................. 202

SECTION 12a: CERAMIC TILING, QUARRY STONE & POOL DECK .......................................................... 219

SECTION 12b: EXTERNAL CLADDING ......................................................................................................... 234

SECTION 12c: WOODEN FLOORING ............................................................................................................ 243

SECTION 12d: RESILENT FLOORING ........................................................................................................... 247

SECTION 13: WINDOWS AND GLASS .......................................................................................................... 254




SECTION 1: GENERAL

1. Scope of Works:

The Works comprise the Refurbishment - Construction, Completion, Commissioning, Maintenance and

Handing over of RESIDENTIAL BUILDING (Basement + Ground + 5 floors) – Plot No. IC3-B37,

International City Phase 3, Dubai, UAE.

The project consists of the following (but not limited to) :

Basement (Area= 2375.82m 2).The basement consists of parking for 66cars and services namely thegenerator room, pump room, fire & domestic water tanks, irrigationwater & storm water tanks and a store. A lift lobby with two lifts andtwo staircases are provided for vertical circulation.

Ground floor (Area= 1592.79m 2). The ground floor includes the main entrance area, entrance lobby,

lift lobby, staircases, and MEP rooms (substation, LV room,telephone room, water meter cabinets, pool pump room andgarbage room). There are 12 studios and 1 one bedroomapartment present in this floor. The ground floor also has parkingfor 22 cars in addition to some landscaped areas along the plotboundaries. A two way ramp of 6m wide is provided to reach thebasement floor. Provision for gas riser is provided.

First Floor (Area= 1098.51 m 2). This floor has a lift lobby, 2 staircases, corridors, 2 lifts, servicesrooms (garbage, Water meters, telephone and electrical room) inaddition to 3 studios and 11 one bedroom apartments. Gym with

sauna & toilet/shower facilities (separate for men & women) isprovided. A swimming pool with Jacuzzi is provided along withlandscaped areas.

Typical floor (Area= 1098.03m 2). The typical floor is from the 2 nd to 4 th floor. Each floor consists of liftlobby, 2 staircases, corridors, 2 lifts, services rooms (garbage,Water meters, telephone and electrical room) in addition to 4studios and 12 one bedroom apartments.

Fifth Floor (Area= 655.64m 2). The 5th floor consists of lift lobby, staircases, corridors, 2 lifts,services rooms (garbage, Water meters, telephone and electricalroom) in addition to 1 studio and 10 one bedroom apartments. An

external canopy is provided with monorail at the edge for BMUservices.

Roof Floor (Area= 32.68m 2). The roof has all services and machines which are covered by steelstructure having louvers (have to be done by a specialist). The roofalso has the roof telephone room, solar room and one of thestaircases for access.

2. The Main contractor will be responsible for the management, supervision and co-ordination of the

works.

The contractor should allow for safe access routes into the site through the existing entrances.




3. Provisional Sums

A number of items have been included as provisional sums. The Employer reserves the right to either tenderthem separately and delegate them to the Contractor or procure them at his end and supply them to theContractor for installation at this (Employer ‘s) sole discretion. These sub -contractors/suppliers shall be treatedas domestic sub-contractor/supplier of the Contractor and not as nominated sub-contractor/suppliers unless

designated as Nominated Sub-Contractors.

Specifications included in this Volume for items that are provided under provisional sums are for guidanceonly. They are liable for changes during the course of the contract at the discretion of the Engineer and theEmployer.

4. Attendance and Facilities to the nominated sub-contractors

The Contractor shall be provided all related attendance to the nominated sub-contractors, coordinate thevarious works, and provide facilities as described under the pricing preambles of the provisional sums:

A. The Contractor shall provide to the nominated sub-contractors the following but not limited to:

Temporary Site Office

Reasonable site offices and facilities depending on the nature and volume of their works. TheContractor shall be provided assistance for obtaining telephone and facsimile connections.

However all connection and running charges for the telephones and facsimile and shall beborne by the nominated sub-contractors.

Storage Sheds

Sufficient storage sheds for storing their equipment to be positioned or work to be performed.

Water and Electricity

Water & electricity required for the performance including for testing and commissioning oftheir works.

Hoisting & Lifting

Lifting including loading and unloading of all heavy equipment.

Aluminum, glazing and external cladding installation in place shall be carried out by thespecialist sub-contractor using his own scaffoldings, cradles/other means. However liftingloading and unloading of the units to the required areas/floors shall be carried out by the MainContractor.

Site crane, hoists, etc. shall be shared to lift personnel and equipment that can be handled bythem.

Fire Proofing

All fire proofing / sealing of all openings, penetrations, crossings, provisions, of fire barriers,etc., (Fire barriers between floors of the curtain wall & cladding system shall be provided bythe specialist Sub-Contractor.

Scaffolding

All scaffolding require by the sub-contractors except for the aluminum sub-contractor for theperformance of their works.

B. Builder‘s works to be carried out by the Main Contractor for the nominated sub-contractors aredescribed in the pricing preambles of the relevant trades and provisional sums However this is not to




provided and needed for the completion of the works.

C. All the above requirements shall be included by the Contractor in his prices while pricing the same inthe provisional sums.

5. D efinitive List of “Attendance Items”

A definitive list of ―Attendance Items‖ required by the MEP sub -contractors is indicated below for theguidance of the Contractor. The Contractor shall carefully review these items and ensure that these arecovered ei ther as measured items of the BOQ (in the various bills) or covered under the head ―Attendanceand Profits‖ in the provisional sum bill.

Also included is Annexure -2. The list of items to be covered under the MEP scope of works for guidanceof the Contractor.

Any other items not covered in the above lists but is considered essential for the project, shall beconsidered by the Contractor as within his scope of work as part of his contractual obligation andresponsibilities.

ANNEXTURE “1”

MAIN CONTRACTOR SCOPE OF WORK – MEP RELATED

1. Steel Ladder, Crossover and Access platform in shafts & OTS roof and or water tanks.

2. Chequered plate/cover for cable trenches.

3. Floating slab & Concrete for inertia base of any related equipment.

4. Acoustic analysis & treatment for building and equipment.

5. Concrete work for manhole, grease traps, sand trap, earthlings pit, trenching, sump pit, inspectionchamber, water meter chamber, thrust block, pipe support, LPG tanks & Machinery base.

6. Architectural louvers for the MEP services (excluding Grills and Gratings and similar items which arean integral part of MEP system).

7. Openings in wall or shear wall, slabs, falls ceiling.

8. Permanent or temporary access panels/doors in walls & false ceiling.

9. Epoxy paint for plant rooms.

10. Electrical & water required for installation testing commissioning and start up till handling over.

11. Car park offices and facilities like water, electricity & telephone lines.

12. The usage of site Hoisting & lifting facilities including the carnage of chillers to their final location.

13. Security & watching.

14. Rest area, drinking water, site toilets for MEP staff & labor force.

15. Receiving & storing of provisional sum material.

16. Reasonable storage area & shaded open stocking areas.

17. Housing keeping from central positions.




ceiling.

19. Third party for testing & commissioning (MEP and / or subcontractors / suppliers).

20. Authority and connection fees to be considered as part of MEP scope.

ANNEXTURE “2”

Scope of work of MEP Sub- Contractor

1. Ordinary firefighting sleeves including fire stop.

2. Swimming Pool part:

2-1 Make up water to balancing water tank2-2 Plan room drain including provision for back wash drain2-3 Power connection to main control panel including termination and connection

3. Rubber pushes to fit sanitary ware.

4. Final painting & signage of visible MEP services, colors are subject to Engineer‘s approval.

5. All interlock between fire alarm panel & kitchen hoods fire system, LPG, Garbage & FM200/ cleanagent.

6. Interlock between lighting control system with BMS and all other equipment as per data schedule &drawings.

7. Power and supply for window cleaning system.

8. Sand trap intake exhaust louvers and doors grills.

9. Power supply to garbage chute panel and its fan including isolating switch.

10. Fire & water supply to garbage chute including piping, sprinkles & valves.

11. Scaffolding, platform, block chain, duct lifter inside building.

12. Lighting for dumb waiter.

13. MEP services required for kitchen equipment, & laundry.

14. ―Access control systems‖ form part of MEP scope of work.

15. Sanitary fixtures and accessories receiving, unloading in scope of main Contractor – handling and

installation is in scope of MEP.

16. All meters & telecommunication equipment are under and it is considered to be included in MEPscope of work.

17. Health Club facilities services such as water & power supply & drainage work are included in MEPscope of work.

18. Full coordination with various Contractors is to be taken care of by MEP sub-contractor to define finallocations, sizes and arrangements of MEP services.

19. Protection of MEP work during installation up to handling over.

20. PVC traps serving sanitary were individually (Main Contractor).




The following abbreviations have been used for the standards applicable to the works under the contract:

BS - British StandardsCP - Code of Practice

ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ACI - American Concrete Institute

ISO - International Organization Standardization ANSI - American National Standards Institute AASHTO - American Association of State Highways & Transportation

OfficialsDIN - Deutshes Institute for NormungBSEN - European Standards – Adopted as British StandardsEN - Euronorms Harmonized StandardUL - Under Writers Laboratories INC.IEC - International Electrotechnical CommissionCENELEC - Committee European de Normalization Electro technique

Referenced Standards are part of the Contract Documents and have the same force and effects as if boundwith this specification.

7. Standards

The works have been designed to incorporate and utilize economically, goods, materials, and workmanship tovarious specifications which are detailed herein. Reference is commonly made to British standards (BS) andBritish Standards Codes of Practice (CP) and to the American Society for Testing and Materials Standards(ASTM). Different National or International Standards ISO, DIN, etc., that correspond to the specified BS or

ASTM Standard may be used provided that their requirements are not less stringent, and provided that theContractor presents copies such standards translated into English. If a redesign of the works is necessitatedby the adoption of such alternatives the costs incurred shall be borne by the Contractor.

Except where specifically indicated otherwise all references shall be deemed to refer to the current standards(the latest edition or issue) as of the date of the signing of the contract.

8. Environmental Concerns

The Contractor shall make himself conversant with all the orders, circulars, laws and bye-laws of the localauthorities, concerning preservation of environment and shall strictly adhere to them. Any issues that aredetrimental or are in violation shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer immediately and the Contractorshall take such remedial actions as accepted by the Engineer.

9. Units of Measurement and Abbreviations

All units of weight and measurement shall be based on the Metric system of weights and measurementsexcept standard products which may be expresses in nominal units of the imperial system.

The metric terms and symbols occurring in the contract documents are based on the ―Systems Internationaldaunts (S1 System)‖.

Abbreviation Description Abbreviation Description

m Liner Meter mm Millimeterm2 Square Meter cm Centimeterm3 Cubic Meter No/Nr NumberKg Kilogram C CelsiusTone 1000 Kilogram LS Lump Sum

10. Definitions

Wherever in the contract documents or on the drawings the words ―as directed‖, ―as described‖, ―as ordered‖,―as required‖, ―as permitted‖ or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction.Description, order, request, requirements or permission of the Engineer is intended. Similarly, the words




satisfactory to the Engineer.

11. Inconsistency in Contract Documents

The Contractor shall execute the works according to the provisions of the Contract Documents. Any workindicated in one of the documents but omitted and /or not stated in one or more of the other documents shallbe treated as though it were included in all of them.

Any discrepancies between the quantities or their descriptions in the Bills of Quantities, the Specification and /or the Tender Drawings, shall be referred for clarifications prior to the submissions of the Tender which shallbe clarified as Addendum to the Tender. Any discrepancies noted after the Tender has been accepted shallbe referred to the Engineer for a ruling. The ruling of the Engineer shall be final and bending on the Contractorand the Contractor shall execute the works accordingly without any increase in cost or extension of time to theproject.

If the Contractor should discover that any work has been omitted from and / or not indicated entirely orpartially in all the documents, he shall report the facts immediately to the Engineer. If the work is somethingwhich in the opinion of the Engineer could not have been foreseen by an experienced Contractor, theEngineer shall issue to the Contractor a variation order stipulating the details of the work to be done.

Save as aforesaid in the above paragraph, no additional payment shall be made in respect of work carried outin connection with discrepancies among the various contract documents.

12. Errors in Computing Contents of Contract Documents

The Contractor shall be responsible for any errors which he makes in computing any quantities of materialand labor required or costs involved or through any lack of knowledge of the site or misunderstanding ofanything shown or replied on the drawings or in the specifications and/or the Bills of Quantities.

The Contractor must refer any discrepancy in the Drawings or the Specifications to the Engineer beforeproceeding with any of the works. The decision of the Engineer as to the interpretation of the discrepancy willbe final as specified above under ―Inconsistency in Contract Documents‖.

Any item or items of work not specifically shown on the Drawings or referred to in the Specifications but whichwould be necessary for the proper construction of the works in accordance with the best practice is impliedand must be included for as incidental to the contract sum.

Any item for which the Contractor has not inserted a price in the Bills of Quantities shall be deemed to becovered by other prices or rates therein.

13. Temporary Site Offices, Sanitary Facilities and Equipment

Provide and maintain on the site for the duration of the works the following including any relocation of suchoffices/facilities necessitated due to progress of the works or other reasons, if required.

a) Temporary offices for the Contractor and Sub-C ontractors‘ personnel including all necessary sanitary

facilities. Such offices shall be open at all reasonable hours to receive instructions, notices and other forms ofcommunications.

b) Suitable and adequate temporary offices for the sole use of the Employer/Engineer/Project Manager.

All requirements in respect of Employer/Engineer/Project Manager temporary offices shall be new wheninstalled.

Offices shall be of an enclosed type having rooms on either side of a central corridor.

The offices shall be of weather and dust tight construction, being air-conditioned to a comfortable officestandard of 20degree C 24 degree C during summer, with fluorescent ceiling lighting, sufficient to provide amaximum of 500 lux at desk level. Air – conditioning units shall be of the mini split type.

Provide sufficient electrical power socket outlets within the offices (240 V, 3 pin type).




Volume 3, Appendix A. The offices shall be available in full working order to the satisfaction of the Engineerwithin the period stipulated to commence the works in the Tender Documents and remain so until completionof the whole of the works.

All keys for the Engineer‘s site offices shall be held by the Engineer until such offices are removed.

Computer Facilities:

―Branded IBM Compatible‖ Computers shall be provided for the Employer/Enginee r/Project Manager offices oflatest maximum configuration available at the market at the time of mobilization, which shall not be less thanthe following:

Hard Ware as Follows:

CPU Intel Core i7-2500 3.3G 6M 1155 box Processor- Kingmax DDR III 1600 8GB Nano (Single Piece) RAM- LG DVD RW 22x SATA DVD (write drive for engineer and Employer‘s representative only) - WD HDD 2 TB SATA Hard Disk- PNY VGA Quadro 2000 1024 MB PCI EXP-Graphic Card- Sound Card and Speakers

- Optical MS mouse- 19‘ LED Screen - A/E enhanced keyboard- Cooler Master Case RC-P100K-KKN2, USP 100, All black VER2 fan- G/B PSU GE-M800A-D1 Odin Pro 800w W/EU- Separate dedicated Internet line to be provided to be accessible through network (Type: Business one).- Ethernet Card 10/100- HP A4 / A3 Colored Printer

Provided Soft Ware as follows:

Original Soft Ware of MS Windows 7 64Bit (Arabic enabled with SP2 i.e. Service Pack 3), MS office 2010(Arabic enhanced), Antivirus Software, Networking software for all computers and AutoCAD Rel. 2011, Adobe

Acrobat Professional, Java Applet (updated Version), WinZip, Winrar, Printkey, MS Project and Prima VeraProject Planner (P6) for two computers only.

Sufficient, as required quantities stationary and computer, printer, scanner, and photocopier, requirements oftoner, ink cartridges, special color printing paper and other requirements.

One computer literate Secretary (full time) shall be employed exclusively for the Engineer‘s office.

The Contractor shall provide daily cleaning attendance an d office boy exclusively for the use of the Engineer‘sstaff.

Kitchen equipment common for all offices:

i) Refrigerator 12 cu. f. 2 Nr.ii) Water Filter 2 Nr.iii) Sink Unit 2 Nr.iv) Electric kettle 2 Nr.v) Microwave 1Nr.vi) Gas Stove 2 Nr.vii) Consumables Sufficient Qty.

Adequate firefighting equipment to the approval of the Local Fire Authority and the Engineer.

Approved signboards written in Arabic and English. The size of the signboard and lettering including thewordings shall be as directed by the Engineer. Signboards shall be taken over from enabling work-subcontractor (others).

Pay for all connection and related charges, and call / use charges for telephone, telefax and computer lines(U.A.E calls only).




Maintain Employer / Pr oject Manager / Engineer‘s Site Office, including routine/preventative/correctivemaintenance for all systems and furniture. In addition, provide full time janitor service for daily dusting, floorand window cleaning, and removal of rubbish.The Contractor shall obtain necessary approvals from concerned Regulatory Authority and relocate siteoffices as required during the period of construction to allow the permanent works to proceed.

Dismantle and remove from the site all offices, latrines, sign-boards and other temporary works on completion

of the whole contract and make good and leave site in clean and tidy condition to the satisfaction of theEngineer.

14. Toilet Facilities

The Contractor shall provide and maintain clean portable toilet facilities on site as specified elsewhere are notpermitted by the local authorities or the employer, or if during the progress of the work the temporary facilitiesare to be removed or relocated. The Contractor shall include in his contract sum for the above provision asapplicable.

The Contractor shall not use the permanent facilities within the building unless permitted by the Engineer inwriting. If use of permanent facilities within the building is permitted these shall be maintained in a clean andsanitary condition to the satisfaction of Engineer.

After completion of works the permanent facilities shall be restored to perfect condition and handed over longwith the works by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Employer.

15. Sign Boards

One (1No.) Project Sign Board/s to be provided as per the related drawing and according to the localregulations.

The Contractor shall maintain the signboards in a clear and tidy condition provide power and pay for it for theduration of the project.

On completion of the project the signboards shall be dismantled and removed from site either to the Employer

stores or to the Contractor‘s store as directed by the engineer.

16. No Objection Certificates” (NOCs)

Copies of ―No objection Certificates‖ (NOCs) received from authorities are encl osed as Appendix ―2‖ forreference. The Engineer does not assume any responsibility for the accuracy of the information provided inthe NOC or that shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall carry out necessary exploratory works andinvestigations to obtain sufficient information as required.

The cost of locating or verifying the location of existing services, maintaining, protecting from damage duringconstruction and liaison with the various Service Authorities and complying with their dictates shall be borneby the Contractor unless provided for elsewhere. This is applicable to those services that are visible on siteand shown on drawings and NOCs.

Any re-routing shall be carried out by the Contractor in co-ordination with the concerned authorities and asdirected by the engineer.

17. Site Hoarding

Site hoarding has to be provided as per the related drawing and according to the local regulations andmarketing section of client The Contractor may augment, rectify and replace sections of this hoarding asrequired but the approval of the Engineer and maintain the same in a neat, clean and tidy conditionsthroughout the contract period by replacing damaged portions, repainting soiled or deteriorated paintedsections and remove on completion. Adequate number of entrance with gates/barriers shall be provided andmanned at all times as approved by the engineer.The fresh look of the hoarding shall be maintained at all times until completion of the works. Adequate

number of entrances with gates/barriers shall be provided at suitable locations and shall be manned at alltimes as approved by the Engineer.




engineer leaving the site clean and clear.

18. Temporary Works and Reinstatement

The Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary roads and tracks necessary for movements of plantand materials, and clear them away on completion and make good all works damaged or disturbed.

The Contractor shall submit drawings and full particulars showing the site layout of all temporary works to theengineer for his approval before commencing any works. The Engineer may require modifications to bemade if he considers them to be insufficient and the Contractor shall give effect to such modifications butshall not relieved of his responsibilities for the sufficiency thereof.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain weatherproof sheds for storage of material pertinent to the worksboth for his own use and for the use of the employer and clear them away on completion of the works.

All injury to the surface of the land, to the beds of water courses, projecting banks, etc., where disturbed bythe works (other than where specifically ordered by the engineer) shall be repaired by the Contractor or

Authorities concerned, at the C ontractor‘s expense. All such making good shall be to the approval of theengineer.

The requirements detailed above shall be provided and maintained at the expense of the Contractor.

The employer shall not be liable for loss or injury of/ any type due to any temporary works.

19. Locating, Protecting, Maintaining and Diverting Services and Public Utilities

The Contractor shall ascertain the whereabouts of all existing services and public utilities such as electricalcables, telephone lines, sewers, water supply lines, gas lines, pipes, wires, fences, etc., on the site, bothabove and below ground. Service and other utilities may exist in certain locations not indicated on drawings.Completeness or accuracy of information given on the drawings are not guaranteed. It is the responsibility ofthe Contractor to ascertain their whereabouts from the concerned authorities before commencing any workon site. The Contractor shall also obtain any re-routing requirements from the concerned authorities andshall be responsible to carry out such works accordingly to the satisfaction of the authorities and the

engineer.

All electrical cables discover during excavation and found to be redundant shall be handed over to asdirected by Authority / Engineer.

Where diversions of services are not required in connection with the permanent works, the Contractor shallprotect, uphold, maintain and keep the same in working order in their existing locations and shall restorethem to their original condition on completion to the satisfaction of the engineer.

The Contractor shall make good, at his own expense, all damaged caused to any of the services and publicutilities by him or his sub-contractors, except where the Public Authority or Private Party Owning the same,elects to make good the damage under their own arrangements. The cost incurred in making good damagesby the Public Authority or Private Party shall be paid to them by the Contractor on demand.

All costs in connection with the above works shall be borne by the Contractor without extra cost theEmployer.

The Employer shall not be liable for any loss or injury in connection with any of the above works.

20. Watching

The Contractor shall allow for all necessary watching for the security of the works and the protection of thepublic, including shelter and other facilities for any watchmen so required.

21. Water for the Works

The Contractor shall provide all necessary water for the project including that required for testing andcommissioning of the MEP works including those of the sub-contractors and nominated sub-contractors,irrespective of availability of main supply. The Contractor shall provide all temporary plumbing and storage,




remove and make good on completion.

22. Temporary Power and Lighting for the Works

The Contractor shall provide all necessary artificial lighting and power for the execution and security of theproject and for protection and for the purposes of testing and commissioning of the MEP works includingthose of the sub-contractors and nominated sub-contractors, irrespective of availability of main supply, with

all meters, temporary wiring and fittings, etc., pay all charges, and alter, adapt and maintain the temporaryelectrical power supply as necessary and remove and make good at completion.

23. Safety and Security

It will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to provide full and continued security and safety for the siteincluding all site facilities until the substantial completion certificate is issued and all the works are completedand the Contractor has demobilized.

The Contractor shall nominate qualified site based safety engineer dedicated for the project. He will within 30days of handing over the site (to the Contractor) formulate a safety plan for the works and submit the samefor the approval of the engineer. Any comments of the engineer shall be incorporated and re-submitted tillfinal approval is obtained.

The safety engineer and the Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring of that the safety plan as adheredto and shall co-ordinate with the sub-contractors and or other persons required to be working on or near thesite for proper implementation during the execution of the works.

He shall make himself full conversant with the safety regulations and requirements of standard engineeringpractice, of the local authorities and implement them effectively to the approval of the engineer.

Safety practice shall comply with the requirement the Local/Governing Municipality/development Control Authorities.

The safety plans shall include but not be limited to the following safety, fire and personnel welfare aspects:

a. Protective clothingb. Overhead workingc. Scaffolding, general access, access to work placesd. Protection/Barricades to openings, edges and excavationse. Transportationf. Plant, Machinery & Toolsg. Carnage and Hoisting Equipmenth. Working at Heighti. Fire prevention – Fire Fighting

j. Work in enclosed spacesk. Electrical works and Temporary electrical worksl. Cylinder gases – storage – transport in usem. Welding and gas cutting

n. Grinding Wheelso. Cartridge operated fixing toolsp. Medical first aid, on-site medical first aid room and associated trained nursing staff, emergency

transport and hospitalization of injured personsq. Smoking control regulationsr. Accident reporting and statisticss. Training and Instructiont. Hygienic facilities, i.e. rest rooms, messing facilities, washrooms and sanitary facilities, hot and cold

water, etc.u. Provision and correct use of safety equipmentv. Appropriate use of known safety sign in all the jobs/tasks performed.w. Use of hazard hats and safety boots for all site personnel, laborers and all others persons requiring

access to the site.

The Contractor shall also implement the following as part of the project safety procedures:




2. Provide safety and fire prevention procedures to be clearly posted about the site in relevant languages.3. Routine checks on C ontractor‘s as well as sub -contractor‘s first aid and other medical facilities to ensure

adequacy of supplies and services.4. Routine checks on firefighting equipment and safety equipment to ascertain proper functionability.5. Ensuring that all personnel wear proper safety clothing and apparel.6. Handle claims for accidents sustained by employees or third parties working on project.7. Enforce safety regulations

8. Maintain site safety records.

The Contractor shall provide among other items, the following safety were the employer and Engineer‘s staffat site / visiting the site:

1. Safety helmets2. Safety Shoes3. Protective Eye Glass4. Ear muffs

The safety engineer shall report to the engineer on the status of planning and implementation of activities toensure safe construction and operation of the works periodically, as agreed with the engineer.

Contractor shall submit for the engineer‘s approval, detailed procedures for the control of fire, Medical first -aid and security, applicable to the site.

Contractor shall liaise with the engineer and shall observe and ensure that all their personnel observe, allrelevant security procedures particularly those applicable to performing works in an ongoing operatingenvironment.

24. Contractor’s Quality Assurance and Quality (QA/QC)

The Contractor shall nominate a Site QA/QC Manager for approval by the Engineer. The QA/QC Managershall be an employee of the Contractor, reporting directly to the C ontractor‘s main office, and to theEngineer. Additionally, the QA/QC Manager shall remain independent of the C ontractor‘s field operations.

And have the authority to accept or reject the C ontractor‘s work.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective QA/QC system. The Contractor shall b responsible forensuring that this sub-contractors and suppliers conform to the quality requirements as provided in thecontract documents.

The C ontractor shall establish a ―Quality Assurance / Quality Control (QA/QC)‖ system to perform sufficientinspection and tests of all items of work, including that of his sub-contractors and nominate sub-contractors,to ensure that all aspects of supply, construction, finishes, technical and functional performance, andidentification are covered. This control shall be established for all construction work performed as prescribedin the contract except where the technical provisions of the contract provide for specific control byinspections, test or other means. The C ontractor‘s QA/QC system shall specifically i nclude the surveillanceand tests required in the technical provisions of the specification.

The C ontractor‘s QA/QC system is the means by which the Contractor assures himself that this constructioncomplies with the requirements of the contract documents. The system shall include as a minimum at leastthree phases of inspection for all definable phases of construction as follows:

a) Preparatory Inspection:

Preparatory Inspection shall be performed prior to beginning any work on any definable phase ofconstruction and as shown in the approved construction program. It shall include a review of contractrequirements; a check to assure that all materials and /or equipment have been tested, submitted, andapproved; a check to assure that provisions have been made to provide required control testing; and planmock ups where appropriate and as required by the Engineer; examination of work area to ascertain that allpreliminary work has been completed; and a physical examination of materials and equipment to assurethat they conform to approved shop drawings or submittal data and that all materials and/or equipment are

on hand. The engineer shall be notified at least twenty four (24) hours in advance of the preparatoryinspections and such inspections shall be recorded in the QC report as specified here in.




Initial inspection shall be performed as shown in the approved construction program and as soon asrepresentative portion of the particular phase of the construction has been accomplished and shall establishthe acceptable standard of workmanship, including a review of control testing for compliance with contractrequirements, review of mock up, identifying defective or damaged materials used, omissions, anddimensional requirements. The engineer shall be notified at least twelve (12) hours in advance of the initialinspection and such inspection shall be recorded in the QA/QC reports as specified herein.

c) Follow-up Inspections:

Follow-up inspections shall be performed daily to ensure continuing compliance with the contractrequirements, including control testing, until completion of the particular phase of construction. Suchinspection shall be recorded in the QA/QC Reports as specified herein.

The Contractor and sub-contractor shall operate a quality system in accordance with ISO 9001 or ISO 9002and shall furnish to the Engineer for his review as soon as practicable and in no event later than thirty (30)days after receiving the letter of acceptance, a QA/QC plan which shall include the procedures, instruction,and records to be used. This document will include as a minimum the following:

a) The QA/QC organization chart.

b) Qualification criteria of personnel

c) Authority and area of responsibilities of the QA/QC personnel. The Contr actor‘s QA/QC Manager shallnot have any duties other than the implementation of the QA/QC program.

d) Plan for accomplishing quality control inspections including that of his sub-contractors and nominatedsub- contractor‘s works.

e) Detailed listing and designation of all tests to be performed. The engineer reserves the right todetermine which test may be performed by the technicians employed by the Contractor and those thatmust be performed by an independent testing laboratory.

f) Method of documenting QA/QC operations, inspections and testing.

g) A copy of a letter of direction to each C ontractor‘s representative responsible for QA/QC, outlining hisduties and responsibilities and signed by a responsible officer of the Contractor.

h) A narrative discussion of how C ontractor‘s QA/QC staff will accomplish the tasks assigned underQA/QC procedure.

i) An explanation as to how the C ontractor‘s QA/QC plan relates to other staff elements with regards toall submittals, as-built drawings, safety and revisions to the contract.

Construction operations will not commence until the engineer has accepted the C ontractor‘s QA/QC plan.However, the engineer may permit at his direction to proceed on specific phases of construction for which

the plan has been submitted and accepted. Progress payments will not be processed for any portion of workthat has a QA/QC requirement until that portion of the QA/QC plan has been submitted and accepted.

Prior to submittal of the Contractor QA/QC plan for acceptance, the Contractor shall meet with the engineerto discuss the QA/QC system. The meeting shall develop mutual understanding relative to details of thesystem, including the forms to be used for recording the QA/QC procedures, inspection, and administrationof the system.

The Con tractor‘s QA/QC organization shall be sufficiently staffed to perform the following tasks:

a) Conduct phased inspections (preparatory, initial and follow-up) as described above.

b) Perform all testing required under the C ontractor‘s QA/QC report herein after.

c) Prepare daily QA/QC reports in accordance with C ontractor‘s QA/QC report clause stated hereinafter.




e) Inspects materials as they are delivered on site to ensure compliance with approved shop drawingsand Contract Specification.

f) Conduct off-site inspections of supply items fabricated or assembled and services to be incorporatedinto the work. Provide monthly report of off-site QA/QC activities. The C ontractor‘s QA/QCrepresentative at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for the release of the fabricated items for

shipment to the job site.

g) Maintain record of all QA/QC activities. These records shall be made available to the Engineer.

The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days of issue of the letter of acceptance, report to the engineer, thenames and qualifications of personnel assigned full-time to the QA/QC function for approval of the engineer.The named personnel shall prepare the QA/Qc program and remain as the basis of the QA/QC staff until aQA/QC program has been submitted and accepted.

If at any time during the life of the contract the engineer determines the QA/QC staff is not capable ofperforming all the tasks listed above, then the engineer may direct the Contractor to revise and / orsupplement the present organization structure at no additional cost to the employer.

Contractor‘s QA/Qc Reports: The Contractor shall submit a daily QA/QC report in triplicate not later than theend of the next working day. The report shall contain a record on inspections and tests for all workaccomplished subsequent to the previous report and shall include the following information:

A. Trade(s) of construction underway during the time frame of the report (i.e. earthwork, concrete work,structural steel erection, etc.)

B. Phase wise inspections (preparatory, initial or follow-up), phase of construction and location ofinspection and /or tests that were made.

C. Results of inspection, including nature of deficiencies observed and corrective actions taken or to betaken.

D. Report of tests performed, including those determined as failures and remedial action to be taken. Testsresults, including all computations shall be attached to the report form. Where test results cannot becompleted by the time the report is submitted, a note shall be added to the effect that the test wasperformed, along with the date when the test results will be made available. Delayed tests results shallbe submitted with the report form on the date received.

E. Results of inspection of materials and equipment upon arrival at the site and prior to incorporation intothe work for compliance with submittal approvals, damaged and storage.

F. Instructions received from the engineer.

G. In all cases, the report must be verified and signed by the person delegated with this responsibility bythe Contractor. The verification is to contain the statement that all supplies and materials incorporated in

the work are in compliance with the terms of the contract except as noted.

H. Site safety.

The engineer shall approved laboratories used to perform test.

The engineer reserves the right to utilize the C ontractor‘s control testing laboratory and equipment to makespot tests and to check the C ontractor‘s testing procedures, techniques, and test results at no additionalcost to the employer.

If recurring deficiencies indicate that the QA/QC system, personnel, inspections, tests and/or records are notproviding adequate control, the Contractor shall take corrective action as deemed necessary and asdirected by the engineer. The Contractor shall, after receipt of such notice, immediately take corrective

action. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor or his representative at the site of the work, shall bedeemed sufficient for the purpose. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the engineer mayissue an order stopping all or part of the works until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The




extension of time or for excess costs or damages.

The Contractor shall notify the engineer in writing of any proposed change to the QA/QC system. No suchchange shall be implemented without approval in writing by the engineer.

a. Latest Document

The QA/QC program shall provide for procedures, which will ensure that the applicable portions of thecontract (and any variations there to make in accordance with clause 51 of the General Conditions ofContract) and the latest and approved shop drawings and samples are used for fabrication.

b. Testing and Inspection Devices

All measuring and testing devices shall be calibrated periodically against certified standard equipment.Copies of certified calibration reports issued by relevant authorities / agencies should be made available forreview by the engineer.

c. Test Methods

The test shall include typical, routine and sample tests specified in British Standard or ASTM or equivalent

International Standards relating thereto and those corresponding to any special requirements or changecontained in the Specification. In addition, the engineer may direct special tests to be made to prove that theequipment and materials supplied comply with the specification. The methods of tests for equipment andmaterials not covered by a recognized standard and for which tests have not been specified shall be asdirected by the Engineer.

Material shall be tested before leaving the manufacturer‘s premises as well as after delivery on the worksand the engineer shall have the right to reject material after delivery notwithstanding the preliminary test atthe manufacturer‘s premises.

Should the employer decide not to send an inspector to the manufacturer‘s works, the Contractor shallobtain from the manufacturer, certificates of tests, etc., showing that the material have been tested inaccordance with the requirements of the specification, but the omission of the employer to send an

inspector nor the submission or manufacturer‘s certificate s of test as aforesaid shall not relieve theContractor from his contractual responsibilities and commitments or shall affect the right of the employer orthe engineer to reject after delivery materials found to be unsuitable in accordance with the specification.The Contractor shall meet all expenses in connection with the testing and inspection.

25. Laboratories used to Perform Tests shall be approved by the Engineer

The engineer reserves the right to utilize the C ontractor‘s control testing laboratory and equipment to makespot tests and to check the C ontractor‘s testing procedures, techniques, and tests results at no additionalcost to the Employer.

If recurring deficiencies indicate that the QC system, personnel, inspections, tests and/or records are notproviding adequate control, the Contractor shall take corrective action as deemed necessary and as

directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, after receipt of such notice, immediately take correctiveaction. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor or his representative at the site of the work, shall bedeemed sufficient for the purpose. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the engineer mayissue an order stopping all or part of the works until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part ofthe time lost due to any such stop orders shall be made the subject for claims relating to extension of timeor for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any proposed change to the QC system. No suchchange shall be implemented without approval in writing by the engineer.

a. Latest Documents

The QC program shall provide for procedures which will ensure that the applicable portions of the contract

(and any variations thereto made in accordance with clause 51 of the General Conditions of Contract) andthe latest and approved shop drawings and samples are used for fabrication.




The Contractor shall make arrangements for periodical inspection by local fire authorities and shallcooperate with the said Authorities to promptly carry out their recommendations to ensure compliance.

30. Scaffolding

The Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain, dismantle and clear away at completion proper and adequatescaffolding including that required for sub-contractors and specialists. Putlog holes should be made good to

match the adjacent surface as the scaffolding dismantled. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for allsafety precautions in connection with the stability of the scaffolding and for entire sufficiency for the work.

Scaffolding shall be a complete system from a manufacturer approved by the engineer. The Contractor shallprovide shop drawings and design calculations to prove the sufficiency of the proposed system for theintended applications for the approval of the engineer as and when called for contractual responsibilities orobligations.

31. Contractor’s Design

The Contractor shall responsible for all designs that are designated or implied as his responsibility eitherdirectly or indirectly

The Contractor shall comply with the relevant standards and codes in this design, adopting the designparameters specified or shown on drawings. If the details are not readily available he shall ascertain therequirement from the engineer in writing. The Contractor shall design the element and submit his designalong with detailed design calculation for the approval of the engineering at least 15 days in advance of thescheduled dates of production / procurement.

The Contractor shall carry out any modification/redesign required, based on the comments of the engineerand resubmit for his approval. The process will be repeated till final approval is accorded. The Contractorshall be responsible for any delays in the above process and shall not be entitled for any additional coats ortime on this account.

The Contractor shall submit a schedule of items other than the above the needs design to the engineer forconfirmation and shall undertake the design work as approved. No claim shall be entertained for any design

requirement of any item not listed above if the same is not brought to the notice of the engineer during thetender period.

Any approval accorded by the engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his contractualresponsibilities and obligations.

The Contractor shall warran t the design as ―Fit for purpose‖ and shall indemnify the Employer and theengineer for any and all failures arising from such design. The Contractor shall provide details of hisprofessional indemnity insurance to cover the design work and liability undertaken by him, to the Employer

32. Sheds

The Contractor shall provide and maintain weatherproof sheds, air conditioned where necessary, for

storage of materials pertinent to the works and clear them away at the completion of the works.

Cement and other perishable material storage areas shall have floors raised 150 mm off the ground. TheContractor shall clear away at completion and make good all work disturbed.

33. Keeping Site Free from Rubbish

The premises and the project site shall be maintained in a reasonably neat and orderly condition by theContractor and his sub-contractors and kept free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish duringthe entire construction period. The Contractor shall remove all crates, carton and other flammable wastematerials or trash from the work areas at the end of each working day.

Floors shall be ―broom -cleaned‖, or its equivalent, during the course of the work. Additional cleaning of all

other items which are provided as a part of the contract, including removal of dust, dirt, stains, and fingermarks from all finished wood, metal, marble or glass surfaces, shall be performed by the Contractor asrequired to the approval of the engineer, before handover of the works.




The Contractor shall responsible for the general cleaning and maintenance of the premises and the projectsite and for the co-ordination of the clean-up work of all trades. The Contractor shall ensure that each tradeshall clean and maintain its portion of the work as required and as directed by the Engineer. If the premisesand job site are not maintained properly, the engineer, may have any accumulations of waste materials ortrash removed and deducts such costs from payments due to the Contractor.

Elevator shafts, electrical pipe and duct shafts, chases, enclosed spaces and similar spaces which are

generally unfinished, shall be cleaned by the Contractor and left free from rubbish, loose plaster, mortardrippings, extraneous construction materials, dirt and dust, before requesting the engineer to make finalinspection of the work.

All areas of the building in which painting and finished work is to be performed shall be cleaned by theContractor or his sub-contractor(s) thoroughly just prior to the start of the work, and these areas shall bemaintained in satisfactory condition for painting and finishing. This cleaning shall include the removal oftrash and rubbish from these areas; broom cleaning of floors; the removal of any plaster, mortar, dust andother extraneous materials from all finished surfaces, including but not limited to, all exposed structuralsteel, miscellaneous metal, woodwork, plaster, duct work, conduit and also all surfaces visible after allpermanent fixtures, grilles, registers and other such fixtures or devices are in place.The Contractor shall institute an effective program of rodent and pest control for the entire site within theconstruction limits. During the construction period, services of an experienced exterminator shall be utilized

if desired and as directed by the engineer. The Contractor shall provide suitable covered containers for alledible rubbish and shall enforce their use by all employees. Containers shall be emptied and the contentsremoved from the site as often as required to maintain an adequate rodent/pest control program.

34. Progress Photographs

The Contractor shall arrange to have monthly record photographs of the works taken. These photographsshall cover such extent of the works as the engineer will direct. The days upon which the photographs aretaken shall be as decided by the Engineer.The Contractor shall provide the engineer with two sets of the monthly progress photographs with datesimprinted on them.

One set shall comprise the following:

- One color negative of each photograph for an anticipated average maximum of fifty exposures per month.- Seven colors prints (294 x 210 mm) off each a maximum of twenty of the negatives as selected by theengineer.The prints are to be processed by an approved professional laboratory and shall be in color on heavy weightpaper with matt finish. A label giving a brief description shall be affixed in the bottom right – hand corner ofeach photograph. Each photograph shall be provided in an approved clear plastic cover for binding.

The copyright of all photographs shall be vested in the employer and the negatives and prints shall bedelivered to the Engineer within 4 days of developing. The photographs shall not be used for any otherpurposes what so ever without the employer‘s approval.

35. Setting Out

The Contractor shall employ an experienced Land Surveyor to carry out all setting out and surveying work.

Before the commencement of the works the Contractor will be supplied with the information necessary toestablish the lines and levels of the works. The engineer has shown on the drawings all the survey markersestablished but can give no warranty for their existence at the start of the contract nor will he acceptresponsibility for replacing any survey markers found to be missing. Where survey markers have beenestablished by the engineer the Contractor shall check the accuracy of their position and level and shallimmediately notify the engineer of any discrepancies.

The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable, supply the engineer with records in approval from relating toall reference pegs and bench marks and shall keep such records up to date by formal notice to theEngineer.

All survey reference pegs shall be carefully preserved except where construction requires their removal, andbefore such removal the approval of the engineer shall be obtained.




grid over the site and agree the levels with the engineer. The Contractor shall prepare drawingsrepresenting the configuration of the areas which shall be signed by the engineer and the Contractor asrecord.

The Contractor shall establish bench marks and grid lines at each floor showing exact floor elevations andother lines and dimensional reference points as required.

36. Shop Drawings

Provide accurately prepared, large scale and detailed shop drawings on reproducible sheets, preparedspecifically for the project for all disciplines and as instructed by the engineer. The shop drawings shallshow adjacent conditions and related work. Accurate field dimensions and conditions shall be shown. Anyspecial coordination with other trades required shall be clearly noted. All drawings shall be prepared using

AutoCAD rel. 2007 software.

Not with standing any specific requirements. If at any time before the commencement or during the progressof the work it appears to the Contractor that for the proper execution of a specific part of the works, shopdrawings are necessary, these drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the engineerfor approval. The engineer shall have authority to order at any time and the Contractor shall provide anynumber of shop drawings which, in the opinion of the engineer are necessary for the proper execution of a

specified work. The Contractor shall not proceed with the above mentioned work unless these shopdrawings are approved by the engineer.

All shop drawing shall be properly checked and coordinated with all connected trades/disciplines by theContractor and shall be signed by a designated qualified coordination engineer as proof of verification andcorrection and submitted to the engineer.

37. Record Drawings

The Contractor shall maintain one complete set of drawings of all disciplines (Architectural, Structural,Electrical, Mechanical, Civil, Landscaping, External works, etc.), at site exclusively to note all

deviations/changes and submission at the time of completion of the works. All changes/deviations anddetails such as levels of foundations, routing of services, invert levels of pipes, cables, manholes, etc., theposition of tees, bends, clean outs and other appurtenances, details of underground services encounteredand any other relevant data, locating dimensions where appropriate shall be accurately and neatly recordedon these drawings as work proceeds. All changes noted/recorded on the drawings shall be submitted to theengineer for approval as and when the changes occur and are recorded.

38. As Built and Operations and Maintenance (O & M) Manuals

The Contractor shall 15 days if issuance of provisional completion certificate, prepare a complete new set ofdrawings for all disciplines of the project as executed incorporating all changes/deviations and all therecorded data on the set of record drawings maintained at site and submit the same in duplicate to theengineer for approval. The Contractor shall verify and reflect any modifications and/or changes noted by the

engineer on the submittals and shall resubmitted to the engineer for approval. This process shall berepeated until final approval of the engineer is accorded. When approved by the engineer, the Contractorshall submit three copies of ―As -built‖ drawings duty stamped ―As Built‖ as follows before issuance of takingover certificate.

a. Three set of white paper copies duly marked ―As built‖ – each trade/discipline in 4 ring white plastic file.

b. One electronic copy on compact disc., (AutoCAD Rel. 2007).

The “FINAL PAYMENT CERTIFICATE” will not be made until the “AS BUILT DRAWINGS AND O & MMANUALS are submitted. The final payment certificate will not be made except for the actual works thathave been completed in accordance with the specifications and been duly presented on the ―As BuiltDrawings‖.

TAKING OVER CERTIFICATE will not be issued until a full set of ―As Built‖ Drawings and O & M manualsare submitted and accepted by the Employer /Engineer.




and supplying of the above requirements.

39. Customs and Local Dues

All state dues, toll rates, duties, fees and charges in connection with the works shall be deemed to beincluded by the Contractor in his contract unit rates.

40. Expatriate Labor

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the engagement of expatriate labor and staff if requiredand for the housing, health, welfare and repatriation of same shall conform in all respects with the conditionsand requirements of any law and of any regulations or orders of the government of the country where in thesite is situated or any authority which may be applicable including any such Law, Regulation or Order passedor made or coming into force after the date of Tender and /or during the execution of the works.

41. Alternative Materials

Should the Contractor wish to offer alternative items or materials to those specified he shall supply details ofsuch alternatives together with details of any reduction in the contract price should the alternative be allowedto be substituted for the specified items or materials. All offered alternatives shall comply fully in all respects

with the specifications of the particular items or materials. Acceptance or refusal of any alternatives will beentirely at the discretion of the engineer.

If during the course of the contract certain materials or items required for use in the works should beunobtainable, despite the best effort of the Contractor, the Contractor may offer for the approval of theengineer alternative materials or items, provided that they possess the minimum requirements of theoriginally specified material.

In the event of acceptance of any alternative materials or items a suitable price reduction shall be made inrespect of any decrease in value but not price addition shall be made in respect of increase in value.

In the event of refusal of any alternatives materials or items the Contractor shall not be relieved of any ofobligations under the contract and shall be solely liable for any delay or loss occasioned by his failure to

provide the materials or items as specified.

42. Material, Goods and Workmanship Generally

The whole of the goods materials and workmanship incorporated in the works shall be new and of the bestquality available and shall be to the approval of the engineer. Should the engineer discover on the works anymaterials other than those specified or approved, he may order their removal from the site and for theirreplacement as specified. All cost incurred for such removal and replacement, and of associated works shallbe borne by the Contractor.

43. Schedule Procurement of Material

The C ontractor shall produce a ―Schedule of Procurement of Materials‖ and submit the same within 3 weeks

of commencement of works for the approval of the engineer. This schedule shall give the followinginformation:

Item to be procured Quantity Date of submission for approval Date of approval Date of order Expected date of arrival at site Date required on site

The Contractor is required to procedure documentary evidence that all materials or items have been orderedin sufficient time to ensure their arrival on site sufficiently in advance of their incorporation in the works.

No claim will be considered for extension of the contract period due to non-availability of materials as a resultof the C ontractor‘ s failure to comply with this requirement




44. Sample and Testing Materials

A. Samples

Prior to ordering or delivering any materials or manufactured item to the site, the name and address of thesupplier(s) and, where required by the engineer, adequate sa mples, schedules and manufacturer‘scertificates of all the materials and goods to be used in the works shall be submitted to the engineer for

approval at no extract cost to the project.

In case of rejection further samples, until final approval is accorded, shall be submitted. The Contractor shallhave no claims to extra cost or time lost due to improper submissions, the resultant rejections and theapproval process.If considered necessary and ordered by the engineer, the samples shall be tested for compliance at theContractor‘s expense in a laboratory approved by the engineer.

B. Testing

The Contractor shall be responsible for the sampling, storage, transportation and laboratory testing ofproducts and materials as required in the specification.

The Contractor shall make available on site necessary equipment for the use of the engineer for tests to beconducted at site.

E.g. -Slump cone with base plate and tamping rod.

-Thermometer suitable for measuring concrete temperature.

-Magnetic flux principle instrument for non-destructive method of testing paint film thickness.

- Etc.

In additional, suitable experienced labor to carry out the operations in connection with the above shall beprovided by the Contractor as required by the engineer.

The Contractor shall allow for the costs of the above in his units areas.

45. Co- ordination of Builder’s Work

The C ontractor shall coordinate the requirements for holes, fixing and other similar builder‘s work.

The C ontractor shall ensure that such builder‘s wo rk as shown on the drawings is in accordance with his ownand his subcontractor‘s requirements. Details of holes, fixing, etc., which are not shown on the drawings butare required by the Contractor or his sub-contractor shall be submitted to the engineer for his writtenapproval. No holes or fixings shall be performed without prior approval by the engineer. No claim will beentertained for this work and for any abortive work executed due to lack of co-ordination.

46. Periodic Reports

The Contractor must present to the engineer detailed daily/weekly reports and monthly summary reportshowing the following:

Labor force working during the period. Quantity and type of materials and equipment used during the period. Quantity of works executed. Climatic conditions with special reference to any direct effect they may have on the works. Unforeseen circumstance (if any) which may hamper the progress of the works. Graph showing the relation between the executed portions o the works and the corresponding

portions in the work program.

The Contractor shall prove to the engineer upon his request the correctness of the above mentioned reportswithout having the right to use such documents to support a claim for any extra payment or compensationwhatsoever in regard or in relation to such reports However this shall not vitiate the right of the engineer to




47. Construction Program

The Contractor shall prepare a co-ordinated program of all the works, including incorporation of the works ofhis sub-contractors and nominated sub-contractors and submit the same for the approval of the engineer.

The program shall be prepared using proprietary software Prima Vera.

Contractor shall prepare and submit to the engineer, within 30 days of issue of notice to commence a fullyweighted ―S‖ curve indicating planned construction effort and related labor and plant histograms.

―S‖ curve shall be updated with actual progress on weekly basis and incorporated in the Contractor‘s WeeklyReport.

48. Site Progress Meetings

During the course of the work, site progress shall be held at regular intervals, at least once every two weeks,or at other intervals as directed by the engineer, for the purpose of coordinating the C ontractor‘s works andto ensure that full compliance with the various sequences of the contract are maintained. Minutes of suchsite meetings will be recorded by the Engineer and copies will be distributed to all persons concerned andfull effect shall be given to all instructions contained therein.

Prior to such meetings the C ontractor shall give to the Engineer‘s Representative details in writing of thatportion of the works he proposes to construct during the coming two weeks with details of the plant andmethods he proposes to employ. These proposals shall be discussed at the meeting and no work based onsuch proposals shall proceed without the approval of the Engineer‘s Representative.

The Contractor shall have no claim against the employer for costs incurred by him in changing the method ofworking or in the provision and use of other additional plant.

49. Safety of Adjoining Existing Buildings, Roads, Services, Etc.

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions during the excavation for the works particularly thoseexcavations which are adjoining existing buildings, roads, services, etc., and shall protect such buildings,

roads, services, etc., from damage or collapse.

50. Safe Access and Maintenance of Traffic Flows

The Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary roads and tracks necessary for movement of plantand materials, and clear them away at completion and make good all works damaged or disturbed.

The necessity for, provision of, details of, and maintenance of temporary road diversions and existing roadclosures shall be subject to the approval of the engineer, the traffic police and the municipality.

No public or private facility shall be removed or interrupted without written permission of the engineer. Suchpermission will not be given until suitable permanent or temporary alternatives approved by the engineerhave been provided by the Contractor or in the case of accommodation works, by the owner of the facility or

his agents.The Contractor shall be responsible for making arrangements with the Statutory Undertakings, Public

Authorities and the Engineer, as appropriate, concerning the phasing into his program, of all works whichneed to be done by the Contractor or his sub-contractors.

The Contractor shall take any and all measures reasonably required by the Public, Statutory Authority or theEmployer for providing safe passages to the adjoining building, for the support and full protection of allmains, pipes, cables and other apparatus during the progress of the works, and shall construct and provideto the satisfaction of the Authority concerned, all works necessary for the prevention of damage orinterruption of services. If in the execution of works, any subsidence is caused by any act of neglect ordefault of, or any damage to any apparatus, or any interruption of or delay to the provision of any service, bythe Contractor, he (the Contractor) shall bear and pay the cost reasonably incurred by the authorityconcerned in making good such damage and shall make full compensation to the authority for any loss

sustained by reason of such act to neglect, default, damage, interruption or delay.

The Contractor shall, at all times during the progress of the works, afford facilities to properly accredited




situated in or under the site, as may be necessary for inspecting, reporting, maintaining, removing, renewing,or altering such apparatus in connection with the construction of the works or for any other purposewhatsoever.

The position of Services mains, drains, sewers and telephone lines shown on the drawings have been basedon information extracted from the records of the various bodies and must be regarded as approximate only.The engineer does not guarantee either the accuracy of the information or that the location of such

apparatus is as shown on the drawing, or no warranty must be implied as to the position, depth, size orgradient thereof. The Contractor must make his own enquires of the statutory undertakers, public Authoritiesand the engineer and satisfy himself as to the exact position of such apparatus and the depth, size andgradient thereof.

51. Protection of Finished Works

The Contractor shall carefully protect his own finished work, the works of his subcontractors and the works ofLocal Authorities if any, up to the time of completion and final handover of the project. The Contractor shallbe liable for the reinstatement of any work damaged during the progress of the works, caused by any reasonwhatsoever.

Any and all temporary barricading, diversions, enclosures as required to suit the nature of the works. Shall

be provided to protect the works including for the works of his sub-contractors.

52. Working Environmental Conditions

It shall be the Main C ontractor‘s responsibility to ensure that the temperature and humidity conditions aremaintained in respect of his own works and those of the domestic sub-contractors and nominated sub-contractors to suit the following:

I. As per the dictates of the manufacturer/supplier/applicator for each and every item used in the project like,timber doors, partitions, timber flooring, waterproofing to wet areas, painting and tapes used to covercracks and/or joints, false ceilings, etc. The listed items are only examples and are not to be consideredas an exhaustive list.

II. Where toxic items are applied / used.

III. Welfare of men working in enclosed areas / cladded spaces.

IV. Where explosive, flammable or otherwise hazardous products and materials are being handled.

The exact methods used shall be subject to the approval of the engineer. The Contractor shall providedetails of materials/ areas requiring environmental control and a method statement of his proposedprocedures for the approval of the engineer.

The Contractor shall ensure that all local and international codes and guide lines are strictly followed asapplicable.

All costs incurred for the above including any payment / arrangements with authorities in connection with theabove shall be borne by the Contractor.

53. Access to or Possession or Use of the Site

The Contractor shall restrict access to the site to those persons entitled to be present under the Conditionsof contract and to persons authorized by the employer to visit the works. The employer shall give theContractor sufficient notice prior to bringing his invites onto the site and the Contractor shall allow for takingreasonable precautions during such visits against the possibility of injury to persons. All visitors to site mustbe provided with hard hats. No minors shall be allowed on site.

The Contractor shall provide at all times throughout the duration of the works, from commencement to thedate of the certificate of final completion, proper means of access including ladders, scaffolds, etc., and the

necessary attendance to move and adapt same as directed, for the inspection by the engineer.

The Contractor shall remain solely responsible for complying with regulations imposed by any statutory




The Contractor shall take all measures necessary to confine his activities to, and to prevent his workmenfrom trespassing beyond the site area, working limits and any nuisance or detriment caused to the public, theemployer, or owner, or occupier of existing adjacent premises or land, including premises handed over to theemployer prior to final completion by the Contractor or those employed by him, shall be stopped immediatelyif any compliant is made. If such trespass does occur the Contractor shall make good at his own cost anyloss or damage arising by reason of such trespass and shall indemnify the employer from any claimsresulting from the same.

The Contractor will be held solely responsible for ensuring that no nuisance arises from whatever cause andif such nuisance arises through neglect of proper precautions the Contractor shall indemnify the employeragainst all claims, which maybe in this respect. The Contractor shall not use the site for any purpose otherthan carrying out this contract and the sitting of spoil, heaps, etc., necessary for the execution of the works.

54. Limitation of Working Space

The Contractor shall confine his apparatus, the storage of materials and the operation of the workmen to thesite and shall not unreasonable encumber the area with his material. Storage of site materials or for anyother purposes is strictly not allowed under Authority regulating.

Appropriate and sufficient temporary barricades shall be provided to the approval of the engineer to confine

the C ontractor‘s activities and personnel, to ensure privacy and safety.

The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for complying with Local Authority regulations regarding fencingthe site, storage of materials and spoil heaps, unloading of materials, temporary buildings, sanitaryarrangements, etc. No claims for delay or costs will be entertained in the event of work being stopped for abreach of regulations.

55. Limitations of Working Hours

The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of clause 45 of the conditions of contract. Where nightshift construction work is involved prior approval from Authority shall be obtained.

56. Construction Procedure, Progress Reporting and Co-ordination Procedure

A. INTRODUCTION

The scope of Project Control Service to be performed by the CONTRACTOR shall include, but not be limitedto, functions as described under the following major headings:

Preparation of Project Control Procedures and Documentation Project Planning & Scheduling Project Progress Measurement

The Contractor shall use computer systems for the Project Control Services listed above. Such systems shallbe capable of electronic interface between the Contractor‘s Hone office (if applicable) and theCONSTRUCTION SITE. Software facilities shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR as approved by theEngineer. However, preference will be given the primavera package Microsoft Project 1998.

The Project Control Service requirements and systems described hereafter are provided for guidance andestablishment of minimum PROJECT requirements. The CONTRACTOR may use his own house systems,provided by the ENGINEER‘S requirements as stated herein are met and are approved by the engineer.

B. PROJECT CONTROL PROCEDURES AND SYSTEMS

The CONTRACTOR shall develop detailed procedures for each of the major control functions described inthis section, for review and APPROVAL by the engineer.

The CONTRACTOR shall prepare a systems plan, identifying each computer (hardware, software andcommunications links) to be used in the control and reporting of the WORK, the interface between systemswhere applicable, and SCHEDULE for implementation of the systems.

Systems Users Manuals shall be provided for each system, detailing computer hardware and software usedin the works




C. OVERALL PROJECT PLANNING AND SCHEDULING

The CONTRACTOR shall implement the overall Project Planning and Scheduling Controls on a hierarchicalbasis consisting of four levels:

Level 1 – Master Schedules Level 2 – Overall project CPM Network and initial 90-DAY Starter Schedule.

Level 3 – Detailed SCHEDULES Level 4 – Week Look – Ahead schedules

C1 LEVEL 1 – Master Schedule

Overall Progress curves shall be developed to monitor the progress of the WORKS. The curves shall bebased on the APPROVED Overall Project Master Schedule, including breakdowns for all disciplines, andshall cover:

a. DRAWINGS/Documents, Product Descriptions and Data Sheets Progress.b. Subcontracting Services progress.c. Procurement Progress.

- EQUIPMENT/Packages

- BULK MATERIALS- Overall Procurement Progress

d. Construction progress

- Each area by trade/discipline- Each Subcontract- Over CONSTRUCTION Progress

e. Commissioning Progress

- Each System- Total Progress

f. Overall WORK Progress

The ―S‖ Curves wil l be supported by summary bar charts developed from level 2 CPM Networks.

The curves shall be updated monthly to display actual versus plan progress as well as projected trend for theremaining period. These shall be issued as part of the Monthly Progress Report.

g. Overall Manpower Histogram

Manpower histograms shall be developed showing the planned manpower, by discipline, for the entireduration of the WORKS, separately for overseas office (if applicable), local office and the CONSTRUCTIONWORKSITE activities. Actual mobilize manpower shall be indicated to show comparison with plannedmanpower, and monthly updates shall be included in the monthly progress report.

C2 Level 2 – Overall Project CPM Network

A. A computerized networks shall be prepared in precedence format, and the coding structure shall providereference to project phase and plant number as per WORK breakdown structure for ease of activityidentification and report sorting.

B. By use of sub-codes as per WORK breakdown structure, the network activities shall relate to overseasoffice (if applicable), engineering and procurement, and CONSTRUCTION activities. For this purpose,the network coding structure shall be developed by the CONTRACTOR for the review and APPROVALof the Engineer.

C. It is essential that the network contain logic that relates engineering DRAWINGS with detailed SHOPDRAWINGS related to EQUIPMENT AND VENDOR data.




Bid, Evaluation, and Commit Cycle, including Engineer review period, with additional activities formanufacture, information, shipment and delivery to SITE.

E. For sub-contract work, each CONSTRUCTION Subcontract Bid, Evaluation and Award cycle shall beidentified separately. CONSTRUCTION networks shall be prepared primarily on area basis. TheCONSTRUCTION networks for each area shall contain sufficient detail to allow identification of start ofeach major trade activity, logic links between each trade, and in particular to each area relative to

EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS deliveries; through installation of EQUIPMENT / packages and achievingoverall CONSTRUCTION completion.

F. A separate commissioning network shall be developed, identifying activities for each system.

G. The network shall be updated monthly for actual progress and minor change in activity logic and/orduration‘s to suit current information. All logic and duration changes shall be reviewed with the engineer.Following the update, a critical listing shall be produce identifying chain of events with a float of thirty(30) days or less. The critical activity listing shall be reviewed with the engineer to identify problem areasand corrective actions necessary. The critical activity listing shall be included in the Monthly ProgressReport along with suggested corrective actions.

H. As referenced in the overall Project Master Schedule, key milestone in the CPM network shall be

identified and assigned fixed target dates, to validate the duration‘s of the major activities shown on theOverall Project Master Schedule and consequently to identify critically where applicable.

I. The complete CPM network may contain a large number of activities (excluding logic restraints for aprecedence network) and therefore it is recommended that the network be prepared on a sub-net basis,with ENGINEER‘ S review of the individual sub-nets as they are completed. The total network shall becompleted within ten (10) weeks after the EFFECTIVE DATE of the CONTRACT.

J. Review and APPROVAL periods by ENGINEER‘S shal l be identified as separate activities within thenetwork.

C3 90 DAY Starter Schedule

At the commencement of the PROJECT, and prior to development of detailed logic networks, a 90-day starterschedule shall be issued which shall illustrate in detail all major works anticipated within the period, bydiscipline/trade. This schedule is available and implemented.

C4 LEVEL 4 – Detailed Schedules

The control tools included in this level are primarily all documents which are used to track and measureprogress of the WORK at identifiable deliverable levels, including, but not limited to:

A. DRAWINGS/Documents SCHEDULE

A detailed SCHEDULE shall be prepared for all DRAWINGS including workshop drawings and otherdocuments to be developed on the PROJECT for each discipline of engineering. Based on the level 2

network, SCHEDULE requirement dates shall be incorporated for each document, by discipline. Planned andactual dates of completion of different stage for each DRAWING/Document shall be shown. Wherever theSCHEDULE date cannot be accomplished, this will be reflected in the forecast. These shall include allSPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS< MATERIAL requisitions and other documents to be produced for eachengineering discipline. This SCHEDULE shall also be computerized to enable generation of reports to meetENGINEER‘S requirements like:

- Summary table by discipline and by type of documents planned together with actual achievements forthe period and cumulative.

- Documents planned for completion but not complete.

- Documents due for issue in next period.

B. Procurement SCHEDULE




of Procurement Control Log. Based on the Level 2 network, SCHEDULE requirement dates shall beincorporated for each stage against each requisition to show the WORK accomplished, and whereverSCHEDULE dates cannot be met, the forecast dates shall be indicated for the immediate and further stages.The required at SITE date shall also be indicated against each requisition and where the forecast date is likelyto exceed the required at SITE date, recommended recovery action shall be indicated by the CONTRACTORunder ―Remarks‖ Column.

C. Subcontracting Schedule

Using the detailed Level 2 Network as the basis, a detailed subcontracting SCHEDULE shall be prepared forall filed contracts planned to be let on the PROJECT, in the form of Subcontracts Control Log. ThisSCHEDULE shall show the required dates under all subcontract stages (from formulation of subcontractsdocuments, review bids received and award of the contracts) according to the agreed milestones.

D. Manufacturing and MATERIALS Delivery SCHEDULE

Based on the Level 2 Detailed Network, all SCHEDULED manufacturing and delivery requirements shall beincorporated for each major purchase order. The MATERIALS status shall indicate the SCHEDULE, forecastand actual manufacturing status as per the identified stages of manufacturing process and delivery datesagainst major purchase order.

E. Linkage between Network Activities and DocumentsCONTRACTOR shall ensure that a system is used whereby all engineering documents and MATERIALrequisition in the Control Register are directly linked with related activity numbers on the CPM network so thatall planned, actual and forecast dates of deliverable match with the network activity SCHEDULES.

C5 Planning and Scheduling of CONSTRUCTION WORKS

a. CONTRACTOR shall commence the SITE WORK on the dates indicated in the AGREEMENT andcomplete the WORKS on or before the dates indicated in the AGREEMENT.

b. At all times, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish sufficient work forces, MATERIALS, facilities,CONSTRUCTION plant and EQUIPMENT, workout the hours, perform the WORK in character,

sequence and timings, and control progress of the WORKS so as to achieve completion of theWORKS on or before the scheduled completion dates specified in the AGREEMENT.

c. CONTRACTOR shall produce a WORK SCHEDULE for APPROVAL and use the detailed workSCHEDULE as the basis of reporting progress of the works, forecasting and SCHEDULE control.CONTRACTOR shall revise the Work SCHEDULE only to reflect the effect of approved VARIATIONSORDERS, and at regular weekly intervals the CONTRACTOR shall update the work SCHEDULE toreflect actual progress of the WORKS.

d. If the CONTRACTOR‘S performance of the WORK deviates from or does not conform to the WorkSCHEDULE, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a written plan of SCHEDULE recovery for the WORK tothe ENGINEER, detailing all activities to be undertaken by the CONTRACTOR to improveperformance so as to achieve compliance with the Work SCHEDULE.

e. The CONTRACTOR will plan and schedule field activities well in advance of the start of SITE WORK.The engineer will review and comment upon the engineering and procurement SCHEDULES toensure that the engineering and procurement work priorities are aligned with the construction plan forthe PROJECT. Field planning and scheduling updates shall take into account the current status ofengineering and procurement activities and shall include, but not limited to the following:

Submitting for review of the engineer, the basis and formats for the types SCHEDULES to be usedby the CONTRACTOR indicating the frequency of up-date.

Preparing within agreed time scale(s), the following documentation for WORKS.

- Overall Construction Schedule.- Detailed Construction Schedules / CPM networks for construction activities.- Detailed Commissioning Schedule.- Summary bar charts and ―S‖ Curves for progress of the WORKS - Subcontractor‘s resource based Co nstruction bar chart schedules and physical progress




- Detailed quantified WORK program Schedules.- Manpower Loading Charts (direct and indirect and showing split by craft).- Construction Equipment Loading Charts.

Furthers details on Construction Planning requirements are detailed in Clauses H to K.

C6 Level 4 – 3 Week Look-Ahead Schedules for DRAWINGS / Documents, Procurement and

Construction Activities

Three-week Look-Ahead Schedules shall be prepared covering activities in detail for alltrades/disciplines, to indicate specific items of WORK to be accomplished over the forth coming 2weeks and activities completed in the previous week. This SCHEDULE shall form part of the WeeklyProgress report and be updated weekly. This SCHEDULE shall highlight any internal or externalinformation flow or decision restraints that are hindering progress.

Level 3 and 4 schedules provide the detailed basis for update of the level 1 and Level 2 Schedulesand Overall Project Master Schedule, by either direct electronics or manual interface.

C7 Provision of SCHEDULES / Networks to ENGINEER

The CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with the various SCHEDULES and networks together withupdates through electronic mail, floppy discs and hard copies throughout the duration of the PROJECT.

D. PROJECT PROGRESS MEASUREMENT

D1 Basis of Progress Measurement

The CONTRACTOR shall develop a detailed Progress Measurement System for review and APPROVAL ofthe ENGINEER. Planned and Actual Progress for the total PROJECT shall be assessed for all activities onthe PROJECT. Progress will be split over the following:

a. Drawings/Documents

b. Subcontracting

c. Ordering, manufacturing and Delivery of EQUIPMENT

d. CONSTRUCTION (including progress of CONSTRUCTION activities and commissioning activities).

e. Overall PROJECT Physical Progress will be calculated based upon fixed weight factors for the majorcomponents of the PROJECT as specified below:

DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS SUBCONTRACTING Ordering, Manufacturing and delivery of EQUIPMENT / Packages and Bulk Materials. Construction including commissioning.

f. The CONTRACTOR shall submit computerized systems which allows for the weighting of variousactivities and shall use a common unit of measurement relative to the total PROJECT for accurate andmeaningful measurement of Overall Project Progress.

D2 DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS and Subcontracting Progress measurement

a. For DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS, the CONTRACTOR shall submit for the APPROVAL of the ENGINEER,a weighted listing of all DRAWINGS/Documents with their planned and forecasted actual issues dates.This listing shall include but not be limited to the following:

Product description and date sheets List of requisitions for purchase List of requisitions for subcontracts




Workshop drawings

b. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for the ENGINEER‖S APPROVAL a computerized Document StatusSystem which records and reports document progress with appropriate summarization

c. Capabilities. The system shall be capable of interfacing with network activities.

d. Progress shall be determined completeness of documents, which include SHOP DRAWINGS, productdescriptions, data sheets, specifications, and materials requisitions for each discipline. Weightage foreach document shall be based on the estimated man hours needed for the same.

e. For calculating progress of various types of documents in various disciplines, the CONTRACTOR shallpropose standard progress stages/milestone for each type of document occurring throughout the lifecycle of each document along with allocated percentage progress for each stage milestone. Thesestandards may or may not be universal across drawings types and/or disciplines. The incrementalprogress for each step shall be recognized when the milestone is achieved. No intermediate proratedprogress credit between two successive milestones shall be recognized. The proposed measurementsystem shall be submitted to the Engineer for Approval. The milestone percentage (%) progress forvarious documents types to be fallowed shall be submitted for the Engineer‘s review and approval. TheContractor may add additional document types as appropriate.

D3 Subcontracting Progress Measurement

The Contractor shall submit for the engineer‘s review and approval a system of measuring the progress forsubcontracting activities. Total subcontracts shall be weighted depending upon their estimatedcost/complexity.

The following milestone and percentage progress shall be used for each subcontractor:

- Issue RFQ to bidders 35%

- Award recommendation and 55% Approval by the Engineer

- Sub-contract award 10% _______________

Total 100%==============

D4 Ordering, Manufacturing and Delivery of Equipment / Packages and Bulk Materials

a. The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer ‘s approval a system for progress measurement ofordering, manufacturing and delivery of the equipment / packages and bulk materials.

b. The system shall include activities starting with issuing inquiry, receiving bids, evaluation, ordering andcontinue through delivery to SITE. Each shall be weighted depending upon the estimatedcost/complexity.

c. The following milestone and percentage progress shall be used to measure progress for each categoryof equipment / package items and bulk material:

- Order placed 10%

- Issue of final approved shop drawing 10%Product Description and data sheets

- Materials Inspected / Tested and Accepted 60%

- FOB 10%

- Receipt at SITE 10%




TOTAL 100%==============

D5 Construction Progress Measurement system

The CONTRACTOR shall develop and submit to the ENGINEER for review, comment and approval, aquantitative system for measurement of CONSTRUCTION progress. Detailed activity weight factors will be

calculated based upon estimated efforts required to perform the unit quantity. The system will be fullydetailed and computer based and shall be the basis of weekly/monthly reporting of PROJECT progress. TheCONTRACTOR may develop his own weighting system which shall be implemented only after APPROVALof the ENGINEER.

A. PROGRESS MONITORING

a. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for measuring and monitoring progress on a weeklybasis, by marking up the weekly work SCHEDULE with the physical work completed andrecording the actual percent completely on each activity.

b. The percentage achieved shall be measured using the ENGINEER‘S APPROVED progress

measurement procedure. Overall physical progress will be calculated by using weightedfactors and summarized as required by rolling up at higher levels.

c. The actual progress will be compared with the scheduled progress and for any shortfall, theCONTRACTOR shall promptly propose to the ENGINEER appropriate recovery plan andadjustments to immediate works programs and SCHEDULE to ensure that over scheduledprogress is achieved and planned completion dates are maintained.

B. PROGRESS REVIEWING

a. The CONTRACTOR shall establish and maintain complete and accurate details of the worksas they progress.

b. For the purpose of reviewing progress of the works, the Contractor shall report and presentdetails of progress of the works, in accordance with the agreed format.

c. At all times the CONTRACTOR shall allow the ENGINEER to have access to theCONTRACTOR‘S documents and records that suppo rt the CONTRACTOR‘S reporting ofprogress of the works

d. The CONTRACTOR shall review and up-date these documents at mutually agreed intervalsand issue the same for the engineer‘s review.

e. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a detailed physical progress measurementsystem for the engineer‘s review and approval.

f. The CONTRACTOR shall monitor actual progress of the works against the schedule usingdetailed work schedules as applicable, identifying problem areas and shall proposeschedule recovery plans.

g. The CONTRACTOR shall measure and report to the ENGINEER actual productivity againstpredetermined standards to ensure manpower loading is adequate and effective utilized toachieve the desired progress.

h. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare monthly graphical presentations of the actual versusplanned trends for progress, man-hours, and productivity for the review of the ENGINEER.

i. The CONTRACTOR shall develop forecasts for the activities still be completed, to establishwhether current schedule completion dates can be met.

j. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare DRAWING and MATERIALS hold-up reports, for theengineer‘s review, due to non -availability of required drawings and materials, impeding the




k. CONTRACTOR shall conclude schedule risk analysis on a quarterly basis using acomputerized system to predict probability of project completion as per target and presentthe analysis to the engineer with full backup.

C. PROGRESS REPORTING

a. The Contractor shall implement an engineer approved progress reporting system. TheContractor shall submit to the engineer daily, weekly and monthly progress reports,providing the following information as a minimum:

i. Daily Reports

Highlights of manpower and major CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT employed, MATERIALS received,key milestone achieved and other major activities of the day.

ii. Weekly Reports

Highlights of the week‘s activities. The actual progress versus planned progress in quantitative terms,work availability and planned work for following week and major areas of concern along with proposed

corrective actions. Manpower and construction equipment loading chart showing actual versusplanned numbers and a three week look-ahead schedule shall be submitted by each subcontractor.The Contractor shall submit a summarized weekly report for the total project in a format approved bythe engineer. The report shall be submitted on the first working day of each week.

iii. Monthly Progress Report

- This report shall be submitted to the Engineer by the 5th day of each month.- The exact format of the report will be mutually agreed between the engineer and the Contractor. As a

minimum, it shall include the following:

Executive summary narrative highlighting major home office (if applicable), LocalOffice and construction worksite activities accomplished during the month.

Status of works, overall and a comparison between planned and actual Areas of concern. Proposed remedial actions recommended correcting stated situations and avoiding

potential problems. Effectiveness of remedial actions taken previously. Narrative and summary of drawings/documents progress-actual progress planned. Narratives and summary of subcontract award progress-actual progress planned. Narrative and summary of procurement progress-actual progress planned. Construction progress – activities performed and progress achieved. Actual versus

planned by subcontracts and overall construction. Plans and schedules including important activities in the immediate future, up-dates

and forecasts.

SITE MATERIALS delivery details and forecasts including specific information onlate materials deliveries likely to affect progress. Progress, productivity and man-hour data to include planned, actual and forecast

progress together with trend identification and analysis, by each subcontract. Project Schedule status, highlighting the status of critical activities along with

schedule trend analysis, indicating actions proposed to be taken to ensure timelycompletion of the project.

Project milestone status. Drawings and materials hold-up analysis and report. Productivity analysis for each subcontractor. Project trends summary. Photographs

The CONTRACTOR shall supply once a month at his own cost and as directed by

engineer‘s three mounted sets of 20 No. color prints of progress photographs of asize not less than twenty five (25) cm by twenty (20) cm of such portions of theworks in progress or completed, as may be directed by the engineer. Each set to be




engineer. All photographs and negatives shall become the property of the Engineer.

b. Progress Meeting Records

i. The Contractor shall prepare the agenda for the meeting and arrange distribution at least two(2) days prior to the meeting.

ii. The engineer shall record the minutes of all progress meetings with particular attention toactions agreed upon, dates by which actions to be taken and by whom and shall follow-upthe implementation of these actions.

D. OVERALL CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

a. An overall construction schedule shall be developed within thirty (30) days after the effectivedate of the contract and incorporated into the project master schedule. Constructionrequirements and priorities will be reflected in the engineering and procurement schedules.The Contractor shall submit for comments, to the engineer. The overall constructionschedule in the form precedence diagram, drawn on a time scale. It shall depict the logicalsequence, relationships and duration of the major activities to be performed duringconstruction by the Contractor and the subcontractors. The submission shall include

computer printout and floppy disk containing all relevant data.b. The time schedule shall clearly show the major interactions of the work between theContractor and the various subcontractors and for each individual unit or facility includingcommissioning. The schedule shall be based on the latest information with regard toavailability of equipment/packages and construction drawings at the site and other data fromthe list as provided by the C ontractor‘s overseas head office (if applicable).

c. The critical and sub-critical activities shall be shown in different colors.

d. The extent of detailing of the network shall meet the engineer requirement such that theeffect of any significant delay or change in the course of the execution of the works can beclearly explained, evaluated and controlled.

e. After discussions and agreement with engineer on the overall construction schedule andtiming, the overall construction schedule shall form the basis for the detailed constructionschedules.

E. DETAILED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

a. The Contractor shall build up a detailed CPM CONSTRUCTION network logic diagram withactivity duration‘s and resource allocation, in accordance with the overall constructionschedule and the CONSTRUCTION WORK breakdown structure. It shall depict the logicalsequencing and relationships of engineering, procurement and subcontracting toconstruction, fabrication, erection, and commissioning.

b. The logic diagram shall be developed in precedence format and the critical activities shall be

identified together with optimum resource requirements and shall be submitted for theengineer‘s approval thirty (30) days prior to commencement of site activities.

c. Revisions to the logic, duration‘s of sc heduled activities and milestone dates shown on thelogic diagram schedules shall only take place after full consultation with the engineer.

F. SUBCONTRACTOR’S SCHEDULE

a. Immediately after the mobilization of each subcontractor, Contractor shall prepare aresource based bar chart schedule for entire scope of work and the duration of thesubcontract. The activities will be prioritized keeping in view the interface and dependencywith respect to other SUBCONTRACTORS WORK item as defined in detailedCONSTRUCTION network logic. Resources and estimated efforts will be define for each

activity by which the weighted factor‘s will be calculated and physical progress ‗S‘ curvesdrawn for further monitoring.




continuously, dynamic work program schedule for each subcontractor taking intoconsideration the latest drawings, materials and access availability status and monitor theactivity completion schedules and schedule progress. Output of these schedules will berolled up for updating C ontractor‘s schedules as well as detailed and overall constructionlogic networks.

G. DETAILED WORK PROGRAM SCHEDULE

Schedules falling under this category are as follows:

a. Twelve (12) week look-ahead schedule: This schedule shall be derived from the updatelogic diagram. It will be issued as part of the Municipality Progress Reports and shall coverthe activities for the following Twelve (12) weeks. Drawings and materials requirements willbe correlated to meet the f orward programs. The related ―HOLD -UP‖ reports will begenerated if after comparing with the current drawing status report and materials deliverystatus reports there is a slippage to the availability dates of either.

b. 3 Week Look-Ahead Schedule: this schedule shall be derived from the twelve (12) weeklook-ahead, it will include the past week and the following two weeks (2). This will be adetailed schedule at working level and shall identify all activities for all work discipline, in

each and every year.

c. Construction Manpower Planning: the C ontractor shall submit for the engineer‘s review, hisproposed manpower planning for labor and his estimate of the man-hours needed for theconstruction, in the form of histograms. These will be broken down by trade for the entireduration of the construction activities. Resource scheduling calculations shall be made onthe basis of the network schedule. The Contractor shall however be responsible for resourceplanning, as required, to meet the scheduled progress and recover slippages at no cost theEngineer.

d. Construction Equipment Planning: The Contractor shall submit to the engineer, for review,his proposed plan for deployment of construction equipment and facilities, at no cost to theengineer, to recover any shortfalls in the progress and in the progress and in order to ensure

timely completion of the project.

57. Regulatory Authorities Requirements

The Contractor shall be responsible to make himself aware of all the Local Municipality and otherRegulatory /Jurisdictional Authorities requirements and regulations and ensure that they areimplemented to the satisfaction of the Municipality and other Regulator/Jurisdictional Authorities andto the approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall pay all charges in connection with the Municipality Building Permit inclusive of,but not limited to, Drainage fees, Insurance fee (deposit) and Building permit charges.

The tender price shall include all costs associated with collection of the Municipality Building Permit.

58. Maintenance During Defects Liability Period and Guarantees

Starting from the date of issue of Substantial/Provisional completion certificate the Contractor shall beresponsible, for the duration of one year, to provide the following services free of charge, at his owncost:

1. The servicing/ Repairing and Restring to satisfactory working order of all system and equipmentincluding replacement of parts or whole equipment that show any manufacturing or installationdefect during operation.

2. Carry out routine preventive maintenance (fortnightly, monthly, quarterly, half yearly, yearly as

applicable to the approval of the engineer). Including provision of labor, spare parts and supply ofconsumable materials for all systems as required for the safe operation and guarantee ofperformance of all the systems.




3. Necessary staff to carry out the above shall be resident on the job site during the said year.

4. On call emergency services (24 hours), particularly for fire alarm system.

5. Guarantee of every piece of equipment from any manufacturing or installation defects for a periodof one year.

6. At the end of defects liability period the Contractor shall be responsible for final handing over of allinstalled systems in a perfect condition to the satisfaction of both engineer and Employer.

59. Training of Employer Personnel

The Contractor shall responsible for the training of operators assigned by the Employer for operationof all major equipment and controls as decided by the engineer. Training should be provided byoriginal suppliers of equipment for a period of at least one week and/or when requested by Employerprior to issuance of take-over certificate.

60. Examination and Take Over of site from the Enabling Works Sub-Contractor – (If applicable)

The Contractor shall examine the site and the various installations that need to be taken over from the

Enabling Work Sub-contractor for compliance with requirements, for construction of his (the mainContractors) works and shall record and submit a written report listing any conditions pr items notfulfilling the requirements or are considered detrimental for further progress of his work to theengineer. The examination, report and listing shall be carried out in the presence of the EnablingWorks Sub-contractor.

The Contractor shall not proceed with the works until all defects are rectified and unsatisfactoryconditions are corrected to the approval of the engineer.

In case the taking involves exposing of examination after same works are to be performed by themain Contractor, the main Contractor shall take over the works in two stages:

- At the time of taking over – initial conditional takeover to be reviewed checked and taken over

exposing by main Contractor.

- Final takeover of all review has been completed.

Acceptance of the site and commencement of works by the Contractor shall be deemed asacceptance without any defects / unsuitable conditions and no subsequent claim whatsoever in thisregard by Contractor will be entertained.

Items to be taken over from the Enabling Works Sub-contractor shall be, but not limited to thefollowing:

- Site- Site Hoarding

- Site sign Boards- Shoring Works- Dewatering System- Piling Works

61. Site Visit

The Contractor shall examine the Soil Investigation Report and take into account therecommendations therein. Similarly he shall visit the site, study the conditions both physical apparentand anticipated, obtain all information about requirements arising out of site conditions beforecommencing works and be responsible for any variations or extra-work resulting from the siteconditions or contents of soil investigation report without additional time and/or cost implications to thecontract.




SECTION1a : SPECIALIST CONTRACTOR’S DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1. GENERAL

1.1 Performance Criteria

The performance criteria included in the Performance Specification sets the minimum standards with whichthe Detailed Design shall comply, and the means by which compliance shall be checked and controlled priorto completion of each element of the Works.

1.2 Design Submittals

The Specialist Con tractor‘s design submittals shall be reviewed by the Engineer during the evaluation period,and any alteration and/or agreements reached shall be incorporated into the Contract Drawings and ContractSpecification.

1.3 Design Intent

a) The Drawings are only intended to indicate the required visual effect.

b) Although the Drawings show considerable detail and dimensions, no warranty or representation isgiven herewith as to the accuracy of such dimensions or the adequacy or buildability of such details.Should the Specialist Contractor adopt the details or arrangements indicated on the Drawings it shallbe deemed that he has checked their buildability and performance in terms of the Performancespecification, all applicable Regulations, Codes of Practice, Standards and manufacturers/ suppliers‘recommendations for any products referred to. The Specialist Contractor shall undertake full designresponsibility for all adopted designs and details.

1.4 Material Preferences

a) Where a preference for a particular material, type of construction, dimension, size or thickness isindicated in the performance Specification or on the Drawings, or a particular method of constructionis implied, the specialist Contractor shall either guarantee that the preference indicated will satisfy therequirements of the Tender Document or if he considers them, in his expert opinion, to be inadequateor inappropriate, make alternative proposals in his Tender satisfying the performance and visual intentrequirements of the Performance Specification and Drawings.

b) If, with his Tender, the Specialist Contractor submits no such alternative proposal to any of thepreferences indicated in the Tender Documents then the solutions proposed in the PerformanceSpecification and on the Drawings shall be deemed to be acceptable and be warranted by him.

2. SPECIALIST CONTRACTOR’S DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY

2.1 General

a) To the extent that the Specialist Contractor designs any part of the works the same shall be designedwith all reasonable skill and care in conformity with the normal standards of the relevant disciplines.

b) All elements of design and construction work shall be fit for their intended purpose and location, andshall be fully co-ordinated with adjoining elements of construction.

c) The Specialist Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his Tender for development of thedesigns specified to meet the specialist requirements of his own fabrication techniques.

d) The Specialist Contractor shall be responsible for the Detailed Design and selection of materials,which shall be used solely for the purpose intended by the manufacturer and which satisfy therequirements of the Performance Specification.




2.2 Design Response

a) The Design is that shown on the Drawings and the Performance Specification.

b) The Specialist Contractor shall provide, with his Tender, a response to the Design, maintaining thedesign intent and criteria provided.

c) The Specialist Contractor shall submit with his tender, sufficient drawings and technical specificationsas required detailing his proposed solutions to the Drawings and Performance Specifications in orderthat a realistic technical appraisal of his Tender can be made by the Engineer.

d) Prior to Contract award, the Specialist Contract shall agree a set of Contract Drawings and a ContractSpecification with the Engineer which provides detailed descriptions of all work proposed, includingfull technical details of components, materials and attachments, structural calculations, etc.

e) During the course of the works, the Specialist Contractor shall provide such additional supplementaryinformation necessary to substantiate and complete the Detailed Design to the satisfaction of theEngineer.

f) The Specialist Contractor shall not alter the Contract Specification without the Engineer‘s priorconsent.

2.3 The Drawings

a) The Drawings are those listed in the Instructions to Tender.

b) Used for Tender purposes, the Drawings provide the design and visual intent with which the SpecialistContractor shall base the Tender.

2.4 The Performance Specification

a) Used for Tender purposes, the Performance Specification describes the design and performance

criteria of the works with which the Specialist contractor shall comply when providing a technicalresponse with the Tender.

b) The Performance Specification identifies preferred materials which the Specialist Contractor shallconfirm as being suitable for their specified purpose. If he considers them unsuitable he shall advisethe Main Contractor at the Tender Stage.

2.5 The Detailed Design

a) The Specialist Contractor shall provide and be responsible for the Detailed Design of the works.

b) The Specialist Contractor shall complete the Detailed Design of the works to meet the requirements ofthe Drawings, the Performance Specification and all other criteria which, in his specialist knowledge,are relevant to the design and installation.

I. Where a particular material, type of construction, dimension, size or thickness is stated inthe Performance Specification or on the Drawings or a particular method of constructionmay be implied, the Specialist Contractor shall guarantee that the preference indicatedwill satisfy the requirements of these documents. If the Contractor considers these to beinadequate or inaccurate, then alternative proposals shall be made when submitting hisTender.

II. If the Specialist Contractor submits no alternative proposal to any of the preferencesindicated with his Tender then the solutions proposed in the Performance Specificationand on the Drawings shall be deemed to form part of his proposals.

c) The Detailed Design shall not alter the design intent, appearance or performance of the Design.




d) The Detailed Design shall comply with all relevant Codes of Practice, Regulations, Fire Regulations,Local Building Regulations, Safety Regulations and any other regulations applicable to the installation,together with all relevant Statutory Rules, Regulations, By-Laws and other enforceable instrumentsapplicable to both the design and execution of the installation.

e) The Detailed Design shall finalise all manufacturing and installation detailed and guarantee

performance of the works.

f) The Specialist Contractor shall submit Tender Response Drawings and tender ResponseSpecifications in order that Design Development may commence.

g) Prior to Contract award, a set of Contract Drawings shall be agreed which provide detaileddescriptions of all work proposed including typical technical detailed of components, materials andattachments, structural calculations, etc. The Performance Specification shall be adjusted to reflectthe solutions agreed for contract purposes.

h) During the course of the works, Specialist Contractor‘s Supplemental Information shall be provided tosubstantiate and complete the Detailed Design to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

i) The Specialist Contractor shall not alter the requirements of the Performance Specification without theEngineer‘s prior consent.

2.6 The Detailed Design Process

a) When preparing the master programme, the Specialist Contractor shall make reasonable allowancefor completing design/ production information.

b) During the Contract the Specialist Contractor shall submit via the Main Contractor to the Engineer therequired number of copies of design/ production information. The Engineer will note his comments onone copy, then return these to the Main Contractor.

c) The Main Contractor shall co-ordinate any interface required and return the drawings to the Specialist

Contractor.

d) The Specialist Contractor shall ensure that any necessary amendments are made without delay.Unless and until the Engineer confirms that resubmission is not required, submit copies of amendeddrawings etc. and ensure incorporation of necessary amendments, all as before.

3. SPECIALIST CONTRACTOR’S DRAWINGS

3.1 Working Drawings

a) Working Drawings, and where appropriate structural, thermal and acoustic calculations etc. shall besubmitted to the Engineer for review in good time so as to allow any revisions to be carried out andnot affect planned manufacturing periods.

b) The Engineers shall review the working Drawings for compliance with the Contract drawings, to checkgeneral visual performance and overall functional matters only. The Detailed Design and constructionof components and materials shall remain the responsibility of the Specialist Contractor.

c) The Engineers review of Working Drawings shall not relieve the Specialist Contractor of hisresponsibility for errors or for supplying components and materials to the full satisfaction of theEngineers.

d) The Working Drawings shall be fully dimensioned in metric to an agreed scale appropriate to thedetail and include (but not be restricted to):

I. Full size details describing materials, components and equipment, construction, finishes,provision for movements, fabrication and erection tolerances.




Contractor shall provide the Engineers with (6 No.) Record Drawings plus one negative of each,showing clearly the final as manufactured/ as-built product.

s) No Working Drawings will be accepted if produced at scale and reduced. The Working Drawings shallbe fully co-ordinated, taking into account all interface conditions, tolerances and, where appropriate,on-Site dimensions in order to ensure that the works are installed without alteration, unless otherwise

stated herein or agreed with the Engineers.

t) Submittals to be returned no later than 14 days after receipt.

3.2 Erection Drawings

The Specialist Contractor shall, where deemed necessary by the Engineers, produce Erection Drawingsshowing the dimensional layout of the structure from which Working Drawings shall be produced.Erection Drawings shall be produced to a relevant and agreed scale correlating the piece markings with thelocation in the structure.

4. SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION

4.1 Technical Literature and Calculation

The Specialist Contractor shall ensure that sufficient relevant information and any design calculations aresubmitted to the Engineers which demonstrates compliance with the Performance Specification and ContractDocuments.

5. SITE WORK

5.1 Co-ordination

a) The Main Contractor shall arrange, and the Specialist Contractor shall attend and contribute to,regular Detailed Design co-ordination meetings. The Specialist Contractor shall produce, adapt andupdate Working Drawings based on such meeting to ensure that the Detailed Design and execution of

the works are fully co-ordinated.

b) The Specialist Contractor shall dimensionally co-ordinate the Detailed Design of the works with thedimensional requirements of works being designed by any third party to ensure that co-ordinateddetailed Working Drawings are produced. The Specialist Contractor shall co-ordinate the executionand completion of the works with the execution and completion of the work of third parties and shallprovide all information necessary and undertake all tasks required by the Engineers for the purpose ofensuring that the works and the project works are carried out and completed in an economic manner.For the purpose of this clause the term ―third party‖ shall include all other contractors, all StatutoryUndertakers, all Suppliers of goods, material and plant and all others engaged pursuant to theContract, whether on or off the Site.

6. MAINTENANCE MANUAL

6.1 General

a) Not more than one week before completion of the works the Specialist Contractor shall submit adetailed operating and maintenance manual (using only the format provided by the Engineers) whichshall give details for the proper operation and maintenance of the works or any component, fitting, oraccessory consistent with the performance and other requirements of this Contract and which shallclearly state the following:

I. Method of operation and maintenance.

II. Any sequence related to operation and maintenance.

III. Identification of parts requiring operation and maintenance giving reference to location of theitem on manual drawings, together with manufacturer‘s reference numbers, addresses and




telephone numbers of firms from whom materials or parts can be obtained.

IV. The Specialist Contractor recommendations shall pay particular regard to safety in operationand maintenance.

V. The Specialist Contractor shall provide all manual drawings, sketches and diagrams

necessary to illustrate the nature of the operating and maintenance works described in themanual.

VI. Where manual drawings, diagrams, sketches and the like are A4 size they shall be appendedand bound into the manual; if larger, then one negative copy together with a copy on C.D.shall be provided.

b) The works shall not be accepted as practically complete until the detailed operating and maintenancemanual has been submitted to the satisfaction of the Engineers.

6.2 Record Drawings

a) The Specialist Contractor shall prepare detailed, full and accurately dimensioned record drawings

showing the works as finally supplied and installed.

b) The Specialist Contractor shall provide one negative copy of the finally accepted record drawingstogether with a copy on CD.

7. SPECIALIST CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTALS

7.1 Tender Specification

a) The Specialist Contractor shall submit with his Tender a specification giving sufficient preliminaryinformation to adequately describe his proposals so that a realistic evaluation of the Tender can bemade.

b) Such specifications shall be set out to follow the order of headings set out herein so that the proposalsto each requirement can be easily checked.

c) Consideration will be given to the quality, contents visual appearance, and neatness in layout andgeneral excellence of the proposals and selection may be made in favour of quality, contents andappearance rather than the lowest tender sum.

d) Tenders not accompanied by an adequate tender specification may not be considered if there isinsufficient information for a proper evaluation of the proposals to be made.

7.2 Detailed Drawings, Performance Specification and Calculations

No alteration to the performance or other requirements of this Performance Specification shall be madeunless a variation instruction is issued by the Engineers which expressly require such alteration.

8. GENERAL PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

8.1 Scope of Works

a) General: The design, fabrication, installation and performance requirements specified are intended toestablish minimum performance levels, general design principles and the visual appearance required.

b) The Specialist Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the whole of the installation achieving orsurpassing the design and performance criteria for all components and all sub-assemblies of theinstallation.




SECTION 2: DEMOLITION & SITE CLEARANCE

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Specification

a) This specification deals with the general requirements for the demolition of buildings,other structures and services above and below ground level and/or for the clearancefrom site of other superficial obstructions, shrubbery, materials and the like. TheContractor is to allow for the provision of adequate screens, necessary watering toallay dust and removal of all debris from the site

b) The Contractor is responsible for taking all necessary precautions for the protection oftrees, shrubs and existing structures on site that may need to be retained if indicatedand shall be held responsible for reinstating or replacing any items of work damagedby him during the execution of the works, to the approval of the Engineer.

c) Prior to removing any trees or vegetation, approval of Municipal Horticulture Sectionshall be obtained.

1.2 Survey before Commencement

Before commencing the Works, The Contractor shall study all available drawings and carryout a thorough survey and examination of buildings, structures or services to be demolishedor site to be cleared. The Engineer shall be fully informed of the results of this survey. Theamount and extent of the demolition and/or site clearance together with the time scheduleshall then be agreed with the Engineer.

2.0 DEMOLITION

Demolition Procedure

a) Extent of the Work.The Contractor shall demolish, break-up and remove buildings, structures and superficialobstructions on the site in the way of or otherwise affected by the works. He shall clear eachpart of the site at times and to the extent required or approved by the Engineer.

b) Demolition Techniques.Demolition shall be carried out using techniques, which will not be detrimental to adjacent oradjoining structures or parts of structures, which are not to be demolished. Where shown onthe drawings or where directed by the Engineer, underground structures, culverts, chambersand foundations other than building foundations shall be removed to such a level as may beindicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

Where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall excavate in trench and breakoutredundant pipes, ducts and surrounds. Trenches and pits resulting from site clearance belowground level shall be properly cleaned out and filled with compacted suitable material,compacted in layers not exceeding 200 mm to achieve at least 95% MDD.

3.0 GENERAL SITE CLEARANCE

Debris and Obstructions

Before commencing any excavating or fill, the area shall be cleaned of all debris, materials orobstructions, which in the opinion of the Engineer would adversely affect the uniformity or stability offill.

4.0 PRESERVATION OF PROPERTY

Existing Facilities(i) Existing highways, facilities, adjacent property, trees and plants designated for preservation




shall be suitably protected from injury or damage by the Contractor from his operations.

(ii) The form of protection of vegetation within the Site shall be a type and standard approved bythe Relevant Department.

(iii) The Contractor shall ensure that access to adjoining properties is not impeded by his work.

5.0 DISPOSAL OF OLD MATERIAL

Materials to Remain Property of Employer

(i) Where specified, certain materials arising from the site clearance are to remain the propertyof the Employer. All fossils, antiquities and other objects of interest or value which may befound or uncovered on the Site shall remain or become the property of the Employer and theContractor shall forthwith:

a) Use his best endeavors not to disturb or damage the object;b) Cease work, which would endanger the object or prevent or impede its removal;

c) Inform the Engineer of the discovery and precise location of the object.

(ii) The Engineer will issue instructions on the procedure to be adopted which may includeconditions to permit the examination, excavation or removal of the object by a third party.

(iii) Subject to the provisions of the conditions of Contract and of this Specification, all materialsarising from site clearance which are surplus to or unsuitable for use in the Works shallbecome the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of by him either off the Site to anapproved tip or if agreed by the Engineer on the Site in an approved manner.

(iv) The Contractor shall propose two sites for disposal of unsuitable or surplus material, one ofwhich shall be specified as having priority and which must be filled before the second is used,together with a separate location where debris, such as concrete, kerbing etc., shall bedisposed of. The Contractor shall seek approval for all the nominated sites from theMunicipality before work commences.




SECTION 3: EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS

1. SCOPE OF WORK

The work covered by this section concerns excavations and earthworks of any kind includingtransportation of excavated materials, backfill and filling as required for the various types of buildings,as well as for external works.

The Contractor shall judge for himself the nature of the ground and its bearing capacity, and shall be fullyresponsible for ascertaining all necessary information concerning permanent water table, periods ofrainfall, flooding of the site and all matters affecting the excavations and foundation work.

The methods of excavation, which the Contractor desires to use, shall be at the sole discretion of theContractor. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure the complete safety of allsite personnel, including any third party, together with all buildings on site, including buildingscompleted by any third party.

Hauling of material from cuttings or borrow pits to the embankment or other areas of fill shall proceed onlywhen sufficient compaction plant is operating at the place of deposition.

The Contractor shall report to the Consultant when excavations are completed and are ready to receiveblinding concrete, and shall obtain consent before depositing concrete. In the event of excavations beingmade larger than the sizes shown on the drawings or as otherwise directed by the Consultant, theContractor shall fill in the excavated void to the correct profile with selected fill compacted in layers notexceeding 150 mm to the required density, or mass concrete as described hereinafter under "ConcreteWork", at his own expense.

The final 150 mm depth of all excavations shall be taken out by hand unless the Consultant allowsotherwise and the bottom leveled and rammed immediately prior to placing concrete. Should anyharmful material be encountered at the bottom of any excavation, it shall be removed and the extradepth filled with mass concrete as directed by the Consultant.

Where shown, the excavation shall be blinded with concrete as soon as possible after the final trimmingof the bottom of the excavation, but not later than 24 hours, after which time fresh approval shall besought and obtained from the Consultant before proceeding this work.

Construction traffic shall not use the surface of the bottom of a cutting unless the Contractor maintains thelevel of the bottom surface at least 300 mm above formation level. Any damage to the surface arisingfrom such use of the surface shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense.Excavation and earthworks shall conform to BS 6031 (1981) and approval of the Consultant.

2. SITE CLEARANCE

The sites of structures shall be cleared of all trees, bushes, scrub, crops, grass and all other vegetablegrowth including grubbing ups all roots. All rubbish and grubbing matter shall be burned or disposed ofoffsite at tips to be provided by the Contractor. All compost materials and excavated surfaces soil shall bespread and leveled evenly over garden areas.

3. EXCAVATION PERMITS

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits relating to excavation works and shall bearall costs involved. The Contractor shall abide by all conditions, etc. laid down in such permits.

4. TYPES OF EXCAVATIONS

4.1 Excavation shall be classified according to the nature of the materials to be removed either as excavationin rock or excavation in earth. Excavation in rock shall be defined as including all excavations in hard andconsolidated materials which cannot be removed by normal excavation tools and equipment and whichrequire drilling, blasting or other special means for their removal. All excavation other than in rock shall




be defined as excavation in earth.

4.2 The use of explosives to remove rock encountered in the course of excavation will not be allowed withoutthe prior written consent of the Consultant and concerned authorities. The storage and use of all suchexplosives shall fully comply with the By-laws and ordinances of Army and all Government Departmentsconcerned.

4.3 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all safety precautions concerned with the use ofexplosives and for all damage to life and property as a result thereof. The explosives shall be storedin a locked and adequately safe store and the Contractor shall maintain a register for their control anduse.

5. SITE SURVEY AND SETTING OUT

Before work commences on the site, the Contractor shall carry out a survey of the levels of the siteand obtain the verification of the Consultant of these levels. Levels shall be taken on a grid to beagreed by the Consultant, and the Contractor shall produce a drawing of these levels for recordpurposes. The Contractor shall be responsible for setting up and maintaining a site datum level."Zero" datum shall be the level of the top of the ground floor slab of the proposed buildings.

Information pertaining to the nature of the ground may be given to the Contractor, when available butwithout any guarantee of its correctness or accuracy.

The Contractor shall be responsible for accurately setting out the works to the specified lines, levels andpositions in relation to the building lines and existing structures.

6. EXISTING SERVICES

The Contractor shall ascertain the whereabouts of all existing services on the site, both above and belowground. Such services shall be removed, sealed or rerouted in a manner prescribed by the Public

Authorities concerned including additional requirements for future services at the Contractors ownexpense.

The Contractor shall also be held responsible for all damage sustained by any of the services adjacent tothe site resulting from the works. Excavations to locate services shall be carried out by hand.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all liaison with local and service Authorities and for obtaining allnecessary permissions, licenses and approvals, arranging for disconnection of existing services as wellas for all payments of fees, changes etc. in respect of the works.

7. POOR GROUND & TREATMENT OF SOFT AREAS

Any subterranean cavity found within the area of the buildings shall be dredged of any soft materialand then filled to the Consultant's instruction to ensure that the cavity concerned does not adverselyaffect the permanent works in any way.

Under foundations the wells or cavities will be filled with mass concrete or equivalent cement grout.Elsewhere, wells will be filled with approved consolidated filling as indicated in item 10 below, to matchthe surrounding ground but cavities will be left or filled as instructed by the Consultant.

Where soft areas occur treat as follows:

Initially non-friable boulders of sizes between 150 - 300 mm shall be end tipped over the area and rolleduntil the area is stabilized to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Further stones of 10 - 70 mm size shall berolled into the area until all the areas are leveled and well bound.

8. SHORING EXCAVATIONS

The Contractor shall to the satisfaction of the Consultant, shore the sides of excavations for structures,trenches and pits to prevent them for slipping or falling. Should any slips, falls or settlement occur theyshall be made good by the Contractor, at his own expense, with selected fill or with mass concrete as




may be directed by the Consultant.

In removing shoring from the sides of excavations, care shall be taken to avoid bringing loads onto anyconcrete until it has hardened sufficiently to carry such loads.

Timber or other materials used for shoring the sides of excavations shall be removed as the work

proceeds except when ordered to be left in by the Consultant.

The Contractor shall, not later than four weeks before commencing any excavation, submit to theConsultant for inspection calculations and working drawings for the proposed scheme of strutting andretaining the sides of the excavations.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all excavations and for the maintenance andprotection of any adjacent property, structures and roads.

Trenches and pits shall be kept free of water at the expense of the Contractor.

9. MINERALS

The Contractor is strictly prohibited from digging for sand, gravel or other minerals and no sand or gravelarising from the excavations may be used in these works.

10. REQUIRED BEARING CAPACITY

The Contractor shall submit the necessary soil investigation report, if so required by the Consultant andnotify the Consultant to obtain his instructions if the required bearing capacity:I) Is obtained at a lesser depth than that shown on the drawings.ii) Is not obtained at the depth shown on the drawings.

The soil Investigation report should include:

a) Subsurface exploration of site soils and rocks.b) Ground water investigation.c) Laboratory testing of soil, rock and water samples.d) Description of subsurface and groundwater conditions.e) Selection of geo-technical parameters.f) Developing foundation recommendations, including construction considerations for the proposed

works.g) Developing recommendations for site preparation, including earthworks.h) Reporting the results of all field, laboratory and analytical work in a final geo-technical report.i) Review of foundation drawings to determine if they are incomplete with the recommendations of

the geo-technical reports.

The report / works shall not be limited to the above but shall include all that is required to confirm the

adequacy of the foundations and the safety of the proposed structure.

Excavation bottoms are to be approved before the new works are laid on them. The Contractor shallinform the Consultant when excavations are ready for inspection, if after approval, surfaces becomeunsuitable due to flooding or other causes the Contractor shall excavate further, backfill with concreteor with suitable materials and compact to the Consultant's approval at his own expense.

Should the soil condition, after the Consultant has been informed that the excavations are ready forinspection, be such that the Consultant deems it necessary to carry out loading tests, the Contractor shallperform such tests to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Any expenses incurred in consequence of theperformance of such tests are deemed to be included by the Contractor in his own tender.




11. STOCK PILING

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for stock piling and the material should not be placeddirectly in its final position. All locations for stock piling must be approved by the Consultant and theMunicipality.

12. BACKFILLING

Foundations, trenches, column bases and the like are to be backfilled with selected excavated materialas shown in the structural drawing. The imported fill to comply with the following:

Soaked CBR : BS 1377, Part 4, 1990 Not less than 30% at 95% maximum dry density (MDD) 4 days soaking orNot less than 15% at 95% MDD as required and instructed by the Consultant.

Liquid Limit : BS 1377, Part 2, 1990 Not more than 35

Plasticity Index : BS 1377, Part 2, 1990

Not more than 6

Water Soluble Salts : BS 1377, Part 3, 1990 Test 7 & 5 for water-soluble chloride and sulphate respectively, not more than 2% by weight of drymaterial expressed as chloride and sulphate content.

Fill must be well rammed and consolidated to the satisfaction of the Consultant, in layers not exceeding150 mm thick, and sufficiently watered during consolidating to achieve maximum consolidation. Themaximum size of the material shall not be greater than 63 mm, not more than 20% shall pass the 200mm sieve and it shall be free of all debris, vegetable matter and the like. Maximum dry density isdetermined according to BS 1377, 1990.

Organic Matter

Maximum limit is 0.1%, test method to be latest edition of BS 1377.

Number of field density tests shall be a minimum of 3 for each 500 m2 of fill area or unit whichever issmaller. For areas larger than 500 m2 the number of tests shall be increased proportionately.

Number of field density tests for services trenches shall be a minimum of 3 for each 500 L.M. length foreach lift or per unit whichever is less.

Dune sand will not be accepted as imported material irrespective of it meeting the suitable fillrequirements.

13. DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

Surplus excavated material and all unsuitable material shall be removed from site and run to spoil bythe Contractor in tips provided by himself and approved by the Municipality and the Consultant or asotherwise directed by the Consultant.

14. COMPACTED FILL BENEATH GROUND SLABS, FOOTINGS, ETC.

The area shall be trimmed to a clean properly compacted uniform surface to the lines and levels shownon the drawings. Any soft areas considered unsatisfactory by the Consultant shall be taken out and theextra depth filled with approved compacted fill material.

The fill is to be non-plastic granular material, well graded, strong, with a maximum particle size of 50 mm,with not more than 15% passing a 200 mm sieve, free of all debris, vegetable matter and the like.

Filling is to be compacted as soon as possible after deposition, and with plant approved by the Consultant




and complying with the following:

Fill shall be placed in layers not exceeding a 150 mm compacted thickness and compacted to not lessthan 95% of the maximum dry density (MDD) as determined according to BS 1377, Part 4, 1990 for allembankment layers.

The top 300 mm of fill up to formation level shall have a minimum soaked CBR of 30% at 95% MDD. Theremaining underlying fill material shall have a minimum CBR of 10% at 95% MDD.

During construction of embankments the Contractor shall control and direct construction traffic uniformlyover the full width of the embankment. Damage to compacted layers by construction traffic shall be madegood by the Contractor at his own expense. If the Contractor wishes to continue to use the surface ofembankments for constructional plant before trimming to formation level he shall bring up and maintainthe area between the extremities of any carriageway, including any shoulders to a level not less than 150mm above formation level. Any damage to the sub grade caused by the use of such surface shall bemade good by the Contractor at his own expense.

Where embankments 1.2 meters or less in height are to be constructed, the top 150 mm of the ground onwhich the embankment material is to be placed shall be compacted to a density not less than 95% of the

maximum dry density.

Where embankment height is in excess of 1.2 m the top 150 mm of the ground on which theembankment material is to be placed shall be compacted to a density not less than 90% of MDD.

Where the soaked CBR of formation in cut is less than 10% but greater than 5%, a thickness of 200 mmor as shown on the drawings immediately below formation shall be replaced with an equivalent thicknessof material of minimum soaked CBR of 10% at 95% MDD. However where soaked CBR of the formationis less than 5%, then 300 mm thick layer immediately below the formation shall be replaced with similarthickness layers of suitable material of minimum soaked CBR of 10% at 95% MDD. The fill material shallbe compacted to not less than 95% MDD. Soil improvement shall be considered as the first option if

judged more practicable and economical by the Consultant.

All references to soaked CBR's shall be as determined according to BS 1377, Part 4 and Part 2, 1990.

The fill is to be compacted using a vibrating compactor of not less than 1.5 tone. The fill is to bethoroughly compacted in layers not more than 150 mm thick. Adequate water is to be used forcompaction and the density after compaction shall not be less than 95% of the maximum dry density asdetermined according to BS 1377, Part 4, 1990.

Backfilling and compaction operations to make up the levels under the ground slabs shall proceed at thesame time as backfilling to the final external levels. The difference in level of backfill between inside andoutside of walls shall not be permitted to exceed 200 mm unless noted otherwise.

Compacted fill shall not be obtained from the site but imported from a source to be approved by theConsultant.

15. NON COMPACTED FILL

Non compacted fill shall be non-plastic granular material to the approval of the Consultant.

16. PROTECTION OF SERVICES

The Contractor shall maintain and protect all permanent mains, services etc. serving adjacent buildingswhere affected by excavations.

17. KEEPING EXCAVATIONS FREE FROM WATER

The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping all excavations free from water, from whatever causearising from whatever means. The Contractor shall make good at his own expense any damage that may




result from his failure to keep the excavations free from water. The method adopted for dewatering shallin no way contravene the regulations of the local authorities. The system or systems to be employeds hall be approved by the Engineer, such approval if given shall not waive the Contractor‘s responsibilitiesand liabilities under the Contract.

18. TESTING FOR DENSITY & COMPACTION

Before commencement of pavement works and during the earthworks construction the Consultant shallinstruct control tests to determine the degree of compaction. These shall include:

a) Dry density / moisture content relationship : BS 1377, Part 4, 1990.

b) In-Situ Dry Density Tests : BS 1377, Part 9, 1990.

c) CBR Tests : BS 1377, Part 4, 1990.

d) In-Situ Density by the Nuclear Method : ASTM D2922.

e) In-Situ Moisture Content : ASTM D3017.

The areas shall be rejected if the resulting test results do not satisfy specified requirements.

Tests for laboratory testing (Density, Moisture content, CBR, Plasticity Index, maximum size, sulphateand chloride content tests) shall be carried out at a frequency of at least one group of tests per 1500 m3of fill.

19. DEWATERING

Where the excavation level is below the water table and it is necessary to pump continuously from theexcavation or to install a specialist form of dewatering equipment around the perimeter of the site orexcavation, the Contractor will be responsible for ensuring the safety and stability of all adjoiningground, property, structures, services or utilities above or below ground level.Continuous or permanent dewatering of the excavation of site may not be undertaken without the writtenapproval of the Consultant to the work, and the methods to be employed shall be to the Consultants

approval.During the execution of pumping operations, records shall be kept and agreed weekly with theConsultant of all equipment, pumping times and water levels. The water pumped from excavations orwell points shall be pumped to disposal points or sumps as approved by the Consultant and if sorequired be passed through settling tanks before disposal.

20. USE OF WATER FOR EARTHWORKS

The use of saline water for earthworks will only be permitted if the percentage of water soluble salts in thecompacted fill does not exceed 2 % by weight of dry soil.

21. EXPLOSIVES & BLASTING

Explosives may only be used in the works with the prior written approval of the Consultant and allsafeguards and conditions that the Consultant may specify are to be agreed in writing. Permission mustalso be obtained from the relevant Government Authorities.

22. GROUND PREPARATION BELOW FORMATION

Where any material below the natural ground level under embankments or below formation level incuttings is required to be excavated it shall be removed to such a depth and over such areas as areshown on the drawings, or as the Consultant shall direct, and disposed of in a manner depending on itsnature and condition at the time. The resultant excavation shall be backfilled with the material defined onthe drawings, or as the Consultant shall direct and shall be compacted as specified, except incircumstances where the backfill has to be deposited below standing water. In such cases the Contractorshall use only an approved granular material of maximum size not greater than 300 mm and which onanalysis by sieving complies with the requirements of Table 1 below and may be deposited below waterwithout the associated use of compaction plant.




Table 1: Free Draining Material

B. S. Sieve Size Percentage by Weight Passing

10 mm Up to 100

5 mm Not more than 850.60 mm Not more than 450.075 mm Not more than 5

Where the Consultant shall direct, approved rock fill shall be placed directly on to naturally occurringmaterial. Such rock fill material shall have a "10 percent fines" value or not less than 10 tones whentested in accordance with BS 812 and shall be graded from 300 mm to 150 mm with not more than 10%less than 150 mm in size. The rock fill material shall be deposited and compacted to the satisfaction ofthe Consultant.

23. SETTLEMENT

The Contractor shall be responsible for making good all settlement of filling that may occur up to the endof the maintenance period of the Contract, unless stated otherwise in the specification.




SECTION 4: CONCRETE WORK

1.0 CONSTITUENT MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE

61.1. Cement

(a) General

The cement used shall be Portland Cement conforming in all respects with ASTM standard specificationC 150, type 1, or to BS EN 197-1:2000 unless otherwise required. The Contractor shall obtain the writtenapproval of the Engineer to the proposed cement manufacturer.

(i) Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) shall comply with BS EN 197-1:2000 but contain not less than 4% andnot more than 13% proportion by weight of tri-calcium aluminate.

(ii) Moderate Sulphate Resisting Portland cement (MSRPC)

Cement complying with BS EN 197-1:2000 but containing not less than 4% and not more than 8%proportion by weight of tri-calcium aluminate, or cement complying with ASTM C 150 Type II. Ineither case the cement shall not contain more than 2.7% proportion by weight of sulphur trioxide.

(iii) Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement (SRPC) shall comply with BS 4027:1996 or ASTM 150, type V andalso shall comply with the following requirements:

Cement shall comply with the following requirements:

(a) The acid soluble alkali level measured as Na2 0+0.658 K20 shall not exceed 0.6% by weightand shall be determined by the test method described in Clause 16.2 of BS 4550, Part 2.

(b) The heat of hydration shall not exceed 290 KJ/Kg at 7 days.(c) The specific surface area shall not be greater than 325 m2/Kg and not less than 225 m2/ Kg

when tested as described in the relevant BS.(d) The temperature of the cement shall not exceed 38º C at the time of incorporation into a

concrete mix.

(iv) Low heat Portland cement shall comply with BS 1370.

(v) Portland blast furnace cement shall comply with BS 146.

(vi) High Slag Blast Furnace cement shall comply with BS EN 197-1:2000 .

(vii) Portland pulverized fuel ash cement shall comply with BS EN 197-1:2000 .

(viii) Super sulphated cement shall comply with BS 4248.

(ix) White Portland cement shall comply with BS EN 197-1:2000

(x) All cement shall be obtained from a source approved by the Engineer. Certificates signed by themanufacturer, issued by an approved independent testing agency in the country of origin, shall beprovided for each delivery stating that the cement complies in all respects with the relevant BritishStandard and giving the date of manufacture.

(b) Cement Test and Analysis

Prior to any shipment to site the Contractor shall supply the Engineer with the manufacturers statement ofspecification and test certificate together with the date of manufacture certified by own independentagency in the country of origin. The date, quantity of cement and the number of the relevant delivery noteshall also be stated. Before or after delivery the Engineer shall have the right to reject any cement if theresult of additional test he may request do not meet the required standard. The Engineer shall haveaccess to the cement store and have the right to take samples for these additional tests.




The Contractor shall remove all rejected cement from the site without delay.

(c) Handling and Storage

(i) Cement delivered to site in bags shall be stored under cover on a raised floor. The covering shall beraised above the surface of the material to permit adequate ventilation, and shall be arranged to protect

the cement from moisture. Cement from broken bags shall not be incorporated in the permanent works.

(ii) Cement delivered in bulk, in batches not exceeding 100 tones, shall be transported to the site in closedpurpose made containers and shall be stored on elevated, airtight and weatherproof storage bins. Eachbatch shall be stacked separately and used in order of delivery.

(iii) Different types of cement shall be stored in separate locations and each storage area shall be clearlyidentified.

(iv) At the time of use all cement shall be free flowing and free from lumps. Cement that has been in storagefor a substantial time shall be tested in accordance with the respective BS to determine its suitability foruse. Any cement that has become injuriously damaged by damp or other causes shall at once beremoved from site. No cement shall be used after 6 months of its manufacturing.

(v) Unless otherwise specified sulphate resisting cement shall be used for all concrete work up to andincluding the ground floor level, and ordinary Portland cement for all work above this level.

(vi) All cements whether stored in bulk or in bags, barrels or containers in warehouses or on site shall besampled for testing according to BS EN 196-7:2005, or according to BS EN 197-1:2000 . Test samplesover and above those specified shall be taken at any time if so requested by the Consultant. Testing ofcement shall be in accordance with the methods required by ASTM C150 or BS EN 197-1:2000 .

61.2. Aggregates

(a) General

(i) Unless otherwise specified on drawings aggregates shall be from an approved source and shall consistof naturally occurring materials complying with the requirements of BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008 forgraded or single size aggregate and ASTM C.33. For the purpose of test requirements aggregates shallbe defined in accordance with BS EN 12620:2002 + A1:2008, latest edition.

(ii) Aggregates shall be chemically inert and shall consist of sound, hard, clean, durable sand gravel orgravel or stone, whole or crushed rock or washed sand or a combination thereof. They shall be of highcrushing strength and free from adherent coating such as clay, earth, vegetable and organic matter,alkalis or acids, bituminous material or any other deleterious matter or impurities.

(iii) Aggregates shall not contain harmful materials such as iron pyrites, coal, mica, shale or similar laminatedmaterials or flaky or elongated particles in such a form or in sufficient quantity to effect adversely thestrength or durability of the concrete or any materials which will cause expansion in the concrete afterhardening has commenced or taken place. Also for reinforced concrete, any materials which may attackthe reinforcement.

(iv) The provisions of all sections relating to aggregates shall apply to both reinforced and plain concreteunless otherwise stated.

(v) Prior to commencing the work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval samples ofaggregates, results of all specified tests, details of sources of supply and details of types of crusherand/or screening machinery or washing equipment he proposes to use. No aggregates shall be useduntil such approval is given by the Engineer.

(vi) Sampling and testing of aggregates shall be as required by BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008 and inaccordance with BS EN 932-1:1997 "Methods for Sampling & Testing of Mineral Aggregates, Sands, andFillers". All sampling shall be done by or under the supervision of the Engineer or his representative.

http://www.ihsti.com/CIS/BroSer.aspx?AuthCode=410A45B&Ser=BS+EN&Let=ABC







(vii) Aggregates shall meet the limits set out in Table 4 below.

(b) Fine Aggregates

(i) Grading of fine aggregates, when analyzed by the method of sieve analysis described in BS EN 933-1:1997 shall be within the limits of one of the grading zones given in Table 2 of BS EN

12620:2002+A1:2008. The fine aggregate shall be described as fine aggregate of the grading zone intowhich it falls, e.g. (C.M.F.) BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008. The sand must be selected to produce aconcrete of the required quality.

(ii) Physical and chemical properties shall comply with BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008.

(iii) The total chloride ions in the mix shall not exceed the limits in BS 8110 or BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008.The total acid soluble sulphate content of the concrete mix, expressed as SO 3 should not exceed 4% SO 3

by mass of the cement in the mix. The sulphate shall be calculated as the total from the constituents ofthe mix. This does not apply to concrete made with super sulphated cement.

(iv) The content of Shelly material based on percentage by weight of calcium carbonate shall not exceed20%.

(c) Coarse Aggregates

(i) The grading of coarse aggregate, when analyzed by the method given for sieve analysis in BS EN 933-1:1997 shall be within the limits given in Table 1 below. In addition, flakiness index and elongation indexshall not exceed 25%. Determination of flakiness and elongation indices shall be in accordance with BS812, Part 105.1 and 105.2 respectively.

(ii) Physical and chemical properties shall comply with BS EN 12620:2002.

(iii) The content of shell material when determined in accordance with BS EN 933-7:1998 shall not exceedthe following:

- Fractions of 10 mm single size or graded or all-in aggregate that is finer than 10 mm and coarserthan 5 mm - 10%.

- Fractions of single sizes or of graded or all-in aggregate that is coarser than 10 mm - 5%

(iv) The reduction in strength between the soaked and unsoaked 10% fines values shall not exceed 50 kn.The unsoaked test shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 933-3:1997 and the soaked test afterimmersing the aggregate specimen in distilled water for 24 hours.

10% fines values shall be not less than the following for different types of concrete:

: Heavy-duty concrete floor finishes 150 kn.: Pavement wearing surfaces 100 kn.: Others 50 kn.

(d) All-in Aggregates

(i) All-in aggregates complying with BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008 shall not be used for reinforced concretebut may be used for mass concrete if approved by the Engineer. Single sized aggregate to BS EN12620:2002+A1:2008 may only be used for reinforced concrete when combined in 2 or more sizes toprovide a well-graded mixture approved by the Engineer. The grading of all-in aggregate when analyzedby the method of sieve analysis described in BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008 shall be in accordance withTable 3 below.

(e) Storage and Handling

(i) All aggregates for the manufacture of concrete shall be stored on a drained concrete hard standing, laid-to-fall away from the mixer, or other approved surface to prevent the aggregate from being contaminatedby the ground or other foreign matter. Each type of grading of aggregate shall be kept separate by the




use of partition walls, etc. to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure that gradedcoarse aggregates do not segregate in storage heaps. To avoid contamination by excess silt and finematter the bottom 250 mm of all stockpiles shall not be used.

(ii) Wet fine aggregate shall not be used until in the Engineer's opinion it has been drained, unless theContractor measures the moisture content continuously and adjusts the quantity of fine aggregate and

added water in each batch of concrete mixed, to allow for free water contained in the fine aggregate.

(iii) Just before use the aggregate shall be washed down with potable water to reduce the content ofsulphates, chlorides and other extraneous materials.

(iv) The choice and preparation of sites for stockpiling of aggregates, the number and sizes of stockpiles andthe methods adopted to prevent segregation of component sizes shall be agreed with the Engineer.

(v) Coarse aggregate shall be stockpiled in three separate grading, 40-20 mm, 20-10 mm, and 10-5 mm.When aggregates of different grading are stockpiled close together the stockpiles shall be separated bybulkheads.

(vi) Stockpiles are to be on concrete or other hard surface sufficiently sloped so that water is not retained in

the base of stockpiles.

(vii) All aggregates are to be handled from the stockpile in such a manner as to secure a typical grading of thematerial, care being taken to avoid crushing the aggregates and contamination with extraneous matter.

(viii) "Aggregates need not be stockpiled when a crushing - screening plant is used in tandem with awatching plant properly equipped with several bins for different sized aggregates having theappropriate weighting scales at each bin such that a mix of the desired gradation is obtainedconsistently and the whole operation is conducted to the satisfaction of the Engineer".

(ix) Beach sand shall not be used in building works (concrete, mortar, plaster, render, etc.).

(x) For the limits and frequencies of testing pertaining to physical, chemical and mechanical properties of

aggregates the Contractor is referred to Tables 1 and 2 respectively.




Table 1 : COARSE AGGREGATE

Sieve Size Percentage by mass passing BS sieves for nominal sizesmm

Graded aggregates Single sized aggregates

40mm to5mm

20mm to5mm

14mm to5mm 40mm 20mm 14mm 10mm 5mm

50 100 - - 100 - - - -

37.5 90 to 100 100 - 85 to 100 100 - - -

20 35 to 70 90 to 100 100 0 to 25 85 to 100 100 - -

14 25 to 55 40 to 60 90 to 100 - 0 to 70 85 to 100 100 -

10 10 to 40 30 to 60 50 to 85 0 to 5 0 to 25 0 to 50 85 to 100 100

5 0 to 5 0 to 10 0 to 10 - 0 to 5 0 to 10 0 to 25 45 to 100

2.35 - - - - - - 0 to 5 0 to 30




Table 3 : ALL-IN AGGREGATE ____________________________________________________________________________

Sieve Size Percentage by mass passing BS sieve for nominal sizesmm

40mm 20 mm 10 mm 5 mm'

50 100 - - -

37.5 95 to 100 100 - -

20 45 to 80 95 to 100 - -

14 - - 100 -

10 - - 95 to 100 100

5 25 to 50 35 to 55 30 to 65 70 to 100

2.36 - - 20 to 30 25 to 100

1.18 - - 15 to 40 15 to 45

600 um 8 to 30 10 to 35 10 to 30 5 to 25

300 um - - 5 to 15 3 to 20

150 um 0 to 8‖ 0 to 8‖ 0 to 8‖ 0 to 13

' Used mainly in pre-cast concrete products'' Increased to 10% for crushed rock sand.




TABLE 4: LIMITS OF PHYSICAL, CHEMICAL & MECHANICAL

PROPERTIES OF AGGREGATES FOR CONCRETE ______________________________________________________________________________________No. Kind of Requirement Test Methods Permissible Limits

ASTM Fines Coarse _____________________________________________________________________________________1. Grading BS EN 932-1 Standard2. Material finer than 0.075mm BS EN 932-1 max. 3% max. 1%

Natural, uncrushed/crushed rock max. 7% max. 1%3. Clay lumps and friable particles C 142 max. 1% max. 1%4. Light weight pieces C 123 max. 0.5% max. 0.5%5. Organic impurities C 40 not darker than standard color solution.6. Water absorption C 128/

C 127 max. 2.3% max.2%7. Specific gravity (apparent) C 128/

C 127 min. 2.6% min. 2.6%8. Shell content in aggregates : BS EN 933-7

Coarser than 10mm max. 5%Between 5mm and 10 mm max. 15%Between 2.36mm and 5 mm max. 10%Finer than 2.36mm Note 1

9. Particle shape :Flakiness Index BS EN 933-3 max.25%Elongation Index BS 812-105.2 max.25%

10. Acid soluble sulphates, C1 for BS EN 1744-1reinforced concrete made withSRPC cements, max.0.03% max. 0.01%OPC & MSRPC cements max.0.05% max. 0.02%

For mass concrete made with

SRPC cements max.0.03% max. 0.02%OPC & MSRPC cements max.0.05% max. 0.04%

For pressed concrete and steamcured structural concrete max.0.01% max. 0.01%

11. Acid soluble sulphates, SO 3 BS EN 1744-1 max.0.3% max. 0.3%12. Soundness, MgSO 4, (5 cycles) C 88 max. 12% max. 12%13. Mechanical Strength, 10% fines

value BS EN 1744-1 min. 100 KNor impact value BS EN 1097-2 max. 30%Los Angeles Abrasion C131/C535 max. 30%

14. Potential re-activity,Note 2 of Aggregates C 289 innocuous innocuousOf Cement Aggregate combination C 227 six-month expansion

15. Drying shrinkage BS EN 1367-4 max. 0.5%16. Unit weight and voids C 29 <10% voids17. Durability index D 3744 > 90%18. Aggregate crushing value BS EN 1097-2 < 20% < 20% loss

Note :

1. There is no requirement of shell content in sands passing 2.36 mm size sieve.

2. Aggregates may initially be assessed for reactivity in accordance with ASTM C 289 and if potentialreactivity is indicated, then mortar bar tests in accordance with ASTM C227 shall be carried out.

The aggregate shall be considered conforming to specifications if representative samples pass the abovetests.




Just before use, the aggregate shall be washed down with potable water to remove the content ofsulphates, chlorides and other extraneous materials.

Coarse aggregate : The grading of coarse aggregate when analyzed as per BS EN 933-1:1997 shacomply with BS EN 12620:2002.

REQUIRED ROUTINE TESTS FOR AGGREGATES

61.3. Water

(a) Water quality

(i) Water used for mixing concrete shall be clean, free from oil, grease, vegetable matter or other organicimpurities. Mixing water shall be potable and shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 1008:2002

No. Requiremen t / Test Method Test Frequency Rate

1. Grading : BS EN 933-1 & 2:1997 Each two weeks or per 100m3, whicheveris more frequent.

2. Material finer than 0.075 mm: BS EN 933-1 & 2:1997

Each two weeks or per 100m3, whicheveris more frequent.

3. Clay lumps and friable particles : ASTM C142 Each two weeks or per 100m3, whichever

is more frequent.

4. Organic Impurities : BS 1377, Test 8 Each month or per 200 m3, whichever ismore frequent.

5. Water Absorption : ASTM C128 / C127 Each month or per 200 m3, whichever ismore frequent.

6. Specific Gravity : ASTM C128 / C127 Each month or per 200 m3, whichever ismore frequent.

7. Shell Content : BS EN 933-7:1998 Each two months or per 100 m3,whichever is more frequent.

8. Particle shape : BS EN 933-3:1997 Each two months or per 100 m3,whichever is more frequent.

9. Acid soluble chlorides, Cl :Quantitative BS EN 1744-1:1998, Annex A.2 & A.3Quantitative BS EN 1744-1:1998, Annex A.4

On each delivery to site.Each two weeks if result is more than 75%of the limit and each month if the result isless than 75% of the limit.

10. Acid soluble Sulphates, SO3: BS EN 1744-1:1998, Annex A.5

Each two weeks if result is more than 75%of the limit and each two months if theresult is less than 75% of the limit.

11. Soundness, Mg SO4 (5 cycles) : ASTM C88 Each two months.

12. Mechanical strength,10% fines or impact value : BS EN 1097-2 1998.Los Angeles abrasion : ASTM C131/C535.

Each three months.

Each three months.

13. Moisture variation in sand by moisture meters. Twice daily.




determined and checked regularly in accordance with the test method ASTM C128/C127 and to thefrequency recommended.

In case cylinders are used for determination of concrete compressive strength in accordance with ASTMC39, the corresponding cube strength shall be obtained by using a multiplication factor of 1:2. The termaggregate/cement ratio means the ratio by weight of aggregate to cement in the mix. For this purpose

the aggregate is taken in a saturated surface-dry condition as for the water/cement ratio above. The aircontent of air entrained concrete shall be expressed as a percentage by volume of concrete determinedby ASTM C231, "Air Content of freshly mixed concrete by the pressure method" at least one test for each500 m 3 of concrete shall be made or as directed by the Engineer. The slump of the freshly mixedconcrete shall be determined in accordance with BS EN 12350-2:2000 or ASTM C143. For each mix ofeach grade the equivalent slump measured by the core test shall be determined by trial mixes. Controlshall be maintained by measuring the slump at the point of placing.

To ascertain strength of concrete preliminary test cubes shall be taken from the trial mixes designed toselect the job mix and shall be made and tested in accordance with BS EN 12390-3:2002 . Works testcubes shall be those used for control during construction and shall be made and tested in accordancewith BS EN 12390-3:2002 The criteria and requirements given are intended to produce the required strength, durability and

workability which will enable the concrete to be properly compacted to its full depth and finished to thedimensions and within the tolerances shown on the drgs and required by the specification. Thewater/cement ratio shall not exceed the upper limits specified in Table 5 below for each type of concrete.

2.1 Prescribed Mix Concrete

Ordinary prescribed mixes will be as specified and in accordance with BS 8500-1:2002, BS 8500-2:2002and BS EN 206-1:2000 .

2.2 Designed Mix Concrete

(a) General

(i) All mixes shall be designed by the Contractor to produce concrete of the required strength and complyingwith the requirements of BS 8500-1&2:2002 & BS 8110:1997.

(ii) The grade of concrete is denoted by the number which indicates the characteristic compressive strengthof the concrete in N/mm 2 determined from cube tests at 28 days without accelerated curing, prefixed bytype of cement to be used in the mix. The grade designation is numerically equal to the characteristicstrength in N/sq. The grades are 7,10,15,20,25,30,40,50,60.

For reinforced concrete with dense aggregate, grades less than 20 shall not be used. Thecharacteristic strength is that determined from test cubes at 28 days.The grade of concrete specified would be as described on the structural drawings and the Bill ofQuantities.

The characteristic strength of concrete is defined as the crushing strength of concrete cubes at 28days below which not more than 5% of the test results may be expected to fall, when determined by astatistical analysis based on a normal distribution.

(b) Trial Mixes

(i) Laboratory tests shall be carried out to ascertain that mixes are will satisfy the specification with theavailable materials. Field trial mixes shall be prepared under full-scale site conditions and tested inaccordance with BS EN 12390-3:2002 .

(ii) Trial mixes shall be prepared for all concrete grades to be incorporated in the works before any structuralconcrete is placed.

(iii) Before any trial mixes are prepared the following information shall be submitted to the Engineer for

http://www.ihsti.com/CIS/BroSer.aspx?AuthCode=510AEF&Ser=BS+EN&Let=ABC


http://www.ihsti.com/CIS/BroSer.aspx?AuthCode=530608C&Ser=BS+EN&Let=ABC
















provisional approval:

b) The manufacturer and source of cement.c) The source of supply of fine aggregate.d) The source of supply of coarse aggregate.e) The source of supply of water.

f) The grading of the coarse and fine aggregate.g) The combined aggregate grading.h) The water/cement ratio and details of free water available.i) The aggregate/cement ratio.

j) The workability of the mix and the range in which it will be maintained.k) The details of any proposed additives.l) The type of measuring and mixing plant stating capacity.m) The 28 days designed compressive strength.

(iv) Each trial shall be carried out using the same materials, type of plant and equipment as will be used forthe works.

(v) Three separate trial mixes shall be prepared for each grade of concrete and six 150 mm preliminary test

cubes shall be made for each trial mix, two for testing 7 days after casting and four for testing after 28days.

(vi) The sampling, making, curing and testing of the preliminary test cubes shall be carried out in accordancewith the methods described in BS EN 12390. All specimens shall be labeled in accordance with therequirements of the Engineer.

(vii) The trial mix proportions shall be approved if the requirements of BS EN 8500:2002 are satisfied.

(viii) Trial mixes shall be tested to determine the extent of bleeding in accordance with ASTM C 232, dryingshrinkage in accordance with BS EN 12350 / BS EN 12390, air content if applicable, workability and freshand hardened concrete densities.

(ix) The trial mix proportions may be provisionally approved on the basis of the 7-day Design Strengthresults when the average strength of the six cubes is not less than the value given for trial mixes in BSEN 8500:2002. However, it remains the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the minimumspecified strength for each type of mix at 28 days will be achieved.

3.0 QUALITY CONTROL

3.1 General

In order to ensure that the quality of materials and mix portions are maintained throughout the concretingoperations, sampling and testing shall be carried out using the relevant procedures set out in BS EN 932,BS EN 12620:2002, BS EN 12350 and BS EN 12390 in accordance with a routine testing program, whichshall be agreed with the Engineer prior to the commencement of concrete work. Unless the Engineerotherwise directs, the program shall include at least the test specified in the following paragraphs. All testsshall be carried out by an approved independent laboratory.

3.2 Aggregates

Required routine tests on aggregate shall be as described earlier.

3.3 Concrete

(a) Sampling Rates

(i) Slump tests shall be carried out at the average rate of one test per 5m 3 of concrete mixed on site and onevery load of ready-mixed concrete delivered to site.The maximum permissible slump, measured at the point of placing of the concrete, shall be 75 mm forgeneral concrete work and 100 mm for pumped concrete. Any variation from these slumps necessitated




by the use of plasticisers and the like shall be approved by the Engineer. Any concrete with a slumpvarying from the design value by more than one third or 25 mm, whichever is greatest, shall be rejected.

(ii) Samples for works cube tests shall be taken at the average rate of one per 25 m 3 or part thereof ofconcrete of a particular grade placed, with a minimum of one sample taken every day that the mix isused. A sample consists of six cubes. Cubes shall be cured in water at 23 Deg.C +/- 2 Deg.C

(iii) Bleeding tests shall be carried out at a rate of one per 25 m 3 or part thereof.

(b) Works Cube Tests

(i) Samples shall be taken at the point of placing or from the delivery vehicle if ready-mixed concrete isbeing used. From each sample six 150 mm cubes shall be made, two for testing at 7 days aftercasting and four for testing at 28 days. All cubes shall be clearly marked with their identification andaccurate records shall be supplied to the Engineer giving:

a) Identification of test cubeb) Date and time of samplingc) Mix designationd) Location of sample batch after placinge) Method of compaction

f) Date of testingg) Results of test

(ii) Criteria of acceptance & rejection of concrete shall be as per BS EN 8500:2002 / BS EN 206-1:2000.

(iii) If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the concrete which has failed to meet the strength requirements of thisspecification is not likely to be capable of fulfilling its purpose in the structure, three cores shall be cutfrom the area represented by the test cubes. The actual location shall be decided by the Engineer. Thecost of cutting the cores and any resultant delay shall be borne by the Contractor regardless of whetherthe quality of the deposited concrete proves to be satisfactory or not. Where the average compressivestrength, found by testing the three cores taken from the structures and adjusted to the equivalent cubestrength at 28 days, is confirmed as below the strength requirements, then the Engineer may instruct thatfurther cores be cut in order to determine the full extent of the defective concrete and furtherinvestigations e.g. load test, etc. be carried out. Defective concrete shall be cut out and replaced oralternative remedial action shall be taken, as the Engineer directs, and the cost of such work and ofcutting the additional cores shall be borne by the Contractor.

(iv) The results obtained from the tests carried out on molded cubes at 28 days shall be the means ofensuring that the concrete meets the compressive strength requirements of the specification. Tests shallbe carried out at 7 days to establish a relationship between the 7 days and 28 days strengths. Therelationship shall be used to interpret further test results in order to predict the probable value of thecorresponding 28-day strengths. The Engineer shall be advised without delay should any sample appearlikely to fail to meet the specification so that necessary action can be taken to minimize the effect of suchfailure.

4.0 CONCRETE MIX SPECIFICATION

Concrete shall be as shown in Table 5 below. The number of mixes may require to be increased. Thecriteria given in the Table are designed to produce concrete of the required strength and durability. If themaximum aggregate size is 10 mm then the cement content stipulated for the class of concrete given inTable 5 shall be increased by 45 Kg. per cu.m.

Table 5 : Table of Concrete Mixes _______________________________________________________________________________Concrete Max. Size Min. Qty. Max. Free Water/ Characteristic Cube Class Aggregate of Cement Cement Ratio Strength, CCS

________________________________________________________________________________mm Kg. / m 3 7 day 28 day

N/mm 2 ________________________________________________________________________________45/20 20 400 0.425 33 45




40/20 20 370 0.475 30 4037/20 20 350 0.50 26 3735/20 20 330 0.525 25 3530/20 20 310 0.55 20 3025/20 20 275 0.60 16 2515/20 20 250 0.65 10 15

________________________________________________________________________________

The CCSs are for concrete which has been cured at a temperature of 20 oC +/- 1 oC and are the valuesbelow which no more than 5% of the test results fall. The 7-day strengths shall be used only as a guide.

Concrete shall comply with BS EN 1992-1.1:2004 except where BS 8007:1987 or this specificationdiffers. Sampling for test purposes shall comply with BS EN 12350-1:2000 (on site) and BS 1881-125:1996 (in laboratory). Concrete for water retaining shall be watertight and shall comply with therecommendations of BS 8007.

Concrete for paving or precast units shall be tested to BS EN 12390-5:2000 and shall have a minimumflexural beam strength of 3.5 N/mm 2 at 28 days. If the concrete has a specified CCS of 40 N/mm 2 orgreater than the minimum flexural strength shall be 4 N/mm 2.

If concrete specimens are cured at higher temperatures, or for longer periods than BS EN 12390-2:2000111 requires the adjusted CCS shall be calculated as follows :

100 f'/f = A + B log (24D (T+12)/1000).

f' = adjusted CCSf = specified CCST = curing temperatureD = age at testing in days

A&B = are coefficients given in the following table.

The above equation applies only to OPC, MSRPC and SRPc.

_________________________________________________________Recorded Cube Strength, N/mm 2 A B

_________________________________________________________

Less than 15 10 67.515 to 35 20 60.0Greater than 35 30 52.5

__________________________________________________________

This calculation may be applied for curing at temperatures up to 27 0 C.

Before placing concrete the Contractor shall obtain approval of the mixes proposed for each class ofconcrete and the average target strengths. The mixes shall be designed to achieve the minimumworkability for the Contractor to place and compact the concrete with the equipment proposed for use.

The mean strength shall exceed the CCS by a margin of 1.64 times the standard deviation expected fromthe concreting plant, except that no standard deviation less than 3.5 N/mm 2 shall be used as a basis fordesigning a mix. Unless otherwise approved a standard deviation of 7 N/mm 2 shall be used for initialmixes.

The ultimate compressive strength of the concrete shall be determined on test specimens obtained andprepared in accordance with BS EN 12390-1:2000.

Mixes for structural concrete shall be designed by the Contractor. The class of concrete is denoted by

the 28-day characteristic cube strength and the maximum size of aggregate.




The chloride and sulphate levels in the concrete mix shall comply with the following requirements :

Maximum Limits of Chloride and Sulphate content as a percentage of Weight of Cement in the Mix. ___________________________________________________________________Type of Concrete Chlorides as Cl Sulphates as SO3

According to BS 1881, Part 124

____________________________________________________________________

For reinforced concreteif made with OPC/MSRPC 0.30 3.70if made with SRPC 0.06 3.70

Prestressed concrete 0.10 3.70and heat curedreinforced concrete

For mass concreteif made with OPC/MSRPC 0.60 3.70if made with SRPC 0.12 3.70

_____________________________________________________________________

Note : The OPC and MSRPC cements can also contain chlorides, the relevant standard BS EN 197allows upto 0.1% Cl. Therefore any chloride content present in the cement has to be taken into accountwhile computing total Cl in the mix. In case the cement contains the maximum limit of 0.1% Cl, then theaggregates, water and admixtures used for Prestressed concrete or heat cured reinforced concreteshould be absolutely free of chlorides.

WORKABILITY OF CONCRETE: TABLE 7 _______________________________________________________________________________Degree of Workability 20 mm max. size 40 mm max. size

Aggregate Aggregate

____________________________________________________Slump, mm Compacting Slump, mm Compacting

Factor Factor _______________________________________________________________________________

Low 13-25 0.82-0.88 20-50 0.88-0.88

Medium 25-50 0.88-0.94 50-100 0.88-0.94

High 50-127 0.94-0.97 100-125 0.94-0.94 _______________________________________________________________________________

5.0 MIXING AND TRANSPORTATION

5.1 Mixing

(a) Mixing Concrete

(i) Concrete shall be batched by weight only. The weight of cement and each size of aggregate as indicatedby the mechanisms employed shall be within tolerance of +2% of the weights per batch agreed by theEngineer. The weight of the fine and coarse aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for the free watercontained in them. The water to be added to the mix shall be reduced by the quantity of free watercontained in the fine and coarse aggregates, which shall be determined by the Contractor by a methodapproved by the Engineer immediately before mixing, and further as the Engineer requires.

(ii) Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, concrete shall be mixed in a batch type mixer manufacturer inaccordance with BS 1305 or in a batch type mixer, a specimen of which has been tested in accordancewith the requirements of BS 3963 for the mix which corresponds most closely to the mix proportionsbeing used. The mixing blades of pan mixers shall be maintained within the tolerance specified by the




manufacturer and the blades shall be replaced when it is no longer possible to maintain the tolerances byadjustment.

(iii) The weighing and water-dispersing mechanisms shall be maintained in good order. The accuracy shallbe maintained within the tolerances described in BS 1305 and checked against accurate weights andvolumes when required by the Engineer.

(iv) Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before any

fresh concrete is mixed. Mixing plant shall be thoroughly cleaned before changing from one type ofcement to the other.(v) Under no circumstances shall different types of cement be used in same mixer.(vi) Mixers shall not be loaded in excess of the manufacturers rated capacity which shall be clearly

displayed on the mixer in terms of volume of concrete mixed.(vii) The materials shall be mixed until they are uniformly distributed and the mix is of uniform consistency and

color but in no case less than 2 minutes after all the materials have been added to the drum. The mixershall revolve at the speed recommended by the manufacturer.

(viii) On cessation of work including all stoppages exceeding 20 minutes, the mixers and all handling plantshall be washed with clean water. If old concrete deposits remain in the mixer drum, it shall be rotatedwith clean aggregate and water fed into the drum prior to production of new concrete.

(ix) Total CL from all constituents in the concrete mix shall not be greater than 0.3 and 0.7 by weight ofcement for mass concrete made with SRPC and OPC respectively and 0.10 and 0.30 by weight of

cement for reinforced concrete made with SRPC and OPC respectively. Total SO3 from all componentsin the hardened concrete shall not be greater than 4% by weight of cement.

(x) Sulphate resisting concrete is to contain sulphate-resisting cement with a minimum cement content of370 kg/m 3 and a maximum free water cement ratio of 0.45 by weight, irrespective of required strength ofconcrete.

(b) Ready Mixed Concrete

(i) Ready mixed concrete, as defined in BS 8000-2.1:1990, from a central batching plant may be used in theworks upon the agreement of the Engineer. The quality and strength of cement shall be determined bythe Site and Lab tests conducted under the supervision of the Engineer. No test results supplied by theready mix manufacturer shall be accepted as proof of quality and strength of concrete. Prior to thedelivery of any concrete to the site details of the proposed supplier shall be submitted to the Engineer for

approval. Arrangements shall be made for the Engineer to inspect the plant if so required and to be present duringthe preparation of trial mixes. The source of ready-mixed concrete shall not subsequently be changedwithout the further approval of the Engineer.

(ii) The requirements of this specification in respect of materials, testing, storage, batching and mixing shallapply equally to the central batching plant. The concrete shall comply in all respects with the provisionsof BS 8500:2002.

(iii) Work test cubes shall be taken on site at the specified rate irrespective of any cubes which may havebeen taken by the supplier.

(iv) Mixer trucks shall provide a minimum of 100 rotations at a rate of not less than 7 revolutions per minute toensure thorough mixing. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer truck mixer units and their mixing anddischarge performance shall comply with the requirements of BS 8500:2002.

(v) Extra water shall only be added at the site with the specific approval of the Engineer and in the event ofsuch an addition, works tests cubes shall be taken to check that the minimum strength requirements havebeen achieved.

(vi) Copies of all delivery notes shall be submitted to the Engineer and shall include the following information:

a) Name of supplier, serial number of ticket and dateb) Truck numberc) Name of Contractord) Name of Contact and location of sitee) Grade of concretef) Specified workabilityg) Type and source of cementh) Source of aggregatei) Nominal maximum size of aggregate

j) Time of loading at suppliers‘ works k) Time of loading at supplier‘s works




l) Quantity of concretem) Arrival and departure times of trucksn) Time of completion of dischargeo) Extra water added with the approval of the Engineer.

5.2 Transportation

(i) The concrete shall be transported to the site in an approved type of truck mixer or agitator truck such thatthe materials do not segregate. The discharge chute and other dirty areas shall be washed down afterdelivery to prevent spillage on the roads.

(ii) The maximum time between the addition of cement to the mixer or agitator truck and the discharge ofconcrete shall be one hour, regardless of whether retarders have previously demonstrated to theEngineer that concrete can be transported successfully for longer periods and received the Engineer'swritten approval.

6.0 PLACING, COMPACTING AND CURING

6.1 Placing Concrete

(a) Engineer's Approval

The Engineer shall receive a minimum of 24 hours‘ notice of the Cont ractor's intention to place concreteand the Engineer's approval shall be obtained before concrete is placed in any part of the works. Ifconcreting has not started within 24 hours of approval being given, approval shall be obtained. In theevent of failure to receive the Engineer's approval the notice and approval procedure shall be repeated asabove.

(b) Temperature Conditions

(i) Concrete when deposited shall have a temperature of not more than 32 Deg.C and the form work andreinforcement shall be at a temperature low enough to prevent the flash setting of the concrete.

(ii) No concrete shall be mixed or placed while the temperature is above 40 Deg.C on a rising thermometeror above 43 Deg.C on a falling thermometer. The day's concreting shall be planned in such a manner asto ensure that each bay or panel is completed at an approved construction joint before the temperaturerises above the permissible limit.

(c) Placing Generally

(i) The concrete shall be compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of discharge from the mixer unlesscarried in purpose made agitators, operating continuously, when the time shall be within one hour of theintroduction of cement to the mix and within 30 minutes of discharge from the agitator.

(ii) Concreting shall be carried out continuously and fresh concrete shall not be placed against in-situconcrete which has been in position for more than 30 minutes unless a construction joint is formed. When

in-situ concrete has been in place for 4 hours no further concrete shall be placed against it for 24 hours.(iii) Concrete shall be placed gently in position to avoid segregation and care must be taken to ensure thatreinforcement, water bars or any other embedded items are completely surrounded by concrete andvoids or cavities are present in the body of the concrete. Concrete shall be placed as near as possible toits final position and not moved by the use of internal vibrators, to ensure that no reinforcement, formworkor embedded items are disturbed under any circumstances, especially after the initial set of the concrete.

(iv) Concrete shall in no circumstances be placed in standing or flowing water except with the priorapproval of the Engineer, and utilizing purpose design equipment and methods e.g. tremie pipes,hydrovalve etc.

(v) Generally concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to a compacted depth not exceeding 300 mmand each layer shall be well consolidated before the subsequent layer is placed. In the case of columnsand walls the compacted depth may be increased to a maximum of 450 mm.

(vi) Concrete shall not be dropped into place from a height exceeding 2 meter and shall not be pumped or

discharged through aluminum alloy.(vii) When trunking or chutes are used they shall be cleaned before and after each pour.




(d) Pumped Concrete

Concrete may only be transported by pumping if the following information is submitted to the Engineer forprior approval:

a) Details of mix design.b) Details of pumping equipment including distribution pipe layouts for static pumps.

c) Area and volume of concrete to be placed in one operation.d) Distance and height over which concrete is to be pumped.e) Details of standby equipment.

6.2 Compacting Concrete

(a) Equipment

(i) Immersion type vibrators shall have a frequency of not less than 10,000 oscillations unless otherwiseagreed by the Engineer.

(ii) External vibrators shall be of a type approved by the Engineer and shall operate at not less than 85 Hz.(iii) Surface vibrators shall be of double beam type to the approval of the Engineer, used in conjunction with

immersion vibrators to ensure full compaction across the entire width of the section.

(iv) Vibrating roller compactors for dry lean and rolled concrete shall be to the Engineer's approval. Thenumber of passes required shall be determined by trials to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

(v) Sufficient standby equipment shall be retained on site during concreting operations to ensure thatsuitable equipment is always available in the event of breakdowns.

(vi) Compaction equipment shall only be operated by workmen trained in the use of the particularmachinery.

(b) Workmanship

(i) Compaction shall commence as soon as there is sufficient concrete within the formwork to immerse thevibrator, when poker vibrators are used, or as soon as the maximum depth of uncompacted concrete hasbeen achieved when using external vibration. Compaction shall continue during the placing operation sothat at no time shall there be a large volume of uncompacted concrete within the formwork.

(ii) Concrete shall not be moved across the surface of the forms by means of internal vibration.(iii) Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration or other means during placing, and worked around

reinforcement, tendons or duct formers, water bars or other embedded items and into corners offormwork to provide a solid void-free mass having the required surface finish. Vibration shall be appliedcontinuously during the placing until the expulsion of air has practically ceased and in a manner that doesnot promote segregation. Over vibrating shall be avoided to minimize the formation of a weak surfacelayer.

(iv) For poker type vibrators the tubular part of the tool shall be immersed vertically into the full depth of theconcrete to be vibrated, at points spaced to suit the radius of action of the vibrator and workability of theconcrete but not exceeding 500 mm centers. Where the underlying layer is also fresh concrete thevibrator shall also penetrate that layer by 100 mm to ensure that the surfaces knit together.

(v) Vibrators shall not be allowed to touch reinforcement or other embedded items and shall not be permittedto touch the form face to avoid damage to the formwork (poker burns).

(vi) Where external vibrators are used, the design of formwork and the disposition of vibrators shall be suchas to ensure efficient compaction and to avoid surface blemishes.

(vii) Additional vibration may be required after initial compaction to obviate the effects of minor surfacesettlement, causing plastic settlement cracks at reinforcement locations and changes to concrete section. (viii)If and when the formwork is stripped, the surface is found to be honeycombed, the Engineer maygive instructions for the whole or part of the work to be removed and replaced at the expense of theContractor.

6.3 Curing

(a) General

(i) Curing and protection shall start immediately after compaction of the concrete. Concrete surfaces shallbe cured for a minimum of 7 days by a method approved by the Engineer. Formed surfaces shall besimilarly protected and cured if formwork is removed before 7 days have elapsed.




(b) Curing Methods

(i) The method of curing treatment adopted shall ensure that sufficient moisture is present to complete thehydration of the cement. It shall not:

a) Disfigure permanently exposed surfacesb) Affect the bonding of subsequent coatingsc) Increase the concrete temperature

(ii) Hessian or other absorbent material shall be kept wet for the duration of the curing period. Anadequate supply of fresh salt-free water shall be kept on site for this purpose. The Engineer may insistthat Hessian be overlaid with polythene sheet to assist water retention during rapid drying weatherconditions.

(iii) Curing compounds shall be to the Engineers approval. Curing membranes shall have a minimumefficiency factor of 90% when tested in accordance with Clause 2709 of the Department of TransportSpecification for Road and Bridge Works. Compounds shall be white pigmented or aluminized and shallbe degradable to avoid affecting the final surface finish of concrete.

7.0 REINFORCEMENT

7.1 Materials

(a) Standards

(i) Hot rolled mild steel bars and hot rolled high yield bars shall comply with the requirements of BS4449:2005+A2:2009, latest edition.

(ii) Steel fabric reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of BS 4483:2005, latest edition or anyequivalent standard. Steel shall be fusion-bonded epoxy coated if so required by the particularspecification or denoted elsewhere in the contract documents.

(iii) Hard drawn mild steel wire shall comply with the requirements of BS 4482:2005.(iv) Tying wire shall be either:

a) 1.6 mm diameter soft annealed iron wireb) 1.2 mm diameter stainless steel wire

(v) Reinforcement yield stress fy shall be 460 N/mm2.

(b) Epoxy Coated Reinforcement

(i) Where specified on drawings reinforcing bars, fabric and special steel connections shall be protectedagainst corrosion with a fusion-bonded epoxy coating applied in accordance with the latest edition of

ASTM A775 Standard and shall be supplied from an approved coating factory using approved epoxyresins. All cutting and bending procedures shall be to the coating factory's recommendations andinstructions, as agreed with the Engineer. The coating factory representative shall be required to attend

the site at regular intervals to inspect all aspects of the work to ensure his product is used fully inaccordance with his recommendations. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a copy of certificateof compliance for each shipment of coated bars. The certificate of compliance shall state thatrepresentative samples of the coated bars have been tested and the test results comply with therequirements herein specified. Copies of test results shall be retained by the coating factory for sevenyears and originals shall be forwarded to the Engineer upon completion of the works.

(ii) When the epoxy coating is damaged, (cut ends, accidental damage, etc.) the coating shall be repairedwith patching material conforming to the latest edition of ASTM A775 and shall be carried out inaccordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The repair to the damaged area shall be carriedout as soon as possible and before oxidation of the surface occurs. In no case shall the repair be delayedmore than 8 hours. Any trace of rust or oxidation must be removed by grinder or wire brush prior to touch-up.

(iii) All reinforcement shall be bent cold unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Bar bending equipment

shall have padded supports and contact areas and shall be fitted with nylon or plastic mandrels suppliedby, or approved by the coating factory representative.(iv) Reinforcement of all types shall be stored on site in protected racks above ground in an approved manner




so as to avoid damage to the coating. Direct metal to coating contact should be avoided whereverpossible.Equipment for handling epoxy-coated bars shall have padded contact areas. Bundles shall be lifted witha strong back or have multiple support to prevent bar-to-bar abrasion from sags in the bundle. Bars orbundles shall not be dragged or dropped. Any coating damage due to handling, shipment and placingshall be repaired as described above. All chairs, tie-wires or other devices used to connect, support,

secure or fasten epoxy coated reinforcement shall be made of, or coated with, a dialetric material such asnylon, epoxy or plastic. All bundles shall be identified at the factory with durable tags to allow checking ofcoating quality control at site. Reinforcement shall not be straightened or re-bent in a manner which maycause injury to the material. Bars with shapes not shown on the drawings shall not be used. TheContractor shall provide adequate scaffold boards or similar to ensure that the coating is not damagedduring fixing and the reinforcement is not displaced by being walked upon during the placing of theconcrete or other operations. Prior to concreting the Contractor shall ensure that the reinforcement iscleaned of all concrete from previous pours and any damage to the coating is repaired.The insertion of bars into or removal of bars from concrete already placed will not be permitted.Reinforcement temporarily left projecting from concrete at joints shall not be bent without the priorapproval of the Engineer. Secondary reinforced concrete members for which no reinforcement detailshave been given, shall have a min. ratio of reinforcement to concrete of 0.5 %.

(c) Testing of Reinforcing Bars

(i) A copy of the manufacturers test certificate for ultimate strength, elongation and bend tests together withthe chemical analysis of the steel shall be submitted to the Engineer for each consignment ofreinforcement steel delivered to site.

(ii) Sampling and testing of reinforcement shall be in accordance with BS 4449:2005+A2:2009 in all respectsand batches shall be rejected if the average results from each batch are not in accordance with thespecification.

(iii) The samples shall be adequate for the test to be carried out, shall be representative specimens of thesteel being used in the works and shall have mill identification marks along the test length. If identificationmarks are not rolled into the steel, the source of supply shall be submitted at the time of submission of thesamples.

(iv) Tests for epoxy coating to bars shall be carried out to the latest edition of ASTM A775 at the following

frequencies:

a) Coating thickness - minimum of two bars from each size coated from each production shift, but notless than two bars for every:

- 5 tons of reinforcement of diameter less than 20 mm- 10 tons of reinforcement of diameter 20 mm or greater

b) Bend tests - same rate as for coating thickness.c) Impact test - certification for each individual batch of powder.d) Abrasion test - certificate to be as for impact test.e) Chemical resistance - each batch to be certified.f) Cathodic despondency - each batch to be certified.

(d) Surface Condition

(i) Reinforcement shall not be surrounded by concrete unless it is free from mud, oil, paint, retarders, looserust or mill scale, grease or any other substance which may adversely affect the steel or concretechemically or reduce the bond.

(ii) The Engineer may instruct the cleaning of any reinforcement which has remained exposed on site forlong periods, resulting in a high concentration of chlorides on the surface.

7.2 Cutting, Bending and Fixing of Reinforcement

(a) Cutting and Bending

(i) Reinforcement shall be cut and bent to the shape and dimensions shown in the Contract documentationor to schedules approved by the Engineer in accordance with the requirements and tolerances of BS8666:2005.

(ii) Reinforcement shall not be heated before bending. Hot rolled high yield bars shall not be straightened or




bent again once having been shaped, except with the approval of the Engineer.(iii) Mild steel bars projecting from concrete may be bent provided that the bend radius complies with the

requirements of BS 8666:2005. High yield bars, partially embedded may only be rebent with the approvalof the Engineer and with a minimum bend radius in compliance with BS 8666:2005.

(b) Fixing Reinforcement

(i) The number, size, form and disposition of bars shall be strictly in accordance with the /drawings andbending schedules or as directed by the Engineer.Reinforcement shall be checked after fixing and no concrete shall be placed around the reinforcementwithout the written approval of the Engineer.

(ii) All reinforcement shall be fixed rigidly in position. At intersections the bars shall be bound together withtying wire and loose ends of the wire shall be turned towards the inside of the member.The position of reinforcement should be checked before and during concreting, particular attention beingpaid to the position of top reinforcement in cantilever sections.The Contractor shall provide adequate scaffold boards or similar to ensure that the reinforcement is notdisplaced by being walked on during the placing of the concrete or other operations.

(iii) Spacers, chairs and other supports detailed on drawings, together with such other supports as may benecessary shall be used to maintain the specified position of steel reinforcement. Spacers or chairs shall

be placed at a maximum spacing of 1 m in each direction and at a closer spacing if required.(iv) Unless otherwise specified on drawings:

a) The actual concrete cover shall be not less than the required cover minus 5mm.b) Where reinforcement is located in relation to one face of a member only the actual concrete cover

shall not exceed the nominal cover plus :- 5 mm on bars up to and including 12 mm in size- 10 mm on bars over 12 mm up to and including 25 mm size- 15 mm on bars over 25 mm size

(v) Spacers shall be of such material and design as will be durable, not lead to corrosion of the reinforcementand not cause spacing of the concrete cover. Spacer blocks shall not be used where the concrete facewill be visible in the finished work unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

(vi) Concrete spacer blocks shall not exceed 50 mm square. The mix used for spacer blocks shall becomparable in strength, durability, porosity and appearance to the surrounding concrete. The maximumnominal aggregate size shall not exceed 10mm.

(vii) During concreting operations, a competent steel fixer shall be in attendance to ensure that thereinforcement is maintained in position as placing and compaction proceeds.

(c) Laps and Joints

(i) Laps and joints shall be made only by the method specified and at the positions shown on the drawingsor as agreed by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified minimum laps as defined in BS EN 1992-1-1:2004.

(ii) Welding may only be permitted for bars having the required welding properties ("weldable" and "readilyweldable" reinforcement as defined in BS 4449:2005+A2:2009 or equivalent). The competence of theoperators shall be demonstrated prior to, and periodically during, welding operations. All welding shall bein accordance with the relevant British Standard and the recommendations of the reinforcementmanufacturer. For structural welds involving transfer of load between bars, tensile testing of samples ofeach size of bar shall be carried out at an approved independent laboratory prior to any welded jointsbeing formed on site.When required length of run of weld exceeds five bar diameters, the weld shall be divided into sectionswith a space between runs of not less than five bar diameters. The locations of all welded joints should beapproved by the Engineer.

(iii) Couplers shall be purpose made fittings to the approval of the Engineer, fixed strictly in accordance withthe manufacturers‘ recommendations.

(iv) Tensile testing of joints for each size of bar to be used shall be carried out at an approved independenttesting laboratory prior to any such joint being formed on site.

(v) Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings steel fabric shall be lapped at least 300 mm at the ends andsides for square meshes.

(vi) For the cross wires of longitudinal mesh fabric, and for the short way of expanded metal fabric, 150 mm




lap is required but for the longitudinal wires of wire fabric and for the long way of expanded metal fabricthe lap shall be at least 300 mm for fabric weighing less than 4 kg/sq., 450 mm for weights between 4 and8 kg/sq. and 600 mm for heavier fabric.

8.0 FORMWORK & FINISHES

8.1 Surface Finishes

(a) Unformed Surfaces

(i) Unformed surfaces shall receive one of the following as specified on drawings.

Class U1 The concrete shall be uniformly leveled and tamped.Class U2 When the concrete has hardened sufficiently the Class U1 finish shall be wood

floated to give uniform surface, free from tamping marks.

Class U3 When the moisture film has disappeared and the concrete has hardenedsufficiently to prevent laitence being worked to the surfaces, the Class U1 finishshall be steel trowelled by hand or machine to produce a dense, smooth uniformsurface, free from trowel marks.

(ii) The concrete surface shall not be wetted to assist the production of the surface finish.(iii) Concrete surfaces to receive thin tile or sheet finishing shall be free from any defects which would

adversely affect the appearance of the applied finish.

(b) Formed Surfaces

Formed surfaces shall receive one of the following specified finishes unless otherwise specified ondrawings.

Class F1 Irregularities in the finish shall be no greater than those obtained from the use of properlydesigned grout tight forms of timber, plywood, plastics, concrete or steel. Smallblemishes caused by entrapped air or moisture will be permitted, but the surface shall befree from voids, honeycombing or large blemishes.

Class F2 The finish shall be smooth and have uniform texture and appearance and shall beobtained by the use of properly designed forms of closely jointed material having a hardsmooth surface. The particular material shall be used consistently throughout thestructure. Any imperfections shall be made good as directed by the Engineer.

Class F3 The finish shall be Class F2, with formwork designed to achieve a surface finish givingvariation not exceeding 3 mm under a 3 m straight edge.

(c) Remedial Work

(i) Concrete exposed by the removal of formwork shall be inspected by the Engineer before any remedialwork, subsequent treatment or any other treatment which would hinder the proper inspection of theconcrete, is carried out. Any concrete, the surface of which has been treated prior to inspection by theEngineer shall be liable for rejection.

(ii) Concrete which in the opinion of the Engineer is defective or which is not true to an acceptable line orlevel shall be cut out and rebuilt without delay, unless the Engineer agrees that a repair may besatisfactorily effected. Such agreement shall not preclude the subsequent rejection of the repaired work.

(iii) Making good ("bagging up") of Class F2 or F3 surfaces shall be carried out within 24 hours of removal offormwork.

(iv) Shutter tie holes shall be filled with an approved non-shrink mix of equivalent strength to that of the parentmaterial.




8.2 Formwork

(a) Formwork Design

(i) The design of formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor not withstanding any approval whichmay be given by the Engineer.Forms shall be of such quality and strength that throughout the placing, compaction, vibration and settingof the concrete the designed and constructed formwork maintains rigidly, position and level within theallowable tolerances. If timber forms are used they should of sound, well-seasoned timber and free fromall loose knot.

(ii) Formwork shall be so designed and constructed so that the finished concrete is to the shape, size,position and finish shown on the drawings and to meet the following basic requirements.

a) To safely support all loads that might be applied until concrete has hardened sufficiently to supportsuch loads itself.

b) To be sufficiently watertight to prevent loss of liquid.c) To fit lightly against previous concrete work to prevent lapping, loss of liquid or grout.

d) To be capable of being cleaned out immediately prior to concreting with temporary access holesprovided as necessary.

e) To permit removal of side forms without disturbing the soffit formwork.f) The positioning of props to be such as not to overstress any part of the completed structure.

(iii) Unless otherwise shown on the drawings formwork to all slabs and beams shall be constructed withthe following upward camber :Beams and slabs spanning between supports : 7 mm at midspan for each 5 m span.Cantilever beams and slabs : 12 mm at free end for each 3 m span.

(iv) Where specified triangular fillets shall be fixed in the forms to provide a chamfer to all external angles inthe finished work.Where internal ties are used they or their removable parts shall be capable of being extracted withoutdamage to the concrete or its surface finish. No permanently embedded metal part shall have less than

the cover specified for reinforcement.(v) Formwork shall be provided to the top faces of sloping work where the slope exceeds 15 Deg. from the

horizontal.(vi) Falsework shall be adequate to safely transfer all loads to a safe bearing level. If required by the Engineer

calculations to demonstrate the adequacy of Falsework shall be forwarded for approval.Concrete shall not be placed until the relevant form work has been inspected and approved by theEngineer through this shall not relieve the Contractor from the requirements as to soundness, finish andaccuracy specified.

(b) Preparation of Formwork Prior to Concreting

(i) Before concrete is placed the forms shall be thoroughly cleaned.

(ii) The inside surfaces of all formwork, except permanent pre-treated and lined formwork shall be sparinglycoated with an approved release agent to prevent adhesion to the concrete. Special care shall be takento keep reinforcement and any hardened concrete against which new concrete is to be placed free fromthe release agent.

(iii) The release agent shall be an approved material, marketed as such and shall be one of the followingtypes) Cream emulsion.

a) Neat oil with surfactant addedb) Chemical release agent

The release agent shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations andshall not at any time be diluted by the addition of water or any other material.

(iv) The same type and make of release agent shall be used on all formwork to concrete which will be visiblein the finished work.

(v) No openings, chases, holes or other voids shall be formed in the concrete without the prior approval of

the Engineer. All joints in formwork shall be close fitting to prevent bleeding of cement paste from theconcrete. All permanent fixings, conduits, pipes, etc. and formwork to all holes and openings shall be securely and




accurately fixed in their correct position before the concrete is placed. No fixings shall be made in thestructural concrete without written permission, and they shall comply with the requirements of theEngineer.The Contractor shall obtain from each sub-contractor complete details of the latter are requirements forholes and fixings which shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

(c) Removal of Formwork

(i) Removal of formwork shall comply with BS EN 1992-1.1:2004.(ii) The Engineer shall be notified when the Contractor intends to remove any formwork.(iii) The minimum periods between concreting and removal of formwork are shown below, however,

compliance with the requirements shown shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to maintainforms and props in position until the new construction is sufficiently strong to support its own weight andany incidental additional loads without damage.

_________________________________________________________________Ordinary Portland Cement Rapid Hardening Portland

Concrete Cement Concrete __________________________________________________________________Slab, props left under 6 days 3 days

Beam Soffits 10 days 5 daysProps to Slabs 10 days 5 daysProps to Beams 16 days 8 daysVertical surfaces such aswalls, columns and sides ofbeams 1 day 1 day

__________________________________________________________________

The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the concrete work caused by or arising from theremoval and striking of the forms and supports. The Engineer's approval shall not relieve the Contractorfrom his responsibility towards the stability and safety of the shuttering and the relevant structure. Anywork showing signs of damage through premature or excess loading is to be entirely re-constructed at theContractor's expense. After removal, the Contractor shall not undertake or start any repair work without

the Engineer's inspection and approval.

(iv) Where props are to be left in place, the soffit forms may only be removed if the design of the formworkallows such a sequence of operations without the props being in any way disturbed.

(d) Early Loading

(i) Concrete shall not be subjected to loading, including its own weight, which will induce a compressivestress in it exceeding 0.33 of its compressive strength at the time of loading, or of the specified 28 daystrength whichever is the lesser.

(ii) The assessment of the strength of the concrete and the stress produced by the loads shall be subject toagreement of the Engineer.

(e) Tolerances

(i) Permissible deviations from the dimensions and levels indicated in the Contract Documentation for in-situconcrete are given in Table 7.2.5.1.

(ii) The tolerances specified are for general use only and shall not apply where :

a) A greater accuracy is necessary to enable plant or components to be incorporated to fulfill theirintended purpose, or for subsequently applied coverings to comply with specification.

b) The specified cover to the reinforcement is not maintained.c) The requirements for surface finishes Class U2, U3, F2 and F3 necessitate closer tolerances.d) Tolerances are specified on the Drawings.




9.0 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS

9.1 Construction Joints

(a) Location

(i) The number of construction joints shall be kept to the minimum necessary for the execution of thework. The location of joints shall be agreed by the Engineer before concreting is commenced.

(ii) Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer construction joints shall be at right angles to the generaldirection of the member.

(b) Preparation of Joints

(i) In horizontal or inclined members the joint shall be formed by the insertion of rigid stopping-off forms. Theforms shall be split along the lines of the reinforcement passing through them so that each portion can bepositioned and removed separately without disturbance or shock to the reinforcement or concrete.

(ii) Stop ends made of expanded metal lath or similar material may only be left permanently in the concretewith the approval of the Engineer. Where such stop ends are used no metal may be left permanently inthe concrete closer to the surface of the concrete than the minimum specified cover to the reinforcement.

(iii) In vertical members the upper surface of the concrete lift shall be horizontal and the external face of the joint shall be neatly formed by means of a timber edging fixed to the formwork.

(iv) All contact surfaces of the existing concrete in the construction joint, except within 25 mm of permanentlyexposed faces, shall be treated to remove laitence together with any porous areas below the laitence toexpose the aggregate.

(v) The treatment shall preferably consist of using a wire brush and water spray as soon as the concrete hashardened sufficiently. If the surface is too hard for this to be effective, the surface shall be roughened bysand blasting or the use of a scaling hammer or other mechanical device. Particular care shall be takennot to disturb any of the remaining materials.

(vi) Before fresh concrete is placed against the joint the surface shall be cleaned of all loose materials andwashed with water. All free water shall be removed immediately before placing the fresh concrete, whichshall be well compacted against the joint.

9.2 Movements Joints

(a) Joint Filler Material

Joint filler board shall be one of the following, as specified on the drawings:i) Pre-formed bitumen impregnated fiber joint filler board, non-extruding in compliance with Ministry of

Transport Specification for Roads and Bridges, Clause 2630.ii) Bitumen bound cork with asphalt paper encasement, non-extruding in compliance with Ministry of

Transport Specification for Roads and Bridges, Clause 2630.iii) Cellular non-absorbent pre-formed low-density joint filler. All materials to be installed in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendation.

(b) Slip Membranes

(i) Slip membranes shall be preformed plastic sheet, the mating surfaces of which will give a coefficient offriction not exceeding 0.2 when subjected to a load of 270 kN/m 2.

(ii) Slip membranes shall be fitted strictly in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.

(c) PTFE Bearing

PTFE bearings shall be to the approval of the Engineer. Bearings shall consist of a lower PTFE coatedreinforced elastomeric stationery pad of minimum 2 mm thickness and an upper PTFE coated reinforcedneoprene sliding load bearing pad, with expanded polystyrene surround. Dimensions shall be determinedto the approval of the Engineer, based on loading indicated on the drawings.

(d) Sealant

(i) Horizontal sealant to be cold poured polysulphide rubber to BS EN ISO 11600:2003.(ii) Vertical sealant shall be cold applied polysulphide rubber in compliance with BS EN ISO 11600:2003.




13.0 PRECAST HOLLOW CONCRETE BLOCKS (HOURDIS) For Ribbed Slabs

Aggregate shall be so sized, graded, proportioned and thoroughly mixed in a batch mixes with suchproportions of cement and clean water as to produce a homogenous concrete mixture. However, in nocase shall the proportion of cement in the mixture be less than five ( 5 ) standard bags (each weighing 50kgs.) per cubic meter of concrete.

Pre-cast hollow concrete blocks (hourdis) for ribbed slabs shall be manufactured in approved vibratingmachines. If for any reason the strength requirement is not achieved, the cement shall be increased atthe Contractor‘s own expense. The blocks shall be cured for twelve (12) consecutive days and shall beat least twenty one (21) days old before incorporation in the works. The blocks shall be of an approvedpattern capable of withstanding a compressive pressure applied at the ends of 50 kgs / cm2 based on thegross cross sectional area of the block obtained without deducting voids.

The blocks shall be hard, sound, durable, sharp, clean with well-defined arises, free from cracks andflaws or other defects and of the dimensions shown on the Structural Drawings. The blocks shall beobtained from an approved local factory.

Pre-Cast hollow concrete blocks (hourdis) shall be laid exactly in line with the cells on the long

dimensions. Close edged blocks shall be used at the end; the dimensions of the ribs and size ofreinforcing bars shall be exactly according to the Structural Drawings. In narrow widths specially madehalf blocks shall be used and full blocks shall not be used along their length (with the cells along the longdimension of the rib).

The blocks are to be laid on adequate forms. All blocks shall be well cleaned and thoroughly wetted withclean water before the concrete is poured and laborers shall not be allowed to walk on them. Any blockfound to be defective or damaged during concreting operations shall be removed and replaced beforepouring the concrete, all at the Contractor‘s expense.

14.0 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

14.1 GENERAL

This specification cover the manufacturer, supply of prestressed concrete members, pre-stressingsteel, pre-stressing components, pre-stressing equipment and plant and post tensioning requirementsof prestressed concrete.

14.2 STANDARD AND DESIGN GUIDES

This specification cover the manufacturer, supply of prestressed concrete members, pre-stressingsteel, pre-stressing components, pre-stressing equipment and plant and post tensioning requirementsof prestressed concrete.

i) Materials and construction shall be in accordance with BS 8110-1:1997 Section 8 and Annex A. incase of conflict BS EN 1992-1.1:2004 takes precedence over BS 8110 and Structural DesignEngineer approval need to be taken before proceeding with any deviation.

ii) Reference should also be made to concrete society Technical Reports 43 post-tensioned concretefloors – design handbook (1994) and 47 Durable bonded post-tensioned concrete bridges (1996).

14.3 DESIGN

14.3.1 Qualifications

The design of prestressed concrete elements of the work is to be carried out by a firm specialized inthe design of such works. The contractor is to submit to the consultant for approval prequalificationdocuments in respect of the proposed specialist.




The contractor shall follow the guide lines contained in the latest editions of the codes, specificationsand standards listed above and other relevant standards and codes, except where more stringentrequirements are shown or specified.

Plant and field inspection and testing of concrete and all ingredients there in, and reinforcement, pre-stressing components and equipment shall be performed by an independent laboratory approved by

the Engineer at the Contractors expense. Materials and installed work may require testing and re-testing as directed by the Engineer, at any time during the progress of the work which shall be carriedout by the Contractor at his own expenses.

The Contractor shall provide free access to visit and inspect the materials, stockpiles and facilities,proposed works, plants and sources of materials by the Engineer.

All tests including re-testing of rejected materials and work shall be done at the Contractors expense.

14.3.2 Design Standards

The design is to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 1992-1.1:2004 or AS.3600, as approved by the Consultant.

14.3.3 Design Criteria

i) The design criteria (dimensions, loadings & other pertinent data) are shown on the drawings.

ii) Deviations from these design criteria will be permitted only with the prior approval of the consultant.

iii) The Contractor may submit to the Consultant for approval an alternative structural.

14.3.4 Submissions

i) The Contractor is to submit to the Consultant for approval general arrangement, reinforcement anddetail drawings, together with design calculations, at least four weeks before construction is due to

start on site,

ii) Two sets of drawings and calculations are to be submitted for Acceptance by the consultant, five setsof drawings for construction purposes.

14.4 TYPE OF SYSTEM & METHOD STATEMENT

The contractor shall submit to the Consultant for agreement all details of the prestressing system asappropriate before construction and a detailed statement on proposed methods, sequences andtiming of operations. Details to be submitted shall include but not be limited to the following:

Tendons Sheathing or Ducting Anchorages Any anti-corrosive or Friction-reducing compounds for unbounded systems Drainage and bleed details for grouted tendons Methods of installation Supports Stressing Grout mix and method of grouting including vent location Corrosion protection details Fire resistance

14.5 GUARANTEE / WARRANTEE

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a written warrantee stating that all Works have beencarried out in accordance with the drawings and specifications and the approved design and will be




free from defects material and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from the date of issuance ofthe substantial completion certificate and shall be covered by an appropriate performance indemnityinsurance cover. The contractor shall agree to repair (including any replacement of materials)resulting from defective materials or workmanship during the warrantee period at no additional cost tothe Employer.

The Contractor shall also pass on to the Employer any and all warrantees provided by the SpecialistSub-Contractor and manufacturers of individual members of the system.

The Contractor shall also provide a minimum 25 years design life warrantee.

14.6 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

14.6.1 Prestressing Tendons

i) Prestressing tendons shall confirm to:

BS 4486:1980 – hot rolled bars

BS 5896:1980 – stress relieved seven wire strand or equivalent to the approval of the Consultant

ii) Before delivery to site, Manufacturer‘s certificates shall be submitted to the Consultant as evidence ofcompliance with the relevant standards.

iii) Low relaxation and normal relaxation wire and presstressing strand shall be supplied in coils ofsufficiently large diameter to ensure that the physical properties will be retained and that the wire orstrand will pay off reasonable straight from the coils.

iv) Tendons shall be delivered to the site properly protected from inclement weather conditions.

v) Manufacturer‘s test certificates for each coil and strand or wire and each type of bar supplied to siteshall be submitted to the Consultant before installation. Each certificate shall contain the information

required by BS 4486:1980 or BS5896:1980. Each coil of wire or bar shall clearly marked foridentification against the certificate.

vi) Coatings for unbonded tendons shall be a calcium grease, manufactured from highly refinednapthenic mineral oil and be free from harmful impurities such as chlorides, sulphides or nitratesexcept in harmless traces. It shall be applied at pressure to ensure penetration of the interstitialspaces between the individual wires of the strand. A manufacturer‘s product certificate shall besupplied by the contractor.

The sheathing shall comprise black HDPE applied to the greased strand in factory condition as part ofa continuously monitored process. The use of PVC sheathing is not permitted.

14.6.2 Un-tensioned reinforcement

Un-tensioned reinforcement shall comply with BS 4449:2005. Grade 250 & 460 B

14.6.3 Sheaths (Ducts for Tendons)

i) Sheaths shall be formed of material that will not react adversely chemically with concrete, grease orsteel.

ii) Cable ducts shall be manufactured from spirally wound corrugated or smooth galvanized steel strip.

iii) Other materials for ducts may be used with the approval of the Consultant.

14.6.4 Anchorges

Anchorages shall comply with BS 4447 and BS EN 1992-1.1:2004 to appropriate section in Clauses




8.7.4.1 or 8.7.5.2. The Contractor shall provide the Consultant with quality control documentation forthe anchorages.

14.6.5 Concrete strength at transfer

Sufficient concrete cubes shall be cast to demonstrate that the required in situ strength of concrete at

transfer has been reached. No member shall be strength until the strength of each of two cubes takenfrom the concrete used is not less than the specified transfer strength. The test cubes shall be madeand tested in accordance with BS EN 12390-2:2000 but shall be cured in similar conditions to theconcrete to which they relate.

14.6.6 Grout

i) Grout material for filling prestressing ducts shall comprise ordinary Portland cement and water. Thewater and cement ratio should be as low as possible and shall not exceed 0.45.

ii) Fluid and hardened properties of grout shall be submitted to the consultant for approval beforeconstruction.

iii) Trials are to be carried out on the proposed grout mix, based upon the contractor shall carry out full-scale grouting trials using the same equipment and procedures as those proposed for the works.

14.6.7 Tensioning Apparatus

i) Tensioning apparatus shall comply with BS EN 1992-1.1:2004, Clause 8.7.3.

ii) Apparatus shall be operated in accordance with the system manufacturer‘s written instruction andshall be maintained in good working condition.

iii) All load-measuring equipment shall be tested in accordance with the quality plan of the accreditedmanufacturer.

14.6.8 Handling and storage

Care should be taken to avoid mechanically damaging work-hardening or heating prestressingtendons while handling. All prestressing tendons should be stored clear of the ground and protectedfrom the weather from splashes from any other materials and from splashes from the cutting operationof an oxy-acetylene torch, or arc-welding processes in the vicinity. In no circumstances mayprestressing tendons after manufacture be subjected to any welding operation or on-site heartreatment or metallic coating such as galvanizing. This does not pre-clude cutting as given in 8.5.

Protective wrappings for tendons should be chemically neutral and suitable protection be provided forthe threaded ends of bars.

When prestressing tendons have been stored on site for prolonged period, the engineer shouldensure by tests that the quality of the prestressing tendons has not been significantly impaired byeither corrosion, stress corrosion, loss of cross – sectional area or changes in any other mechanicalcharacteristics.

14.7 WORKMANSHIP

14.7.1 General

i) Workmanship shall comply with BS EN 1992-1.1:2004, Clauses 8.3, 8.6 and 8.7.5 and Annex andrelevant clauses of TR47 where grouted tendons are used. Prestressing operations shall be carriedout under the direction of experienced and competent supervisors and all personnel operatingtensioning and grouting equipment shall have been certified as competent by the system supplier. Allprestressing materials and equipment shall be used in strict accordance with the recommendations of




the manufacturer of the stressing system.

Cutting to length and trimming of ends shall be by high-speed abrasive cutting wheel.

ii) The contractor shall submit the following to the Consultant for agreement prior to any work.

Fully dimensioned drawings, plans and crosssection of tendon and anchorage layouts, indicatingtendon profiles at regular intervals along each length, support details, stressing sequences etc.Stressing end and dead end anchorages shall be clearly defined.

Any ordinary reinforcement sizes and locations required to supplement the post-tensioning designincluding bursting reinforcement at anchorages to suit anchor type and layout.

Minimum concrete strength at each stage of stressing and anchorage capacities.

Calculations of forces and elongation of tendons with jack pressure-gauge readings at eachstressing stage taking into account all short-term and long-term losses including anchoragefriction, wedge pull-in, jack losses, duct friction, etc.

Vent locations for bonded tendons and details of vent closures.

14.7.2 Construction Joints & Pour Sizes

i) The Contractor shall locate and form construction joints to suit the structure and so as not to causeany short-term or long term distress to the structure.

ii) Construction joints in suspended slabs and beams are to be located within the middle third of anyspan, unless agreed otherwise by the Consultant.

iii) The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant for approval a drawing marked up with he proposedlocations of construction joints.

iv) The Contractor shall carefully prepare construction joint surfaces to expose the coarse aggregate toprovide a key by a method to be agreed with the consultant.

v) Pour sizes, except as agreed otherwise between the Consultant and contractor, shall be as shown inTable 1.

Table 1 Maximum areas & dimensions of concrete pours for prestressed post tensioned concreteelements.

Element Maximum Areas (m²) Maximum dimensions (m) in direction oftendon

Slabs (single end stressed tendons)

Slabs (double end stressed tendons)

500

750

25 metres

50 metres

14.7.3 Safety

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure safety during and after stressingoperations and during grouting and shall make reference to BS EN 1992-1.1:2004, Clause 8.7.2.

Appropriate procedures shall be set out in the contractor‘s method statement.

14.7.4 Soffit Marking

Tendons positions shall be marked on the soffit to indicate locations in both plan and elevation withinthe slab. The system to be used for identification shall be agreed with the Consultant and shall be




recorded on the as-built drawings.

14.7.5 Anchorages, tendons and sheathing

i) Anchorages and tendons shall be protected against damage and corrosion at all times. The

requirements of BS EN 1992-1.1:2004, Clauses 8.3 and 8.7.5.1 shall be complied with. Under nocircumstance shall prestressing steel be subjected to any welding operation, heat treatment ormetallic coating after manufacturer.

ii) Joints in sheathing shall be sealed. At anchorages, joints shall be sealed to prevent ingress ofconcrete or egress of grout.

iii) Anchorages and sheathing ducts shall be firmly fixed in place so they are not disturbed duringconcreting.

iv) Anchorages shall be protected in the final condition in accordance with the recommendation inSection 7.7.3 of TR43 or other details as agreed by the Consultant.

14.7.6 Post - Tensioning

i) Tendons may be stressed either by pre- tensioning or by post-tensioning, according to the particularneeds of the form of construction. In each system, different procedures and types of equipment areused and theses govern the method of tensioning the form of anchorage and, in post- tensioning, theprotection of the tendons.

All wires or strands stressed in one operation should be taken, where possible, from the same parcel.Each cable should be tagged with its number and the coil number or numbers of the steel used.Cables should n‘t be kinked or twisted, and individual wires and strands should be readily identifiableat each end of the member. No strand that has become unraveled should be used.

14.7.7 Tensioning Procedure

i) Before tensioning, it should be demonstrated that all tendons are free to move in the ducts.Tensioning should be carried out under competent supervision in such a manner that the stress in thetendons increases at a gradual and steady rate. Tensioning should not be carried out at temperaturebelow 0° C without the approval of the engineer.

The supervision in charge of stressing should be provided with particulars of the required tendonsloads and extensions. Allowance should be made during stressing for the friction in the jack in theanchorage although the former is not necessary when using load cells.

Stressing should continue until the required extension and/or tendon load is reached. The extensionshould allow for any draw-in of the tendon occurring at the non-jacking end, but measurement shouldnot commence until any slack in the tendon ahs been taken-up. A comparison between the measuredtendon force and that calculated from the extension provides a check on the accuracy of theassumption made for the frictional losses at the design stage; if the difference is greater than 6%corrective action should be taken but only with the approval of the engineer. Full records should keptof all tensioning operations, including the measured extensions, pressure-gauge or load-cell readingsand the amount of pull-in at each anchorage.

Where a large number of tendons or tendon elements is being tensioned and the full force cannot beachieved in an element because of breakage slip or blockage of duct, of the replacement of theelement is not practicable, the engineer should consider whether a modification in the stress levelscan still conform to relevant limit state.

In the case of curved tendons, or tendons made up of a number of consistent elements, or tendonsloaded in stages, the engineer should specify the order of loading and the magnitude of the load foreach component of the tendon.




Tensioned tendons, anchorages and duct forms should be effectively protected against corrosionduring the period between stressing and covering with grout concrete or other permanent protection.Ducts should be plugged at their ends and vents.

ii) Tensioning shall not start until the Contractor has advised the Consultant, within a time previously

agreed, when stressing is due to commence and that the following has been carried out and agreed:

All required test have been completed A method statement has been agreedThe structure to be stressed (including any joints) has achieved the specified strength).

Allowance has been made for formwork to accommodate shortening, bending or uplift duringstressing.

All tendons are free to move between jacking points and members are free to accommodate thehorizontal and vertical movements due to the application of prestress.Calculations of the total force and extension for each tendon after allowance for anchoragefriction, wedge pull-in, jack losses and duct friction have been approved.Details of any grout mix proposals have been agreed.

iii) Cropping of tendons shall be by mechanical means such as an angle grinder or shearing devise, notby burning.

iv) Load-extension graphs shall be plotted for the first tendon of each typical length during stressing.

v) Stressing of tendons shall continue until both the required load and the calculated extension havebeen reached, provided that both the following conditions have been satisfied.

The load in the tendon does not exceed 80% of the specified characteristics breaking load duringstressing or 75% of the specified characteristics breaking load after anchoring.

The measured extension of the tendon under its specified load differs from the calculated value bymore than 10% for tendons less than 20m long and 60% for tendons greater than 20m long.

14.7.8 Anchoring

When the prestress has been applied to the satisfaction of the Consultant, the tendons shall beanchored in accordance with the system manufacturer‘s instructions. If the pull -in of the tendon atcompletion of anchoring is greater than that agreed, the contractor shall inform the consultant.

14.7.9 Grouting

i) For grouted tendons, the grouting after tensioning shall comply with BS EN 1992-1.1:2004, Clause 8.9and Annex A, and Concrete Society Technical Report 47.

ii) All grouted and venting points shall be suitably marked to enable identification of the duct to whichthey are connected.

14.7.10 STRESSING SEQUENCE AND PROCEDURE

14.7.11 (Six) cubes shall be taken for crushing prior to stressing operations

14.7.12 In general band beam tendons shall be stressed first, then slab tendons, unless noted otherwise.

14.7.13 Stressing shall be carried out as follows:

Initial Stress: 25% of stressing load to be applied to all strands at minimum 24 hrs followingof pour and at minimum cylinder strength 9 MPA.

Final Stress: 100% of stressing load to be applied to all strands at minimum 72 hrsfollowing completion of pour and at minimum cylinder strength 25 MPA.




15.0 GROUND FLOOR SLABS

Ground floor slabs are to be cast as specified in the drawing. The slab should be power floated aftervacuum de-watering process to the approval of the Engineer. Further, the slab should at least conform tothe ‗AR3‘ class requirements defined under BS 8204:2003 (or Latest) for ‗classification of abrasion

resistance‘.

Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement as the proposed method of ground floor slabconcreting in accordance with the manufacturer or supplier‘s guide lines and recomme ndations forvacuum dewatering method.The floor slab should be suitably cured by ponding for minimum 14 days and no vehicular traffic shouldbe allowed over it for the first 7 days.

The relevant table is reproduced below:

BS 8204Class

Duty Tope ofConcrete

Application ConcreteGrade – N/mm 2

MinimumCementContentKg/m 2

Maximumdepth ofwear mm

Special Severe abrasionand impact

Specialmixes

Very heavyduty Eng.Workshopetc.

Special mixes andsprinkle finishes

0.05

AR1 Very highabrasion steelwheel traffic andimpact

Highstrengthtoppings

Heavy dutyindustrialwork shop,special

commercial,etc.

60 – 85 475 0.1

AR2 High abrasionsteel or hardplastic wheeltraffic

Directfinishconcrete

Medium dutyindustrial andcommercial

C50 400 0.2

AR3 Moderateabrasion rubbertyre traffic

Directfinishconcrete

Light dutyindustrial andcommercial

C35 325* 0.4

Table 3: BS 8204:2003 (or Latest) Classification of abrasion resistance and proposed

limiting depths of wear accelerated abrasion test.

* Minimum cement content shall be as per Contract Specifications.

Power Floated Floor Slabs (i) Produce a smooth even finish to receive directly applied floor coverings without use of screeds.

(ii) Use power machines on concrete stiff enough to take weight of machines after surface moisturehas evaporated.

(iii) Power float to be used to regulate and close surface and remove surplus mortar.




(iv) Power trowel after further moisture has evaporated with successive trowellings at minimum onehour intervals with blades tilted at greater angles to produce a hard wearing surface.

(v) Hand finishes margins to match remainder of work.

(vi) Making good with latex screeds at the Contractor‘s expense will normally be accepted.

Hand Trowelling (i) Produce a smooth hard and even finish.

(ii) Successive Trowelling by experienced labor with steel trowels with a delay of an hour betweeneach Trowelling to allow further moisture to evaporate.

(iii) Surplus weak mortar to be scraped from surface as Trowelling proceeds.

The dusting of neat cement on to the surface or wetting down before Trowelling will not be permitted.

16.0 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES

A. General

All reinforced concrete sub-structure shall be protected from aggressive actions of soil, ground water andall detrimental influences due to soil quality at the site.

Substructures, i.e., foundations, including basements, strap and tie beams, sump pits, lift wells, etc.,which are in contact soil shall be protected as detailed below.

The concrete surfaces to which the membrane is to be applied shall be cleaned of all grease, oil, dust,loose material, etc. and shall present a sound surface, free of all sharp protrusions.

Before applying the membrane the blinding surface shall be suitably primed with a primer recommendedby the manufacturer of the membrane.

All angles and corners, internal and external, shall be reinforced with an extra strip of 300 mm widemembrane. External angles shall be suitably splayed to prevent sharp corner and internal angles shall beprovided with cement sand fillet 50 x 50 mm to provide smooth transition.

The contractor‘s rate shall allow to for all the requirements specified herein.

B. Qualifications

The waterproofing systems including protection and all associated accessories and works shall beexecuted by a specialist firm(s) having at least 7 years‘ experience in U.A.E in installation of materialsdescribed herewith. The specialist (s) shall provide evidence of successful completion of similar works forthe approval of the Engineer before commencing any work.

The manufa cturer‘s qualified representatives shall visit the job site immediately prior to commencement ofworks and as and when required and directed by the engineer to satisfy the engineer and to instruct thespecialist (s) in the correct methods of execution of the works.

C. Submittals

The Contractor shall submit the following for the approval of the engineer:

a) Samples of each material: size and quantity to be as agreed with the Engineer.b) Catalogues, test certificates, etc.c) Shop drawingsd) Method statement




D. Warranty

The contractor shall submit to the engineer a guarantee stating all works of waterproofing system of thebasement have been carried out in accordance with the drawings and specifications and shall beguaranteed free from defects in material and workmanship and shall be leak – proof for a period of ten(10) years from the date of issuance of the completion certificate. The contractor shall agree to repair

(including and replacement of materials) any leaks resulting from defective materials or workmanshipduring the guarantee period at no additional cost to the client.

The contractor shall also pass on to the owner any and all guarantees provided by the sub-contractor andmanufacturers of individual members of the system.

E. Basement & Sub-structure

Two layers of 4 mm thick SBS modified bituminous membrane shall be laid fully torched on to the blindingconcrete with minimum laps of 100 mm all around.

An extra length of minimum 300 mm of the horizontal membrane shall be left over to carry up verticalsurfaces to maintain continuity of the membrane and shall be protected as detailed below.

The membrane shall be protected against damage from reinforcement and site traffic by a layer of cementsand screed of 30 mm thickness laid over one layer of 1500 gauge (0.375 mm) thick polyethylene sheetor filter membrane of 280 gm/m2 as density indicated on drawings. Aggregate size for screed shall be 6mm and shall be used at the discretion of the engineer. The area of the membrane laid at any one timeshould not exceed that which can be protected by screed in the same period. Care should be exercised inthe sequence of laying screed to ensure that the membrane laid is not damaged due to site traffic or othertrade works or any other reason.

The extra portion of 300 mm of the horizontal membrane left over shall be turned up after removal of formwork and shall be torched on to the exposed vertical prime surfaces. Primed vertical surfaces shall beprovided with one year of bituminous membrane fully torched on to the walls including over the 300 mmportion member carried up from the horizontal layer. The continuity of the membrane shall be maintained

by minimum laps of 100 mm all around. The membrane on the external exposed vertical surfaces shall becarried up to a minimum of 150 mm above the finished ground level (i.e. side walk, road surface, paving,etc.) and tucked into a continuous, purpose made groove in the substructure and secured firmly withapproved sealant/mastic recommended by the manufacturer of the membrane.

The membrane applied to the vertical surfaces of the substructure shall be protected against abrasivebackfill by a 6 mm thick rigid bituminous protection board, spot bonded to the membrane.

All areas of the membrane exposed above ground shall be protected from exposure deterioration withappropriate aluminum sheet flashing or application of mineral chipping faced membrane as indicated ondrawing or as directed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall allow for all the above requirements in his rates.




SECTION 5: SHORING

1.0 Hard/Soft Secant Pile Walls

1.1 General

All materials and work shall be in accordance with sections 3, 6 of these specifications, except where theymay be conflict of requirements, in which case this Section shall take precedence.

1.2 Guide Walls

The design and construction of guide walls shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall take intoaccount the actual site and ground conditions and the equipment to be used on site to ensure stabilityand avoid undercutting as appropriate.

Guide walls shall be constructed in reinforced concrete or other suitable materials. The minimum depth ofguide wall shall be 500 mm and the minimum shoulder width shall be 300 mm for walls in reinforcedconcrete.

1.3 Hardening Concrete Mixes

The Contractor shall submit details for the self-hardening concrete mix (soft pile) proportions to be usedprior to commencing the works.

Cement materials, aggregates (if used), additives and water shall be in accordance with section 3 of thisspecification.

Trial mixes shall be prepared for each mix unless there are existing data showing that the mix proportionsand method of manufacture will produced hardened material of the strength, permeability, shrinkageproperties and durability required, having adequate workability for compaction by the method to be usedin placing. All testing shall be carried out in an approved laboratory.

No variations outside the limits set out in the proportions shall be made nor in the original source ofmaterials without demonstrating compliance with the specification.

Self-hardening mixes shall be checked for compliance with the proportions. Cube samples shall be madeat the rate of four samples for each 50 m3 of self-hardening concrete or part thereof.

The Contractor shall keep a detailed record of the results of all tests on self-hardening mixes and theiringredients. Each test shall be clearly identified with the pile to which it relates and the date it was carriedout.

1.4 Support Fluid

Where support fluid is issued to maintain the stability of the pile bore, it shall be in accordance with therelevant clause of the ―Piling‖ Specification. (Bentonite).

1.5 Boring

1.5.1 Boring Near Recently Cast Piles

Piles shall not be bored so close to recently cast piles, which contain workable or partially set concretepiles or self-hardening mixes that a flow of concrete or instability could be induced or damage caused toany installed piles. The Contractor ‘s sequence of construction shall be submitted prior to workcommencing in accordance with ―Concrete Works‖ and ―Piling‖ specifications.




1.5.2 Stability of Bore

Temporary casing shall be used in unstable ground with or without support fluid to maintain the stability ofthe bore. The process of advancing the bore and the temporary casing shall be such that soil is not drawnin the bore from outside the area of the pile and cavities are not created outside the temporary casing.

1.5.3 Cleanliness of Pile Base

Prior to placing steel or concrete. The Contractor shall remove from the base of the pile as much loosedisturbed and remolded materials as practical and in accordance with the method of construction.

1.5.4 Cleaning of Support Fluid

Prior to placing steel or concrete, any support fluid including water shall be wholly or partly removed andreplaced while maintaining the fluid head if it does not comply with the Contractor ‘s limits for support fluidprior to concreting.

1.5.5 Steel Reinforcement

Shall be placed in accordance with the relevant clauses of the ―Piling‖ Specification. The quantity of steelreinforcement shall be as designed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.

1.6 Placing and Compacting Concrete

Placing of concrete shall be in accordance with relevant clauses of the ―Piling‖ specification. The concreteworkability shall be determined using the slump or flow table. The slump or flow shall be measured at thetime of discharge into the pile boring and shall be in accordance with the limits as specified underperformance requirements.

1.7 Tolerances

1.7.1 Guide Wall

The finished face of the guide wall closest to any subsequent main excavation shall be vertical to atolerance of 1 in 200 and shall represent the reference line. There shall be no ridges on the face and thecenterline of the guide wall shall not deviate from its specified position by more than +5 mm in 3 m.

The minimum clear distance between the guide walls shall be the pile diameter plus 25 mm and themaximum distance shall be the pile diameter plus 50 mm.

1.7.2 Secant pile

At cut-off level the maximum permitted deviation of the pile center from the point shown on the setting outdrawings shall be 25 mm in any direction except that an additional tolerance of 10 mm shall be permittedfor each additional 1.0 m that the cut-off level is below the top of the guide wall.

The exposed face of the pile shall be vertical within a tolerance of 1:100 in any direction.

An additional tolerance of 100 mm will be allowed for concrete protrusions resulting from cavities formedby over break in the ground. Where very soft clay layers or peat layers are anticipated or obstructions areto be removed prior to or during boring, an additional over break tolerance will be agreed with theengineer.

The Contractor shall carryout necessary preparation of the secant pile wall surface in terms of chippingand cleaning of piles to be readied for guniting to the approval of the Engineer prior to its handover to thebasement Contractor. Gunnting shall be carried out by the Main/Basement Contractor.


A vertical tolerance of + 150/-50 mm shall generally be permitted on the level of steel projecting from a




pile cut-off.

1.8 Capping Beam

After the construction of the secant pile wall the top portion of the secant piles shall be chipped to have a

sound surface for casting the capping beam. A capping beam shall be constructed to the sizes dictatedby the design requirements and cured prior to the stressing of tie back anchors to transfer the anchor loadevenly to the shoring system and to function as a single unit. The design and construction of the cappingbeam shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall take into account the actual site and groundconditions.

1.9 Backfilling of Empty Bore

Where concrete is not brought to the top of the guide wall, the empty pile bore shall be backfilled as soonas possible with approved material. Prior to backfilling, bores shall be clearly marked and fenced off so asnot to cause a safety hazard.

1.10 Water Retention

The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any joint, defect or pile where on exposure of the wallvisible running water leaks are found. Any leak, which results in water flow emanating from the surface ofthe retaining wall, shall be sealed.

1.11 Performance Requirements

A. Concrete for Soft piles - 20 N/mm2

B. Concrete for hard pile - 40 N/mm2

C. Slump - 175 (+,-) 25

2.0 Contiguous Pile Walls

2.1 General

All materials and works shall be in accordance with sections 3, 6, of these specifications, except wherethere may be conflict of requirements, in which case this section shall take precedence.

2.2 Guide Walls

The design and construction of guide walls shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall take intoaccount the actual site and ground conditions and the equipment to be used on site to ensure stabilityand avoid undercutting as appropriate.

Guide walls shall be constructed in reinforced concrete or other suitable materials. The minimum depth ofguide wall shall be 500 mm and the minimum shoulder width shall be 300 mm for walls in reinforcement

2.3 Support Fluid

Where support fluid is used to maintain the stability of the pile bore it shall be in accordance with pilingspecification (Bentonite).




2.4 Boring

2.4.1 Boring Near Recently Cast Piles

Piles shall not be bored so closed to recently cast piles which contain workable or partially set concretepiles to avoid instability or cause damage to any installed piles. The Contractor ‘s sequence of

construction shall be submitted prior to work commencing in accordance with sections 3 & 6 of thisspecification.

2.4.1 Stability of Bore

Temporary casing shall be used in unstable ground with or without support fluid to maintain the stability ofthe bore. The process of advancing the bore and the temporary casing shall be such that soil is not drawninto the bore from outside the area of the pile and cavities are not created outside the temporary casing.

2.4.3 Cleaning of Support Fluid

Prior to placing steel or concrete, any support fluid including water shall be wholly or partly removed andreplaced while maintaining the fluid head if it does not comply with the Contractor ‘s limits for support fluid

prior to concreting.


Shall be placed in accordance with Section 6. The quality of steel reinforcement shall be as designed bythe Contractor and approved by the Engineer.

2.5 Placing and Compacting Concrete

Placing of concrete shall be in accordance with section 6. The concrete workability shall be determinedusing the slump or flow table. The slump or flow shall be measured at the time of discharge into the pileboring and shall be in accordance with the limits as specified under performance requirements.

2.6 Tolerances

2.6 Guide Wall

The finished face of the guide wall closest to any subsequent main excavation shall be vertical to atolerance of 1 in 200 and shall represent the reference line. There shall be no ridges on the face and thecentre-line of the guide wall shall not deviate from its specified position by more than +5 mm. in 3 m.

The minimum clear distance between the guide walls shall be the pile diameter plus 25 mm. and themaximum distance shall be the pile diameter plus 50 mm.

2.7 Contiguous Piles

At cut-off level the maximum permitted deviation of the pile centre from the point shown on the setting outdrawings shall be 25 mm in any direction except that an additional tolerance of 10 mm shall be permittedfor each additional 1.0 m that the cut-off level is below the top of the guide wall.

An additional tolerance of 100 mm will be allowed for concrete protrusions resulting from cavities formedby over break in the ground. Where very soft clay layers or peat layers are anticipated or obstruction areto be removed prior to or during boring, and additional over break tolerance will be agreed with theEngineer.

2.8 Steel Reinforcement

A vertical tolerance of +50/-50 mm shall generally be permitted on the level of steel projecting from a pilecut-off.

2.9 Backfilling of Empty Bore




Where concrete is not brought to the top of the guide wall, empty pile bore shall be backfilled as soon aspossible with approved material. Prior to backfilling, bores shall be clearly marked and fenced off so asnot to cause a safety hazard.

2.10 Water Retention

Any leak which results in water flow emanating from the surface of the retaining wall shall be controlled bydewatering.

2.11 Performance RequirementsConcrete for hard pile – 35 N/mm2 Cylinder compressive strength

Slump - 175 +, - 25 mm

3.0 Planking and Strutting

The terms ―planking and strutting‖ will be deemed to cover sheet piling. Underpinnin g, secant pilling orany other method the Contractor elects to adopt for shoring the sides of excavation and also for shoring

the sides of adjoining buildings, public roadways, etc... The Contractor will be held responsible for shoringthe sides of all excavations, adjoining building and the like and no claim for additional excavation,concrete or other material and workmanship will be considered in this respect.

The shoring system of deep excavation of 2 m and above shall be carried out by competent approvedspecialist sub-Contractors having a minimum of 5 years‘ experience in similar works. The Contractor shallprovide a method statement for the system he proposes along with substantiating detailed calculations forthe approval of the Engineer. However any approval accorded by the Engineer shall not relieve theContractor of any of his responsibility and contractual obligations.

The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages, subsidence by any neglect or any default and shallmake good all damages and subsidence and shall make full compensation to the Employer and otherconcerned parties for any loss sustained due to above.

In the event of any collapse occurring during the excavation, the Contractor shall re-excavate and re-instate such excavations at his own expense. No additional excavations will be paid for should theContractor better the sides of the excavations.

If the temporary shoring is to be left in place the top 1 ½ to 2 m or such heights as directed by the localauthorities, shall be cut and removed in accordance with the requirements of the Municipality and asdirected by the Engineer at no extra cost to the project.




SECTION 6: DE-WATERING

1.0 General

This specification is provided as issued to the de-watering Sub-Contractor under the Enabling workscontract.

However they shall be applicable to this contract as a continuation of the De-watering works.

Design, furnish, operate, maintain and remove temporary dewatering systems to lower and control waterto maintain stable, undisturbed sub grades at the lowest excavation levels as specified and indicated.

Work to be done as part of dewatering includes the lowering of the water table, the lowering of hydrostaticpressure, preventing surface water from entering the excavation during construction, installation ofrecharging systems and/or disposing of discharge water, and installing and monitoring observations wellsand geotechnical instruments. Common dewatering methods include sump pumping, deep wells, wellpoints, French drains or combination thereof.

Discharge of construction dewatering effluent may require treatment facilities, and discharge monitoringto confirm compliance with rules, regulations, laws and ordinance of the Municipality and all otherauthorities having jurisdiction.

The Contractor shall also carry out inspection at regular intervals as agreed with the Engineer to ensurethat no movement, damage, foundation disturbance, subsidence and the like occurs.

The de-watering system catering for dewatering upto about 50 cm below the final excavation level of thebottom of blinding concrete for pile-cap/raft shall be handed over by the Enabling Works Contractor at thecommencement of the project.

De-watering shall be stopped only after casting the floor slab at the level indicated on structural drawings.

1.1 Qualifications of De-Watering Contractor

Dewatering specialist‘s Firm shall:

(i) Have a minimum of 10 years current U.A.E based experience in the design and construction ofwell points, deep wells, recharge systems, French drains or equal systems.

(ii) Have completed at least 5 successful dewatering projects of equal size and complexity and withequal systems within U.A.E.

If the dewatering system does not maintain the groundwater level to obtain the specified sub gradeconditions, the Engineer shall be notified and the system shall be modified appropriately at no additionalcost to the Employer.

If dewatering system causes sub grade soils to be unable to meet density requirements due todewatering interruptions or an inadequate system, notify the Engineer and modify system to perform asspecified at no additional cost to the Employer.

Obtain and comply with permits, laws, regulations, rules and codes of Local Municipality and all otherauthorities having jurisdiction.

Approval of the shop drawings submitted by the Contractor shall not in any way relieve the Contractorfrom full responsibility for errors therein or form the entire responsibility for complete and adequate designand performance of the system in controlling the water level in the excavated area and for control of thehydrostatic pressures to the depths specified. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for properdesign, installation, operation, maintenance and any failure of any component of the system.




1.2 Submittals

The Contractor shall submit the following for the approval of the Engineer:

A dewatering plan including:

(i) Shop drawings to a scale agreed with the Engineer. Drawing shall indicate the locations andsizes of berms, dikes, ditches, all deep wells, observation wells, sand and gravel filters,settlement points, well points, sumps, recharge systems and discharge lines, including theirrelation to sedimentation ponds.

(ii) Capacities of pumps, prime movers, and standby equipment.(iii) Detailed description of dewatering, maintenance, and system removal procedures.(iv) List of applicable laws, regulations, rules, and codes to which dewatering design conforms.

A modified dewatering plan within 24 hours, if open pumping from sumps and ditches results in boils, lossof fines or softening of the ground.

A modified dewatering plan when required

Preconstruction conditions survey of buildings and utilities around the site.

1.3 Materials

Provide and maintain erosions/sedimentation control devices as indicated or specified and in accordancewith the dewatering plan.

Provide casings, well screens, piping, fittings, pumps, power and other items required for dewateringsystem.

When deep wells or well points are used, provide pumping units capable of maintaining high vacuum andhandling large volumes of air and water at the same time.

Provide temporary pipes, hoses, flumes, or channels for the transport of discharge water to the indicatedor specified sedimentation ponds or drainage systems.

Provide pumps for dewatering sedimentation systems.Provide cement grout.

Provide portable sedimentation basins/tanks when sedimentation ponds are not available.

Provide and store auxiliary dewatering equipment, including pumps and hoses on the site in the event ofbreakdown, at least one (1) pump for every five (5) or part used.

1.4 Workmanship

Furnish, install and maintain dewatering system in accordance with approved dewatering plan. Locatedewatering system components so that they do not interfere with construction.

Carry out dewatering program in such a manner as to prevent undermining or disturbing foundations ofexisting structures or of work on going previously completed.

Do not excavate until the water has been drawn down to a minimum of 0.5 meter below the bottom of theplanned excavation.

Do not excavate until the dewatering system is operational and the excavation may proceed withoutdisturbance to the final sub grade.

Unless otherwise specified, continue dewatering uninterrupted until the structures, pipes andappurtenances to be built there have been completed such that they will not be floated or otherwisedamaged by an increase in groundwater elevation.




Implement the approved modified dewatering plan and repair any damage incurred at no additional costto the Employer if open pumping from sumps and ditches results in boils, loss of fines or softening of theground.

Where sub grade materials are unable to meet the sub grade density requirements due to improper

dewatering techniques, remove and replace the materials at no additional cost to the Employer.

Lay temporary French drains (under drains) where indicated in trenches beneath bottom level orexcavation. Provide trenches to accommodate under drain and surroundings material. Lay under drainsbelow bottom or normal excavation with open joints wrapped in non-woven geotextile fabric, and entirelysurrounded by screened gravel or crushed rock to prevent the admission of fines into the underdrains.Provide at least 3 inches between bottom of pipe or structure and highest point of underdrain pipe. Fill thespace between the underdrain and pipe or structure with compacted screened gravel or crushed rock.

1.5 Dewatering Discharges

Install and monitor discharge systems when specified, indicated or deemed necessary.

Install sand and gravel filters in conjunction with well points and deep wells to prevent the migration offines from the existing soil during the dewatering operation.

Transport pumped or drained water without interference to other work, damage to pavement, othersurfaces, or property. Discharge pumped water to a sedimentation pond or drainage system and asapproved by the Local Municipality Authorities.

Do not discharge water into any storm or sanitary sewer system. Discharged water must be visible orallowed to be observed to verify compliance with U.A.E Regulations.

Provide separately controlled pumping lines.

The Engineer reserves the right to sample discharged water at any time.

Do not pump water found to be contaminated with oil or other hazardous material into sedimentationponds or drainage systems without treatment.

1.6 Removal of Dewatering

Do not remove dewatering system at least until the floor slab indicated on structural drawing has beenpoured and is cured. Dewatering system shall be removed only after written approval is obtained from theEngineer.

Backfill and compact sumps or ditches with screened gravel or crushed rock.

Remove well points and deep wells. Backfill abandoned well holes with cement grout having a watercement ratio of 1 to 1 by volume.

If an equal system has been used, remove and backfill in accordance with approved dewatering plan.




The Contractor shall warrant the design as ―Fit for purpose‖ & shall indemnify the Employer & theEngineer for any & all failures arising from such design. The Contractor shall provide details of hisprofessional indemnity insurance to cover the design work & liability undertaken by him, to the Employer.

4.0 General

Piling shall confirm in all respects with the principles contained in BS 8004: 1996 & relevant clauses ofthe ICE manual.

The Contractor shall report immediately to the Engineer any ground conditions that differs from thoseexpected by the Contractor from his interpretation of the site investigation records which in his opinionwould materially affect the bearing capacity of the pile.

The heads of piles shall be within 75 mm of the correct plan positions.

Vertical piles shall not deviate by more than one degree from the vertical, & raking piles shall notdeviate by more than two degrees from the designed angle of rake.

Where piles have not been positioned or driven within the limits described in the Contract, no methodof forcible correction shall be permitted. The Engineer may require piles so positioned to be withdrawn& re-driven, or take such other action as he considers necessary all at the expense of the Contractor.

The Contractor shall carry out the work in such a manner & at such times as to minimize noise &disturbance.

Any proposals by the Contractor for ground treatment of any nature or for temporary lowering of thewater table by well points or any other method shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. TheContractor shall however remain fully responsible for any effects of such ground treatment or controlof the level of water tables upon the existing roads, buildings & structures in the vicinity of the works.

Any proposals by the Contractor for the underpinning, needling, & shoring of existing structures in the

vicinity of the works shall be carefully designed by the Contractor & be subject to the approval of theEngineer.

Record of Existing Services: Prior to commencing work, record of drain, cables, mains & otherservices shall be obtained & made by the Contractor to ensure that his work will not cause damage tothese services.

5.0 INVESTIGATIONS

Details of soil investigations will be provided to the Contractor. However no responsibility shall beaccepted by the Employer/Engineer for the accuracy of the report including opinions & conclusionstherein. The Contractor is to carry out any further soil investigations he requires at his own expense.

6.0 PILING SYSTEM

Piles shall be cast-in-situ reinforced concrete, board system using Bentonite slurry, unless otherwisespecified, all as shown on the drawings & as directed by the Engineer.

The bearing capacity & crushing strength of each pile shall be as indicated on the drawings. Theallowable pile capacity shown on the drawings are derived by a combination of end bearing & skinfriction as indicated in the soil report.

The Contractor shall submit a method with his Tender Documents, detailed drawings & specificationfor the piles he intends to use or for any alternative piling system he proposes to adopt based onContract Drawings & Specifications together with calculations & details of the type, number & lengthof piles, loads carried, casting and/or driving methods, lengthening arrangements & pile caps where




required for the approval of the Engineer. Such drawings, specification, method of piling & the plant tobe used are subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer on adaily basis upon commencing the works of the intended Program of piling activities for the followingday as approved by the Engineer, shall form an integral part of the Contract documents.

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing piles/pile groups to withstand the loading specified

with a sufficient margin of safety as required by the loading test & relevant codes.

From the results of the non-production test piles & other available information, the Contractor shalldetermine the lengths of piles necessary to carry the specified safe working loads & shall submit hisproposals to the Engineer for approval. He shall not cast any piles without prior approval of theEngineer.

Approval so accorded shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide pilescapable of carrying the required loading.

7.0 CONCRETE FOR PILING

Unless otherwise specified or indicated all concrete for piling shall comply with the relevant clauses inSection 4 – Concrete Work.

Bores which have reached foundation depth shall not be permitted to stand unconcreted overnight.

8.0 COMPOSITION AND STRENGTH OF CONCRETE

The composition of concrete shall be such that it meets the strength requirements as indicated onStructural Drawings. The concrete mixes shall be as detailed under prescribed mixes & trial mixes inSection 4 – Concrete Work.

All concrete aggregates, cement & water shall be stamped & tested as per relevant codes as deemednecessary & as frequently as deemed necessary by the Engineer as detailed under the relevant

clauses in Section 3 – Concrete Work. All test samples shall be supplied by the Contractor at his ownexpenses. Samples shall be obtained in accordance with the latest editions of BS & ASTM, ACI codeor any equally approves standard.

The minimum cover to the reinforcing bars shall be 75 mm unless otherwise shown on drawings & theContractor shall ensure that no steel is displaced from its position during the placement of concrete.

9.0 PLACING CONCRETE

Stability of Bore

- For maintaining the stability of the bore, an adequate temporary casing shall be used inConjunction so as to ensure stability of the strata near ground level until concrete has beenplaced. During construction the level of drilling fluid in the pile excavation shall be maintainedwithin the cased or stable bore so that it is not less than 1.0 m above the level of externalstanding groundwater at all times.

- In the event of rapid loss of drilling fluid from a pile excavation, the bore shall be backfilledwithout delay & the instruction of the Engineer shall be obtained before boring at that location isresumed.

- Approved of the Engineer shall be obtained before water is used to assist boring.

- Adequate precautions shall be taken at all times to prevent surface water or groundwaterseepage entering the pile bore.

The Contractor shall take measures to ensure that the best achievable shaft friction is developed inthe pile. The Contractor shall submit proposals to the Engineer for minimizing the effects of thepotential bentonite ―cake‖ on the concrete/soil interface, for example, by scoring the face of the pile




while withdrawing the auger.

A cleaning process of the bore holes shall be carried out before concrete is placed. Large debris/oraccumulated sediment shall be removed using appropriate approved methods, which shall bedesigned to clean while at the same time minimizing ground disturbance below the pile bases. Wateror drilling fluid shall be maintained at such levels throughout & following the cleaning operation it shall

be ensured that stability of the bore is preserved.

No concrete shall be placed until all boring within a radius of 3 times the diameter of the larger pile(center to center of piles) has been completed, nor until all the shells for any one cluster have beencompletely bored. If this cannot be done, all boring within above limits shall be discontinued until theconcrete in the last pile cast, has been set for at least 24 hours. Concrete in piles shall be placedusing full length chute or tremie which is lubricated with grout.

All piles except those that are to be finished at a lower level shall be placed with their tops at least 1meter above pile cut-off level in their respective pile caps. All boreholes, except for piles that are to befinished at a lower level or unless otherwise specified, shall be filled with concrete to the top of thehole so that the Engineer can be assured that all the bentonite has been displaced by the concrete.

Bore holes for piles where concrete is to be finished at a lower level and is not to be filled to the top ofthe bore, if approved by the Engineer, shall be filled to the minimum of 1500 mm above thedesignated cut-off level. Empty pile shall not be left open but shall be backfilled with surplusexcavated material to ensure site safety.

Completion of Piles: the Engineer shall be notified immediately if the concrete or grout placing in a pilecannot be completed in a continues operation or the Contractor is unable to insert the reinforcementor for any other cause is unable to complete the pile in the normal manner & the pile shall be re-boredbefore the concrete has hardened. The re-bore shall extend 300 mm below the previous depth ofaugering.

10.0 DRILLING FLUID

Bentonite, as supplied to the site & prior to mixing, shall be in accordance with specification EngineerEquipment & Material Users Association – EEMUA 163 Drilling Fluid Materials.

A certificate shall be obtained by the Contractor from the manufacture of the bentonite powder,showing the properties of each consignment delivered to the site. This Certificate shall be madeavailable to the Engineer on request. The properties to be given by the manufacturer are the apparentviscosity range (in centipoises) & the gel strength range ( in Pascals) for solids in water.

Bentonite shall be mixed thoroughly with clean fresh water to make a suspension which will maintainthe stability of the pile bore for the period necessary to place concrete & complete the construction.The temperature of the water used in mixing the bentonite suspension, & of the suspension whensupplied to the borehole, shall be not lower than 5 C.

Where saline or chemically contaminated ground water occurs, special precautions shall be taken tomodify the bentonite suspension or pre-hydrate the bentonite in fresh water so as to render it suitablein all respects for the construction of piles.

The frequency of testing drilling fluid & the method & procedure of sampling shall be proposed by theContractor for approval prior to the commencement of the work. The frequency may subsequently berequired, depending on the consistency of the results obtained, subject to approval.

Control tests shall be carried out on the bentonite suspension, using suitable apparatus. The densityof freshly mixed bentonite suspension shall be measured daily as a check on the quality ofsuspension being formed. The measuring device shall be calibrated to read to within 5g/L. Tests todetermine density, viscosity, shear strength & pH value shall be applied to bentonite supplied to thepile bore. The results of these tests shall comply with the following table:




Property MethodSupplied to Pile Bore

During DrillingSampled from PileBore Immediately

Prior to ConvertingBentonite Content 4-5% 5-8% 4%min.

Plastic viscosity Fann Viscometer* 3.10 7-20 20 max.10 mm gel strength (Pa) Fann Viscometer* 2-30 10-40 15-40Density (g/ml) Mud balance 1.03-1.07 1.03-1.10 1.02-1.10

API sand content (% vol) API test 3 max 3 max 6 maxFluid loss in 30 min (ml) API test 40 max 40 max 60 maxPh pH meter or indicator

strips8-11 8-11 8-11

* Where the Fann Viscometer is specified, the fluid sample should be screened by a number 52 sieve(300 m) prior to testing.

Tests shall be carried out until consistent working pattern has been established; taking into accountthe mixing process, any blending of freshly mixed bentonite suspension & previously used bentonitesuspension. When the results show consistent behavior, the tests for shear strength & pH value maybe discontinued, & tests to determine density & viscosity shall be carried out as agreed with theEngineer. In the event of a change in the established working pattern, tests for shear strength & pHvalue shall be reperformed for a period as directed by the Engineer.

The movement of drilling tools up & down the pile bore may produces local suction piston effects, bypass currents & variations in the level of the bentonite suspension due to the displacement volume ofthe drilling tool & Kelly bar. These effect may create scouring & over back of the excavation. TheContractor shall ensure that the above are avoided by controlling the lifting speed of the drillingequipment.

All reasonable steps shall be taken to prevent the spillage of bentonite suspension, either clear orcontaminated, on to the ground of the site. Discarded bentonite shall be removed from the site withoutundue delay. Any disposal of the bentonite shall comply with the regulations of the local Municipality.Under no circumstance shall any suspension be allowed to discharge into any permanent drainagesystem.

11.0 REINFORCEMENT

The reinforcement shall be deformed high grade steel confirming to ASTM 615-94 with a minimum yieldstrength of 4600 kg/cm2, to sizes & lengths as indicated on the drawings & in conformity to thespecifications described under Concrete Work – Section 4.

Reinforcement cages shall be inserted by applying steady pressure & not by the application of percussiveforces. The means of inserting the reinforcement cages shall not cause buckling or lateral displacementof the cages, & shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

Cover to reinforcement: Unless otherwise specified cover to reinforcement for 750 mm dia. Piles shall be75 mm & for 1000 mm or higher dia piles shall be 100 mm.

12.0 PILE RECORDS

A record of all piles installed shall be kept by the Contractor & a copy of the record of work done eachday shall be given to the Engineer not later than mid-day of the working day after the pile is cast.

On completion of the piling, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer a drawing recording the finaldepth of all piles relative to cut off depth or penetration depth as appropriate




The piling record sheet should include the following:

(i) Contract reference(ii) Pile reference(iii) Pile type, size & length

(iv) Date & time of casting(v) Ground level or sea bed level relative to the site datums at pile position before boring.(vi) Pile toe level(vii) Pile cut off level ( top of pile )(viii) Plant information(ix) All relevant information regarding progress or delays including observation or other interruption to

the sequence of work & all information in respect of unexpected piling conditions

13.0 SONIC INTEGRITY TESTING

In addition to the other specified tests all piles shall be sonic integrity tested in accordance with thefollowing requirements:

(i) The work must be carried out by an independent testing company approved by the Engineer,experienced in the use of the equipment & in interpretation of the results with respect to cast-in-situ piles.

(ii) The pile head must be clean, accessible, sound & free from standing water. The area to behammered shall be ground smooth to the satisfaction of the testing company &/or theEngineer.

(iii) The concrete should not be less than 7 days old at the time of testing.

(iv) Details of the appropriate length of the piles & the ground conditions should be made availableto the testing company.

(v) The method of testing, equipment to be used, output & report formats shall be submitted to theEngineer for his approval before work commences.

(vi) A full report of the tests carried out complete with full references to individual piles & theirlocations shall be provided to the Engineer within 7 days of the tests being carried out.

(vii) Any pile found possibly defective will be reported by the testing company to the Engineerimmediately, without waiting for the full report.

(viii) Sonic integrity tests on working piles to be subject to load tests shall be carried out before &after the piles have been load tested &/or as directed by the Engineer.

(ix) Testing of piles shall be carried out once piles have been cut back to their final working level&/or as directed by the Engineer.

14.0 TESTING EQUIPMENT

The loading ram & load measuring device shall be precisely centered between the test pile & thereaction beam loading point. A self- aligning seating shall used in accordance with the manufacturer‘sinstructions. The overall height of the loading arrangement shall be kept to a minimum & the use ofpacking pieces shall be minimized. In all cases the Contractor shall ensure that when the hydraulic

jack load-measuring device are mounted on the pile head the whole system will be stable up to themaximum load to be applied.

The hydraulic jack, pump, hose, pipes, couplings & other apparatus to be operated under hydraulicpressure shall be capable of withstanding a pressure of 1.5 times the maximum pressure used in thetest without leaking. In addition to the primary load indicating system, the loading jack shall be




equipped with a pressure gauge on the fluid inlet together with a load/pressure calibration. Themaximum test load expressed as a reading on the gauge in use shall be displayed & all operatorsshall be made aware of this limit. If a power pack hydraulic system is used an emergency relief valueor power cut-off must be fitted. The hydraulic jack pump hose shall be long enough to keep theoperator clear of the testing.

Means shall be provided to control the test & read the dial gauges or displacement measuring devicesfrom positions clear of where failure of the test rig could constitute a hazard. The test shall becontrolled & the gauges read from a position clear of the test rig.

If in the course of carrying out a test any unforeseen occurrence should take place, further loadingshall not be applied until a proper consulting assessment of the condition has been made & stepshave been taken to rectify any fault. Reading of gauges should however be continued where possible& if it is safe to do so.

15.0 LOADING TESTS (STATIC AXIAL COMPRESSIVE LOAD)

Before commencing work, the Contractor in collaboration with the Engineer shall establish tentativepenetrations & depth for the piles. This does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to deliver

piles having the bearing capacities required & passing the required load tests.

The Contractor shall not perform any load test without securing the written approval of the Engineeron the method to be adopted & the equipment & tools to be used for the test. Loading tests shall becarried out at the date ordered on individual piles selected by the Engineer.

Piles selected by the Engineer shall be tested in accordance with BS 8004:1986 or ASTM D1143 forthe test loads indicated on drawings as follows:

(a) The test load shall be applied by a method approved by the Engineer & shall be measured withinan accuracy of 2 percent. Settlements shall be measured with in an accuracy of 0.25 mm.

(b) The test load & unloading shall be applied in suitable increments & as smoothly & expeditiously

as possible.

(c) The load after each increment shall be kept constant until the rate of settlement does not exceed0.25mm per hour.

(d) The amount of settlement shall be recorded before the next increase of load.

(e) The full test load shall be maintained for 48 hours & the total settlement recorded.

(f) The load after each reduction shall be kept constant until the rate of recovery does not exceed0.25mm per hour.

(g) The amount of recovery shall be recorded before the next decrease of load.

(h) The Contractor shall within 24 hours of the completion of the test submit to the Engineer for eachpile tested graphs showing:

(i) Load & settlement plotted above & below a common line of time.(ii) Settlement & recovery plotted vertically against a base line of load.

(j) The settlement of the pile under the test load & the recovery of the pile after its subsequentremoval shall be within the limits agreed with the Engineer.

Each pile to be tested shall be loaded axially with not less than 150% of the working load or asspecified on the drawings. The test shall not be commenced until the concrete has been set at least




for seven days after concreting, & shall be maintained on the pile as aforementioned or for suchperiod as the Engineer may direct.

16.0 DYNAMIC PILE TESTING

Dynamic pile test shall be carried out by a specialist testing agency with a proven record & who is fully

conversant with the test, interpretation & reporting procedures using a pile driver analyzer, straintransducers & accelerometers.

Dynamic pile test shall be carried out strictly in accordance with ASTM D 4945-89 for loads asindicated on drawing & to piles selected by the Engineer at site.

The Contractor shall be responsible to ascertain & coordinate the requirements of the specialisttesting agency as regards the preparation of the pile surfaces, additional exposed lengths of the pile(1.5 to 2 times the pile dia), providing hole in the center of the pile top (about 130mm dia x 155 mmdeep) for placing test rod, leveling of the pile top, etc.., & ensure that the same are provided either bythe Piling Contractor during piling or by the Contractor himself depending on the type of work & theircapabilities.

Based on the field test results the specialist testing agency shall perform the required laboratoryanalysis & review the following:

- Driving stresses (Compression or tension)- Integrity of the Pile- Bearing capacity

The specialist testing agency shall submit in triplicate a detailed report of the tests along with theresults & his finding, recommendations & comments to the Engineer.

All testing shall be as detailed under the laboratory testing clause.

17.0 FAILURE OF COMPRESSION PILE

A pile shall be considered to have failed when any of the following conditions occur:

(a) On completion of a load test, the residual settlement after rebound exceeds 6mm

(b) The safe working load (designed pile load) as specified in the drawing shall not havebeen achieved

(c) The maximum settlement exceeds 10 percent of the least lateral dimension of the pileunder the ultimate load.

18.0 PILE LOAD TESTS (TENSILE)

Tensile test shall be performed on piles indicated on drawings or as selected by the Engineer.

In the event of the tensile test being conducted on piles which have been tested for compressive load, thetensile test shall be conducted after a minimum period of 48 hours after completion of compressive loadtest.

Each production piles that is to be tested shall be loaded axially with not less than 150% of the workingload or as specified on the drawings & shall be maintained on the pile as aforementioned or for suchfurther period as the Engineer direct.

Piles shown on drawings or as selected by the Engineer shall be tested in accordance with the ASTMD3689 for axial tensile standard loading procedure & in accordance with relevant codes & Municipalityregulation & requirements.

The test load shall be applied by a method approved by the Engineer & shall be measured within an




accuracy of 2 percent. Upward movements shall be measured with in an accuracy of 0.25mm.

Non production test piles shall be tested to 250% of the working load or to failure whichever occurs first.

19.0 FAILURE OF TENSION PILE

A pile shall be considered to have failed when any of the following conditions occur:

- On completion of a load test, the net upward pile butt movement exceeds 10mm.- The test load as specified in the drawing shall not have been achieved.- The upward movement suddenly increases disproportionately.

20.0 RECTIFICATION OF FAILURE

In the event of a pile failing a load test, notwithstanding any contrary proposals by the Contractor, theEngineer may insist on the following methods of rectification (as minimum).

When a non production test pile fails & is confirmed that the failure is due to design aspects & not due todefects in the piling operation, the Engineer shall order such changes in the design of the pile as he

considers necessary.

For each main piling operation test pile failure 3 piles further shall be tested. If these piles fails, theEngineer shall order such changes in the design of the pile/pile group as he considers necessary.

In the case of the pile of the main piling operation failing a test load, but subsequent piles passing theload test new piles shall be driven to replace the defective piles in positions agreed by the Engineer at theexpense of the Contractor.

In the event of additional works being carried out as a result of new piles being required under thisClause, the cost of this additional work will be at the expense of the Contractor.

21.0 CORE TESTING OF PILES

10 percent of all basement type piles which are filled in blind boring shall be core tested in the followingmanner:

(a) The top 1000 mm of the pile shall be cut away to expose a height of 500 mm of pile above thecut off level.

(b) The top of the exposed pile shall be leveled to allow for a 100 mm diameter diamond cone300mm deep to be taken in the centre of the pile.

(c) The core shall be removed & tested for compressive strength & any contamination by deleterioussubstances such a bentonite.

(d) Once the core test has been approved the pile in question shall be cut down to its final level inthe pile cap.

(e) Should a core test fail on a particular pile the Contractor may take a further 200 mm core aftercutting the pile down to 200mm above cut off level. If this test should also fail the pile shall becondemned.

(f) If any of the core tests on the 10% of the pile fail then all piles will be tested in the abovedescribed manner at no extra cost to the Employer.




22.0 REVIEW & MODIFICATION OF TEST PILE RESULTS

The Engineer shall review the results of the test pile & the recommendation of the specialist piling sub-Contractor & will either issue instructions to precede with the work as per the existing drawings or issuerevised drawings/instructions after carrying out necessary modifications.

The Contractor shall allow in his rates to cater for the curing & test periods in addition to the periodrequired for Engineer‘s review & issue of instructions to proceed with the works.

The Contractor shall be entitled for time extension only (without any monetary claims) equal to the periodof delays due to any design review, modifications & authorities approval. However no financial claimsShall be entertained due to the above delays.

23.0 CLEARANCE OF WORKS

Upon the completion of the works the Contractor shall clear away & remove from the Site allconstructional plant, equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, etc. & leave the whole of the Site & worksclean & in perfect condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.




- Work sizes (length x width x height): 400 x 200 x 200- STC. AVG without plaster: 56 db- Water Absorption: 4.1

1.4 MANUFACTURED HOLLOW BLOCKWORK FOR INTERNAL WALL- Blocks: BS 6073, BS 1881, BS EN 772, ASTM C-518 compliance and to DCLD Approved

- Manufacturer: As listed in Appendix 3: List of Approved SuppliersProduct reference: Hollow Block 6‖ - Individual Strength: 6 N/mm2- Average Strength: 7.5 N/mm2- Block weight: 18 kg.- Block density: 1570 kg/m3.- Fire rating: Four Hours- Category: Hollow Blocks.- Work sizes (length x width x height): 400 x 150 x 200- STC. AVG without plaster: 53 db- Water Absorption: 4.6

1.5 MANUFACTURED HOLLOW BLOCKWORK FOR INTERNAL WALL

- Blocks: BS 6073, BS 1881, BS EN 772, ASTM C-518 compliance and to DCLD Approved- Manufacturer: As listed in Appendix 3: List of Approved Suppliers

Product reference: Hollow Block 4‖ - Individual Strength: 6 N/mm2- Average Strength: 7.5 N/mm2- Block weight: 15 kg.- Block density: 1760 kg/m3.- Fire rating: Four Hours- Category: Hollow Blocks.- Work sizes (length x width x height): 400 x 100 x 200- STC. AVG without plaster: 51 db- Water Absorption: 4.7

1.6 MANUFACTURED SOLID BLOCKWORK FOR SUBSTRUCTURE- Blocks: BS 6073, BS 1881, BS EN 772, ASTM C-518 compliance and to DCLD Approved

- Manufacturer: As listed in Appendix 3: List of Approved SuppliersProduct reference: Solid Block 8‖

- Individual Strength: 6 N/mm2- Average Strength: 7.5 N/mm2- Block weight: 36 kg.- Block density: 2170 kg/m3.- Fire rating: Four Hours- Category: Solid Blocks.- Work sizes (length x width x height): 400 x 200 x 200- STC. AVG without plaster: 62 db- Water Absorption: 3.6

1.7 MANUFACTURED SOLID BLOCKWORK FOR SUBSTRUCTURE- Blocks: BS 6073, BS 1881, BS EN 772, ASTM C-518 compliance and to DCLD Approved

- Manufacturer: As listed in Appendix 3: List of Approved SuppliersProduct reference: Solid Block 6‖

- Individual Strength: 6 N/mm2- Average Strength: 7.5 N/mm2- Block weight: 26 kg.- Block density: 2180 kg/m3.- Fire rating: Four Hours- Category: Solid Blocks.- Work sizes (length x width x height): 400 x 150 x 200- STC. AVG without plaster: 57 db- Water Absorption: 3.4




1.8 MANUFACTURED LIGHT WEIGHT AUTOCLAVED AERATED CONCRETE BLOCKWORK- Blocks: To DMS 1 Part 3: 2004 – Specification for precast AAC masonry units

BS EN 771-4: 2001 - Specification for masonry units – AAC Masonry unitsDubai Central Laboratory Department Technical Approval Certificate

- Manufacturer: Al Jazeera Factory or equivalent approvedProduct reference: Autoclaved Aerated Concrete (AAC)

- Average Normalized Compressive Strength: 3.2 N/mm2 (min.)- Block dry density: 525 kg/m3. Tolerance ± 50- Fire rating: Four Hours- Category: Autoclaved Aerated Concrete (AAC) thermalite block.- Thermal Conductivity at 35°C and 60% R.H: 0.134 W/m.k° (max.)

2.0 BLOCKWORK – MATERIALS

2.1 Constituents

(a) Cement

(i) The cement used in the manufacture of concrete masonry blocks shall comply with the requirements ofBS 12 or BS 4027 as appropriate.

(ii) Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Concrete Specification.(iii) The cement content of manufactured blocks shall not be less than 200 kg/m 3.(iv) Cement shall be sulphate resisting Portland cement to BS 4027 for work up to and including the structural

ground slab level and ordinary portland cement to BS – 12 for work above this level.

(b) Aggregates

(i) Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring crushed or uncrushed materials, which shall fully complywith BS 882.

(ii) Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Concrete Specification.(iii) The content of acid soluble chloride (Cl) shall not exceed:

- 0.06% by weight of fine aggregate- 0.02% by weight of coarse aggregate

(iv) The content of acid soluble sulphates (SO 3) shall not exceed 0.3% by weight of coarse and fineaggregates.

(v) Coarse aggregates used for the manufacture of concrete blocks shall be 10 mm nominal size forstandard blocks. Grading, when determined in accordance with BS 812 shall be within the limits of Table1.1.2.1. Therein.

(c) Water

(i) Water shall be potable, clean and free of any organic and deleterious matter having a pH value of 7 to 9.(ii) Organic impurities shall not exceed the following limits

- Total dissolved solids 2000mg/litre- Chlorides 250mg/litre- Sulphates 350mg/litre- Alkalis, carbonates and bicarbonates 500mg/litre

(d) Additives

(i) All pigments shall comply with BS 1014.(ii) All admixtures shall comply with BS 5075 Part 1.(iii) Admixtures shall not contain chlorides. They are preferred to be lignosulphate based water reducing

agents.

2.2. Block Manufacture




(a) General

Arises shall be sharp and true, blocks which have damaged arises are not to be used in the works andshall be discarded at the expense of the Contractor.

Immediately after molding, the blockwork shall be placed on clean, level, non-absorbent pallets. Blocksshall not be removed from the pallets until inspected and approved by the Engineer. Blocks shall becured by being kept thoroughly wet by means of water sprinklers or other approved means for a perioddetermined by the Engineer, but in all cases for not less than 3 days. Blocks must not be left on earth orsand during the curing process. Blocks shall be stacked in honeycomb fashion. Solid stacking will not bepermitted.

The blocks are to be produced to the following minimum compressive strength for the uses noted versuseach. Block strengths shall be consistent with those recommended and specified in the specification.

__________________________________________________________________Minimum compressive Uses for whichStrength Blocks are suitable Mortar Mix

__________________________________________________________________

Average LowestOf 10 blocks individual blocks

_________________________________________________________________N/mm 2 N/mm 2 7.0 5.6 Protective skins S.R. Ctm. (1:3)

To foundations

External non-loadBearing wallsLoad bearing wall Ct.m. (1:4)

__________________________________________________________________10.5 8.4 Load bearing wall

Below ground S.R. Ct.m (1:3)

14.0 11.2 Soakaways andManholes S.R. Ct.m. (1:3)

__________________________________________________________________

2.8 2.25 Internal non-load Ct.m (1:6)Bearing walls

___________________________________________________________________

Blocks not exceeding 75 mm thick and blocks for use in the ground are to be solid unless otherwisedirected. All other blocks are to be hollow.

All blocks intended to be used in substructures or may be in contact with soil shall be made from S.R.P.cement.

(b) Dimensions and Tolerances

(i) Standard co-ordinated block sizes for walls shall be 400 mm long, 200 mm high and of width indicated onthe drawings.Sizes shall be modular as specified in BS 6073 Part 2.

(ii) Load bearing blocks shall have thickness not less than 200 mm.(iii) Hollow blocks shall have voids between 25 and 50 percent with a minimum external shell of 35 mm or

1.75 times the nominal maximum size of aggregate, whichever is greater.(iv) No overall dimension (length, width or height) shall differ by more than 3 mm at any point.(v) Thermal Insulated Blocks will have Polystyrene Insert of 60mm, 75mm, 110mm

2.3 Mortar




The sand to be used for mortar shall be clean, sharp and be chemically and structurally stable andcomply with the grading below. The lime to be used for mortar shall be imported hydrated lime complyingwith BS 890. Sand for mortar shall generally comply with BS 1198 and 1199 as appropriate. Wherecolored mortars are required these shall be obtained either by the use of colored cement or by addition ofpigments complying with BS 1014.

The cement and water to be used for mortar shall comply with the requirements given under concreteworks and the methods of measuring and mixing shall be the same. The following mixing table shall bestrictly adhered to in all cases.

Mixing Table

Nominal Cement, Sand, Imported LimeMix Kilos m 3 (dry hydrate), Kilos

1:4 361 1.00 -1.: imported lime 145 1.00 161with 10% cement (1:10:2 1/2)

Table of Grading

BS 410 approximately sand passing through sieve :

Sieve No. Size, mm Percentage- 3 95 - 1007 2.4 80 - 100

14 1.2 60 - 10025 0.6 30 - 10052 0.3 5 - 65

100 0.15 0 - 1

Note: The above figures represent the limits of percentage (by weight) passing sieves of the sizesmentioned.

The mortar generally shall be cement and sand (1:4) mix. No lime or any other admixtures shall bemixed with the mortar without the prior consent of the Engineer.

Where plasticiser is added to the mortar the following mixes shall be used :a) Building mortar, cement and sand (1:4) andb) Mortar for pointing, cement and sand (1:3).The plasticiser shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

All mortar shall be used before the initial set has begun. Mortar shall not be remixed after the initial sethas taken place. The full description given in plasterwork shall apply also to the measuring, mixing, etc.,of mortar for blockwork.

2.4 Ancillary Items

(a) Damp Proof Courses

Damp proof course to block walls shall consist of one layer of tropical quality bitumised fiber felt dampproof course complying with Type B of BS 743 and weighing not less than 3.3. kg per square meter.

(b) Wall Ties

(i) Standard wall ties shall conform to the requirements of BS 1243.

(c) Movement Joints




Movement joint filler shall be 10 mm thick (unless specified otherwise) cellular non-absorbent low-density joint filler sealed on both sides with an approved polysulphide sealant complying with BS 4254.

(d) Special Blocks

(i) Special blocks for forming feature panels etc shall be to details shown on the Engineer's drawings.(ii) Claustra perforated blocks shall be constructed generally as for precast concrete blocks but perforated asindicated on drawings. They shall be formed in purpose made moulds to give faces finished fair to receivea paint finish without plastering.

Blocks may be constructed of either :a) White gypsum plaster.b) Concrete (1:2:5) orc) White concrete (1:2:5) using white Portland cement, and white aggregate as described in concrete

work and noted on the drawings or as described in the specification.

All blocks are to be finished with a fine finish to an approved ornamental pattern and shall be 100 mmthick unless otherwise noted, with slots in ends of blocks to adapt reinforcement bars.

Claustra wall will normally be built with vertical strength joints reinforced with 12 mm mild steel reinforcingbars vertically at each straight joint pinned to structure at each end and surrounded solid with mortar.

Blocks shall be bedded in a mixture of white cement and sand (1:4) and struck pointed to Engineer'sapproval.

(e) Reinforcement

(i) Expanded steel mesh joint reinforcement shall comply with BS 2989.(ii) Bar reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of the Concrete Specification.

(f) Cavity Wall Insulation

(i) Cavity wall insulation shall be preformed rigid boards of closed cell extruded polystyrene to BS 3837.(ii) Insulation board fixings shall be approved purpose made proprietary stainless steel wall ties complete

with polypropylene retaining clips.

3.0 BLOCKWORK - WORKMANSHIP

i.1 Construction

(i) When delivered to the site, concrete blocks shall be dry and shall be maintained in this dry condition bystock piling them on planks or other supports free from contact with the ground and if necessary bycovering them for protection against wetting. Blockwork shall be constructed in accordance with BS 5628and laid in a workmanlike manner with true and regular horizontal courses and staggered vertical jointswith walls and partitions bonded to one another at junctions and angles. All blockwork shall be set outand built to the dimensions shown on the drawings.

(ii) All joints shall be of consistent thickness (average 10 mm); all horizontal joints shall be properly leveland vertical joints shall be properly lined and quoins, jambs and other angles plumbed as the workproceeds.

(iii) Not more than five courses of blocks shall be laid in any one-day within any one section of walling.(iv) Cut blocks shall only be used where required for bonding purposes or to facilitate building in of other

components but shall not be used as a lintel bearing.(v) In hollow blocks, where required by the Engineer, hollows shall be only filled with concrete Grade 25

at ends of walls and jambs to openings below lintels, beams and slabs which bear on the wall. Fillingwith mortar or material other than that specified will not be accepted.

(vi) Walls shall be carried up regularly without leaving any part more than 4 courses lower than adjacentsections unless the permission of the Engineer is first obtained and work left at different levels shall beevenly stepped back.




(vii) In cavity wall construction one skin shall not be taken more than 3 courses above the adjacent skin.(viii) Blocks shall be soaked with water before being used and the tops of walls left off shall be well wetted

immediately prior to recommencement of work.(ix) The faces of walls shall be kept clean and free from mortar droppings and splashes.(x) All blocks shall be properly spread with mortar before being laid and all joints shall be thoroughly flushed

up solid through the full thickness of the wall at each course as the work proceeds.

(xi) Walls to be left unplastered shall have a fair face consisting of selected blocks pointed with a neatweathered or flush joint as the works proceed using the same mortar mix specified for jointing.(xii) Walls to be plastered shall have horizontal joints raked out to a depth of 15 mm to form a key for

rendering.(xiii) Blockwork shall be bonded to concrete columns and the like with 200 x 60 x 6 mm non ferrous metal ties

cast in concrete and subsequently bent down ragged and built into every course of blockwork. Gunningties to concrete will not be employed without the prior consent of the Engineer.

(xiv) Load bearing block walls shall be formed of blocks of the wall thickness stated in the particularspecifications and shall comply with CP 111 "structural recommendations for load bearing walls. ‖

Where the thickness of the wall needs to be increased over 200 mm the Contractor may either use blocksof the required thickness or use two or more skins solid grouted between, in mortar and adequately tiedtogether to suit the design conditions to the approval of the Engineer.

(xv) Joints for fair face (unplastered) block work shall be finished off with neat flush or grooved pointing. Thearises shall be well defined and of perfect rectangular shape.

(xvi) Blockwork over lintels shall be reinforced with two layers of expanded metal mesh well embedded in richmortar and extending for at least 250 mm at both ends of the lintels and sills.

(xvii) All block walls shall be bonded to adjacent R.C.C. / steel structures by means of galvanized mild steelcramps (hold fast) at every alternative course. Cramps shall comply with BS 1243, latest issue. Thecramps shall be at least 200 mm long with one end bent and the other shot fired into abutting concrete.

Alternatively cramps consisting of 12 mm high strength steel bars could be accepted. The bars shall beembedded in concrete for a depth of 150 mm and protruding by not less than 300 mm into the blockcourse.

(xviii) Concrete elements adjacent to block work shall be scrabbled and roughened to form a suitable key andinterlock with abutting blocks. Partitions shall be bonded to main walls by toothing or interlocking at everysecond course to a depth not less than 100 mm. Partitions where sanitary fittings or other equipment are

to be mounted shall be not less than 150 mm thick and suitably strengthened with grade 15 concrete.

3.2 Movement Joints

(i) The movement joint material and thickness shall be as specified and allowance shall be made for leavingtemporarily open courses immediately under all horizontal structural members and they shall be madegood and pointed up after the structural members have been fully loaded and before the completion ofthat section of the works.

(ii) The movement joint material shall be laid to the width appropriate to the walling with clean; even butt joints and the joint shall be kept clean of any material which may be detrimental to the operation of the joint.

(iii) Movement joints shall be sealed on both faces with an approved polysulphide sealant.

3.3 Cavity Walls

(i) In cavity wall construction the cavity shall be maintained at the width shown on the drawings or asspecified and shall be kept clean by efficient means throughout the construction of the walls and anyaccidental mortar droppings shall be prevented from adhering to cavity faces of walls, wall ties, cavitytrays or insulation. Internal faces of block work shall be pointed to allow for the correct application ofinsulation.

(ii) Wall ties shall be bedded minimum 50 mm in to each skin of walling and spaced 400 mm vertically and800 mm horizontally, and staggered, with additional ties within 200 mm of the sides of openings, atreveals, quoins, etc. The ties shall be of the butterfly twist type of no. 10 SWG mild steel wire zinc coatedand similar to those described in BS 1243. The length of the ties shall be approximately 80 mm less thanthe total thickness of the wall.

(iii) Cavity wall insulation shall be installed in accordance with BS 6676 Part 2 (as appropriate) and inaccordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

(iv) Insulation boards shall not, under any circumstances, be pushed into a cavity but shall be fixed tightly




against the insulated skin of walling, which shall be clean, using approved fixings.(v) Boards shall be tongue and groove jointed with staggered vertical joints and shall be evenly and

cleanly cut where required.(vi) Spacing of wall ties with retaining clips shall suit sizes of insulation boards so as to retain all edges but

not to be less than the requirements of Clause 2.3(ii).(vii) Allowance shall be made for leaving, temporarily, open courses immediately under all structural members

built into the walls. These open courses shall be left in the suitable positions to permit the structuralmembers to take up their full deflection. The open courses shall be made good and pointed up after thestructural members have been fully loaded and before the completion of the works.

(viii) Where the Contractor cannot obtain the required compressive strength in the hollow load bearing blockshe may with the approval of the Engineer obtain an adequate strength in the wall by one or more of thefollowing methods :

a) Manufacture the blocks as solid blocks to obtain the compressive strength, orb) Fill the cavities solid with concrete as the work proceeds, orc) Introduce reinforcement.

Subject to producing adequate design detail as required by the Engineer, all the variations inwork shall be done wholly at the Contractor's expense.

3.4 Labor

Arches shall be constructed in purpose made concrete solid blocks as appropriate to the size shown onthe drawings. The Contractor shall provide and erect temporary shuttering of timber construction andstrike and remove on completion.The Contractor shall cut and fit block work around steel work etc., leave or form chases for edges ofconcrete slabs, staircase, ends of partitions, etc., cut chases for pipes, conduits, etc., and make good.

No hollow blocks shall abut any built in fixtures, e.g. door and window frames, apertures and louvers, etc. All hollow blocks at jambs or doors and windows shall be filled in grade 15 concrete.

Door and window frames shall be bedded and exposed edges pointed in a sealant and fixing crampsshall be built in.

The Contractor shall perform all cutting away and making good for all trades.

3.5 Damp Proof Lining

(i) Where indicated on the drawings, approved damp proof courses shall be laid on and bedded in mortar incontinuous lengths as far as is practicable. Damp proof course in walls shall consist of one layer oftropical quality bitumenised fiber felt damp proof course complying with Type 3 of BS 743 weighing notless than 3.3 kg/m 3. The damp proof course shall be well lapped at corners and joints and bedded incement mortar (1:4) mix and pointed both sides.

(ii) Joints shall be lapped 200 mm in straight runs and for the full width at junctions and angles with themeeting surfaces sealed with bituminous waterproofing.

(iii) Where shown on drawings the Contractor shall similarly provide and build in a vertical damp proof courseat jambs of openings in cavity walls and a horizontal damp proof course above such openings and toparapet walls.

3.6 Reinforced Block Walls

(i) All blockwork exceeding 3 m high is to be reinforced with approved proprietary strip reinforcement fixedhorizontally in each alternate course and in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

(ii) Where noted on the drawings or in the specification reinforced block walls are to be constructed of hollowconcrete blocks grade P1 units to ASTM designation C90. The minimum compressive strength of theblocks shall be 7.0 N/m 2.

(iii) Mortar and grout for reinforced block shall conform to ASTM designation C476.

The mortar shall be grade 'S' mortar with a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 12.0 N/m 2. Themix proportions by volume of cement, hydrated lime to damp loose sand shall be 1 cement, minimum 1/4

to maximum 1/2 hydrated lime, and not less than 2 1/4 and not more than 3 times the sum of the volumesof cement and lime and sand.




The grout shall be composed by volume of 1:1 5:2 parts of cement, sand, and small size gravelrespectively. The grout shall have a fluid consistency, which means that consistency shall be as fluid aspossible for pouring without segregation of the constituent parts.

(iv) Steel bar reinforcement shall be in accordance with the relevant BS referred to in the concrete

specification. Wire reinforcement in bed joints shall conform to ASTM designation A305.(v) Field and preliminary testing procedures will be as follows:

a) Preliminary test results for mortar, grout, concrete blocks and block prisms in accordancewith following ASTM designation must be provided prior to masonry work commencing onsite.

b) Compressive tests on mortar and grout shall be carried out in accordance with ASTMDesignation C39. At least 6 samples shall be taken or otherwise as directed by theEngineer.

c) 10 no. preliminary block compression test results from each block manufacturer must besubmitted prior to work commencing on site. Once a particular supplier has been selectedand approved by the Engineer a further 10 blocks from each consignment delivered to thesite shall be tested.

d) 3 no. block prisms shall be made for each 500 sq. of block work constructed on site or foreach day of work if less than 500 m 2 is built per day.

The prism shall be made by bedding two blocks together with mortar and left undisturbed onsite for 7 days in protected position. After 7 days the prisms shall be carefully transported toan approved laboratory and tested in accordance with ASTM C39 method prism test.

(vi) All block work shall be laid true, level, plumb and neatly in accordance with the plans.

Units shall be cut accurately to fit all plumbing ducts, openings, electrical work, etc., and all holes shall beneatly patched up with suitable concrete or mortar.

Extreme care shall be taken to prevent visible grout or mortar stains.

No construction supports shall be attached to the wall except where specifically permitted by theEngineer.

(vii) Block units shall be sound, dry, clean and free from cracks when placed in the structure.

All block units should be stored on the site in a neat and clean condition and kept off the ground andprotected from rain. The surfaces of blocks may be wetted with a light mist spray.

Where block unit cutting is necessary, all cuts shall be neat and true.

(viii) Mortar shall be mixed by placing one-half of the water and sand in the operating mixer. Then add thecement lime and the remainder of the sand and water.

After all ingredients are in the batch mixer they shall be mechanically mixed for not less than 3 minutes.Hand mixing shall not be permitted unless specifically approved by the Engineer.

3.7 Bonding

For bonding the blockwork to the foundation the top surface of the concrete foundation shall be clean,with laitance removed and aggregate exposed before starting the block work construction.Where no bond pattern is shown, the walls shall be laid up in straight uniform courses with regularrunning bond.Intersecting blockwork walls and partitions shall be bonded by the use of galvanized steel ties of suitablesize and each two alternate course. Corners shall have a standard blockwork bond by overlapping units




and shall be solid grouted.

3.8 Jointing

The starting joint on foundations shall be laid with full mortar coverage on the bed. D.P.C. shall beprovided if specified. Mortar joints shall be straight, clean, and uniform in thickness and shall be tooled as

shown on the plans. All walls shall have joints tooled with a round bar (or V-shaped bar) to produce adense, slightly concave surface well bonded to the block at the edges, unless specifically detailedotherwise. Tooling shall be done when the mortar is partially set but still sufficiently plastic to bond.Raked joints shall be not more than 12 mm deep and where exposed to the weather shall be tooled.Where walls are to receive plaster the joints shall be struck flush.Where joints are to be concealed under paint, these joints shall be filled flush and then pressed toproduce a dense surface without sheen. Joints, which are not tight at the time of tooling, shall be rakedout, pointed, and then tooled. Unless otherwise specified or detailed on the drawings, in hollow unitblockwork the horizontal and vertical mortar joints shall be 10 mm thick with full mortar coverage on theface shells and on the webs surrounding cells to be filled with grout. If it is necessary to move a unit afterit has been once set in place, the unit shall be removed from the wall, cleaned and set in fresh mortar.Concrete building bricks shall be laid with full head and bed joints.

3.9 Reinforcing Generally

a) When a foundation dowel does not line up with a vertical core it shall not be sloped more than onehorizontal in six vertical. Dowels shall be grouted into a core in vertical wall reinforcing.

b) Reinforcing bars shall be straight except for bonds around corners and where bonds or hooks aredetailed on the drawings.

c) Reinforcing steel shall be lapped 30 bars diameters minimum where spliced, and shall be separated byone bar diameter or wired together.

d) Vertical bars shall be held in position at top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 192 diameters ofthe reinforcement.

e) Horizontal reinforcing bars shall be placed in continuous blockwork courses, consisting of bond beam ortrough block units and shall be solidly grouted in place.

f) Vertical reinforcing steel shall have a minimum clearance of 6 mm from the blockwork and not less thanone bar diameter between bars.

g) Wire reinforcement shall be completely embedded in mortar or grout. Joints with wire reinforcement shallbe at least twice the thickness of the wire.

h) Wire reinforcement shall be lapped at least 150 mm at splices and shall contain at least one cross wire ofeach piece of reinforcement in the lapped distance.

3.10 Reinforcing Details

a) All reinforced block walls shall be reinforced with one Y12 vertical bar at 800 mm C/C in solid groutedcells. One additional Y12 bar shall be placed at ends of walls, wall returns, wall intersections and oneach side of all openings. Short lengths of walls or at beam supports may require additionalreinforcement and this should be provided as shown on the drawings.

b) Horizontal reinforcement in the walls shall consist of two Y12 continuous bars in solid grouted bondbeams at the top of foundations, at mid height of the walls and at the underside of floor/roof slabs. TwoY12 bars grouted bond beams shall also be provided at the top and bottom of all openings and shallextend 800 mm past such openings. Galvanized trussed wire reinforcement shall also be provided in thebed joint every third course.

3.11 Grouting Generally

a) Reinforcing steel shall be secured in place and inspected before grouting starts.

b) Mortar dropping should be kept out of the grout space.

c) All grout shall be puddled or vibrated in place.

d) Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment to maintain a continuous unobstructed cell area not




less than 50 mm x 75 mm.

e) Cells containing reinforcement shall be solidly filled with grout and pours shall be stopped 30 mm belowthe top of a course to form a key at pouring joints.

f) Grouting of beams over openings shall be done in one continuous operation.

g) The top of unfilled cell columns under a horizontal bond beam shall be covered with metal lath or specialunits shall be used to confirm the grout fill to the beam section.

h) All bolts, anchors, etc., inserted in the walls shall be solid grouted in place.

3.12 Low Lift Grouting

In hollow unit blockwork low lift grouting, the structure shall be grouted in heights of less than 1200 mm.In double thickness blockwalls low lift grouting, the wall shall be grouted in heights of less than 200 mm or6 times the grout joint thickness, whichever is less.

3.13 High Lift Grouting

a) Cleaning holes shall be provided at the bottom of all cores containing vertical reinforcement in hollow unitblockwork and in double thickness blockwork shall be provided by omitting alternate units on the firstcourse of one skin.

b) Excess projections and mortar droppings shall be cleaned out of the grout space and off the reinforcingsteel with a jet stream of water or as required to clean the space.

c) All grout shall be consolidated at time of pouring by puddling or vibrating and then reconsolidating by laterpuddling before the plasticity has become low.

d) The minimum dimension of the grout space shall be 50 mm.

e) Double thickness blockwork shall cure at least 3 days and hollow unit blockwork shall cure at least 48hours before grouting.

f) Grout shall be poured to not more than 1200 mm depth, then wait approximately 1 hour and pour another1200 mm depth. The full height in each section of the wall shall be poured in one day.

g) Vertical grout barriers or dams shall be built across the grout space of double thickness blockwork to theentire height of the wall to control the flow of grout horizontally. These barriers shall be less than 7.6 mon center.

h) All reinforcing steel shall be inspected in place before grouting and there shall be continuous inspectionduring the grouting operation.

i) In double thickness blockwork wire ties consisting of no. 9 wire rectangles, shall connect the skins andshall be spaced not more than 300 mm o.c. vertically for stacked bond, not more than 600 mm o.c.vertically for running bond, and not more than 800 mm o.c. horizontally.

3.14 Special Notes

a) On no account may any reinforced blockwall be cut or chased out to accommodate conduits, water pipes,etc.

All conduits requiring to be built into the wall shall be placed in an unreinforced cell as work proceeds. Allsuch cells containing conduits, water pipes, etc., shall be solid grouted.

b) All block work walls denoted on the drawings or in the particular conditions as 'reinforced' blockwalls shallin any case comply with the following minimum requirements.

i) Blocks are to have compressive strength of 7 N/m 2.




ii) Walls are to be reinforced as noted on the drawings or in the absence of detailed requirements theminimum reinforcement provided shall be horizontal reinforcement as noted in Clause 8.01 together withone 12 mm mild steel bar set vertically per 0.4 m 2 (or part hereof) horizontal section area of blockworkwall pinned to structure at each end and spaced evenly along length of wall.

iii) Mortar mix to be 1 part cement to 1/2 part hydrated lime to 4 parts sand.

iv) The reinforcement is to be solidly grouted in with cement mortar of fine aggregate concrete with acompressive strength of 14 N.

v) The grouting is to be thoroughly compacted and executed in lifts not exceeding 120 mm high, with 1 hour(minimum) interval between lifts but with full height of wall to be completed in one day.




SECTION 9: WATER PROOFING

A. BASEMENT WATERPROOFING

A1 GENERAL

A1.1 SCOPE OF WORKS

a. Supply and installation of waterproofing system to all concrete surfaces from slab on grade level downto concrete blinding below basement slab including pile caps, retaining walls, underground lift pits,water tanks and pile heads

b. Supply and installation of 3 channel re-injectable hose in construction joints.

c. Supply and installation of injectable water stops in expansion joints as applicable.

A1.2 APPROVED SUBCONTRACTORS

Waterproofing shall be applied by a franchised applicator of the waterproofingmembrane manufacturer, having not less than ten years of proven experience in this type of work andclimatic condition and who has the necessary equipment and skilled labor to carry out the worksatisfactorily.

A1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

a. Substrate condition: Have subcontractors representative approve conditions of Substrates prior to theapplication of waterproofing. Rectify conditions as necessary, to obtain subcontrac tor‘s

representative‘s approval.

b. Subcontractor‘s representative: Have subcontractor‘s technical representative present during theperformance of the work as necessary to ensure proper preparation of substrate and installation ofwaterproofing.

c. All waterproofing works and related protection shall be done by the same approved applicator.

A1.4 SUBMITTALS

a. Product Data: Provide manufacturer‘s printed material specifications and membrane installationinstructions, including methods and materials used for terminations, penetrations, flashing, protection,

compatibility and bonding.

b. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings indicating installation details.

c. Samples:

2. Membrane: Provide three 100 mm x 100 mm samples of membrane.3. Protection board: Provide three 100 mm x 100 mm samples of protection board.4. Injection hose: Provide 3x300 mm length samples of injection hose and related accessories.

d. Certification:

2. Submit manufacturer‘s certification/approval for the installer of waterproofing system.

3. Submit waterproofing subcontractor qualifications indicating related experience and equipmentand manpower available.




4. Submit manufacturer‘s certification stating materials supplied are compatible with each other.

A1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

1. Store materials in dry area out of direct sunlight and as directed by the materials manufacturers.

2. Do not use old materials or materials damaged in handling and storage.

A1.6 WARRANTY

1. Furnish written warranty of materials and workmanship for the complete water tightness of thebasement.

2. Warranty shall be signed by the applicator agreeing to repair or replace defects in material andworkmanship and failure of waterproofing to prevent water from entering into the building for a periodof twenty years from date of the Defects Liability Certificate.

3. The warranty must be backed up by the manufacturer and Insurance Co.

A2 PRODUCTS

A2.1 MATERIALS

1. Membrane: A homogeneous 20% SBS modified elastomeric bituminous membrane 5 mm thick non-reinforced with no fillers such as FLEXOBIT by M/S BITUFA HOLLAND, U.A.E. distributor andapproved applicator M/s Western International, P.O. Box 73820, Dubai, U.A.E.

MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS

Subject Test Method Unit Tolerance Nominal ValueThickness EN 1849-1 mm +/15% 5,0

Length EN 1848-1 M -1% 5,0Width EN 1848-1 M +/-1% 1,0Mass per m² EN 1849-1 G/m² +10%/ 5200Bitumen quantity total NEN 2087 G/m² -0 4000Filler content % +5 0Mass variation inwidth direction

NEN 2087 - +0,20 1,0

Flow temperature EN 1110 C -0 100Flow temp. after ageing EN 1110 /

EN 1296C -0 85

Cold bendingtemperature

NEN 1109 C +0 -25

Cold bendingtemperature after ageing

EN 1110 /EN 1296 C +0 -20

Tensile strength at 750%elongation *length

*widthISO 37ISO 37

N/mm²N/mm²

+/-0,2+/-0,2

0,40,4

Elongation at breaklengthElongation at break width

ISO 37ISO 37

%%

-0-0

10001000

2. Horizontal Protection: Membrane on 75 mm of lean blinding concrete, with protective 50 mm screedon top of the membrane.




3. Vertical Protection: Ensure protective boards are of sufficient strength of preformed semi rigid boardto withstand pressure loads and provide absolute protection to membrane.

a. Against backfill -such as 8mm studded hdpe drainage protection sheet Delta MS

b. Against concrete-such as 6mm impregnated bituminous protection board

4. Primer: As recommended by the membrane manufacturer and formulated to ensure bond of themembrane to the substrate.

5. Sealant: Hot applied SBS sealant, cold applied bituminous or approved equivalent at membranetermination.

6. Metal flashings: 09 mm thick aluminium flashings at membrane terminations.

7. Injection Hose: The injection hose is to be re-injectable 3 channel hose such as TRIOJECT or equalapproved. The Injection hose must be a flat hose consisting of 3 injection channels capable of beinginjected independently of each other as and when required.

8. Injection resin: The injection resin must be MC-INJEKTOPRESS 2300 NV or equal approved. Theresin must be 2 component polyurethane suitable for flexible crack injection and sealing with thefollowing properties.

Viscosity: 100 mPasPot life: 100 minutesShore A Hardness: 50Crack width penetration: down to 0.1 mm

9. Injection equipment: The pump to be used for injection must be a air driven one component highpressure injection pump with an injection pressure of up to 390 bar. The injection pump must be

connected with a suitable gauge to control the pressure as required to enable a thorough injectionprocess.

10. Cable/pipe Sealing compound: One part water and gas tight sealing compound to seal cablepenetration and other pipe penetration through sleeve openings in the waterproofing. The sealingcompound shall remain flexible forever to enable new cables or pipes to be conducted through theopenings. The sealing compound shall be STOPAQ or approved equivalent.

A3 EXECUTION

A3.1 INSPECTION

1. Ensure substrates are dry, clean, smooth, and free of matter and conditions detrimental to bond andperformance of the membrane.

2. Verify that substrate and concrete blinding substrate are smooth, sound and suitable to acceptwaterproofing.

3. Ensure all items to be installed by other trades which require penetrations through the waterproofingmembrane are placed prior to the application of the membrane.

A3.2 PREPARATION

1. Compl y with membrane manufacturer‘s instructions for preparation of substrate. Sweep substrate asnecessary to remove laitence, loose materials, and other contaminants which will have detrimentaleffect on membrane. Grind smooth all concrete ridges and irregularities.




2. Fill voids and cracks in substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer. Make substratessmooth.

3. Prime vertical substrates and other substrates where membrane is to be applied as recommended bymembrane manufacturer for optimum adhesion of materials.

4. Allow primer to dry minimum 24 hours before application of the membrane waterproofing.

5. All pipe penetrations shall be fitted with an approved pipe sleeve with a welded flange bolted andsealed to structural concrete.

6. Groove or approved provision for membrane termination at grade shall be available.

7. All external corners shall be rounded or chamfered. All internal corners shall receive a 40x40 mmmortar fillet.

A3.3 INSTALLATION

1. MEMBRANE:

a. Install membrane in strict compliance with manufacturer ‘s instructions.

b. Apply membrane free of wrinkles and free of wavy edges.

c. Extend membrane full height of basement walls and over entire horizontal basement and ground floorarea around tie beams, under slab on grade etc. as shown on drawings. Extend membrane undertrenches, pits and depressions.

d. Apply membrane fully torched onto surfaces as directed by manufacturer except horizontal surfacewhere membrane should be loose laid faulty seams.

e. All lap joints of sheets, to be torched and welded, with 100 mm side laps and end laps fully torched. Apply heat to both sides of the overlaps in proper order and immediately press the overlaps tight.

f. Have subcontractor‘s technical representative thoroughly check all seams repair .

g. For all details of corners, membrane termination, pipe penetration, pile head treatment and the like,refer to the technical documents and approved shop drawings and provide collars, metal clamps,sealant, etc. as required.

h. Extend membrane under bases before columns are placed and make watertight seal to all anchor

rods passing through the membrane.

i. Make watertight seals to all items passing through the membrane such as ties, anchors, pipes, etc. toovercome any water penetration.

j. Use special sealants such as STOPAQ to seal cable and pipes through preinstalled sleeves.

2. PROTECTION SCREED

Apply 50 mm uniform thickness of screed over waterproofing membrane which is placed horizontallyon the concrete blinding. Do not extend the screed over concrete pile heads.

3. PROTECTION BOARD




1. Apply protection board onto membrane on all vertical and sloping surfaces to protect thewaterproofing from damages due to placing and the vibrating of the concrete, and to reduce dragdown on the membrane by the placing action of the concrete.

2. Apply full coverage and butt joints between boards, to moderate contacts.

3. Spot adhere the protection boards to the membrane with daubs of adhesive of type approved by themembrane manufacturer.

A3.4 PILE HEAD WATERPROOFING

Refer to waterproofing details and carry out waterproofing accordingly.

A3.5 INJECTION HOSE IN CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

1. The injection hose must have a foam pad on the bottom assuring continuous full width access to thesurface of the concrete.

2. The injection hose must be firmly secured in position and protected by means of a steel mesh.

3. The injection hose shall be placed preferably at the center of the construction joint for concretesections up to 50 cm thick.

4. The injection points must be specially designed proprietary packers installed at a spacing notexceeding 8 m.

A3.6 DEWATERING SYSTEM SWITCH OFF

1. Waterproof all temporary openings. Prior to dewatering switch off, repair all cracks below grade level

as per concrete crack repair section and inject one of the channels of the Trioject injection hose usingthe approved low viscosity polyurethane resin.

B. FOUNDATION WATERPROOFING FOR BURIED FOOTINGS, TIE BEAMS, NECK COLUMNS,SLAB ON GRADE etc.

B1. GENERAL

B1.1 SCOPE OF WORKS

1. Supply and installation of waterproofing system to all concrete surfaces from slab On grade level ,buried footings, tie beams, and neck columns.

B1.2 APPROVED SUBCONTRACTORS

1. Waterproofing shall be applied by a franchised applicator of the waterproofing Membranemanufacturer, having not less than ten years of proven experience in this type of work and climaticcondition and who has the necessary equipment and skilled labor to carry out the work satisfactorily.

B1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Substrate condition: Have subcontractors representative approve conditions of substrates prior to theapplication of waterproofing. Rectify conditions as necessary, to obtain subcontractorsrepresentative‘s approval.




2. Subcontractor‘s representative: Have subcontractor‘s technical representative present during theperformance of the work as necessary to ensure proper preparation of substrate and installation ofwaterproofing.

3. All waterproofing works and related protection shall be done by the same approved applicator.

B1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Product Data: Provide manufacturer‘s printed materi al specifications and membrane installationinstructions, including methods and materials used for protection, compatibility and bonding.

2. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings indicating installation details.

3. Samples:

a. Membrane: Provide three 100 mm x 100 mm cured samples of membrane.

b. Protection board: Provide three 100 mm x 100 mm sample of protection board.

4. Certification:

a. Submit manufacturer‘s certification/approval for the installer of waterproofing system.

b. Submit waterproofing subcontractor qualifications indicating related experience and equipment andmanpower available.

c. Submit manufacturer‘s certification stating materials supplied are compatible with each other.

B1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING



B1.6 WARRANTY

1. Furnish written warranty of materials and workmanship for the complete water.

2. Warranty shall be signed by the applicator agreeing to repair or replace defects in material andworkmanship and failure of waterproofing to prevent water from entering into the building for a periodof ten years from date of the Defects Liability Certificate.

B2 PRODUCTS

B2.1 MATERIALS

1. 3 mm thick two-component SBS modified bitumen compound with special hydraulically hardeningfillers, free from solvents and asbestos fibers. Approved product, NAFUFLEX 2K as manufactured byMC-BAUCHEMIE MULLER, and distributor and approved applicator M/s Western international. P.OBox:73820 Dubai. UAE.

2. Material Specifications

Performance specifications




Chemical resistance Sulphur dioxide,Carbon dioxide,chlorides,weakacids,sulphates and ground salt water

Flash Point >200 degrees CelsiusCrack bridging >10mm

Flexibility 360 degrees, 10mm radius mandrelBond strength Min 0.2N/mm2

Concrete Curing 90% efficiencyPermeability 2mm thickness, 5 bar

3. Horizontal Protection for slab on grade: 50 mm screed on top of the membrane.

4. Vertical Protection: Ensure protective boards are of sufficient strength of preformed semi rigid boardto withstand pressure loads and provide absolute protection to membrane such as a 3 mm thickbitumen impregnated protection board.

5. Cable/pipe Sealing compound: One part water and gas tight sealing compound to seal cablepenetration and other pipe penetration through sleeve openings in the waterproofing. The sealingcompound shall remain flexible forever to enable new cables or pipes to be conducted through theopenings. The sealing compound shall be STOPAQ or approved equivalent.

B3 EXECUTION

B3.1 INSPECTION



3. Ensure all items to be installed by other trades which require penetrations through the waterproofingmembrane are placed prior to the application of the membrane.

B3.2 PREPARATION

1. Comply with membrane manufacturer‘s instructions for preparation of substrate sweep substrate asnecessary to remove laitence, loose materials, and other contaminants which will have detrimentaleffect on membrane. Grind smooth all concrete ridges and irregularities.

2. Fill voids and cracks in substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer. Make substrates

smooth.3. Prime vertical substrates and other substrates where membrane is to be applied as recommended by

membrane manufacturer for optimum adhesion of materials.4. Allow primer to dry minimum 24 hours before application of the membrane waterproofing.5. All pipe penetrations shall be fitted with an approved pipe sleeve with a welded flange bolted and

sealed to structural concrete.

B3.3 INSTALLATION

1. MEMBRANE:

a. Install membrane in strict compliance with manufacturer‘s instructions.




b. Have subcontractor‘s technical representative thoroughly check all seams. Repair.

c. For all details of corners, membrane termination, pipe penetration, pile head treatment and thelike, refer to the technical documents and approved shop drawings and provide collars, metalclamps, sealant, etc as required.

d. Extend membrane under bases before columns are placed and make watertight seal to all anchorrods passing through the membrane.

e. Make watertight seals to all items passing through the membrane such as ties, anchors, pipes,etc. to overcome any water penetration.

f. Use special sealants such as STOPAQ to seal cable and pipes through preinstalled sleeves.

2. PROTECTION SCREED

Apply 50 mm uniform thickness of screed over waterproofing membrane which is placed horizontallyon the concrete blinding.

3. PROTECTION BOARD

1. Apply protection board onto membrane on all vertical and sloping surfaces to protect thewaterproofing from damages due to placing and the vibrating of the concrete, and to reduce drag-down on the membrane by the placing action of the concrete.

2. Apply full coverage and butt joints between boards, to moderate contacts.

3. Spot adhere the protection boards to the membrane with daubs of adhesive of type approved bythe membrane manufacturer.

C. WET AREAS WATERPROOFING

C1 GENERAL

C1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1. Supply and installation of waterproofing membrane to floors of washrooms, kitchens, and otherlocations as shown on the drawings and schedules.

C1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Applicator: Having not less than Ten years of proven experience in work of this section and

approved by the manufacturer of the waterproofing.

C1.3 INSPECTION AND TESTING

1. Prior to concealing of the waterproofing, the Contractor shall give the Engineer written notice thatthe installation of the waterproofing has been inspected and approved by the waterproofingSubcontractor and by himself.

2. Subsequent work will not be permitted until the above inspection and tests have been carried outto the Engineer‘s approval.




C1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Product data: Submit manufacturer‘s specifications, installation instructions and recommendationsfor waterproofing material and related components. Include data substantiating that materialscomply with specified requirements.

2. Samples: Submit cured film samples of waterproofing applied to concrete substrate.

C1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

1. Deliver materials to site undamaged in original sealed containers. Store materials in dry area outof direct sunlight, at temperatures within manufacturer‘s recommended temperature range.

C1.6 EXTENDED WARRANTY

1. Provide an extended warranty for a period of ten years from date of the Defects LiabilityCertificate, against faulty workmanship and materials.

2. Upon written notification from the Engineer that the membrane waterproofing is defective promptlyrepair or replace the defective work.

C1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

1. Substrate: Proceed with work of this Section only after substrate construction and penetrations work iscompleted. Ensure substrate is sufficiently dry to prevent pin holing of membrane and to prevent lackof bond of membrane to substrate.

2. Protect works of others from damage due to work of this Section.

C2 PRODUCTS

C2.1 MATERIALS

1. Product Description

All wet areas shall be waterproofed using a fluid applied, 3 mm thick .two-component SBS modifiedbitumen compound with special hydraulically hardening fillers, free from solvents and asbestos fibers.

Approved product, NAFUFLEX 2K as manufactured by MC-BAUCHEMIE MULLER, GERMANYU.A.E. distributor and approved applicator M/s Western International, P.O. Box 73820, Dubai, U.A.E.

2. Performance specifications


Flash Point >200 degrees CelsiusCrack bridging >10mmFlexibility 360 degrees, 10mm radius mandrelBond strength Min 0.2N/mm2





C3. EXECUTION

C3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

1. Ensure substrate is completely dry to approval of waterproofing manufacturer.

2. Make substrates free of latence, form oils, cure and seal compounds and other substancesdetrimental to bond. Any ridges and concrete irregularities shall be ground smooth.

3. At intersections with vertical surfaces (upstands, wall, etc….) a suitable cant strip shall be built as permanufacturer‘s recommendations.

4. All shrinkage, cold pour joints and non-moving structural cracks should be pre-treated as permanufacturer‘s re commendations.

5. PVC plumbing shall be primed with a suitable primer as per manufacturer‘s recommendation.

C3.2 INSTALLATION

1. Application

a. Prime substrate with a solution of 1 part NAFUFLEX 2 K with 10 parts of clean water applied bybrush.

b. Coating shal l be applied as per manufacturer‘s instructions, to a minimum thickness of 3 mmunless shown otherwise in drawings or indicated in the bill of quantities.

c. Allow membrane to cure for 36 hours before flood test.

d. Flood with a minimum of 25.4 mm (1‘‘) of wat er for 48 hours. Drains should be plugged andbarriers placed to contain the water.

e. If any leaks occur, repair the membrane as per manufacturer‘s instructions.

D. CONCRETE ROOFS

D1 GENERAL

D1.1 SCOPE OF WORKS

1. Supply and installation of roof waterproofing system to all concrete roof slabs to keep water out ofbuilding and to provide thermal insulation.

D1.2 APPROVED SUBCONTRACTORS

Waterproofing shall be applied by a franchised applicator of the waterproofing membranemanufacturer, having not less than Fifteen years of proven experience in this type of work and climaticcondition and who has the necessary equipment and skilled labor to carry out the work satisfactorily.

D1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Substrate condition: Have subcontractors representative approve conditions of Substrates prior to theapplication of waterproofing. Rectify conditions as Necessary to obtain subcontractor‘srepresentative‘s approval.




2. Subcontractor‘s representative: Have subcontractor‘s technical representative Present durin g theperformance of the work as necessary to ensure proper Preparation of substrate and installation ofwaterproofing.

3. All waterproofing works and related protection shall be done by the same approved applicator.

D1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Product Data: Provide manufacturer‘s printed specifications and membrane Installation instructions,including methods and materials used for terminations, penetrations, flashing, protection, compatibilityand bonding.

2. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings indicating installation details.

3. Sample: Provide 3 samples of all items specified.

4. Certification:

a. Submit manufacturer‘s certification/approval for the installer of waterproofing system .b. Submit waterproofing subcontractor qualifications indicating related experience and equipment

and manpower available.c. Submit manufacturer‘s certification stating materials supplied are compatible with each other.

D1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING



D1.6 EXTENDED WARRANTY

1. Furnish written warranty of materials and workmanship for the complete water tightness of the Roof.

2. Warranty shall be signed by the applicator agreeing to repair or replace defects in and workmanshipand failure of waterproofing to prevent water from entering into the building: for a period of twentyyears from date of the Defects Liability.

3. Certificate. The guarantee must be backed by the manufacturer and an Insurance company.

D2 PRODUCTS

D2.1 MATERIALSWATERPROOFING & THERMAL INSULATION COVERING ROOF AREA :

Preparation: Clean the entire substrate with compressed air prior to application.

Roofing System Covering: “Combo -Roof System” by Roof Care Co. L.L. C.First Layer: 100mm Polyfoam of minimum density 48Kg/M3Polytex liquid electrometric u.v. coatingPolyfab filter membraneScreed to falls 1:120 minimum recommendedPolyboard filler boardBacking rod & Polyseal PS to all construction joints

Combotex HR Solar Reflective Material top1st Layer: POLYFOAMGrade: Spray




Average thickness: 80-100 mm to comply with Authority U-Value requirementCore density: 45-50kg/M3Comp. strength: 2.5kg/cm2Tensile strength: 3kg/cm2Thermal conductivity: 0.0213W/(mk) (aged value)Closed cells: 98%

Standards: BS 5241-part 12nd Layer: POLYTEXGrade: Brush applyDensity: 1.2gm/ccpH: 8 - 8.5Solid content: 60%Elongation: 300%Standards: BS 476 – 3

3rd Layer: POLYFABGrade: Filter membraneMass: 120gm/M2Thickness: 1.5mmElongation: 50%

Color: White.4th Layer: SHOTCRETE (Recommended fall 1:100)

Grade: Pouring Admix: CORMIX P9Mix class: 350 OPCSlump: 125+/-25mmDensity: 2.5kg/ltr

5th Layer: POLYTEX HRGrade: Brush applySpecific gravity: 1.0-1.05Water penetration: NilStandards: BS 1881 Part 5Solar Index: Minimum 78

Construction joints: POLYBOARDGrade: Impregnated filler boardThickness: 12mmDensity: 220kg/M3Standards: BS 1142

Construction joints: POLYSEAL PSGrade: PouringSolid content: 100%Temperature Resistance: -20 0C to 120 0CElongation: 400 %( at break)Standards: BS 6920 - 88

D3 EXECUTION

D3.1 INSPECTION



3. Ensure all items to be installed by other trades that require penetrations through the waterproofingmembrane are placed prior to the application of the membraneVerify that light weight screed slopes positively to drains.




D3.2 PREPARATION

a) General

1. Comply with membrane manufacturer‘s instr uctions for preparation of substrate.

2. Sweep substrate as necessary to remove laitence, loose materials, and other contaminants which willhave detrimental effect on membrane. Grind smooth all concrete ridges and irregularities.

3. Fill voids and cracks in substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer.

4. Prime vertical substrates and other substrates where membrane is to be applied as recommended bymembrane manufacturer for optimum adhesion of materials. Allow primer to dry minimum 24 hoursbefore application of the membrane waterproofing.

5. All pipe penetrations shall be fitted with an approved pipe sleeve with a welded flange bolted andsealed to structural concrete.

6. Groove or approved provision for membrane termination at up stands shall be available.

7. All external corners shall be rounded or chamfered. All internal corners shall receive a 40x40 mmmortar fillet.

D3.3 INSTALLATION

a) MEMBRANE:

1. Install membrane in strict compliance with manufacturer‘s instructions. 2. Apply membrane free of wrinkles and free of wavy edges.

3. Apply membrane fully torched onto surfaces as directed by manufacturer except horizontal surfacewhere membrane should be loose laid.

4. All lap joints of sheets, to be torched and welded, with 100 mm side laps and end laps fully torched. Apply heat to both sides of the overlaps in proper order and immediately press the overlaps tight.

5. Have subcontractor‘s technical representative thoroughly check all seams. Repair faulty seams.

6. For all details of corners, membrane termination, pipe penetration, refer to the technical documentsand approved shop drawings and provide reinforcing strips, collars, metal clamps, sealant, etc asrequired.

7. Make watertight seals to all items passing through the membrane such as vent pipes, etc. toovercome any water penetration.

b) MEMBRANE FLASHING

1. Install membrane flashing in strict compliance with manufacturer‘s instructions. Bond membraneflashing fully to the substrate. Extend membrane flashings minimum 150 mm out onto the roofingmembrane. Extend membrane up vertical surfaces to extent shown. Lap joints of sheets and ensure

joints are sealed water and air tight, free of fish mouths and other defect.

2. Flash items such as pipes and other items passing through membrane watertight.

3. Flash membrane into drains.

4. Install fillers around penetrations and fill pocket with no shrink grout and liquid sealer.

c) TERMINATIONS




1. Provide water cutoffs at end of each day‘s work .

2. Pull membrane loose from water cutoff and remove contaminated material before resuming work.

d) INSTALLATION – METAL FLASHING

1. Install metal flashings at membrane termination where indicated on the drawings.

2. Do not install metal flashing until all membrane flashings have been inspected and approved by theConsultant and membrane manufacturer.

3. Join flashings in a lock-jointed arrangement which will allow for expansion and contraction, faces freefrom buckling, warp, wave, dents, oil-canning, or other defects.

4. Provide metal drips, cleats, clips and starter strips as shown or required, of sufficient thickness to holdflashings in true planes and position without deformations.

5. Where aluminum is in contacts with cementitious materials, coat the back of the aluminum withbituminous paint to prevent corrosion.

e) INSULATION

1. Place 50 mm thick insulation directly on membrane, tightly butt boards, and stagger end joints. Cutinsulation to shape and maintain 12 mm maximum clearance from projections and cants.

f) PRECAST CONCRETE PAVERS

1. Immediately after installation of insulation, loose lay the separation sheet (water pervious fabric) overinsulation .Lapping sheets minimum 300mm.

2. Install precast concrete pavers level on paver seats or mortar as indicated in drawings with joints buttto moderate contact.

g) FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Membrane manufacturer‘s representative shall verify warranty requirements are achieved.

2. Flood test membrane 24 hours minimum following completion of membrane installation and prior toinsulation installation.

3. Restrict water runoff from membrane area by plugging drains and creating dams or dikes. Floodrestricted area to depth for 24 hours.

4. Repair any leaks which develop and retest.

5. At completion of flood test, remove drain plugs.

6. Coordinate inspection and testing activities described above with the Engineer.

h) CLEANING

1. Clean stains from adjacent surfaces with cleaning agent.

2. Remove masking protection, equipment, material, and debris from roof and storage area.

E. WATERSTORAGE TANKS WATERPROOFING

E1 GENERAL




E1.1 SCOPE OF WORKS

Supply and installation of waterproofing system to floors , walls and soffits of water tanks

E1.2 APPROVED SUBCONTRACTORS

Waterproofing shall be applied by a franchised applicator of the waterproofing membranemanufacturer, having not less than ten years of proven experience in this type of work and climaticcondition and who has the necessary equipment and skilled labor to carry out the work satisfactorily.

E1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Manufacturer‘s printed material specifications and

2. Installation instructions, including methods and materials used

3. Penetrations, flashing, protection, compatibility and bonding.

4. Shop drawings indicating installation details.

5. Provide three 100 mm x 100 mm samples of the liner..

E1.4 CERTIFICATION

1. Submit manufacturer‘s certification/ap proval for the installer of waterproofing system.

2. Submit waterproofing subcontractor qualifications indicating related experience and equipment andmanpower available.

3. Submit manufacturer‘s certification stating materials supplied are compatible with eac h other.

4. Submit manufacturers and resin suppliers certificate that the proposed liner is suitable for potablewater.

E1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING



E1.6 WARRANTY

1. Furnish written warranty of materials and workmanship for the complete water tightness of the watertank.

2. Warranty shall be signed by the applicator agreeing to repair or replace defects in material andworkmanship and failure of waterproofing to prevent water from leaking out from the water tank for aperiod of 10 years.

E2 PRODUCTS

E2.1 MATERIALS

1. Cast in HDPE liner with anchors such as 3mm thick Anchor knob sheet with 1150 knobs per sqm from




Anchor Lining systems, South Africa.

Technical data

.Minimum Pull Strength 35Kgs (per Anchor)

Density ASTM D1505 0.94g/mlYield stress ASTM D 638 Type 4 15MpaBreak stress ASTM D 638 Type 4 27 MpaYield elongation ASTM D 638 Type 4 12%Break elongation ASTM D 638 Type 4 700%Tear resistance ASTM D 1004 120N/mm

Puncture Resistance ASTM D 4833 300N/mm

E3 INSTALLATION

E3.1 Concrete Protection liner AKS should be installed to structures in the longest possible vertical panelsto limit horizontal joints.

E3.2 The sheets must be well secured against the formwork to avoid movement or displacement when theconcrete is poured.

E3.3 Care must be taken to avoid damage to the lining, as any damage will need to be located andrepaired.

E3.4 All installation and welds must be carried as per manufacturer‘s guidelines.

F. DAMPROOFING BEHIND EXTERNAL CLADDING

F1 GENERAL

F1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

Supply and installation of waterproofing membrane to exterior shell of concrete/blockworksuperstructure behind GRC cladding and other locations as shown on the drawings and schedules.

F1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Applicator: Having not less than Ten years of proven experience in work of this section and approvedby the manufacturer of the waterproofing.

F1.3 INSPECTION AND TESTING

Prior to concealing of the waterproofing, the Contractor shall give the Engineer written notice that theinstallation of the waterproofing has been inspected and approved by the waterproofing Subcontractorand by himself. Subsequent work will not be permitted until the above inspection and tests have beencarried out to the Engineer‘s approval.

F1.4 SUBMITTALS




1. Product data: Submit manufacturer‘s specifications, installation instructions and recommen dations forwaterproofing material and related components. Include data substantiating that materials comply withspecified requirements.

2. Samples: Submit cured film samples of waterproofing applied to concrete substrate.

F1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

Deliver materials to site undamaged in original sealed containers.Store materials in dry area out of direct sunlight, at temperatures within manufacturer‘s recommendedtemperature range.

F1.6 EXTENDED WARRANTY

1. Provide an extended warranty for a period of ten years from date of the Defects Liability Certificate,against faulty workmanship and materials.

2. Upon written notification from the Engineer that the membrane waterproofing is defective promptly

repair or replace the defective work.

F1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

Substrate: Proceed with work of this Section only after substrate construction and Penetrations workis completed. Ensure substrate is sufficiently dry to prevent pinholing of membrane and to preventlack of bond of membrane to substrate.

Protect works of others from damage due to work of this Section.

F2 PRODUCTS

F2.1 MATERIALS

1. Product Description

1.7 mm thick .two-component SBS modified bitumen compound with special hydraulically hardeningfillers, free from solvents and asbestos fibers. Approved product, NAFUFLEX 2K as manufactured byMC-BAUCHEMIE MULLER, GERMANY U.A.E. distributor and approved applicator M/s WesternInternational, P.O. Box 73820, Dubai, U.A.E.

Performance specifications


Flash Point >200 degrees CelsiusCrack bridging >10mmFlexibility 360 degrees, 10mm radius mandrelBond strength Min 0.2N/mm2


F3 EXECUTION

F3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION




1. Ensure substrate is completely dry to approval of waterproofing manufacturer. Make substrates free oflatence, form oils, cure and seal compounds and other Substances detrimental to bond. Any ridgesand concrete irregularities shall be ground smooth.

2. All shrinkage, cold pour joints and non-moving structural cracks should be pre-treated as per

manufacturer‘s recommendations.

F3.2 INSTALLATION

Coating shall be applied as per manufacturer‘s instructions, to a minim um thickness of 1.7 mm unlessshown otherwise in drawings or indicated in the bill of quantities.

G. PODIUM DECKS, LANDSCAPE AREA ABOVE BASEMENT SLAB, PLANTERS BOX, SWIMMINGPOOL WALL & FLOOR AND INVERTED ROOF WATERPROOFING SYSTEM

G1 GENERAL

G1.1 The waterproofing system shall be an elastomeric cold spray applied system based on methacrylateresins. The membrane system should comprise a primer and two separately applied coats ofmembrane in contrasting colours. The waterproofing system shall have a current BBA certificate fortanking and roofing applications. The waterproofing system shall not require protection boards or anyscreeds to falls and will have a proven track record in providing Class 1 Water tightness in accordancewith BS8102 for landscaped areas. The waterproofing system shall be manufactured by an ISO9001approved manufacturer and shall be applied by an Authorized, trained Contractor.

.

G1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Applicator: Having not less than Ten years of proven experience in work of this section and approvedby the manufacturer of the waterproofing.

G1.3 INSPECTION AND TESTING

Prior to concealing of the waterproofing, the Contractor shall give the Engineer written notice that theinstallation of the waterproofing has been inspected and approved by the waterproofing Subcontractorand by himself. Subsequent work will not be permitted until the above inspection and tests have beencarried out to the Engineer‘s approval.

G1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Product data: Submit manufacturer‘s specification s, installation instructions and recommendations forwaterproofing material and related components. Include data substantiating that materials comply withspecified requirements.

2. Samples:

a. Submit cured film samples of waterproofing membrane.b. Submit 3 samples of Anti Root Membrane

G1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

1. Deliver materials to site undamaged in original sealed containers.




Store materials in dry area out of direct sunlight, at temperatures within manufacturer‘s recommendedtemperature range.

G1.6 EXTENDED WARRANTY

1. Provide an extended warranty for a period of ten years from date of the Defects Liability Certificate,against faulty workmanship and materials.

2. Upon written notification from the Engineer that the membrane waterproofing is defective promptlyrepair or replace the defective work.

G1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

1. Substrate: Proceed with work of this Section only after substrate construction and Penetrations workis completed. Ensure substrate is sufficiently dry to prevent pinholing of membrane and to preventlack of bond of membrane to substrate. Protect works of others from damage due to work of thisSection.

G2 PRODUCTS

G2.1 MATERIALS

1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS

a) Primer – PA1, PAR, PAR1UV or ZED S94 PRIMER from Striling Lloyd

The primer shall be compatible with the waterproofing membrane and will be recommended by themanufacturer of the waterproofing system depending on the substrate material and the constructiondesign.

b) WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE based on Methyl Methacrylate (MMA) Resin – INTERITANKfrom Striling Lloyd

The membrane shall be a two component 100% reactive methacrylate waterproofing membraneapplied in two coats of contrasting colour. The membrane shall be cold applied using a proportioningspray pump system. Each coat of membrane shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’sguidelines to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0mm in order to produce a minimum total membranedry film thickness of 2mm. Wet film Thickness checks will be carried out every 2m² to ensure that thecorrect thickness is being applied. One coat systems or two coat systems of the same colour will notbe accepted.

Where the system is to be fully bonded to the substrate, a minimum of 1 tensile adhesion test is to becarried out every 50m² prior to the application of the membrane.

Before application of the second coat the fully cured surface of the first coat shall be examined andany visible defects made good in accordance with the manufacturers guidelines. Only after thisQA/QC inspection is completed may the second coat, of a contrasting colour, be applied. Followingthe application of the second coat of membrane the membrane will be checked for pinholes byperforming electrical holiday detection tests over the full surface area of waterproofing.

The membrane shall have a current BBA Certificate for tanking and roofing applications for roofs withzero falls. The membrane shall be able to demonstrate a 10 year track record of applications in theGulf region and a clear track record of successful waterproofing projects.

Membranes containing isocyanates shall not be permitted.




The density of the applied cured membrane must be greater or equal to 1.10g/cm 3.

Technical Characteristics

PROPERTY TEST METHOD VALUE

Minimum Thickness As approved by the Engineer 2mm minimum

Elongation BS903:A2:1995 (ISO37:1994); ASTM D412

>80% -<170%

Density of cured membrane ASTM D792 ≥ 1.10g/cm³

Tensile AdhesionStrength

BSEN 4624:2003

Concrete SubstrateSteel SubstratePVC Substrate

≥0.7 MPa ≥ 2.0 MPa ≥2.0 MPa

Water Vapour transmission ASTM E96-80 at 23 0 C <4g/m 2 /day

Tensile Strength BS 903:A2:1995 (ISO 37:1994); ASTM D412 ≥9 MPa

Tear Strength BS ISO 34-1:2004 ≥60 N/mm

Shore HardnessBS2782: Part 3 Method 365B: 1992ISO 868: 1985 ≥40 (Shore D)

Water penetration

Approved Document C, Requirement

C2(a) Section 4.7 of the NationalBuilding Regulations

Zero

Crack-Bridging ASTM C1305 3.2mm @ -10 0 C

Chemical resistance:- Anti-freeze (ethylene glycol)- Calcium Chloride- Diesel Fuel- Gasoline- Motor Oil- Sodium Chloride

TRL Research Report 248

ResistantResistantResistantResistantResistantResistant

Resistance to Chloride ionpenetration

ASTM C1202-05 Pass

Resistance to Chisel Impact BE27, Appendix B Part C (v) No penetration

Resistance to abrasion SNCF Taber MethodH22 Wheel – 1000 cycles <0.60g

Resistance to Puncture ASTM D4833-07 >500N

Resistance to HydrostaticPressure

MOAT 27: 5.1.4 >5m HeadNo puncture




G3 EXECUTION

G3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

Concrete substrates should be designed and built in accordance with BS8110: 1985. All new concretesubstrates should be a minimum of seven days old. A minimum U2 concrete finish as defined by theUK Department of Transport is required. A non U2 finish may be over coated but higher consumptionrates may be required. The following requirements must still be adhered to:

All surfaces must be dry, and free from laitance, oil, grease, curing compounds, loose particles, friablematter, moss and algae growth as well as any other dirt.

Where necessary mechanical surface preparation such as diamond grinding, vacuum blasting or gritblasting can be performed to provide a laitance free substrate. All blowholes and voids are to berepaired with an appropriate concrete repair material prior to application of the waterproofing system

Any steel substrates shall be prepared to Swedish Standard Sa2.5

For all other substrates the compatibility of the waterproofing system must be checked with themanufacturer of the waterproofing system.

G4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

G4.1 Membrane manufacturer‘s representative shall verify warranty requirements are achieved.

G4.2 Flood test membrane 24 hours minimum following completion of membrane installation and prior toinsulation installation.

G4.3 Restrict water runoff from membrane area by plugging drains and creating dams or dikes. Floodrestricted area to depth for 24 hours.

G4.4 Repair any leaks which develop and retest.

G4.5 At completion of flood test, remove drain plugs.

G4.6 Coordinate inspection and testing activities described above with the Engineer.

G5 CLEANINGG5.1 Clean stains from adjacent surfaces with cleaning agent.

Remove masking protection, equipment, material, and debris from roof




SECTION 9A: CAR PARK DECK COATING SYSTEM

1.0 Function:

1.1 The prepared deck/s shall be protected from water and chloride penetration by a multi-

layered, liquid resin coating system having a durable slip resistant finish, designed for use onreinforced concrete car park decks.

2.0 Description:

2.1 The system shall provide a slip resistant, non-squeal finish which will be unaffected by UVdegradation, standing water and common spillages from parked vehicles.

2.2 The system shall be available in a range of contrasting coloured finishes that allowdifferentiation between pedestrian, vehicular rotation, designated and general parking bins(the layouts are to be as shown on the drawings).

2.3 The system shall have good resistance to wear and shall be capable of being repaired oroverlaid in the long-term future without removal of the existing layers.

2.4 The wearing course shall consist of a coloured liquid resin encapsulating slip resistantaggregate applied in one coat at a minimum coverage rate of 1.7kg/m² to provide a profiledfinish with a typical dry film thickness of 2.0mm.

3.0 Technical Performance:

3.1 Wheel Tracking Test Result: Zero Erosion

(Scuffing test after 500 wheel passes requirement for Type 1 Site Category as defined inHD28/94) BSDD184)

3.2 Tensile Adhesion (BS EN ISO 4624:2003)

Result >1Mpa and >Strength of concrete substrate

i.e. mode of failure is within the substrate

3.3 Drying aids: Remove minimum four days prior to test

3.4 Test for moisture content: To BS 8203, Annex A using an accurately calibrated hygrometer

3.5 Location of readings: Corners, along edges, and at various points over the test area.

3.6 Acceptability: Do not lay resin flooring until readings show 75% relative humidity or less.

3.7 Bond Strength of resin flooring to Test to BS 8204-6, clause 11.4 and BS EN 1542.

4.0 Substrate Preparation:

4.1 Damage and imperfections in the surface finish of the concrete substrate should be madegood using a rapid cure repair mortar that is compatible with the deck coating system. Both

materials shall be produced by the same manufacturer. The repair mortar shall be capable ofbeing laid to a feather edge so as to reduce the additional preparation required and thepotential for inducing further micro cracking within the surrounding area, by breaking outconcrete during preparation.

4.2 Substrates must restrain stresses that occur during setting and hardening of resin.

4.3 Test for surface hardness: To BS EN 12504-2 using a rebound hammer.

4.4 Report: Submit.

4.5 Areas of noncompliance: Submit remedial proposals.

4.6 Chases/ Saw cuts: Cut/ break out at skirtings, free edges, movement joints, etc. fortermination of resin flooring.

4.7 Blow holes, cavities, cracks, etc: Fill with repair product recommended by resin flooringmanufacturer.




4.8 Cleanliness: Remove surface contaminants, debris, dirt and dust.

4.9 Surface texture: Suitable to accept resin flooring and achieve a full bond over the completearea.

4.10 The substrate must be prepared in strict accordance with the manufacturer‘srecommendations.

5.0 Application:

5.1 The system shall contain no bitumen, isocyanates or sensitisers and should present no risk tothe general public who may be in close proximity of the works.

5.2 The resin based wearing course shall be cold liquid applied and of a thixotropic nature toensure consistent thicknesses are achieved over all substrate irregularities.

5.3 The materials used must be based upon resin systems that do not react with moisturealthough the substrate should be dry during application.

5.4 The system shall be moisture permeable and suitable for application onto both existing andnew concrete that is 14 days old, confirmed by the manufacturer.

5.5 All components/layers of the system shall be capable of being overcoated with the next layerwithin two hours of application.

5.6 The manufacturer must be able to demonstrate that in order to maintain the system in thelong term without removal of existing material, all layers of the system will bond to thepreviously laid material after any length of time with no detriment to the intercoat adhesionachieved. This clause may not be set aside by the provision of temporary protection of theworks such as tenting.

5.7 After application of the completed system or any repairs the system shall be able to receivevehicular traffic after 2 hours.

6.0 Quality Assurance:

6.1 All components of the system shall be supplied by a company that operates a quality systemregistered to ISO9001:2000.

6.2 All materials must be supplied to site in unopened packaging, with batch numbers markedand corresponding manu facturer‘s certificates of conformity, and must be used within theproducts‘ shelf life or ‗use by date‘.

6.3 Only contractors that are trained and authorized by the manufacturer may apply the system.

6.4 Site conditions should be regularly monitored to ensure the substrate is above the dew pointduring application.

6.5 The adhesion of the system to the substrate must be assessed prior to application by randomspot testing to BS EN ISO 4624:2003 At least one test should be carried out per 50m2 subjectto a minimum of six tests per deck. The sampling must include all variations in the concretefinish. A minimum tensile adhesion value of 1.0 N/mm2 should be achieved, with all results,including the mode of failure, recorded for inspection by the Engineer.

6.6 Coverage rates and applied coating thickness must be monitored and recorded for each day‘sproduction together with material batch numbers, ready for inspection by the Engineer ifrequested.

7.0 WARRANTY

7.1 Furnish written warranty of materials and workmanship for the complete coating system of thecar parking deck.

7.2 Warranty shall be signed by the System supplier, applicator and Main contractor agreeing torepair or replace defects in material and workmanship and failure of parking deck system for aperiod of twenty years from date of the Defects Liability Certificate.

7.3 The warranty must be backed up by the manufacturer and Insurance Co.

8.0 System:




Section 9B, Crystalline Waterproofing System 143

SECTION 9B: CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM

A. INTEGRAL-CRYSTALLINE-WATERPROOFING-OF-CONCRETE-ADMIXTURE

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1.1.1. Section Includes: Furnishing of all materials, services, application instructions, testingguidelines, quality control requirements and supervision necessary for the supply andinstallation of crystalline integral waterproofing admixture to concrete structures asindicated on the drawings and as specified herein. The crystalline waterproofingadmixture shall be added to the concrete mixture at the time of batching and the concreteshall be designed, batched, placed, finished and cured in accordance with the guidelinesset out by the American Concrete Institute and the instructions of the manufacturer.

1.1.2. Related Section:

a) Section 4 - Concreteb) Section 9 –Waterproofing

1.2 References:

1.2.1. Applicable Standards: The following standards may be referenced.

A. ACI 305R – Hot Weather Concreting; 1999.B. ACI 306R – Cold Weather Concreting; 1988.C. ACI 308 – Standard Practice for Curing Concrete; 1992 (Reapproved 1997).D. ASTM C 39/C 39M – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens; 1999.E. ASTM C 309 – Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing

Concrete; 1998a.F. ASTM C 666 – Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing andThawing; 1997.

G. BS 5075-2: 1998 – Concrete Admixtures: Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures.H. ASTM E 329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection

of Materials Used in Construction; 1998a.I. COE CRD-C 48 – Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992.J. AASHTO T277 – Standard Method to Test for Rapid Determination of Chloride Permeability

of Concrete.K. NSF/ANSI Standard 61 Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2000a.L. BS 12390-8 – Testing Hardened Concrete – Depth of Water Penetration under Pressure.

1.3 System Description

1.3.1. Crystalline Integral Concrete Waterproofing Admixture System: The admixture mustbe a Permeability Reducing Admixture for Hydrostatic Conditions (PRAH) as indicated by

ACI 212.3R-10. The admixture is a dry chemical admixture supplied in sealed plasticbuckets and/or in disintegrating paper bags. The admixture will initiate and promote thegrowth of long, narrow crystal structures sufficient to fill and block capillary pores andmicro cracks within the concrete in order to prevent the passage of water. The admixturemust remain available within the hardened concrete and must react to any futurepresence of water to self-seal minor cracking that may occur in the future.





1.3.2. Additional System Requirements include construction joint details, penetration details,water stops and remedial waterproofing steps.

1.4 System Performance Requirements

1.4.1. Permeability: The coefficient of permeability for admixture treated concrete will bereduced by a minimum of 70% compared to untreated concrete when tested using BS EN12390-8 at 150 psi of pressure for 96 hours (Taywood- Valenta Method, ACI 212.3R-10).

1.4.2. Permeability: No passage of water through treated samples when exposed to a verticalwater head equal to 140 meters (460 feet).

1.4.3. Compressive Strength: Treated concrete must have compressive strength equal orhigher than plain concrete when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 daysand at one year.

1.4.4. Drying Shrinkage: Minimum 20% reduced drying shrinkage for treated concretecompared to untreated concrete when tested according to ASTM C157 or equivalent.

1.4.5. Self-Sealing: Autogenous crack sealing of treated concrete for cracks with width of up to

0.5mm (0.02 inches) or greater; verified by independent testing.1.4.6. Chemical Resistance: Minimum 20% less weight loss compared to untreated specimen

after exposure to 5% sulfuric acid for 70 days.

1.4.7. Carbonation Resistance: No increase in rate of carbonation compared to untreatedconcrete when exposed to a 4% carbon dioxide atmosphere for 28 days.

1.4.8. Sulfate Resistance: Improved resistance to sulfate attack compared to untreatedconcrete when tested to the US Bureau of Reclamation Accelerated Method.

1.4.9. Potable Water Contact Approval: Certified by NSF to NSF/ANSI Standard 61 DrinkingWater System Components - Health Effects for use in structures holding potable water.

1.4.10. History: The waterproofing admixture must have demonstrated success in similarapplications that are no less than 15 years old.

1.5 Submittals

1.5.1. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with conditions of the Contract and withDivision 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

1.5.2. Product Data: Submit Technical Data Sheets, the KIM Best Practices Guide and Application Instructions including all instructions relating to jointing and penetrationdetails.

1.5.3. Test Reports: Submit, for acceptance, complete test reports from approved independenttesting laboratories certifying that waterproofing system meets the performance andtesting requirements specified herein.

1.5.4. Project References: Provide case study documents demonstrating successfulapplications of the waterproofing admixture in similar projects over a period of no lessthan 15 years.

1.6 Quality Assurance

1.6.1. The waterproofing admixture shall comply with CAN/CSA A266 – 1-M in the latestaddition as both a WR type water reducing admixture and optionally as an air entraining





admixture and with ASTM C494 and as a Type D, water reducing and set retardingadmixture.

1.6.2. Waterproofing admixture to be certified by the International Code Council (ICC) as aChemical Admixture Used in Concrete (AC198).

1.6.3. Waterproofing admixture must be certified to NSF/ANSI Standard 61 – Drinking WaterSystem Components – Health Effects

1.6.4. Waterproofing admixture must bear a CE mark and conform to the performance andquality requirements of EN 934- 2:2001.

1.6.5. Waterproofing admixture shall hold a valid Agreement Certificate from the British Boardof Agreement.

1.6.6. Waterproofing admixture shall hold a valid Appraisal certificate from BRANZ Limited.

1.6.7. A meeting of involved parties must be held prior to installation. This meeting will clarifyprocedures, roles and responsibilities among the parties. This meeting requires thepresence of representatives from the manufacturer, owner, concrete supplier, consultingengineer/architect and all involved contractors.

1.6.8. The concrete supplier shall conduct laboratory and field trials as necessary to

successfully incorporate the waterproofing admixture into their concrete mixture. Followthe manufacturer‘s testing guidelines.

1.6.9. All parties shall follow the manufacturer‘s written instructions as contained in the KIMBest Practices Guide, published by the manufacturer.

1.6.10. All parties shall follow the manufacturer ‘s written instructions as contained in the Application Instructions, published by the manufacturer.

1.6.11. All waterproofing system components shall bear a traceable manufacturer‘s lot number.

1.7 Delivery, Storage And Handling

1.7.1. Delivery: Deliver materials in manu facturer‘s original, unopened packages bearing thecomplete product label and lot number.

1.7.2. Storage: Store materials in a warm and dry location. Protect from humidity or moisturecontamination at all times.

1.7.3. Handling: Observe all occupational health and safety requirements. Read and follow theMaterial Safety Data Sheet for each product. Conform to all local regulations.

1.8 Warranty

1.8.1. Provide 25- year manufacturer‘s limited standard material warranty for the waterproofing

admixture.1.8.2. Provide 10-year manufacturer ‘s limited labor and material performance warranty for the

waterproofing admixture system. (additional service costs are applicable to this option)





2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

2.1.1. Acceptable Manufacturer:

Kryton International Inc.1645 Kent Ave. NEVancouver, BC, Canadawww.kryton.comT: 1.604.324.8280TF: 800.267.8280Fax: 1.604.324.8899Email: [email protected]

2.1.2. Acceptable Applicator:

Crystalline Water Proofing Trading LLC.PO Box91280, Abu Dhabi UAEwww.crystallineuae.comT: +9712 5503364F: +9712 5598256Email: [email protected]

2.1.3. Acceptable Products:

1. Krystol Internal Membrane (KIM)2. Krystol Waterstop Grout3. Krystol Waterstop Treatment

2.1.4. Substitutions: Substitutions are not permitted.

2.1.5. Source Quality: Obtain all crystalline integral waterproofing products from a singlemanufacturer.

2.2 Dosage

2.2.1. Dosage of the waterproofing admixture shall be at 2% by mass of all cementitiouscontent of the concrete up to a maximum of 8kg/m3 (13.5 lb. / cu. yd.).

3.0 EXECUTIONS

3.1 General

3.1.1. Safety: Comply with local regulations for health and safety. Read and observe allprecautions contains in the Material Safety Data Sheets for the products.

3.1.2. Compliance: Follow all of the manufacturer‘s written Applica tion Instructions.

3.2 Project Conditions

3.2.1. Structural Design: The concrete structure shall be designed to meet local building codesand in addition shall be designed to minimize and control any occurrence of cracks withinthe concrete mass. Follow ACI 224.R and ACI 301 regarding the placement ofreinforcement and crack control joints.

mailto:[email protected]












3.2.2. Scheduling: Trial mixes conducted prior to the project start shall have determinedworkability and setting times and strength development. This data shall be used to planappropriate schedules for placing, finishing and removal of formwork.

3.2.3. Weather Conditions: For mixing, transporting and placing concrete under conditions ofhigh temperature or low temperature, follow concrete practices as referred to in ACI305R-77 (Hot Weather Concreting) and ACI 306R-78 (Cold Weather Concreting)

respectively. For flatwork being placed in hot, dry or windy conditions, surface humiditymust be maintained by fogging or use of monomolecular film (evaporation retardant).

3.3 Concrete Batching & Mixing

3.3.1. KIM admixture shall be added to the concrete at the time of batching at a concrete plantthat is acceptable to the manufacturer. Dosage shall be properly supervised and a recordkept of quantities and lot numbers.

3.3.2. Concrete shall be batched following the approved mix design as determined through priortrials. Content of cementing materials shall not be less than 300 kg /m 3 (500 lb. / cu. yd).Water content shall be kept to within the specified water to cementing material ratio andthis ratio shall not exceed 0.45.

3.3.3. KIM admixture shall be added to the dry ingredients prior to batching and if this is notpossible, KIM should be added prior to the addition of other admixtures. Do not mix KIMwith other admixtures prior to addition. Add KIM separately from other admixtures.

3.3.4. Allow KIM to thoroughly mix at medium/high speed for 1 minute per cubic meter/yard inthe batch and a minimum of 3 minutes. Place and finish in accordance with ACIguidelines. If possible, hold back a portion of super plasticizer during the initial batchingand add the held portion at the jobsite immediately before discharging.

3.4 Concrete Placing

3.4.1. Place concrete promptly. KIM concrete will be expected to perform as a waterproofmembrane. Therefore, superior consolidation is required. Follow ACI Guideline 309R forproperly consolidating concrete with special attention given to joint locations.

3.4.2. Shotcrete: Shotcrete shall be placed by an ACI certified nozzleman in accordance with ACI 506R – Guide to Shotcrete.

3.5 Curing

3.5.1. Curing is essential to reduce or eliminate shrinkage cracking: Wet cure concrete inaccordance with ACI 308 Guidelines. If wet curing is not possible, apply a curingcompound that meets ASTM C309.

3.6 Construction Joints, Penetrations And Tie-Holes

3.6.1. Construction joints and control joints must be designed and spaced to isolate and controlshrinkage cracking following the guidelines in ACI 224.R and ACI 301. The locations of

joints must be indicated on the project drawings and be acceptable to thearchitect/engineer.

3.6.2. The Krystol Waterstop System, consisting of Krystol Waterstop Grout and KrystolWaterstop Treatment, shall be installed in all non-moving construction joints andshrinkage control joints according to Application Instructions 4.11 to 4.22 — Use ofKrystol Waterstop System, as applicable.





3.6.3. All pipe penetrations shall be treated as per the admixture manufacturer‘srecommendations. Application Instruction 5.32 – Waterproofing Pipe Penetrations(Existing Construction).

3.6.4. After completion of pour, all tie-holes shall be treated as per the admixturemanufacturer‘s recommendations. Application Instruction 5.31 — Waterproofing TieHoles and Concrete Defects.

3.7 Field Quality Control

3.7.1. Examination for Defects: Do not conceal KIM concrete before it has been observed by amanufacturer‘s representat ive and other designated entities. Concrete shall be examinedfor structural defects such as faulty construction joints, cold joints and cracks. Suchdefects to be repaired in accordance with manufacturer‘s repair procedures.

3.7.2. Observance of Leaks: Leaks that occur through well consolidated concrete or tightcracks will self-seal within a few days or weeks. Leaks that occur through poorlyconsolidated concrete or large cracks must be repaired in accordance with themanufacturer‘s repair instructions.

3.8 Interaction With Other Materials3.8.1. Backfilling : Normal backfilling procedures may be used after concrete has been cured for

at least seven days. If backfill takes place within seven days after concrete placement,then backfill material shall be moist so as not to draw moisture from the concrete. In noevent shall backfilling take place before concrete has gained sufficient strength towithstand the applied load.

3.9 Description:

3.9.1. The system shall provide a slip resistant, non-squeal finish which will be unaffected byUV degradation, standing water and common spillages from parked vehicles.

3.9.2. The system shall be available in a range of contrasting coloured finishes that allowdifferentiation between pedestrian, vehicular rotation, designated and general parkingbins (the layouts are to be as shown on the drawings).

3.9.3. The system shall have good resistance to wear and shall be capable of being repaired oroverlaid in the long-term future without removal of the existing layers.

3.9.4. The wearing course shall consist of a coloured liquid resin encapsulating slip resistantaggregate applied in one coat at a minimum coverage rate of 1.7kg/m² to provide aprofiled finish with a typical dry film thickness of 2.0mm.





B. CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE WATERSTOP

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1. Crystalline waterproofing joint system – Provide Krystol Waterstop System consisting ofKrystol Waterstop Grout and Krystol Waterstop Treatment, for all non-movingconstruction joints to provide waterproofing by growth and penetration of hydrophiliccrystals into the concrete.

1.1.2. Provide all written materials and site services necessary to complete the installation asherein specified.

1.2 Related Sections

*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* Edit to add or remove sections as required for the project.

1.2.1. Section 4 – Concrete

1.3 References

*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* Delete references not required by the text of the edited specification.

1.3.1. COE CRD-C 48 – Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992.

1.3.2. NSF 61 – Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2000a.

1.4 Submittals

1.4.1. Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: Before delivery of the materials a copy of themanufacturer‘s certificates, attesting that materials meet the requirements specified, shallbe submitted to and approved by the contracting officer.

1.4.2. Product Litera ture: Manufacturer‘s descriptive product literature shall be submitted andshall consist of detailed specifications, available performance test data and installationinstructions.

1.4.3. Certified Laboratory Test Reports: Before delivery of materials, copies of the reports of alltests specified herein or in reference publications shall be submitted to and approved bythe contracting officer.

1.4.4. Test reports shall be accompanied by certificates from the manufacturer certifying thatthe previously tested material is of the same type, quality and make as that proposed forthis project.

1.4.5. Training: Contractor shall advise manufacturer‘s representative 2 weeks prior toplacement of jointing materials to ensure manufacturer‘s representative can be availableon-site for application training.

1.4.6. Shop Drawings: Show construction join types, layout and location.

1.4.7. References: Product must have a history of over ten years of successful use and must beaccompanied by a list of job sites of a similar nature.


1.5.1. Provide Krystol Waterstop System consisting of Krystol Waterstop Grout and KrystolWaterstop Treatment manufactured by Kryton International Inc., 1645 East Kent Avenue,Vancouver BC, V5P 2S8. Tel: 604.324.8280 or other licensed manufacturing facility.





1.5.2. Installer/Applicator shall be an experienced installer approved by the manufacturer or bya non- approved installer under direct supervision of a manufacturer‘s representative oran independent materials engineering company.

1.5.3. Prior to installation, hold a meeting of all relevant parties required for successfulinstallation of waterproofing products to verify installation methods and warrantyrequirements. Relevant parties may include the waterproofing installer, installers of

adjacent work or work penetrating waterproofin g, manufacturer‘s representative andproject engineer/architect.


1.6.1. Deliver materials in manufacturer‘s original, unopened, undamaged packages bearing themanufacturer‘s name, brand designation and batch number.

1.6.2. Store materials in a dry storage area to avoid contact with moisture.

1.7 Warranty

1.7.1. Provide manufacturer‘s standard warranty document authorized by manufacturer‘srepresentative for 25 year material warranty from date of substantial completion forprojects utilizing the Krystol Waterstop System in conjunction with concrete treated withKIM waterproofing admixture.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 Waterproof Joint System For Non-Moving Joints:

2.1.1. System Components: The Krystol Waterstop System shall consist of the waterproofinggrout Krystol Waterstop Grout and waterproofing coating Krystol Waterstop Treatmentmanufactured by Kryton International Inc. - located at: 1645 Kent Avenue East,Vancouver BC V5P 2S8; Toll Free Tel: 800.267.8280; Tel: 604.324.8280; Fax:604.324.8899; Email: [email protected]; Web: www.kryton.com

2.1.2. Krystol Waterstop Grout Internal (K-322i) shall be used for the internal installationmethod. Application Instruction 4.11 — Waterproofing Horizontal Construction Joints(Internal Method).

2.1.3. Krystol Waterstop Grout External (K-322x) shall be used for the external installationmethod (Application Instruction 4.12 to 4.22 — Use of Krystol Waterstop System).

2.1.4. Internal jointing (completely encased in concrete) shall be color coded to allow for visualinspection of application procedures prior to covering with concrete. Color coding shall beas follows: Krystol Waterstop Grout = Red, Krystol Waterstop Treatment = Yellow. Colorcoding is not required for External joint installation.

2.1.5. Waterproofing materials shall consist of cement, quartz silica and active ingredients thatpromote the growth of insoluble, hydrophilic hydration crystals within the concrete.

2.1.6. Waterproofing materials shall not contain chlorides.2.1.7. Waterproofing materials shall not provide waterproofing by way of hydrophobic

ingredients such as oils, stearates, silanes, silicate salts or other hydrophobic treatment.Manufacturer must certify in writing the absence of these materials. Krystol WaterstopGrout shall be non-shrink, non-toxic, fast setting, contain hydrophilic crystal producingchemicals, and when mixed with water and installed according to the manufacturer‘swritten procedures withstand water pressure of 417 m (1250 ft.) of head pressure whentested in accordance with USACE C48-92.

2.1.8. Krystol Waterstop Treatment shall consist of a cementitious powder and hydrophilic





crystal producing chemicals that when mixed with water and installed according to themanufacturers written procedures shall promote crystal growth and penetration to aminimum depth of 10 cm (4 in.) in both directions from the coated surface.

2.1.9. Adjacent concrete (slabs and walls) shall be waterproofed with KIM (Krystol InternalMembrane) as per section 03305 and Application Instructions 1.11 to 1.22 — Use of KIM

Admixture where applicable.

2.1.10. Obtain all crystalline waterproofing products from a single source.

2.1.11. Substitutions: Not permitted.

3.0 EXECUTIONS

*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* The waterstop details will vary depending on the joint profile, whether the jointis subject to hydrostatic pressure, and whether the concrete is cast-in-place or shotcrete. The KrystolWaterstop system is intended for static (non-moving) joints only. It is common to use the internal method,

Application Instruction — 4.11 Waterproofing Horizontal Construction Joints (Internal Method), for wall-to-slab joints, and the external method, Application Instruction 4.12 — Waterproofing Horizontal & Vertical

Construction Joints (External Method), for vertical joints. Specific instructions for the external methodwhen used with shotcrete are available in Application Instructions 4.21 and 4.22 — Use of KrystolWaterstop System. Modified versions of the external method are available for shrinkage control joints(Application Instruction 4.14 — Waterproofing Horizontal & Vertical Control Joints) and joints not subjectto hydrostatic pressure, Application Instruction 4.13 — Dampproofing Horizontal Construction Joints (1-Step Method). Joints in suspended slabs are vulnerable to movement and should be kept watertight usinga flexible sealant following the procedure in Application Instruction 4.31 — Waterproofing SuspendedSlab Joints. Additional information about specifying the best joint details is available at www.kryton.comor from your Kryton representative.

3.1 Examination And Surface Preparation

3.1.1. Safety precautions sha ll conform to the manufacturer‘s MSDS and all local regulations.

3.1.2. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.3.1.3. Concrete surfaces to receive waterstop material must be clean and free of contaminates

or debris. Remove from laitance, oils, curing agents, sealers and all foreign material fromsurfaces to be treated. Use a chipping hammer or scrabbler to remove all loose orprotruding aggregates. Some exposed aggregate is ideal.

3.1.4. Saturate the surface by high pressure water blasting, then remove all standing water sothe surface is only slightly damp (saturated-surface-dry or SSD). Re-saturate surfacesprior to installing each component of the Krystol

3.1.5. Waterstop System.

3.1.6. Strictly follow manufacturer‘s published procedures for mixing, applica tion and curing ofwaterproofing products.

3.2 Installation

*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* The use of ―Internal‖ or ―External‖ installation will depend on thedesign of the joint as described below. Note that Waterstop Grout Internal (K-322i) and WaterstopGrout External (K-322x) are separate products and are not interchangeable. For detailedinstallation procedures, consult Application Instruction 4.11 to 4.31 — Use of Krystol WaterstopSystem.





3.2.1. Internal Installation For Wall-To-Slab Joints Subject To Hydrostatic Pressure:

A. The Krystol W aterstop System shall be mixed and installed in all horizontal non-movingconstruction joints subject to hydrostatic pressure according to Kryton ApplicationInstruction 4.11 — Waterproofing Horizontal Construction Joints (Internal Method).

B. Apply Krystol Waterstop Grout (K322i) in center of joint area in a triangular strip. Ifreinforcing bar is present, install as close to the center and possible.

C. Place plastic grout with 50 mm (2 in.) margin trowel, then use Kryton Triangle Trowel orsimilar tool to from a continuous triangular line of grout.

D. The triangular line of Krystol Waterstop Grout shall have a base of 50 mm (2 in.) and aheight of 30 mm (1.25 in.) with uniformly angled sides. Ensure that the clearance aroundthe grout triangle is sufficient to allow for proper consolidation of concrete around the

joint. Recommended clearance is 150% of the largest nominal aggregate size in theconcrete. Ensure a minimum of 50mm (2 in.) cover between the Krystol Waterstop Groutand the exterior of the concrete wall. Product usage is 15 m (50 ft.) of installed materialper 25 kg (55 lb.) pail.

E. Apply a coating of Krystol Waterstop Treatment after the Krystol Waterstop Grout hasreached sufficient strength not to be damaged by application of Krystol WaterstopTreatment. Apply Krystol Waterstop Treatment with a stiff bristled brush employing acircular, scrubbing motion to achieve maximum contact and penetration.

F. Spreading rate of the Krystol Waterstop Treatment is 1 kg/m2 or 0.2 lb./sq. ft. (3 linealmeters per 1 kg for a 30 cm wide coating or 10 lineal feet per 2.2 lb. for 12 in. joint).Krystol Waterstop Treatment shall be applied to the entire width of the joint and cover thepreviously installed Krystol Waterstop Grout.

G. Forms may be closed immediately after inspection. Protect the completed KrystolWaterstop System from rain, freezing or rapid evaporation for a minimum of 12 hours oruntil covered by concrete.

3.2.2. External Installation For Wall-To-Wall, Slab-To-Slab And Slab-To-Wall Joints Subject ToHydrostatic Pressure

A. Krystol Waterstop Treatment:

1. The Krystol Waterstop System shall be mixed and installed in all non-moving

construction joints subject to hydrostatic pressure according to Application Instruction2.12 — Waterproofing with Surface Application (Spray Method) and ApplicationInstructions 4.12 and 4.21 — Use of Krystol Waterstop System.

2. Apply Krystol Waterstop Treatment to the entire contact area where the two pours willmeet. Apply Krystol Waterstop Treatment with a stiff bristled brush employing acircular, scrubbing motion to achieve maximum contact and penetration.

3. Spreading rate for Krystol Waterstop Treatment is 1 kg/m 2 or 0.2 lb./sq. ft. (3 linealmeters per 1 kg for a 30 cm wide coating or 10 lineal feet per 2.2 lb. for 12 in. joint).

4. Protect application from rain, freezing conditions and rapid evaporation.

B. Krystol Waterstop Grout

1. Form a keyway to intersect the joints. A suitable keyway may be made from adressed 40 by 40 by trimming one edge so it tapers to 30 mm (2 x 2 in. tapered to1.25 in.). Do not use release agents on the keyway form.

2. Attach keyway to formwork, or for slabs and shotcrete, press the keyway into theconcrete/shotcrete while it is still slightly plastic.

3. Remove keyway forms from the hardened concrete.4. The keyway must be clean and of free of release agents, debris and laitance. Soak

the keyway to a saturated surface- dry (SSD) condition. Do not leave standing water.





1. Following the installation of Krystol Waterstop Grout, an inspector shall visually inspectthe application to verify the presence of the ―red‖ triangular strip in the correct locationand proper dimensions.

2. Following the installation of Krystol Waterstop Treatment, an inspector shall visuallyinspect the application to verify the presence of the ―gold‖ slurry coat covering the entirecontact area of the joint including the previously installed triangle of Grout.

3.3.3. If a two stage inspection is not possible, a single inspection shall verify the presence ofthe ―gold‖ slurry of Krystol Waterstop Treatment which shall cover the entire contact areaof the joint. At or near the center of the joint shall be a raised triangle with the properdimensions for Krystol Waterstop Grout. A small secti on of the ―gold‖ treatment may beremoved from the triangle to verify the presence of ―red‖ grout underneath.

*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* Not all applications will be possible or relevant to water test.Measure change in water level to determine if leaks exist if leaks cannot be directlyobserved. Delete this section of not required.

3.3.4. Where applicable, water test structures capable of holding water for 24 hours afterconclusion of curing period. Repair identified leaks and repeat water testing until structure

is watertight.





C. DURABILITY ENHANCING ADMIXTURE FOR MASONRY MORTAR & CONCRETEMASONRY UNITS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1. Durability enhancing admixture – Provide KMA, a specially formulated crystalline andwater repellent admixture that when added to the plastic mix will provide long-termprotection in cementitious mortar by reducing both permeability and absorption.

1.1.2. Provide all written materials, mortar mix design and site services necessary to completethe installation as herein specified.


*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* Edit to add or remove sections as required for the project.1.2.1. Section 8 – Masonry

1.3 References

*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* Delete references not required for the final specification.

1.3.1. ASTM C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry

1.3.2. ACI 530 Building Code Requirements & Specification for Masonry Structures and RelatedCommentaries

1.3.3. BS EN 480-5 Admixtures for Concrete, Mortar and Grout

1.3.4. DIN 1048 Part 5 Testing concrete; testing of hardened concrete

1.3.5. ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete; 1992 (Reapproved 1997).

1.4 Submittals

1.4.1. Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: Before delivery of the materials a copy of themanufacturer‘s certificates, attesting that materials meet the requirements specified, shallbe submitted to and approved by the contracting officer.

1.4.2. Product Literature: Manufacturer‘s descriptive product literature shall be submitted andshall consist of detailed specifications, available performance test data and instructionsfor additive addition.

1.4.3. Certified Laboratory Test Reports: Before delivery of materials, copies of the reports of alltests specified herein or in reference publications shall be submitted to and approved bythe contracting officer.

1.4.4. Test reports shall be accompanied by certificates from the manufacturer certifying thatthe previously tested material is of the same type, quality and make as that proposed forthis project.


1.5.1. Provide KMA, admixture for masonry mortar & concrete masonry units manufactured byKryton International Inc., 1645 East Kent Avenue, Vancouver BC, V5P 2S8. Tel:604.324.8280 or other licensed manufacturing facility.





1.5.2. Installer/Applicator shall be an experienced installer. Follow ASTM C270 StandardSpecification for Mortar for Unit Masonry or ACI 530 Building Code Requirements &Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries, or where applicable aninternational equivalent.


1.6.1. Deliver materials in manufacturer‘s original, unopened, undamaged packages bearing themanufacturer ‘s name, brand designation and batch number.

1.6.2. Store materials in a dry storage area to avoid contact with moisture.

1.7 Warranty

1.7.1. Provide manufacturer‘s limited product warranty document.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 Mortar Dampproofing System

2.1.1. System Components: The system shall consist of the crystalline and water repellentchemical admixture, Krystol Mortar Admixture (KMA) manufactured by KrytonInternational Inc. - located at: 1645 East Kent Avenue, Vancouver BC V5P 2S8; Toll FreeTel: 800.267.8280; Tel: 604.324.8280; Fax: 604.324.8899 or other licensedmanufacturing facility.

2.1.2. Admixture shall consist of quartz silica, hydrophilic chemicals, and water-repellentchemicals which promote the growth of insoluble hydration crystals within the mortar toreduce both permeability and water absorption.

2.1.3. The protection admixture shall not contain chlorides.

2.1.4. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.2 Materials

*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* The mortar should be specified in accordance with standardrecommended practices for selecting proportions for mortar, following ASTM C270, or whereapplicable an international equivalent.

2.2.1. Admixture: KMA, proprietary compound consisting of quartz silica and active ingredients,when properly added to mortar, shall produce mortar that complies with the following:

a) Water Absorption: 50% reduction in water absorption of KMA mortar compared to thecontrol when tested in accordance with BS EN 480-5 Admixtures for Concrete, Mortarand Grout – Test Methods Part 5: Determination of Capillary Absorption.

b) Water Reduction: 5% reduction in water demand of KMA mortar as compared to a controlmixture of equal workability when following ASTM C270.

c) Permeability: No measurable leakage or dampness observed through KMA treatedmortar when tested in accordance with DIN 1048 Part 5 at a constant hydrostaticpressure of 0.5 MPa (72.5 psi) for a period of 10 days.

2.2.2. Notwithstanding other requirements, the mortar shall be cured and protected inaccordance with CSA A23.1-21.1.4, ACI 308-92 or where applicable an internationalequivalent.





3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 Surface Preparation

3.1.1. Safety precautions shall conform to the manufacturer‘s MSDS, printed literature and allcurrent regulations.

3.1.2. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

3.1.3. Surfaces must be clean and free of oil, dirt, paint or other foreign material.

3.1.4. Surface must be thoroughly soaked with clean water to a surface saturated dry condition(SSD). Do not leave standing water.

3.2 Installation

3.2.1. KMA shall be mixed according to Application Instruction 6.11 – Protecting MasonryMortar

a) Dose KMA at 2% by weight of cement. When dosing on the jobsite, measure and add 1liter (1 quart) of tightly packed KMA for each 40kg (88 lb.) bag of cement in your mortarmix. Mix well. Reduce water if necessary.

b) Trial batches are strongly recommended to assess the local plastic and hardenedproperties and to determine appropriate mix designs.

c) KMA can be added at any time during the batching process. However, the plasticproperties may vary with the time of addition depending on the mix proportions and siteconditions. Adjust the mixing sequence as necessary to optimize the mix for yourapplication. Allow KMA to thoroughly mix at medium/high speed for a minimum of 2minutes or until the admixture is fully incorporated.

3.2.2. Install mortar as normal

1. Install masonry mortar and masonry units as normal.

2. All site prepared mortar should be installed as soon as possible, but always within 1.5hours after the original mixing.

3.2.3. Moist cure mortar in accordance with CSA A23.1-21.1.4, ACI 308-92 or where applicablean international equivalent.

1. Wet curing the mortar with a fog mist spray, sprinkler or wet burlap for 3 to 7 days isrecommended to achieve the full benefits of KMA.

2. Protect fresh applications from wind and direct sunlight.

3.3 Cleaning And Protection

3.3.1. Protect masonry wall from damage during construction.

3.3.2. Mortar must be cured a minimum of 28 days before applying paint or other coatings.Surface preparation and application should follow guidelines supplied by the

paint/coating‘s manufacturer.




D. CONCRETE RESTORATION AND PROTECTION

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes1.1.1. Concrete restoration and protection sytem – Provide Hydrostop Restore & Protect Sytem

consisting of Hydrostop Grout, Hydrostop Coating, and Hydrostop Sealer, for restoration andprotection of above grade aging concrete.

1.1.2. Provide all written materials and site services necessary to complete the installation as hereinspecified.


*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* Edit to add or remove sections as required for the project.1.2.1. Section 9 – Waterproofing

1.2.2. Section 4 – Concrete

1.3 References

*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* Delete references not required by the text of the edited specification.

1.3.1. ASTM D7234 – Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings onConcrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers.

1.3.2. ASTM C1403 – Standard Test Method for Rate of Water Absorption of Masonry Mortars

1.4 Submittals

1.4.1. Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: Before delivery of the materials a copy of the

manufacturer‘s certificates, attesting that materials meet the requirements s pecified, shall besubmitted to and approved by the contracting officer.

1.4.2. Product Literature: Manufacturer‘s descriptive product literature shall be submitted and shallconsist of detailed specifications, available performance test data and installation instructions.

1.4.3. Certified Laboratory Test Reports: Before delivery of materials, copies of the reports of alltests specified herein or in reference publications shall be submitted to and approved by thecontracting officer.

1.4.4. Test reports shall be accompanied by certificates from the manufacturer certifying that thepreviously tested material is of the same type, quality and make as that proposed for thisproject.

1.4.5. Training: Contractor shall advise manufacturer‘s representative 2 weeks prior to placement of

jointi ng materials to ensure manufacturer‘s representative can be available on -site forapplication training.


1.5.1. Provide Hydrostop Restore & Protect System consisting of Hydrostop Grout, HydrostopCoating and Hydrostop Sealer, manufactured by Kryton International Inc., 1645 East Kent

Avenue, Vancouver BC, V5P 2S8. Tel: 604.324.8280.

1.5.2. Installer/Applicator shall be an experienced installer acceptable to the manufacturer.


1.6.1. Deliver materials in manufacturer‘s original, unopened, undamaged packages bearing themanufacturer‘s name, brand designation and batch number.




1.6.2. Store materials in a dry storage area to avoid contact with moisture. Do not store liquids attemperatures below 4°C (40°F)

1.7 Warranty

1.7.1. Provide manufacturer‘s limited warranty document.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 Concrete Restoration And Protection System

2.1.1. System Components: The system shall consist of the waterproof repair grout, Hydrostop Grout,the 2-part polymerized topping mortar, Hydrostop Coating, and the water-based water repellentsealer, Hydrostop Sealer, all manufactured by Kryton International Inc. - located at: 1645 EastKent Avenue, Vancouver BC V5P 2S8; Toll Free Tel: 800.267.8280; Tel: 604.324.8280; Fax:604.324.8899.

2.1.2. Cementitious repair grout shall consist of cement, quartz silica and other hydrophilic chemicalswhich promote the growth of insoluble hydration crystals within the concrete; 2-part toppingmortar shall consist of a powdered blend of cement, quartz silica and other special additives,and a specialized liquid acrylic polymer; Water-repellent sealer shall consist of a unique water-based blend of silane and siloxane compounds which chemically react with silicates below thesurface to produce a strong, water repellent effect.

2.1.3. Obtain all restoration and protection products from a single source.

2.1.4. Products shall contain no added chlorides.

2.1.5. Substitutions: Not permitted .

2.2 Materials

2.2.1. Concrete restoration and protection system: Hydrostop Restore & Protect System, the threeproduct system that repairs surface cracks and defects in concrete and creates a durable

barrier against water intrusion shall a substrate that complies with the following:1. Pull Off Adhesion Strength: A pull off adhesion strength of 7 MPa (1,000 psi.) when

coated with Hydrostop Coating and tested in accordance with ASTM D7234 – StandardTest Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using PortablePull-Off Adhesion Testers

2. Water Absorption Reduction: A water absorption reduction of 70% after 24 hours whencoated with Hydrostop Coating and Hydrostop Sealer and tested in accordance with

ASTM C1403 – Standard Test Method for Rate of Water Absorption of MasonryMortars

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 Examination And Surface Preparation

3.1.1. The Hydrostop Restore & Protect System is intended for structurally sound, above grade agingconcrete.

3.1.2. Safety precautions shall conform to the manufacturer‘s MSDS and all local regulations.

3.1.3. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

3.1.4. Concrete surfaces must be clean and free of contaminates or debris. Remove dirt, organicgrowth, oil, paint and other foreign material. High pressure water blasting is the preferredcleaning method.

3.1.5. Surface must be thoroughly soaked with clean water to a saturated-surface-dry condition(SSD). Re-wet surface prior to installing Hydrostop Grout and Hydrostop Coating.

3.1.6. Strictly follow manufacturer‘s published procedures for mixing, application and curing ofproducts, as laid out in Application Instruction 8.11 – Restoring Above Grade Concrete.




3.2 Installation

3.2.1. Repair Damaged Areas and Cracks

A. Structural defects such as honeycombing, cracks, or holes should be routed out using asharp 25 mm (1 in.) wide chisel to a minimum depth of 13 mm (0.5 in). Use a vacuum ifnecessary to remove dust, debris or water. Wash chase with water so that it is clean andbring the concrete to an SSD condition.

B. Mix Hydrostop Grout with cool, clean water in the ratio of 1 part water to approximately 4parts Hydrostop Grout. Fill in the chase or defect with Hydrostop Grout and strike off with atrowel. Usage is 40 m (130 ft.) of crack repair per 18 kg pail.

C. Protect the freshly installed grout from wind and direct sunlight. Cure the repair by keeping itdamp for at least 24 hours. Cover with plastic or damp burlap to prevent water loss fromevaporation.

3.2.2. Apply Hydrostop Coating

A. Hydrostop Coating comes supplied as a pre-measured kit. Shake Part B (liquid) and pourthe entire contents into a suitable mixing container. Slowly add the entire contents of part A(powder) into the mixing bucket containing part B (liquid) while mixing with an electric drilland paddle.

B. Ensure the concrete is in SSD condition and apply Hydrostop Coating to the concrete at arate of 1-2 kg/m 2 (1.8 to 3.6 lb./sq. yd.) using a stiff bristle concrete brush, by spreading witha push broom, or with a suitable sprayer designed for mortar or ceiling texture. Finish witheither the concrete brush or a trowel to desired texture. Usage is about 1 kit per 16.5 m 2

(180 sq. ft.).

C. Allow the coating to reach its initial set (4-5 hours) or until the coating feels set to the touch.It is permissible for the coating to dry out during the initial setting period. After the initial set,lightly dampen the surface with water and maintain moist curing conditions for a further 24hours. Cover the coating with plastic or damp burlap as needed to maintain moisture levels.

*ATTENTION SPECIFIER* If applying paint over Hydrostop Coating, do not apply Hydrostop Sealer.Cure Hydrostop coating for three days, and then allow the surface to dry. Follow the paintmanufacturer‘s instructions for painting new concrete surfaces.

3.2.3. Apply Hydrostop Sealer

A. Hydrostop Sealer comes supplied as a ready to use, sprayable liquid; no mixing is required.

B. Remove curing protection from the Hydrostop Coating and allow the surface to dry out untilno dark or damp areas remain.

C. Apply Hydrostop Sealer using a brush, roller, or low pressure spray equipment in a singlecoat the rate of 7.4 m 2/L (300 sq. ft./gal.) or approximately 150 m 2 (1,500 sq. ft.) per 18.9 L(5 gal.) pail. Do not allow Hydrostop Sealer to pool on the surface; remove excess materialwith a towel, sponge or roller before the surface dries.

D. Protect the surface from rain for 24 hours while water repellency develops.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 10: CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY

1.0 CARPENTRY

1.1 Timber Generally

Timber shall comply in all respect with BS 881 and 589 : 1974 FOR Nomenclature of Commercial Timber,including sources of supply and BS 1186 LATEST EDITION, Timber for and Workmanship in Joinery.Sizes of timber shall be in accordance with BS 5450 (for hardwood) and BS 4471 (for soft wood)

Timber shall be of an approved variety and quality suitable for the purpose for which it is to be used andequal to samples approved by the Engineer.

All timber shall be properly seasoned and shall be planed square, straight and true and shall be free fromthe following defects :

(a) Sapwood, splits, rings shakes, for pith.(b) Checks exceeding 300 mm in length.(c) Checks exceeding 6 mm in width.(d) Checks exceeding one quarter of the thickness of the timber in depth.(e) Knots of any description in surfaces for staining or polishing.(f) Knots of any description in glazing bars.(g) Knots exceeding one half the width of the surface.(h) Knots exceeding 20 mm mean in diameter.(i) Decayed or dead knots unless cut out and plugged.(j) Loose knots or knot holes unless cut and plugged.(k) Pith pocket.(l) Decay and insect attack including pinworm holes,

All timber shall be treated with a wood preservative as per ―Cuprinol‖ or approved equal.

In joined panels each piece shall be of the same species. Joinery for staining or polishing shall have allsurfaces of the same species and same character of grain running in the same direction.

All plugs inserted after cutting out defects shall be the full depth of hole and the grain of the plug shall runin the same direction as the grain of the piece.

Timber connectors where used shall be two single – sided toothed plates (round or square) for permanent

joints to conform to BS 1579 LATEST EDITION.

Timber shown to be plugged to wall shall be properly and securely fixed by means of proprietary or

hardwood plugs cut on the twist.

Nails shall be in accordance with BS 1202, Steel Nails‘ and screws shall conform to BS 1210, ‗Wood

Screws‘ of latest editions.

Timber to be used for each position of the works shall be as indicated on the drawings and as stated inthe Bills of Quantities. In general exposed joinery work shall be executed in first grade hardwoodobtained from an approved supplier.




All ground and other timber to be built into concrete or block walls or otherwise covered shall first becoated all over with approved wood preservative, suitable for the position in which the member is to beincorporated.

1.2 Moisture Content

(i) All timbers (softwood and hardwood) shall be kiln dried to a moisture content of 11% - 13%(12% average) before transportation.

(ii) Each batch shipped shall have accompanying documentation verifying this and any batchwithout such documentation will be ejected.

1.3 Preservatives

(i) When stated on the drawings/schedules treated timber shall mean timber treated with copperchrome arsenate (CCA) fixed water-borne preservatives applied by vacuum pressureimpregnation in accordance with BS 4072.

(ii) All softwood shall be treated as in Clause 1.3 (I) whether or not stated ondrawings/schedules.

(iii) The Designer shall be informed of the firm undertaking the timber treatment and theContractor shall obtain from the firm a certificate of treatment for every consignment of timbertreated, which shall be re-submitted to the Engineer.

(iv) Treatment shall be carried out after machining of timber except that brush or spray applicationof the manufacturer's preservative, in two applications, to any cutting or boring subsequentto the initial treatment, will be carried out to the Engineer's approval.

(v) All water borne preservative treatment shall be undertaken in good time for timber to dry outbefore allowing the treated timber to contact any other materials or components.

1.4 Hardwood

(i) All hardwood shall be in accordance with the requirement of BS 1186: Part 1 and BS 4047and shall be of first quality, sorted and selected at time of fabrication for suitability of purposeand to give a harmonious appearance to the approval of the Engineer.

(ii) The species of hardwood shall be as indicated on the drawings/schedules.

(iii) In addition to the requirement of Clause 1.1 (I) all hardwood shall show a straight and regulargrain throughout, shall have a consistent color in all locations and be free from knots onexposed faces.

(iv) Any hardwood showing visible imperfections will be rejected.

1.5 Softwood

(i) All softwood shall comply with the requirements of BS 1186 Part 1.(ii) In addition to the requirements of Clause 1.1 (I) all softwood shall be free from pith showing

on the surface, sloping grain exceeding 1 in 8, checks and shakes, knots exceeding 25 mmdiameter, arrays and splay knots, decayed knots, or loose knots and knot holes.

(iii) Softwood shall be one of the following :

Species(BS 881, 589: 1974) Origin ________________________________________________________________

Whitewood/European spruce (Picea abies) Europe

Scots pine/ Redwood (Pinus sylvestris) Europe

(Douglas firBritish Colombian




pine (Pseudotsuga taxifolia) Canada/USA

1.6 Plywood

Plywood shall consist of an odd number of plies arranged so that the grain of each layer is at rightangles to the grain of the adjacent layer or layers. The plies shall be hot pressed during adhesion and

shall have a finished thickness as shown on the drawings, or shall be prefinished plywood obtainedfrom an approved supplier.

In the case of plywood having 3 plies the core shall be not more than 60% of the total thickness.

In plywood having more than 3 plies the faces and all plies with the grain running in the samedirection as the faces shall have a combined thickness of between 40% and 65% of the totalthickness of the plywood.

The plywood shall be free from end joints (including scruff-joints in veneers), overlaps in core veneers,dead knots, patches and plugs, open defects, depressions due to defects in core, insect attach(except isolated pinworm holes through face veneers only), fungal attack and from discolorationdiffering from that normally associated with species.

The Contract will not be allowed to make up thickness by gluing or otherwise fixing together sheets ofthinner previously formed plywood.

(i) All plywood shall comply with the requirements of BS 6566 grade II and B on both faces andshall be of Canadian or Finnish origin obtained from a manufacturer to be approved by theDesigner.

(ii) Except where stated otherwise plywood shall be Exterior Grade WBP Bonding with syntheticresin adhesives to BS 1203.

(iii) Plywood shall be supplied by the manufacturer in the thickness as stated on thedrawings/schedules.

(iv) Plywood shall be manufactured from hardwood and shall be free from end joints,(including joints in veneers) overlaps in core veneers, dead knots, patches and plugs,open defects, depressions due to defects in cure, insect attack (except isolated pinwork holesthrough face veneers only), fungal attack and from discoloration differing from that normallyassociated with species of timber used.

(v) Face veneers shall be hard and durable and shall be capable of being finished to a smoothsurface to receive coatings.

(vi) Marine plywood shall be to BS 1088 and 4079 and of balanced construction.

1.7 Blockboard and laminboard

Blockboard and laminboard shall be from an approved manufacturer and guaranteed not to wrap or

change in size or suffer any kind of deformation. It shall be of timber specified and glued with anti-insect synthetic resin waterproof glue all though. All strengthening boards shall be fixed duringmanufacturer.

Blockboard and laminboard shall conform to the requirements of BS 3444, ―Blockboard andLaminboard‖. Block board and Laminboard shall be free from defects as specified under ―Plywood‖.

1.8 Veneers

Timber for face veneer shall generally be first grade hardwood as indicated on the drawings and / orin the Schedule of doors and obtained from an approved supplier.

The face veneers shall be hard, durable, and capable of being finished easily to a smooth surface.They shall be free from knots, work and beetle holes, splits, dots, glue stains, filling and inlay of anykind or other defects.




The face veneers shall be applied to one or both sides of wood panels as shown on the Drawings.

Where veneers are shown to be applied to one face only, the other side shall have a balancing veneerapplied to prevent warping.

Adhesives shall comply with the requirements of BS 1203, synthetic resin adhesives for plywood(Phenolic and aminoplastic) and shall ensure proper adhesion between plies.

1.9 Plastic Laminate

The plastic laminate facings shall conform to BS 2572, Phenolic laminated sheet and shall be aminimum 1.5 mm thick.

Color and pattern shall conform to the sample approved by the Engineer. Plastic laminate sheetsshall be applied with a waterproof, heat-resistant adhesive of a type recommended by the plasticlaminate manufacturer and applied in accordance with the manufacturer‘s instructions.

Approved Products: Formica, Panelyte or Perstop.

1.10 Mechanical Fastenings and Fittings

(i) Non-standard metal work used in cleats, brackets, straps etc and standard sections asdetailed in the drawings shall be from mild steel in accordance with Section K, Metalwork.

(ii) All fastenings described below shall be of steel unless otherwise stated.

(iii) All ferrous metalwork, nails, screws, bolts and other mechanical fastenings shall be protectedby galvanizing after manufacture in accordance with Section K, Metalwork or, whereappropriate the relevant British Standard for the item.

(iv) Nails shall be high grip nails with annular ringed shank or helical threaded shank toBS1202:Part 1

(v) Screws shall be to BS 1210 or BS 1494

(vi) Plain hexagon bolts shall be to BS 4190(vii) Washers, large diameter, shall be to BS 4320

(viii) Expanding bolts shall be proprietary devices comprising corrosion resistant expanding insertand removable bolt or threaded stud to suit the work being fixed, of a pattern and make to theapproval of the Engineer.

(ix) Frame cramps shall be galvanized steel cramps of an approved pattern, shaped for buildingin.

(x) Timber connectors, where indicated on the drawings, shall be of the toothed plate type to BS1579.

(xi) All mechanical fastenings and fittings shall be adequately protected from corrosion and all

exposed bolts are to be capped with an approved dome headed nut.

1.11 Adhesives

(i) Adhesives shall comply in all respects with BS 1204 and BS 5442 Part 3 and shall be used instrict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

(ii) For joints in non-load bearing internal work and for joints in work where the moisture contentis always less than 16 per cent organic or casein glues may be used.

(iii) For work under damp conditions (moisture content normally 20 per cent or more or conditionsliable to fungal attack) resin type adhesives shall be used.

1.12 Packaging, Delivery and Storage

(i) All timber must be polythene wrapped at 12% moisture content prior to transportation.




(ii) Protection shall be such as to protect the timber against stain, discoloration and other surfaceinjuries during transportation and erection on site. Protection shall be of suchcomposition that it may be easily removed when work is complete, without being harmful tothe surface of the timber.

(iii) The polythene shall be removed as soon as possible and the timber close stacked in theshade, clear of the ground on leveled bearers in a manner that prevents sagging and permits

free air circulation.(iv) When stored externally timber shall be covered during wet weather and uncovered during dryweather.

(v) Temporary covers should be kept from close contact with the timber.(vi) Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, joinery that shall be finally fixed in an air-

conditioned environment shall be stored, immediately prior to fixing, in similar conditions tothose designed for that location and for a period sufficient to enable its acclimatization to thatenvironment.

1.13 Workmanship

(i) Timber shall be sorted and selected at time of fabrication for suitability for purpose and itsfunction in the Works.

(ii) The moisture content of timber shall be checked, before fixing, with a reliable, properlycalibrated meter and timber with a moisture content in excess of 2% above that specified shallnot be fixed.

(iii) Timber shall be sawn truly square, straight and free from burrs.

(iv) Joints shall be as shown on the drawings but where not specifically shown shall be therecognized form of joint with regard to its location and such that they tighten under load, resisttension as appropriate to their function and are without gaps or imperfections.

(v) Loose joints shall be used where provision must be made for shrinkage or other movementsacting other than in the direction of the stresses of fixing or loading.

(vi) All joints, arrises, recesses etc. shall be plumb, true and square.

(vii) All units and members shall be installed such that they are truly plumb or horizontal.

(viii) The carpenter shall perform all necessary mortising, tensioning, grooving, matching, tonguing,housing, rebating and all other works necessary for correct jointing.

(ix) All metal plates, screws and other fixings that may be required or necessary for the properexecution of the carpentry works shall be provided.

(x) The carpenter shall also carry out all works necessary for the proper construction of allframing, linings, etc., and for their support and fixing in the building.

(xi) Nails, sprigs, etc shall be punched and puttied.(xii) Screw heads in work to be painted shall be countersunk and stopped.

(xiii) Glued joints shall be used where provision need not be made for shrinkage or other movementsin the connections and where sealed joints are required.

(xiv) Glued joints shall be cross-tongued or otherwise reinforced so as not to be wholly dependentupon the adhesive.

(xv) Surfaces to be glued shall be clean, free from dirt, dust, sawdust, oil and other contaminantsand shall have a good sawn or planed finish.

(xvi) Adequate pressure shall be applied to glued joints to ensure intimate contact and shall bemaintained whilst the glue is setting.

(xvii) Unless specific sizes are stated on the drawings/schedules screws shall be of a size and lengthto suit pre-drilled holes in metalwork and the dimensions of the timber being fixed.




complied with.

(ii) Joinery shall comply with the requirements of BS 1186 part 2, and shall be accurately, properly andsoundly fabricated in a manufacturer's workshop.

(iii) Fixing of all joinery work, including fillets, architraves, frames, glazing beads and the like shall be by

means of screws unless specifically approved by the Engineer.

(iv) The terms "frame","framed" shall mean work put together by proper carpentry of joinery joints, suchas mortising and tensioning, dovetailing, doweling, etc, and the joints are to be as shown, specified ordirected.

(v) Butted and screwed or nailed joints or halved joints and the like will not be deemed framed and willnot be accepted for framed work.

(vi) Cutting of plywood and blackboard shall be neatly and accurately performed with fine tooth saws soas to avoid splitting the face veneers, or intermediate plies.

(vii) Where raw edges arise from cutting blackboard these shall be lipped with hardwood to match

factory-produced edges.

(viii) Plastic laminate shall be fixed with an approved adhesive in accordance with BS 1203 and BS 1204Part 1.

(ix) Care shall be taken on fixing plastic laminates to eliminate all air from beneath the laminate and if airis entrapped the portions and work so disfigured shall be removed and replaced.

(x) After complete setting of the adhesive the plastic laminate shall be neatly beveled along all arises witha plane.

(xi) Where plastic laminate is fixed to doors or shelves, etc, without laminate to the outer edge, a raisedlipping is to be provided and the laminate finished flush against the lipping.

(xii) Where blackboard and plywood are specified to have a laminated plastic sheet, a balancing veneer ofthe same material and thickness shall be bonded to the back.

(xiii) Unless secret fixing is practicable or otherwise described clear finished hardwood shall be fixed usingnon-ferrous or plated screws with heads let in and pelted with grain matched pellets of minimum 6 mmthickness cut from the same timber.

(xiv) Built in fittings etc., are to be accurately constructed in accordance with the detailed drawings anddoors, drawers, etc. shall fit, and open and close smoothly and all work next to walls, floors andceilings or other fixed items shall be soundly fixed and scribed to fit snugly against same.

(xv) Moldings shall be worked on the solid unless otherwise stated and shall be accurately worked to thedrawings.

(xvi) When circular work is shown on the drawings or specified it shall be built up with an appropriatenumber of pieces, cut to the required shapes, which shall be put together in two or three thickness sothat they break joint, and shall be secured with hardwood keys and wedges or with hardwood pins,whichever is more appropriate.

(xvii) Skirting, architraves, plates and other joinery works shall be accurately scribed to fit the contour ofany irregular surface against which they will be required to form a close butt connection.

(xviii) Doors shall be properly hung within frame/linings to give a uniform clearance.

(xix) Hardwood veneers shall be the species described or specified and shall be selected pieces free fromsplits, dots, stains, insect and fungal attack or any other natural or man-made defects.




(xx) Glass or synthetic fiber stitching will not be permitted for jointing veneer leaves together, and filling orinlaying shall be avoided.

(xxi) All wood veneers shall be bonded to the core material with approved adhesives such that no lifting orblistering shall occur.

(xxii) The method of construction must accommodate tolerances as shown on the drawings and allow forensuring that repetitive units can be accurately located in relation to grid lines or other setting outpoints and that tolerance do not accumulate.

(xxiii) Reasonable tolerance shall be provided at all junctions between joinery and the building carcass,whether of masonry or frame construction, so that any irregularities or movement shall be adequatelyaccommodated.

(xxiv) All joinery shall be left finished smooth and clean by rubbing down by hand with fine glass paper.

(xxv) Should any joints or moving parts in joinery fit other than accurately and evenly or with acceptableclearances or should any defect of timber become apparent, the joinery shall be repaired or replacedas directed by the Engineer.

(xxvi) Pencil round all trafficked edges of boardwalk or bridge timbers.

3.0 IRONMONGERY

(i) Ironmongery shall be of the pattern and finish as shown on the drawings/schedules or as specifiedand obtained from approved manufacturer's delivered in protective packaging, clearly labeled andstored in a secure store.

(ii) Hinges and other items to be fixed flush with the timber shall be located within accurately formedhousings of suitable path.

(iii) All Ironmongery shall be fitted firmly into its housing or surface mounted as appropriate with matchingscrews or other fixings in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and to enable itsproper and easy operation.

(iv) Where possible Ironmongery shall be fixed as a final operation or shall be removed and re-fixed asnecessary to facilitate decoration or other work.

The Ironmongery shall be kept carefully wrapped and protected until required and when fixed shall becarefully protected against defacement by mortar and plaster droppings, paint splashes, smudges etc.

(v) Where indicated on the drawings/schedules approved draught/dust seals shall be installed in strictaccordance with the manufacturers printed instructions.

(vi) All Ironmongery shall be properly eased, adjusted, lubricated and cleaned on completion and left ingood working order all to the Engineer's approval.

(vii) Locks shall be suited as indicated on the drawings/schedules and all keys, with one duplicate shall beadequately labeled and handed to the Engineer.

(viii) All Ironmongery unless otherwise specified shall be in solid polished brass obtained from an approvedsupplier.

4.0 IRONMONGERY FOR TIMBER DOORS

4.1 General

The Contractor shall provide and fix the Ironmongery required by the specifications or shown on the




drawings complete, including all necessary screws, bolts, plugs and other fixings. The use of nails forfixing Ironmongery will not be permitted. The Contractor shall hand over all work in a finished stateand to the satisfaction of the Designer. All Ironmongery shall be first quality, as described in theIronmongery Schedule.

The Contractor shall be required to submit for approval samples of all items of Ironmongery heproposes to use for approval before ordering.

4.2 Finish

The finish of various items of Ironmongery shall be as shown on the drawing and described in theIronmongery Schedule.

4.3 Fitting and Testing

All screws used for fixing Ironmongery shall be of the correct type, material, finish, size and shape tothe satisfaction of the Engineer.

All Ironmongery shall be carefully wrapped and protected until completion of the work and any items

or parts which are damaged or defaced or found to be defective shall be replaced at the Contractor'sexpense before handing over.

On completion of all locks, catches and similar items of Ironmongery, they shall be properly cleaned,tested and oiled, and all keys shall be clearly labeled and securely fixed to the keys and handed to theEngineer.

Door closures shall be fitted a maximum of two weeks before handover.

All floor and door springs are to be fully charged with oil and their operation checked to thesatisfaction of the Engineer.

4.4 Keys and Master Keys

All locks are to be provided with 3 keys on a key ring neatly labeled.(a) Construction key set to operate lock sets during construction.(b) Grand master key set issued after work is completed. Initial use of this key shall automatically

cancel out the construction set.(c) Sub-master key set for separate buildings.(d) Operating key set including two key per lockset.(e) Steel wall mounted cabinet with a lock set for keeping the keys to prevent any unauthorized

opening of doors.

All keys shall be tagged, or otherwise marked, before delivery, with identification of the door for whichthe lockset is intended.

As much as possible, all Ironmongery shall be the product of one manufacturer who maintains a fullyequipped plant with all necessary tools, fixtures, bondarizing and furnishing equipment, to perform therequirements of this specification and manufacturing skill.The Contractor shall submit a schedule of Ironmongery and manufacturer for the approval of theEngineer before placing any supply order; The Engineer‘s approval of suc h schedule shall not relievethe Contractor from furnishing all items or ironmongery required under the Contract.

All lock cylinders shall differ.

4.5 Generally

On completion, check and adjust all Ironmongery, lubricating all moving parts as necessary to ensurecorrect functioning.

On completion supply to the Consultant two copies of manufacturer's maintenance instructions for allitems for which these are published.




drawings complete with Ironmongery and decoration as specified. Architraves and moldings whereindicated shall be of HPL, screwed on to frames and doors as shown on detail drawings. The sheetsshall matte finish with properties of Wear – resistant, Fire – resistant, Anti – Static etc..

Shelves unless otherwise shown on the drawings shall be 12 mm thick white laminate finished HPL. All exposed edges of HPL Panel shall be protected by hardwood edge strips tongued, glued andpinned. Alternative design in proprietary melamine faced high-density chipboard construction may beacceptable.




SN Item Code Description Finish Size Unit Qty.

WOODEN DOOR

HW Set. 01Door Type - D01 - Single Leaf Wooden Door.

Location: Staircase.

1 BISCFCE433IS TESA Stainless steel double ball bearing butt hinges, 102x76x3.CE Marked in Grade 304 and Satin Stainless Steel Finish. S.S.S. No.

2 CT250034PL

TESA CT2500 Overhead Door Closer with V arm, Valve with AdjustableSweep Speed, Reversible, Second Valve for latch Speed Adjustment,Back Check Valve, Suitable for Door Weights Upto 80kg and up to

1,10m width. Certified to EN 1154A and Approved for Fire Doors.

Silver No.

3 1910908PP

TESA Universal Series Rim Panic Latch for Emergency Exit. Narrowsupports 280 x 39 mm, reversible, One Lateral Locking Point. Certifiedby AENOR according to UNE-EN 1125, applicable to Fire Doors.Supports and Bar finished in Silver.

Silver No.

4 TE6R3010NAM

TESA Security TE-6 Adjustable Cylinder 40mm to be used with S1912External Trim. 6 Spring Loaded Antipick Pins. Made to DIN V 18254.Supplied with 3 Nickel plated brass Keys. Nickel Finish.Group Master Keyed.

S.N.P. No.

5 S1912EXIS16TESA Sena model External Trim in Long Plate (44x215mm) withEuroprofile. To be used with TESA Rim Panic Devices. Satin Stainless

Steel finish (AISI 316L).

S.S.S. No.

6 PCCIEGAIS800150 TESA Kick Plate, Satin Stainless Steel finish.800mmx150mmx1.5mm S.S.S. No. 1

7 TOPINOX45IS TESA Floor Door Stop, Half-dome, Satin Stainless Steel finish, Suppliedwith fixing screws. S.S.S. No.

TOTAL FOR DOOR Set 1TOTAL FOR SETS Set 1






Location: Flat Entrance


2 4030E5SAI

TESA Euro Profile Mortised Lock 50mm Backset, 85mm C/C, ReversibleLatch, 8 mm Follower, With Anti Thrust Security Pin & Anti Saw DeadBolt, Anti-friction latchbolt for smoother operation. For Fire RatedDoors, Tested to performance EN1303. Satin stainless steel finish.

S.S.S. No.

3 MB0RBOMSSISTESA Europrofile Cylinder Rose Escutcheons, 10mm Thick, 53mmDiameter. Grade AISI 304L Satin Stainless Steel Finish. S.S.S. Pair

4 TE653535NAMTESA Security TE-6 Double Cylinder 35x35mm. 6 Spring Loaded

Antipick Pins. Made to DIN V 18254. Supplied with 3 Nickel plated brassKeys. Nickel Finish. Group Master Keyed.

S.N.P. No.

5 MYA5R800SSISTESA "Yas" model Solid type Lever Handle on Rose, Stainless SteelLevers on 53mm Diameter, 11mm Thick Rose. Grade AISI 304LStainless Steel finish.

S.S.S. Set.

6 MIRILI4TSCR Door viewer, satin chrome plated S.C.P. No. 1







HW Set. 03Door Type - D04 - Single Leaf Wooden Door

Location: Toilet & Bath


2 403050AI

TESA Mortice Lock 2030 Series with Latch and Deadbolt. Reversible,with 50mm backset and 85mm between axes. 8mm Lever Spindle Hole.Supplied with Europrofile Cylinder Hole, Antisaw Deadbolt. Certifiedaccording to UNE 97-320-88 grade A. Forend and Strike Plate Finish inStainless Steel.

S.S.S. No.

3 MB0RBOMSSIS TESA Europrofile Cylinder Rose Escutcheons, 10mm Thick, 53mmDiameter. Grade AISI 304L Satin Stainless Steel Finish. S.S.S. Pair

4 50347SBLNTESA Security TE5 Double Cylinder 35x35mm with Thumbturn &Emergency release, 70mm length. 5 Spring Loaded Antipick Pins.Made to DIN V 18254. Satin Nickel Finish.

S.N.P. No.


S.S.S. Set.

6 TOPINOX4320IS TESA Wall Door Stop, Cylindrical with rubber head, Satin Stainless Steelfinish, Supplied with fixing screws. S.S.S. No.






HW Set. 04

Door Type - D05 - Single Leaf Wooden Door.Location: Handicap Toilet.


2 TR19305SSIS

TESA Solid Pull Handle, Size 305x19mm Size, Including M8x70mmScrew Thru-bolt Fixing with Brass insert, D-Shape, Fixing screwsincluded. Stainless Steel finish. To be fixed on the outside leaf close tothe door edge ( Bottom end of pull handle to be fixed no lower than700mm and no higher than 1000mm from floor level ).

S.S.S. No.

3 TR19305SSIS

TESA Solid Pull Handle, Size 305x19mm Size, Including M8x70mmScrew Thru-bolt Fixing with Brass insert, D-Shape, Fixing screwsincluded. Stainless Steel finish. To be fixed on the inside leaf of thedoor. ( To be fixed horizontally as shown in pictorial. Bothends of pull handle to be fixed no lower than 700mm and no higherthan 1000mm from floor level ).

S.S.S. Pair

4 MB0REMESSMINIS TESA Bathroom Thumb turn with Emergency Release on the outside,53x80mm diameter, Grade AISI 304, Satin Stainless Steel finish. S.S.S. No.

5 TOPERCHAIS

TESA Stainless steel Coat hook with rubber buffer. 2.5mm Thick.To be fixed on the inside leaf of the door.( To be fixed no lower than 900mm and no higher than 1000mm fromfloor level ).

S.S.S. Set.






HW Set. 05

Door Type - D06 - Single Leaf Wooden Door.Location: Telephone & Electric Rooms.


2 CT250034PL

TESA CT2500 Overhead Door Closer with V arm, Valve with AdjustableSweep Speed, Reversible, Second Valve for latch Speed Adjustment,Back Check Valve, Suitable for Door Weights Upto 80kg and up to1,10m width. Certified to EN 1154A and Approved for Fire Doors.

Silver No.

3 4030E5SAITESA Euro Profile Mortised Lock 50mm Backset, 85mm C/C, ReversibleLatch, 8 mm Follower, With Anti Thrust Security Pin & Anti Saw DeadBolt, Anti-friction latchbolt for smoother operation. For Fire RatedDoors, Tested to performance EN1303. Satin stainless steel finish.

S.S.S. No.




S.N.P. No.


S.S.S. Set.








Location: Bedroom


2 4030E5SAI

TESA Euro Profile Mortised Lock 50mm Backset, 85mm C/C, ReversibleLatch, 8 mm Follower, With Anti Thrust Security Pin & Anti Saw Dead

Bolt, Anti-friction latchbolt for smoother operation. For Fire RatedDoors, Tested to performance EN1303. Satin stainless steel finish.

S.S.S. No.


4 TE6B3535NAMTESA Security TE-6 Double Cylinder with thumbturm 35x35mm. 6

Spring Loaded Antipick Pins. Made to DIN V 18254. Supplied with 3Nickel plated brass Keys. Nickel Finish. Group Master Keyed.

S.N.P. No.

5 MYA5R800SSISTESA "Yas" model Solid type Lever Handle on Rose, Stainless Steel

Levers on 53mm Diameter, 11mm Thick Rose. Grade AISI 304LStainless Steel finish.

S.S.S. Set.








Location: Kitchen


2 4030E5SAI

TESA Euro Profile Mortised Lock 50mm Backset, 85mm C/C, ReversibleLatch, 8 mm Follower, With Anti Thrust Security Pin & Anti Saw DeadBolt, Anti-friction latchbolt for smoother operation. For Fire RatedDoors, Tested to performance EN1303. Satin stainless steel finish.

S.S.S. No.

3 MB0RBOMSSISTESA Europrofile Cylinder Rose Escutcheons, 10mm Thick, 53mmDiameter. Grade AISI 304L Satin Stainless Steel Finish. S.S.S. Pair



S.N.P. No.


S.S.S. Set.








Location: Gym Toilet


2 CT250034PL


Silver No.

3 4031U50AITESA 2030 Series Dead Lock for EuroProfile Cylinder. Reversible.Cylinder Operates an Antisaw Dead Bolt. 50mm Backset. Unified BoxFormat. Certified According to UNE 97-320-88 Grade A.

S.S.S. No.


5 TE6B3535NAMTESA Security TE-6 Double Cylinder with thumbturm 35x35mm. 6Spring Loaded Antipick Pins. Made to DIN V 18254. Supplied with 3Nickel plated brass Keys. Nickel Finish. Group Master Keyed.

S.N.P. No.

6 TR19225SSIS TESA Solid Pull Handle, Size 225x19mm Size, Including M8x70mmScrew Thru-bolt Fixing with Brass insert, D-Shape, Fixing screwsincluded. Stainless Steel finish.

S.S.S. Set.

7 PCCIEGAIS305150 TESA Push Plate, Satin Stainless Steel finish. 305x150x1.5mm S.S.S. Set. 1


S.N.P. No.

8 TOPERCHAIS TESA Stainless steel Coat hook with rubber buffer. 2.5mm Thick S.S.S. No. 1







HW Set. 10Door Type - D12 - Double Leaf Wooden Door

Location: Corridor.


2 CT250034PL


Silver No.


S.S.S. No.



S.N.P. No.

6 TR19225SSIS TESA Solid Pull Handle, Size 225x19mm Size, Including M8x70mmScrew Thru-bolt Fixing with Brass insert, D-Shape, Fixing screwsincluded. Stainless Steel finish.

S.S.S. Set.


8 DB19SS12IS Tesa Manual lever action flush bolt for Timber Doors. 304x19mm. SatinStainless Steel Finish. S.S.S. No.

9 GUARDAPOLIS TESA Dust excluding socket. 25x38x13.5mm Dia. Satin Stainless SteelFinish. S.S.S. No.

10 TOPERCHAIS TESA Stainless steel Coat hook with rubber buffer. 2.5mm Thick S.S.S. No. 1







HW Set. 11Door Type - D14 - Double Leaf Wooden Door

Location: (W.M.C).


2 CT250034PL


Silver No.


S.S.S. No.



S.N.P. No.

6 TR19225SSIS

TESA Solid Pull Handle, Size 225x19mm Size, Including M8x70mm

Screw Thru-bolt Fixing with Brass insert, D-Shape, Fixing screwsincluded. Stainless Steel finish. S.S.S. Set.


8 DB19SS12IS Tesa Manual lever action flush bolt for Timber Doors. 304x19mm. SatinStainless Steel Finish. S.S.S. No.

9 GUARDAPOLIS TESA Dust excluding socket. 25x38x13.5mm Dia. Satin Stainless SteelFinish. S.S.S. No.








Location: Shower.


2 TR19225SSISTESA Solid Pull Handle, Size 225x19mm Size, Including M8x70mmScrew Thru-bolt Fixing with Brass insert, D-Shape, Fixing screwsincluded. Stainless Steel finish.

S.S.S. Set.



S.S.S. No.



S.N.P. No.







Location: Plumbing Shaft.


2 TIRADORBOMIS TESA Cylinder Pull with europrofile hole, satin stainless steel finish. S.S.S. No. 1


S.S.S. No.


S.N.P. No.






ALUMINIUM DOOR

HW Set. 14Door Type - L-01 - Four Leaves Aluminium Folding Door.

Location: Sub Station Room

1 ALUMINIUM DOOR HINGES No.

2 HASP AND STAPLE SETS No.

3 CL55TE6CRTESA Stainless steel range Padlock.Double security locking mechanism,Solid brass body, stainless steel shackle and SS spring.Group Master Keyed.

S.S.S. No.

4 DTR19225SSISTESA Solid Pull Handle, Size 225x19mm Size, Including M8x70mmScrew Back-to-Back Fixing with Brass insert, D-Shape, Fixing screwsincluded. Stainless Steel finish.

S.S.S. Set.

5 DB3/4LSS8ISTesa Manual lever action flush bolt for Steel & Aluminium Doors withadjustible extended rod extension. 3/4 width 8 inches. Satin TainlessSteel Finish.

S.S.S. Pair

6 GUARDAPOLIS TESA Dust excluding socket in Satin Stainless Steel Finish.25x38x13.5mm Dia. S.S.S. No.







HW Set. 15Door Type - L02 & L02a Double Leaves Aluminium Door.

Location: Substation Room & Generator Room.

1 ALUMINIUM DOOR HINGES No.


3 CL55TE6CRTESA Stainless steel range Padlock.Double security locking mechanism,Solid brass body, stainless steel shackle and SS spring.Group Master Keyed.

S.S.S. No.

4 DTR19225SSISTESA Solid Pull Handle, Size 225x19mm Size, Including M8x70mmScrew Back-to-Back Fixing with Brass insert, D-Shape, Fixing screwsincluded. Stainless Steel finish.

S.S.S. Set.

5 DB3/4LSS8ISTesa Manual lever action flush bolt for Steel & Aluminium Doors withadjustible extended rod extension. 3/4 width 8 inches. Satin TainlessSteel Finish.

S.S.S. Pair








STEEL DOOR

HW Set. 16Door Type - D15 - Single Leaf Steel Door.Location: Solar Room & Tele. Room Roof

1 BISUL 45434ISTESA Stainless steel double ball bearing butt hinges, 4.5”x 4”x3.4mm

UL Listed, Fire Rated, Grade 304 and Satin Stainless Steel Finish.(MT Screws)

S.S.S. No.

2 CT250034PL

TESA CT2500 Overhead Door Closer with V arm, Valve with AdjustableSweep Speed, Reversible, Second Valve for latch Speed Adjustment,

Back Check Valve, Suitable for Door Weights Upto 80kg and up to1,10m width. Certified to EN 1154A and Approved for Fire Doors.

Silver No.

3 4031U50AITESA 2030 Series Dead Lock for EuroProfile Cylinder. Reversible.

Cylinder Operates an Antisaw Dead Bolt. 50mm Backset. Unified BoxFormat. Certified According to UNE 97-320-88 Grade A.

S.S.S. No.


5 TE6B3535NAM

TESA Security TE-6 Double Cylinder with thumbturm 35x35mm. 6


S.N.P. No.

6 DTR19225SSISTESA Solid Pull Handle, Size 225x19mm Size, Including M8x70mm

Screw Back-to-Back Fixing with Brass insert, D-Shape, Fixing screwsincluded. Stainless Steel finish.

S.S.S. Set.







HW Set. 17Door Type - D16 - Single Leaf Steel Door.

Location: Roof Stair Case.



S.S.S. No.

2 CT250034PL

TESA CT2500 Overhead Door Closer with V arm, Valve with AdjustableSweep Speed, Reversible, Second Valve for latch Speed Adjustment,

Back Check Valve, Suitable for Door Weights Upto 80kg and up to1,10m width. Certified to EN 1154A and Approved for Fire Doors.

Silver No.



S.S.S. No.


5 TE653510NAMTESA Security TE-6 Half Cylinder 45mm. 6 Spring Loaded Antipick Pins.Made to DIN V 18254. Supplied with 3 Nickel plated brass Keys. Nickel

Finish. Group Master KeyedS.N.P. No.



S.S.S. Set.







HW Set. 18Door Type - D17, D21 & D22 - Double Leaf Steel Door.

Location: Pump Room ; Generator Room; Garbage Room & LV Room.



S.S.S. No.


3 CL55TE6CRTESA Stainless steel range Padlock.Double security locking mechanism,

Solid brass body, stainless steel shackle and SS spring.Group Master Keyed.

S.S.S. No.



S.S.S. Set.

5 DB3/4LSS8ISTesa Manual lever action flush bolt for Steel & Aluminium Doors withadjustible extended rod extension. 3/4 width 8 inches. Satin Tainless

Steel Finish.S.S.S. Pair








HW Set. 19Door Type - D24 - Single Leaf Steel Door.

Location: Pool Pump Room

1 BISUL 45434ISTESA Stainless steel double ball bearing butt h inges, 4.5”x 4”x3.4mm


S.S.S. No.



S.S.S. No.


4 TE6B3535NAMTESA Security TE-6 Double Cylinder with thumbturm 35x35mm. 6


S.N.P. No.



S.S.S. Set.



Finish Codes :

S.S.S. Satin Stainless Steel

S.N.P. Satin Nickel PlatedS.C.P. Satin Chrome PlatedSilver Silver SprayedBlack Black finishedL.T. Natural BrassH.Z. Zinc plated




Cross cut test to DIN 53151 Gt.0

Continuous Heat Resistance :

After 1000 hours at 120 Deg.C Slight yellowing of white shades

Chemical Resistance :

Test Medium Time Result _______________________________________________________

Premium petrol (gasoline) 10 minutes No changeEthanol 10 minutes No changeToluene 10 minutes No changeButyl acetate 10 minutes No changeTrichloroethylene 10 minutes Softening

Acetone 10 minutes SofteningHydrochloric acid, 10% 4 weeks No changeSulphuric aid, 10% 4 weeks No change

Acetic acid, 10% 4 weeks No changeSoda solution, 1% 4 weeks No changeNitric acid, 1% 4 weeks No changeFuel oil 4 weeks No change

Ammonia, 10% 4 weeks No changeCaustic soda lye, 10% 4 weeks Detached

Corrosion and Weathering Test :

Humidity test to DIN 50017 on zinc phosphated No change after 500 hours.steel sheet

Salt spray test to ASTM B 117 on zinc No loss of adhesionafter 20

phosphated steel sheetrounds

Weathering in Florida (USA) and industrial Excellent resultsclimate

1.4 Brass and Copper

(i) In addition to specified surface finishes, the Contractor shall where adequately treat or sealthe permanently hidden parts of metalwork from deterioration and corrosion (excluding

standard hollow sections).(ii) Mill finish aluminum will not be accepted unless specified or to the Engineer's written approval

or to be subsequently decorated.

1.5 Bolts and Nuts

Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of BS 4190 : ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws,and nuts.

1.6 Washers

Plain washers shall be made of galvanized steel. Taper or other specially shaped washers shall be madeof steel or malleable cast iron and shall conform to the requirements of BS 4230, Metal washers forgeneral engineering purposes.




1.7 Galvanized Steel Pipes

Galvanized steel pipes shall confirm to the requirements of BS 1387, IS O ―Medium Series‖.

1.8 Protective Coatings and Finishes

(a) Primers

Section of primers shall be in accordance with BS 5493 and shall comply to BS 2523, BS3098 or BS 4652.

(b) Galvanizing

Where steel is referred to as `galvanized', galvanizing shall be applied by Hot Drip process toBS 729 and BS 2989 and unless specified otherwise shall be 85 microns (6.0 g/m2)

(c) Anodising

(i) Where indicated on the drawings or specified elsewhere aluminium shall be anodisedin accordance with BS 1615 Grade AA25 and BS 3987 to the colour and finish approved bythe Engineer.

(ii) Anodising shall be by the "Anoloc" process to give 25 micron minimum depth.(iii) Sections shall be anodised before cutting into length to suit the fittings dimensions.

(d) Polyester Powder Coating

(i) Powder coatings shall comply to BS 6496 or BS 6497 as applicable to the material to becoated.

(ii) Polyes`ter powder coating shall be to a minimum film thickness of 100 microns and carriedout by an approved specialist to the specified colour.

(iii) Steel to receive polyester powder coatings shall be first galvanized in accordancewith Clause 1.5(b) above.

(iv) Aluminium sections to receive polyester powder coatings shall be first cleaned,degreased and primed with two-pack etch primer.

(v) As far as possible the assembled units as a whole shall be coated to avoid joint heat build-up,scratches, touching up joints, etc. Powder coating shall be carried out in a well establishedfactory fully equipped for such works and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

(e) Painting When described on the drawings/schedules painting of metalwork shall be in accordance withSection N of this specification.

2.0 COMPONENTS

2.1 General Requirements(i) All components shall be obtained from an approved supplier/fabricator and theContractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval a complete set of shop drawings.Drawings must be submitted at least 4 weeks before starting fabrication, showing elevations,plans and full size sections, proposed methods of fixing, proposed methods of forming joints,any proposals for fabricating large components in more than one piece.(ii) The design of metal components shall comply with the requirements of BS 4479 in as

much as they are applicable to the specific component, and where a British Standard existsfor that component it shall also be complied with.(iii) The shop drawings referred to in 2.1 (i) above shall conform to the design,

dimensions and general descriptions as shown on the drawings/schedules and as specified.(iv) After finalization of all details, prepare control samples as requested and obtain

approval of appearance before proceeding with manufacture.(v) All fixings shall be of materials compatible with the component being fixed and where




dissimilar metals are used adequate precautions, such as coating or sleeving, shall be takento prevent electrolytic corrosion.(vi) All nuts and bolts shall be adequately protected from corrosion and all exposed bolts

including Carpenters and Joiners metalwork are to be capped with an approved dome headednut.

2.2 Aluminium Windows, Doors and Screens (i) Aluminium windows shall be manufactured to BS 4873 and tested to BS 4315 Part b comply

with severe exposure rating as defined in BS 6375 Part 1.

(ii) The Contractor shall obtain from the window manufacturer all design calculations in respectof wind loading for external windows and screens and submit them to the Engineer forapproval.

(iii) Aluminium framed sliding glass doors shall be in accordance with BS 5286.

(iv) Glazing shall be installed at the factory at the time of manufacture in accordance with SectionM of this specification.

(v) All fixings, ironmongery, locks and locking devices, fly screens, glazing, weather

stripping etc, necessary for the proper and intended function of the component shall beincluded with the component and shall be allowed for within the Contractors Tender.

(vi) Ironmongery to such fabricated components shall be comparable to the ironmongery usedelsewhere and suited to the proposed operation of the component and the component shallbe suitably strengthened, lapped and modified to receive the ironmongery.

(vii) When shown on the drawings/schedules or specified, particular requirements for ironmongeryand any other integral parts of the component shall be included.

(viii) All frames, angles, channels and the like shall be non-ferrous and fixed with countersunkaluminium screws or as indicated on the drawings/schedules all of which shall be finished tomatch exactly the colour and finish of the adjacent aluminium components and sections or tothe specified finish colour.

(ix) All aluminium windows, doors, frames etc shall be factory assembled and reinforcedaccording to the drawings, complete with hinges, glazing gaskets and anchors. The only sitework allowed on aluminium units is fixing in position and glazing. The finished surfaces shallpresent a clear surface free from alloy defects, scratches, or other surface blemishes.

(x) All aluminium windows, doors, etc. shall be provided with necessary ironmongery required forits efficient functioning. Ironmongery shall be in conformity with that specified under―CARPENTRY AND JOINERY‖ and shall be coordinated and integrated to merge with theoverall system.

2.3 Substrate

The flexible substrate is a durable, flexible, translucent, dimensionally stable material consisting of apolyester scrim embedded between two layers of white pigmented vinyl specially formulated to accept the

decorative graphics material.The flexible substrate manufacturer must give written approval of compatibility of the substrate with thedecorative material used, and must warranty against failure of the substrate due to chemicalincompatibility with the graphic material and the materials used to transfer the graphics onto the substrate.

Typical characteristics of the flexible substrate are :




Proper ty Engl i sh Uni t s Metric Uni t s

Temperature stability - 20 o F to 170 o F 29 o C to 77 o C

Light Transmission 28 % ± 2 % 28 % ± 2 %

(Opacity)

Strength Tear Weft 85 lbs / in min 15 kg / cm min

Tear Warp 113 lbs / in min 10 kg / cm min

Tensile Weft 150 lbs / in min 26.6 kg / cm min

Tensile Warp 150 lbs / in min 26.6 kg / cm min

Seam Strength 50 lbs / in min 9 kg / cm min

Thickness 0.021‖ ± .001‖ 0.05 ± .0025 cm

Weight 1.22 lbs / sq.yd 670 gms / sq.m.

Dimensional Stability 1/32‖ Shrinkage

max, per 12‖

0.26 cm Shrinkage

max. per 1 m.

Impact Resistance

Flammability

No penetration

Self – Extinguishing –

Support combustion

Recognized

Does not

U. L.

Whiteness Index (Ref.) WI=103

CIELAB L*=-90.20

a*=-1.65,

Colour (reflective) b*=2.82




2.4 Workmanship

2.4.1 General

(i) All metalwork shall be undertaken in accordance with sound engineering and smithy practiceand as much metalwork as possible shall be undertaken in properly equipped workshops with

site work restricted to fixing and other operations that cannot be undertaken prior to deliveryto site.

(ii) All finished components shall be wrapped, taped or otherwise protected with non-absorbentcoverings and delivered to site at a time to eliminate or reduce to a minimum, storage on siteprior to fixing.

(iii) Protective coverings shall be sufficiently removed for jointing, assembly and fixing purposesand afterwards replaced.

(iv) After erection all metalwork with applied finishes shall be adequately protected from anydamage and any such work which is scratched, marked or damaged in any way shall besuitably repaired if appropriate, to the Engineer's approval or, if so instructed by the engineer,replaced at the Contractor's expense.

(v) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer evidence that the thickness ofprotective/decorative coatings are not less than as specified and in cases of doubt theEngineer may instruct the Contractor to send sample pieces to independent testinglaboratories and the cost of all such testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

(vi) All window, door, screen, and other like frames shall be made to allow a 5 mmtolerance all round the opening in the structure and junctions shall be finished off by applyingan approved sealant onto a closed cell polystyrene foam backing strip or as otherwise shownon drawings or specified.

(vii) Discrepancies in overall width or height exceeding 5 mm will not be allowed and where suchdiscrepancies occur the frame will be rejected.

(viii) Welding shall be undertaken in accordance with the appropriate British Standard for the type

of metal being joined.(ix) Aluminium fixed against or into cementitious materials or stone/brickwork shall be adequately

protected by plastic spacers/sheeting or two coats bituminous paint applied to the fixed faceof the component.

2.4.2 Steel Elements

All steel parts shall be accurately set out, cut, framed, assembled and executed using proper bolts or

welding electrodes. All cut parts shall be saw cut, no oxygen burning shall be permitted except for pipe

supports. All welding shall be electrical welding,, clean and of proper workmanship. All cut parts and

welded section shall be ground even and filed smooth with rounded edges.

All steel members in contact with the soil shall be painted with two (2) coats of protective asphaltpaint. All doors, frames, staircases, etc. shall be given at least one (1) coat of approved rust inhibitingprimer before delivery to site.

Frames for doors and windows shall be provided with not less than (3) adjustable type anchors oneach jamb, minimum distance between anchors shall be eight hundred (800) mm.

All joints shall be machined to a close fit and all pins and screws shall be countersunk and dressedflush after assembly.

Forging shall be sharp and true. Curves, intersections and members of the same size shall be halvedtogether.




other coating, using mild soap or detergents and clear petroleum spirits.

Acids caustics and abrasives shall not be used. Where cleaners are used to remove excess sealingcompounds care shall be exercised to prevent damage to seals or staining or damage to adjacent work.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all aluminium work until the completion of theworks, and only units in perfect working order and in perfect condition shall be accepted.

2.5 Access Hatch Rooflights

(i) Access hatch rooflights shall be obtained from an approved supplier and installed strictly incompliance with manufacturer‘s instructions.

(iii) They shall be delivered to site as a complete assembly and include an opening glazing unithinged to the frame with rigid aluminium stays and locking collars securing the hatch in theopen position. The unit shall be hand operated with internal and external openinghandles.

(iii) They shall comprise an aluminium frames proprietary factory made unit, shall be fullyweatherproof and include all flashings and gaskets as integral.

(iv) The units shall be domed of double-skinned insulated construction in wire reinforced opaldiffusing PVC, fully UV resistant, with Class 1 surface spread of flame rating according to BS476 Part 7 1971 and graded self-extinguishing according to BS 2728 1970, test method 508A.

2.6 Extruded Aluminium Expansion Joints

Extruded aluminium expansion joints shall be of a proprietary make, and of types as indicated on thedrawings complete with all fixings and fixtures, from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer. Extrudedaluminium expansion joints shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer‘s instructions.

Floor and wall joints shall be sealed with an elastomer filled proprietary joint seal with extruded aluminiumretaining profiles on each side securely bolted to the structure. Retaining profiles shall be set below theplaster or screed so that only the elastomer and the edges of the profiles show.

Joint width shall be 20 mm and the joint cover shall be capable of absorbing ± 35% free movement of the joint width. All corners, cross connections, curbs, tee joints or other special accessories shall be shopfabricated.

3.0 STEELWORK

(i) All steelwork shall be provided and fixed complete with all plates, cleats, bolts, etc.,cut to lengths and sizes and drilled as shown on the Drawings. Steelwork generallyshall comply with BS 4 part 1, BS 2994 or BS 4848 Part 4.

(ii) Rag bolts and nuts shall be mild steel to BS 1494 Part 2. Black bolts shall complywith BS 4933 and washers to BS 4320.

(iii) The steel sections where specified to be factory rustproofed shall be rust-proofed byhot dip galvanizing, metalizing or sheradizing process. The rust – proofing shall besufficient to withstand the 72 hours salt – spray test as provided for in BS 5466 : Ifthe rustproof coating suffers any damage during the progress of work, the damagedpart shall be re-coated to a minimum of the original thickness to the satisfaction of theEngineer.

3.1 Fabrication

(i) All fabrication and welding shall comply with BS 449 Part 2.

(ii) Welding shall be carried out by skilled operatives with proven qualifications and experience inusing the same electrode, class and welding positions which will be required in the work andshall comply with BS 1856. The competence of all welders shall be tested in accordance withthe relevant BS.

3.2 Priming




All steel items which are not galvanized or zinc coated are to be primed with a coat of approved rust-proofing primer. Items which have been primed before delivery to site should immediately be touched upwith similar primer and every effort made to protect the members from damage during fixing. All structuralsteelwork is to be adequately protected from the effects of the weather before fixing.

3.3 Workmanship for Steel

(i) All steelwork including connections shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with theappropriate BS to the tolerance specified.

(ii) All holes shall be drilled to the appropriate size for the type and diameter of bolt beingused. For HSFG bolts the clearance shall not exceed 2 mm, except where oversize holes arerequired for tolerance reasons and in this case special oversize washers will be supplied.

(iii) All bolts shall have steel washers between the nut and the member being fixed. The head andnut of all bolts shall have taper washers as necessary to give a bearing without bolt distortion.When load indicating washers are used the load indicating device shall bear against ahardened steel washer of the head or the bolt.

(iv) Site connections will be formed with HSFG or black bolts, to BS, of such size and quality tocarry the loads required unless specified otherwise.

(v) Stud welding and shot fired fastenings will not be allowed unless authorized in writing by theEngineer subsequent to satisfactory performance tests and trials. Contact faces betweenmembers which are to be formed with HSFG bolts shall be cleaned and left unpainted, unlessotherwise directed, and after fabrication the surfaces protected until time of assembly.Contact faces between normally bolted connections are cleaned and protected locally withred lead paint.

3.4 Welding

(i) All welding at works shall be carried out in accordance with BS requirements. All weldingoperatives employed shall be tested and qualified welders in accordance with BSrecommendations and the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, if required, evidence ofqualification.

(ii) All welded connections shall be accurately made and the joint faces formed in accordancewith BS for metal type and thickness as appropriate and any necessary pre-treatment due tometal thickness or type shall be undertaken. All welding electrodes shall be of theappropriate type to be compatible with the metal being welded.

3.5 Inspection

The Engineer may employ, to act on his behalf, an Independent Weld Inspection Company to carry outregular inspections and nondestructive, and visual examinations, whilst the fabrication and erection are inprogress to ensure compliance with the Specification and BS requirements and an adequate standard ofworkmanship and supervision for the works.

The Contractor is to allow unrestricted access and facilities at his works or those of his sub-contractors oron site for authorized personnel to carry out inspection procedures on behalf of the Engineer, in respectof the fabrication, erection and or welding of the Steelwork.

3.6 Stability

All erected steelwork shall be true to line, level and plumb, and securely bolted and fixed with temporarybracing to resist safely all loads from erection procedures and or all accidental and natural forces whichmay occur. All connections shall be permanently bolted when the members are fixed true to line,level and plumb.

3.7 Steelwork Supply and Erection

(v) The Contractor will supply all bolts and fixings to be cast into the substructure in time to

comply with the program, together with detailed setting out drawings showing the size andlocation of all items. The Contractor will supply and erect all steelwork and handovercompleted and approved as required by the construction program.




SECTION 12: FINISHINGS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 Storage of Materials

(I) Wallboards shall be stored flat in dry conditions and shall always be carried on edge.(ii) Rolls of sheet materials shall be stored standing on end.

1.2 Sample Panels and Control Samples

(I) Sample panels, minimum size 600 x 600 mm, shall be prepared for all finishes, finishings andtextured coating to be used in the Works.

(ii) If the Engineer requires a control samples of a finishing materials, it shall be prepared in anagreed location within the Works (e.g. the floor tiling to a complete room). The area to beused as a control shall be completed and approved to the standard of workmanship andappearance required by the Engineer before the application of the material is proceeded withelsewhere in the Works.

1.3 Scaffolding

(I) Scaffolding shall be erected to external facades and any other areas where it is requiredbefore any work is commenced, so that good access is obtained to the whole of the workingarea.

(ii) The scaffolding shall be supported independent of the working area and shall provideplatforms at about 2 metre intervals. A gap of at least 250 mm shall be left between the workface and the scaffolding to allow sufficient clearance for working.

1.4 Test for Dryness

Moisture content shall be ascertained by use of a hygrometer or similar approved instrument. A

substrate will be considered "dry" in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer when allreadings taken in the corner, along edges and at various points over the area being tested show 75%R.H. or less.

1.5 Uniformity

(I) To ensure consistency of appearance all flexible sheet or tiles of the same type, colour andpattern, which will be visible together when laid, shall be from one batch.

(ii) In all cases wherever possible joints in tiling walls, floors and ceilings shall bealigned/matched to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

1.6 Recessed Duct Covers and the Like

Floor finishes shall be fitted into recessed duct covers to finish flush with the surrounding floor. Tiledfinishes shall be located so as to continue the joint pattern of the surrounding floor.

1.7 Changes in Finish at Doorways

Changes in colour or type of finish in doorways shall be situated under the centre line of the door leaf.

1.8 Protection of Floors

(I) During floor laying operations the areas being treated shall only be accessible to the floorlayers.

(ii) Completed tiled floors shall not be subject to traffic until the bedding has stiffened andsufficient bond has developed between the bedding and the finish to ensure that the tiles will

not be disturbed.(iii) Light pedestrian traffic shall not be allowed over a finished floor until 4 days after completion




polymer base ―Anti -Dust‖ treatment from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

2.10 Levelling Compounds

Levelling compound for screeds which are to receive floor coverings shall be in powder form andcapable of application by addition of water to smooth out surface irregularities and set hard in ½ hour

and allow the final covering to be laid after 8 hours from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

2.11 Welded-Fabric Mesh for Reinforced Rendering

Reinforcement for rendering shall consist of galvanised welded-fabric mesh with 50 x50 mm squareshaving wires not less than 2.5 mm diameter.

2.12 Nails, Screws and Washers

(I) Nails, screws and washers shall be galvanised or of stainless steel. Pins for shotfiring shallbe of steel with a tight coating of cadmium or zinc to comply with BS 1706.

(ii) Clout nails shall comply with BS 1494, part 2.

2.13 Movement Joint Filler and Sealant

(I) Movement joint filler shall be approved impregnated fibreboard or cellular polyethylene whichis compatible with the sealant being used and which does not give up bituminous or oilyproducts.

(ii) Sealant shall be two-part polysulphide type as recommended by the manufacturer for thesituation in which they will be used. Butyl mastics and other forms of mastics shall not beused without specific approval by the Engineer.

2.14 Brass Dividing Strip

Brass dividing strips shall comply with BS DD 19.

2.15 Surface Hardener, etc.

(I) Where specified the cement and sand screeds shall be treated with sodium silicate basedsurface hardener manufactured by and applied in accordance with the printed instructions ofan approved manufacturer.

(ii) Power floated concrete slabs shall be treated with dust-proofed manufactured by and appliedin accordance with the printed instructions of an approved manufacturer.

2.16 Adhesives

(I) Adhesives for fixing ceramic wall tiles shall comply with B.S. 5980, Class A.

(ii) Adhesives used for fixing carpet shall be waterproof, peel-up type recommended for thepurpose by the carpet manufacturer.

(iii) Adhesives used for fixing flexible PVC, thermoplastic or similar material in sheet or tile formshall be recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer.




3.0 WALL FINISHINGS AND FINISHES

3.1 Plastering and Rendering

(a) General

(I) The requirements for sand for finishing coats shall comply with the following: __________________________________________________BS Sieve Percentage by mass passing BS Sieve

__________________________________________________mm %

2.36 1001.18 90 - 100600 55 - 100300 5 - 50150 0 - 10

(ii) The requirements for sand for undercoats and screeds shall comply with the following: ________________________________________________________________________

BS Sieve Percentage by mass passing BS Sieve ________________________________________________________________________

mm %

5.00 1002.36 90 - 1001.18 70 - 100600 40 - 80

300 5 - 40150 0 - 10

(b) Thickness of Plaster and Rendering

(I) The methods of measuring and mixing plaster shall be as laid down under Section E,Concrete Work and the proportion and minimum thickness of finished plasterwork andrendering shall be in accordance with the following:

__________________________________________________________________________

Plaster or Rendering Mix Minimum Thickness __________________________________________________________________________

Cement, lime, sand 1 partcement, Two coats, total finishedthickness

plaster internally 1/4 part lime, 15 mm, to walls and ceilings.4 parts sand

Wood or steel float finish.

Cement and sand 1 part cement, Render coat, 15 mm finishedrendering finishes 4 parts sand with thicknessinternally and externally approved plasticiser

__________________________________________________________________________




(c) Mixing and Use

(I) Except where hand mixing of small batches is approved by the Engineer, mechanical mixersof an approved type shall be used for mixing.

(ii) Hand mixing plaster and rendering shall be first mixed in the dry state, being turned over at

least three times. The required amount of water should then be added and the mix turnedover until such time as the mass is uniform in colour and homogeneous.(iii) Mechanical mixers, mixing boxes and tools shall be cleaned after mixing each batch and kept

free of material from previous mixes. All tools, implements, vessels and surfaces shall at alltimes be kept scrupulously clean and strict precautions shall be taken to avoid materialsbecoming contaminated by pieces of partially set material which would tend to retard oraccelerate the setting time. The plaster shall be completely used within thirty minutes ofmixing and hardened.

(iv) Plaster Retempering will not be permitted and all render or screed which has begun to stiffenshall be discarded. Frozen, caked or lumped materials shall not be remixed but removedfrom the site.

(v) Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original packages, containers or bundles bearingmanufacturer's name and brand and shall be stored in dry and well-ventilated enclosure.

(d) Preparation of Surfaces for Plaster, etc.

(I) Irregularities in the surfaces to be plastered or rendered shall be filled with mortar, withoutlime, twenty-four hours before plastering is commenced. Joints in Blockwork, etc., are to bewell raked out before plastering to form a good key. Smooth concrete surfaces to be plasteredshall be treated with an approved propriety-bonding agent.

(ii) All surfaces to be plastered or rendered shall be clean and free from dust, loose mortar andall traces of salt and adequately true and level to achieve specified tolerances.

(iii) All surfaces shall be thoroughly sprayed with water 5 to 10 minutes before plaster/render isapplied and all free water allowed to disappear before plaster is applied.

(iv) As far as practical, plastering shall not be commenced until all mechanical and electricalservices, conduits, pipes and fixtures have been installed.

(v) Before plastering is commenced all junctions between differing materials shall be reinforced.This shall apply where walls columns and beams, particularly where flush, and similarsituations where cracks are likely to develop and as directed by the Engineer. Thereinforcement shall consist of a strip of galvanised wire mesh (10 to 15 mm hexagonal mesh)450 mm wide which shall be plugged, nailed or stapled as required at intervals not exceeding450 mm at both edges. External angles shall be formed with galvanised steel angle beadsfixed with plaster dabs at not more than 450 mm centres.

(vi) A wall sample should be prepared by the Contractor prior to the commencement of the plasterworks and shall be removed at the Contractor's cost when he is instructed to do so.

(vii) Dubbing out on smooth dense concrete surfaces is not permitted.

(e) Application of Plaster and Render

(I) After preparation of the surfaces a key coat of cement slurry spatterdash of cement and sandwhich shall contain 500 kgs of cement per one cubic meter of sand shall be applied to thewetted surface to be plastered.

(ii) The Contractor shall form vertical guide screeds 50 mm wide on walls. The spacing shall notexceed 1.50 meters. The screeds shall be plumb and shall all be in the same plane. Thesides of the screed shall be left rough to bond with plaster. The finished surface shall be trueto shape and angle, even in all directions, with straight arises free from cracks and trowelmarks and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

(iii) Render shall not be applied by means of trowel between stops, laid, ruled and plumbed asnecessary within 24 hours of the spatter coat application, if used.

(iv) Render shall be floated to a true, even surface. If the surface is to be a smoothly finish then itshall be further trowelled in a manner which forces the sand particles down into the render.

(v) All render surfaces shall be free from rough areas, trowel marks, checks or other belishes.Work shall be executed in a neat workmanlike manner and internal and external angles shall




be true, straight and plump.(vi) Render shall be made good to adjacent finishes, frames, skirtings, etc. and around pipes

sleeves and other fittings.(vii) Render shall be worked into expanded metal latching, where used and into beads to form a

neat edge or arrays.(viii) The under coat shall not be applied before the elapse of 24 hours on the application of the

spatterdash coat to ensure complete setting.(ix) The under coat shall be lightly scratched in both directions to provide key for the finishing coatand shall be kept moist with a spray for two days and then allowed to dry out.

(x) Undercoats shall be applied firmly to achieve good adhesion, and in one continuous operationbetween angles and joints. Rule to an even surface and cross scratch to provide a key for thefinish coat.

(XI) The finishing coat shall not be applied until the rendering or base coat has seasoned for 7days and is firmly bounded to the background and has developed reasonable suction. Thefinishing coat, rendering coat or base coat shall be wetted evenly with a fog spray. Wherecement plaster with a smooth troweled finish is specified or indicated on the drawings, thefinish coat shall be first floated to a true even surface, then troweled in a manner that willforce the sane particles down into the plaster and with the final troweling, leave the surfacefinished smooth and free from rough areas, trowel marks, checks or other blemishes.

(ix) Cement plaster in all other spaces, where a smooth finish is not specified or noted on thedrawings, shall be given a sand float finish of a uniform texture, as approved by the Engineer.

(ix) Approved hydrated or slaked lime shall be added in the protection hereinafter specified to themix of the finish float coat to internal plaster which is to be lime washed.

(iv) All tools, implements, vessels and surfaces shall at all times be kept scrupulously clean andstrict precautions shall be taken to prevent the plaster or other materials from beingcontaminated by pieces of partially set material which would tend to retard or accelerate thesetting time.

(xv) Where wall or ceiling plaster is to stop with a clean edge to a line, the edge shall be formed bymeans of a timber batten wedge in position to act as a screed stop and the batten to becarefully removed leaving a square straight line at the edge of the plaster. Alternatively,proprietary plaster stops may be used.

(xvi) Plastering work shall not be carried out when the shade temperature exceeds 43 oC. The

Contractor is responsible for preventing excessively rapid or localised drying out.(xvii) The following are the different types of plastering finish:

(f) Types of Finish

(I) Smooth finish Finished with a steel-laying trowel to an even surface.

(ii) Plain finish Finished with a dry wood float as soon as wet sheen has disappeared from surface to give anover all even texture.

(iii) Rough textured finish Finished with a coat or carpet float to give a rough and even open texture finish.

(iv) Scraped finish Finished with laying trowel to uniform thickness and after coat has set but before it is too hard,aggregate exposed by scraping surface of skin to approved texture.

(v) Haring finish Thrown on while wet with trowel or scooped to an even texture and left to cast.

(vi) Dry dash finishTopcoat of render finished to uniform thickness; while coating plastic aggregate is thrown onto cover surface.

(vii) Sprayed finish The sprayed finish shall be applied by an approved machine to give an even texture andfinish. Sprayed finish shall not be applied until all repairs and making good to the undercoatare completed.




(g) Curing of Plaster

Each coat of plaster or rendering work is to be maintained in a moist condition for at least threedays after it has developed enough strength not to be damaged by water.

(h) Acceptance and Repairs

Plaster with cracks, blisters, trowel marks, discoloration or sand marks will not be accepted and shallbe replaced at the Contractor's expense. If plaster is damaged by related work, such as window anddoor framing etc. then all damaged parts shall be repaired to match existing plaster in texture andcolour at the Contractor's expense.

(I) Tyrolean Rendering

(I) Tyrolean rendering shall consist of white cement and coarse washed sand complying withClauses 3.1.(a)(I) in the proportions of 1 : 1 1/2 or 1 : 2 applied to a rendered undercoat.

(ii) Sufficient supplies of sand from a single source shall be stockpiled on site to ensure that theTyrolean finish is of even texture and colour throughout the works.

(iii) The rendered undercoat shall be applied in accordance with Clauses 3.1 (d) and (e) exceptthat the surface of the undercoat shall be finished smooth with wood float and not scratched.

(iv) The Tyrolean finish coat shall be applied by an approved hand-operated machine in layers tobuild up an average thickness of 6mm and shall be allowed to cure and dry in the same wayas a final rendering coat.

3.2 Dry Linings

(I) Gypsum wallboard shall consist of either 9.5 or 12.7 mm thick gypsum plasterboardcomplying with BS 1230, having one face finished for direct decoration.

(ii) Thermal wallboards shall consist of an insulation core having a thermal conductivity of notless than 0.037 W/m Deg.C. bonded on one side to gypsum wallboard and on the reverseside with a water-vapour resistant membrane.

(iii) The edge profiles of wallboard shall be:"Tapered" for smooth seamless jointing."Bevelled" for V-jointing."Square" for stippled textured coatings, cornerstrip jointing or plaster.

(iv) Accessories for installing wallboard shall be approved propriety materials recommended bythe manufacturer of the board.

3.3 Ceramic Wall Tiles

(I) Glazed ceramic wall tiles shall be first quality tiles to conform with B.S.1281 and shall beselected. Tiles shall be manufactured by an approved manufacturer.

(ii) Tiles for external use must be recommended for that purpose by the manufacturer. All tilesshall be glued to plaster with an approved adhesive especially made for the purpose withclosely butted joints and later pointed in white or coloured cement.

(iii) Where tiling abuts against frame or other tiling at angles and around pipes, etc., it shall becarefully cut and fitted to form a close neat joint. Open irregular joints filled with cement andsand or plaster will not be permitted.

(iv) Movement beads in the face of wall tiling shall be positioned at internal corner, at junctionsbetween concrete blocks and concrete columns and at maximum 4.50 m vertical centres.

(v) A silicon rubber based sealant shall be inserted between tiles and all sanitary fittings and shallbe by an approved manufacturer and used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer'sprinted instructions.




4.0 FLOOR FINISHINGS AND FINISHES

4.1 Materials and Manufacturers

4.1.1 Cement .

Cement shall be ordinary Portland Cement to BS 12. White (non stain) cement shall conformto the same specification standards.

4.1.2 Colour .Colour pigments shall conform to BS 1014.

4.1.3 Sand (Fine Aggregate) .Sand (Fine Aggregate) for use in Tile and Slab finishings shall be as specified under―Concrete Work‖

4.1.4 Water Water shall be as specified under ―Concrete Work‖.

4.1.5 Grout .Grout for tiling work shall be obtained from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

4.1.6 Adhesive Adhesive shall be a suitable cement based adhesive complying with BS 5980 : 1980, from amanufacturer approved by the Engineer.

4.1.7 Joint Sealant .Sealant for movement joints shall be silicone based for internal use and 1 part polysulphidebased for external use, from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

4.1.8 Backing Strip .Backing Strip for joint sealant shall be round, closed cell, impermeable, expanded

polyethylene from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

4.1.9 Joint Filling Material .Filling material for movement joints shall be flexible bitumen impregnated mineral fibreboardfrom a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

4.1.10 Damp Proof Course (Separating layer) .

Membrane shall be polythene sheet, 1000 gauge thick.

4.1.11 Plasticisers .Plasticisers shall be from a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

4.1.12 Mastic Mastic for waterproofing and damp proofing membrane shall be rubber / bitumen based froma manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

4.1.13 Precast Terrazzo Tiles, Skirting, Etc. …. The Precast terrazzo tiles and skirting shall be formed of white cement and granular marblechipping of large grades in order to obtain a good wearing surfaces. The thickness of thewearing layer shall be around half tile thickness. Precast terrazzo skirtings shall have squaretop edges.

Precast terrazzo treads, risers, skirting, thresholds, etc. shall be of the design, dimensionsand thickness shown on the drawings and they shall be formed in the same proportions andmixes as for tiles.

Where required, terrazzo units shall be reinforced with bars and treads shall have either a




non-slip aggregate (carborundum) incorporated into the top surface or a non-slip nosingrecessed into the surface near the edge as directed by the Engineer.

Grinding shall be done wet by means of appropriate carborundum stones. Filling shall be witha neat cement grout of the same colour as the facing mix and this shall be worked into thesurface with a wooden scraper to fill all voids and air hoes. After a minimum period of 24

hours polishing shall be carried out as described in ―Workmanship‖.

Samples or terrazzo shall be provided for the Engineer to choose from.

4.1.14 Ceramic Floor Tiles .

Ceramic floor tiles shall be matt finish, vitrified plain clay tiles manufactured in accordancewith BS 1286 : 1974. Skirtings shall be cove edge type 100 mm high. Special pieces shall beused for steps. Acid resistant tiles shall be used where specified. Tile patters and colourshall be to the Engineer‘s approval.

4.1.15 Glazed Wall Tiles .

Glazed wall tiles shall conform to the requirements of BS 1281 and the size shall be as shownon the schedule of finishes or the drawings and or an approved pattern and colour. Singleedge and double edge rounded tiles, coves and corner pieces shall be used where requiredand shall be of same quality, colour and finish.

4.1.16 Marble or Granite Slabs

Marble or granite slabs for flooring, skirting, treads, risers, door thresholds, column and wallcladding shall be first quality, uniform in colour and texture, free from voids, earth veins andlamination or structural weakness and of an approved texture and colour. The pattern,

dimensions and thickness of marble or granite slabs shall be as shown on the drawings, or asstated in the Bills of Quantities. Samples of marble or granite slabs shall be submitted to theEngineer for approval prior to order.

Metal anchorage consisting of craps, bolts, dowels, etc. shall be of approved preparatorymake from stainless steel or phosphor bronze.

4.2 Cement and Sand Floor Screeds

(I) The surface of the concrete base must be clean, firm and rough to ensure a good bond. Thisshall be achieved by hacking thoroughly to remove all latency and to expose the aggregateover the whole area, followed by sweeping clean and hosing down to remove all dust.

(ii) The base shall be soaked with water for at least 12 hours and any surplus water removedbefore laying commences.

(iii) To obtain the required thickness of screed, levelling battens shall be used, carefully fixed toline and level and fully bedded. There shall be a minimum thickness of screed of 20 mm overthe top any conduit or duct.

(iv) The screed shall be laid in alternate bays maximum 15m 2 with plain butt joints and length ofthe bay shall not exceed 1.5 times the width. Movement and construction joints in the baseshall be carried through the screed.

(v) Immediately prior to laying the screed, a thick brush coat of wet cement grout shall be appliedto the damp surface of the base concrete and shall be well scrubbed in. The brush coat mustnot be applied more than 10 minutes before it is covered with screed.

(vi) Screeds to receive thin flexible finishes (i.e. of vinyl and rubber sheet or tile) shall consist of 1part of cement to 3 parts of sand by weight and screeds to receive strong rigid coverings (e.g.quarry and ceramic tile) shall consist of 1 part of cement to 4 parts of sand by weight. Sandshall comply with the requirements of Clause 3.1.(ii).




(vii) The mix shall only contain sufficient water with a maximum allowable slump of 50 mm that willallow full compaction and shall be evenly spread to a thickness approximately 10 mm greaterthan that required. The screed shall then be thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawingoff to the required level with a screed board.

(viii) If a smooth surface is required the final working up shall be done with a wood float, steeltrowel, power float or other finish as specified elsewhere in the contract documentation. Care

shall be taken to avoid excessive trowelling which may cause crazing.(ix) Screeds to receive thin flexible finishes or screeds which are finished as paving shall be laidto a tolerance such that localised variations do not exceed plus or minus 2 mm under a 3metre straight edge and plus or minus 10mm over large areas, measured from datum.

(x) As soon as each bay is completed and has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage to itssurface it shall be covered with polythene or similar sheets which shall be adequately lappedand held down. The screed shall not be allowed to dry out for a minimum period of 7 daysand no traffic shall be permitted on the surface during this time.

4.3 PVC and Thermoplastic Floor Tiles

(I) Thermoplastic floor tiles shall comply with BS 2592.(ii) PVC (Vinyl) asbestos floor tiles shall comply with BS 3260 to be supplied by a manufacturer

approved by the Engineer and they shall be laid strictly in accordance with the manufacturer'sprinted instructions and C.P. 203.

(iii) A high standard of finish will be required and it is essential that the preparatory screeds be putdown accurately to thickness and level. Unless otherwise stated the screeds will be 1:3,cement and sand, trowelled smooth and level. Tiles will be fixed to the prepared screed withapproved adhesive and treated on completion with approved liquid sealer applied strictly inaccordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

(iv) Cove skirtings will be fixed to backing with adhesive. Brass division strips are to be providedat junctions of different colours and against other floor finishes and are to be bedded into thescreed and finished flush with the floor finish.

4.4 Flexible Sheet Flooring

(I) Unbaked PVC sheet flooring shall comply with BS 3261, part 1, Type "A".(ii) PVC sheet flooring will be fixed to the prepared screed with approved adhesive all as Clause

4.2 above.

4.5 Ceramic Floor Tiles

(a) General

Ceramic floor tiling shall be carried out in compliance with BSCP 202 : Section 4 : 1972.

The overall thickness of tiles, mortar and screed shall be maximum of 100 mm. Bedding of Ceramictiles will be of a stiff plastic consistency, spread, compacted, cement sand mortar and leveled to athickness of 9 – 10 mm.

(I) Unglazed ceramic floor tiles and skirting tiling shall conform to B.S. 1286 and shall be by anapproved manufacturer.

(ii) Tiles shall be delivered in unbroken packages bearing the brand and makers name. Theyshall be stored on raised platforms and properly covered to protect them from moisture. Tilesmust not be allowed to come into contact with water during storage.

(iii) Damaged materials and manufactured items shall not be used in the works specified underthis Section. Any materials and manufactured items damaged during and after bedding orsetting in position shall be removed and replaced by and at the Contractor‘s expense. (vi) Although recommended sizes and thickness of tiles, slips and slabs will be indicatedon the drawings, the final choice of size colour and thickness shall be decided by theEngineer‘s Representative at site.

(iv) Tiles shall be dipped in water and surface water allowed to drain off. The back of the tiles shallbe buttered with neat cement / water mix. (Or cement based adhesive), and the tiles lay onbedding and tapped down to form a level surface. All joints shall be as close as possible and




shall in no case exceed half (0.5) mm in width on face for areas less than ten (10) squaremeters and one (1) mm for areas over ten (10) square meters.

(vi) Water content of mortar must be limited to prevent formation of surface water when mortar iscompacted and surface water, which does occur, must be allowed to dry. Sufficient mortar for2 – 3 hours work maximum shall be laid at any one time.

(vii) Tiles are to be bedded in cement and sand (1:3) with applied cement slurry on cement andsand screed as described to make up the total finished floor thickness with perimeter andintermediate joints at maximum 4500mm centres. Do not use admixtures without theEngineer's approval.

(viii) Tiles shall be laid with continuous straight joints not wider than 2mm to true lines withoutlipping and with a minimum of cutting. Work shall be so laid out that no tiles less than half tilesize shall occur.

(ix) Bedding joints shall be well filled and grouted at least 12 hours after completion with a mortarmix tinted to match the colour of the tiles. All surplus grouting and mortar shall be cleaned offimmediately.

(x) Tiles shall be neatly cut around pipes or other obstructions. All work shall be protected fromdamage during the contract and shall be properly cleaned off on completion.

(XI) Clean off and polish tiles at completion. Protect external tiling from heat and inclementweather until jointing has completely set. Do not allow water on to new tiling until beddingand jointing have completely set.

(ix) Acid resistant tiles shall be grouted in a suitable acid – resistant grout shall be applied inmatching colour according to manufacturer‘s written instructions and to the Engineer‘sapproval.

(ix) The surplus grout from the floor surface shall be gently wiped with fine sand. Sawdust shallnot be used.

(iv) Walking on tiles shall not be allowed for five (5) days after laying.(xv) Perimeter movement joints shall be provided to the full depth of finish, bedding and screed in

al tiles floors.

(b) Floor and Wall Tile Movement Joints

(I) Floor and wall tile movement joints shall be a minimum of 6 mm wide at the tile face. The joints shall be packed with silicon rubber sealant after priming. The joint backing shall be 10mm diameter foamed polyurethane strip to pass through the full depth of tile and renderedbacking.

(ii) Silicon Rubber Sealant shall be by an approved manufacturer and used strictly in accordancewith the manufacturer's written instructions.

(c) Floor and Wall Tile Expansion Joints

The expansion joint materials are to be supplied by an approved manufacturer and used strictly inaccordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

(d) Ceramic floor and Wall Tile Adhesive

Ceramic floor and wall tile adhesive and grouting material shall be by an approved manufacturer andused strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

4.6 Terrazzo

(a) Terrazzo Floor Tiles and Skirtings

(I) Portland cement, aggregates for the base layer and pigments used in the manufacture of thetiles shall comply with Clause 2.1 above. Aggregates for the facing layer shall consist of goodquality, hard marble or other approved natural stone with similar characteristics. The marbleaggregates shall be graded, but shall not include a high fines or dust content and shall besharp and angular.

(ii) The base layer shall consist of not less than 3 and not more than 3.5 parts of aggregate toone part of cement, proportioned by weight. The facing layer shall be such as to provide aminimum-wearing surface of 6 mm after grinding and shall generally consist of 2.5 parts of




aggregate to one part of coloured cement.(iii) The tiles shall be vibrated to an extent which allows the entrapped air to escape to the surface

and compacts the aggregate at the wearing surface and hydraulically pressed sufficient tomould the facing to the base layer.

(iv) The surface of the facing layer shall be ground and slight imperfection shall be filled bygrouting with a neat cement paste coloured to match the original mix and well worked into the

surface before it is re-ground to a fine grit finish.(v) Skirting tiles shall have square or bevelled, ground top edges. Cut floor tiles shall not be usedfor skirtings.

(vi) The tile faces shall be free from projections, depressions, flakes and crazes and theaggregate shall be evenly distributed. The tiles shall be square and of rectangular crosssection with sharp and true arises, shall comply with the performance requirements of BS4131 and shall be of the minimum thickness shown on the drawings.

(b) Laying Terrazzo Tiles

(I) The areas of concrete substrate to be tiled shall be brushed clean and dampened untilabsorption ceases and the finished floor level shall be established by means of dots andrules.

(iii) The mortar for bedding the tiles shall be to the thickness shown elsewhere in the contractdocumentation and shall consist of 1 part of cement to 3 parts of sand by volume and anyadmixture approved by the Engineer, mixed semi-dry in a mechanical mixer with onlysufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezedin the hand.

(iii) A stiff slurry consisting of cement and water shall be prepared and spread on the back of thetiles about 2 mm thick before they are laid on the bed and tapped firmly into position with arubber or wooden hammer. The tiles shall then be vigorously beaten with a wooden beater toensure a true surface and that contact between the tiles and bedding is complete.

(iv) The tiles shall be laid with joints of about 3 mm and proper alignment shall be maintained with

continuous square joints in both directions. The joints shall line-up through doorways wherepossible.

(v) At least 24 hours after laying the tiles, the joints shall be filled with neat cement grout to acolour approved by the Engineer. Care should be taken to fill and joints completely. Excessgrout shall be removed with a squeegee and shall be cleaned off the face of the tiling andsurrounding surfaces as the work proceeds.

(vi) The tiles shall be laid with a minimum of cut tiles, but where it is necessary they shall be cutwith approved power driven saw and any rough edges shall be rubbed smooth. Roughcutting by means of a chisel or axe shall not be permitted.

(vii) Cut – tiles misfits shall be replaced with properly cut tiles. Straight edges shall be accuratelyset to the lines established and reset at suitable intervals to keep the joints parallel over the

entire area.(viii) Broken tiles or tiles showing the least signs of defects will not be accepted and if laid by the

Contractor shall be removed and replaced with sound tiles, at his own expense.

(ix) Tiles shall be laid out from the centreline of each space outward and adjustment made alongwalls, partitions, and borders, so as to symmetries the pattern with a minimum of cut tiles.Tiles of less than half of their full size along one side after cutting should be avoided.

(x) Tiles shall be laid level or to 1% falls in "wet" areas, as may be required. Localised variationsin level for a nominally flat floor shall be a maximum of plus or minus 3 mm under a 3 metrestraight edge. Particular care shall be taken in "wet" areas to prevent low spots and thepooling of water.

(XI) Skirtings shall be fixed in such a manner that their vertical joints coincide with the horizontal

joints of the floor tiles.(ix) All terrazzo surfaces shall be polished on completion. Large areas such as floors shall be wet




polished by means of approved machines using a No. 140 carboundum wheel. Any narrowsurfaces, which cannot be polished conveniently by the machine, may be polished by handusing a No. 140 carborundum stone and water. Care must be taken during any polishingoperation not to damage any angles or arises. Polishing shall be performed with addition ofappropriate lead and salt pigments as approved by the Engineer to produce a mirror – likeglossy finish.

(c) Precast Terrazzo Units

(I) Precast terrazzo units shall comply with the requirements of BS 4131.

(ii) Precast terrazzo treads and risers shall also comply with Clause 4.4(a) above except that thefacing layer of the treads shall be such as to provide a minimum-wearing surface of 12 mmafter grinding.

(iii) All exposed edges of the units shall be terrazzo faced.

4.7. Entrance Matting

(I) Entrance matting shall be of open construction (allowing dirt to fall through into recessedwell).

(ii) Mats shall have an absorbent pile surface with alternative ridges of aluminium and rubber,and be fully reversible.

(iii) Mats are set in recessed wells with 30 mm deep aluminium angle skirtings, and shall be flushwith adjacent floor finishes.

4.8 Epoxy Flooring (1.5 mm minimum self levelling)

(a) General

(I) Self levelling epoxy flooring shall be from an approved supplier and shall be resistant towater, acid, oil, petrol and abrasion.

(ii) It shall be applied level at a minimum thickness of 1.5 mm (as specified) to a sand cementscreed sub-base, whose surface shall be prepared in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions and to the required tolerances. The finished surface shall be jointless, ductless,chemically resisting and hard wearing.

(iii) Application is to be according to manufacturer's instructions.

(iv) A non-slip finish is to be applied by sprinkling 60 mesh aluminium oxide grains uniformly overthe surface before the epoxy sets. Care must be taken to ascertain the correct time forapplying the non-slip aggregate, by use of a test pane.

(v) The colour of the flooring is to be as approved by the Engineer.

(b) Epoxy Resin Based Sealer

(I) Where specified the cement and sand screeds shall be treated with an approved surfacesealer to be obtained from an approved supplier, applied strictly in accordance with themanufacturer's written instructions.

(ii) The colour of the flooring is to be as approved by the Engineer.

5.0 WALL FINISHINGS

5.1 Glazed Wall Tiles - Fixing with Adhesive




The joints shall be tooled slightly concave and the excess mortar shall be cut off and wiped off with adamp cloth from the face of tile, before it sets hard.

Interstices or depressions found in the mortar joints after the grout has been cleaned from the surfaceshall be roughened at once and filled to the spring line of the cushion edge before the mortar begins

to harden.

Immediately after the grout has had its initial set, glazed wall tile surfaces shall be given a protectivecoat of a non-corrosive soap or toner approved method of protection and joints cured for 72 hours.

Wall tiles operations in spaces where floor tiles are required also, shall not be started until the floortiles are required also, installation had been completed.

5.3 Marble or Granite Slabs

Marble or granite floor slabs shall be laid on a bed of cement : Sand mortars 1 : 3 mix. The back ofthe slab shall be properly sealed to ensure good bonding between the slab and mortar.

All slabs shall be tight butt jointed. Joints shall be thoroughly grouted with matching coloured cementand wiped clean before setting hard.

All exposed faces and edges of marble or granite shall be polished smooth free from scratches orother defects.

Marble or granite wall cladding shall be fixed in accordance with BSCP 298 : 1972. Cladding shall befixed to solid background by mechanical means such as cramps, dowels and similar fixings inaccordance with the working drawings. The cladding shall be supported at its lower edge andsecurely tied back at the top. The thickness of the material behind the cramp should be 20 mm. Thefixing cramps shall be adequately inset in to the supporting background, preferably with undercutholes and secured in place with 1 : 3 cement / sand or epoxy / polyester resin mortar dabs. The backsurface of the cladding shall be coated with an approved quality sealant.

Cladding shall be butt jointed with maximum 3 mm gaps.

The length and height dimensions of individual slabs shall be worked to within plus or minus 1 mmfrom those specified. Thickness shall be within 3 mm from that specified. For wall cladding, all blockwork, concrete or other backing must be formed so as to allow a minimum of 20 mm clearancebetween the backing and the back of the cladding.

Cramp holes and mortises shall be carefully drilled or cut to avoid stunning or fracture of the materialadjacent to the hole or mortise.

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and fixing protection against weather or damage andstaining by other trades. Particular care must be taken against staining from timber, oil, wet straw,washing from steel work or scaffolding or from any other injurious substances. On completion ofadjacent building operations the completed marble work shall be cleaned down and any defects in thepointing and polishing shall be rectified.

The Contractor shall prepare fully dimensioned shop drawings from details shown on workingdrawings supplied by the Engineer and from site survey. Key numbers of each slab shall be showntogether with details of metal anchoragets. No marble or granite shall be worked until these drawingsare approved by the Engineer.

6.0 CEILING FINISHINGS

6.1 Suspended Ceilings Generally




(I) The Contractor shall provide shop drawings to show the final layout and sizes of members ofall suspension systems and co-ordinate the design and work on the suspended ceilings withother trades to provide for the reception and installation of outlets, fixtures, access panels,etc., pertaining to mechanical and electrical work, all for the Engineer's approval before anywork is commenced.

(ii) Ceilings shall be erected in a rigid and secure manner by workmen skilled in this work so thatthe final surface is free from any waves, buckles or sags.They are symmetrical about the centre lines of the room or space, beginning with a tile or jointline as required to avoid narrow tiles at the perimeter.

(iii) The ceiling shall be finished at the junction with all walls and columns with edge trim fixed atmaximum 450 mm centres.

(iv) Additional supports shall be provided above all access panels, light fittings, diffusers, etc., andthe tiles shall be accurately cut to accommodate all such fittings. Under no circumstancesshall any fitting be supported by the tiles, plank or strip membrane material.

(v) Care shall be taken to ensure that the tiles are kept clean if subsequently removed for accessto services, for inspection or for remedial works.

(vi) All suspended ceilings work shall be carried out in accordance with C.P. 290.(vii) The tile plank or strip membrane material shall be as specified elsewhere in the contract and

shall have a fire performance when tested in accordance with B.S 476 which satisfies the requirements of:

Class 0 - BS 476, Part 6 Class 1 - BS 476, Part 7

(viii) The suspension system shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the membranematerial and shall be constructed from hot dipped galvanised steel sections and galvanisedwire or similar non-corrodible materials and fixings.

(ix) The suspended ceiling system shall incorporate proprietary mineral fibre tiles, which shall be

by an approved manufacturer and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's writtendirections.

6.2 Expanded Metal Latching Ceilings

(I) Unless otherwise approved, framework shall consist of 9 mm x 25 mm, 16 g galvanised steelchannel sections at 600 mm centres wired to 11 mm x 38 mm, 16 g galvanised steel channelsections hung on 3 mm x 25 mm straps. The straps shall be bolted to concrete soffit withrawbolts.

(ii) Covering shall be ribbed galvanised tying wire or to underside of timber framing at maximum350 mm centres.

(iii) The whole to form a suspension grid ready and of adequate strength to receive plaster orother applied finish and with supports for light fittings where required.

(iv) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer shop drawings as described.

6.3 Suspended Plasterboard Ceilings

(I) Unless otherwise approved the suspension system shall consist of 80 mm x 26 mm x 0.5 mmthickness ceiling section at 450 mm centres connected by wire connecting clip to 15 mm x 0.9mm thickness intermediate channel at 1200 mm centres maximum suspended from theconcrete soffit by 25 mm x 0.5 mm strap hangers at 1200 centres maximum.

(ii) Strap hangers shall be suspended from 27 mm x 37 mm x 25 mm x 1.6 mm thick soffit cleatsrawbolted or shot fired to concrete soffit. Strap hangers shall be bolted of soffit cleats andscrew fixed to intermediate channel.

(iii) Perimeter channels shall be 20 mm x 27 mm x 30 mm x 0.5 mm thick to accept the ends of




SECTION 12a: CERAMIC TILING, QUARRY STONE & POOL DECK

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

TYPES OF FINISHES

110 GRANITI TILE - TO FLOOR AS PER FINISHING SCHEDULE.- Tiles: GRES PORCELLANTO Fully vitrufied.- Manufacturer/ Supplier: RAK Ceramics or approved equal.

Product reference: To approval.- Colour: To approval.- Finish: Unpolished anti-slip.- Size: As schedule of finishes and drawings.- Thickness: as per size.- Background/ Base: Cement sand screed.- Intermediate substrate: Not required.- Bedding: As clause 650 to 740.- Reinforcement: Not required.- Adhesive: High performance cementitoius adhesive Keraflex C2TE from Mapei in

compliance with ISO 13007-1.- Joint width: 2 mm set at with spacer legs.- Grout: Ultracolor CG2WA from Mapei complying to BS EN 13888.- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and

appearance in each conditions . Intermediate movement joints not more than 10 mcentres. Perimeter movement joints including door thresholds and around columnsand stairs. Structural movement joints coincides with the structural movement joints inthe base.

- Accessories: Covered skirtings, plain skirtings, step or other nosings, nonslip inserts,tile edge trim, Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material toapproval and movement joint covers etc. for complete installation.

111 CERAMIC TILE - TO FLOOR AS PER FINISHING SCHEDULE.- Tiles: CERAMIC WHITE BODY.- Manufacturer/ Supplier: RAK Ceramics or approved equal.

Product reference: To approval.- Colour: To approval.- Finish: Unpolished anti-slip.- Size: As schedule of finishes and drawings.- Thickness: as per size.- Background/ Base: Cement sand screed.- Intermediate substrate: Not required.- Bedding: As clause 650 to 740.- Reinforcement: Not required.- Adhesive: High performance cementitoius adhesive Keraflex C2TE from Mapei in

compliance with ISO 13007-1.- Joint width: 2 mm set at with spacer legs.- Grout: Ultracolor CG2WA from Mapei complying to BS EN 13888.- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and


- Accessories: Covered skirtings, plain skirtings, step or other nosings, nonslip inserts,tile edge trim, Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material toapproval and movement joint covers etc. for complete installation.

112 TILING TO EXTERNAL FACADE AND BOUNDARY WALL.




- Tiles: Ceramic.- Manufacturer: Nitto Seitosho Fascia Ceramics Tiles www.nittoseitosho.co.jp- Supplier: Mr. P.P Sood, Trade Engineering LLC PO Box 36472 Dubai Tel +971 4

2825150, +971 50 6443804, email [email protected] Product reference: Refer drawing and to Architect / Engineer / Clients approval.- Colour: To approval.

- Finish: Matt.- Size: As schedule of finishes and drawings with special corner tiles.- Thickness: Minimum 9 mm.- Background/ Base: Mature render. Primed drywall surface.- Preparation: Splattered coat to provide key.- Intermediate substrate: Not required.- Bedding: As clause710.- Reinforcement: Not required.- Adhesive: High performance cementitoius adhesive Keraflex C2TE from Mapei in

compliance with ISO 13007-1.- Joint width: 2 mm set at with spacer legs.- Grout: Ultracolor CG2WA from Mapei complying to BS EN 13888.- Type/ classification: CG2 .

- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose andappearance in each conditions . Intermediate movement joints not more than 10mcentres. Perimeter movement joints including door thresholds and around columnsand stairs. Structural movement joints coincides with the structural movement joints inthe base.

- Accessories: Tile edge trim, Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansionmaterial to approval and movement joint covers etc. for complete installation.

112 TILING TO WALL.- Tiles: Vitrufied porcelain or Ceramic.- Manufacturer/ Supplier: RAK Ceramics or approved equal- Product reference: To approval.- Colour: To approval.

- Finish: Matt.- Size: As schedule of finishes and drawings.- Thickness: Minimum 8 mm.- Background/ Base: Mature render . Primed drywall surface.- Preparation: Splattered coat to provide key.- Intermediate substrate: Not required.- Bedding: As clause710.- Reinforcement: Not required.- Adhesive: High performance cementitoius adhesive Keraflex C2TE from Mapei in

compliance with ISO 13007-1.- Joint width: 2 mm set at with spacer legs.- Grout: Ultracolor CG2WA from Mapei complying to BS EN 13888.- Type/ classification: CG2 .- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and

appearance in each conditions . Intermediate movement joints not more than 10mcentres. Perimeter movement joints including door thresholds and around columnsand stairs. Structural movement joints coincides with the structural movement joints inthe base.


113 GLASS MOSAIC TO POOL.- Tiles: Crystal Glass Mosaic.- Manufacturer/ Supplier: Crystal Tiles http://www.crystaltiles.com or approved equal- Product reference: B12C or to Architects selection.- Colour: Multicolour to approval.- Finish: Translucent and glossy.

http://www.crystaltiles.com/







- Size: 1‖ x 2‖ - Thickness: Minimum 8 mm.- Water Absorption – to Comply with EN ISO 10545-3 1997- Frost Resistance – to Comply with EN ISO 10545-12 1997- Bending Strength – to Comply with EN ISO 10545-4 1997- Stain Resistance – to Comply with EN ISO 10545-14 1997

- Crazing Resistance – to Comply with EN ISO 10545-11 1997- Chemical Resistance – Class `A‘ to Comply with EN ISO 10545 -13 1997- Background/ Base: Mature render . Primed drywall surface.- Preparation: Splattered coat to provide key.- Intermediate substrate: Gannite.- Bedding: As clause. 661- Reinforcement: Not required.- Adhesive: High performance cementitoius adhesive Keraflex C2TE from Mapei in

compliance with ISO 13007-1.- Joint width: 2 mm set at with spacer legs.- Grout: Ultracolor CG2WA from Mapei complying to BS EN 13888.- Type/ classification: CG2 .- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and

appearance in each conditions. Intermediate movement joints not more than 10mcentres. Perimeter movement joints including door thresholds and around columnsand stairs. Structural movement joints coincide with the structural movement joints inthe base.


120 NATURAL STONE - MARBLE TILING TO FLOOR AS PER FINISHING SCHEDULE- Stone:- Name (traditional): To Engineers and client approval.- Petrological family: Metamorphic rocks.- Colour: To Engineers and client approval.

- Origin: To Engineers and client approval.- Finish: Polished and pattern to approval.- Supplier: To approval.- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or other defects deleterious

to strength/ colour.- Size: As schedule of finishes and drawings.- Thickness: 30 mm .- Sealer - ‗SurfaPore C‘ from Nanophos, Greece or approved equivalent, number od

coat as per manufactures recommendation.- Other requirements: Water absorption maximum 0.60%, Ultimate Tensile Stress 72

Kg./Sq.cm., Impact Test minimum full height 34 cm. Bulk density 2750 Kg./ m 3. Applyback sealer to stones before lying. Provide a Water Repellent coating penetrating topsealer after final polishing using diamond method. Slabs should be of a grain flowwhen laid. Shade/ tone, viewing or pattern variation not to be more than 10%.

- Background/ Base: Concrete Screed .- Intermediate substrate: Not required .- Bedding: As clause 740.- Reinforcement: Not required.- Adhesive: Cement, Lime and sand mortar as clause 740.- Joint width: Butt jointed with tiles touching each other.- Grout: Suitable product to BS EN 13888, from Fosroc or approved equal.- Type/ classification: CG2.- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and





- Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material toapproval at all exposed movement joints and Junctions with adjoining finishes.

121 NATURAL STONE – MARBLE TILE AT STEPS TREAD AND RISER- Stone:

- Name (traditional): To Engineers and client approval- Petrological family: Metamorphic rocks- Colour: To Engineers and client approval.- Origin: To Engineers and client approval.- Finish: Polished with Sawn edges and with depression/ groove with anti-slip emery

tape to approval.- Supplier: To approval.- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or other defects deleterious

to strength/ colour.- Size: To Engineers and client approval.- Sealer - ‗SurfaPore C‘ from Nanophos, Gre ece or approved equivalent, number od


Kg./Sq.cm., Impact Test minimum full height 34 cm. Bulk density 2750 Kg./ m3

. Applyback sealer to stones before lying. Provide a Water Repellent coating penetrating topsealer after final polishing using diamond method. Slabs should be of a grain flowwhen laid. Shade/ tone, viewing or pattern variation not to be more than 10%..

- Background/ Base: Concrete Screed .- Preparation: As approved.- Intermediate substrate: As approved.- Bedding: As approved.- Reinforcement: Not required.- Adhesive: Cement, Lime and sand mortar as clause 740.- Joint width: Butt jointed with tiles touching each other.- Grout: Suitable product to BS EN 13888, from Fosroc or approved equal.- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and

appearance in each conditions . Intermediate movement joints not more than 10mcentres. Perimeter movement joints including door thresholds and around columnsand stairs. Structural movement joints coincides with the structural movement joints inthe base.

- Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material toapproval at all exposed movement joints and Junctions with adjoining finishes

122 NATURAL STONE - MARBLE TILING TO WALL- Stone:- Name (traditional): To Engineers and client approval.- Petrological family: Metamorphic rocks.- Colour: To Engineers and client approval.- Origin: To Engineers and client approval.- Finish: Polished and pattern to approval .- Supplier: To approval.- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or other defects deleterious

to strength/ colour.- Size: As schedule of finishes and drawings.- Sealer - ‗SurfaPore C‘ from Nanophos, Greece or approved equivalent, number od


Kg./Sq.cm., Impact Test minimum full height 34 cm. Bulk density 2750 Kg./ m 3. Applyback sealer to stones before lying. Provide a Water Repellent coating penetrating topsealer after final polishing using diamond method. Slabs should be of a grain flowwhen laid. Shade/ tone, viewing or pattern variation not to be more than 10%.

- Background/ Base: Blockwork wall/concrete.- Intermediate substrate: Not required .




- Installation: .- Framing: Galvanised structural framing rails necessary for alignment as per drawing.

Calculations and materials to approval.- Fixing: Proprietory Galvanised steel fixing brackets by Halfen, Harris and Edgar or

approved equal..- Joint width: Butt jointed with tiles touching each other.

- Grout: Not required.- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose andappearance in each conditions . Intermediate movement joints not more than 10 mcentres. Perimeter movement joints including door thresholds and around columnsand stairs. Structural movement joints coincides with the structural movement joints inthe base.

- Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material toapproval at all exposed movement joints and Junctions with adjoining finishes.

131 NATURAL STONE – GRANITE TILE AT ENTRANCE- Stone:

- Name (traditional): JUPARANA. - Petrological family: Igneous rocks. - Colour: PINK.- Origin: Indian Subcontinent.- Finish: Honed with Sawn edges and pattern to approval.- Supplier: To approval.- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or

other defects deleterious to strength/ colour.- Size: 600 x 600 mm.- Thickness: 30 mm.- Sealer - ‗SurfaPore C‘ from Nanophos, Greece or approved equivalent, number od


Kg./Sq.cm., Impact Test minimum full height 34 cm. Bulk density 2750 Kg./ m 3. Applyback sealer to stones before lying. Provide a Water Repellent coating penetrating top

sealer after final polishing using diamond method. Slabs should be of a grain flowwhen laid. Shade/ tone, viewing or pattern variation not to be more than 10%..

- Background/ Base: Concrete Screed .- Preparation: As approved.

- Intermediate substrate: As approved.- Bedding: As approved.

- Reinforcement: Not required.- Adhesive: Cement, Lime and sand mortar as clause 740.

- Joint width: Butt jointed with tiles touching each other.- Grout: Suitable product to BS EN 13888, from Fosroc or approved equal.

- Type/ classification: CG2.- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and appearance in

each conditions . Intermediate movement joints not more than 10m centres. Perimetermovement joints including door thresholds and around columns and stairs. Structuralmovement joints coincides with the structural movement joints in the base.

- Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to approvalat all exposed movement joints and Junctions with adjoining finishes

132 NATURAL STONE – GRANITE TILE AT STEPS TREAD- Stone:

- Name (traditional): JUPARANA. - Petrological family: Igneous rocks. - Colour: PINK.- Origin: Indian Subcontinent.- Finish: Honed with Sawn edges and with depression/

groove with anti slip emery tape to approval.- Supplier: To approval.- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or




- Other requirements: Water absorption maximum 0.60%, Ultimate Tensile Stress 72 Kg./Sq.cm.,Impact Test minimum full height 34 cm. Bulk density 2750 Kg./ m3. Apply back sealer to stonesbefore lying. Provide a Water Repellent coating penetrating top sealer after final polishing usingdiamond method. Slabs should be of a grain flow when laid. Shade/ tone, viewing or patternvariation not to be more than 10%..

- Background/ Base: Concrete Screed .

- Preparation: As approved.- Intermediate substrate: As approved.- Bedding: As approved.- Reinforcement: Not required.- Adhesive: Cement, Lime and sand mortar as clause 740.- Joint width: Butt jointed with tiles touching each other.- Grout: Suitable product to BS EN 13888, from Fosroc or approved equal.- Type/ classification: CG2.

- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and appearance in eachconditions . Intermediate movement joints not more than 10m centres. Perimeter movement jointsincluding door thresholds and around columns and stairs. Structural movement joints coincideswith the structural movement joints in the base.

- Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to approval at all

exposed movement joints and Junctions with adjoining finishes

152 SAND STONE FLOORING-2- Support structure/ background: Reinforced Concrete, Secondary steel

framework/ Curtainwall framing.- Stone:

- Name (traditional): Autumn Brown.- Petrological family: Sedimentary Sandstone.- Colour: Brown.- Origin: Indian Subcontinent to approval. - Finish: Cleft natural, Tumbled, Honed or Polished to approval.- Supplier: To approval.

- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other defects deleterious to strength,durability or appearance. Before delivery to site, season thoroughly, dress and work in accordancewith shop drawings prepared by supplier.

- Size: 300 x 300 mm, 300 x 600 mm 600 x 600 mm 600 x 900 mm as per plan- Thickness: 22 to 30 mm.- Sealer - ‗SurfaPore C‘ from Nanophos, Greece or approved equivalent, number od coat as per

manufactures recommendation.- Other requirements: Water absorption maximum 0.60%, Ultimate Tensile Stress 72 Kg./Sq.cm.,

Impact Test minimum full height 34 cm. Bulk density 2750 Kg./ m3. Apply back sealer to stonesbefore lying. Provide a Water Repellent coating penetrating top sealer after final polishing usingdiamond method. Slabs should be of a grain flow when laid. Shade/ tone, viewing or patternvariation not to be more than 10%..

- Background/ Base: Concrete Screed .- Preparation: As approved.- Intermediate substrate: As approved.- Bedding: As approved.- Reinforcement: Not required.- Adhesive: Cement, Lime and sand mortar as clause 740.- Joint width: Butt jointed with tiles touching each other.- Grout: Suitable product to BS EN 13888, from Fosroc or approved equal.- Type/ classification: CG2.


- Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to approval at allexposed movement joints and Junctions with adjoining finishes




130 SAND STONE FLOORING-3- Support structure/ background: Reinforced Concrete, Secondary steel framework/ Curtainwall framing

.- Stone:

- Name (traditional): Mandana Red.- Petrological family: Sedimentary Sandstone.

- Colour: Maroon Red.- Origin: Indian Subcontinent to approval.- Finish: Cleft natural, Tumbled, Honed or Polished to approval.- Supplier: To approval.- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other

defects deleterious to strength, durability or appearance. Beforedelivery to site, season thoroughly, dress and work in accordance withshop drawings prepared by supplier.

- Size: 300 x 300 mm, 300 x 600 mm 600 x 600 mm 600 x 900 mm as per plan- Thickness: 22 to 30 mm.- Sealer - ‗SurfaPore C‘ from Nanophos, Greece or approved equivalent, number od coat as per

manufactures recommendation.- Other requirements: Water absorption maximum 0.60%, Ultimate Tensile Stress 72 Kg./Sq.cm.,

Impact Test minimum full height 34 cm. Bulk density 2750 Kg./ m3. Apply back sealer to stonesbefore lying. Provide a Water Repellent coating penetrating top sealer after final polishing usingdiamond method. Slabs should be of a grain flow when laid. Shade/ tone, viewing or patternvariation not to be more than 10%..

- Background/ Base: Concrete Screed .- Preparation: As approved.- Intermediate substrate: As approved.- Bedding: As approved.- Reinforcement: Not required.- Adhesive: Cement, Lime and sand mortar as clause 740.- Joint width: Butt jointed with tiles touching each other.- Grout: Suitable product to BS EN 13888, from Fosroc or approved equal.- Type/ classification: CG2.


- Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to approval at allexposed movement joints and Junctions with adjoining finishes

161 COMPOSITE WOOD PLANK – AT POOL DECK

- Name: PINUFORM Patio System. - Colour: DRAK BROWN P-0001 and to Architects approval.- Origin: Germany.- Finish: DRT 220 cl- Supplier: Pinus Hlzimport Gmbh Karlsruhe KG www.pinus.de .- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or other defects deleterious

to strength/ colour.- Plank Size: 25 x 175- End Profile LRR 100- Substructure UCL 210- Assembly clamp – T clip nr 8d3- Edge clip – E clip nr 8- Slope 1% to 2%- Screws – Concealed Stainless Steel

- Background/ Base: Concrete Screed. Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 assuitable to purpose and appearance in each conditions. Intermediate movement joints notmore than 10m centres. Perimeter movement joints including door thresholds and around




columns and stairs. Structural movement joints coincide with the structural movement joints in the base.

- Accessories: Proprietary stainless steel joint strip with infill expansion material to approvalat all exposed movement joints and Junctions with adjoining finishes

GENERALLY

210 SUITABILITY OF BACKGROUNDS/ BASES- Background/ base tolerances: To permit specified flatness/ regularity of finished surfaces

given the permissible minimum and maximum thickness of bedding.- New background drying times (minimum):

- Concrete walls: 6 weeks.- Brick/ block walls: 6 weeks.- Rendering: 2 weeks.- Gypsum plaster: 4 weeks.

- New base drying times (minimum):- Concrete slabs: 6 weeks.- Cement:sand screeds: 3 weeks.

215 FALLS IN BASES- General: Give notice if falls are inadequate.

220 SWIMMING POOL TILING- Watertightness of pool base/ substrate structure: Test and prove to be watertight.- Time intervals between stages of the work (minimum):

- Completion (curing) of pool shell to start of rendering/ screeding/ tiling: 6 weeks.- Completion of rendering/ screeding to start of tiling: 3 weeks.- Completion of tiling to start of grouting: 3 days.- Completion of grouting and sealing of movement joints to filling of pool: 3 weeks.

- Filling, emptying and heating pool: Minimize stresses.- Maximum filling and emptying rate: 750 mm/24 hour.- Maximum rate of heating water: 0.25°C/hour.

250 SAMPLES- General: Submit representative samples of the following: All the materials to be used for

the finsh and installation..

260 CONTROL SAMPLES- General: Complete sample areas, being part of finished work, in locations as follows: To

approval.

PREPARATION

310 EXISTING BACKGROUNDS/ BASES GENERALLY- Efflorescence, laitance, dirt and other loose material: Remove.- Deposits of oil, grease and other materials incompatible with the bedding: Remove.- Tile, paint and other nonporous surfaces: Clean.- Wet backgrounds: Dry before tiling.

320 EXISTING CONCRETE/ SCREEDS- Loose or hollow portions: Cut out.- Making good: Material recommended by tiling adhesive manufacturer.

330 EXISTING PLASTER- Plaster which is loose, soft, friable, badly cracked or affected by efflorescence: Remove.

Cut back to straight horizontal and vertical edges.- Making good: Use plaster or nonshrinking filler.

340 EXISTING GLAZED BRICK




- Defective areas: Cut out.- Making good: Material recommended by tiling adhesive manufacturer .

350 EXISTING TILES- Loose or hollow sounding tiles: Remove.- Making good: Material recommended by tiling adhesive manufacturer.

355 OLD ADHESIVE RESIDUES ON CONCRETE/ SCREED BASES- Soft or unsound adhesive residues: Remove without damaging base.

360 EXISTING PAINT- Paint with unsatisfactory adhesion: Remove so as not to impair bedding adhesion.

370 NEW IN SITU CONCRETE- Mould oil, surface retarders and other materials incompatible with bedding: Remove.

380 NEW PLASTER- Plaster: Dry, solidly bedded, free from dust and friable matter.- Plaster primer: Apply if recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

390 PLASTERBOARD BACKGROUNDS- Boards: Dry, securely fixed and rigid with no protruding fixings and face to receive

decorative finish exposed.

400 BACKGROUNDS- Boards: Dry, securely fixed and rigid with no protruding fixings.- Surfaces to be tiled: Seal or prime if recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

410 HACKING FOR KEY- Keying: Roughen backgrounds thoroughly and evenly. Remove surface to depth of 3 mm.- Backrounds to be keyed: to approval.

420 RAKING OUT FOR KEY- Soft joints in existing masonry: Rake out to a depth of 13 mm (minimum).

430 SPATTERDASHING FOR KEY- Spatterdash mix:

- Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1 type CEM I/42.5.- Sand: Clean coarse.- Proportions (cement:sand): 1-1.5:2.- Admixture: BBA certified SBR bonding agent.- Consistency: Thick slurry with no segregation.

- Application/ finish: Thrown.- Thickness: 3-5 mm.

- Curing/ drying: Keep damp until hardened. Dry out to provide securely bonded finish.

431 STIPPLING FOR KEY- Stipple mix:

- Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1 type CEM I/42.5.- Sand: Clean coarse.- Proportions (cement:sand): 1-1.5:2.- Admixture: BBA certified SBR bonding agent.

- Application/ finish: Brush applied to a deep close texture.- Curing/ drying: Keep damp until hardened. Dry out to provide securely bonded finish.

438 PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR FULLY BONDED BEDDING- Surface cement:sand matrix: Remove to expose coarse aggregate.- Surface preparation: Suitable to achieve a full bond with bedding. Select from:

- Keep well wetted for several hours. Remove free water then brush in a slurry bondingcoat.




Slurry: SBR Polymer modified cement.- Prepare, prime as necessary and apply a bonding agent.

Bonding agent: BBA certified SBR Polymer.

444 PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR PARTIALLY BONDED BEDDING- Surface finish: Brushed with no laitance.

- Surface preparation: Suitable to achieve a full bond with bedding. Select from:- Keep well wetted for several hours. Remove free water then brush in a slurry bondingcoat.Slurry: SBR Polymer modified cement.

- Prepare, prime as necessary and apply a bonding agent.Bonding agent: BBA certified SBR Polymer.

450 PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR UNBONDED BEDDING - WITHOUT SEPARATINGLAYER- Surface finish: Smooth.- Surface preparation: Before laying mortar bed, dampen lightly.

451 PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR UNBONDED BEDDING

- Separating layer: Polythylene sheet not less than 65 micrometers (250 gauge).- Lap at joints: 100 mm.

460 SMOOTHING UNDERLAYMENT- Type: Recommended by adhesive manufacturer.- Condition: Allow to dry before tiling.

FIXING

510 FIXING GENERALLY- Colour/ shade: Unintended variations within tiles for use in each area/ room are not

permitted.

- Variegated tiles: Mix thoroughly.- Adhesive: Compatible with background/ base. Prime if recommended by adhesive

manufacturer.- Cut tiles: Neat and accurate.- Fixing: Provide adhesion over entire background/ base and tile backs.- Final appearance: Before bedding material sets, make adjustments necessary to give

true, regular appearance to tiles and joints when viewed under final lighting conditions.- Surplus bedding material: Clean from joints and face of tiles without disturbing tiles.

530 SETTING OUT- Joints: True to line, continuous and without steps.

- Joints on walls: Horizontal, vertical and aligned round corners.- Joints in floors: Parallel to the main axis of the space or specified features.

- Cut tiles: Minimize number, maximize size and locate unobtrusively.- Joints in adjoining floors and walls: Align.- Joints in adjoining floors and skirtings: Align.- Movement joints: If locations are not indicated, submit proposals.- Setting out of Openings fittings, joints etc.: Drawing references: To details.- Setting out of openings, fittings, movement joints: Submit proposals.

540 LEVEL OF FLOOR TILING- Permissible deviation in level from datum for ±2 mm.

550 FLATNESS/ REGULARITY OF TILING- Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.- Deviation of surface: Measure from underside of a 2 m straightedge placed anywhere on

surface. The straightedge should not be obstructed by the tiles and no gap should begreater than 3 mm.




- Placing mosaic sheets: Hang in horizontal rows, working downwards. Stagger vertical joints. Prevent slippage of sheets. Lightly beat mosaics into adhesive.

- Width, plane and alignment of joints between sheets: To match joints between mosaictiles.

661 THIN BED ADHESIVE - PAPER FACED MOSAIC (WALLS)

- Application: Apply 3 mm floated coat of adhesive to dry background. Comb surface.- Preparing mosaic sheets: Pregrout. Remove surplus before fixing.- Placing mosaic sheets: Hang in horizontal rows, working downwards. Stagger vertical

joints.- Width, plane and alignment of joints between sheets: To match joints between mosaic

tiles.- Paper face: Before adhesive hardens completely, remove paper face. Complete grouting.

Wash off glue from face of mosaic.

670 THICK BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (WALLS)- Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background. Comb surface.- Tiling: Apply thin even coat of adhesive to backs of dry tiles. Press tiles firmly onto float

coat.

- Finished adhesive thickness: Within range recommended by manufacturer.

690 CEMENT:SAND (WALLS)- Preparation: Dampen background.- Application: Apply floated coat: 1:3-4 cement:sand mortar bedding.

- Thickness (maximum): 10 mm.- Finish: Equivalent to wood float. Before tiling allow to stiffen slightly.

- Tiling: Without delay, apply 2 mm thick coat of 1:2 cement:fine sand mortar to backs oftiles, filling keys. Press tiles firmly onto float coat. Tap firmly into position.

710 THICK BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (FLOORS)- Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry base and comb surface.- Tiling: Apply coat of adhesive to backs of tiles filling depressions or keys. Press tiles firmly

onto position.- Finished adhesive thickness: Within range recommended by manufacturer.

720 CEMENT:SAND BED (FLOORS)- Mortar bedding mix: 1:3-4 cement:sand.

- Consistency: Stiff plastic.- Laying: Lay suitably small working areas of screeded bed. Compact thoroughly to level.

- Finished bed thickness: 15-25 mm.- Tiling: Within two hours and before bedding sets, evenly coat backs of tiles with adhesive.

Press tiles firmly into position.- Finished adhesive thickness: Within range recommended by manufacturer.

730 SEMIDRY CEMENT:SAND BED (FLOORS)- Mortar bedding mix: 1:3.5-4 cement:sand.

- Water content: A film of water must not form on surface of bed when fully compacted.- Preparation: Dampen base.- Laying: Lay suitably small working areas of screeded bed. Compact thoroughly to level.

- Finished bed thickness (minimum): 25 mm.- Finished bed thickness (maximum): 100 mm.

- Tiling: Within two hours and before bedding sets, evenly coat backs of tiles with a neatcement slurry. Beat tiles firmly into position.

740 CEMENT:LIME:SAND BED (FLOORS)- Mortar bedding mix: 1:1: 3 cement:lime:sand.

- Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1 type CEM I/42.5.- Lime:sand (coarse stuff): Ready-mixed to BS EN 998.- Sand: To BS EN 12620.

Grading limit: To BS 8204-1, table 1.




- Consistency: Stiff plastic. A film of water must not form on surface of bed when fullycompacted.

- Preparation: Dampen base.- Laying: Lay and compact bed to level.- Tiling: Tamp tiles firmly into position.

MOVEMENT JOINTS/ GROUTING/ COMPLETION

805 SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS WITH METAL EDGINGS .- Edging material: Stainless steel angle.

- Size: 75 x 50 x 5 mm.- Bedding: Bed in 1:3 cement:sand.

- Installation: Centre over joints in base. Set to exact finished level of floor.- Fixing to base: Stainless steel screws at 600 mm centers.

- Joint width: To match with the joint in base.- Sealant: Forsroc or approved equal.

- Colour: To approval.- Preparation and application: As section Z22.

815 SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS- Joints: Extend through tiles and bedding to base/ background. Centre over joints in base/

background.- Width: To match with the joint in base.

- Sealant: Forsroc or approved equal.- Colour: To approval.- Preparation and application: As section Z22.

825 STRIP MOVEMENT JOINTS- Manufacturer: To approval.

- Product reference: To approval.- Colour: To approval.

- Joint width: As required.- Fixing to base: To manufacturer‘s recommendation. - Joints: Extend through tiles and bedding to base.

835 METAL SECTION MOVEMENT JOINTS- Manufacturer: To approval.

- Product reference: To approval.- Colour: To approval.

- Bedding: Bed in 1:3 cement:sand.- Installation: Centre over joints in base. Set to exact finished level of floor.- Fixing t o base: Stainless Steel Screws at 300 mm centers or To manufacturer‘s

recommendation.

855 CEMENT:SAND GROUTING MIX- Grout mix:

- Cement: Portland cement to BS EN 197-1 type CEM/ 42.5.- Sand:

Joint widths of 6 mm or greater: To BS 1199 table 1, Type B.Joint widths of 3-6 mm: To BS 5385-5 table 2.

- Proportions (cement:sand): 1:1 .- Pigment: To approval and comply with BS EN 12878.

- Mixing: Mix thoroughly. Use the minimum of clean water needed for workability.

865 CEMENT:LIME:SAND GROUTING MIX- Grout mix:

- Cement: Portland cement to BS EN 197-1 type CEM/ 42.5.- Hydrated nonhydraulic lime: To BS EN 459.- Sand:




Joint widths of 6 mm or greater: To BS 1199 table 1, Type B.Joint widths of 3-6 mm: To BS 5385-5 table 2.

- Proportions (cement:lime:sand): 1:1:3 .- Pigment: To approval and comply with BS EN 12878.

- Mixing: Mix thoroughly. Use the minimum of clean water needed for workability.

875 GROUTING- Sequence: Grout when bed/ adhesive has set sufficiently to prevent disturbance of tiles.- Joints: 6 mm deep (or depth of tile if less). Free from dust and debris.- Grouting: Fill joints completely, tool to profile, clean off surface. Leave free from

blemishes.- Profile: To approval.

- Polishing: When grout is hard, polish tiling with a dry cloth.

885 COLOURED GROUT- Staining of tiles: Not permitted.- Evaluating risk of staining: Apply grout to a few tiles in a small trial area. If discoloration

occurs apply a protective sealer to tiles and repeat trial.




SECTION 12b: EXTERNAL CLADDING

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

010 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH TENDER

- Submit the following cladding particulars:- Typical plan, section and elevation drawings at suitable scales.- Typical detailed drawings at large scales, including Full size details at positions indicated on

drawings and/ or as desired by the Consultant .- Technical information and certification demonstrating compliance with specification of proposed

incorporated products and finishes, including Thermal insulation, sealants, fittings and fixtures.- Certification, reports and calculations demonstrating compliance with specification of proposed

cladding.- Proposals for connections to and support from the support structure/ background.- Proposals for additional support structure/ background to that shown on preliminary design

drawings.- Schedule of builder‘s work, special provisions and special attendance by others. - Examples of standard documentation from which project quality plan will be prepared.

- Preliminary fabrication and installation method statements and programme.- Proposals for replacing damaged or failed products.- Areas of non-compliance with specification.

TYPES OF CLADDING

110 CLADDING TO Elevation- Support structure/ background: Reinforced Concrete, Secondary steel

framework/ Curtain wall framing.- Lime stone:

- Name (traditional): Patara Honed.- Alternative Name:- Petrological family: Limestone.

- Colour: Beige Fine grain. - Origin: Isparta Turkey for the lime stone or to approval.- Finish: Cleft natural, Tumbled, Honed or Polished to approval.- Supplier: MetaMar www.metamarmarble.com .- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other defects deleterious to strength,

durability or appearance. Before delivery to site, season thoroughly, dress and work in accordancewith shop drawings prepared by supplier.

- Size: 300 x 300 mm, 300 x 600 mm 600 x 600 mm 600 x 900 mm as per Elevation- Thickness: 13 mm for Lime stone

- Fixings: As determined by clause 230, 305 and 315.- Joints:

- Type: Polyurethane sealant as clause 610.- Bond pattern: Half lapped.- Width (nominal): 8 mm.- Profile: Recessed and Curved.

- Cavity width (nominal): 100 mm.- Air gap: Minimum 10 mm.

- Cavity barriers: To Civil defence requirement.- Thermal insulation: 50 mm Fire retardant Extruded Polystyrene.- Waterproofing: Acrylic polymer modified cementitious coating to wall up to 300mm above finished floor- Vapour control: Bitumen / Rubber latex emulsion protective coating.- Accessories/ Other requirements: External quality stainless steel fixing angles, pins and expanding

anchor.




Physical and Mechanical Properties

METRIC SYSTEM SI SYSTEM BRITISH SYSTEM

Hardness Mohs 4 - 4.5 Mohs 4 - 4.5 Mohs 4 - 4.5Bulk Specific Gravity (ASTMC97) Dry gr/cm³ 2.470 ± 0.010 kg/m³ 2470 ± 10 lbs/ft³ 154.20 ± 0.62

Density gr/cm³ 2.707 ± 0.001 kg/m³ 2707 ± 1 lbs/ft³ 168.99 ± 0.06Water Absorption by Weight(ASTM C97) % 1.507 ± 0.202 % 1.507 ±

0.202 % 1.507 ± 0.202

Water Absorption by Volume (TS699) % 3.691 ± 0.492 % 3.691 ±

0.492 % 3.691 ± 0.492

Effective Porosity (TS 699) % 3.691 ± 0.492 % 23.2 ± 6.3 % 3.691 ± 0.492

Real Porosity (TS 699) % 8.76 % 8.76 % 8.76

Fullness Ratio (TS 699) % 91.24 % 91.24 % 91.24

Compressive Strength (TS 699) kg/cm² 1169.9 ± 57.2 MPa 114.7 ± 5.6 Psi 16641 ± 813Compressive Strength (ASTMC170)……………….. Dry……………….. Saturated

kg/cm² 1334.9 ± 72.21240.4 ± 50.6

MPa 130.9 ± 7.1121.6 ±

4.96

Psi 18988 ± 102714644 ± 720

Compressive Strength AfterFreezing (TS 699) kg/cm² 1031.7 ± 40.7 MPa 101.2 ±

3.99 Psi 146751 ± 579

Changing of CompressiveStrength After Freezing (TS 699) % 11.80 % 11.80 % 11.80

Bending Strength (TS 699)………………….. Dry ………………….. Saturated

kg/cm² 112.7 ± 15.5140.4 ± 24.2

MPa 11.1 ± 1.513.8 ± 2.4

Psi 1602.8 ± 2211997 ± 343.4

Strength to Blow (TS 699) kg.cm/cm³ 23.2 ± 6.3 kg.cm/

cm³ 23.2 ± 6.3 kg.cm/cm³ 23.2 ± 6.3

Abrasion Strength (Bohme) TS699)

cm³/50cm³ 27.75 ± 1.188 cm³/5

0cm³27.75 ±1.188

cm³/50cm³ 27.75 ± 1.188

Bulk Specific Gravity (ASTMC97) gr/cm³ 2470 ± 0.010 kg/m³ 2470 ± 10 lbs/ft³ 154.20 ± 0.62

Water Absorption by Weight(ASTM C97) % 1.507 ± 0.202 % %

Compressive Strength (ASTMC170)…………………….. Dry …………………….. Saturated

kg/cm² 1334.9 ± 72.21240.7 ± 50.6

MPa 130.9 ± 7.1121.6 ±

4.96

Psi 18988.3 ±1027

17644 ± 720Modulus of Rupture (ASTM C99)……………………. Dry ……………………. S aturated

kg/cm² 138.1 ± 6.9144.6 ± 6.4

MPa 13.5 ± 0.714.2 ± 0.6

Psi 1963.6 ± 99.32057.2 ± 91.3

111 FASCIA CERAMIC TILES – NITTO SEITOSHO- Ceramic:

- Name: Nitto Seitosho. - Colour: Light Grey AQ471 and Dark Grey AQ472 and to Architect‘s A pproval.- Origin: Japan.- Finish: Matt.- Supplier: To approval.- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or other defects deleterious

to strength/ colour.- Size: Flat tiles 60 x 227 x 9 mm.- Size: Corner tiles 1 (50+168) x 60 x 9 mm.- Size: Corner tiles 2 (50+227) x 60 x 9 mm.




- Size: Corner tiles 3 (50+60) x 227 x 9 mm.- Slip resistance value (SRV) minimum to BS 7932- Pendulum Test value (PVT) minimum to BS 7932- Surface roughness (Rz) to BS 1134- Other requirements: Water absorption maximum 0.60%, Ultimate Tensile Stress 72

Kg./Sq.cm., Impact Test minimum full height 34 cm. Bulk density 2750 Kg./ m 3.

- Background/ Base: Concrete Screed.- Preparation: As approved.- Intermediate substrate: As approved.- Bedding: As approved.

- Reinforcement: Not required.- Adhesive: Suitable product to BS EN 12004, Keraflex from Mapei or approved equal.

- Type/ classification: C2TE.- Joint width: 9 to 12 mm.- Grout: Suitable product to BS EN 13888, Ultracolor plus from Mapei or approved equal.

- Type/ classification: CG2WA.- Movement joints: As clauses 815, 825 and 835 as suitable to purpose and appearance in

each conditions. Intermediate movement joints not more than 10m centres. Perimetermovement joints including door thresholds and around columns and stairs. Structural

movement joints coincide with the structural movement joints in the base.- Accessories: Proprietory stainless steel jont strip with infill expansion material to approval

at all exposed movement joints and Junctions with adjoining finishes

112 CLADDING TO Elevation- Support structure/ background: Reinforced Concrete, Secondary steel framework/ Curtain wall

framing.- Prefrabricated Crystallised Glass ceramic:

- Name: Neoparies.- Colour: Pure White (403). - Origin: Nippon Electrica Glass co. Ltd. Japan and to approval.- Finish: Polished to approval.

- Supplier: Trade Enigneering LLC or to approval.- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other defects

deleterious to strength, durability or appearance. Before delivery to site,season thoroughly, dress and work in accordance with shop drawingsprepared by supplier.

- Thickness: 16 mm.- Fixings: As per manucatures detail and as determined by clause 230, 305 and 315.- Joints:



- Cavity barriers: To Civil defence requirement.- Thermal insulation: 50 mm Fire retardant Extruded Polystyrene.- Waterproofing: Acrylic polymer modified cementitious coating to wall up to 300mm above finished floor- Vapour control: Bitumen / Rubber latex emulsion protective coating.- Accessories/ Other requirements: External quality stainless steel fixing angles, shims, washers, pins

and expanding anchor.

113 CLADDING TO Elevation- Support structure/ background: Reinforced Concrete, Secondary steel framework/ Curtainwall framing.- Stone:

- Name (traditional): Lalitpur yellow.- Petrological family: Sedimentary Sandstone.- Colour: Yellow. - Origin: Indian Subcontinent to approval.




- Finish: Cleft natural, Tumbled, Honed or Polished to approval.- Supplier: To approval.- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other defects deleterious to strength,


- Size: 300 x 300 mm, 300 x 600 mm 600 x 600 mm 600 x 900 mm as per Elevation

- Thickness: 22 mm.- Fixings: As determined by clause 230, 305 and 315.- Joints:



- Cavity barriers: To Civil defence requirement.- Thermal insulation: 50 mm Fire retardant Extruded Polystyrene.- Waterproofing: Acrylic polymer modified cementitious coating to wall up to 300mm above finished floor- Water Repellent coating to Natural Stone Surface: 1 coat of ‗SurfaPore C‘ from Nanophos,

Greece or equivalent- Vapour control: Bitumen / Rubber latex emulsion protective coating.- Accessories/ Other requirements: External quality stainless steel fixing angles, pins and expanding

anchor.

114 CLADDING TO Elevation- Support structure/ background: Reinforced Concrete, Secondary steel

framework/ Curtainwall framing.- Stone:

- Name (traditional): Autumn Brown.- Petrological family: Sedimentary Sandstone.

- Colour: Brown.- Origin: Indian Subcontinent to approval. - Finish: Cleft natural, Tumbled, Honed or Polished to approval.- Supplier: To approval.- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other defects deleterious to strength,


- Size: 300 x 300 mm, 300 x 600 mm, 600 x 600 mm, 600 x 900 mm as per Elevation- Thickness: 22 mm.




- Cavity barriers: To Civil defence requirement.- Thermal insulation: 50 mm Fire retardant Extruded Polystyrene.- Waterproofing: Acrylic polymer modified cementitious coating to wall up to 300mm above finished floor- Water Repellent coating to Natural Stone Surface: 1 coat of ‗SurfaPore C‘ from Nanophos, Greece or

equivalent- Vapour control: Bitumen / Rubber latex emulsion protective coating.- Accessories/ Other requirements: External quality stainless steel fixing angles, pins and expanding

anchor.




115 CLADDING TO Elevation, Border, Coping and Riser- Support structure/ background: Reinforced Concrete, Secondary steel framework/ Curtainwall framing- Sand Stone:

- Name (traditional): Mandana Red.

- Petrological family: Sedimentary Sandstone. - Colour: Maroon Red.- Origin: Indian Subcontinent to approval.- Finish: Cleft natural, Tumbled, Honed or Polished to approval.- Supplier: To approval.- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other


- Size: 300 x 300 mm, 300 x 600 mm, 600 x 600 mm, 600 x 900 mm as per Elevation- Thickness: 22 mm.




- Cavity barriers: To Civil defence requirement.- Thermal insulation: 50 mm Fire retardant Extruded Polystyrene.- Waterproofing: Acrylic polymer modified cementitious coating to wall up to 300mm above finished floor- Water Repellent coating to Natural Stone Surface: 1 coat of ‗SurfaPore C‘ f rom Nanophos, Greece or


anchor.

116 CLADDING TO Elevation,- Support structure/ background: Reinforced Concrete, Secondary steel framework/ Curtainwall framing

.- Stone:

- Name (traditional): Slate.- Petrological family: Metamorphic. - Colour: Grey. - Origin: Indian Subcontinent to approval.- Finish: Cleft natural to approval.- Supplier: To approval.- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other


- Size: 300 x 300 mm, 300 x 450 mm, 450 x 450 mm, 450 x 600, 600 x 600 mm as per Elevation- Thickness: 12 mm.




- Cavity barriers: To Civil defence requirement.- Thermal insulation: 50 mm Fire retardant Extruded Polystyrene.




- Waterproofing: Acrylic polymer modified cementitious coating to wall up to 300mm above finished floor- Water Repellent coating to Natural Stone Surface: 1 coat of ‗SurfaPore C‘ from Nanophos, Greece or


anchor.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK

210 DESIGN- Cladding: Complete detailed design.

- Standard: To BS 8298.- Related works: Coordinate in detailed design.

230 FIXINGS- Standard: To BS 8298, clauses 2.3 and 3.10.- Designer/ Supplier: Halfen or approved equal.- Type: Secretly fixed.- Material: Stainless Steel grade 1,4401 to BS EN 10888 (Grade 316 to previous BS Codes).

- Dimensions: Not less than recommended by manufacturers.- Extent of adjustment: To accommodate support structure/ background and cladding fabrication/

installation tolerances.- Method of fixing to backing wall: Expanding bolts and sockets.

245 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN- Submit the following cladding particulars:

- A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment.- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from cladding to the support structure/ background.- Proposed fixing details and systems relevant to structural design and construction with methods of

adjustment and tolerances.- A schedule of fabrication tolerances/ size tolerances.- A detailed testing programme in compliance with Main Contract master programme.

- A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with Main Contract masterprogramme.

- A quality plan in compliance with the CWCT ‗Guide to good practice for facades‘, Section 6. - Proposals to support outstanding applications for Building Regulation consents or relaxations.

261 STONE SAMPLES- General: Before commencing detailed design, submit labelled samples or arrange for samples that

represent the range of variation in appearance to be inspected.

271 FIXING SAMPLES- General: During detailed design, submit samples of every type. Clearly identify. Include

manufacturer‘s recommended torque figures. - Shims: Submit dimensions.

281 CONTROL SAMPLES- General: Complete areas of finished work and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.- Size: 100 m 2.- Location: To approval.

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

305 INTEGRITY OF CLADDING- Requirement: Determine sizes and thickness of slabs/panels, sizes, number and spacing of fixings,

configuration and location of support systems and incorporation of accessories to ensure the claddingsystem will resist factored dead, imposed and design live loads, and accommodate deflections andthermal movements without damage.

- Wind loads: Calculate to BS 6399-2 Standard Method appropriate to location, exposure, height,building shape, and size, taking account of existing and known future adjacent structures.




- Basic wind speed (V b): 24 m/s.- Altitude factor (S a): Determine in accordance with the code. depend upon the method adopted.- Direction factor (S d): 1.- Seasonal factor (S s): 1.- Probability factor (S p): 1.- Terrain and building factor (S b): Determine in accordance with the code. depend upon the method

adopted. .- External and internal size effect factors (C a): 1.- External pressure coefficients (C pe ): As determined from BS 6399-2, clauses 2.4 and 2.5.- Internal pressure coefficients (C pi): As determined from

BS 6399-2, clause 2.6.- Dominant opening: To drawings .

- Impact loads: to BS 8200:- Location and category: To structural calculations.

- Temporary imposed loads: To structural calculations.

315 INTEGRITY OF LINING- Requirement: Determine sizes and thickness of slabs/ panels, size, number and spacing of fixings,

configuration and location of support systems and incorporation of accessories to ensure the lining will

resist factored dead, imposed and design live loads, and accommodate deflections and thermalmovements without damage.

325 PRELIMINARY TEST INFORMATION- Stone type: As clause 110.

- Petrographic examination to BS EN 12407.- Water absorption coefficient by capillarity to BS EN 1925: Submit.- Apparent density to BS EN 1936: Submit.- Real density to BS EN 1936: Submit.- Open porosity to BS EN 1936: Submit.- Total porosity to BS EN 1936: Submit.- Flexural strength to BS EN 12372: Submit.

330 ACCURACY OF ERECTION- Elevation joint widths: Within joint lengths, including in-line continuations across tranverse joints, as

follows:- Tolerance: Greatest width not to exceed least width by more than 25%.- Variations: Evenly distribute, with no sudden changes.

- Offset in elevation: Between nominally in-line edges across transverse joints not to exceed 15% widthof joint.

- Offset in plan or section: Between flat faces or adjacent panels across joints not to exceed 15% widthof joint.

- Sealant joints width limitations: To recommendations of sealant manufacturer.- Finished work: Square, regular, true to line and plane with satisfactory fit at junctions.

TESTING

405 TESTING AUTHORITY- Testing: Carried out by a United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) approved independent

laboratory or Local approved laboratory.

415 TESTING AUTHORITY- Testing: Carried out by the stone supplier/ contractor and witnessed/ certified by ______ .

425 STONE PRODUCTION TESTS- Frequency of tests: After quarrying every 15 m 3 of stone.- Procedures:

- Water absorption coefficient by capillarity to BS EN 1925.- Real and apparent density to BS EN 1936.- Flexural strength to BS EN 12372

- Results: Submit prior to fabrication.




- External cladding: Do not use mortar spacer dabs. Keep cavity clear of debris.- Give notice:

- Before covering up loadbearing fixings.- Before proceeding with next course on completion of: Plinth course and Every third stone course.

590 CEMENT:LIME:CRUSHED STONE MORTAR JOINTING

- General: As section Z21.- Mix: Cement:lime:crushed stone 1:2:8-9.- Crushed stone: Colour matched and passing a 1.4 mm sieve.

- Colour matching: Submit samples.- Preparation: Wet stones thoroughly.- Laying: Full mortar bed with joints and voids filled.

- Cavities: Clear of mortar.- Appearance: Neat and consistent.- Temporary distance spacers: Remove.

610 SEALANT JOINTING- Sealant: Polyurethane.

- Manufacturer: fosroc or approved equal.

Product reference: To approval.- Colour: To match the stone colour to approval.- Application: As section Z22.

630 SEALANT MOVEMENT/ OTHER JOINTS- Sealant: Multiple component High performance polyurethane sealant.

- Manufacturer: Fosroc or approved equal.Product reference: To approval.

- Colour: To match the stone colour to approval.- Application: To approval.

- Joint widths: Where not specified, to be as small as practicable. Allow for shrinkage, thermal and othermovements in structure and cladding.




SECTION 12c: WOODEN FLOORING

1. GENERAL : WOOD GYMNASIUM FLOORING

1.1. REFERENCES

1.1.1. DIN – Performance Standard 18032 Part 2

1.1.2. EN – Performance Standard 14904 World Standard

1.1.3. FSC – Forest Stewardship Council

1.1.4. LEED – Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design

1.1.5. MFMA – Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association

1.1.6. PUR-Performance Uniformity Rating Standards

1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.2.1. Manufacturer

1.2.1.1. Manufacturer of resilient flooring shall be a firm specializing in manufacturingproducts specified in this section.

1.2.1.2. Basis of design shall be ―AacerCush I‖ sports floor system as provided by Aacer Flooring. (877) 582-1181, www.Aacerflooring.com.

1.2.1.3. Materials other than those listed must be approved 10 days prior by writtenaddendum. Materials from non-approved manufacturers will not be accepted.

1.2.2. Installer

1.2.2.1 The installation of the floor system described in these specifications shall becompleted by a firm familiar with the requirements of the system specifiedand fully experienced in procedures required for installing athletic flooringmanufactured by Aacer Flooring.

1.2.2.2 Installer shall be liable for all matters related to installation for a period of oneyear after the floor has been substantially installed and completed.

1.2.3. Installer must have Aacer installation accreditation.

a) Optional: MFMA accreditation

1.2.4. Performance Testing

1.2.4.1 Flooring system shall have been independently tested to the InternationalStandards: DIN 18032, Part 2 or EN 14904.

1.2.4.2 Independent DIN testing laboratory must be recognized by the MFMA andtest to all the required standards of the DIN testing methodologies.

1.2.4.3 Independent DIN testing laboratory shall have Scientific Body Membership inthe International Association of Sports Surface Sciences (ISSS).

1.3. SUBMITTALS

A. Specification -Submit Aacer Flooring specification sheets and shop drawings asrequired.




B. Sample -Submit required number of samples of the specified system as requestedby the owner/architect.

C. Maintenance Guidelines -Upon completion of floor, send the Aacer FloorMaintenance Guide to the owner. This guide will explain the proper HVAC andbuilding maintenance requirements as well as floor cleaning and servicing

guidelines to assure proper floor performance and longevity.

1.4. WORKING CONDITIONS

A. The wood flooring and its components specified herein shall not be delivered orinstalled until all wet trades and overhead work is completed. This includes allmasonry, painting, plaster, tile, marble, and terrazzo, as well as all overheadmechanical trades. The building shall be fully enclosed and weather tight and allpermanent windows and doorways shall be installed. Permanent heating and airconditioning shall be installed and working in accordance with building occupationrequirements.

B. The concrete substrate shall be determined fully cured by industry standards. It

shall be free of all foreign materials and broom cleaned when turned over to thefloor installer. Permanent HVAC units for the building shall have been operating aminimum of one week prior to the floor installation start up.

C. During and after installation, building HVAC systems shall maintain a temperatureand humidity range compatible with the expected high and low moisture contentrange of the flooring. The floor installer, based on the building‘s HVAC control andgeographical situation, shall determine this range.

D. Flooring must be stored on site in a dry, well-ventilated area while acclimating tosite conditions. Moisture content of wood shall be consistent with the ambientconditions of the building as it will be maintained when occupied.

1.5. WARRANTY

A. Furnish written warranty of materials and workmanship for the complete woodenflooring system

1. Warranty shall be signed by the applicator agreeing to repair or replace defectsin material and workmanship and failure of flooring system a period of ten yearsfrom date of the Defects Liability Certificate.

2. The warranty must be backed up by the manufacturer and Insurance Co.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. MATERIALS

A. Vapor Barrier – 6 mil polyethylene

B. Resilient Pads1. AacerCush 3/8‖ pad, extruded, black 60 durometer2. Optional Pads (Specify of Delete)

a. Aacer Performance pad 3/4", extruded, black 60 durometerb. Aacer Eco pad 7/16‖, re cycled rubber, black 60 durometerc. Aacer Bi-Power pad 12mm, EPDM, red 55 durometer

C. Subfloor –

1. Nominal 2‖x3‖x4‘ S4S, Spruce, Pine, of Fir with pads attached 12‖ on center.




2. FSC® Certified (Specify or Delete) Subfloor must be certified by the ForestStewardship Council®

D. Flooring –

1. 25/32‖ x 2 -1/4‖ 2nd and Better grade northern Hard Maple flooring, TGEM,

MFMA grade marked and stamped as manufactured by Aacer Flooring.

2. Optional Sizes and Grades (Specify or Delete)

a. 25/32‖ x 1 -1/2‖ ; 25/32‖ x 2 -1/2‖; 33/32‖ x 2 -1/4‖,33/32‖ x 1 -1/2‖b. 1st grade, 3rd grade, 3rd and better grade

3. FSC® Certified (Specify or Delete) Maple must be certified by the ForestStewardship Council®

Expansion Bead (Specify or Delete) Flooring shall include 1/64‖ Expansion Bead.

E. Fasteners –

1. Flooring - 2‖ barbed cleats.

F. Finish Materials – Any seal and finish approved by the MFMA

G. Game Lines – Compatible with finish and as specified by layout design.

H. Wall Base – Heavy duty, molded, vented cove base with pre-molded outsidecorners.

3. EXECUTION

3.1. PRE-INSTALLATION INSPECTION

A. Floor installer shall verify slab tolerance of concrete and report any corrections togeneral contractor.

B. Room shall be broom cleaned and free of any foreign debris.

C. Floor installer shall document site and working conditions prior to and duringinstallation. This documentation shall become a part of any warranty and may ormay not affect fulfillment of any warranty.

3.2. INSTALLATION

A. SUBFLOOR –

1. Cover entire slab with 6 mil polyethylene, sealing and lapping joints a minimumof 6‖.

2. Install sleepers with factory pads attached at right angle to long dimension ofroom a maximum 9‖ on center for 25/32‖ flooring. (Note: 12‖ on center for33/32‖, 8‖ on center for 3rd grade.)

3. Install solid blocking at doorways, under bleachers in the stacked position, andbelow portable goals.

4. Provide 1- 1/2‖ expansion voids at perimeter and all vertical obstructions.

B. MAPLE FLOORING




1. Install Aacer maple flooring parallel with the long dimension of room. Flooring shallbe powe r nailed every 10‖ to 12‖ O.C. with all end joints properly driven tight.

2. Expansion joints may be required between flooring strips intermittently throughoutthe floor. Requirements will be determined by site and geographical conditions.

3. Provide a minim um 2‖ expansion void at all walls and permanent obstructions.

3.3. FINISHING

A. FLOOR SANDING

Machine sand entire floor with multiple grit papers to a smooth and uniform surface,free from edger marks and drum drops.

Remove all sanding dust and lint from entire surface by vacuum and/or tack.

B. FINISHING AND GAME LINES

1. Inspect entire floor to be sure surface is ready to accept seal and finish. Floorshould be free from dust and debris.

2. Apply (2) coats of approved seal and (2) coats of approved finish permanufacturer‘s label instructions.

3. Floor shall be buffed, cleaned and tacked between coats.

4. Apply game lines and logos as indicated by drawings between seal and finishcoats. Paint shall be compatible with finish.

C. BASE INSTALLATION

1. Install vent cove base with cove base adhesive and/or mechanical attachment towall. Use pre-molded outside corners and mitered inside corners.

3.4. CLEANUP

A. CLEANUP

1. Remove excess debris and waste material from the work area.

2. General Contractor shall lock floor area after floor is finished to allow proper curingtime. If general contractor or owner requires use of gym before proper curing time,they shall protect the floor by covering with non-marring Kraft paper.




SECTION 12d: RESILENT FLOORING

1. GENERAL : RUBBER FLOORING

1.1. REFERENCES (Industry Standards)

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1.1.1. ASTM D 2047 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of

Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James

Machine

1.1.2. ASTM D 3389 Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics Abrasion

Resistance (Rotary Platform, Double-Head Abrader)

1.1.3. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials

1.1.4. ASTM E 648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor

Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source

1.1.5. ASTM E 662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke

Generated by Solid Materials

1.1.6. ASTM F 150 Standard Test Method for Electrical Resistance of

Conductive and Static Dissipative Resilient Flooring

1.1.7. ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive

Resilient Flooring

1.1.8. ASTM F 1344 Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile1.1.9. ASTM F 1859 Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering

Without Backing

1.1.10. ASTM F 1860 Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering With

Backing

1.1.11. ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base

1.1.12. ASTM F 2169 Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads

1.1.13. ASTM F 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in

Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes

1.1.14. ASTM F 2420 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity on

the Surface of Concrete Floor Slabs Using Relative Humidity

Probe Measurement and Insulated Hood

1.1.15. FTM 4046 101 Static Decay

1.1.16. ESD S7.1 100 Resistive Characterization of Flooring Materials

1.1.17. ESD STM 97.2 Floor Materials and Footwear - Voltage Measurement on a

Person

1.1.18. MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association

1.1.19. PUR Performance Uniformity Rating Standards




1.2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1.2.1. NFPA 253 Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering

Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source

1.2.2. NFPA 258 Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by

Solid Materials

1.3. SUBMITTALS

1.3.1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation guide, and

maintenance guide for each material proposed for use (available on

www.nora.com ).

1.3.2. Samples: Submit two A-4 size verification samples of each type of product

specified in colour selected for use.

1.3.3. MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets) are available for adhesives, heat weld rod,

cold weld and cleaning agents.

1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1. Manufacturer: Provide resilient flooring manufactured by a firm with a minimum

of 10 years‘ experience with resilient flooring of types equivalent to t hose

specified. Manufacturers proposed for use, which are not named in this Section,shall submit evidence of ability to meet performance requirements specified not

less than 10 days prior to bid date.

a. Colour Matching: Provide resilient flooring products, including wall base

and accessories, from one manufacturer to ensure colon matching.

b. Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation.

1.4.2. Installers Qualifications: Installer shall be nora® approved for the requirements of

the project.

1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1.5.1. Deliver materials in labelled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with

manufacturer's recommendations. Protect from damage due to weather,

excessive temperatures, and construction operations.

1.5.2. Deliver materials sufficiently in advance of installation to condition materials to

room temperature prior to installation.

http://www.nora.com/






1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.6.1. Maintain a temperature of 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) plus or minus 5 degrees

F (3 degrees C) in spaces to receive resilient flooring. Specified temperature

shall be maintained at least 48 hours before, during, and 72 hours after

installation.

1.7. WARRANTY

1.7.1. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty against defects in

manufacturing and workmanship of resilient flooring products. Provide

manufacturer's standard limited wear warranty/conductivity warranty as specified

under each product as applicable.

1.8. EXTRA MATERIALS

1.8.1. Furnish full size units equal to 2 percent of quantity of resilient flooring installed

as extra materials. Properly label and package extra materials. Deliver to

Owner's designated storage area.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

2.1.1. Provide resilient flooring by nora systems, GmbH, Hoehner Weg 2-4, 69469

Weinheim, Germany; telephone +49 6201 80-3950, or +49 6201 88-3950; Locally

sourced by nora systems Middle East, Ms. Lama ElKurdy; +971 4 450 8175; Fax:

+971 4 450 8374; [email protected]

2.2. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

NTS: SELECT 2.03B ESD SHEET GOOD FOR: OR-ROOMS

2.2.1. Rubber Sheet for ESD Protection Control: FOR CLEAN ROOMS, ELECTRONIC

MANUFACTURING

Commercial Traffic.

1. Product Name: noraplan® eco, Article 1490, smooth surface, 2.0 mm

thickness, 1.22m x 15lm roll size.

2. Material: nora® rubber with abundant natural fillers and

environmentally compatible color pigments.

3. Limited Wear Warranty: 5 year wear.

4. Standard: ASTM F 1859 rubber sheet floor covering without backing.

5. Abrasion Resistance: Taber abrasion test, ASTM D 3389, H-18 wheel, 500

gram load, 1000 cycles, gram weight loss not greater than

.60.




6. Hardness: ASTM D 2240, Shore A, equal to or greater than 85.

7. Slip Resistance: Static coefficient of friction (James Test): ASTM D 2047,

equal to or greater than 0.5.

8. Asbestos-Free: Products shall contain no asbestos.

9. Flammability: ASTM E 648; NFPA 253; NBSIR 75 950 result to be not lessthan 0.45 watts per square centimeter, Class 1.

10. Smoke Density: ASTM E 662, NFPA 258, NBS smoke density, less than 450.

11. Burn Resistance: Cigarette and solder burn resistance.

12. Halogen-Free: Products shall contain no halogens.

13. PVC-Free: Products shall contain no poly-vinyl-chloride.

14. IAQ: Product shall meet GreenGuard requirements.

15. Isolative Properties: antistatic < 2000V body voltage generation. IEC 60093/VDE

0303 T 30 >10 x 10Ohm.

16. ISO 14001: Manufacturer shall be ISO 14001 Environmental

Management Systems Certified

17. Color: As selected.

18. Technical Data: Properties in acc. to EN 1817/ EN 14521 per annex

Technical Datasheet or by www.nora.com

19. Installation System: Use only nora® pro install system products following the

current nora Installation Guide that may consist of part or all

of the following steps depending upon the substrate

conditions and requirements of the specific project.

Step 1 – nora® membrane (see Installation Guide for

requirements).

Step 2 – nora® primer (see Installation Guide for

requirements).

Step 3 – nora® leveler (see Installation Guide for

requirements

Step 4 – nora® patch (see Installation Guide for

requirements).

Step 5 – nora® adhesives, the flooring usage and substrateconditions will determine the appropriate adhesive. Contact

your nora representative for specific recommendations.






3. EXECUTION

3.1.1. EXAMINATION

A. Verify that spaces to receive resilient flooring are suitable for installation. Do not

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Comply with

manufacturer's recommendations including the following:

a. Substrates shall be dry and clean.

b. Substrates shall be free of depressions, raised areas, or other defects

which would telegraph through installed flooring.

c. Temperature of resilient flooring and substrate shall be within specified

tolerances.

d. Moisture condition and adhesive bond tests shall be performed as

specified.

B. For applications on concrete, verify curing, hardening, or breaking compounds have

not been used. If there are any, do not proceed until compounds have been removed

as specified.

C. For applications on concrete slab on grade or below grade, verify vapor retarder

below slab was installed. If no vapor retarder was installed, do not proceed with work

unless an effective fully warranted surface moisture mitigation system is applied first.

D. Test for moisture as detailed in ASTM F 2170. Relative humidity shall not exceed

75%. Do not proceed with work until results of moisture condition tests are

acceptable.

E. Perform adhesive bond test in each major area, minimum 1 per 1,000 square feet,

prior to installation. Examine after 72 hours to determine whether bond is solid and

no moisture is present. Do not proceed with work until results of bond test are

acceptable.

3.1.2. PREPARATION

A. Comply with ASTM F 710 and manufacturer's installation guide for surface

preparation. Remove substances incompatible with resilient flooring adhesive by

method acceptable to manufacturer.

a. Concrete floors with steel troweled (slick) finish shall be mechanically

roughened (sanded) to ensure suitable profile and to promote a good

adhesion bond.

b. Concrete floors with curing, hardening, and breaking compounds shall be

abraded with mechanical methods only to remove compounds. Use

blastrac, diamond grinding or similar equipment with vacuum attachment.




B. Fill voids, cracks, and depressions with suitable smoothing compounds acceptable to

manufacturer. Remove projections and repair other defects to tolerances acceptable

to manufacturer.

C. Vacuum subfloors immediately prior to installation to remove loose particles (do not

use oil or wax based sweeping compounds). Use only water based compounds thatdo not leave behind residues which can interfere with adhesion.

3.1.3. INSTALLATION

A. Install resilient flooring in accordance with manufacturers printed installation guide.

Comply with the following:

a. Do not mix manufacturing batches of a color within the same area.

b. Do not install resilient flooring over building expansion joints.

c. Do not install defective or damaged resilient flooring.

d. Layout resilient flooring to provide equal size at perimeter. Adjust layout as

necessary to eliminate resilient flooring which is cut to less than half full width.

e. Lay resilient flooring with arrows in the same direction (excluding borders and

some flash coving methods).

f. Install resilient flooring without cracks or voids at seams. Lay seams together

without stress.

g. Scribe resilient flooring neatly at perimeter and obstructions.

h. Extend resilient flooring into reveals, closets, and similar openings.

i. Remove excess adhesive immediately.

j. Install reducer strips at exposed edges.

B. Install resilient wall base in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation guide.

Install in longest practical lengths. Tightly adhere to substrate. Fill voids due to

seams in substrate materials with a suitable filler material.

C. Install resilient stairtreads and accessories in accordance with manufacturers printed

installation guide. Install reducer strips at exposed edges. Tightly adhere to

substrate only where recommended by manufacturer. Fill voids due to seams in

substrate materials with a suitable filler material.

D. noraplan® SEAMLESS FLOORING INSTALLATION (WHEN REQUIRED). Rout

seams and heat weld together with coordinated colored heat welding rod or cold weld

with coordinated colored cold weld compound in accordance with resilient flooring

manufacturer's installation guide.

E. norament® SEAMLESS FLOORING INSTALLATION (WHEN REQUIRED). Rout

seams and weld together with coordinated colored cold weld compound in

accordance with resilient flooring manufacturer's installation guide.




F. FLASH COVING OF SHEET GOOD (WHEN REQUIRED). Extend flooring up the wall

in a flash-coved method, with resilient flooring manufacturer's recommendations, to a

height as indicated. Provide cove stick and suitable capping strip. All vertical internal

and external seams shall be cold welded with coordinated colored cold weld

compound. Follow resilient flooring manufacturer's installation guide.G. SANITARY BASE (WHEN REQUIRED). All seams between sanitary base and

flooring, and between sanitary base sections shall be cold welded together with

coordinated colored cold weld compound in accordance with resilient flooring

manufacturer‘s installation guide.

3.1.4. CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Touch-up and repair minor damage to eliminate all evidence of repair. Remove and

replace work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

B. Clean flooring surfaces only after adhesive has fully cured, no sooner than 72 hours

after installation, unless agreed with nora® representative. Clean surfaces using

non- abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer‘s maintenance

guide. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned.

C. Protect completed work from damage and construction operations and inspect

immediately before final acceptance of project.

D. No metal or plastic wheels, the shape of contact surfaces of equipment wheels must

be flat, shore hardness ―A‖ of the wheels‘ material must be ≤ 90. Office

chairs/furniture wheels shall be soft type (W according to EN 12529).




SECTION 13: WINDOWS AND GLASS

1. GENERALSection includes fabrication, supply and installation of aluminum framed doors /windows complete with all related necessary accessories, for completion tothe Engineer‘s ap proval.

2. RELATED WORKS

Supply of finishing hardware.Sealing under Joint sealants.Glass and glazing.

3. STANDARDS AND DIRECTIVES

All metal works are to be executed according to the valid standards, directives,governmentCodes and building regulations, fire requirements and any other such applicableregulations as:

a) BS 952

b) BS 6262 code of practice for glazing of buildings.

c) BS 8000 Part 7 workmanship – code of practice for glazing.

d) DIN 1249 Flat glass for building construction.

e) Din 1745 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloy plate, sheet and stripgreater than 0.35 mm thickness, properties technical delivery conditions.

f) DIN 1748 Wrought aluminum and aluminum extruded sections design,permissible deviations.

g) DIN 1783 Strips, plates and sheets of aluminum and wrought aluminumalloys with thickness over 0.35 mm, cold-rolled: dimensions.

h) EN 1364 part 1 for Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing

i) EN 14449 for Tempered Safety Glass and Intumescent Interlayers

4. SHOP DRAWINGS TO BE SUBMITTED

a) Submit shop drawing indicating each door and door frame, the type of eachglass and frame, the materials being supplied, and the frame type finish.Show the cutouts and reinforcement for hardware, anchors and locations ofexposed fastenings.

b) Clearly indicate installation details for frames to walls. Show anchors, andrelationships of frame to applied finishes to walls and adjacent framing.

5. SPECIAL PROTECTION

a) Instruct the Employer on proper care, operation and maintenance for alldoors.

b) Suitable storage at site shall be provided by the General Contractor.




c) Under conditions of high humidity, ventilation or other, measures shallbe supplied by the Contractor to prevent the accumulation of surfacemoisture.

d) Supplier shall provide appropriate packaging to protect all finished

surfaces prior to leaving the factory and such protection shall bemaintained until the products are installed.

6. PRODUCTS

The following manufacturers and their products are acceptable.

Schuco by Alico or equal approved.

Other manufacturers are acceptable provided their products and applications meetrequirements of this section and are approved by the Engineer.

Hinges for Windows shall be equal to Schuco model Royal S50 N, outward opening with

double glazing.

7. MATERIALS

a) Aluminum Extruded aluminum profiles of alloyAIMgSi 0.5 F22. or equivalent profiles(WPC series) by US Aluminum Corporation.

b) Steel parts for anchoring or bracing must either be or galvanized. During mountingall necessary welding points shall be painted with epoxy zinc type protective coating.

c) Stainless steel 316 type, brushed no. 4 finish.

d) Selection of Profiles All required sections are to be chosen according to foreseenapplication and data given by the detail drawings and the system manufacturer.Thermally insulated outer and inner profiles must be continuously connected andcontinuity of insulating bars maintained. All doors shall be capable of accepting 24mm glazing panel.

8. GLAZING AND GLAZING ACCESSORIES

To the requirement of glass and glazing .

9. GLASS TYPES AND LOCATIONS

All glass in exterior aluminum doors and windows shall be 24 mm thick double glazingunits.

10. FINISH OF ALUMINIUM FOR DOORS

a) All exposed aluminum shall have powder coated finish.b) Exposed fastening if occurring. Finished and coloured to match the finish and colour

of the material in which they appear. The finish provided shall be permanent anddurable.

11. FINISH OF HARDWARE FOR DOORS

Supply and install compatible hardware for all exterior aluminum doors and bi-parting




12. GLAZINGa) The glazing of aluminum framed doors is to be executed using

permanently elastic EPDM – gaskets.b) Guidelines and directives of insulating glass suppliers are to be

strictly followed.

c) All glass unit assemblies shall be pre-fabricated and checked forquality of seals and stamped / marked in the plant prior to deliveryand installation on site.

13. REINFORCEMENT

Where reinforcement is required, reinforce frames with galvanized steel channels,plates or tubular section.

14. EXECUTION

14.1 Installation.

a) Erect doorframes plumb, true and square, in strict accordance with themanufacturer‘s printed directions.

b) The anchoring of all aluminum elements must accommodate movements of thebuilding structure and of other elements attached, without loading or stressingthe aluminum construction.

c) Accurately fit frames to provide tight installation and provide clearances requireddue to expansion, contraction and deflection of building structure and frames.

d) After adjustment, the anchorage devices shall be riveted, welded or positivelylocked to prevent movement once alignment is achieved.

e) Install all hardware, sills, cover plates, weather stripping and all other items,shown, specified or necessary for a complete weather tight installation.

f) Metal members shall be isolated where necessary to prevent corrosion due todifferent metal-to-metal contact.

g) Assume all responsibility for the design of the assembly, reinforcing, furring andanchoring to suit each specific condition complying with the requirementsspecified herein and as shown on the reviewed shop drawings.

14.2 Finish of Hardware.

Hardware to be as per supplier standard. All fittings to be powder coated matchingfinish.

14.3 Installation - Doors

Install doors to ensure true alignment with frame, correct fit and smooth operation.

Install hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturersinstructions.

15. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

15.1 General:

Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and windand impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakageattributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure

of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazingmaterials; or other defects in construction.




15.2 Glass Design

Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for uetailing only. Confirm glassthicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites forvarious size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknessesand in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the followingcriteria:

a) Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,according to the following requirements:

b) Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Projectfrom basic wind speed, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildingsand Other Structures": Section 6.4.2, "Analytic Procedure," based on mean roof heightsabove grade indicated on Drawings.

c) Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set verticallyor not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.

d) Maximum Lateral Deflection: Provide thickness required that limits center deflectionat design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch (25 mm),

whichever is less. 15.3 Thermal Movements:

Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the maximum change(range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members andglazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures ofmaterials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

15.4 Thermal and Optical Performance Properties:

Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer'spublished test data.

15.5 Air Penetration Tests

a) Testing Method: In accordance with BS 5368: Part 1. Measure air velocity by meansof a directionally sensitive hot wire pyrometer used as an anemometer, or other suitableinstrument.

b) Wind Exposure: Limits specified for resistance to air penetration shall apply underthe following conditions:

a. Wind Speed : 140 km/sec.b. Pressure Difference : 321 N/m2.c. Test Pressure : 30 mm water gauge.

15.6 Water Penetration Tests

a) Testing Method: In accordance with BS 4315: Part 1 and Agreement Board MOATNo. 1.

b) Wind Exposure: Limits specified for water penetration shall apply under the followingconditions:a. Wind Speed : 18.7m/s.b. Pressure Difference : 321 N/m2.c. Test Pressure, No Leakage 30 mm water gauge.d. Test Pressure No. Gross Leakage : 50 mm watergauge.




15.7 Resistance to Wind Pressure

a) Elements shall resist sporadic pressure from wind gusts under specified exposureconditions. There shall be no fracture or permanent deflection of any part, or anydeterioration expect as noted below of subsequent performance.

b) Exposure Conditions: a. Wind Speed: 140 km/sec

c) The deflection/span ratio of any part of a window or door shall not exceed 1/175 not10 mm when exposed to pressure or suction.

16. REFERENCED STANDARDS

Products shall comply to the referenced standards. Following are the internationalstandards that are acceptable provided that the Contractor substantiates theirequivalence and ensures their compatibility with other components of the system.Furnish copies of the current version if the referenced standards for comparison if sorequired by the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to insist on the named

product complying to the specified standard:1. British Standards

2. American Standards

3. U.S. Federal Specifications

4. French Government Standards

5. West German Standard DIN 6

17. SUBMITTALS

20.1 Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

20.2 Samples: 300-mm- square Samples for glass types and of 300-mm- long Samples forsealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in colorof the adjoining framing system.

20.3 Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifyingthat products furnished comply with requirements.

20.4 Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealantmanufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazingchannel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.

20.5 Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the products complywith requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.

20.6 Certification of Guarantees: Provide the manufacturer's certification or guarantee ofperformance of the following glass types supplied for the designed and specifiedperformance required:

1. Insulating Glass Units.

2. Tempered/Toughened Glass.

3. Coated Glass.




18. QUALITY ASSURANCE

Glazier Qualifications: An experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar inmaterial, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted inconstruction with a record of successful in-service performance.

Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals"article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.

Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experienceand capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for producttest reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing currentsealant formulations within a 36-month period.

Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualifiedaccording to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to

ASTM E 548.

Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified byreference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.

Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazingsealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glass type, tapesealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affectelastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and otherspecific preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazingsealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type and finish of glass-framing members andeach type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass (monolithic, laminated, and insulatingunits) as well as one sample of each glazing accessory (gaskets, tape sealants,* settingblocks, and spacers).

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

4. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions forcorrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.

Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listedand labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to local authorities for fire ratingsindicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201and ANSI Z97.1.

Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product ormanufacturers and organizations, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Referto these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referencedstandards.

Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on atleast one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the followinginspecting and testing agency:

1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.2. Associated Laboratories, Inc3. National Accreditation and Management Institute..

Mockups: Before glazing, build mockups for each glass product indicated to verifyselections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects andqualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following




Section 13, WINDOWS AND GLASS 260

requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directedby Engineer.2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will beconstructed.3. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting fabrication.4. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.5. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time ofSubstantial Completion subject to the approval by the Engineer.

19. GLASS SPECIFICATION

19.1. Main Glass: Emirates Glass, Saint Gobain, Glaverbel, Belgium, or equivalenthermetically sealed structural silicone double glazed unit of the followingmake up (6+16+6)

Outer layer: 6mm Tempered NN35T Blue Low-e on surface two of clearSubstrate

Inter Layer: 16mm Air Space

Inner Layer: 6 mm Clear float tempered glass at human contact level

VisibleLight Transmission % Light Reflection / Out % Light reflection / In %

22 12 13

Solar EnergyEnergy Transmission

%Energy Reflection % Energy Absorption %

15 15

Solar Factor Shading coefficient U-Value W/m² C RHGW/m²

0.20 0.23 1.53 159

19.2. Spandrel - 26mm hermetically sealed structural silicone double glazed unit ofthe following make up with FR extruded insulation and vapour barrier.

Outer layer: Same as noted on above as outer layer of main glass.

Inter layer: 16mm Air space

Inner layer: 6 mm obscured glass

19.3. Bath Room - 26 mm hermetically sealed structural silicone double glazedunit of the following make up

Outer layer: Same as noted on above as outer layer of main glass.


Inner layer: 6 mm obscured tempered glass




19.4. Railing

Single layer: 6mm clear float tempered glass + 1.52 PVB + 6mm clear floattempered glass

19.5. Skylight

Outer layer: 8mm Low-e on surface two of Blue tempered glass Substrate.


Inner layer: 6mm clear float tempered glass + 1.52 PVB + 6mm clear floattempered glass

20. SAFETY GLASS - FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED-GLAZING

20.1. Integrity plus Radiation reduction Safety glass for opening located far

from egress way

- Drawing reference(s): Opening schedule- Product name : CONTRAFLAM DOOR LITE- Type - Laminated Safety Glass in conformance with EN 14449- Classification: EW – Integrity plus Radiation reduction.- Material : Toughened Safety glass + Intumescent Interlayer + Edge Sealant- Fire Resistance : EW 30 / EW 60 / EW 120 compliance to EN 13501-2- Thickness Tolerance : +2 to -1 mm- Length Tolerance : ± 2 mm- Impact Resistance : 2 (B) 2 classifications as per EN 12600- Thickness : 11 mm- Weight : 25 kg/m2

- Sound Reduction : 37 db complying with EN 410-3- Light Transmission : 86% complying with EN 410- U value : 5.2 W/m2K complying with EN 673- g value : 0.73- Energy Transmission : 66% τE - Energy reflection : 7%/7% ρE- Manufacturer and reference: Vetrotech Saint-Gobain www vetrotech.com- All Sections, fastening, trims, sealant, and seals accessories etc. necessary to

complete the installation to meet the performance requirements and should be partof tested system and to manufacturer‘s recommendations.

20.2. Integrity plus Radiation reduction Safety glass for opening located farfrom egress way

- Drawing reference(s): Opening schedule- Product name : CONTRAFLAM LITE 120- Type - Laminated Safety Glass in conformance with EN 14449- Classification: EW – Integrity plus Radiation reduction.- Material : Toughened Safety glass + Intumescent Interlayer + Edge Sealant- Fire Resistance : EW 120 / EI 15 compliance to: EN 13501-2- Thickness Tolerance : +2 to -1 mm- Length Tolerance : ± 2 mm- Impact Resistance : 1 (B) 1 classifications as per EN 12600- Thickness : 14 mm 16 mm 20 mm- Weight : 31 kg/m2 36 kg/m2 46 kg/m2- Sound Reduction : 37db 40db

Complying with EN 410-3- Light Transmission : 85% 84% 82%




Complying with EN 410- Light Reflection : 9%/9% ρL 9%/9% ρL 8%/8% ρL- U value : 5.1 W/m2K 5.0 W/m2K 4.9W/m2K

complying with EN 673- g value : 0.71 0.69 0.66- Energy Transmission : 63 % τE 60% τE 56% τE

- Energy reflection : 7%/7% ρE 7%/7% ρE 7%/7% ρE - Manufacturer and reference: Vetrotech Saint-Gobain www vetrotech.com- All Sections, fastening, trims, sealant, and seals accessories etc. necessary to

complete the installation to meet the performance requirements and should bepart of tested system and to manufacturer‘s reco mmendations

20.3. Other requirements: Units to be of

20.4. Listed and labeled by an independent testing agency for fire-protectionratings indicated, based on testing according to EN 1364 part 1

20.4.1. Test reports are to be submitted for the Engineer‘s approval.

20.5. Tempered Safety Glass with Intumescent Interlayers: Tempered safety glassmade from multiple layered of toughened safety glass with intumescentinterlayers; in accordance with EN 14449

20.5.1. Fire-Protection Rating: Same as indicated for the assembly in which glazingmaterial is installed, and permanently labeled by a testing by an internationalaudit body like UL or TUV.

20.5.2. Fire Protection Type: Integrity and Insulation.

20.5.3. Unless otherwise specified in related specification sections, glazingbeads, accessories, sealants or gaskets shall be identical to those utilized in

the fire test of the fire rated glass.

20.5.4. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, "Contraflam" by VetrotechSaint-Gobain or equivalent product.

21. SAFETY GLASS - FIRE RATED INSULATED GLASS UNITS

21.1. Thirty (30) minutes Integrity plus Insulation Safety glass for openinglocated on egress way

- Drawing reference(s): Opening schedule- Product name : CONTRAFLAM 30-2- Type - Laminated Safety Glass in conformance with EN 14449

- Classification: EI – Integrity plus Insulation.- Material : Toughened Safety glass + Intumescent Interlayer + Edge Sealant- Fire Resistance : EI 30 compliance to: EN 13501-2- Thickness Tolerance : ± 2 mm- Length Tolerance : ± 2 mm- Impact Resistance : 1 (B) 1 classifications as per EN 12600- Thickness : 20 mm 21 mm- Glass size as per thickness ≤ 1.5 x 2.5m ≤ 1.5 x 3m - Weight : 44 kg/m2 47 kg/m2

- Sound Reduction : 41db 41db complying with EN 410-3- Light Transmission : 82% 81% complying with EN 410

- Light Reflection : 8%/8 % ρL 8%/8 % ρL- U value : 4.7 W/m2K 4.7 W/m2K complying with EN 673- g value : 0.66 0.65- Energy Transmission : 57% τE 56 % τE




- Energy reflection : 7%/7% ρE 7%/7% ρE - Manufacturer and reference: Vetrotech Saint-Gobain www vetrotech.com- All Sections, fastening, trims, sealant, and seals accessories etc. necessary to

complete the installation to meet the performance requirements and should bepart of tested system and to manufacturer‘s recommendations

21.2. Sixty (60) minutes Integrity plus Insulation Safety glass for openinglocated on egress way

- Drawing reference(s): Opening schedule- Product name : CONTRAFLAM 60-3- Type - Laminated Safety Glass in conformance with EN 14449- Classification: EI – Integrity plus Insulation.- Material : Toughened Safety glass + Intumescent Interlayer + Edge Sealant- Fire Resistance : EI 60 compliance to: EN 13501-2- Thickness Tolerance : ± 2 mm- Length Tolerance : ± 2 mm- Impact Resistance : 1 (B) 1 classifications as per EN 12600

- Thickness : 27 mm 29 mm- Glass size as per thickness ≤ 1.5 x 2.5m ≤ 1.5 x 3m - Weight : 59 kg/m2 64 kg/m2

- Sound Reduction : 43db complying with EN 410-3- Light Transmission : 80% 79% complying with EN 410

- Light Reflection : 8%/8 % ρL 8%/8 % ρL- U value : 4.4 W/m2K 4.3 W/m2K complying with EN 673- g value : 0.63 0.61- Energy Transmission : 52 % τE 5 0% τE - Energy reflection : 6 %/7% ρE 6%/6 % ρE - Manufacturer and reference: Vetrotech Saint-Gobain www vetrotech.com- All Sections, fastening, trims, sealant, and seals accessories etc. necessary to

complete the installation to meet the performance requirements and should be

part of tested system and to manufacturer‘s recommendations

21.3. Ninety (90) minutes Integrity plus Insulation Safety glass for openinglocated on egress way

- Drawing reference(s): Opening schedule- Product name : CONTRAFLAM 90-4- Type - Laminated Safety Glass in conformance with EN 14449- Classification: EI – Integrity plus Insulation.- Material : Toughened Safety glass + Intumescent Interlayer + Edge Sealant- Fire Resistance : EI 90 compliance to: EN 13501-2- Thickness Tolerance : ± 3 mm- Length Tolerance : ± 2 mm- Impact Resistance : 1 (B) 1 classifications as per EN 12600- Thickness : 40 mm- Glass size as per thickness ≤ 1.5 x 2.5m - Weight : 82 kg/m2

- Sound Reduction : 46db complying with EN 410-3- Light Transmission : 77% complying with EN 410

- Light Reflection : 8%/8 % ρL- U value : 3.6 W/m2K complying with EN 673- g value : 0.59- Energy Transmission : 47 % τE - Energy reflection : 6%/6 % ρE - Manufacturer and reference: Vetrotech Saint-Gobain www vetrotech.com




- All Sections, fastening, trims, sealant, and seals accessories etc. necessary tocomplete the installation to meet the performance requirements and should bepart of tested system and to manufacturer‘s recommendations

21.4. One Hundred Twenty (120) minutes Integrity plus Insulation Safety

glass for opening located on egress way

- Drawing reference(s): Opening schedule- Product name : CONTRAFLAM 120-6- Type - Insulating glass in conformance with EN 1279- Classification: EI – Integrity plus Insulation.- Material : Toughened Safety glass + Intumescent Interlayer + Spacer + Edge

Sealant- Fire Resistance : EI 120 compliance to: EN 13501-2- Thickness Tolerance : +3 / -2 mm- Length Tolerance : ± 2 mm- Impact Resistance : 1 (B) 1 classifications as per EN 12600- Thickness : 60 mm

- Glass size as per thickness ≤ 1.5 x 2.5m - Weight : 118 kg/m2

- Sound Reduction : 46db complying with EN 410-3- Light Transmission : 64% complying with EN 410

- Light Reflection : 13%/14 % ρL- U value : 2.4 W/m2K complying with EN 673- g value : 0.49- Energy Transmission : 35 % τE - Energy reflection : 9%/9 % ρE - Manufacturer and reference: Vetrotech Saint-Gobain www vetrotech.com- All Sections, fastening, trims, sealant, and seals accessories etc. necessary to

complete the installation to meet the performance requirements and should bepart of tested system and to manufacturer‘s recommendations

21.5. Rating to be as per drawings and approved by Civil Defense.

21.6. Integrity and insulation multi-laminated tempered safety glass withintumescent interlayer fire rate glass

21.7. Average temperature on non - fire side not to exceed 140◦C and maximumtemperature not to exceed- 180◦C above ambient temperature, as per EN1363-1.

21.8. Assemblies should meet EN 1363-1 requirements of passing integrity andinsulation and glass should be 1(B)1 classified for impact resistance as perEN 12600.

21.9. Fire rated glazing units separating between air conditioned spaces andnon-air conditioned spaces are to be insulating glazing units.

21.10. For fire rated spandrel panels, same type of fire rated glass will be used inaddition to galvanized steel shadow box as specified in the curtain wallsections.

21.11. Provide an independent fire test evidence from independent approvedtesting laboratory for the full system confirming the specified rating durationand integrity and insulation classification.

21.12. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provideVetrotech Saint- Gobain ―Contraflam units‖ or equivalent product.




22. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Work included: Furnish all necessary materials, labor and equipment for the competeinstallation of aluminum framing as shown on the drawings and specified herein.(Specifiier Note : it is suggested and related items such as glass, sealants and

entrances be included whenever possible).

Work not included: Structural support of the framing system, interior closures trim,metal subsille. (specifier list other exclusions).

23. PERFORMANCE REQUIRMENTS

Air infiltration shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Infiltration shall notexceed .06 CFM per square foot of fixed area when tested at 6.24 P.S.F.

Water infiltration – shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. No waterpenetration with at a test pressure of 12 R.S.F.

Structural Performance – shall be based on maximum deflection of 1/175 of the span.The system shall perform to this criteria under a wind load of specify P.S.F.

24. PRODUCTS MATERIALS

Extrusion shall be 6063-T5 and 6063-16 alloy and Temper. Fasteners, whereexposed shall be aluminum, stainless steel or zinc plated steel in accordance with

ASTM164-71. Perimeter encores shall be aluminum or steel, providing the steel isproperly isolated from the aluminum.

Mullion configurations shall allow for pockets at the exterior glazing face to receiveclosed cell neoprene sponge gaskets (ASTM C-509) with factory molded corners.Interior glazing seal gasket shall be fixed reliant electrometric E.P.D.M. glazing

wedge field installed under pressure.

Provisions shall be made at sealed horizontal to weep moisture accumulations to theexterior. A cover shall be strapped over horizontals to show only a sharp,uninterrupted exterior profile.

Vertical mullion shall be of sufficient strength to meet job requirements. Vertical andhorizontals components shall be designed for complete inside of Spandrel fromexterior without removal of vision lites.

System shall provide for expansion and contraction of component materials as wellbe required by an ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F. without causingharmful bucking or cracking, opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners or othereffects detrimental to weathering performance.

25. FINISH

All exposed framing surfaces shall be have scratch less and other serious blemishes.

Aluminum extrusions shall be given a caustic etch followed by Power coating.

26. FABRICATION

The curtain wall system shall provide for both vertical and horizontal members toproject a maximum of % to the exterior. Major framing members will be fabricated,assembled and sealed in factory to allow job site erection with a minimum of fieldlabor and materials.




The system shall provide for a minimum of ½ separation of interior covers from metalexposed to the exterior. This will occur at vision areas. Vertical framing membersshall have a nominal width of 3º. Overall depth of system shall be 6. Horizontalframing members shall have a nominal width of 2%.

There shall be no exposed fasteners at perimeter sections. Horizontal face covers

shall be 1/3 less in depth than vertical face covers to prevent exposed edges atintersection of verticals.

Horizontal face covers shall have a beveled face on top side of extrusion.

27. EXECUTION INSTALLATION

All glass framing shall be set in correct locations as shown in the details and shall belevel, square, plump and in alignment with other work in accordance with themanufacturer‘s installation instructio ns and approved shop drawings. All jointsbetween framing and the building structure shall be sealed in order to secure awatertight installation.

28. PROTECTION AND CLEANING

After installation, the General Contractor shall adequately protect exposed portions ofaluminum surfaces from damage by grinding and polishing compounds, plaster lime,acid, cement, or other contaminants. The General Contractor shall be responsible forfinal cleaning.

29. Polyester Powder Coating

Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless steel,zinc, white bronze or small areas of other metals compatible with aluminum surfaces,they shall be kept from direct contact with such parts by painting the dissimilar metalwith a prime coat of zinc chromate primer or other suitable primer, followed by one or

two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint or other suitable protective coating,excluding those containing lead pigments, or a non-absorptive tape or gasket shall beplaced between aluminum and dissimilar metals. Steel anchors and connectingmembers shall be hot dip galvanized or zinc plated after fabrication.

Aluminum surfaces in contact with lime mortar, concrete, plaster or other masonrymaterials, shall be painted with alkaline- resistant coatings such as heavy-bodiedbituminous paint or water- white methacrylate lacquer.

Aluminum in contact with wood or absorptive materials which may become repeatedlywet shall be painted with two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint or a coat ofheavy bodied bituminous paint. Alternatively paint the wood orbther absorptivematerial with two coats of aluminum house paint and seal joints with a good quality ofcaulking compound.Where aluminum is in contact with treated wood, wood shall be treated withpentachlorophenol, 5% minimum concentration or approved equal, followed with theprotective measures described for aluminum in contact with wood or other absorptivematerials.The aluminum work shall be designed and anchored so that the work will not bedistorted nor the fasteners overstressed from the expansion and contraction of themetal.Before shipment from factory, aluminum surfaces requiring protection shall be given acoating which will protect the metal during construction. In areas where appearanceof the finish on aluminum items is important, a coating of methacrylate type lacquershall be applied as specified hereinafter.

Apply two sprayed coats of water-white methacrylate lacquer having a total minimumthickness of 0.015 mm, which when applied to the aluminum surface shall be capableof withstanding the action of lime mortar for a period of at least one week in anatmosphere of 100% relative humidity at 40 degree centigrade, the action of 10% (byweight) muriatic acid for a period of six hours at 20 degree centigrade, and the action




of atmospheric weathering for a period of 12 months. The coating shall be applied inthe manufacturer's plant to the exposed surfaces of all aluminum components subjectto staining from alkaline mortar and plaster, abrasion and other construction abuses.Before application of lacquer, the manufacturer shall remove all fabricationcompounds, moisture, dirt, accumulations and other foreign materials to ensureproper lacquer adhesion.

Upon completion, the Contractor shall clean all aluminum work as required byremoving protective tape or other coating, using mild soap or detergents and clearpetroleum spirits.

Acids, caustics and abrasives shall not be used. Where cleaners are used to removeexcess sealing compounds care shall be exercised to prevent damage to seals orstaining or damage to adjacent work.The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all aluminum work until thecompletion of the works, and only units in perfect working order and in perfectcondition shall be accepted.

30. Aluminum Extruded Expansion Joints

Extruded aluminum expansion joints shall be of a proprietary make, and of types asindicated on the drawings complete with all fixings and fixtures, from a manufacturerapproved by the Engineer. Extruded aluminum expansion joints shall be installedstrictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.Floor and wall joints shall be sealed with an elastomer filled proprietary joint seal withextruded aluminum retaining profiles on each side securely bolted to the structure.Retaining profiles shall be set below the plaster or screed so that only the elastomerand the edges of the profiles show.Joint width shall be 20 mm and the joint cover be capable of absorbing ± 35% freemovement of the joint width. All comers, cross connections, curbs, tee joints or otherspecial . accessories shall be shop fabricated.The Contractor shall produce shop drawings along with samples for the approval of

the Engineer.

ACCEPTABLE ALUMINIUM MANUFACTURERS

1. U.S. Aluminum – U.S.A.2. Technal - FRANCE3. Kawneer – U.S.A.4. Schuco – GERMAN5. ESC – GERMAN6. Reynaers- Duffel, BELGIUM

31. HARDWARE MOUNTING HEIGHTS

The following mounting height shall apply throughout the work, unless otherwiseshown or specified:

1. Lock Sets and Latches: 950mm to center of knob from floor.

2. Butt Hinges: 250mm to bottom of lowest hinge from floor; 125mm to top of upperhinge from top of door; space other hinges equally between lower and upper hinges.

3. Door Pulls: 1.15m Finish floor to center of pull; center line in 125mm from edge offlush doors, and centered on stile of narrow stile glass doors.

4. Deadlocks: Center line of cylinder to align with center line of cylinder for lock sets.

5. Cross-Bar of Exit Device: 1.05m Finish floor to center of cross-bar.




6. Push Bar: 1.05m Finish to center of push bar.

7. Push Plate: 1.15m Finish floor to center of plate through mounted to pulls.

8. Flush Bolt Operating Mechanisms: Top bolt 1.65 to 1.8m above finished floor,bottom bolt 300mm above finished floor.

34.1 FASTENERS

Provide concealed fastenings wherever possible. The use of self-tapping or sheetmetal screws is prohibited except for the application of flush mounted push and kickplates.

1. Concealed Fasteners: Furnish hardware items with appropriate type and length ofscrews or other fastenings suitable to ensure permanent anchorage.

2. Exposed Fasteners: Furnish hardware with countersunk Phillips oval head typescrews where concealed fastening is not possible. The finish or colour of thesescrews is to match that of the hardware item being fastened.

34.2 BUTT HINGES

A. General: Pack all hinges with machine or wood screws as required by door andframe construction, where door jamb or trim projects to such an extent that thewidth of leaf specified will not allow the door to clear such frame or trim furnishhinges with leaves of sufficient width to clear. Furnish template hinges inaccordance with door and frame material requirements.

B. Butt hinge sizes for 45mm door thickness:

Door Thickness Hinge Size (h x w)

less than 100mm 114 x 114mm (4.5" x 4.5")

100mm and over 125 x 125mm (5" x 5")

C. Butt hinge quantities per door leaf: These quantities are to override those shownon the hardware schedule in cases of inconsistency.

Height of Door No. of Hinges

1.50m or less 21.51 m to 2.25m 3

D. Butt Hinge Characteristics: The following apply throughout the work:

1. Ball Bearing: Bearings contained within or flush with barrels2. Pins: All interior hinges are to have non-rising pins. All exterior hinges are

to have non-removal pins (NRP).3. Tips: Button4. Application: Full mortise

34.3 MORTISE LOCKS, LATCHES AND DEADLOCKS

General: Furnish mortise type lock sets and latch sets with anti-friction deadlockinglatch bolts and deadlocks as scheduled. All lock sets, latch sets or deadlocks to befurnished complete with trim, armor fronts and cylinders, concealed fastenings,




washers and bushings, provide wrought box strikes for each lock set, latch set ordead lock with curved lips of sufficient length to assure proper operation of latch bolt.

All locks shall have special type self-locking square spindles with ball bearing guideand with square front and strike.1. Provide a minimum 19mm throw on locksets and latch sets for pairs of doors.

34.4 CYLINDERS

General: Security profile key, removable core cylinders master keyed into buildingsystem, with cams to suit lock functions, and furnish with square shouldered blockingremoving cylinder.

34.5 PANIC DEVICES

A. General: Furnish panic device where scheduled, subject to the following:

1. Mounting: Devices shall be furnished with provision for concealed mounting,through bolts will not be accepted.

2. Keying: Keyed devices shall be furnished less cylinders. Cylinders shall be ashereinbefore specified, keyed to building system.

3. Bolts retracted feature to be provided for all concealed vertical rod devicesprovided at center hung doors.

4. Outside trims: Custom applications as scheduled and as follows:

34.6 HEAD AND JAMB ACOUSTICAL GASKETS

A. Furnish head and jamb acoustical gaskets where necessary

34.7 KEYING SYSTEM - KEYING CONTROL

A. Master key system has to cover all door types such as wood, hollow metal steeldoors and aluminum doors. The system has to be designed by the hardwaresupplier for approval by the~Owner and Engineer.

B. A complete masterkey system should be installed according to the hardware setschedule, in conjunction with set numbers and/or door applications shown,provide keys accordingly. The specific keying requirements are to be determinedin consultation with the Owner and the Engineer. Review the specific keyingrequirements with the Owner and the Engineer prior to ordering cylinders.

C. Levels of Control in Masterkeying: Furnish locksets and cylinders with levels ofcontrol as follows:

1. Masterkeys and Sub-masterkey in accordance with the Owner's andEngineer's requirements.

D. Cylinders must have a minimum of 6 pins. Finish of cylinders shall follow andmatch the finish of all other hardware used on the door.

E. Key and Removable Cores: Furnish keys, removable cores and blanks asfollows:

1- Material: Nickel Silver2- Quantities: Furnish 3 change keys for each cylinder, unless otherwise

specified, furnish 5 masterkeys for each sub-masterkeyed section.




3- Extra Blanks: Furnish the following quantities of blanks for theOwner's use in making additional keys (two blanks for each lock).

F. KEY CABINET

1. Key Cabinet: Sheet Steel Construct-on, piano hinged doorwith cylindertypelock, great grand master keyed to building system.

2. Provide steel key cabinets with capacity of minimum 300 hooks for apartmentkeys and steel cabinets with capacity of minimum 400 hooks for other keys.

3. Internal hooks for all keys.4. Horizontal metal strips for key hook labelling with plastic strip cover over

paper labels.5. Finish: Baked enamel colour as selected.

G. Installation of Cylinders: Do not install permanent key cylinders in locks until thetime of handing over to the Owner. At the time of handing over, and in thepresence of the Owner's representative, permanent key all lock cylinders, recordand file all keys in the key control system specified and turn system over to the

Owner for sole possession and control.

1- Provide half square lever handles in locks during construction, as may benecessary for security or as may be requested by the Owner.

2- Provide construction single key cylinder 2 nos. to operate locks duringconstruction.

34.8 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

A. Receive hardware for doors as shown and scheduled, and as specified in theapplicable hardware portions of these specifications. Store in a locked space to

prevent loss.B. Apply to doors as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required. Fit

locks and latch sets in their respective doors and remove before painting. Re-install after painting of doors is completed. Upon completion adjust and lubricatehardware for proper operation

C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance ofhardware

34.9 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS AND CHECKING

The hardware supplier shall assist the Contractor in adjusting and checking theinstallation of finish hardware. Check test and adjust moving parts to ensure free andsmoother operation. Furnish to the Owner the special tools required to adjust and

maintain hardware.

1. After the building is completed and in use, adjust hardware to compensate for airmovement and other conditions, so that it will operate properly at all times.

2. A factory representative of the lock and latch manufacturer shall examine allhardware furnished, with an Owners representative, 6 months after handing overto the Owner, adjust the hardware for proper operation.

3. Clean and polish all exposed hardware at the time of handing over to the Owner.

34.10 DOOR/WINDOW HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS

http://nos.to/

http://nos.to/




1. Roto, Div of EFCO corporation-Germany2. WSS-Wilhelm Schlechtendahl & Cohne-Germany3. Sobinco-Belgium4. Dorma Gmbh + Co – Germany5. GezeGmbh & Co – Germany6. J.C.L. Engineering Ltd. – U.K.

7. Mckinney – U.S.A.8. Savio – Italy




SECTION 13a: METAL AND TERRACOTTA CLADDING

1.0 PRELIMINARY INFORMATION / REQUIREMENTS

1.1 Requirements

The cladding panel package is performance specified.

The Main Contractor shall:

a) Be responsible for the Detailed Design of the Cladding Panels andassociated components/accessories shown on the Drawings and to meetthe requirements of this Performance Specification.

b) Be responsible for the supply and installation of the Cladding Panels tomeet the requirements of this Performance Specification.

c) Before the preparation of the Detailed Design complete a site survey toconfirm that the line, level and module of the Drawings are compatiblewith all existing structural interfaces. Any discrepancy found or intentionto alter the design intent is to be reported to the Engineer.

d) Co-ordinate the Detailed Design with that for all related works andaccommodate the specified movements and tolerances for structuralelements. The Main Contractor shall be responsible for providing allshims and fixings to primary and secondary structures and for the co-ordination and provision of cleats by the Specialist Sub - Contractor.

e) Be responsible for the final selection of materials, sizes, thickness, types,locations of fixings and sealant, all in accordance with specifiedstandards detailed herein.

f) Be responsible for ensuring that finishes meet the standards specifiedherein and have been independently inspected and certified as specified.

g) Be responsible for sealing all junctions between the Cladding Panels andadjacent structure to form a fully weather tight and airtight system to meetthe Performance Specification criteria.

h) Be responsible for ensuring fitness for purpose of all materials,components, systems, methods of installation etc. to meet theperformance criteria specified herein.

1.2 Health & Safety

a) The Main Contractor shall ensure that he complies with the latest ‗Codeof Construction Safety Practice‘, the Health and Safety section of theContract Documents and ensure that full consideration is given to thehealth and safety of operatives when manufacturing, handling andinstalling the Works.

1.3 Standards

a) Comply with the latest edition of all relevant standards and provideindependently certified evidence that all specified variants ofcomponents comply with specified requirements.




2.0 TYPE(S) OF CLADDING PANELS

2.1 Location

The location of the Cladding Panels is defined on the drawings but is generally asfollows:

TYPE 1Single skin Metal cladding.

TYPE 2Standing Seam Metal cladding.

TYPE 3Insulated Roof Gutter

2.2 Type Architectural Terracotta cladding – NBK Terrart Large .

40 mm thick NBK Ceramic Terrart Large 400 mm wide suspended façade with

special Terrart Flex Substructure system with 50 mm fully bonded rigid fireretardant insulation backing to maintain overall building envelope u-value integrityas per LEED silver rating requirement.

The joints to be backed by a support system which drains rainwater away fromthe cavities behind.

The design installation to take into consideration all associated support fixings, T1& T2 vertical profile, joint profile, spacer profile, tile holder, pin, butt straps andsectional profile dimensions as set-out within the detail design drawings. Also tobe include are all relevant cill, jamb, retainer, support, slip, parapet flashings etc.Support rails / framework to be formed using Stainless Steel framework. Colourcoated flashings, cover caps to mechanical fixings, appropriate pvc barrier tape,sealants and all other necessary components to complete the installation.

The support framework should take into consideration the local/site conditions toaccommodate any potential deflection.

The contractor should note, where applicable, the need for preformed cornerpanel sections as detailed.

Technical Performance

Water Absorption : less than 6.5%

Bending Tensile Strength: greater than 20N/mm2

Raw Density : 2.09-2.16 Kg/dg3

Linear Thermical expansion – 20-100 oC

Compressive Strength : 36.5 – 66.5 N/mm2

Freeze / Thaw resistance: EN 150 10545 part 12 (100 cycles) to be fulfilled.

Soluble salts – Din 105 part 1 – should be well below permitted max limit

Colour Finish: Brown and to Architect selection.

Manufacturer: NBK Ceramic (UK) or approved equal

Locations: Wall Cladding etc. cross refer to all relevant drawings.

2.3 Type Architectural Terracotta Louvers – NBK Terrart baguette.

50x50 mm square NBK Ceramic Baguatee Terracotta louvers with special TerrartFlex Substructure system to maintain overall building envelope u-value integrity




2.4 Type Aluminium Aerofoil fins- Hunter Douglas.

450x65 mm extruded aluminium Aerofoil fins with endcaps to maintain overallbuilding envelope u-value integrity as per LEED silver rating requirement.

The design installation to take into consideration all associated support fixings,butt straps and sectional profile dimensions as set-out within the detail designdrawings. Support rails / framework to be formed using Stainless Steel frameworkall other necessary components to complete the installation.


The contractor should note, where applicable, the need for preformed corner finsas detailed.

Colour Finish: PVDF coating to Architect selection.

Manufacturer: Hunter Douglas or approved equal

Locations: External Glazing and Canopy etc. cross refer to all relevant drawings.

2.5 Type SINGLE SKIN METAL CLADDING.

4mm flat composite aluminium cladding (ACM) Fire rated panel with 50 mm fullybonded rigid fire retardant insulation backing to maintain overall panel rigidity andbuilding envelope u-value integrity where applicable. Cladding system to be PVF2finish, to a colour agreed with the Architect.

Width tolerance: 2.0mm

Length tolerance: 4.0mm

Squareness: max. 5.0mm

Bowing: max. 0.5% of the length and / or width.The surface shall not have any irregularities such as roughness, buckling andother imperfections.

The design installation to take into consideration all associated support fixings,butt straps and sectional profile dimensions as set-out within the detail designdrawings. Also to be include are all relevant cill, jamb, retainer, support, slip,parapet flashings etc. Support rails/framework to be formed using both hot rolledsteel sections and galvanized framework, where appropriate. Colour coatedflashings, cover caps to mechanical fixings, appropriate pvc barrier tape, sealantsand all other necessary components to complete the installation.


No site welding of pre-finished panels will be acceptable

The contractor should note, where applicable, the need for preformed cornerpanel sections as detailed.

Colour Finish: PVF2 to be selected by Architect.

Manufacturer: Alpolic, Alucobond, Aluplex, Alubond or approved equal

Locations: Skylights, Wall Cladding etc. cross refer to all relevant drawings.




2.6 Specific Interfaces

The Cladding Panels interfaces with the following works sections. The MainContractor shall liase with the relevant sub-contractors and ensure that allinterfacing requirements are provided for:

a) Structural Steelwork:i) Ensure that all interfacing requirements relating to fixings areprovided.

b) Concrete works:

Co-ordinate all interfacing requirements with concrete up stands and allother concrete works/interfaces.

a) Electrical InstallationsEnsure that all interfacing requirements are provided relating to lightningprotection and earth bonding. In particular that a concealed route fromearth bonding point to earth is provided.

Ensure that all other cabling/wiring interfaces are accommodated in a concealedlocation.

3.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

3.1 Structural Requirements/Movements Generally

a) The Cladding Panels shall be designed, fabricated, and installed towithstand all movements of the building structure under all design loadsor combination of loads without damage or any reduction in theperformance of the Cladding Panels.

b) Attention is drawn to the Structural Engineer‘s Specification whichdescribes the requirements and the tolerances of the support structureand surrounding elements.

c) All necessary expansion and movement joints shall be designed toaccommodate the maximum movements that can be derived from thespecified and determined design loads and movements. Undermaximum movements the joints shall meet all the performancerequirements of the Performance Specification.

3.2 Design Life

The Cladding Panels shall be designed to withstand weather conditions based on

a 50 year return period (from Meteorological data) taking account of extremes ofwind, temperature, solar radiation, sandstorms, hail, rain and all other relevantfactors. The expected service life of the Cladding Panels is a minimum of 25years.

3.3 Fire Performance

All materials used shall be noncombustible in accordance with BS 476: Part 4.The surface spread of flame shall be class 0 as defined by the BuildingRegulations Part B2/3/4.

3.4 Wind Loads




a) The Contractor shall design the Cladding Panels to withstand, withoutpermanent deformation, the effects of wind loads.

b) The Contractor shall make proper allowance for site exposure.

3.5 Thermal Movement

a) All components shall be designed to resist thermal movement resultingfrom: the maximum and minimum surface temperature differentials,maximum annual range, diurnal range, absolute highest and lowesttemperature for mid-winter and mid-summer and surface temperaturein accordance with the recommendations of BS 5427.

b) The surface differential temperature range for components of the RoofCoverings shall be taken as 1 C and 55 C.

c) The anual range of external air temperature is generally about 45 C

d) The 24 hour range of external air temperature is generally about 20 C.

e) The highest recorded temperature is 50.5 C. and the lowest recordedtemperature is 1 C.

f) The design shall cater for all temporary and permanent conditionsenvisaged for the works.

g) In addition, the components shall be capable of accommodatingchanges in dimension and shape of its components resulting fromvarying surface temperatures between the outside and inside of thebuilding, without any reduction in the specified performance.

3.6 Condensation

The psychometric conditions under which condensation shall not form on thebuilding interior surfaces of framing members or any part of infill panels/ facings,or interstitially within the construction of infill panels forming a part of the CladdingPanels, such that it may lead to damage or staining are:

a) External:i) Summer: 55 degC maximum at 100% RH.ii) Winter: 28 degC minimum at 6% RH.

a) Internal:i) Summer: 25 degC at 100% RH.ii) Winter: 23 degC at 40% RH.

3.7 Setting Out and Tolerances

a) Set out components at evenly spaced centres, straight parallel and trulyaligned with other features where shown and to the modules shown onthe Drawings.

b) Permissible erection tolerances shall not exceed ±2m from designedpositions in any direction and shall not be cumulative.

c) All components shall be fabricated with a tolerance on design lengths of±1mm and shall not deviate in straightness by more than 1 in 500 up toa maximum of 2mm.

3.8 Cavity Barriers




Cavity Barriers to provide one hour fire protection to BS 476 and resistance tothe passage of smoke and flame shall be provided incorporating all necessaryfire stops, as indicated on the Drawings.

4.0 MATERIALS

4.1 Aluminum : see Section 11

4.2 Mild Steel: see Section 11

4.3 Isolating Tape

Closed cell neoprene self-adhesive tape to the cladding manufacturer‘sapproval. Apply to those surfaces of supports which would otherwise be incontact with sheeting or accessories after fixing.

4.4 Breather Membrane (Cladding)

A breather membrane is to be provided to the external face of the insulatedblanking panels

4.5 General Sealant: Refer to Section 18 for Details

4.6 Insulation (Cladding)

Insulation shall be:

a) Bonded mineral fibre slabs or closed cell rigid polystyrene HFC and CFCfree.

b) Inert, durable, rot and vermin proof and not degradable by moisture or

water vapour.

c) Attached to or supported within the Cladding Panels so as not to bulge,sag, delaminate or detach during installation or in situ during the life ofthe curtain walling.

d) The Main Contractor shall be responsible for selecting the insulationmaterial to meet the ‗U‘ values specified.

4.7 Vapour Control Layers

a) Vapour Control layers shall be reinforced membranes of foil or plastics,protected both sides by rigid facings/ linings.

b) Fixed to ensure continuity of vapour control on the warm side of thermalinsulation.

5.0 FINISHES

5.1 Protective Coating of Mild Steel Framing Sections/Reinforcement : Section11

5.2 Protective Coating of Mild Steel Mechanical Fixings : see Section 11

5.3 Anodizing : see Section 11




6.0 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

6.1 Generally

a) Fabricate and install the Cladding Panels in accordance with thisPerformance Specification and Detailed Drawings. All works shall be trueto detail with continuous profiles which shall be free from marks, defects,flaws, steps, waves, or damage of any nature.

b) Fabricators and installers shall employ competent Cladding Paneloperatives. Records of their experience are to be provided to theEngineer.

c) Select and align all products to ensure uniformity of appearance.

d) Joints shall only occur at positions indicated on final detailed drawings.

e) All fixings shall be concealed, unless indicated on final detailed drawings.Where exposed they shall match the material and finish of the productsfixed.

f) Machine cut and drill all products in the workshop wherever possible.

g) Mark or tag all products to facilitate identification during assembly,handling, storage and installation. Do not mark surfaces visible in thecomplete installation.

h) Dimensions and levels of the structure shall be verified.

i) The Cladding Panel works shall be set out such that all framing membersare installed in the correct position, within tolerance, and in the correctrelationship to the building structure.

j) All fixing bolts and anchors shall be installed in accordance with themanufacturer‘s recommended procedures.

k) Materials shall be kept dry until fixed.

l) Approval shall be obtained from the Engineer before drilling or cuttingparts of the structure, other than where shown on the Working Drawings.

m) Isolating tape, plastics washers, or other suitable means should be usedto prevent bi-metallic corrosion between dissimilar metals.

n) Cladding Panels shall be set out at evenly spaced centres, straight,parallel, and truly aligned with other features where shown on theWorking Drawings.

o) The finished work shall be square, regular, true to line, level and plane,with a satisfactory fit at all junctions.

p) Inspect each piece of Cladding Panels immediately before installation.Do not install any pieces which are improperly sized or have damagededges, scratches or abrasion or other evidence of damage.

6.2 Metalwork

a) The detailed design of extrusions and material thickness, the dimensionsof shall be designed and submitted for approval. Refer to Section 11.

b)




c) For each material or component, the total quantity shall be obtained fromthe same supplier or manufacturer unless otherwise agreed with theEngineer.

d) All support systems shall be adequate thickness and strength, not only tomeet the structural requirements, but also eliminate any risk of distortion

in the finished surfaces.

6.3 Coating/ Finishes Generally

a) All concealed/exposed metalwork shall be finished in accordance with therelevant BS standards. Refer to Section 11.

b) Visible cover-stripping shall be made from materials that are compatiblewith aluminium. It shall not shrink nor warp, nor adhere to the movingsurfaces and shall be resistant to deterioration by weathering. It shall becapable of being renewed without disturbing the panel systems andwithout removing the frame from the structure.

c) The quality of finish and corrosion protection shall be maintained by theMain Contractor until completion of the works.

d) Protection of the works shall be provided until handover to avoid anyblemishes on the finished elements.

6.4 Fixings : see Section 20

6.5 General Sealant: see Section 18

6.6 Assembly

a) Carry out as much assembly as possible in the workshop.b) Joints, other than movement joints, shall be rigidly secured, reinforced

where necessary and fixed with hairline abutments.c) Take precautions to prevent displacement of components in assembled

units. Obtain Approval for any re-assembly on site.

6.7 Installation Tolerances

a) The Main Contractor shall comply with the tolerances specified herein forthe Cladding Panels and accommodate the construction tolerances for

the cladding support structure. The Cladding Panels installation shall becapable of accommodating steelwork tolerances in accordance with therequirements of the Structural engineers Specification (NSSS). Inaddition, where applicable, the Cladding Panels shall be capable ofaccommodating the tolerances for concrete as specified in the StructuralEngineer‘s Specification. Different tolerances for structural steelwork andfor concrete shall not prevent the Cladding Panels from achieving theinstallation tolerances specified below.

b) The Cladding Panels shall be erected plumb and in proper alignment andrelation to established lines and grades as shown on the WorkingDrawings. The erected system shall present true and accurate lines andflat planes.




c) Permissible deviations measured in any direction shall be limited to longwave formations of minimum 20m wave length and a maximumamplitude of 3mm when measured from a laser reference line.

d) Joints between panels (vertical and horizontal): The actual width of any joint shall not deviate from the nominal width by more than +1mm or 10%

of the joint width, whichever is the lesser. Any variation shall be equallydistributed with no sudden changes. The offset misalignment between joints shall not exceed 0.55mm.

e) Joints (vertical and horizontal) between panels and adjoining cladding/structure (by others): The actual width of any joint (Sealant joint) shallnot deviate from the nominal width by more than +2mm or 10% of the

joint width, whichever is the lesser. Any variation shall be equallydistributed with no sudden changes. The offset misalignment between

joints shall not exceed 0.5mm.

f) Level: the Cladding Panels shall be within +2mm of the specified datum

level. The cumulative slope between the same location on any panelshall not exceed 1 in 1000.

g) Plumbness: the Cladding Panels shall be erected such that no point onany panel is more than 2mm from its theoretical vertical plane. Thecumulative slope between the same locations on any panel shall notexceed 0.5 in 1000.

h) The straight line tolerance for Cladding Panel elements in plan shall notexceed +2mm from grid lines and building reference lines.

i) The angular tolerance for Cladding Panel elements in plan shall notexceed +0.5mm per 1m width for each curtain wall bay.

j) The variation in flatness and angular twist for any Cladding Panelcomponent shall not exceed +2mm.

k) A method statement shall be submitted prior to fabrication detailingproposals to achieve the specified tolerances. This shall demonstratethat the construction programme, the effects of the building structure andconstruction method and the fabrication method of both the panels andcladding support structure is clearly understood.

l) The construction tolerances of surrounding elements (by others) and forthe Cladding Panel shall be stated on the Working Drawings in order toclarify and ensure that all aspects of the Cladding Panel relatesatisfactorily to the Work as a whole.

m) Dimensional Checking: Before work begins on Site the Main Contractorshall submit to the Engineer his proposed method of dimensional setting-out and cross checking, with adjacent trades and elements to satisfy theaccuracy requirements. The checking of any setting-out or of any line orlevel by the Engineer shall not in any way relieve the Main Contractor ofhis responsibility for the correctness thereof.

n) The Working Drawings shall provide for sufficient tolerance inmanufacture of the Cladding Panel in order to accommodatemanufacturing tolerances of other interfacing elements.

o) The tolerances stated herein shall be adhered to and no revisions to thetolerances to cater for inadequate control shall be permitted.




6.8 Protection

a) All fabricated and assembled units shall be protected against damage,corrosion and disfigurement during handling, installation and subsequentsite operations.

b) Protective coverings shall be applied before dispatch to site and shall notbe detrimental to products, finishes or installation procedures.

6.9 Handling And Storage

a) Do not deliver to site any Cladding Panel products and units whichcannot be installed immediately or unloaded into a suitable, wellprotected storage area.

b) Store products and units on level bearers clear of the ground andseparate with resilient spacers.

6.10 Interfaces

Ensure that flashing, closers, etc. (specified in another section) are locatedcorrectly and neatly overlap the Cladding Panel to form a weathertight

junction.

6.11 Damage

a) Do not repair without prior acceptance of the Engineer. Acceptance willnot be given where products and units are badly damaged or where theproposed repair will impair performance or appearance.

6.12 Cleaning

b) At Practical Completion of the Works, or when otherwise agreed with theEngineer, remove any protective coverings and thoroughly clean externaland internal areas. Cleaning agents for the purpose shall be approved bythe Cladding Panel manufacturer.

6.13 Shims

Where shims are required in the works they shall match the profile of theplates between which they are fixed. Where necessarily exposed shims shallbe finished to match adjoining metalwork as directed by the Engineer. Thesub-contractor is required not to make over allowance for shimming and onlythe minimum of shimming is permissible to allow for building tolerances. It isa requirement that shimmed connections shall generally be concealed andshall not feature visually in the finished works.

6.14 Bi-Metallic Corrosion

Do not permit contact between dissimilar metals in components and

assemblies. Take appropriate measures to ensure bi-metallic/electrolyticcorrosion cannot take place , in accordance with BS PD 6484 ‗Commentary onCorrosion at Bi- metallic Contacts and it‘s Alleviation‘.




6.15 Infestation

No materials used in the cladding or its component parts shall be liable toattack or infestation by micro-organisms, fungi, insects, or other vermin. Notimber shall be used in any part of the cladding.

6.16 SUBMITTALS

Control Samples (Fabrication Samples)

Provide samples, including relevant technical literature as follows:

a) 1000mm x 1000mm sample mockup of each type of Cladding Panels,including a junction between horizontal and vertical framing with allproposed gasket types, extrusions, and molds in materials and colourspecified.




SECTION 13b: CURTAIN WALLING

1.0 TYPE(S) OF CURTAIN WALLING

1.1 CURTAIN WALLING INCLUDING WINDOWS, CW.01- Drawing reference(s):- Supporting structure: Concrete as indicated on the drawings.- Curtain walling system:

Manufacturer and reference: Contractor to submit details of proposed system andcruciform samples with tender.Type: Stick system, thermally broken, dry gasketed, pressure equalized,conventional stick, transom - mullion glazed system fully drained .To include all products, fixings and interfaces necessary to complete thefabrication and installation. Performance criteria to comply withDesign/Performance Requirements and Testing subsections.

- Internal framing member:Material: Aluminium as clause 7.1Finish: As clause 8.3Colour/texture: to approval.Minimum film thickness: as recommended by manufacturer to meet severeexposure conditions.

- Glazing: Insulating glass units as clause 7.12, refer also to section 13. Thicknessand properties to BS 6262.

- Glazing system: Conventional, pressure equalised stick, mullion – transomsystem complete with thermal breaks, pressure plate, appropriate EDPM gasketscontinuous inner seals designed to accommodate minimum 24 mm insulatedglass units.

- Vapour Control : Vapour control layer as clause 7.20- Accessories : Condensation control of all thermal insulation cavities by

concealed buffed weep suit.- All fastenings and trims and seals necessary to complete the installation to meet

the performance requirements, manufacturers recommendations.- Other requirements: Units to be of modular design.

2.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/PREPARATORY WORK

2.1 DESIGN:- Complete the detailed design of the curtain walling and associated features

shown on the preliminary design drawings to meet the requirements of thisspecification.

- Coordinate detailed design with that for all related works.

2.2 DESIGN PROPOSALS:The preliminary design drawings indicate design intent but do not precludesubmission with tender of reasonable alternative proposals for consideration.

2.3 SPECIFICATION:Comply with the latest edition of the Centre for Window and Cladding Technology(CWCT) ‗Standard for curtain walling‘ unless specified otherwise in this section. - Keep a copy of the CWCT ‗Standard for curtain walling‘ at the design office,

workshop and on site, readily accessible for reference at all times during thecourse of the works.

2.4 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH TENDER:

Submit to the Engineer the following curtain walling particulars:- Typical plan, section and elevation drawings at suitable scales.




- Typical detailed drawings at large scales, including plans, sections, elevationssufficient detail to interfaces with associated components/ work.

- Technical information and certification demonstrating compliance with thespecification of proposed incorporated products and finishes, including but notlimited to.

- Certification, reports and calculations demonstrating compliance with the

specification of the proposed curtain walling.- Proposals for connections to and support from the building structure and buildingcomponents.

- Proposals for any amendments to primary supporting structure and for anysecondary supporting structure additional to that shown on preliminary designdrawings.

- Schedule of builder‘s work, special provisions and special attendance by others. - Examples of standard documentation from which the project quality plan will be

prepared.- Preliminary fabrication and installation method statements and programme.- Schedule of products and finishes with a design life expectancy less than that

specified in clause 4.3, with proposals for frequencies and methods ofreplacement.

- Proposals for replacing damaged or failed products.- Areas of non-compliance with the specification.

2.5 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED AFTER ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER:

Submit to the Engineer within 4 weeks of appointment the following curtain wallingparticulars:- A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment.- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from the curtain walling to the

structure.- Proposed fixing anchor details relevant to structural design and construction.- A detailed testing programme in compliance with the Main Contract master

programme.- A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with the Main

Contract master programme.- A quality plan in compliance with CWCT ‗Guide to good practice for facades‘,

Section 6.- Proposals to support any outstanding applications for Building Regulation

consents or relaxations.

2.6 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF CURTAINWALLING WORK:

Submit to the Engineer before testing or fabrication the following curtain wallingparticulars:- Detailed drawings to fully describe fabrication and installation.- Detailed calculations to prove compliance with all design/performance

requirements.- Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements.- Certification for all incorporated components manufactured by others confirming

their suitability for all locations in the curtain walling.- Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.- Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of all products.

2.7 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OFSTRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING:

Submit to the Engineer before fabrication the structural bonding sealantmanufacturer‘s project specific appr oval for:- Compatibility and adhesion of all products and finishes.




- Full details of structural sealant glazing design.- Structural sealant dimensioning.- A project specific sealant application method statement.

2.8 PRODUCT SAMPLES:

Before commencing detailed design submit three samples of each type of material tobe used on the project, with respective finishes as follows:1. 2m 2 aluminium glazed sample in approved colour showing spandrel junction.2. Extrusions each type: 300mm long3. Aluminium honeycomb panel: 1m 2 4. Gaskets and types, each type: 300mm long5. Sealants: 300mm bead sample applied to metal gut showing colours.6. Fasteners7. Hardware

The samples to be supported with printed technical literature of the manufacturerincluding Glass test reports.The samples shall represent physical and chemical properties, finishes and colours.

2.9 SAMPLES OF FIXINGS: At an agreed stage during detailed design work provide the Engineer with identifiedsamples of each type of fixing anchor including casting-in restraints and shims,together with manufacturers‘ recommended torque figures.

2.10 FABRICATION SAMPLES:

At an agreed stage during detailed design work provide the Engineer with samples of:2m 2 aluminium glazed sample in approved colour including louvre, spandrel paneland flashings. Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.

2.11 MOCK-UP:

At an agreed stage during detailed design work construct in an approved location amock-up of the curtain wall:1. The purpose of the preconstruction mock is to be able to make a visual inspection

to ensure that it conforms to the design intent. At this stage of the cladding development, the employer reserves the right tohave the subcontractor for the curtain wall cladding changed, at no additional costto the contract.

2. One complete lift of walling and balcony sliding door including differentcomponents of glazed curtainwall system representative of actual building designfor acceptance and approval by the Engineer.

3. The mock up will be used for evaluating colour, workmanship of curtainwallcomponents both for themselves and in conjunction with components of theprefinished aluminium panels. The mock up will also be reviewed for theoperation of sliding door and top hung window.

4. Adjust mock up as may be necessary to assist the Engineer with the finalisationof colours, profiles and properties.

5. Modify mock-up as may be necessary to obtain approval.6. When approved retain mock-up in undisturbed condition until completion of

curtain walling installation.

3.0 DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

3.3 GENERALLY:

- Comply with CWCT ‗Standard for curtain walling‘, Section 2 - PerformanceCriteria unless specified or agreed otherwise.




- Project performance requirements specified in this subsection are to be read inconjunction with CWCT performance criteria.

3.2 INTEGRITY:

Determine the sizes and thickness of glass panes and panels/facings, the sizes,

types and locations of framing, fixings and supports, to ensure that the curtain wallingwill resist all wind loads, dead loads and design live loads, and accommodate alldeflections and movements without damage.- Determine method(s) of attachment of the membrane to resist wind loads

calculated in accordance with BS 6399: Part 2, Standard Method or CP3:Chapter V: Part 2 using the following data:Basic wind speed (v): 45m/sTopography factor (S1): 1.0Ground roughness, building size and height factor (S2) determined from CP3:Chapter V: Part 2, table 3Statistical factor (S3): 1Make due allowance for any internal pressure.

3.3 DEFLECTION UNDER DEAD LOADS of framing members parallel to the curtainwalling plane must not:

- Reduce glass bite to less than 75% of the design dimension.- Reduce edge clearance to less than 3 mm between members and immediately

adjacent glazing units, panel/facing units or other fixed units.- Reduce clearance to less than 2 mm between members and movable

components such as doors and windows.

3.4 GENERAL MOVEMENT:

The curtain walling must accommodate anticipated building movements as follows:1. Thermal movement of the assembly or adjacent structure and assemblies over an

air temperature range 0 degrees centigrade to 45 degrees centigrade.2. Movement from the designed deflection of adjacent structure of ±/8mm as shown

on the arrangement drawings or can be ascertained from the associated shopdrawings.

3.5 AIR PERMEABILITY:

Permissible air leakage rates of 1.5m³/hr/m ² for fixed lights and 2.0 m³/hr/lin.m foropening lights must not be exceeded when the curtain walling is subjected to a peakpositive test pressure of 600 Pascals.

3.6 WATER PENETRATIONonto internal surfaces or into cavities not designed to be wetted must not occur when

the curtain walling is subjected to a peak positive test pressure of 600 Pascals.

3.7 WIND RESISTANCE – SERVICEABILITY:

Glazed units in framing member tests must have all edges supported.

3.8 THERMAL PROPERTIES:

The average thermal transmittance (U-value) of the curtain walling, calculated usingthe elemental area method, must be not more than 1.7W/m²K.

3.9 SOLAR AND LIGHT CONTROL:

Glass panes or units in curtain walling must have:




- Total solar energy transmission of not more than 13 % of normal incident solarradiation.

- Total light transmission of not less than 30-40 %.

3.10 THERMAL STRESS IN GLAZING:

Glass must have an adequate resistance to thermal stress generated by orientation,shading, solar control and construction.

3.11 CONDENSATION:The psychrometric conditions under which condensation must not form on thebuilding interior surfaces of framing members or any part of infill panels/facings are:- External: Summer:52°C maximum at 100% RH.

Winter: 14 °C minimum at 55 % RH.- Internal: Summer: 22°C at 55 % RH.

Winter: 22°C at 55% RH.

4.0 INTERNAL SURFACE SPREAD OF FLAME OF CURTAIN WALLING:To BS 476-7, Class 0

4.1 FIRE STOPPINGmust be provided at all junctions of curtain walling with compartment walls and floors.Use materials and methods of fixing to ensure fire resistance not less than thatspecified for the compartment walls and floors.

4.2 OPENING LIGHTS:

Each unit must incorporate concealed multipoint fastening operated by an internalhandle with integral lock suited to pass the same key.

4.3 DESIGN LIFE of the curtain walling must be not less than 30 years. Submit to theEngineer a schedule for maintenance and for replacement of secondary

components.

4.4 SAFETY:

The finished surfaces of curtain walling in all accessible internal and external areasmust not:- Have any irregularities capable of inflicting personal injury.- Release irritant or staining substances.

4.5 STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING REQUIREMENTS:

- Structural sealant glazing units must be capable of installation, without siteapplication of structural bonding sealant.

- Structural sealant glazing units must be capable of removal and replacementwithout site application of structural bonding sealant.

- Structural sealant glazing design must limit the design tensile stress of sealantsto 138 kPa.

5.0 TESTING

5.1 COMPARISON (TYPE) TESTING:

Fabrication and installation of curtain walling must not commence until testresults and reports showing compliance with this specification have beensubmitted to the Engineer.

5.2 PROJECT TESTING (SITE):




- At an agreed stage during preliminary installation on site arrange for testing of asection of curtain walling in accordance with relevant clauses of this specification.

- Protect building structure, components and finishes from any damageconsequent upon testing.

- Installation of general areas of curtain walling must not continue until site testresults and reports showing compliance with this specification have been

submitted to the Engineer.

5.3 TESTING AUTHORITY:

Project testing must be carried out by a United Kingdom Accreditation Service(UKAS) approved independent laboratory or U.A.E Municipality AccreditedLaboratory.

5.4 TEST SPECIMEN:

1. Overall dimensions 2 storeys high 2 modules wide including top hung windowand incorporating precast unit at least to one side.

2. One module of balcony sliding door including fixed screens

- Features: to include all components integral to the curtain walling.

5.5 TEST SEQUENCE:

To CWCT ‗Standard for curtain walling‘, clause 3.8.1, Standard sequence A, asfollows:1. Air permeability – jacked position2. Static air pressure water penetration3. Dynamic air pressure water penetration4. Wind resistance – serviceability5. Repeat air permeability6. Repeat static air pressure water penetration

7. Dynamic air pressure water penetration8. Seismic testing (serviceability and safety load)9. Thermal cycling regime10. Condensation test11. Repeat air permeability12. Repeat static air pressure water penetration13. Dynamic air pressure water penetration14. Wind resistance – safety15. Controlled dismantleThe tests shall be witnessed by the Employers Engineer, testing agent, the maincontractor and the curtain wall contractor.

5.6 AIR PERMEABILITY/LEAKAGE TESTS:- To CWCT ‗Standard for curtain walling‘, clause 3.4. Peak pressure as specified in

clause 3.5.- Carry out tests in calm wind conditions and standard temperature, pressure and

humidity conditions.- Regions of concentrated air leakage are to be identified by smoke.

5.7 WATERTIGHTNESS - STATIC TESTS:To CWCT ‗Standard for curtain walling‘, clause 3.5.1. Peak pre ssure as specified inclause 3.6.

5.8 WATERTIGHTNESS - DYNAMIC TEST(S):- To CWCT ‗Standard for curtain walling‘, clause 3.5.2. Peak pres sure as specified

in clause 3.6- Supplementary test(s) to prENV 13050.




- Mild steel to BS 4190 and suitable for galvanizing or other protective coating, or- Aluminium complying with BS 1474 for brackets, rivets and shear pins.

6.7 ADHESIVES must not be degradable by moisture or water vapour.

6.8 FIXING ANCHORS must be:

- Of dimensions not less than recommended by their manufacturers.- Capable of adequate three dimensional adjustment to accommodate buildingstructure and curtain walling fabrication/installation tolerances.

6.9 GLASS GENERALLY:- To BS 952 and the relevant parts of:

BS EN 572 for basic soda lime silicate glassBS EN 1096 for coated glassBS EN 1748 for borosilicate glassBS EN ISO 12543 for laminated glass

- Panes to be accurately sized, clean and free from obvious scratches, bubbles,cracks, ripplings, dimples and other defects.

- Edges generally undisfigured. Shells and chips not more than 2 mm deep and

extending not more than 5 mm across the surface are acceptable if ground out.

6.10 TOLERANCES ON GLASS TO SEALED UNITS :- Distortional tolerances measured after any thermal toughening/heat

strengthening:Maximum bow: 0.2% of pane dimension.Maximum roller wave:For 3 to 5 mm glass: 0.5 mmFor 6 to 10 mm glass: 0.3 mmFor 12 mm and thicker glass: 0.15 mm.Maximum edge dip:For 3 to 5 mm glass: 0.8 mmFor 6 to 10 mm glass: 0.5 mm

For 12 mm and thicker glass: 0.25 mm.

6.11 THERMALLY TOUGHENED GLASSthat is to be fixed in the locations referred in section L40/165 must besubjected to a heat soaking regime designed to reduce the incidence offailure due to nickel sulfide inclusions:

All panes must be heat soaked at a mean glass temperature of 280 ±10°C for not less than 3 hours.

6.12 INSULATING GLASS UNITS :- To BS 5713, hermetically sealed and Kitemark certified.

Colour of aluminium perimeter spacers: black- Perimeter seals must be resistant to UV light degradation on any exposed edges.- Perimeter taping must not be used.- Perimeter seals must be compatible with any structural/ assembly/weather

sealants, specified in this section, that they come into contact with.

6.13 GLASS EDGE CONDITION FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING :Bonded, unframed outer edges must be flat ground with a small arris suitable foropen jointing or for

6.14 GASKETS:- Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1

Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509.- Outer gaskets of single front sealed curtain walling systems and inner gaskets of

drained and ventilated or pressure equalised curtain walling systems must beformed in a complete frame with sealed joints. Vulcanised rubber gaskets musthave factory moulded corner joints.




- All gaskets must be resistant to oxidation, ozone and UV degradation.

6.15 GENERAL SEALANTS :Must be stable and compatible with all contact products and finishes and be selectedin accordance with BS 6213 from:Silicone to BS 5889

One part polysulfide to BS 5215Two part polysulfide to BS 4254One or two part polyurethane.

6.16 CURTAIN WALLING JOINT ASSEMBLY SEALANTS:Silicone to BS 5889, type A or B, neutral curing where in contact with or closeproximity to other products which may be adversely affected by acetoxy curing.Manufacturer and reference: to curtain walling manufacturers recommendations toapproval.

6.17 BONDING SEALANTS FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING:- Silicone, one or two part, neutral curing.

Manufacturer and reference: to approval.

- Designed and manufactured for bonding of structural sealant glazing.- Compatible with all contact and close proximity products and finishes.

6.18 WEATHERSEALING FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING:- Silicone, one or two part, neutral curing.

Manufacturer and reference: to approvalColour: to approval

- Designed and manufactured for weathersealing of structural sealant glazing.- Compatible with all contact and close proximity products and finishes.

6.19 THERMAL INSULATION :- Material: mineral wood slabs, foil backed- Durable, rot and vermin proof and not degradable by moisture or water vapour.

- Attached to or supported within the curtain walling so as not to bulge, sag,delaminate or detach during installation or in situ during the life of the curtainwalling.

6.20 VAPOUR CONTROL LAYERS :- Aluminium alloy as clause 7.2, mild steel as clause 7.4 or stainless steel as

clause 7.5, not less than 1.5 mm thick, or- Reinforced membranes of foil, plastics or rubbers, protected both sides by rigid

facings/linings.- Fixed to ensure continuity of vapour control on the warm side of thermal

insulation.

7.0 FINISHES

7.1 PROTECTIVE COATING OF MILD STEEL FRAMINGSECTIONS/REINFORCEMENT:

All surfaces must be:

- Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461, or- Treated with an appropriate equivalent coating to BS 5493, BS EN ISO 12944 or

BS EN ISO 14713.

7.2 PROTECTIVE COATING OF MILD STEEL MECHANICAL FIXINGS :

All surfaces must be:- Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461, or- Sherardized to BS 4921, class 1 coating thickness and passivated, or




- Zinc plated to BS 1706, coating classification Fe/Zn 12 and chromate conversionclass 2C or 2D.

7.3 POLYVINYLIDENE FLUORIDE (PVDF) COATING:

- To BS 4842, AAMA 2604 or AAMA 2605 subject to minimum coating thickness

recommended by the manufacturer on all significant surfaces.- Manufacturer and reference: as proposed by system manufacturer to approval.- Coatings must not contain less than 70% PVDF resin.- Prepare base metals, prime, PVDF coat test samples, protect components and

repair damage in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.- Apply coatings after fabricating is complete wherever possible. Any fabrication of

prefinished lengths must be previously agreed with the Engineer. Uncoatededges must not be visible in assemblies.


8.1 GENERALLY:- Fabricate and install curtain walling in accordance with this specification and the

final detailed drawings.- Fabricators and installers must employ competent curtain walling operatives.

Records of their experience are to be provided to the Engineer on request.- Select and align all products to ensure uniformity of appearance.- Joints must only occur at positions indicated on final detailed drawings.- Isolate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic corrosion.- All fixings must be concealed unless indicated on final detailed drawings. Where

exposed they must match the material and finish of the products fixed.- Machine cut and drill all products in the workshop wherever possible.- Mark or tag all products to facilitate identification during assembly, handling,

storage and installation. Do not mark surfaces visible in the complete installation.

8.2 METALWORK:

As section 11, unless specified otherwise in this section.

8.3 GLAZING:

- As section 13, unless specified otherwise in this section.- Fix directional patterned/wired glass generally parallel to surround and align

adjacent panes where seen together at close quarters.

8.4 FIXINGS/ADHESIVES APPLICATION:


8.5 SEALANT APPLICATION:


8.6 STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING:

- Prepare for and apply structural bonding sealant in environmentally favourableworkshop conditions.

- Place or fix setting blocks, edge supports, glazing retention devices andassociated accessories in accordance with the curtain walling and/or structuralbonding sealant m anufacturers‘ recommendations.

- Apply structural bonding sealant as section 18.- Do not transport units until structural bonding sealant has adequately cured for a

period stated in the project specific approval.




8.7 ASSEMBLY:

- Carry out as much assembly as possible in the workshop.- Joints, other than movement joints, must be rigidly secured, reinforced where

necessary and fixed with hairline abutments.- Take precautions to prevent displacement of components in assembled units.

Obtain approval for any reassembly on site.

8.8 INSPECTION:

- All fabrications and assembled units must be carefully inspected for match withapproved samples and for compliance with this specification and the final detaileddrawings before dispatch to site.

- Give adequate notice of inspection arrangements to enable the Engineer and/orother affected parties to be present.

8.9 PROTECTION:

- All fabrications and assembled units must be protected against damage,corrosion and disfigurement during handling, installation and subsequent siteoperations.

- Protective coverings must be applied before dispatch to site and must not bedetrimental to curtain walling products, finishes or installation procedures.

8.10 HANDLING AND STORAGE:

- Do not deliver to site any curtain walling products and units which cannot beinstalled immediately or unloaded into a suitable well protected storage area.

- Store products and units on level bearers clear of the ground and separate withresilient spacers.

8.11 SUITABILITY OF STRUCTURE:

- Not less than three weeks before commencement of curtain walling installationcarry out a geometric survey of the supporting building structure, checking line,level and fixing points. Report immediately to the Engineer if structure will notallow the required accuracy or security of erection.

- Coordinate geometric survey for curtain walling with any other survey(s) foradjacent cladding.

- Set out erection datum points, lines and levels for a complete elevation at a timeunless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.

8.12 FIXING ANCHOR INSTALLATION :

- Ensure that fixing anchor cast-in inserts are positioned in approved locations andthat insert cavities are protected from entry of concrete.

- Site drill or cut into structure only in approved locations.- Distances between all fixing components and edges of concrete must not be less

than recommended by their manufacturers.

8.13 FIXING ANCHOR ADJUSTMENT :

- Before commencement of curtain walling installation adjust all fixing anchors forline and level, allowing for adequate final adjustment during installation.

- Obtain approval before carrying out corrective fabrication to fixing anchors.

8.14 PRELIMINARY CURTAIN WALLING INSTALLATION :




Complete a preliminary area of curtain walling as set out below for inspection andapproval of appearance by the Engineer.1. One complete vertical walling section with all associated flashings and trims,

rainscreens, sliding doors, windows, etc. fully glazed representative of thecurtainwalling assembly.

8.15 CURTAIN WALLING INSTALLATION:

- Set out straight, parallel and truly aligned.- Secure to fixing anchors through holes formed during fabrication only.- Tighten all mechanical fixings to manufacturer‘s recommended torque figures. Do

not overtighten fixings intended to permit differential movement.- Remove protective coverings only where necessary to facilitate installation and

from surfaces which will be inaccessible on completion.

8.16 IN SITU WELDING is not permitted.

8.17 INTERFACES:

Ensure that flashings, closers, etc. (specified in another section) are located correctlyand neatly overlap the curtain walling to form a weathertight junction.

8.18 IRONMONGERY:

Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using fastenings with matching finishsupplied by ironmongery manufacturer. Prevent damage to ironmongery and adjacentsurfaces. At completion check, adjust and lubricate as necessary to ensure correctfunctioning.

8.19 DAMAGE:

- Do not repair curtain walling without approval. Such approval will not be given

where products and units are badly damaged or where the proposed repair willimpair performance or appearance.

- Repairs may require additional site testing at the discretion of the Engineer.- Schedule repairs or record on drawings for inclusion in the maintenance manual.

8.20 CLEANING:

At Practical Completion or when otherwise agreed with the Engineer, remove anyprotective coverings and thoroughly clean external and internal curtain walling areas.Cleaning agents for the purpose must be approved by the curtain wallingmanufacturer and incorporated products manufacturers.

8.21 MAINTENANCE:

Prepare a maintenance manual in accordance with CWCT ‗Guide to good practice forfacades‘, Section 10. Unless otherwise instructed or agreed the manual must becompleted and handed over to the Engineer at Practical Completion.




SECTION 14: PAINTING AND DECORATING

1.0 GENERALLY

Materials shall be delivered in sealed containers clearly labeled with the followinginformation:

1.1 SCOPE

The specifications cover paint work to exposed concrete and rendered surfaces,wood work, ferrous and non – ferrous surfaces in accordance with the schedule offinishes, drawings, bills of quantities and as directed in writing by the Engineer.

The term ―Paint‖ as used herein includes emulsi ons, enamels, lacquers, sealers andother coatings, organic or inorganic, whether used as prime, intermediate or finishcoats.

All painting works shall be applied by skilled workmen experienced in this work.

1.2 Marking of Containers(I) Materials shall be delivered in sealed containers clearly labeled with the

following information:1. Manufacturers name, initials or recognized trademark.2. Title and specification number.3. Whether primer, undercoat or finishing coat.4. Whether for internal or external use, where appropriate.5. Color reference from BS 4800.6. Method of application.7. Batch number and date of manufacture or re-test.

(ii) No paint shall be used more than 18 months after manufacture or re-test.

(iii) Coating materials other than spray paints, bituminous paints and fine textured

masonry paints shall be in containers not exceeding 25 kg capacity.

1.3 Samples

(I) Sample panels minimum two square meters in area shall be prepared for each type

and color of coating material to be used in the Works for the approval of the Engineer.

(ii) Sample pieces of each paper/fabric material minimum size 500 x 500 mm showing at

least the pattern repeat where applicable shall be submitted for the approval of theEngineer.

1.4 Manufacturers

The Contractor shall state the name and address of the manufacturer whosematerials he proposes to use. Once approval has been given, the Contractor shall notobtain materials from other

sources without the prior written agreement of the Engineer.

2.0 MATERIALS

2.1 Material in General

The materials to be used shall be of the best quality and of approved types, obtainedfrom an approved manufacturer thoroughly mixed and ground.




Paint shall show easy brushing, good flowing, spreading and leveling properties.These properties shall be demonstrated on test specimens at the request of theEngineer. Coats that have any noticeable pull under a large brush and that showpoor spreading and flowing properties will not be acceptable.

Paint shall dry to a uniform smooth, flat or semi – gloss finish under ordinary

conditions of illumination and wearing. There shall be no laps, skips, highlighted spotor brush marks and no evidence of cracking, chipping or flaking. Tinted paints shalldry to a uniform color.

Re-coating of a previous painted surface shall produce no lightening, softening orother film irregularities. Paint during and after application shall not be abnormallypungent, offensive or disagreeable.The color of the paint shall match the approved sample.

2.2 Preparatory Materials

(i) Paint removers, abrasive papers and blocks, cleaning agents, etchingsolutions, stopping, knotting, fillers and other commodities shall be of thetypes recommended by the manufacturer of the coating to be applied.

(ii) White spirit shall comply with B.S. 245.

(iii) Knotting shall be composed of dissolved shellac or other resin which remainunaffected by the resinous materials in the wood or the following paintcoating, thereby preventing the resinous materials in the timber leeching intothe paint film and causing discoloration or defective drying and shall be inaccordance with BS 1336 latest edition.

(iv) Stopping and filler for woodwork shall be approved proprietary leafless, oil-based type recommended for internal or external work as appropriate.Stopping for woodwork to receive a clear finish shall be tinted to match withthe surrounding woodwork.

(v) Filler for plaster and rendering shall be an approved proprietary type.

(vi) Mordant Solution

Shall be composed of a solution usually slightly acidic in nature and containing solvents,for applying to new smooth metallic surface to remove grease, organic soaps and providea physical key, and shall be obtained from an approved supplier.

(vii) Putty Filler

Shall be composed of white lead and dry filler mixed with pure linseed oil, the content ofthe white lead shall be not less than ten percent (10%) of the mixture by volume and shallbe obtained from an approved supplier.

(viii) Thinners

Shall be an approved turpentine or white spirit. Where the paints are specified to bewater thinned, fresh water shall be used.

(ix) Pigments

Shall be pure tint colors that will easily dissolve and mix with the various coatings andshall conform to the requirement of BS 1014: 1961 ―Pigments for cement, magnesiumoxychloride and concrete‖.

(x) Rust Inhibitor

Shall be ―Galvafroid‖ primer, manufactured by ―Secomastic Ltd. Bracknell, Berks,England‖ or Crown Chlorinated Rubber Zinc Rich Primer – Produce Data Sheet No. 56,




manufactured by the Walpamur Co. Ltd., Darwin Lancs‖ and / or approved equivalent .

2.3 Primers, Paints and Coatings

(i) All brands of primers, paints and coatings shall be approved and shall complywith the relevant B.S. where one exists.

(ii) Primers for plaster and rendering shall be alkali resistant. Primers for othersurfaces shall comply with Table 4.2.

(iii) Undercoats on wood and metal surfaces shall be of the drying-oil/resin bindertype, pigmented with titanium dioxide and/or colored pigments providing a Mattor low-sheen finish suitable for subsequent application of a drying-oil typefinish.

(iv) Water thinned priming paints and undercoats shall only be used with thespecific approval of the Engineer and compliance with B.S. 5082 will need to bedemonstrated in order to obtain such approval.

(v) Finish coats on wood and metal surfaces shall be of the drying-oil/alkyd resinbinder type, pigmented with titanium dioxide and/or light fast, colored pigments.

2.4 Papers/Fabrics

Papers/fabrics shall be clearly marked with batch and shade numbers as appropriate.

2.5 Adhesives

Adhesives for wallpaper/fabrics shall be of a type recommended by the manufacturerof the material to be fixed, and in the absence of such recommendation shall be anapproved type.

2.6 Epoxy Paint (Smooth Finish)

Epoxy paint shall comprise of the following system:

a) One coat of Penguard clear sealer diluted to 25% by thinner # 17, to be appliedby roller.

b) Two coats of Penguard texo to be applied by Putty knife, sanding should beapplied after each coat.

c) One coat of Penguard high built by roller.

d) Two coats of Futura II, which has to be applied after the completion of externalwork.

2.7 Undercoating Paints

For exterior or interior shall be as follows

a) White lead based undercoating in accordance with BS 4310 colors shall besimilar to the finishing paint.

b) Other undercoating paints to be applied as recommended by the manufacturersof the finishing paint.

3.0 WORKMANSHIP

3.1 General (i) Before painting commences all floors shall be washed over and every

possible precaution taken to keep down dust. No paint shall be applied tosurfaces structurally or superficially damp and all surfaces must beascertained to be free from condensation, efflorescence, etc., before theapplication of each coat.

(ii) Workmanship generally shall be carried out in accordance with C.P. 231, and




BS 6150: 1982 unless otherwise specified.

(iii) No primed or undercoated woodwork and metalwork shall be left in anexposed or unsuitable situation for any undue period before completion of thepainting process. No exterior or exposed painting shall be carried out underadverse weather conditions, such as rain, extreme humidity, duststorms, etc.

(iv) All items not required to be painted (e.g., ironmongery) shall first be fitted andthen removed before any painting preparation commences. The fittings shallbe re-fixed in position when all painting is completed and dry for 24hours minimum.

(v) Mixing and application of paint shall be in accordance with the specificationsof the manufactures concerned and to the approval of the Engineer.

(vi) The mixing of paints etc. of different brands before or during application willnot be permitted. No dilution of painting materials shall be allowed exceptstrictly as detailed by the manufacturers and as approved by the Engineer.

(vii) Ironmongery and accessories, machine surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures andsimilar items in place prior to cleaning and painting, which are not intended tobe painted, shall be removed or protected prior to painting operations andrepositioned upon completion of painting work as directed by the Engineer.

(viii) Equipment adjacent or against walls shall be disconnected by workmenskilled in these trades and moved to permit the wall surfaces to be painted,and following completion of painting shall be replaced and reconnected.

(ix) Brushes, pails, kettles, etc., used in carrying out the work shall be clean andfree from foreign matter. They shall be thoroughly cleaned before being usedfor different types or classes of material.

(x) All materials shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturers'printed instructions and paints of different brands shall not be mixed or usedin the same coating system. No dilution of painting material shall be allowed

except strictly as detailed by the manufacturers and as approved by theEngineer.

(xi) Concrete, blockwork, plaster and timber surfaces which are to be paintedshall be washed down prior to painting with a toxic wash applied by brush orspray. A second wash shall be applied two days after the first wash. Thesurfaces shall then be allowed to dry out completely before application ofpaint.

(xii) No exterior or interior or exposed painting shall be carried out under adverseweather conditions such as rain, extreme humidity, dust storms, etc.

(xiii) Painting work shall be shaded from direct sun light to avoid blistering andwrinkling. Wherever possible, painting of exterior surfaces shall follow the sun

so that it is carried out in shadow.(xiv) Edges, corners, crevices, welds and rivets shall receive special attention to

ensure that they receive an adequate thickness of paint.

(xv) All cracks and holes shall be cut out properly square and made good withsuitable filler or cement sand mix as appropriate, such repaired portionsbeing allowed to dry out and sand papered smooth

3.2 Preparation of Plastered and Rendered Surfaces for Painting

(i) Rendered surfaces shall be allowed to dry out completely before carrying outpainting operation. Plaster applied in the winter season shall be at least tenweeks old and that applied in the summer shall be at least five weeks oldbefore commencing painting operations.

(ii) The surface shall first be scraped to remove mortar splashes etc., and then




made good, cutting out all defective work and repairing with plaster or renderof the same type as previously used.

(iii) The surface shall then be vigorously brushed and rubbed down with fineglass paper to remove loose particles and to smooth irregularities. Surfacemould where present shall be removed by washing, rubbing down andburning off as necessary.

(iv) Surfaces shall then be left for a week to determine whether efflorescencereappears in which case it shall be brushed off dry and a further waitingperiod of one week allowed.

(v) Alternatively, the surfaces may be neutralized by brushing on a solution of 3percent phosphoric acid and 2 percent zinc chloride and removing all looseparticles after drying. No painting shall be carried out until the Engineer issatisfied that no efflorescence is occurring.

(vi) All render and concrete surfaces shall be twice stopped with approved puttyfiller shall be spread evenly with a scrapper over all surfaces. The first coatof stopping shall be applied after the primer coat dries out completely and thesecond coat after the first undercoat application. Each coat of stopping shallbe allowed to dry and harden thoroughly and shall then be rubbed bysandpaper until a smooth surface is achieved.

(vii) The surface shall then be sanded using progressively finer grades of paperuntil perfectly smooth and approved by the Engineer.

(viii) A minimum of two (2) approved undercoats recommended by themanufacturers of finishing coat shall be applied by brushing well into thesurface. Each coat shall be allowed to dry and harden thoroughly before thenext coat is approved.

(ix) New concrete shall be allowed to age a minimum of 28 days prior to coatingapplication. The surface must then be chemically treated or sweep blasted toremove the laitance layer. The Ph of the concrete surface should be within

the 6.8 – 8.0 range for safe coating application. If the surface Ph is outsidethis range, the drying of the concrete can be accelerated by applyingisopropanol or ethanol to the surface. The first priming paint coat shall bethinned and applied with a paintbrush to obtain maximum penetration.

(x) All rendered surfaces shall receive on or two full coat of alkali resistant primerbefore the application of oil based paints as per the Engineers instruction.

(xi) The finishing coat of paint shall be applied after the completion and testing ofthe mechanical and electrical works.

3.3 Preparation of Wood Surfaces for Painting

(i) All large, loose or resinous knots shall be cut out and the holes plugged withsound wood. Nails shall be punched well below surfaces, especiallyexternally.

(ii) All surfaces shall be rubbed down with fine glass paper in the direction of thegrain to give a smooth, even finish with arises rounded or eased.

(iii) Surface mould where present shall be removed by washing, rubbing downand burning off as necessary.

(iv) After dusting off all oily woods such as teak and afrormosia shall be washedwith white spirit.

(v) Two thin coats of knotting shall be applied to all knots and any other resinousparts of softwood.

(vi) Resinous exudation and large knots shall be removed and replaced byapproved filler or knot sealer and the surface shall be primed.

(vii) Parts of wood to be enclosed in walls shall be primed unless alreadyimpregnated with creosote or other preservative.(viii) A full coat of primer shall be vigorously brushed in, particular care being




taken to fill end grain. Backs of members and end grains shall receive twocoats of primer.

(ix) After priming all nail, screw holes and similar depressions shall be filled withstopping, pressed well in and finished off flush with the surface. Screw headsshall be countersunk sufficiently to hold the stopping.

(x) Hard stopping shall be rubbed with fine abrasive paper. If the first process of

stopping is found to be unsatisfactory it shall be repeated after the firstundercoating is applied and well dried.(xi) After priming and stopping is completed, pore and grain irregularities shall be

treated with a coat of brush or knife applied filler, and the surface rubbeddown smooth and even.

(xii) Woodwork delivered primed shall be lightly rubbed down with abrasive paper,and dusted off. Touch up bare areas with a similar priming including opengrained ends. The woodwork shall be stopped and filled, rubbed down anddusted off.

(xiii) Edges of exterior plywood and blockboard shall be sealed with two coats ofaluminum primer and the backs treated with a lead primer.

(xiv) All woodwork scheduled to receive a clear finish shall be well sanded with thegrain, removing all dirt, etc., to give as smooth a surface as possible.

Resinous timber shall be swabbed down with White Spirit and driedthoroughly. Spilt or end grain shall be filled with suitable fillerrecommended by the clear lacquer manufacturer, in accordance with hisinstructions, and of the appropriate shade.

(xv) Wood surface specified as stained shall only be rubbed down with fineabrasive paper and two coats of oil stain Ducco sprayed to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer.

3.4 Preparation of Metal Surfaces for Painting

(i) Bare metalwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease, rust and scaleby means of chipping, scraping and wire brushing; particular attention shouldbe given to the cleaning of welded, brazed and soldered joints. Wash down

with white spirit and wipe dry with clean rags. Apply a coat of metal primerimmediately the cleaned surfaces have been approved by the

Engineer. One coat of approved putty shall be applied on the surfaces andleft to dry for at least twenty four (24) hours. Surfaces shall then be rubbedby sandpaper or other approved means before second coat primer is appliedon iron and steel surfaces.

(ii) For Ferrous Surfaces:(a) One cost of rust inhibiting ―Galovafroid‖ primer or other approved equal

shall be applied by brushing well into the surface and shall be allowed todry and harden thoroughly before the application of subsequent coats.

(b) The under-coat and finishing coat shall be chlorinated rubber paint,interior or exterior grades and used all in accordance with the directionsof the approved manufacturer.

(c) Chlorinated rubber paint, interior or exterior grades, shall not be appliedin damp, foggy or freezing weather or to any surface which is notperfectly dry.

(d) Brush application is recommended although this material may besprayed if desired, only special thinners produced by the approvedmanufacturer may be added to achieve the spraying consistencyrequired.

(e) Special approved thinners may be used for cleaning brushes after use.(f) Ferrous works such as frames, covers to expansion joints, etc. which

are to be built into walls shall be primed before installation.(g) Painting of Ferrous surfaces shall comply with BS 5493: 1977.

(iii) Galvanized metalwork scheduled for painting shall be thoroughly cleaned ofdirt, greased, dusted and washed down with white spirit and wiped dry withclean rag. Any minor areas of rust shall be removed by wire brushing and




spot primed with a zinc rich primer. Apply at least one coat of calciumplumbate primer to all surfaces subsequently to be painted. Primer forgalvanized steel shall be calcium plumbate primer to B.S. 3698 Type "A" orzinc chromate primer.

(iv) If the priming coat of pre-primed metalwork has suffered damage in transit, orduring erection on site, the affected areas shall be cleaned off by wire

brushing, abrading and dusting off, the bared patches touched up with aprimer of a similar type to that already applied.(v) Copper scheduled for painting shall be lightly abraded with emery cloth,

washed with white spirit and wiped dry with clean rag.When the cleaned surfaces have been approved apply: -- One coat of etch primer or copper pigmented primer- One coat of alkyd gloss paint

(vi) Aluminum scheduled for painting shall be lightly abraded with emery cloth,washed with white spirit and wiped dry with clean rag. Apply a coat of etchprimer and zinc chromate primer immediately the cleaned surfaces havebeen approved.

(vii) Screeds to receive an epoxy floor coating shall be brushed down, all cracksand holes filled and all projections removed to leave a suitable dust free

surface. When the cleaned surface has been approved apply two coats oftwo pack of epoxy floor coating as manufactured by an approvedmanufacturer.

(viii) Priming shall follow manual preparation as quickly as possible and not laterthan on the same day. With blast cleaned surfaces priming should followwithin 1 hour and under no circumstances later than after 3 hours.

3.5 Epoxy Paint for Water Tanks

Epoxy paint for internal rendered and concrete surfaces of water tanks shall be nontoxic, solvent free, and two component epoxy resin system with water-proofingcapabilities. The surface treatment and application of the paint shall be strictly inaccordance with the manufacturer‘s written instructions to a minimum thickness of

150 microns and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3.6 Epoxy Paint

The surface treatment and application of the paint shall be strictly in accordance withthe manufacture‘s written instruction and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3.7 Paint Application

(i) Coatings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printedinstructions to clean, dry surfaces, in dust free and dry atmosphericconditions and after any previous coats have hardened.

(ii) Priming coats shall be applied by brush unless other methods are approvedtaking care to work the primer into the surface, joints, angles and end grain.

(iii) Any primed surfaces which have deteriorated on site or in transit shall betouched up.

(iv) All surfaces of joinery which have not been primed in the workshop shall beprimed immediately on arrival at site and before fixing.

(v) Care shall be taken to ensure that finish coats applied over calcium plumbateprimer are compatible with the primer.

(vi) Undercoats shall be applied as an even film over all exposed surfacesavoiding an uneven thickness at edges and angles.

(vii) All priming and undercoats shall be rubbed down to a smooth surface withfine abrasive paper and cleaned of all dust before the application of the nextcoat.

(viii) Finishing coats shall be applied as an even film over all exposed surfaces,avoiding brush marks, sags, runs and other defects. Where two glossfinishing coats are specified the second coat shall be applied within 48 hours




of the first.(ix) The application of paint systems for iron and steel shall result in a minimum

total film thickness of 125 microns internally or externally notwithstanding thenumber of coats specified.

(x) Unless otherwise indicated in the contract documentation Table 4.3 showingthe minimum number of coats for drying-oil/resin based paint systems shall

be complied with.(xi) The permission of the Engineer must be obtained if it is necessary to proceed

with painting generally if the temperature is less than 40 OF (5 OC) and therelative humidity in the building are greater than 80% or when suchtemperatures and humidity may be expected. Polyurethane woodfinishes shall not be applied when the temperature is less than50 OF(10 OC)and the humidity of the timber is above 18%.

(xii) In the event that the Engineer is not satisfied that the quality of finishcomplies with the required standards and/or the sample panel of theContractor will be required to repaint at his own expense such work to thesatisfaction of the Engineer. If in the opinion of the Engineer it is necessary toremove completely the unsatisfactory paint work this shall also be doneunder the direction of the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor.

(xiii) If while the work is in progress, the paint appears to be faulty, such asconsistency of color, drying time, or quality of finish , the work shall bestopped at once and the manufacturer consulted.

(xiv) The manufacturers of the material shall be given every facility for inspectingthe work during progress in order to ascertain that the materials are beingused in accordance with their directions, and to take samples of theirproducts from the site if they so desire for tests.

(xv) The finishing coats of the various paints or surface finishing shall be free fromsags, brush marks, runs, wrinkling , dust, bare or 'starved' patches, variationin color and texture, evidence of touching up in any light and other blemishes.

(xvi) When the work has been completed, the finished surfaces shall not beinferior in quality, color and finishes to the samples approved by the

Engineer, and imperfections in manufacture shall not be apparent throughthese finished surfaces.

3.8 Preparation of new Surfaces for Decorative Papers/Fabrics

(i) Rendered surfaces shall be scraped to remove mortar splashes and allirregularities, cracks and blow holes shall be filled and rubbed down whendry, to a smooth surface removing all nibs and loose material.

(ii) Rendering, asbestos board and other alkaline surfaces shall receive one coatof alkali resistant primer.

(iii) All nail and screw heads to rigid sheet surfaces shall be below the surface,

touched in with metal primer and allowed to dry before filling.(iv) Paperfaced plasterboard, hardboard, chipboard and the like shall receive one

coat of general purpose primer.

(v) Surfaces which have not been primed and other surfaces recommended bythe adhesive manufacturer shall receive 1 coat which shall be allowed to dry.

3.9 Preparation of Previously Papered/Painted Surfaces for DecorativePapers/Fabrics

(i) All existing paper or fabric shall be removed and the surface washed downwith warm water to remove old adhesive and size. All existing paintedsurfaces shall be scraped to remove any loose material and washed withdetergent solution to remove any dirt and grease.

(ii) All irregularities and cracks shall be filled and rubbed down when dry to a




smooth surface.

(iii) Bare and filled areas shall be touched in with general purpose primer.

3.10 Hanging Decorative Papers and Fabrics

(i) Hanging shall not commence until :

1) All work affecting the surfaces to be covered is complete.

2) The surfaces to be covered are dry and free from dust.

3) The painting of adjacent surfaces is finished and dry.

(ii) Switch plates, grilles, etc., shall be removed before hanging commences andreplaced when the surfaces are dry.

(iii) The Engineer's instruction shall be obtained where the specified covering willallow minor blemishes in the surfaces to show.

(iv) Only rolls with the same shade number shall be used in any one area. Beforehanging, the rolls shall be carefully matched for color.

(v) The manufacturer's recommendations for hanging the coverings and to whichsurface the adhesive is best applied shall be followed. Great care shall betaken to avoid staining the face of the paper or fabric.

(vi) All lengths shall be in one piece unless greater than roll length.

(vii) Patterned paper or fabric shall be correctly aligned and accurately matched.Where mismatching is unavoidable the Engineer's approval shall be obtainedfor the position allocated.

(viii) Wallpaper shall be accurately butt jointed. Where incomplete widths arerequired or where materials do not have straight edges the joints shall beoverlapped and cut through using a straightedge to form a butt joint. Edgesshall be neatly trimmed to a true line at junctions with other finishes.

(ix) When finished, papers and fabrics shall be free from air bubbles, wrinkles,gaps, tears, adhesive marks and stains and shall be secure and smooth.

4.0 STANDARDS AND TABLES

4.1 Standards

The Standards referred to in this Section are:B.S. 245 Specification for mineral solvents.B.S. 1336 KnottingB.S. 2523 Lead based priming paint for iron and steel.B.S. 3698 Calcium plumbates priming paints.

B.S. 4652 Metallic zinc-rich priming paint (organic media).B.S. 4756 Ready-mixed aluminum priming paints for woodwork.B.S. 4800 Paint colors for building purposes.B.S. 5082 Water thinned priming paints for wood.B.S. 5358 Low-lead solvent-thinned priming paint for woodwork.




4.2 Suitable Primers for Background ____________________________________________________________

SURFACES PRIMER ____________________________________________________________

Non resinous wood Low oil based primer to BS 5358or

Aluminum wood primer to BS 4756 ____________________________________________________________Resinous Woods Aluminum wood primer to BS 4756

____________________________________________________________Iron and Steel Red lead primer to BS 2523, Type "B"

____________________________________________________________Calcium plumbate primer to BS 3698,

Galvanized steel Type "A" orZinc chromate primer

____________________________________________________________Blast cleaned iron and Zinc-rich primer to BS 4652,steel or touching-up Typesdamaged zinc coatings 1, 2, and 3

____________________________________________________________ Aluminum and Etch primer plus zinc chromatealuminum alloys primer

____________________________________________________________Copper Externally: Etch primer or aluminumand pigmented primercopper alloys Internally: Alkyd gloss paint direct

____________________________________________________________Lead Alkyd gloss paint direct

____________________________________________________________Plastics Oil based undercoat

____________________________________________________________




4.3 Paint Systems

__________________________________________________________________SURFACE LOCATION PAINT SYSTEM

__________________________________________________________________

1 coat primer1 coat undercoatInternal 1 coat alkyd gloss finish

or1 coat primer2 coats alkyd mid-sheen finish

Wood-oil paint ________________________________________________

1 coat primerExternal 2 coats undercoat

1 coat alkyd gloss finish __________________________________________________________________

Internal 3 coats varnish or

polyurethaneWood-natural ________________________________________________finish

External 3 coats exterior gradevarnish

__________________________________________________________________1 coat primer

Internal 1 coat undercoatIron and steel 1 coat alkyd gloss finishincluding ________________________________________________galvanized steel

2 coats primerExternal 2 coats undercoat

1 coat alkyd gloss finish __________________________________________________________________

1 coat etch primerInternal 1 coat primer

Aluminum and 1 coat undercoatExternal 1 coat alkyd gloss finish

(lead free) __________________________________________________________________

1 or 2 coat PVA primerCement rendering Internal 2 coats undercoat

2 Acrylic Co polymer Washable emulsion __________________________________________________________________

1 or 2 coat Acrylic Resistant PrimerCement rendering Internal & 2 coats Acrylic Texture coating

External __________________________________________________________________

1 or 2coat Acrylic Resistant PrimerCement rendering External 2 coats water based acrylic emulsion

__________________________________________________________________

Exterior Concrete & rendering 1 or 2 coat of two pack epoxy under coat.Surfaces 1 coat of two pack Epoxy texture spray.

2 coats of two pack polyurethane withmix ratio 6 : 1

__________________________________________________________________




SECTION 15: ROADWORKS, KERBS AND PAVINGS

ii GENERAL

(I) Where materials used in this section (e.g. concrete and reinforcement) havebeen specified elsewhere in this document, the relevant clauses shall apply tothis section. Materials that have not been individually specified shall be offirst class quality and minimum standard acceptable shall be the relevant BritishStandard where applicable.

(ii) White cement shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer and shallcomply with the relevant British Standard. White aggregate shall be of a colorapproved by the Engineer and shall comply in all respects with the requirementsfor aggregates in Section E.(iii) Samples of all materials to be used shall be submitted for approval. Asample area of 3 x 3 meters shall be prepared for each hard surfacing material.The approved sample shall be retained as the quality standard for the materialand its placement.

(iv) For excavation and filling, refer to the standards set out in Section D of thisSpecification.

(v) All tests on kerbstones shall comply with BS 7263, Part 1.

iii PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS, CHANNELS, EDGINGS AND QUADRANTS

(I) Precast concrete kerbs, channels, edgings and quadrants shallcomply with BS 7263, Part 1 and shall be hydraulically pressed. They shallbe laid and bedded on a Class II mortar bed not less than 10 mm and notmore than 40 mm thick on a foundation of concrete Grade 20 as per BS7263, Part II.

(ii) For radii of 12 m or less, appropriate radius kerbs shall be used. Short, straightSections of kerb shall not be used for these radii without the Engineer's priorapproval. Drop, transition and radius kerbs shall be of Grade 30/20/S concrete,Precast upside down in steel or GRP.

(iii) Before backing with concrete the kerbline shall be checked for line and level andthe foundation shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted. Any units deviating bymore than 3 mm in 3 m from line and level shall be taken up and re-laid. Thelevel of any part of the kerbline shall not deviate by more than 3 mm verticallyfrom the specified level.(iv) Where filling behind the kerbs is likely to have a harmful effect on thekerb, backing and foundation shall be protected by a method agreed with theEngineer or as shown on the Drawings.

(v) Joints between Precast units are to be left open. Expansion/contraction jointsare to be at 6 m centers in foundation and backing and are to be 3 to 5 mmwide.

iii.1 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS.

1. Scope:

The part of BS 7263 specifies requirements for the following Precast concreteproducts:

(a) Wet pressed and semi-dry flags(b) Kerbs;(c) Channels;(d) Edging;(e) Quadrants.




The Precast concretes products, referred to as a product of products in thispart of BS 7263 are intended for use in the construction of carriageways andfootways laid in accordance with BS 7263; Part 2.

2. Definitions:

For the purposes of this part of BS 7263 the definitions in BS G100; Subsection1.5.1, from which the following definitions are taken, apply.

1.1 Nominal size. The size, which identifies a component.

1.2 Work size. The target size of a building component specified for itsManufacture.

3. Binders

Products shall be made using one or more of the binders complying with theappropriate British standards as given in table 1.

4. Aggregates

Products shall be made using one or more of the aggregates complying with theappropriate standard as given in table 2.

5. Water

The water shall be either of drinking quality or shall comply with BS 3148.

6. Admixtures

Admixtures shall comply with the uniformity requirements of BS 5075 and if

appropriate with the acceptance tests of the standard.

Table 1. BindersType of binder Standard to be complied withPortland cement BS 12Portland blastfurnace BS 146: Part 2CementSulphate resisting BS 4027Portland cementPortland Pulverized-fuel BS 6588

Ash cementPulverized – fuel ash BS 3892: Part 1

Ground granulated BS 6699Blastfuranace slagTLime BS 890Low heat Portland BS 4246: Part: 2Blastfurnace cementPozzolanic cement with BS 6610Pulverized-fuel ash as pozzolana

Table 2. AggregatesType of aggregate Standard to be complied withNatural aggregates BS 882: 1983 (except grading

requirements in clause 5) Air-cooled blastfurnace slag BS 1047: 1983 (except grading

requirements in 4.8)Pulverized-fuel ash BS 3892: Part 2




Ground granulated blastfurnace slag BS 6699

7. PigmentsPigments shall comply with BS 1014.

8. Air content

The concrete used in kerbs channels quadrants and edgings produced by thewet cast process shall have the following entrained air contents measured inaccordance with BS 1881; part 106: -(a) Products with 14mm nominal maximum aggregate size; 6% 1.5%.(b) Products with 20mm nominal maximum aggregate size: 5% 1.5%

9. FinishProducts described as natural shall contain no pigment where products aremade with two-part mixes the surface layer shall be not less 12 mm thick forflags or not less than 25 mm thick for all other products. The surface layer shallbe produced as an integral part of the product.

10. Dimensions and tolerances

10.1 Dimensions

10.1.1Flags sized shall be given in table 3.

Table 3. Flag sizes

Flag type Nominal size Work size Thicknessmm mm Mm

A 600 x 450 598 x 448 50 or 63B 600 x 600 598 x 598 50 or 83C 600 x 750 598 x 748 50 or 63D 600 x 800 598 x 898 50 or 63E 450 x 450 448 x 448 50 or 70F 400 x 400 398 x 398 50 or 65G 300 x 300 298 x 298 50 or 60NOTE ; Tactile flags type TA are normally available in sites of flag typesE,F and G with an average thickness of 50mm, Tactile flags are thusdesignated type TA/E TA/P or TA/G depending on their size.

Tactile flags shall be provided with domes on the wearing surface . A wearing surfaceedge chamfer with dimensions 5 1 mm vertically and 5 1mm horizontallymeasured at right angles, shall be provided on flags type E, F and G unless

otherwise specified.

10.1.2 Kerbs channels and edgings , kerbs, channels and edgings shall have a length inthe range 450 mm to 915 m. The length shall be measured along the vertical contactface between the kerb and channel. The radius of the vertical contact face of a kerbor channel shall be as given in table 4. All angles except those resulting from splayedradiuses or chamfered force meeting as shown in figure 1 shall be square.

Table 4. External and Internal radii for kerbs and channels

External only Internal and externalm m1.0 2.0 3.0 4.5 6.0 7.5

9.0 10.5 12.0




10.13 Quadrants

Quadrants shall have faces to match the profiles for kerbs type 6N, SP HB2 or HB3respectively.

10.1.3 Dropper Kerbs

Dropper kerb shall have the sizes shown in relevant figure 1(k) or (1) dropper kerbtype or type 2 respectively.

10.2 Tolerances

Flags : the maximum dimensional deviation of any flag measured in accordance withappendix A shall be as follows :

(vi) thickness 3mm.(vii) dome height (tactle flags) ; 1 mm

(viii) length and width 2mm(ix) squareness of plan (difference between diagonals)

(1) flag types A, B,C,D : 6 mm(2) flag types E,F,G : 3 mm

(x) flatness, winding and bowing;(1) measured over 550 to 850 mm 2 mm(2) measured over 250 to 400 mm 1 mm

Kerbs, channels and edging : The maximum dimensional deviations of any kerbchannel and edging measured as described in appendix A shall be as follows:

(a) length, width or height = 6 mm(b) straightness and winding;

1 measured over 550 to 850 mm 2 mm2 measured over 250 to 300 mm 1 mm

(c) squareness 2 mm clearance.

Transverse strength

11.1 Flags

When sampled and tested as described the falling loads shall be not less than theappropriate value given in table 5.

Table 5 Transverse strength of flag

Flag Type Minimum failing load for thickness50 mm 60 mm 63 mm 65 mm 70mmkN kN kN kN kN8.3 12.7

B,C,D 11.1 16.9E 8.0 18.6F 9.1 15.4G 9.6 13.8




Kerbs, channels and edgings

When sampled and tested as described the failing loads shall be not less that theappropriate value given in table 6.

Table 6. Transverse strength of Kerbs, channels and edging

Depth of(see note 1)

Width as tested Failing load( see note 2)

mm mm kN150 305 32.2125 160 8.050 255 13.350 255 3.150 205 2.750 160 2.0Dropper kerbs125

255 to 150 10.3

Note 1. Units are placed in the testing machine with the depth as stetted being thesmallest dimension.

Note 2 : The failing load for kerbs of various length may be obtained by extraociation.e.g. if the failing load for a 125 mm x 255 mm x 915 mm kerb tested on a span of 750mm is 13.3 kN the falling load for a 550 mm kerb of the same cross section tested ona span of x mm will be 13.3 x (750 / x )kN.

Notes 3

Outlet kerbs, quadrants and angle kerbs are not tested for transverse strength.

12. Water absorption.

12.1 Kerbs, channels, edgings and flags: When tested as described in appendix Cthe water absorption shall not exceed the approximate value given in table 7.

Table 7. Maximum water absorption of kerbs, channels, edgings and flags.Kerbs channels and quadrantsshown in figure 1.

% by mass 2.5 % by mass 4.0

13 Sampling for independent testing.

Samples shall be taken before the products are laid and wherever practicable, whilstthey are being moved. e.g. during loading or unloading. A sample of three productsshall be taken from a consignment of not more than 1000 products. Each of the threeproducts in the sample shall be taken from one of three approximately equal sectionsor the consignment to be tested.

Each product of a sample shall be uniquely marked and accompanied by a certificatefrom the person responsible for taking the samples, stating that sampling was carriedout in accordance with BS 7263: Part 1.

The sample shall be dispatched to the test laboratory taking precautions to avoiddamage to the products in transit.

Note : Products used for the dimensional checks may subsequently be used fortransverse strength or water absorption, tests.




14. Marking

14.1 The following particulars relating to products made in accordance with thisBritish Standard shall be clearly marked on the delivery note, invoice,manufacturers or suppliers certificate or brochure relating to a consignment

of products :(vi) The name trademark or other means of identification of the manufacturingplant.

(vii) The number and date of this British Standard, i.e. BS 7263 : part 1 : 1990,(viii) Type of binder constituent(s) used (see clause 3)(ix) Type of admixture(s) used (see clause 8)(x) For flags, the type and thickness in millimeters. e.g. A50.

Marking BS 7263 : Part 1on or in relation to a product represents amanufacturer‘s declaration of conformity, i.e. a claim by or on behalf of themanufacturer that the product meets the requirements of the standard. Theaccuracy of the claim is therefore solely the responsibility of the personmaking the claim. Such a declaration is not to be confused with third party

certificates of conformity, which may also be desirable.

iv IN-SITU CONCRETE KERBS

(I) In-situ concrete kerbs shall be laid by an approved automatic kerbing machineor by a method approved by the Engineer. The kerbs shall be dense withregular sides, arises and chamfers finished to a fine surface free from blowholes and dragging and shall be to the dimensions shown on the drawings.

(ii) The coarse and fine aggregates shall be as specified in the ConcreteSpecification with a ten per cent fines value for the coarse aggregate of not lessthan 50kN when tested in accordance with BS 812. The nominal maximum sizeof aggregate shall be 20 mm.

(iii) Concrete for kerbs shall have a 28-day cube strength of not less than 25.0N/sq.mm. The concrete mix shall contain not less than 280 kg or more than 540kg of sulphate-resisting cement per cubic meter. The ratio by mass of free waterto cement for saturated surface dry aggregate (the water/cement ratio) shall notexceed 0.50. The quantity of water used shall not exceed that required toproduce a dense concrete with suitable workability to obtain full compaction withthe plant used. The mix shall be designed by the Contractor who shall prepareand compact trial mixes in the presence of the Engineer using the same plant asthat proposed for the Works. The concrete mix and compaction plant shall besubject to the Engineer's approval. After approval, no variations shall be madeto mix proportions or to any constituents without the Engineer's prior consent.

(iii) Delivery, storage and batching of material and mixing, transporting and placingof concrete shall be as specified in the Concrete Specification. Immediately aftercompaction and for 7 days thereafter the kerbs shall be fully cured andprotected from drying out and against the harmful effects of weather, includingrain and rapid temperature changes. The method of protection shall be subjectto the Engineer's approval. The use of colored curing membranes will not bepermitted as the color of the kerbs after weathering shall be similar to that ofadjacent Precast units. Concrete not properly cured and protected will berejected and shall be removed from the Works.

(v) Kerbs shall remain firmly secure on the surface on which they are cast. Kerbsshall be cut whilst the concrete is green to form expansion/contraction joints at3 m centers. Joints shall be filled and sealed with materials approved by theEngineer.

(vi) The vertical alignment of the finished kerb shall not depart from the design level




by more than 3 mm and, at any point, the maximum deviation of the kerb in lineand level shall not be greater than 3 mm in 3 m.

4.0 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS:

4.1 Materials

(I) Cement: The cement used in the manufacture of Precast concretepaving blocks shall comply with the requirements of either BS12, 4027 or BS 146. The cement content of compactedconcrete shall not be less than 400 kg/m 3.

(ii) Aggregates: The aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring crushedaggregate to comply with BS 882. The salt contents shall notexceed the following limits:

Acid Soluble Chlorides: 0.06% by weight of Fine Aggregates 0.02% by weight of Coarse Aggregates

Acid Soluble Sulphates: 0.3% by weight of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

(iii) Water: The water shall be clean and free from any deleterious matterhaving pH value in the basic range (7-9).

The inorganic impurities shall not exceed the following limits:Total dissolved solids 2000 mg/literChlorides 250 mg/literSulphates 350 mg/liter

Alkali Carbonates & Bicarbonates 500 mg/liter(iv) Pigments: Any pigments used shall comply with BS 1014

4.2 Dimensions & Tolerances (I) Standard rectangular blocks shall be manufactured with a nominallength of 200 mm and a nominal width of 100 mm. Alternative sizes and shapes

shall have a ratio of length to width on plan of not less than 11/2 or greater than

2 1/2; the width shall not be less than 80 mm or greater than 115 mm. Theminimum normal thickness for paving blocks of any size shall be 60 mm. Thepreferred nominal thickness shall be 60, 80 and 100 mm.(ii) All arises shall be clean, plane and of uniform dimension. Wearingsurface areas shall not be less than 70% of the plan area.

Tolerances: Length +/- 2 mmWidth +/- 2 mmThickness +/- 3 mm

4.3 Compressive Strength (I) The average compressive strength of the block on delivery when sampled and

tested in the manner described below, shall be not less than 49 N/sq. mm in wetconditions. No individual block strength shall fall below 40 N/sq. mm in wetconditions.

(ii) Correction factors for chamfers and thickness shall be :

___________________________________________________________________Block Thickness Correction Factors

___________________________________________________________________

Plain Block Chamfered Block

60/65 1.00 1.0680 1.12 1.18100 1.18 1.24




4.4 Sampling Blocks Two blocks shall be drawn from each group of 1000 blocks for sampling, 10 blocksevery designated 5000 block section or part thereof in a consignment. All samples shallbe clearly marked at the time of sampling in such a way that the designated section orpart thereof and the consignment represented by the sample, are clearly defined.

4.5 Test for Compressive Strength

The sample specimens shall be tested in a wet condition after being stored for at least24 hours in water maintained at a temperature of 27 Deg.C +/- 3 Deg.C. Before thespecimens are submerged in water, the necessary area shall be determined as follows:

(a) Where possible, the plan area or the wearing surface area shall be calculated bymultiplying the length by the width.

(b) Alternatively the plan area or the wearing area shall be calculated by cutting outshapes of cardboard and weighing it to the nearest 0.01 g.

As = 20000 msm

Where As = Area of block (sq. mm)ms = Mass of cardboard shape matching test block

(g); the block shall be placed wearing surfaceuppermost on the cardboard.

m = Mass of 200 x 100 mm cardboard rectangle (g)cut from the same cardboard.

In case of chamfer or radius, the width of chamfer or radius shall be measured andmarked on the cardboard shape. This shape shall then be cut out accurately andweighed for calculation of the wearing surface area. Plywood, nominally 4 mm thick,shall be used as packing between the upper and lower faces of the specimen and the

machine platens, and these boards shall be larger than the specimen by a margin of atleast 5 mm at all points. Fresh packing shall be used for each specimen tested.The load shall be applied without shock and increased continuously at a rate ofapproximately 15 N/sq.mm. per minute until no greater load can be sustained. Themaximum load applied to the specimen shall be recorded. The strength shall beexpressed to the nearest 0.1 N/sq.mm.

4.6 Test for Water Absorption

Blocks shall be tested for water absorption in accordance with BS 1881. Blocks shall bedeemed acceptable provided that the maximum absorption does not exceed:a) 2% after 10 mins.b) 5% after 24 hours

4.7 Certificate of Compliance(I) This certificate is to be provided by the manufacturer at the time of sale as

peritem no.12 of BS 6073

5.0 PAVERS (I) Multi-colored clay brick pavers shall be as specified elsewhere in the Contract

documents.

6.0 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING SLABSSamples of paving shall be submitted to the Engineer showing the color, pattern, andsurface finish etc., as required. The mix and method of production shall be stated andany change proposed to the paving after approval will necessitate re-submission andfurtherapproval.




Paving shall be to the shapes and sizes shown on the drawings. They shall be cast fromMix A sulphate resisting concrete and pressed or vibrated to give a dense, well-finishedmaterial. Undersides of paving shall be grooved or otherwise finished to provide a goodkey. Curing of the paving shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.The sub-base shall be prepared in accordance with the Engineer's instructions. The slab

shall be laid firmly on the sand bed and tamped into position with a pavior's maul. Careshall be taken to ensure that the slabs do not rock and are laid as closely together aspossible but with maximum gap of 3 mm. The joints between the concrete slabs shall befinished carefully brushing in sand grout as soon as possible after the paving slabs arelaid. All surplus grout shall be carefully cleaned from the surface of the paving, kerbs, etcas the works proceed.

The slabs shall be unbounded and laid to a regular grid as shown on the drawings or asdirected by the Engineer. The slabbing shall be laid so that the edge abutting the kerbsshall slightly project (3 mm maximum) above the top face of the kerb. Where necessary,the concrete slabs shall be cut to size and fitted against kerbs, surface boxes andconstructions. Cutting will be carefully carried out by mechanical means to true faces.Where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall fill in narrow gaps and surrounds to

surface boxes and obstructions with mix A concrete to the same thickness as the slabsand bedding. The in-situ concrete strips shall not be greater than 150 mm wide and theconcrete slab shall be properly rammed and trowelled smooth and flush with adjoiningslabs.

7.0 IN-SITU CONCRETE PAVING In-situ concrete paving shall be Mix B. Reinforcement shall be as shown on thedrawings. Samples shall be provided of the surface finishes specified when requested bythe Engineer.

8.0 PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION

8.1 General(Reference to block in this section shall refer to clay paver or concrete block unlessstated otherwise).

a) Concrete block surfacing shall consist of Precast blocks on a bedding course 50 mmthick laid on road-base on sub-grade, if the sub-grade cannot achieve the required CBRvalue, a 200 mm thick sub-base layer shall be provided, in footings the road base shallbe replaced with sub-base naturally occurring materials.

b) Sub-grade shall consist of approved granular material compacted to produce a minimumlaboratory CBR value of 10% at 95% of the maximum dry density achieved as cited inBS 1377 after soaking for 96 hours.

c) Sub-base material shall be type 1 or type 2 as defined below. The type to be used shallbe as shown on the drawings or instructed by the Engineer.




Type 1 material shall be crushed rock or similar hard material, or naturally occurring gravel. Thematerials shall comply with the following grading :

______________________________________________________________________BS Sieve Size, mm Type 1 Type 2

____________________________________________________________________

Percentage by Percentage by

weight passing weight passingsquare mesh square mesh

______________________________________________________________________75 100 10037.5 85 - 100 85 - 10010 40 - 70 45 - 705 25 - 45 25 - 850.6 8 - 22 8 - 450.075 0 - 10 0 - 10

______________________________________________________________________

The total sulphate content (as SO3), as determined by Method 9 Acid soluble sulphate

BS 812, part 118 and 117 respectively shall not exceed 1% by weight. The total chloridecontent (as C1) shall not exceed 0.5% by weight. The materials passing at 0.425 mmsieve shall have a plasticity index not exceeding 6.

d) Sub-base materials shall be spread evenly and compacted to obtain a well-boundsurface finish; loose or segregated areas will be made good by addition of fines or byreplacement of the materials as directed. Compaction shall be carried out by approvedplant operating on the material at an approved moisture content until a dry density of notless than 95% of the maximum achieved as per BS 1377, Parts 4&9 is attained. Thelaboratory CBR value shall be a minimum of 30% at 95% of the laboratory maximum drydensity (or higher approved density) after soaking for 96 hours. The finished surface ofthe sub-base shall be true to line and level within a tolerance of +/- 20 mm of the levelsshown on the drawings.Road base material shall be approved natural gravel, crushed rock or other approvedmaterial complying with one of the following grading.

______________________________________________________________________BS Sieve Size, mm Type 1 Type 2

______________________________________________________________________Percentage by Percentage byweight passing weight passingsquare mesh square mesh

______________________________________________________________________50 100 10037.5 90 - 100 95 - 10020 90 - 80 70 - 9210 40 - 60 50 - 705.00 25 - 30 35 - 552.36 15 - 30 26 - 440.425 5 - 18 10 - 230.075 3 - 9 3 - 8

______________________________________________________________________

The fraction passing the 0.075 mm sieves shall not exceed two third of the fractionpassing the 0.425 mm sieve. The material shall conform with selected gradingthroughout the Contract.




e) Road base material shall have physical properties, which do not exceed the followingtests values.

_______________________________________________________________Limit Standard

______________________________________________________________________Liquid Limit 25% max. BS 1377, Part 2

Linear Shrinkage 3 max. BS 1377, Test 4Plasticity 6 max. BS 1377, Part 2Los Angeles Abrasion 40 max. ASTM C535/C131Chloride content (as Cl) 0.5% max. BS812, Part 117Sulphate content (as SO3) 1% max. BS812, Part 118Test for Organic materials 0.2% max. ASTMC 40Compaction Test(Modified Proctor) - ASTM D 1557

______________________________________________________________________

The sand equivalent shall not be less than 45%, ASTM D 2419.Road base material other than natural gravel shall be crushed and mixed by approvedmechanical plant to produce the specified grading.

Water required to adjust the moisture shall be added at the mixer. The moisture contentmay be adjusted to allow for evaporation losses during transportation and spreading.Mixed material shall be removed from the mixer immediately and transported directly toits ultimate location.The material shall be spread evenly, segregation shall be made good by replacing withproperly graded material as directed.If natural gravel is used, water necessary to adjust the moisture content shall be addedduring laying by plant equipped with a sprinkler bar to give an even spread of water overthe width of the pass.The road base shall be compacted by approved plant to a dry density which shall be notless than 100% of the maximum dry density as determined by BS 1377 or such higherpercentage as may be required to satisfy the minimum CBR requirement. Thelaboratory CBR value shall be minimum of 80% after soaking for 96 hours.

The compaction plant and method shall be proven by trial at the commencement of theworks. Compaction trials shall be carried out at varying moisture content. The weights,types and number of passes of compaction plant shall be varied to determine theoptimum compaction effort. The final levels of the road base shall be within +/- 10 mm ofthe theoretical levels.The road base shall be mechanically swept or cleaned with compressed air to removeloose material and to leave a tightly knit close textured surface, which will not allowpenetration of laying course.




f) The testing requirements for pavement layers are as listed in the following tables.

(I) Laboratory tests to monitor the consistency of the approved material during construction. _________________________________________________________________Layer : Sub-base and Road-base Frequency of Test

(not less than one test per...)

_________________________________________________________________TestMaximum dry density 1500 C.M.

Optimum moisture contentGradingPlasticity IndexLinear ShrinkageCBRSulphate ContentChloride Content

__________________________________________________________________

(ii) In-situ tests to confirm that the required degree of compaction is being achieved duringconstruction.

__________________________________________________________________

Layer: Sub-base and Road-base Frequency of Test(not less than one test per...)

__________________________________________________________________Dry density 500 m 2

__________________________________________________________________

Tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1377, using 4.5 kg rammer methodswhere applicable. Minimum number of field density tests shall be 3 per unit as indicated

in ASTM D 797 and D 75. This size of lot and unit shall be determined by the Engineer.g) The laying course shall consist of clean sand with a practical size of 0.5 mm containing

not more than 3% silt plus clay by weight. The sand shall be obtained from a singlesource, allowed to drain, before use and covered to minimize moisture changes.

Acid soluble sulphate and chloride contents shall not exceed 0.3% and 0.5% by weightrespectively. Tests shall be carried out to confirm achievement of these requirements atthe rate of one set of tests for each 1000 m 2 in accordance with BS 812, Part 118 andPart 117 respectively.The profile of the laying course before compaction shall be similar to that of the finishedsurface. The maximum deviation from the design levels shall be +/- 5 mm. The layingcourse shall be placed to a level, which takes into account the compaction, which occursduring vibration of the blocks, the amount of this compaction shall be determined bytrials prior to commencement of surfacing.

h) The surface course shall consist of approved pre-cast concrete blocks. The concreteconstituents shall comply with the requirements of the Concrete Specification givenelsewhere Cement shall be SRPC. Additional requirements are contained in thefollowing Clauses of this Section.

I) Concrete block shall be of Precast hydraulically pressed type of the size and shapespecified or indicated on the Contract drawings.Each load of Precast concrete and paving blocks must be accompanied with thefollowing documents :I) A Certificate confirming that this particular consignment complies with relevant

standard specifications and that all necessary tests have been conducted.ii) An identification trademark inscribed on each block pallet fixed by the producer.iii) A certificate from the manufacturer, stating the category and dimension of

blocks and the average compression strength of the subject lot.




j) 20 samples from each consignment of upto 10,000 blocks will be selected which theContractor shall bring for testing characteristics strength and dimensional accuracy at atesting center to the approval of the Engineer.

If the parameters of the specification are consistently met over the first 3 months of fullproduction the frequency of block testing will subsequently be relaxed to 20 random

blocks from each consignment of upto 20,000 blocks. If any of the 20 test blocks do notcomply with the requirements for compressive strength and dimensional accuracy thewhole consignment may be rejected.

k) The testing machine shall be of suitable capacity and capable of applying the requiredload at the rate specified and shall comply with the relevant requirements of BS 1610and BS 1181.

The average compressive strength of the 20 blocks on delivery when sampled andtested as specified shall not be less than 48 N/m 2 in wet condition.

The thickness of each sample shall be measured to the nearest 1 mm at 4 differentpoints using steel calipers. The value of thickness measured shall have a maximum

deviation of +/- 2 mm from the specified dimensions.l) Blocks may be required to be tested for water absorption. The test shall be based on

that specified in BS 1881, Part 122, and the maximum acceptable limits for waterabsorption shall be :

2.4% absorbed after 10 minutes.5% absorbed after 24 hours.

The acceptable limits for water absorption may be required to be varied to achieve theminimum absorption compatible with the aggregate approved for use in the pavingblocks.

m) The color of blocks shall be uniform and as detailed on the drawings or as directed.Samples of each different color shall be submitted for approval. The Contractor shall beresponsible for any change in the shade of the same color and may be required to

replace the discolored tiles after laying even during maintenance period.n) Block laying shall commence right angle to the main pavement axis starting at one end

of the area. The paving blocks shall be laid in a herringbone pattern at 45 o to the mainpavement axis, or in any other pattern as required with no extra cost.

Blocks shall be laid on black sand cushion so that blocks already laid are not disturbed.Blocks shall be placed to fit closely together, the width of joints shall not exceed 3 mm.Special edge blocks shall be used on all edges, which are parallel to or perpendicular tothe main pavement axis. Where the shape or dimensions of paved areas preclude theuse of special blocks on all edges, cut blocks shall be used. Blocks shall be cut to suit,using a mechanical block splitter or bolster chisel. In-situ concrete shall not be used tomake up to edge restraints.

o) The blocks shall be compacted to the required levels, using an approved plate vibratoras each of 100 m 2 of paving is laid and checked.

The plate vibrator shall have a plate area of 0.2 to 0.3 and a compaction force of 9 to 16KN.

Joints shall be filled by brushing in fine dry sand with a particle size of 0 to 2 mm and amaximum sulphate content (as SO3) of 0.5% by weight. A further pass of the platevibrator shall be made in each direction. The finished surface level shall be within 5 mmof the design level and the maximum deviation within the compacted surface, measuredby a 3 m straight edge, shall not exceed 5 mm. The level of any two adjacent blocksshall not differ by more than 2 mm, in one meter.

8.2 Bond Pattern

(I) Precast paving blocks used for vehicular carriageways will be laid to aherringbone pattern. The direction of the pattern shall be maintained throughout




the total area to be paved. Any change of direction will require the approval ofthe Engineer.

(ii) The laying course shall be laid to compacted thickness of 50 mm plus asurcharge necessary to provide the specified final bed thickness after vibrationof the block paving. During laying the sand shall be carefully screeded to asmooth surface to receive the paving blocks. No compaction of the sand layer

and no traffic including pedestrian is to be permitted before the blocks are laid.

(iv) The profile of the laying course shall be similar to that of the finished surface.The maximum deviation from the design levels shall be + 10 mm. The edgerestraints to the paved area shall be laid in advance of the laying course and allobstacles within the area, such as manhole covers, shall be constructed to thecorrect finished levels.

(v) The paving blocks shall be laid on the sand-laying course in such a manner asnot to disturb the blocks already laid. Each block shall be placed firmly againstits neighbour so that they fit closely together.

(vi) The joints between blocks shall not exceed 3 mm.

(vii) Where blocks do not fit at the edge, restraints or other obstructions such asmanholes or upstands the gaps shall be filled using cut blocks. Blocks shall becut using a mechanical block splitter or saw. Any damaged or broken blocksshall not be laid. Any blocks damaged during compaction shall be replaced atthe discretion of the Engineer.

(vii) Due allowance shall be made in the final levels of the base for the compactionof the laying course above, which occurs when the paving blocks are beingvibrated. The amount of surcharge required for the laying course shall bedetermined by site trials prior to the commencement of the actual surfacing andshall be repeated when the source of sand supply or a change of weatherconditions occurs.

8.3 Compaction

(I) After each 20 sq., or such area that has been agreed with the Engineer, hasbeen laid, the blocks shall be compacted to the required levels using a platevibrator.

(ii) The plate vibrator shall have a plate area of 0.20 to 0.35 sq. and have acompaction force of 12-24 kN and a frequency of approximately 75-100Hz.

(iii) A minimum of two passes of the plate vibrator shall be made in each direction,i.e. at 90 degrees to each other. Vibration shall continue until no furthercompaction of the sand layer is apparent. Fine dry sand with particle size of 0.3mm shall then be brushed over the paving, and further passes of the plate

vibrator made in each direction until the sand is no longer absorbed into the joints.

(iv) The plate vibrator shall not pass closer than 1 m to a temporarily unrestrainededge during laying.

(v) No paving shall be left uncompacted overnight except for the one metrostrip at the temporarily uncompacted edge, which shall be covered andprotected from rain.

8.4 Accuracy

(I) On completion, the finished surface level shall be within 5 mm of the designlevel and the maximum deviation within the compacted surface, measured by a3 m straight edge, shall not exceed 5 mm. The level of any two adjacent blocksshall not differ by more than 2 mm. Any areas of paving which do not complywith these tolerances shall be removed, and sand laying course lifted and relaid




and the paving blocks relaid to the correct levels.

(ii) Dimensional accuracy, uniformity of joint gaps, alignment and squareness shallbe checked after paving the first three rows of blocks and thereafter at regularintervals. If joints begin to open, the blocks shall be knocked together using ahide mallet.

(iii)

9.0 SUBMISSIONS

The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's data on the Precast concrete blockpavers together with the instructions for all manufactured materials and products.The Contractor shall also submit a sample for approval of color, texture and generalcondition.

Any change in aggregates, admixtures, pigments or mix design will require a re-submission.




SECTION 16: LIFTS

ELEVATOR INSTALLATION

REQUIREMENTS :

The elevator shall be supplied and installed by an approved manu facturer to consultant‘sapproval.

The work will be carried out concurrently with the work of the Main Contractor‘s Contract andthe Main Contractor will be required to carry out certain work in connection with the SpecialistSub-contract.

BUILDER'S WORK AND ATTENDANCE

The main contractor is to allow for all builders work as per requirements of the Elevator Sub-contractor listed elsewhere in connection with the elevator installation.

The Main Contractor shall also provide normal attendance including all usual facilities for theexecution of the Specialist Sub-contract.

AS-FITTED DRAWINGS AND SERVICE MANUALS

On completion of the elevator installation and at least one week prior to the date of inspection,the contractor shall hand over to the Engineer as-fitted elevator installation drawings. Twosets of instruction manuals for general running and maintenance and repair are to beprovided.

GENERAL

The contractor shall supply, install test and commission and hand over the complete elevatorinstallation as specified with the applicable codes as BS/EN-81 or JIS.

The general requirements of the elevators and particular specifications are given in theSchedules at the end of the specification.

The Contractor shall commence the electrical installation from the circuit breakers provided inthe basement for this purpose. All the works shall be co-ordinated with the other Contractorsprior to installation, so that there will be no areas of incompatibility.

The elevator system shall be equipped with traction machinery and associated tractionequipment, elevator cars, solid state control systems and all other equipment and accessoriesrequired to provide a complete, modern, durable and efficient vertical transport system.

All the electrical equipment shall be compatible with the available electrical system of thebuilding, as specified under Electrical Section.

All the components shall be selected to provide satisfactory operation under prevailingenvironmental conditions at site.

The lift contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of the completed lift until such timethat the last taking over certificate for the whole of the works under main contract issued bythe Engineer. The lift contractor is responsible for maintenance of lifts during 12 monthsdefects liability period. Maintenance shall include for cleaning, oiling and inspection of theelevator and all the associated equipment at periods of one month and to include for allemergency calls throughout the 24 hours of the day.




A monthly inspection sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer/Client immediately after eachmonthly inspection and cleaning and greasing.

The Contractor shall also give notice that any fault notified will receive immediate attention onthe day of the notification.

CAPACITY

The Elevator shall have a safe carrying load inclusive of weight of complete car cable andropes and in accordance with the attached particular specification.

SPEED

The rated speed of the elevators shall be as specified in the particular specification.

ELECTRIC ELEVATOR

TRACTION MACHINE

The elevator shall be equipped with variable voltage and variable frequency controlledgearless motors , having stepless, smooth speed time characteristics.

The traction machines shall be of PM (Permanent Magnet) type, designed to meet the severeservice condition encountered in the elevator operation. No structural supports shall beprovided for elevator machine, which shall be supported by the guide rails, independent ofbuilding structure. All vertical elevator reaction loads to be supported by guide rails such thatno load stress to the building structure.

All rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ensure smooth running. Allthe rotating electrical machinery shall be fitted with microtherms, to provide overloadprotection and shall have built in double brakes.

MOTOR DRIVE

The variable voltage, variable frequency motor drive [VVVF] unit will control the motor speedusing a microprocessor.

The VVVF system will be provided with a converter which performs AC-to-DC conversion andan inverter which is designed to invert DC to three-phase variable voltage variable frequency

AC. The inverter will give an output of sinusoidal current with zero [0] through fifty [50] hertzby application of pulse width modulation technology.

The inverter will control voltage and frequency continuously and accurately in accordancewith speed command signal which is performed by a microprocessor in the elevator controller.

The VVVF drive unit will be capable of keeping the elevator service under the followingcondition:

Supply line voltage fluctuation: - 10% to +5% from the rated voltage.Frequency variation - + 2% from the rated frequency

The VVVF drive unit will be provided with contactors for removing the power from the motor ofthe traction machine. The contactors will open each time the car stops. The brake of thetraction machine will be applied while the contacts drop out.

A pulse rotary encoder will detect the actual speed of the car. The difference between thespeed command signal and the actual speed measured by the pulse rotary encoder will




Bright steel wire ropes with steel cores of adequate cross-section manufactured with afactor of safety of 12.

C) GOVERNOR ROPES

These shall be manufactured similar to hoisting ropes. The two ends shall be securely

linked to the car and attached to the safety gear operating level. The governor ropesshall be tensioned by a weight-loaded device located in the pit.

D) COUNTERWEIGHT

Cast iron blocks enclosed in a steel framework shall be provided to balance the weight ofthe car and the specified capacity.

E) BUFFERS

OIL type buffers shall be fitted in the hoistway pit beneath both car and the counterweight.These shall be securely mounted on continuous RS channels and correctly disposedrelative to the car and the counterweight.

The plunger shall be of mild steel, accurately machined and designed to provide very highsafety factor. A toughened rubber bumper shall be fitted to the top of the plunger towithstand the impact of the steel buffer plates mounted on the underside of the car andthe counterweight. An oil gauge shall be provided to check the oil level.

Spring type buffers shall be provided for speeds 60 MPM and below only.

TRAVELLING CABLES

The travelling cables shall be 450V/750V grade multi-core with stranded high conductivitycopper conductors, especially designed for elevator duty. These cables shall be properlysupported by retaining straps and individual cable clamps.

SAFETY EQUIPMENT

The gradual type safety system, comprising of a close loop roping system, over-speedcentrifugal governor, safety gear equipment etc. shall be provided.

The operation of the system shall be such that if the car overspeeds in the downwarddirection, the governor jaws shall trip, operating the safety gear. It shall, in sequence, cut offthe motor power supply, apply normal brakes and engage the safety gear gibs when the

safety gear gibs engage with the car guides. It shall apply a constant retarding force to bringthe car to a gradual and smooth stop within defined limits.

Re-setting of the safety devices shall be possible by moving the car in upward direction.

a) Over Travel

Over travel limit switches shall be provided at the top and bottom of the terminal landingsto disconnect the power supply and apply brakes to bring the car to safe stop position inthe event of an over travel in either direction.

b) Evacuation Devices

Provision shall be made to move the car electrically through the emergency access panelin the top floor to the nearest landing in either direction to facilitate evacuation of




passengers during a power failure. No mechanical devices like brake release rod etc. areacceptable.

c) Fireman Emergency Operation

Fire Emergency Operation Button enclosed in a breaking glass shall be installed nearthe entrance on the main landing and shall operate any one of the elevator underconditions of emergency, in the event of fire.

When the Fireman Emergency Call Button is pressed, it shall immediately disconnect theelevator under normal automatic operation and the car shall return to the main landing. Itshall not register any hall calls, so that the passengers will not wait for the elevator. Thecar shall then only operate on the attendant operation and it shall start registering the hallcalls.

ELEVATOR CAR

The size of the car, interior design and decorations, ceiling and lighting and other facilitiesshall be as called for in the schedule, under the Interior Design work package. The Liftcontractor is to advise on the max. weight factor that can be acceptable for these finishes.

The car shall be of rigid steel framework with sound isolation designed and manufactured allin accordance with relevant Sections.

The operating buttons and keys shall be as given in the relevant Section of the Specification.The following facilities shall be provided for each car, in addition to the items alreadyspecified.

a) Ventilation

Electric Ventilator mounted on car roof with proper vents to be provided.

b) Emergency Lighting

Self contained, non-maintained emergency light, with a trickle charger.

c) Emergency Exit

An Emergency Exit shall be provided on car roof. This door shall be able to open eitherinside or outside. A safety electrical switch shall be provided to prevent the cartravelling when this emergency exit is open.

d) Intercommunication System

Intercommunication system between the car, main landing and the machine room.

e) Working Platform

A working platform shall be provided on the roof of the car.

f) Car and Landing Doors

The car and landing doors shall be fully automatic, two panel, automatic sliding doors.The TYPE AND finish of the doors shall be as specified in the Schedule.

g) Door Operator




The door operator shall be high speed heavy duty, with a VVVF controlled AC Motor. Theinverter shall include high speed switching device which inturn shall provide a smoothsine curve of output current to assure smooth, quite and precise door control. Theopening and closing speeds of the doors shall be adjustable. The landing and car doorsshall operate in full synchronism. Advance door opening during car's approach to alanding could be used to speed up passenger transfer.

h) Safety Features

Emergency unlocking key from landing side for evacuation and maintenance work.

Manual opening of the doors from inside the car, within landing zones during powerfailure.

Full door height safety-edge device in the leading edge of the car doors to reverse thedoors when there is any obstruction for closing.

Electrical interlock to operate in conjunction with the car doors, so that elevator cannot

operate unless doors are closed.

Overload indicator with buzzer. If the car is overloaded it shall prevent from starting.The blinking overload indicator and the sounding buzzer shall signal the overloadcondition to the passengers.

Emergency light with trickle charger.

TESTING

On completion, a thorough test of the elevators under the working conditions shall be carriedout in the presence of and to the approval of the Engineer.

All materials used must be of the highest quality and the best of their respective kinds andmust comply with the relevant. All weights necessary to carry out the full load and overloadtests must be provided by the Contractor and removed after use.

The tests will include the following:

No load current and voltage readings both on ‗Up‘ and ‗Down‘ Circuits.

Full load current and voltage readings both on ‗Up‘ and ‗Down‘ Circuits.

One and quarter load current and voltage readings both on ‗Up‘ and ‗Down‘ Circuits.

Stalling current and voltage and time taken to operate overload.

Overload protection.

Gate sequence relays, if provided and installed.

All interlocks.

Collective control and priority sequences, if installed.

Safety gear mechanism.

Speeds on Up and Down travel with loadings and empty.




Door contacts.

Final terminal stopping device.

Normal terminal stopping device.

Insulation and earth continuity.

OPERATING PANELS AND INDICATORS

a) Car Operating Panel (To be provided to the full height of the car and located on the sidewall)

The car operating panel of each elevator shall contain the following:

Operating buttons numbered to correspond to the landing served with acknowledgelight for each button.

Emergency call button.

Door Open and Door Close Buttons.

Intercom Station.

Overload indicating lamp with buzzer.

b) Landing Position Indicator

Car position indicator shall be provided for each car, in the car and over the mainlanding entrance of each elevator. The top floor shall have the inspection andemergency access panel provided as a combined unit with the hall button. As the

elevator travels through the hoistway, its position shall be indicated by the illuminationof the numeral/letter corresponding to the landing at which the elevator is stopped orpassing. Indicators shall be properly designed for better recognition with colour filtersto provide good contrast. Travel direction indicators shall also be included in thisindicator.

c) Push Buttons and Indicator for Landing

1) Up and Down call buttons with indicator lights to show that the call has beenregistered.

2) Hall Indicators/Call Buttons to be provided as specified in the schedule.

3) Fire Alarm call button in a break-glass fixture at the main landing.

NOTE: The contractor/manufacturer is to submit their model/types for operating / indicatorpanels specification, being aware of this type of project.

CAR AND LANDING SILLS

Sills manufactured as specified in the schedules shall be fitted at every landing entrance andon the car platform for the entire width of the door opening.

These sills shall be with integral grooves to act as guide for the bottom of the door panels.The car sill shall be securely fitted to the car platform and the landing sills securely fitted tothe entrance threshold. These sills shall be flushed with the finished floor level.




The sills shall be designed to provide adequate strength to support the loads excerting onthem, in addition to the safety and decorative entrance plate appearance.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF ELEVATORS

General wiring throughout the installation shall be carried out as specified in the Electrical

Specifications. GI trunking shall be used wherever possible instead of multiple conduits. GIconduits and flexible conduits shall be used between trunking and apparatus.

Earthing of all the equipments shall be carried out as specified in Electrical specification andas per IEE Regulations.

Distribution Equipment shall contain all protection equipment for motors and circuits. Theseshall include overload protection, short-circuit protection, single phasing protection, etc. asappropriate.

FOLLOWING SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE MAIN CONTRACTOR AS PERREQUIREMENT OF ELEVATOR CONTRACTORS.

1. Related builder's works, including wire mesh partition, shaft lighting and ladder in pit,rail guard/mesh/safety chain in the machine room.

2. Permanent 3 Phase 415V 50 HZ and 1 PH 240V 50HZ TPN + SPN circuit breakers ofrequired capacity etc., as required by the lift supplier

3. Hoisting beam/hooks in the hoistway slab.

4. Assistance in fixing steel separator beams, if required, (separator beams will beprovided by lift manufacturer), in between hoistway at approx. every 2.0 mtrs interval.

5. Assistance in fixing steel sill projections/angle support at all landings sills to be provided

by the lift manufacturers.

6. Provision of conduits with draw wire between elevator shaft and security/reception forelevator interphone/supervisory panel.

7. Sufficient weatherproof lockable storage accommodation to store the elevator materialsat ground floor near elevator shaft.

8. Normally open free sensing contact(s) with wiring from fire alarm panel to elevatorshaft, if automatic recalling of elevators during fire is required.

9. Supply and installation of tubular free standing scaffolding to our requirement inside theelevator shafts with working platform and removal thereof.

10. Cranage facility for unloading lift materials from containers and shifting the same tovarious floors.

11. Temporary power supply for installation and testing purposes with breakers, as requiredby lift supplier.

12. Interior finishes in the lift cabin or as mentioned in the particular specifications.




TENDER RETURN BIDS

The following is required within each contractor‘s tender bid for the above scope of w orks.

i) Full and detailed programme for manufacturing, delivery, installation andcommissioning of the works.

ii) Detailed record of manufacturer‘s warranties/guarantees etc.

iii) Pre-qualification pertaining to relevant projects of this type and nature carried out, alongwith suitable references.

iv) All relevant material specification/proposals for exposed finishes (indicator panels etc).

v) Project specific method statement.

vi) QA/QC Plan and Procedures.

vii) Copy of Trade Licence.

viii) Project H + S Plan.

ix) Tender Clarifications, where applicable.

x) Confirmation of any additional interface requirements deemed necessary to allow a fulland complete installation.




SECTION 17: POWDER COATING

1. PRELIMINARY INFORMATION / REQUIREMENTS

1.1 Requirements

The Powder Coating is specified by Performance. The Main Contractor shall:

a) Be responsible for the fabrication/coating of Powder Coated materials andassociated components/accessories shown on the Drawings and to meet therequirements of this Performance Specification.

b) Be responsible for the final selection of materials, coating thickness and types, allin accordance with specified standards detailed herein.

c) Be responsible for ensuring that finishes meet the standards specified herein andhave been independently inspected and certified.

d) Provide all submittals as specified herein.

e) Be responsible for ensuring fitness for purpose of all materials, components,systems, methods of installation etc. to meet the performance criteria specifiedherein.

1.2 Health & Safety

a) The Main Contractor sha ll ensure that he complies with the latest ‗Code ofConstruction Safety Practi ce‘, the Health and Safety section of the ContractDocuments and ensure that full consideration is given to the health andsafety of operatives when manufacturing, handling and installing the Works.

1.3 Standards

a) Comply with the latest edition of all relevant standards and provideindependently certified evidence that all specified variants of componentscomply with specified requirements.

2. TYPE(S) OF POWDER COATINGS

2.1 Location:The location of the Powder Coatings is defined on the Drawings.

2.2 Type 1: Powder CoatingsFinish is to be an exterior super durable polyester powder coating, comprising of

materials/properties that provide colour stability, gloss retention, corrosion

protection withuniform flow and finish and UV and humidity resistance.

Powder coatings to be Jotun PE-SDF or equal and approved. Powder coatings to beapproved by the engineer, prior to contractor commencing scope of works.

3. DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

3.1 Significant Surfaces

a. Supply drawings with the components to be coated with Powder Coatedfinishes.

b. Clearly mark which surfaces are the 'significant surfaces'




i. All visible surfaces

ii. Other surfaces that require a 'full coating'

3.2 Jigging Points, Venting and Drainage Holes

a) No areas of uncoated metal will be accepted on 'significant surfaces under anycircumstances.

b) In any area where coating is carried out after machining, satisfactory jiggingpoints must be agreed in advance between the fabricator and applicator,

c) Provide pre-treatment and galvanizing venting and drain holes where necessary.

d) Obtain agreement of all parties for the location of all jigging, vent and drain holes.

e) Wherever possible ensure drainage holes are in unseen areas, but in positions togive the most satisfactory result and ensure holes are in areas that will notweaken joints, sections or assemblies.

3.3 Appearance

a) Ensure all visible finished surfaces are free from blisters, craters, pinholes orscratches when viewed with normal or corrected vision from a distance of 1metre.

b) The quality of finish must be consistent and in accordance with AAMA 2604-98 4.2. A slight degree of ‗Orange Peel‘ may be acceptable, subject toapproval from the Engineer.

3.4 Coating Thickness

a) Ensure the Powder coating has a ‘Minimum‘ c ontinuous film thickness onall specified surfaces of:

I. 60 microns on Aluminium,II. 60 microns on Galvanized steel, unless specified otherwise.

III. The Maximum Coating thickness should not exceed 100 Micron.

3.5 Design Life

The Powder Coatings shall be designed to withstand weather conditions takingaccount of extremes of wind, temperature, solar radiation, hail, rain, sandstorms

and all other relevant factors. The expected service life of the Powder Coatings isa minimum of 20 years. The contractor shall provide a back to back guaranteefrom the applicator and manufacturer for 25 years.

A back to back (signed) guarantee between applicator and manufacturer of thecoating shall be required.

3.6 General Movement

a) The Powder Coatings shall be applied to withstand all movements of the buildingstructure under all design loads or combination of loads without damage orreduction in the performance of the Coatings.

3.7 Thermal Movementa) All components shall be designed to resist thermal movement resulting from the




maximum and minimum surface temperature differentials occurring:

I. The surface differential temperature range for components of thePowder Coatings shall be taken as 10 C and 70 oC.

3.8 Moisture Movement

The Powder Coatings shall withstand movement without permanent deformationor any reduction in the specified performance:

a) Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting fromvariations in the moisture content of the air either inside or outside thebuilding.

b) Due to the presence of condensation on the surface of coated materials.

3.9 Service Life of Components

a) The service life of all primary components of the works shall be at least equal tothe Design Life as specified above.

3.10 Local Factors

a) The Main Contractor shall have visited the site to familiarise himself with localrequirements. Local micro climatic conditions shall be taken into account andgrades of materials assessed as suitably durable for the location shall beselected.

b) An assessment of micro climatic conditions shall be made with due allowance forany factors likely to have an adverse effect upon materials intended for the workscontract. More appropriate materials shall be substituted if adverse effects arepredicted.

3.11 SafetyThe finished surfaces of the Powder Coatings in all accessible internal andexternal areas shall not:

a) Have any irregularities capable of inflicting personal injury.

4. MATERIALS

4.1 Materials to be Coated

a) Ensure the substrates to be Powder Coated are made from materials to therelevant British Standard(s).

b) Ensure the materials and alloys are all in a suitable condition for theapplication of Powder Coatings and are able to withstand curingtemperatures of approx. 200 degrees Centigrade for a minimum period of 10minutes .

4.2 Conformity Requirements

a) Ensure the product and its application conforms to all relevantrequirements, restrictions and recommendations of:

i. AAMA 2604-98 (Aluminium)

ii. BS 6497 (Galvanized Steel)




iii. QUALICOAT Class 2 Certificate No. P-0440

iv. British Coating Federation: Code of safe practice.

5. FINISHES

5.1 Preparation Generally

All components/materials are to be chemically pre-treated prior to application ofthe Powder Coating finish to promote adhesion and prevent undercutcorrosion.(To the powder coaters recommendations) see Jotun Powder CoatingsRecommended Process & Process Control Requirements MTI 96-62 GB 02 / 99

5.2 Protective Coating Of Mild Steel Framing Sections/Sheet material

Prior to Polyester powder coating. All surfaces shall be:

a) Hot dip galvanized to BS 729, or

b) Treated with an appropriate equivalent coating to BS 5493.

5.3 Protective Coating Of Mild Steel Mechanical Fixings

All surfaces shall be:

a) Hot dip galvanised to BS 729, or BS EN 10142, 3+7 for pre-galvanized sheet – (unpassivated).

b) No uncoated exposed aluminium surfaces or edges.

c) Galvanized coatings on metalwork to be prepared in accordance withmanufacturers recommendations prior to PPC coating.

6. FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

6.1 Generally

a) Apply the Powder Coatings in accordance with this PerformanceSpecification and Detailed Drawings. All works shall be true to detail withcontinuous profiles which shall be free from marks, defects, flaws, steps,waves, or damage of any nature.

b) Main Contractor shall employ competent Powder Coating applicators as

approved by the coating manufacturer. Records of their experience are to beprovided to the Engineer. Applicators should be approved by PowderManufacturers list to be supplied.



6.2 Metalwork and Coatings/Finishes Generally

a) For each material or component, the total quantity shall be obtained from thesame supplier or manufacturer unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.




b) Where metallic super durable powder coatings are required, a higher level ofapplication control, and inspection is recommended. Refer to Jotun PowderCoatings guidelines when applying metallic coatings.

6.3 Protection

a) All fabrications and assembled units shall be protected against damage,corrosion and disfigurement during handling, installation and subsequent siteoperations.

b) Protective coverings shall be applied before dispatch to site and shall not bedetrimental to Powder Coated products, finishes or installation procedures. SeeJotun Powder Coatings Technical Manual.

6.4 Handling And Storage

a) Do not deliver to site any Powder Coated products and units which cannot beinstalled immediately or unloaded into a suitable, well protected storage area.

7. TESTING

7.1 Testing of Finishes: Product test data shall be provided by the CoatingApplicator as follows:

I. Test for Adhesion - in accordance with DIN-EN ISO 2409-2mm, BS3900 Part E6

II. Test for Flexibility - in accordance with DIN-EN ISO 1519, Qualicoat Class 2Section 2-7

III. Film Hardness - in accordance with DIN-EN ISO 2815, AAMA 2604-98 Part 7.3

IV. Impact Resistance - in accordance with ECCTA T5 (1985) , AAMA 2604-98 Part7.5

V. Surface Spread of Flame - in accordance with BS 476: Part 7.VI. Weather Resistance - in accordance with ASTM G90-94 (B), Natural Weathering

VII. Salt Spray Resistance – in accordance with DIN 50021 ISO 9227, 3000hrs saltspray to AAMA 2604-98 7.8.2

VIII. Sulphur Dioxide Resistance – in accordance with DIN 50018, 240hrs BS3900Part 7.8

IX. Humidity Resistance – in accordance with DIN 50017, 3000hrs to BS3900 PartF.2.

X. Artificial Weathering, 2000hrs QUVA .




SECTION 18: SEALANTS

1.0 PRELIMINARY INFORMATION / REQUIREMENTS

1.1 Requirements

The sealants specification is non-performance designated and contains generalmaterials and workmanship specifications to control the standard of materials andproducts.

The Main Contractor should:

a) Be responsible for the supply and installation of the Sealant to meet therequirements of this Specification and its performance criteria.

b) Co-ordinate the installation with that for all related works and accommodatethe specified movements and tolerances for structural elements as specifiedin the Structural Engineering Specifications.

c) Be responsible for ensuring that finishes meet the standards specified hereinand have been independently inspected and certified as specified.

d) Provide all submittals and samples as specified herein.

e) Be responsible for sealing all junctions to form a fully weathertight and airtightseal to meet the Specification criteria.

f) Be responsible for ensuring fitness for purpose of all materials and methodsof installation to meet the criteria specified herein.

1.2 Health & Safety

a) The Main Contractor should ensure that he complies with the latest ‗Code of Construction Safety Practice‘, the Health and Safety section of the ContractDocuments and ensure that full consideration is given to the health andsafety of operatives when manufacturing, handling and installing the Works.

1.3 Standards



This Specification is a general specification which must be read in conjunctionwith all drawings and specifications.

2.0 TYPE(S) OF SEALANT

2.1 Location

The location of the Sealant is defined on the drawings. Sealant types are to beselected by the Main Contractor in accordance with the criteria of thisspecification incorporating the manufacturers recommendations.Manufacture/range specified are intended to set out the performancerequirements, the tenderer has the also the option of costing from an or equaland approved source, however also providing a tender bid return based upon theselected ranges as mentioned:

2.2 TYPE A




Sonolastic NP1 ; as a single component, no sagaliphatic polyurethane with plus or minus 25 percentmovement capability for vertical and horizontal

joints.Manufacture- MBT – MIDDLE EAST / SonnebornCompliance- SONOLASTIC ASTM CY20, Types, Grade NS,

Class Class 25; Federal SpecificationsCAN/CFS329.B M87,Functions C-2-40-A-N and MCG-2-25-N CGSBQualification NO 51026 ANSI/UL263 4 hour fireresistance, Design Nos J9002014 and U9002037;USDA Compliant

Preparation- In accordance to the manufacturer data sheets and Application Method Statement

Colour- To Engineers Acceptance

2.3 TYPE BSonolastic NP2 ; Multiple component highperformance Polyurethane sealant with a plus or

minus movement of 50% for vertical and horizontal joints.

Manufacture- MBT – MIDDLE EAST / SonnebornCompliance- A Canadian Specification CAN/CGSB2-19.24-M80,

Sonolastic NP 2 : ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS,Class Classifications MC-2-A, CGSB QualificationNo. 81029

Colour- To Engineers Acceptance

2.4 TYPE CSonolastic 150 ; low modulus, high movement, fastcuring Sealant, with a plus or minus of + 100 to – 50for aluminum and wood frames, wet glazing.

Manufacture- MBT – MIDDLE EAST / SonnebornCompliance- Sealant Type MR : Silicone sealant

1. ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, uses NT< G,A,O.2. TT – S-0011543A (COM-NBS) Interim Federal Specification for

Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (for Caulking, Sealing, andGlazing in Buildings and other Structures)

3. USDA compliant4. Joint movement capability: plus or minus 25 percent.

Colour-To Engineers Acceptance

3.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Sealant performance, include the following:

All exterior joints shall be filled with self-expanding compriband.

Sealant will be non-chalking, non-cracking, and resistant to ultraviolet. Based onperformance the sealant will be non-fire hazard. Sealant shall be compatible foradhesion with Kynar finish, resin base paint, glass, stone, metal, ceramic tiles,anodised aluminium, galvanised steel and plastics such as polycarbonate andPVC etc. Bond width of the sealant shall be minimum 10mm. Fire-ResistiveJoint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, butnot less than that equalling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of theconstruction in which the joint occurs. Fire rated sealant will be provided aroundall HVAC/Mechanical/other services installation, where the same are penetratingfire rated walls.Backer rod, include the following:




General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; arecompatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and areapproved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on fieldexperience and laboratory testing.

Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining,nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of one of the materialsindicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth andotherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

Closed-cell polyethylene foam, non-absorbent to liquid water and gas, non-outgassing un unruptured state.

Proprietary, reticulated, closed-cell polymeric foam, nonoutgassing, with a densityof 40 kg/cu.m and tensile strength of 241 kPa.

Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended bysealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible jointfiller materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would resultin sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

3.1 Structural Requirements/Movements Generally

The Sealant shall be selected and installed to withstand all movements of thebuilding structure and elements under all design loads or combination of loadswithout damage or any reduction in the performance of the sealant.

3.2 Service Life

The sealant shall be selected to withstand weather conditions based on a 50 yearreturn period (from Meteorological data) taking account of extremes of wind,temperature, solar radiation, hail, rain, sandstorm and all other relevant factors.The expected service life is a minimum of 10 years.

3.3 Thermal Movement

All components should accommodate the thermal movement resulting from themaximum and minimum surface temperature differentials occurring:

a) The surface differential temperature range for components shall be taken as100C and 550C.

b) The sealant shall cater for all temporary and permanent conditions envisagedfor the works.

3.4 Moisture Movement

The Sealant shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or anyreduction in the specified performance:

a) Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting fromvariations in the moisture content of the air either inside or outside thebuilding.

4.0 MATERIALS




4.1 General Sealant

Shall be compatible with all contact products and finishes and be selected inaccordance with:

a) Silicone to BS 5889.

b) One part non-sag polyurethane sealant – Sonalastic NP1 from MBT to BS5215.

c) Two component polysulphide sealant – Masterflex 700 from MBT to BS 4254.

d) Two component gun grade polyurethane sealant – Sonalistic NP2 from MBTto BS 4254 or BS 5889.

4.2 Curtain Walling /Window joint Assembly Sealant

Joint assembly sealant shall be: Silicone to BS 5889, type A or B, neutral curingwhere in contact with or in close proximity to other products which may beadversely affected by acetoxy curing.

5.0 INSTALLATION

5.1 Generallya) Install the Sealant in accordance with this specification, the manufacturers

recommendations and Detailed Drawings. All works shall be true to detailwith continuous profiles which shall be free from marks, defects, flaws, steps,waves, or damage of any nature.

b) Installers shall employ competent operatives.



5.2 Suitability of Joints

Before commencing, check that:

a) Joint dimensions are within limits specified for the sealant.b) Surfaces are smooth and undamaged.

c) Preparatory work which must be done before assembly of the joint has beencarried out

Sealant installation schedule, include the following:

General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sealants at the following locations. For locationsand applications not specified, install sealants of types recommended by the joint sealantmanufacturer.

Exterior Joints:

1. Non-Traffic Joints: One-part non-sag urethane sealant.2. Joints Subject to Traffic: Multi-part pourable urethane sealant.

Interior Joints:

1. Joints Subject to Traffic: Multi-part pourable urethane sealant.2. Non-Traffic Joints:




a. Joint Subject to Movement of 10 to 25 Percent: One-part non-sagurethane sealant.

b. Joints Subject to Movement Under 10 Percent: Acrylic sealant.

3. Tiled Areas and Areas Subject to Attack by Mildew: One-part mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

Joints in Fire-Rated Construction: Fire-resistive joint sealant.

5.3 Applied Sealant Generally

a) The Main Contractor shall ensure that where sealant is used, carefulpreparation for and application of correct de-greasing solvents and bondingagents are carried out.

b) The Main Contractor shall ensure that surrounding elements are adequately

protected from the application of sealants. Following installation protect thesealant from follow on trades where necessary.

c) Where sealant is applied, either on or off Site, it shall be in accordance withBS 4254, BS 5215 or BS 5889, and shall be the most appropriate type andgrade suitable for the intended application.

d) The Main Contractor shall submit his proposal to the Engineer regarding typeand colour of sealant prior to ordering materials and the Sealant colour shallbe agreed with the Engineer. The Main Contractor shall state the periodduring which the sealant will not change in colour or appearance. Anydiscoloration of sealant during this time shall not be acceptable.

e) Excess sealant shall be removed and all joints shall be neat and clean.

f) Sealant shall be evenly applied without bubbles in joints.

g) The Main Contractor shall determine the proper hardness, compressibility orconsistency of sealant in consultation with the manufacturer, considering the

joint movement and exposure for the size of joint.

h) Sealant shall have the lowest modulus of elasticity which is consistent withthe degree of exposure to wear, abrasion and vandalism. Any sealantexposed to traffic shall have strength and modulus sufficiently high to resistdamage by traffic, including indentation.

i) Sealant shall be adequately protected during the curing process to avoidcontamination by dust and other debris.

j) Non stick backing strips shall be provided to ensure that 3 sided adhesiondoes not take place, to the sealant manufacturer‘s recommendations.

k) Sealants which are likely to stain or discolour or bleed into adjacent naturalmaterials shall not be used. In addition, run-off staining shall not occur belowor above horizontal joints.

5.4 Interfaces

Ensure that flashing, closers, etc. (specified in other sections) are locatedcorrectly and neatly overlap the Sealant to form a weathertight junction.




5.5 Damage

a) Do not repair Sealant without approval. Such approval will not be givenwhere materials are badly damaged or where the proposed repair will impairperformance or appearance.

5.6 Cleaning

a) At Practical Completion of the Works, or when otherwise agreed withthe Engineer, remove any protective coverings and carefully clean. Cleaningagents for the purpose shall be approved by the Sealant manufacturer.

6.0 SUBMITTALS

6.1 Submittals to be Provided after Contract Award

a) Confirmation of the materials/ products submitted with full technical literatureof the proposed product/material including relevant testing data fromindependent organizations.

b) Confirmation that the sealant and accessories comply with the contractdocuments and are recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the useintended.

6.2 Control Samples

Provide samples, including relevant technical literature as follows:

a) At an agreed stage provide the Engineer with identified samples of each typeof sealant in it‘s respective conditions/ environment. b) Obtain no objection before proceeding.




SECTION 19: CUBICAL PARTITIONS & LOCKERS

1.0 CUBICLE PARTITIONS- Manufacturer and reference: Proprietary system, to approval.- Finish: To approval- Division panels: 25mm thick phenolic resin- Doors: 25mm thick phenolic resign

Edge details: Post formed with laminate dressed around in a continuousmembrane forming a continuous waterproof and hygienic seal

- Support system: Floor and ceiling mounted proprietary support system withoutneed for head rail at door openings. Concealed head batten above ceiling leveland braced back to concrete soffit.

- Fixing system: Stainless steel concealed integral proprietary alen key systemrecessed into thickness of panels and making secret fixing to wall bracked.Surface mounted screw fixings will not be permitted.

- Ironmongery / Accessories: Integrated 316 grade stainless steel. Stainless steelfoot and ceiling junction surround. Bright stainless steel indicator bolt, coat hook.

2.0 STORAGE LOCKERS

Storage lockers shall be approved proprietary types in accordance with the ProductData.Body, back and front panel to be (TRESPA VIRTUON or equivalent)

Submit Product Data including dimensions and modules, method of locking, internalshelving and fittings, colour range and accessories.

Internal shelves shall be interchangeable and height adjustable.Storage lockers shall be powder coated in selected colours.

Verify colours, dimensions and modules before commencing.

MATERIAL

1. Model: "L - Shaped" 169-30 SBB/L (TRESPA)

2. Design

a. Width: 300mm

b. Depth: 490mm

c. Height: 1690 (overall height of locker unit).

d. Locker Shutter is 13mm thick TRESPA VIRTUON SolidGrade Compact Laminate colour to be selected frommanufacturer‘s standard range.

e. Locker side panels, top, dividers and bottom made of13mm thick solid grade compact laminate, colour white.

f. Locker back panel made of 6mm thick MDF, colourwhite.

g. Hardware includes, cylinder lock, with master keysystem, hanger rod, coat hook, PVC ventilator, andpermanently engraved numbering system to be provided.

3.0 Integrated Bench :Lockers mounted on 454mm high steel base, with 430mm high integral bench, Madeof steel box section frame, polyester powder coated to RAL 9011 (Black) withadjustable foot. Bench top made of 13mm thick TRESPA VIRTUON compactlaminate in approved colour from manufacturer‘s standard range

4.0 Samples:




Before placing the order submit representative sample(s) of the following:

i) cubicle-door, pilaster, support assembly including accessories andcomponents in finishes specified.

ii) Provide a site mock-up full installation of one unit (to be agreed/arrange at a

suit part of the contract/works).

Ensure that delivered materials match that of specification/sample. Samples thatdo not meet the system specified will not be considered.

5.0 PROTECTION:

- Do not remove protective packaging/coverings until just before componentsare required for fixing.

- Stack doors and panels flat on bearers and separated by spacers wherenecessary to prevent damage to or from projections.

- Keep completed cubicles clean, dry and adequately protected from damageuntil Practical Completion.

6.0 INSTALLATION:

- Do not install cubicle partitions before building is weathertight, wet tradeshave finished their work, wall tiling and floor finishes are completed, and thebuilding is well dried out.

- Set out accurately to ensure frames, panels, fascias and doors are plumb,level and accurately aligned.

- Do not cut, plane or sand prefinished surfaces except where shown ondrawings or otherwise agreed with CA.

- Fix securely as section 20, using manufacturer's fixing components withoutcausing distortions to frames, panels and doors.

- Adjust hinges so that doors hang as indicated on drawings.

7.0 Cubicle Sizes

Generally cubicle heights will be 2000mm with a 150mm air gap to base foradjustable foot.Generally cubicle widths 900mm with a hinged inward swing door of 700mmwide.Cross refer to all relevant toilet drawings for exact sizes and setting-out.




SECTION 20: FIXINGS

1.0 Requirements

The Fixings specification is non-performance designated and contains generalmaterials and workmanship specifications to control the standard of materials andproducts.

The Main Contractor shall:

a) Be responsible for the selection supply and installation of the Fixings andassociated components/accessories shown on the Drawings and to meet therequirements of this Specification and its performance criteria.

b) Co-ordinate the supply and installation with that for all related works andaccommodate the specified movements and tolerances for structuralelements as specified in the Structural Engineering Specifications.

c) Be responsible for the final selection of materials, sizes, thickness, types,locations of fixings etc, all in accordance with specified standards detailedherein.

d) Be responsible for ensuring fitness for purpose of all materials, components,systems, methods of installation etc. to meet the performance criteriaspecified herein.

1.1 Health & Safety

a) The Main Contractor shall ensure that he complies with th e latest ‗Code o fConstruction Safety Practice‘, the Health and Safety section of the ContractDocuments and ensure that full consideration is given to the health andsafety of operatives when manufacturing, handling and installing the Works.

1.2 Standards



This Performance Specification must be read in conjunction with all sections.

2.0 TYPE(S) OF FIXINGS

2.1 Location

The location of Fixings is defined on the Drawings, specific types have not been

specified and the Main Contractor and subcontractors shall select fixings in

accordance with the performance criteria of this specification.




3.0 DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

3.1 Generally

a) The design of the Fixings shall accommodate all the various tolerances andmovements of the building structure. Movements of the building structure will

occur from the application of dead and live loads plus moisture, shrinkage, creepand thermal effects.

b) The design shall take account of all structural criteria and ensure that theinstallation takes account of all movements and tolerances, in both permanentand temporary conditions, in order to avoid stress and deformation.

3.2 Fixings

a) The Main Contractor shall ensure that all fixings are of sufficient strength,appropriate to their location, and provided at adequate positions so as to ensurethe performance of the elements being attached. The fixings shall be suitableand used solely for the purposes intended by the manufacturer in order to satisfythe requirements of this Performance Specification.

b) Unless otherwise specified herein or on the Drawings, the Main Contractor shallobserve the following basic requirements:

i. Durability – fixings shall be selected such that adequate protectionagainst corrosion likely in their position of use is provided for theservice life specified.

ii. Rigidity – fixings shall be used which are suited to the likely stresses,movements and vibrations in use.

iii. Appearance – unless otherwise specified, fixings shall not be visible;where fixings are visible shall match or suit the items being fixed orcomply with the Drawings.

iv. The method of fixing shall not damage anything being fixed oranything receiving fixings.

4.0 MATERIALS

4.1 Fasteners – directly and indirectly exposed

Fasteners for materials and components forming part of external construction tobe of corrosion resistant material or have a corrosion resistant finish.

4.2 Packers

a) Provide suitable, tight packers at fixing points to take up tolerances andprevent distortion.

b) Use non-compressible, rot proof, non-corroding materials positioned adjacentto fixing points.

c) Ensure that packers do not intrude into zones that are to be filled withsealant.

4.3 Nailing

a) Nails: To BS 1202




b) In joints, use not less than two nails and opposed skew nailing unlessspecified otherwise.

c) Drive nails fully in without splitting or crushing the material being fixed.

d) Punch nail heads below surfaces that will be visible in the completed work.

e) No nail fixings will be permitted to any finished timber surfaces.

4.4 Plugs

a) Proprietary types selected to suit the background, loads to be supported andconditions expected in use.

b) Locate plugs accurately in correctly sized holes in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations.

4.5 Screw Fixing

a) Screws: To BS 1210.

b) All screws to have clearance holes. Screws of 8 gauge or more and allscrews into hardwood to have pilot holes about half the diameter of theshank.

c) Before using brass, aluminium or other soft metal wood screws pre-cut thethread with a matching steel wood screw.

d) Drive countersunk heads flush with timber surface, or not less than 2 mmbelow it if they are to be stopped.

e) Washers and screw cups, where specified, to be of the same material as thescrew.

4.6 Pelleting

Countersink screw heads 6 mm below timber surface and glue in grain-matchedpellets not less than 6 mm thick, cut from matching timber. Pellets to occupy thewhole depth of the holes and be finished off flush with surface.

4.7 Plugging

Countersink screw heads 6 mm below timber suface and glue in plugs. Plugs tooccupy the whole depth of the holes and project from the surface.

4.8 Adhesives

a) Adhesive types: As specified in the relevant section.

b) Surfaces to receive adhesive to be sound, free from dust, grease and anyother contamination likely to affect bond. Where necessary, clean surfacesusing methods and materials recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

c) Adjust surface regularity and texture as necessary to suit bonding and gapfilling characteristics of adhesive.

d) Apply adhesives using recommended spreaders/applicators to ensure correctcoverage. Bring surfaces together within recommended time period and

apply pressure evenly over full area of contact to ensure full bonding.





5.1 Generally

a) Supply and install the Fixings in accordance with this Specification andDetailed Drawings.

b) Installers shall employ competent trade operatives.

c) All fixings shall be insta lled in accordance with the manufacturer‘srecommended procedures.

d) No objection shall be obtained from the Engineer before drilling or cuttingparts of the structure, other than where shown on the Working Drawings.

e) The finished work shall be square, regular, true to line, level and plane, with asatisfactory fit at all junctions.

f) All materials and components shall be durable and to the minimum standardsset out in this Performance Specification, together with the relevant BritishStandards.

g) For each material or component, the total quantity shall be obtained from thesame supplier.

h) All support systems shall be adequate thickness and strength, not only tomeet the structural requirements, but also eliminate any risk of distortion inthe finished surfaces.

i) Protection of the works shall be provided until hand-over to avoid anyblemishes on the finished elements.

5.2 Fixing Through Finishes

Ensure that fasteners and plugs have ample penetration into the backing.

5.3 Cramp Fixing

a) When not specified otherwise, position cramps not more than 150 mm fromeach end of frame sections and at 600mm maximum centres. Secure crampsto frames with matching screws as masonry work proceeds, and fully bed inmortar

6.0 SUBMITTALS

6.1 Control Samples

A representative sample of each fixing type to be retained on site.




SECTION 21: FACADE CLEANING SYSTEM

1.1 SUMMARYThis section includes supply, installation, testing, commissioning, training of

operators and one year warranty period for the maintenance of the Façade CleaningEquipment.

The primary purpose of the facade cleaning equipment is to regularly clean the facades of thebuilding.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONFacade cleaning system shall include but shall not be limited to the following:

Monorails with Face mounted brackets Monorail traversing bogey Parapet mounted davits Slewing Powered cradle with safe working load of 200 kgs or 2 persons

SUBMITTALS:Upon awarding the Order, the contractor shall submit a complete technical proposal for theapproval by the Consultant, which shall include the following:

Scaled shop drawings for the proposed system including:Proposed system layoutBracket spacing and maximum loadsReactions at point of supportLocation of the power supply pointsServices to be provided by the other related sub contractors.

Upon completion of works, Operational and Maintenance manual in English shall hesubmitted along with As Build Drawings for the system in 3 copies

1.3 SPECIALIST (BMU) CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTThe building maintenance equipment shall be supplied and installed by a specialist contractorwho has a minimum of 7 years experience in the design, manufacture, installation and safeworking of same equipments in the UAE with documentary evidence.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTDesign the system such that the cradle is clear of the face of the building. Fenders to allowthe cradle to rest lightly against the facades at the time of cleaning

All assemblies and components shall be designed with a safety factor of 4 to 1 against failureas a minimum.

Wire Ropes shall be completely capable of supporting the intended loads and have a factor ofsafety of at least 10.

Each equipment shall be completely pre-assembled and thoroughly tested in factory prior todispatch for final installation.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT

1.5.1 Codes and Standards :

British Standards Institution (BSI)

1.5.1.1 BS EN 288 -1: General rules for Fusion Welding.




1.5.1.2 BS EN ISO 1461: specification for Hot Dip Galvanised Coatings on Iron and Steel Articles.

1.5.1.3 BS 916: Specification for Black Bolts, Screws and Nuts, Hexagon and Square withB.S.W. Threads, and Party Machined Bolts, Screws and Nuts, hexagon and

square, with B.S.W. of B.S.F. Threads.

1.5.1.4 BS EN ISO 1461: Hot dip Galvanised Coatings on Fabricated Iron and Steel Articlesspecification and test methods, including annexes A, B, C, D, and E.

1.5.1.5 BS 1981: Specification for Unified Machine screws and Machine screw Nuts.

1.5.1.6 BS EN 10263 - 1 & 2: Steel for cold Forged Fasteners and Similar Components,Stainless steel.

1.5.1.7 BS 4320: Specification for Metal Washers for General Engineering Purpose - Metricseries.

1.5.1.8 BS 4464: Specification for spring Washers for General Engineering Purpose – MetricSeries.

1.5.1.9 BS 4872, Part 1: Fusion Welding of steel.

1.5.1.10 BS EN 1808: Safety requirement on Suspended Access Equipment - DesignCalculations, Stability Criteria, Construction, Tests.

1.5.2 General:Construct all components of heat treated aluminium alloy or stainless steel or hot dipgalvanised structural steel. Dissimilar metals, when used, shall be protected againstelectrolytic action.Consider the materials size and thickness shown on the drawings as for conceptual design

purposes. The facade access system contractor is to provide the final design and detailing ofthe equipment and all connections.

1.5.3 Materials:Comply with BS EN 1808: Safety requirement on Suspended Access Equipment – DesignCalculations, Stability Criteria, Construction, Tests.

1.5.4 Welding: All welding requirements and shall be performed by welders qualified in accordance with BSEN 288 -1: General rules for Fusion Welding & BS 4872, Part 1: Fusion Welding of steel.

1.5.5 Bolting:

Comply with BS 916: Specification for Black Bolts, Screws and Nuts, Hexagon and SquarewithB.S.W. Threads, and Party Machined Bolts, Screws and Nuts, hexagon and square, withB.S.W.of B.S.F.Threads BS 4320: Specification for Metal Washers for General Engineering Purpose – Metric

seriesBS 4464: Specification for spring Washers for General Engineering Purpose – Metric SeriesBS 1981: Specification for Unified Machine screws and Machine screw Nuts.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FABRICATION – GENERAL




Quality of work shall be best trade modern shop and field practice known to recognisedmanufacturers specialising in this type of work. Accurately fit joints and intersecting membersin true planes with adequate fastening.

Fit and assemble work in shop where possible. Execute according to details andreviewed shop drawings. Where shop fabrication is not possible, make trial assembly in

shop.

Fabricate finished work free from distortion, weld spatter and defects detrimental toappearance and performance.

Weld all connections unless otherwise permitted.Where welding is not possible use approved bolted connections. Fastenings shall be

at adequate spacing. Exposed fastenings shall be of the same materials, colour and finish ofthe base metal on which they occur.

3 SYSTEMS:

3.1 MONORAIL SYSTEM:The monorail shall be provided with horizontal access system, fixed around the perimeter of

the building structure. The traversing trolleys, from which the cradle is suspended, shall travelalong the monorail to reach the various parts of the building. The trolleys are equipped withseparate connection shackles for primary and secondary hoist ropes. The rail is Aluminiumprofile. The brackets shall be galvanised steel and fixed to the building structure by 3 nos.Galvanised mounting bolts.

Specifications:Track section Type : Face mounted type extruded trackTrack material : AluminiumSupport bracket : Hot dip galvanised steelMounting of Track : Support from the parapetDesign load for the track support : To be confirmed during shop drawings.Support spacing of track : 2000 mm typically and 250mm at corners and bends

Suspended height : To suit the building heightMonorail surface finish : Powder coated (standard RAL colour)Support bracket surface finish : Hot dip galvanised and epoxy Painted (standard RALcolour)

MONORAIL BRACKET GENERAL PARAMETERS

Material Mild steel plates – minimum 16mm thick

Dimension As per project shop drawing

Quantity As per project shop drawingSurface treatment Galvanized.

Finish: Epoxy painted to standard RAL color.MONORAIL GENERAL PARAMETERS

Material Aluminum

Alloy 6082.

Temper T6

Weight of the Monorail 6.4 Kg/ mtr.

External Dimension 6000 mm x 45.4 mm x 131.4 mm

UTS 220 N/mm²

Elongation % in50 mm 8Finish: Powder coated to standard RAL color.




3.2 DAVIT SYSTEM:Parapet mounted steel Davits complete with required nos. of holding brackets.

Specifications:Davit and bracket material : Hot dip galvanised steel

Mounting of parapet davit brackets : By means of chemical anchor boltsDesign load for the davit support : To be confirmed during shop drawings.Support spacing : To suit the cradle sizeSuspended height : To suit the building heightDavit and davit bracket surface finish : Hot dip galvanised.

3.3 BMU SLEWING CRADLEThe Cradle to be constructed from fully welded mild steel sections, Galvanised. Aluminiumalloy cladding is to be fitted to the outside of the Cradle to give a good appearance &protection for the operator. The cradle to have power operated steel wire climbing winch. Thewinch to be push button operated & to have comprehensive safety devices.

In the event of a break down or power failure provision should be there for manual operation.

One secondary safety wire is to be provided in addition to the winch wire of the cradle withSafety device.

BMU CRADLE SPECIFICATIONSModel: TRANSWILL-TW-C - SLEWING

Unladen Weight of the Cradle: 280 Kg(Excluding wire ropes & power cables)

Carrying capacity (SWL): 200 Kg

Carrying capacity-Number of persons 2 Persons

External Dimension: 3200 mm x 950 mm x 1680 (Overall)

Total Power Consumption : 3 Kw

Hoisting Speed 8.5 m/min

Construction Fully welded mild steel sections, Hot dipGalvanised

Finish Full aluminium cladding and powder coated toRAL9006

HOISTING SYSTEMMake/ Model Titan 403 PI,POWER CLIMBER,BELGIUM

Number of Winches 2

Motor Type TEFC Brake Motor

Rated Power 0.75 KW

Phase 3Rated Voltage 380-415 V

Motor 1400 rpm

Insulation Class F

Method of starting Direct On line

Enclosure IP 55

Wire Rope Diameter 8.4 mm

WIRE ROPE REELER MOTORMake/ Model MRV-10-GHIRRI MOTORS, ITALY

Type Power OperatedNumber of reeler Motors 2




Rated Power 0.25 KwPhase 3Rated Voltage 380-415 VMotor 1360 rpmInsulation Class FMethod of Starting Direct on lineEnclosure IP 55Reduction Gear Ratio 1:80

REELER DRUM & WIRE ROPENumber of drums 4

Diameter 400 mm

Width 120 mm

Number of Ropes 4 (2 Suspension 2 Safety)

Wire rope diameter 8.40 mm

Wire rope construction 5X26 RH cross lay, Light Performed

Material of Wire rope Galvanized Steel

Weight of Rope 0.255 Kg/mt

Breaking Load 47 KN

Rope Factor of safety 10:1

POWER SUPPLYSupply 380-415V, 3ph, 5 Pin, 50 Hz, 16 Amp 4Core 1.5

Sq.mm Insulated Trailing Cable

CONTROL SYSTEMControl Control voltage 24 V/48V controlled Via powercable

POWERED OPERATED CRADLE FEATURES:

The Cradle to be equipped with:- Twin traction hoist- two power operated wire rope reeler drum- four galvanised steel wire ropes stored on powered reelers- four castor wheels are to be provided at the bottom.

- aluminium cladding all over- rubber beading at front and sides- two fenders to allow cradle to rest lightly against the facade- anti collision bar to detect obstructions while lowering the Cradle- control box complete with emergency stop- emergency descent facility

SAFETY FEATURES:

The following safety features shall be installed on the cradle.Emergency StopLower limit safety device

Upper limit safety deviceEmergency manual descent




Overload safety deviceSafety harness points

Anti-collision bar

WORKS PROVIDED BY OTHER SECTIONS

Power supply for the system including power sockets Support structure for the monorail brackets Casting of all cast in anchors Crane for Unloading, loading of material, assembly and installation of the equipments

at the site. Temporary power supply during installation works All civil works as and when required. Readily erected Scaffolding/Access for the installation works Safe Storage of the materials at site

MANUFACTURER CONTACT INFORMATION

1. TRANSWILL ENGINEERING L.L.C P.O.Box 231725Dubai, U.A.E.Tel : +971 4 34 23 880Fax : +971 4 34 23 881Email : [email protected]

[email protected] Web : www.transwill.com

4. EXECUTION

EXAMNATION:

1. Examine work of other sections where such work influences the work of this section andreport unsuitable conditions to the Engineer

2. Supply anchors, inserts and templates required to be build-in by other sections in adequatetime

3. Proceed with the installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

4.1 INSTALLATION

1. Window washing equipment shall be installed by the manufacturer of the equipment or hisauthorized representative.

2. Erect work true to dimensions, square, plumb, level, free from distortion or defectsdetrimental to appearance and performance and tightly fitted, flush and level to adjacentsurfaces.

3 Isolate metals as required to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals.

4 Supply and install all equipment and all necessary electrical work from power outletsprovided by other trade.

4.2 ADJUSTMENT, TESTING, TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION





http://www.transwill.com/








1. When requested, run tests on machinery and safety devices to show their proper operationfor design specified and/or shown. Upon completion of the work, leave all apparatus inproper adjustment and operation.

2. Provide competent instructors to train employees of the Owner, or others as directed, whowill be responsible for the care, adjustment and operation of the equipment. Forward a

statement to Engineer designating the personnel given the instructions and certifying that theinstructions were furnished.

4.3 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Furnish full warranty period maintenance and call back service on equipment for a period ofone (1) year from the date of handing over of the equipment. Service shall include regularexaminations by a competent and trained mechanic to clean, oil and adjust the apparatus,making repairs, as may be required and replacing worn parts when necessary, except suchparts necessitated by misuse, accidents or negligence not caused by those doing the work ofthis section in which case cost of such parts shall be paid for by the Owner.

Carry out maintenance services including emergency call back during regular working hours

and days. Firm performing work of this section shall be able to show successful experience inthe complete maintenance of such equipment and that it employs competent personnel tohandle this service. Perform all maintenance by personnel under the supervision and in thedirect employ of the firm doing work of this section.




SECTION 22: GRP

1.0 REQUIREMENTS

Supply and installation of GRP Liners in Water Tanks and Planters, GRP ladders andGRP hatches as shown on drawings and as described in this section.

2.0 REFERENCE

a) Finish Painting –

3.0 DESIGNS AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

a) Provide anchors, runners and spacers, and other inserts and fittings whichare to be designed by the manufacturer to effect a complete installation.

b) Design all anchorage and fastenings. Show details of such fastenings on theshop drawings.

c) Reinforce GRP units to withstand suspension loads, stress connection loads,super imposed loads and submit all design calculations and data to theEngineer as itemized in Article 1.4.3.

d) Design and construct connections to permit movement where it might occur,and to incorporate all fitments as shown on the drawings.

4.0 QUALIFICATIONS

a) Work of this Section shall be carried out by an organization having not lessthan five years of proven experience, acceptable to Engineer for this type ofwork.

b) The organization to have the capacity to perform with its own personnel andequipment, the engineering, drafting, detailing, fabrications and erection ofthe work to be constructed.

c) Manufacturer to have all design calculations, design details, suspensionsystems and shop drawings carried out by a professional engineer meetingthe requirements of Section 01300: Submittals, who shall sign and seal allsubmittals.

5.0 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

The following are acceptable manufacturers for the work of this Section:

a) Dubai International Reinforced Plastics – Dubai.b) Fibrex co. - Abu Dhabi.

c) Mainline Interiors - Dubai.

d) Gulf Precast Co. - Abu Dhabi.

e) Or other manufacturer meeting the requirements of this Section andapproved by Engineer.

6.0 SHOP DRAWINGS

a) Show each item of precast GRP, surface finishes, connecting hardware,connecting steel, reinforcing, glass fibre, anchorage, setting and bracing,

jointing method and sealant. Drawings to be reviewed and approved prior tocommencement of any fabrication of elements.




b) Identify each unit by a standard mark shown on the shop drawings and placelegibly on each unit at the time of manufacture.

c) Coordinate with related stages of the work to ensure complete installation ofall associated elements of the building.

7.0 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY

a) Warranty GRP work to be colorfast and against cracking, splitting,deformation and loosening for a period of three years from the date ofCompletion Certificate of the Work. Warranty also to cover the installation ofany joint sealant provided under this Section against staining, adhesion andcohesion failure.

b) Upon being notified by the Engineer that defects or failure exist, promptlyreplace defective parts of this work.

8.0 SAMPLES

a) Submit three samples, 300 x 300mm of each type of GRP finish andpigmented colour for the approval of the Engineer before casting the largersamples specified below. Samples to be of appropriate thicknessrepresentative of the proposed finished product, together with sample of

jointing technique and joint sealants.

b) After approval of the 300 x 300mm samples, cast one sample of each typeand finish to conform to Article 2.3 'Finish of Panels' of this Section.

c) The larger samples will be inspected by the Engineer at the plant. If notapproved make a new sample until approved.

d) Erect where directed by the Engineer, and as shown on the Drawings.

e) Submit all data on fire retardant products as specified in this Section.

f) Submit samples of handle, hinges and keylocking mechanism in stainlesssteel type 316 for approval of the Engineer.

9.0 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

a) Prevent units coming into contact with earth or other materials which maydamage the facing material. Protect units with waterproof coverings.

b) GRP contractor to be fully responsible for the delivery, handling and storingof the units.

c) Any dirt on the units due to storage, handling, transportation and erectionshall be capable of removal by washing. To facilitate this the units may begiven a water repellent treatment.

d) Deliver units to site, and on arrival inspect each unit as it is removed from thevehicle.

e) All GRP units must be handled, stored and transported in such a way that nodamage or marking of architectural surfaces occurs, and so that the units arenot subject to undue stress. Delivery must be timed to coincide with the mainContract programme.

f) All GRP units shall be marked by some method of individual identification.

10.0 SUPPORTING STEEL




a) Supply and install all miscellaneous steel for complete installation, except forsteel forming part of a structural system and shown and identified (described)on the Structural Drawings.

b) Ensure any anchorage fixings do not interfere with reinforcing bars.

c) All steel connections and fixings to be Type 316 stainless steel.

d) All steel framing to be electro-galvanized and painted or hot-dippedgalvanized to BS 729 minimum thickness 140microns and painted.

e) Products

11.0 MATERIALS

a) Gelcoat: Gelcoat shall be a thixotropic isophtalic polyester gelcoat resin withexcellent durability and resistant to water and chemicals and conforming toBS 3532:1962.

b) Laminating Resin: Laminating resin shall be a pre-accelerated, filledIsophtalic polyester resin, conforming to BS 3532:1962 when reinforced withchopped strand glass mat and fully cured.

c) Glass Reinforcement: Glass reinforcement shall be chopped strand mat ofcontinuous filament E glass manufactured to BS 3496: 1973. Provide finishcoat using fibreglass Surfacing Tissue, complete with Gel coat to all exposedsurfaces. Minimum glass reinforcement 600 g/m2.

d) Polyurethane foam: shall be used within formed GRP stiffeners, whereapplicable.

e) Anisotropy: By means of correct mould filling techniques as uniform aspossible a distribution of fibre in all directions is to be achieved.

f) Mix Design: The mix shall be determined by the Manufacturer in conjunctionwith the Licensor and submitted to the Engineer for acceptance before workcommences. The proportions shall be chosen to achieve the performanceand the quality control requirements specified.

g) Mould Release Agent: The use of a mould release agent will be permittedprovided it is compatible with the architectural finishes specified. Themanufacturer shall submit full details of the type of release agent heproposes to use for acceptance by the Engineer.

h) Fixings: Fixing shall be those shown on shop drawings, and all as required toensure complete anchorage and support, including sliding type fixingsrequired to allow for movement as required. All steel angles and fixings shallbe type 316 stainless steel.

i) Sealant/Joints: As recommended by the GRP manufacturer to withstand

expansion movement, water, acids and alkalis attack; and to ensure a tight joint without visible appearance after painted finish.

12.0 FABRICATIONS

a) Fabricate units to profiles detailed and in accordance with the reviewed shopdrawings.

b) The units shall be manufactured by a premix process to proceduresrecommended by the Licensor. The mixing of the ingredients and anyadmixtures shall be carried out by high speed mixing. The colour pigments tomatch Engineer's colour selection. The glass fibres shall be blended into this

mortar paste using low speed mixing. The fibres shall be added evenly to themix. The total mixing time after the addition of the glass fibre should not be




so long as to cause damage to the glass fibres which would affect theproperties of the GRP.

c) Install all necessary stiffeners and plastic reinforcing to accommodate theimposed and superimposed loads.

d) All weight and volume measurements of mix constituents shall be carried out

in a careful manner such that the correct mix proportions are achieved.e) Manufacturing moulds must be stiffened to ensure good stability and surface

finish and shall be approved prior to commencement of work.

f) Demoulding and Curing, and Post-Curing Treatment:

g) Demoulding shall not be carried out less than six hours after manufacture.

h) The curing enclosure shall maintain a constant relative humidity greater than95% and a minimum temperature of not less than 15°C.

i) After the curing period, the units shall be stored under cover out of directsunlight for a minimum of 14 days. This is to assist uniform drying out.

13.0 FINISH OF PANELS

a) Shape: The units are to be formed in GRP to achieve the profiles indicatedon the drawings.

b) Finish: GRP panels to have a smooth finish. The colour and texture shallmatch those of sample prepared by the Manufacturer and approved by theEngineer.

c) The finished units shall be free from surface imperfections such asblowholes, void, ridges or any other defects that will be visible in the finishedconditions as the approved samples. Fibres in the surface of the mouldingwill be acceptable providing the appearance so achieved is uniform and tothe Engineer's satisfaction but bare fibres are not to be visible.

d) Finish to panels: finished surfaces on all exposed sides to be painted underSection 09900: Painting.

e) Any GRP unit not complying with the specification may be declaredunacceptable by the Engineer.

14.0 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

a) Do not install units which have chips, spalls, cracks or other deficiencies onsurfaces exposed in the finished work. Immediately remove units damaged

during installation and replace.b) If it is considered that a damaged section can be successfully patched,

remove the panel from the work and patch it elsewhere for futureconsideration and use.

c) All fixings and inserts shall be designed such that they retain the units inposition while allowing for expansion and contraction where needed and shallbe coordinated with supporting structure. Ensure location of anchor bolts intoconcrete does not interfere with steel reinforcing.

d) The safety and protection of GRP units shall be ensured throughout thewhole of the building contract. No approval will in any way absolve theManufacturer from the responsibility for protection.

e) Where shrinkage of units will occur after erection, make final restrainingconnections after shrinkage is substantially complete.




f) Install units plumb, level and in true planes with correct joint widths.

g) Insert all necessary sealant and flashing as noted on shop drawings.

SEALING

a) Before application of sealant, clean and dry thoroughly joints of units.Surfaces which are to receive sealant to be free from release agents or othertreatments which may affect the bond. Prime surfaces to receive sealant ifso directed by the Sealant Manufacturer.

b) Use continuous sealant backing material of size to suit width of joint ifrequired by manufacturer.

c) Apply sealant in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printedinstructions.

d) Submit samples of typical joint sealing for approval by the Engineer.




SECTION 23: GRC

TYPE(S) OF CLADDING/FEATURES

115 PRECAST PANELS TO BUILDING FACADE

- Finish: smooth sand blasted color and texture toreplicate Yellow Lime Stone to clause(s) 260/320and 470 and to architects approval. Complete withsharp arises as indicated on the drawings.

- Units: as Clause 470.Mould material/lining: grp to manufacturersrecommendations as clause 410/411.

Aggregate: to approval of Engineer to meet the design intent.Matrix colour: Chromix colouring admixture by L.M. SchofieldEurope or similar and equal approved, to architects approvalWork on surface: smooth

- Fixing: as clause 0430- Joints: 20mm 3 part polysulphide sealant from MBT, Jotun or Fosroc.

- Accessories/features/incorporated components: complete with allaccessories and components necessary to provide features and designintent as shown on the drawings.

DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

210 DESIGN: Complete the detailed design of the cladding and associatedfeatures shown on the drawings in accordance with the requirements of thisspecification and the recommendations of BS 8297.

215 INTEGRITY:- The cladding and associated features must be designed in accordance

with BS 8110 to resist all dead and live loads.

- Wind loads may be calculated in accordance with CP 3: Chapter V: Part2 using the following data:Basic wind speed (V): 45 m/sTopography factor (S1): 1.0Ground roughness, building size and height factor (S2) determined fromCP3: Chapter V: Part 2, table 3:Statistical factor (S3): 1.Make due allowance for any internal pressure.

- The cladding must accommodate without damage all drying shrinkage,creep, deflections and thermal movements.

- The precast units must be reinforced as necessary to resist shrinkage,handling stresses and service loads. Webs to framed units must bereinforced.

216 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OFPRECAST CLADDING WORK: Submit to the Engineer before testing orfabrication the following rainscreen cladding particulars:- Detailed drawing to fully describe fabrication and installation

- Detailed calculations to prove compliance with all design/ performancerequirements.

- Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements.- Certification for all incorporated components manufactuered by others

confirming their suitability for all locations in the rainscreen cladding.- Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.- Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of all

products.

220 WEATHER RESISTANCE:




- The difference in cement content is not more than 80 kg/cu m.- The thickness of the facing mix is at least 10 mm greater than the

nominal maximum size of aggregate, and in no case less than 25 mm.- Reinforcement is not less than 20 mm away from the junction between

mixes.- The backing mix and facing mix are effectively monolithic, being placed

and compacted within one hour of each other.

260 COVER WHEN USING RECONSTRUCTED STONE: A 25 mm thick facing mix of reconstructed stone as clause 320 may be takenas equivalent to 10 mm of the required concrete cover to reinforcement. Ahigher figure may be approved on submission of suitable evidence ofimpermeability.

270 DIMENSIONAL COORDINATION:- Detail cladding to ensure compliance with the specified requirements for

accuracy in manufacture and erection and to accommodate deviations inthe building structure.

- Select levelling and alignment devices, and types and methods of fixing

which will give ample adjustability in three dimensions.- Liaise with the party responsible for construction of the building structure

to ensure coordination of dimensions and tolerances.- Submit details of the proposed system of tolerances and adjustments.

280 DESIGN SAMPLE: At an agreed stage in the detailed design work make asample of the proposed construction, size 3m x 3m consisting of minimum 2panels to include metal windows and structural glass openings. Sample toshow intended method of adjustment of PC units and to include all externaland internal finishes showing the proposed finish. Obtain approval ofappearance before proceeding. Keep the approved sample at the factory forcomparison with the production units.

290 MOCK-UP:- At an agreed stage in the detailed design work construct a mock-up of

the following:Mock-up:1. Two complete panels with typical window and structural glass

opening position to be agreed with Engineer.2. One complete corner panel to corner panel.Purpose of mock-up: to review junctions, alignment and finish ofpanelling and to incorporate detailing changes if required.

- Arrange for inspection to be carried out jointly with the Engineer and/orarrange for tests as instructed. Obtain approval of appearance beforeproceeding.

MAKING CONCRETE

310 CONCRETE MIXES GENERALLY:- Constituent materials, composition of mixes, production of concrete,

information to be provided, sampling, testing and compliance to be inaccordance with BS 5328 unless otherwise specified.

- The total chloride ion content of the constituents of each mix, expressedas a percentage by weight of cement (including GGBS or PFA if used) inthe mix, must not exceed 0.4. Do not use admixtures containing calciumchloride.

- Rate of sampling for compressive strength testing: Not less than onesample for each day of use.

320 RECONSTRUCTED STONE FACING MIXES:




- To BS 1217, clauses 8 to 12- Initial surface absorption: Grade A- Aggregates and mix design to be such that surface crazing does not

occur.- After approval of appearance of samples and before making any units submit

evidence to demonstrate compliance in respect of:

Compressive strengthDrying shrinkageInitial surface absorption

340 COMPLETE CORRELATED RECORDS must be maintained for each mixtype, including:- Composition of the mixes, including any admixtures.- Batch identification numbers related to the precast unit identification

numbers and test samples.- Results of slump and other tests carried out at the casting yard.- Laboratory test reports, including cube identification numbers.

350 TEST LABORATORY: All compressive strength testing to be carried out by

one UKAS/NAMAS accredited laboratory. Submit the name of the selectedlaboratory to Engineer as soon as possible and in any case beforecommencing manufacture.

MANUFACTURE

410 MOULDS must be:- Of such construction that casting deviations can be readily controlled to

give compliance with clause 420.- Constructed to prevent loss of grout.- Designed to permit demoulding without damage to the units.- Coated evenly with a suitable release agent, which must not be allowed

to touch the reinforcement.

- Maintained in clean, sound condition and inspected carefully for defectsbefore each reuse. Damaged moulds must not be repaired and reused ifthis would impair the surface appearance of the units.

411 MOULDS: Inform Engineer when each mould is complete and not less than21 days before commencing manufacture of units. If GRP moulds are to beused inform Engineer when each master pattern is complete.

420 MANUFACTURING ACCURACY:- Finished dimensions of completed units to be such that the cladding,

when erected, complies with clause 630 and all sizes fall within thepermissible deviations given in BS 8297, table 11.

- Check the overall dimensions, straightness, squareness, twist andflatness of the mould(s) immediately before each reuse and of each unitas soon as possible after demoulding. Make adjustments to moulds asnecessary.

430 FIXINGS and adjustment devices located away from the external face andedges of units may be of galvanized steel. Lifting devices may be of mildsteel provided they are recessed and the subsequent filling with mortarprovides the same amount of cover as required for reinforcement in thepanel. Other devices must be of a suitable type of stainless steel. Preventbimetallic corrosion and staining.

435 LIFTING POINTS: Form in accordance with BS 8297, clause 3.2.6.2.




440 REINFORCEMENT:- In addition to reinforcement required for structural purposes, precast units

must be reinforced as necessary to resist shrinkage and handlingstresses.

- Type of reinforcement, unless otherwise specified: To BS 4449 and/or BS4483, cut and bent to BS 4466.

- Galvanized reinforcement: Galvanized to BS 729 after cutting, chromatetreated.- Stainless steel reinforcement: To BS 6744, type 304 S31 or equivalent.- At time of placing concrete, reinforcement to be clean and free of

corrosive pitting, loose mill scale, loose rust, ice, oil and other substanceswhich may adversely affect the reinforcement, concrete, or bond betweenthe two.

- Fix accurately and securely using tying wire, approved steel clips, or tackwelding if permitted. Wire or clips must not encroach into the concretecover.

450 COVER SPACERS must not be used to concrete faces which will beexposed in the finished work. Where such faces are to be cast against amould submit details of proposed method of ensuring the specified cover.

460 UNIFORMITY OF METHOD: All exposed faces which are specified to be ofthe same finish must be identical in appearance. If different concrete mixes ormethods of producing such faces are proposed, submit evidence that therewill be no difference in appearance and obtain approval; otherwise all suchfaces must be produced in the same way.

470 UNITS WITH NATURAL STONE FACINGS: must be cast face down, thestone being attached to the concrete backing with stainless steel dowels (notless than 11 per sq.m m) in accordance with BS 8297 clause 3.2.7.6 jointsbetween slabs must be sealed to prevent ingress of water.

480 CASTING AND CURING:

- Thoroughly compact concrete by vibration (except for certain specialfinishes which may, subject to approval, be dry rammed).

- Do not demould units prematurely.- Prevent damage to and distortion of immature units from movement,

vibration, overloading, physical shock, rapid cooling and thermal shock.- Ensure that units are protected from sun and drying winds until they are

at least 5 days old.- Do not deliver units to site until at least 14 days after casting.

490 QUALITY OF FINISHES must be consistent throughout the contract.Components having arrises or faces which are broken, chipped, cracked,crazed, honeycombed, irregular, inconsistent, stained or otherwise marredsuch that their appearance or performance is significantly impaired will not beaccepted.

500 PRODUCTION CONTROL UNIT(S):- The first unit produced of each of the type(s) listed below is to be

inspected by the Engineer and, if its appearance is approved, clearlymarked and kept safely at the factory as a control standard forappearance of subsequently produced units.

One standard panel one coping panel, one panel (s)- Control units to be delivered to site last.

510 INSPECTION: All completed units must be carefully inspected and checkedby the manufacturer for match with approved sample(s) or control unit(s) andcompliance with specification before despatch to site. Make arrangements forthe Engineer to inspect completed units in the factory.




520 RECORDS:- Keep complete records for each unit including the following information:

Unique identification number.Correlation with records of mixes, including batch numbers.Date of each stage of manufacture.

Dates and results of all tests, checks and inspections.Dimensions related to specified levels of accuracy.Specific location in the finished work.Details of any damage and making good.

Any other pertinent data, e.g. if the unit is a production control unit.- Records to be available for inspection on request.

ERECTION/FIXING/JOINTING

610 ERECTION, FIXING OR JOINTING BY PERSONS OTHER THAN THEMANUFACTURER: The precast concrete manufacturer must:- Provide clear and comprehensive instructions and ensure that they are

understood by the site operatives.- Provide adequate site supervision by suitably skilled person(s).

620 PROTECTION:- Prevent overstressing of units during transit, handling, storage and

fixing. Lift units at designed lifting points only, using special lifting devicesand cradles as necessary (to be provided by the precast concretemanufacturer).

- Store units on level bearers clear of the ground and separate withresilient spacers.

- Prevent damage to units and any chipping, staining, marking or dirtyingof surfaces which will be visible in the completed work.

630 ACCURACY OF ERECTION:- Before commencing erection, survey the structure including any fixing

inserts. Report to Engineer immediately if structure will not allow therequired accuracy of erection.

- Set out joint centres for a complete elevation at a time unless otherwiseagreed with Engineer. Erect units using temporary spacers to suit thesurvey results and ensure generally consistent joint widths.

- Within the length of any joint (including in-line continuations acrosstransverse joints) the greatest width must not exceed the least width bymore than 3 mm. Any variation to be evenly distributed with no suddenchanges.

- The offset in elevation between nominally in-line edges across atransverse joint must not be more than 3 mm.

- The offset in plan or section between flat faces of adjacent panels acrossany joint must not be more than 3 mm.

- The widths of joints must be such as to ensure that the joints perform asintended and are within the recommendations of the joint sealant or bafflemanufacturer.

- Notwithstanding the tolerances stated above and in clause 420, thefinished work must have a satisfactory appearance, being square,regular, true to line, level and plane with a satisfactory fit at all junctions,all to approval.

640 FINAL FIXING:- Obtain approval of appearance of each elevation before tightening

fixings, filling bed joints and dowel pockets or sealing joints.




- Tighten threaded fastenings to torque figures recommended by themanufacturer. Do not over tighten restraint fixings intended to permitlateral movement.

- Dowel bars and recessed lifting devices must be filled with a fairly dry 1:4cement: sand mix or a suitable epoxy or polyester mix, well tamped in.

650 MORTAR BEDDING TO SUPPORTING STRUCTURE:- Ensure that surfaces are clean and free from frost, oil, dirt and debris.- Insert (if necessary during erection) a suitable compressible tube or

similar to prevent mortar from falling into the cavity or restricting freedomof relative movement between panels.

- Completely fill bed joint with a dry 1:3 cement: sand mix well rammed in.

660 SEALANT JOINTS:- Sealant: 2 part polysulphide sealant

Colour: to approval- Prepare joints and apply sealant as section Z22.

670 OPEN DRAINED JOINTS:

- Ensure that rear seals are completely airtight and watertight.- Install baffles and flashings securely and accurately to ensure that they

function as intended.

680 DAMAGED UNITS: Do not repair without approval. Such approval will not begiven where the units are badly damaged or where the proposed repair wouldimpair appearance or performance.




SECTION 24: PRECAST CONCTETE PANEL CLADDING /FEATURES

TENDERING

010 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH TENDER- Submit the following cladding particulars:- Typical plan, section and elevation drawings at suitable scales.- Typical detailed drawings at large scales, including typical slab edge

detail and fixing and restraint details.- Technical information and certification demonstrating compliance with

specification of proposed incorporated products and finishes, includingThermal insulation, fire stopping, sealant .

- Certification, reports and calculations demonstrating compliance withspecification of proposed cladding.

- Proposals for connections to and support from the support structure/background.

- Proposals for additional support structure/ background to that shown onpreliminary design drawings.

- Schedule of builder‘s work, special provisions and special attendance byothers.

- Examples of standard documentation from which project quality plan willbe prepared.

- Preliminary fabrication and installation method statements andprogramme.

- Proposals for replacing damaged or failed products.- Areas of non-compliance with specification.

TYPE (S) OF CLADDING/FEATURES

110 PRECAST PANELS TO EXTERIOR WALL- Drawing reference(s): Architectural drawings, structural drawings + any

other relevant drawings.- Support structure. Insitu concrete frame and steel structure.- Panel Type: Solid/rebated vertical as shown on drawings.- Finish: smooth sandblasted finish to the fair side, smooth finish to vertical

rebates and horizontal bands all in natural YELLOW LIME tone colour to Architect‘s approval.

- Units: Nominal 150 mm thk. To meet structural requirements and sized tosuit the panel elevations.Mould material/lining: grp to manufacturers recommendations as clause410/411.

Aggregate: Medium exposed aggregate using Omani and Rawdhachipsto approval of Engineer to meet the design intent as per the controlsample.Matrix colour: to be advisedWork on surface: smooth

- Thermal Insulation.- Fixing: as clause 0430- Joints: 10-15mm open joints at other floor levels + any other as on

drawings to be filled with uv resistant mastic polyurethane sealant andbacking rod. Colour to match panels final colour. Provide weep holesintermittently as required at the joints.

- Accessories/features/incorporated components: complete with allaccessories and components necessary to provide features and designintent as shown on the drawings.

- Pattern: Horizontal bands and vertical rebates as indicated in elevationdrawings + as per control sample.




- Contractor to co-ordinate any MEP requirements with respect to AC/lighting etc.

DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

210 DESIGN: Complete the detailed design of the cladding and associated

features shown on the drawings in accordance with the requirements of thisspecification and the recommendations of BS 8297. Allow for necessary co-ordination and allowances as required for MEPinstallations such as Façade lighting or any.

215 INTEGRITY:- The cladding and associated features must be designed in accordance

with BS 8110 to resist all dead and live loads.- Wind loads may be calculated in accordance with CP 3:Chapter V: Part 2

using the following data:Basic wind speed (V): 45 m/sTopography factor (S1): 1.0Ground roughness, building size and height factor (S2) determined from

CP3: Chapter V:Part 2, table 3:Statistical factor (S3): 1.Make due allowance for any internal pressure.

- The cladding must accommodate without damage all drying shrinkage,creep, deflections and thermal movements.

- The precast units must be reinforced as necessary to resist shrinkage,handling stresses and service loads. Webs to framed units must bereinforced.

216 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN- Submit the following cladding particulars:- A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment.- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from cladding to the support

structure.- Proposed fixing details and systems relevant to structural design and

construction with methods of adjustment and tolerances.- Labelled samples, that represent the range of variation in panel finish, for

approval of appearance.- A schedule of fabrication tolerances/ size tolerances.- A detailed testing, fabrication and installation programme in compliance

with Main Contract master programme.- A quality plan in compliance with the CWCT ‗Guide to good practice for

facades‘, Section 6. - Proposals to support outstanding applications for Building Regulation

consents or relaxations.

218 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OFPRECAST CLADDING WORK:- Submit to the Engineer before testing or fabrication the following precast

cladding particulars:- Detailed drawing to fully describe fabrication and installation- Detailed calculations to prove compliance with all design/ performance

requirements.- Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements.- Certification for all incorporated components manufactured by others

confirming their suitability for all locations in the precast cladding.- Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.- Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of all

products.

220 WEATHER RESISTANCE:




- Provide collection grooves and drainage pipes to drain moisture from theinner face of panels and ventilate the cavity. Provide cavity trays overopenings and at junctions as necessary to prevent water from reachingthe inner fabric of the building.

- Prepare specimen samples of complete cladding units, including jointsbetween panels and seals around windows/ doors, as described in

clause 290. Carry out tests for air permeability, water penetration andwind resistance in accordance with BS 8297, section 5.- The cladding and associated features must be weathertight when tested

at the following peak test pressures: Air permeability test: 50 Pa.Water penetration test: 600 Pa.Wind resistance test for:

- Serviceability: Design wind pressure, but not less than 1200 Pa.- Safety: Design wind pressure, but not less than 1800 Pa.- Submit test results to the Engineer immediately they are available.

240 DURABILITY:- Subject to other specified requirements, the quality of concrete and

nominal cover to reinforcement (including secondary reinforcement) mustbe related and are to be chosen from the following:

Minimum acceptable concrete gradeto BS 5328 C40 C45 C50

Minimum cement content (kg/cu m)-With 20 mm aggregate-With 10 mm aggregate

325365

350390

400440

Maximum free water / cement ratio 0.55 0.50 0.45

Nominal cover (mm) for:-External faces of units and all edges-Internal faces completely protectedagainst weather

4030

3025

2520

- The above covers are for concrete made with normal, dense, low porosityaggregates. If water absorption of aggregates exceeds 5%:

- The maximum free water/cement ratio may be increased by 0.10- The nominal cover must be increased by 10mm.- Any units or parts thereof which will be subjected to more severe

wetting/freezing (e.g. copings, balustrades, parapets) must have 10 mmadditional cover on all exposed faces.

- Increase the nominal cover to allow for depth of exposure on exposed

aggregate finishes.- If galvanized or stainless steel reinforcement is to be used submitproposals for quality of concrete and nominal cover for approval.

242 DURABILITY:- Minimum concrete grade to BS 5328:C45.

Minimum cement content with 20 mm aggregate: 350 kg/cu mMinimum cement content with 10 mm aggregate: 390 kg/cu mMaximum free water/cement ratio: 0.50.

- Nominal cover to reinforcement on external faces of units and all edges:40 mm.

250 COVER WHEN USING SEPARATE FACING MIX (ES): Different mixes may

be used for facing and backing provided:- The difference in cement content is not more than 80 kg/cu m.




- The thickness of the facing mix is at least 10 mm greater than thenominal maximum size of aggregate, and in no case less than 25 mm.

- Reinforcement is not less than 20 mm away from the junction betweenmixes.

- The backing mix and facing mix are effectively monolithic, being placedand compacted within one hour of each other.

260 COVER WHEN USING RECONSTRUCTED STONE: A 25 mm thick facing mix of reconstructed stone as clause 320 may betaken as equivalent to 10 mm of the required concrete cover toreinforcement. A higher figure may be approved on submission ofsuitable evidence of impermeability.

270 DIMENSIONAL COORDINATION:- Detail cladding to ensure compliance with the specified requirements for

accuracy in manufacture and erection and to accommodate deviations inthe building structure.

- Select leveling and alignment devices, and types and methods of fixing,which will give ample adjustability in three dimensions.

- Liaise with the party responsible for construction of the building structureto ensure coordination of dimensions and tolerances.

- Submit details of the proposed system of tolerances and adjustments.

280 DESIGN SAMPLE: At an agreed stage in the detailed design work make asample of the proposed construction, size 3m x 3m consisting of minimum 2panels to include any openings and features. Samples to show intendedmethod of adjustment of PC units and to include all external and internalfinishes showing the proposed finish. Obtain approval of appearance beforeproceeding. Keep the approved sample at the factory for comparison with theproduction units.

290 MOCK-UP:

- At an agreed stage in the detailed design work construct a mock-up ofthe following:Mock-up:1. Two complete panels of two floor height position to be agreed with

Architect.2. One complete corner panel to two floor height to corner panel.

Purpose of mock-up: to review junctions, alignment co-ordinator withcurtain walling, and finish of paneling and to incorporate detailingchanges if required.

- Arrange for inspection to be carried out jointly with the Architect and/orarrange for tests as instructed. Obtain approval of appearance beforeproceeding.

MAKING CONCRETE

310 CONCRETE MIXES GENERALLY:- Constituent materials, composition of mixes, production of concrete,

information to be provided, sampling, testing and compliance to be inaccordance with BS 5328 unless otherwise specified.

- The total chloride ion content of the constituents of each mix, expressedas a percentage by weight of cement (including GGBS or PFA if used) inthe mix, must not exceed 0.4. Do not use admixtures containing calciumchloride.

- Rate of sampling for compressive strength testing: Not less than onesample for each day of use.

340 COMPLETE CORRELATED RECORDS must be maintained for each mix




type, including:- Composition of the mixes, including any admixtures.- Batch identification numbers related to the precast unit identification

numbers and test samples.- Results of slump and other tests carried out at the casting yard.- Laboratory test reports, including cube identification numbers.

350 TEST LABORATORY: All compressive strength testing to be carried out byone UKAS/NAMAS accredited or Dubai Municipality approved laboratory.Submit the name of the selected laboratory to Engineer as soon as possibleand in any case before commencing manufacture.

MANUFACTURE

410 MOULDS must be:- Of such construction that casting deviations can be readily controlled to

give compliance with clause 420.- Constructed to prevent loss of grout.- Designed to permit demoulding without damage to the units.

- Coated evenly with a suitable release agent, which must not be allowedto touch the reinforcement.

- Maintained in clean, sound condition and inspected carefully for defectsbefore each reuse. Damaged moulds must not be repaired and reused ifthis would impair the surface appearance of the units.

411 MOULDS: Inform Engineer when each mould is complete and not less than21 days before commencing manufacture of units. If GRP moulds are to beused inform Engineer when each master pattern is complete.

420 MANUFACTURING ACCURACY:- Finished dimensions of completed units to be such that the cladding,

when erected, complies with clause 630 and all sizes fall within the

permissible deviations given in BS 8297, table 11.- Check the overall dimensions, straightness, squareness, twist and

flatness of the mould(s) immediately before each reuse and of each unitas soon as possible after demoulding. Make adjustments to moulds asnecessary.

430 ALL fixings and adjustment devices must be of a suitable type of grade 316stainless steel. Lifting devices may be of mild steel provided they arerecessed and the subsequent filling with mortar provides the same amount ofcover as required for reinforcement in the panel.

435 LIFTING POINTS: Form in accordance with BS 8297, clause 3.2.6.2.

440 REINFORCEMENT:- In addition to reinforcement required for structural purposes, precast units

must be reinforced as necessary to resist shrinkage and handlingstresses.

- Type of reinforcement, unless otherwise specified: To BS 4449 and/or BS4483, cut and bent to BS 8666.

- Galvanized reinforcement: Galvanized to BS 729 after cutting, chromatetreated.

- Stainless steel reinforcement: To BS 6744, type 304 S31 or equivalent.- At time of placing concrete, reinforcement to be clean and free of

corrosive pitting, loose mill scale, loose rust, ice, oil and other substanceswhich may adversely affect the reinforcement, concrete, or bond betweenthe two.




- Fix accurately and securely using tying wire, approved steel clips, or tackwelding if permitted. Wire or clips must not encroach into the concretecover.

450 COVER SPACERS must not be used to concrete faces which will beexposed in the finished work. Where such faces are to be cast against a

mould submit details of proposed method of ensuring the specified cover.

460 UNIFORMITY OF METHOD: All exposed faces which are specified to be ofthe same finish must be identical in appearance. If different concrete mixes ormethods of producing such faces are proposed, submit evidence that therewill be no difference in appearance and obtain approval; otherwise all suchfaces must be produced in the same way.

480 CASTING AND CURING:- Thoroughly compact concrete by vibration (except for certain special

finishes which may, subject to approval, be dry rammed).- Do not demould units prematurely.- Prevent damage to and distortion of immature units from movement,

vibration, overloading, physical shock, rapid cooling and thermal shock.- Ensure that units are protected from sun and drying winds until they are

at least 5 days old.- Do not deliver units to site until at least 14 days after casting.

490 QUALITY OF FINISHES must be consistent throughout the contract.Components having arises or faces which are broken, chipped, cracked,crazed, honeycombed, irregular, inconsistent, stained or otherwise marredsuch that their appearance or performance is significantly impaired will not beaccepted.

500 PRODUCTION CONTROL UNIT(S):- The first unit produced of each of the type(s) listed below is to be

inspected by the Engineer and, if its appearance is approved, clearlymarked and kept safely at the factory as a control standard forappearance of subsequently produced units.

One standard panel and one corner panel- Control units to be delivered to site last.

510 INSPECTION: All completed units must be carefully inspected and checkedby the manufacturer for match with approved sample(s) or control unit(s) andcompliance with specification before despatch to site. Make arrangements forthe Engineer to inspect completed units in the factory.

520 RECORDS:- Keep complete records for each unit including the following information:

Unique identification number.Correlation with records of mixes, including batch numbers.Date of each stage of manufacture.Dates and results of all tests, checks and inspections.Dimensions related to specified levels of accuracy.Specific location in the finished work.Details of any damage and making good.

Any other pertinent data, e.g. if the unit is a production control unit.- Records to be available for inspection on request.

ERECTION/FIXING/JOINTING

610 ERECTION, FIXING OR JOINTING BY PERSONS OTHER THAN THEMANUFACTURER: The precast concrete manufacturer must:




- Provide clear and comprehensive instructions and ensure that they areunderstood by the site operatives.

- Provide adequate site supervision by suitably skilled person(s).

620 PROTECTION:- Prevent overstressing of units during transit, handling, storage and fixing.

Lift units at designed lifting points only, using special lifting devices andcradles as necessary (to be provided by the precast concretemanufacturer).

- Store units on level bearers clear of the ground and separate withresilient spacers.

- Prevent damage to units and any chipping, staining, marking or dirtyingof surfaces which will be visible in the completed work.

630 ACCURACY OF ERECTION:- Before commencing erection, survey the structure including any fixing

inserts. Report to Engineer immediately if structure will not allow therequired accuracy of erection.

- Set out joint centres for a complete elevation at a time unless otherwise

agreed with Engineer. Erect units using temporary spacers to suit thesurvey results and ensure generally consistent joint widths.

- Within the length of any joint (including in-line continuations acrosstransverse joints) the greatest width must not exceed the least width bymore than 3 mm. Any variation to be evenly distributed with no suddenchanges.

- The offset in elevation between nominally in-line edges across atransverse joint must not be more than 3 mm.

- The offset in plan or section between flat faces of adjacent panels acrossany joint must not be more than 3 mm.

- The widths of joints must be such as to ensure that the joints perform asintended and are within the recommendations of the joint sealant or bafflemanufacturer.

- Notwithstanding the tolerances stated above and in clause 420, thefinished work must have a satisfactory appearance, being square,regular, true to line, level and plane with a satisfactory fit at all junctions,all to approval.

640 FINAL FIXING:- Obtain approval of appearance of each elevation before tightening

fixings, filling bed joints and dowel pockets or sealing joints.- Tighten threaded fastenings to torque figures recommended by the

manufacturer. Do not overtighten restraint fixings intended to permitlateral movement.

- Dowel bars and recessed lifting devices must be filled with a fairly dry 1:4cement: sand mix or a suitable epoxy or polyester mix, well tamped in.

650 MORTAR BEDDING TO SUPPORTING STRUCTURE:- Ensure that surfaces are clean and free from frost, oil, dirt and debris.- Insert (if necessary during erection) a suitable compressible tube or

similar to prevent mortar from falling into the cavity or restricting freedomof relative movement between panels.

- Completely fill bed joint with a dry 1:3 cement: sand mix well rammed in.

660 SEALANT JOINTS:- Sealant: Polyurthane sealant with backing rods. Sonolastic NP2 (MBT) or

equal and approved.- Colour: to approval to match panel- Prepare joints and apply sealant as section Z22.

670 OPEN DRAINED JOINTS:




- Ensure that rear seals are completely airtight and watertight.- Install baffles and flashings securely and accurately to ensure that they

function as intended.

680 DAMAGED UNITS: Do not repair without approval. Such approval will not begiven where the units are badly damaged or where the proposed repair would

impair appearance or performance.



MIMAR EMIRATES CONSULTANTS

SECTION 25: SLOTTED ACOUSTICAL WOOD WALL/CEILINGPLANKS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wood planks that are slotted on the front side and perforated on the backside.

B. Sound absorbing blanket.

C. Hardware or ceiling suspension system as required for attachment to substrate.

D. Coordination with all trades having elements that attach to, penetrate throughor are concealed behind/above the wood planks of this section.

1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Sound Absorbing Blanket – Black, glass fiber (or mineral wool) 50 kg/m 3 (3 pcf)density.

B. Mounting hardware or ceiling suspension system.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 09250 – Gypsum Board

B. Section 09120 – Suspension Framing/Furring for Plaster/Gypsum Board Assemblies

C. Division 15 Sections – Mechanical Work

D. Division 16 Sections – Electrical Work

E. Division 17 Sections – Audio, Data, Telecommunication Work

1.04 ALTERNATES

A. Prior Approval: Proposed substitutions for products in this section may besubmitted to the architect and acoustical consultant no later than ten workingdays prior to the bid due date. Substitutions shall only be considered if submittedwith complete information including acoustic data and a sample not smaller than45 cm x 45 cm ( 18‖ x 18‖) showing product design, composition, size, slot/hole

pattern, veneer, finish, standard penetrations, standard joint and end conditionsand mounting hardware with suspension grid if applicable. Acceptance ofsubstituted products is contingent on the architect‘s and acoustical consultant‘sapproval and the substitution‘s compliance with all specified criteria. Thearchitect shall approve substitution request via addendum.

B. Unapproved Substitutions. Substitutions not approved via addendum shall not besubmitted to the architect or acoustical consultant.

1.05 REFERENCES

A. Local Building Code – Current Edition

B. ISO 354 - Measurement of sound absorption in a reverberation room.




C. American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM)1. ASTM C 423 - Sound Absorption & Sound Absorption Coefficients by the

Reverberation Room Method2. ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings3. ASTM C 636 - Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling

Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile & Lay-In Panel Ceilings4. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics ofBuilding Materials

5. ASTM E 795 -Standard Practice for Mounting Test Specimens duringSound Absorption Tests

6. ASTM E 1264 - Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products

1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements: Sound absorption shall be provided via twomechanisms: Transparency and Tuned Resonant Absorption. High frequencysound absorption shall be provided by allowing sound energy to pass throughthe wooden surface by means of slots and perforations. The energy shall then

be absorbed (converted to heat) by a non-woven matt adhered to the rearsurface and also by additional porous absorption placed behind/above theplank. Mid and low frequency sound absorption shall be provided via TunedResonant Absorption with a typical bell curve configuration. As required, extralow frequency sound absorption shall be provided by means of a dual diameterperforation (T hole) which transitions from a small face diameter to a larger reardiameter

B. Performance Requirements

1. Random Incidence, Octave Band, Sound Absorption Coefficients ( a ) andNoise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Tested by independent, accredited,facility according to ISO 354 with 30 mm thick mineral wool. (ComparableTests: ASTM C 423 Mount and ASTM E 795 Mount).

Topakustik (50 mmSystem)

Octave Band (Hz) AbsorptionCoefficients

Solid

Slot

Hole

Open 125 250 500 100

0200

0400

0NRC

9 2 M 6.0% 0.14

0.64

1.06 1.01 0.70 0.59 0.85

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit standard cutsheet including basic system description,options and component sizes. Identify all applicable features and options.Cross out any inapplicable features or options.

B. Shop Drawings: The contractor shall produce and submit shop drawings ofproducts and suspension or mounting systems overlaid on base drawings(interior elevations or reflected ceiling plans) supplied electronically by thearchitect. Show overall layout with dimensions and references to details asnecessary for penetrations, joints, ends and intersections with other materialsor building components. Submit schedule of all quantities, sizes, hole/slotpatterns, edge banding, borders, veneers and finishes. Field verifies siteconditions with dimensions shown on shop drawings.

C. Samples: Submit a 12.7 cm (5‖) x 10.2 cm (4‖) sample of core material withapproximate finish or veneer and black, nonwoven, fiber backing material.




D. Design Data / Test Reports: Submit octave band sound absorption coefficientdata and Noise Reduction Coefficient data according to ISO 354.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: Manufacturer and installation contractor shall have a minimum ofthree years‘ experience with similar systems.

B. Single Source: All products under this section shall be supplied by a singlemanufacturer to ensure consistency in product size and finish.

C. Pre-Installation Meeting: Installing contractor shall organize and conduct pre-installation meetings with all other trades to coordinate substrate conditions,conditioning of the space (temperature & humidity), and elements attaching to,penetrating through or concealed above/behind work in this section.

1.09 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver wood planks to the project site in themanufacturer‘s original, unopened packaging. Do not unpack or handlefinished products until the project environmental requirements have been metand the products are ready to be installed.

B. Storage and Protection: Store all wood planks and associated wood trim piecesin a clean, dry, fully-enclosed storage facility. Protect products from damagethat may be caused by exposure to water, chemicals, direct sunlight orinfestation.

C. Acceptance at Site: Ensure that all project environmental requirements havebeen met prior to unpacking or installing wood planks or associated wood trimproducts. Full or partial installation constitutes complete product acceptance.

D. Waste Management and Disposal: Dispose of all packaging materials anddebris in a safe and environmentally responsible manner according to theinstructions set forth by the General Contractor, local ordinances or codes andthe Environmental Protection Agency.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Project Environmental Requirements: Prior to unpacking or installing woodproducts, ensure that the installation area is fully enclosed and protected frommoisture and direct sunlight. Ensure that the building‘s mechanical systemsare fully operational and will not be turned off again even for testing andbalancing of the mechanical systems. Coordinate with other trades to ensurethat all work above or behind wood surfaces is complete and that all wet anddusty trades have completed work.

B. Product Acclamation: For a minimum period of seventy-two (72) hours and priorto unpacking or installing any wood products, allow both the installation areaand the wood products to stabilize in temperature and humidity levels that arerepresentative of the final temperature and humidity levels expected afterbuilding completion and occupation. Do not install products if the humidityexceeds 70%.

C. Product Handling: Handle wood planks carefully so as to avoid chipping,scratching, scuffing or denting the wood finish or edges.

1.11 WARRANTY




A. Submit to Owner or Owner‘s Representative a wri tten and dated warranty issuedby the wood ceiling/wall manufacturer warranting the wood planks and associatedtrim pieces against defects in materials or manufacturing for a period of one (1)year from the date of delivery.

B. Components used in the system but not provided by the manufacturer areexcluded from the manufacturer‘s warranty. Damage caused by exposure tomoisture or rapid or extreme changes to temperature or humidity are excludedfrom the manufacturer‘s warranty. Damage caused by improper stor age,handling, acclimatization, or installation is excluded from the warranty.

Appearances and colorings of wood products, stains and finishes can vary overtime and as site conditions change and are therefore excluded from the warranty.

1.12 OWNER‘S INSTRUCT IONS

A. Installing contractor shall provide to the building owner or to theowner‘s representative a copy of the manufacturer‘s maintenance manualsupplied with the planks.

1.13 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: If provided per the project requirements, extra materials shallremain in the manufacturer‘s original, unopened packaging and shall be givento the building owner or owner‘s representative upon substantial completion ofwork.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. NH AKUSTIK + DESIGN AG (TOPAKUSTIK-TOPPERFO)

Obseestrasse 11, CH-6078 Lungern / Switzerland, phone +41 41 679 70 58,fax +41 41 679 70 59, www.topakustik.com, [email protected]

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Core (standard): Medium density fiberboard (MDF) made of soft and hard woodfibers with added binding agen ts, 16 mm (0.67‖) thick or thickness on request.

B. Veneer:Natural Wood: European Maple (1 mm thickness).

C. Backing Fabric: Nonwoven, black, glass fiber matt, 60 g/m 2 (0.012 psf) surfaceweight.

2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Planks: (consult manufacturer for available combinations)1. Width: 128 m.2. Length: up to 3640 mm3. Thickness: 17 mm (natural wood veneer)4. Slot width: 2 mm5. Width between slots: 9 mm.6. Perforations (round)

a. M-Hole (single diameter): 6 mm or 8 mm7. Edge conditions

1. Tongue & Groove: 4 mm deep tongue or groove, no veneer,unfinished, perforations set back from edge (not visible).




2.04 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication Tolerances – 0.10 mm (slots & perforations); 0.50 mm (lengths &widths)

2.05 FINISHES

A. Shop Finishing: Planks shall be shop-finished semi-gloss varnish.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturing facility for planks shall be ISO 9001 certified and providecertification documentation upon request by Architect.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLERS

A. Installing contractor shall have a minimum of three (3) yearssuccessful experience installing ceilings and wall systems and must haveprevious experience in similar applications using similar mounting techniquesor suspension systems.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Examine installation area for compliance with allmanufacturers‘ project environmental requirements and ensure uninstalledproducts have been stored, handled and acclimatized properly prior tocommencing installation. Inspect all substrates for completion and quality ofwork to ensure that surfaces are level, plumb, clean, dry and completely curedfrom water or solvent evaporation. Do not commence installation if the

structural capacity of the substrate is questionable or inadequate.

B. Coordination with Other Trades: Coordinate with all other trades to ensure thatwet work including concrete, terrazzo, plastering, painting, etc. in theinstallation area is complete, cured and dry prior to installation. Coordinate withall other trades to verify that components associated with mechanical,electrical, lighting, data, telecommunication, audio, video, fire suppression andother building systems are installed behind or above designated installationareas prior to commencing installation. Coordinate the exact size, location andsequencing of building system components that penetrate the wood ceiling/wallplanks.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Protect all floor, wall and ceiling finishes against possible damageprior to commencing installation and during installation.

B. Surface Preparation: When necessary, field measure substrates to acquireaccurate dimensions of wood planks and submit final dimensions tomanufacturer.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Install wood planks as shown and detailed in the architectural drawings andaccording to manufacturer‘s guidelines and industry standard s.

B. Install wood planks with expansion/contraction gaps equal to 1 mm (1/32‖) forevery 1 meter (3.28‘) of length/width (3 mm minimum between planks).




3.05 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface With Other Work: Support all light fixtures, HVAC air inlet/outletdevices, speakers, signage, sprinkler heads/piping, etc. independently fromwood planks. Do not use wood planks to support the weight of any other

building element or component.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Following initial installation, adjust mounting hardware or suspension system sothat removable planks can be removed easily, yet stay safely secured uponreplacement. Adjust planks so that surfaces are aligned, flush and level orplumb and gaps in between units are of a consistent width and straight.

B. Check that manufacturer‘s e xpansion/contraction requirements weremaintained during installation. As required, adjust the mounting hardware orsuspension system to allow for the appropriate amount of productexpansion/contraction.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Remove dust from surfaces, grooves and penetrations by vacuuming using only asoft brush. Do not scratch wood surfaces with sharp metal or plastic vacuumcleaner extensions. Remove pencil marks with soft erasure. Remove generalsurface dirt with a clean, soft cloth dampened with a diluted, mild, cleaningagent and warm water. Wipe again with clean, soft cloth dampened only withwarm water. Finally, dry surface completely with clean, dry cloth. Do not useabrasive cleaners with grit or cloths that could scratch the wood finish.

B. Remove and replace at no additional charge any materials that cannot becleaned to the Owner‘s satisfaction.

3.08 Local Supplier:Optimum llcTel: 0097126422045Fax: 0097126422049Email: [email protected]

[email protected]

END OF SECTION











SECTION 26: RUBBER/ PLASTICS/ CORK/ LINO/ CARPET TILING/ SHEETING

TYPES OF COVERING

130 CARPET TILING- Location: As indicated in the schedule of finishes and drawings.- Base: Existing concrete slab or concrete screed.

- Preparation: As clause 440.- Fabricated underlay: As recommended by the carpet manufacturer to

approval.- Carpet tiles:

- Manufacturer: To approval.Product reference: To approval.

- Type: Tufted multilevel pattern loop.- BS EN 1307 classification:

Category: Public and Commercial.Level of use class: 33.Luxury rating class: To be confirmed.

- Size: 500 mm x 500 mm.- Colour/ pattern: To approval.

- Method of laying: Fully adhere every eight row with release adhesiverecommended by the manufacturer such as N5000 low VOC (nosolvents) carpet tile adhesive.

- Accessories: Carpet edge guards as clause 746 to approval in locationsas in the drawings, all other accessories as required and recommendedby the carpet manufacturer.

- Other requirements: On top of existing marble floor lay loosely withoutusing any takifier.

130 RUBBER FLOORING- REGUPOL ® EVEROLL- Elastic pre-manufacturedflooring mat made from selected bound with polyurethane- Location: As indicated in the schedule of finishes and drawings.- Base: Existing concrete slab or concrete screed.

- Preparation: As clause 440.- Fabricated underlay: As recommended by the product manufacturer to

approval.

Technical data Standards Regupol® Everoll

Thickness 4mmSpecific Weight approx 1015 kg/ mWeight per m 2 approx 4.06 kg/ m 2 Tensile Strength DIN 53 571, Specimen B approx 2.2 N/mm 2 Elongation at Break DIN 53 571, Specimen B approx 115%Tear Resistance DIN 53 515 approx 14.5 N/mmTemperatureResistance

-40° to 115° C

Fire Resistance DIN 4102 Class B2Stain Resistance ASTM D543

Ammonia No changeBleach Slight changeUnleaded petrol No changeNa0H Slight change

HC1 Severe changeH2S04 Moderate change




Rubbing Alcohol No changeMotor Oil 10W-30 Moderate changeOlive Oil Moderate changeMechanical Grease Severe change

Slip Resistance AS4586:1999 Appendix C: Wet/BarefootRamp

Class C

Appendix D: Oil Wet Ramp Class R10Fire Ratings Spread of flame index 9

Smoke development index 7

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

210 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY- Base condition after preparation: Rigid, dry, sound, smooth and free from

grease, dirt and other contaminants.- Finished coverings: Accurately fitted, tightly jointed, securely bonded,

smooth and free from air bubbles, rippling, adhesive marks and stains.

220 SAMPLES- Covering samples: Before placing orders, submit representative sample

of each type.

230 CONTROL SAMPLES- General: Complete areas of finished work in approved locations as

follows, and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding: toapproval.

250 LAYOUT – ROLL MATERIALS- Setting out of seams: Before placing orders agree setting out forsheeting types M50/ 130.

251 LAYOUT – SEAMS IN ROLL MATERIALS- Setting out: Minimize occurrences of seams and cross seams.- Cross seams: Not permitted in following locations: To approval.

252 LAYOUT – PATTERNS- Setting out: Before placing orders agree setting out for covering types

M50/130 .

270 EXTRA MATERIAL- Provision of extra material: At completion, hand to Employer extra

material of each type of covering to extent of 2%.

330 COMMENCEMENT- Required condition of works prior to laying materials:

- Building is weathertight and well dried out.- Wet trades have finished work.- Paintwork is finished and dry.- Conflicting overhead work is complete.- Floor service outlets, duct covers and other fixtures around which

materials are to be cut are fixed.- Notification: Submit not less than 48 hours before commencing laying.

340 CONDITIONING




- Prior to laying: Condition materials by unpacking and separating inspaces where they are to be laid. Maintain resilient flooring rolls in anupright position. Unroll carpet and keep flat on a supporting surface.

- Conditioning time and temperature (minimum): As recommended bymanufacturer with time extended by a factor of two for materials stored ortransported at a temperature of less than 10°C immediately prior to

laying.

350 ENVIRONMENT- Temperature and humidity: Before, during and after laying, maintain

approximately at levels which will prevail after building is occupied.- Ventilation: Before during and after laying, maintain adequate provision.

360 FLOORS WITH UNDERFLOOR HEATING- Commencement of laying: Not before a period of 48 hours after heating

has been turned off.- Post laying start up of heating system: Slowly return heating to its

operative temperature not less than 48 hours after completing laying.

PREPARING BASES

410 NEW BASES- Suitability of bases and conditions within any area:- Commencement of laying of coverings will be taken as acceptance of

suitability.

420 EXISTING BASES- Notification: Before commencing work, confirm that existing bases will,

after preparation, be suitable to receive coverings.- Suitability of bases and conditions within any area:- Commencement of laying of coverings will be taken as acceptance of

suitability.

430 NEW WET LAID BASES- Base drying aids: Not used for at least four days prior to moisture content

testing.- Base moisture content test: Carry out in accordance with BS 5325,

Annexe A or BS 8203, Annexe A.- Locations for readings: In all corners, along edges, and at various points

over area being tested.- Commencement of laying coverings: Not until all readings show 75%

relative humidity or less.

440 SUBSTRATES TO RECEIVE THIN COVERINGS- Trowelled finishes: Uniform, smooth surface free from trowel marks and

other blemishes. Abrade suitably to receive specified floor coveringmaterial.

461 SMOOTHING/ LEVELLING UNDERLAYMENT COMPOUND- Manufacturer: To approval.

- Product reference: To approval.

470 EXISTING FLOOR COVERINGS REMOVED- Substrate: Clear of covering and as much adhesive as possible. Skim

with smoothing underlayment compound to give smooth, even surface.

480 EXISTING FLOOR COVERINGS TO BE OVERLAID- Substrate: Make good by local resticking and patching or filling with

smoothing underlayment compound to give smooth, even surface.




510 WOOD BLOCK FLOORING- Substrate: Clean and free from wax with all blocks sound and securely

bonded. Fill hollows with smoothing underlayment compound to givesmooth, even surface.

- Missing and loose blocks: Replace and reset in adhesive to match

existing. Sand or plane to make level.

520 TIMBER BOARDING/ STRIP FLOORING- Substrate: Boards securely fixed and acceptably level with no protruding

fasteners. Plane, sand or apply smoothing underlayment compound togive a smooth, even surface.

530 PARTICLEBOARD FLOORING- Substrate: Boards securely fixed, level and free from surface sealers and

contaminants.- Gaps between boards: Not more than 1 mm.- Priming: As required by covering adhesive manufacturer.

- Equilibrium moisture content at time of laying covering: As in service

conditions.

535 PARTICLEBOARD FLOATING FLOORING- Substrate: Boards securely fixed and free from surface sealers and

contaminants.- Level: Sand to remove areas raised more than 1 mm.

- Gaps between boards: Not more than 1 mm.- Priming: As required by covering adhesive manufacturer.

- Equilibrium moisture content at time of laying covering: As in serviceconditions.

LAYING COVERINGS

610 SETTING OUT TILES- Method: Set out from centre of area/ room, so that wherever possible:

- Tiles along opposite edges are of equal size.- Edge tiles are more than 50% of full tile width.

620 COLOUR CONSISTENCY- Finished work in any one area/ room: Free from banding or patchiness.

640 ADHESIVE FIXING GENERALLY- Adhesive: Type to be as specified, recommended by covering/ underlay

manufacturer or as approved.- Primer: Use and type as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.- Application: As necessary to achieve good bond.- Finished surface irregularities: Trowel ridges and high spots caused by

particles on the substrate not acceptable.

650 SEAMS- Patterns: Matched.- Joints: Tight without gaps.

670 BORDERS/ FEATURE STRIPS IN SHEET MATERIAL- Application: Cut strips along length of sheet to prevent curl.- Corners: Mitre joints.

680 SEAM WELDING COVERINGS- Commencement: Not before a period of 24 hours after laying, or until

adhesive has set.- Joints: Neat, smooth, strongly bonded, flush with finished surface.




690 SEAM BONDING CARPET- Carpet types: M50/130.- Seaming adhesive application: Continuous bead to edges.- Joints: Securely bonded, free of air bubbles.

700 LOOSE LAID CARPET TILES- Areas of adhered tiles: Secure using double sided tape or peelableadhesive.

- Joints: Tightly butted.- Perimeter joints: Accurately cut to match abutment and prevent

movement.

720 DOORWAYS- Joint location: On centre line of door leaf.

740 EDGINGS/ COVER STRIPS- Manufacturer: To approval.

- Product reference: To approval .

- Material/ finish: Stainless Steel/ Brushed..- Fixing: Secure (using matching fasteners where exposed to view) with

edge of covering gripped.

750 STAIR NOSINGS/ TRIM- Manufacturer: To approval.

- Product reference: To approval.- Material/ finish: Polished Stainless Steel.- Fixing: Secure, level with mitred joints. Adjusted to suit thickness of

covering with continuous packing strips of hardboard or plywood. Nosingand packing strips bedded in gap-filling adhesive recommended bynosing manufacturer.- Screw fixing with matching plugs: Required.

760 STAIR COVERINGS – SEPARATE RISERS AND TREADS- Fixing: Accurately cut. Fit risers before treads.

770 SKIRTINGS- Types: To drawings.- Manufacturer: To approval.

- Product reference: To approval.- Fixing: Secure with top edge straight and parallel with floor.

- Corners: Mitre joints.

780 TRAFFICKING AFTER LAYING- Covering types: To approval.- Traffic free period: To adhesive manufacturers‘ recommendation.

COMPLETION

820 FINISHING- Cleaning operations:

- Wash floor with water containing neutral (pH 6-9) detergent. Ifnecessary, lightly scrub heavily soiled areas.

- Rinse with clean water, removing surplus to prevent damage toadhesive. Allow to dry.

- Emulsion polish: Two coats of a type recommended by coveringmanufacturer.

825 FINISHING NON –TEXTILE ANTISTATIC FLOORING- Cleaning operations:




- Wash floor with water containing neutral (pH 6-9) detergent. Ifnecessary, lightly scrub heavily soiled areas.

- Rinse with clean water, removing surplus to prevent damage toadhesive. Allow to dry for not less than 24 hours before testing.

830 FINISHING RUBBER FLOORING

- Cleaning operations:- Wash floor with a cleaner recommended by covering manufacturer.- Wet vacuum or mop up residue.- Rinse with clean water. Wet vacuum or mop up and allow to dry.

- Final treatment: Follow recommendations of covering manufacture andspray buff with wetting agent or dry burnish.

840 FINISHING RUBBER FLOORING- Cleaning operations:

- Wash floor with a cleaner recommended by covering manufacturer.- Wet vacuum or mop up residue.- Rinse with clean water. Wet vacuum or mop up and allow to dry.

- Polishing: Apply two coats of buffable or semibuffable polish of a type

recommended by covering manufacturer.

850 FINISHING CORK TILE FLOORING – POLISH FINISH- Preparation: Lightly sand joints to remove any lipping. Match original

finish.- Cleaning operations:

- Remove dust and wash, using water containing a neutral detergent. Allow to dry.

- Sealing: Apply a water based seal of a type and number of coatsrecommended by cork manufacturer. Allow each coat to dry. Dry burnish.

- Emulsion polish: Two coats of a type recommended by corkmanufacturer. Dry burnish each coat.

851 FINISHING CORK TILE FLOORING – POLYURETHANE FINISH- Preparation: Lightly sand joints to remove any lipping. Match original

finish.- Cleaning operations:

- Remove dust and wash with water containing a neutral detergent. Allow to dry.

- Polyurethane varnish: Apply a type and number of coats recommendedby cork manufacturer. Allow each coat to dry.

860 TESTING ANTISTATIC FLOORING- Flooring to be tested: M50/130.- Test methods: BS 2050 Clause A4.1.- Required electrical resistance values:

- Upper limit: Average value not more than as per BS 2050.No individual reading more than as per BS 2050.

- Lower limit: Average value not less than as per BS 2050.No individual reading less than as per BS 2050.

- Electrical resistivity: Submit and agree date and time of test.Record and submit results.

- Flooring details sign: Before fixing, agree location and submit details of abrass plate, size 50 x 75 mm, engraved with the following details:The words ‗ANTISTATIC FLOOR‘. Manufacturer and reference of flooring.Name of flooring contractor.Date when laid.




880 WASTE- Spare covering material: Retain suitable material for patching.

On completion submit pieces for selection. Hand over selected pieces toEmployer.




SECTION 27: FIRESTOPPING

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Section, apply to workspecified in this section.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity offire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread offlame, smoke, and hot gases through penetrations in/ joints between fire ratedwall and floor assemblies.

1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION

Only tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows:

A. Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping,electrical busways and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls andpartitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical serviceshaft walls and partitions.

B. Safing slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and curtain walls.

C. Openings between structurally separate sections of wall or floors.

D. Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies.

E. Expansion joints in walls and floors.

F. Openings and penetrations in fire-rated partitions or walls containing fire doors.

G. Openings around structural members which penetrate floors or walls.

1.04 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to

properly execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progressof the work of other sections, including:

1. Cast-In-Place Concrete2. Joint Sealers3. Masonry Work4. Lath and Plaster5. Gypsum Drywall Systems6. Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control7. Fire Suppression and Supervisory Systems8. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods9. Mechanical Insulation

10. Fire Protection11. Plumbing12. Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

1.05 REFERENCES




A. Test Requirements: ASTM E-814-02, "Standard Method of Fire Tests ofThrough Penetration Fire Stops"

B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL runs ASTM E-814 under theirdesignation of UL 1479 and publishes the results in their "FIRE RESISTANCEDIRECTORY" that is updated annually.

1. UL Fire Resistance Directory:

a. Firestop Devices (XHJI)b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXUV)c. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW)e. Forming Materials (XHKU)2. Alternate ―Omega Point Laboratories Directory‖ (updated

annually).

C. Test Requirements: UL 2079, ―Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joi ntSystems‖ (July 1998.)

D. Test Requirements: ASTM E 1966- 01, ―Standard test method for Fire ResistiveJoint Systems‖

E. Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174 – 01, ―Standard Practice for On -siteInspection of Installed Fire Stops.‖

F. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop SystemsEngineering Judgments

G. ASTM E-84-01, Standard Test Method for Surface BurningCharacteristics of Building Materials.

H. All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC.(Note to specifier: Retain or delete building codes listed above as

applicable)

I. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code

J. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code


A. A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-siteduring initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractorpersonnel in proper selection and installation procedures. This will be done permanufacturer's written recommendations published in their literature anddrawing details.

B. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E-814, UL 1479or UL 2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that ofconstruction being penetrated.

C. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governingcodes having local jurisdiction.

D. Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearingpartitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consultthe structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.




restrictions.D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in

material safety data sheets as applicable.E. Do not use damaged or expired materials.


A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.

B. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating iteminstallation but prior to covering or concealing of openings.

C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correctunsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.

D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials whentemperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations forinstallation printed on product label and product data sheet.

E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestoppingmaterials from contaminating any adjacent surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with eachother, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating thefirestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated bythe firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fillmaterial. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer andapproved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.

C. Firestoppi ng Materials are either ―cast -in-place‖ (integral with concreteplacement) or ―post installed.‖ Provide cast -in-place firestop devices prior toconcrete placement.


A. Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems and jointsystems listed in Volume 2 of the UL Fire Resistance Directory; provideproducts of the following manufacturers as identified below:

1. Hilti – Emirates L.L.CPO Box : 11051 ,Dubai, U.A.E.TEL: 800-44584, 048854445, FAX: 048854405Web site: www.hilti.ae

2. Provide products from the above acceptable manufacturer.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E-814, or UL 2079tested for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to constructionassembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-




rating involved for each separate instance.

B. Cast-in place firestop devices for use with non-combustible and combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems) penetrating concrete floors, thefollowing products are acceptable:

1. Hilti CP 680N Cast-In Place Firestop Device2. Hilti CP 681 Tub Box Kit for use with tub installations.3. Hilti CP 682 Cast-In Place Firestop Device for use withnoncombustible penetrants

C. Sealants, intumescent material or foams for use with non-combustible itemsincluding steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallictubing (EMT), the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant2. Hilti CP 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant3. Hilti CP 620 Expanding Fire Foam4. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant

5. Hilti CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant

D. Sealants and intumescent materials for use with sheet metal ducts, thefollowing products are acceptable:

1. Hilti CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant2. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant3. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant

E. Sealants and spray materials for use with fire-rated construction

joints, soffit joints (top of the wall joints) and other gaps, the following products are

acceptable:

1. Hilti CFS SP WB Speed Spray2. Hilti CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant3. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant

F. Sealants and Spray materials used for Curtain wall Joints (openings betweenSlab and Curtain Wall), the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti CFS SP WB Speed Spray2. Hilti CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant

3. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant4. Hilti CP 604 Self-Leveling Firestop Sealant

G. Pre-formed mineral wool designed to fit flutes of metal profile deckand gap between top of wall and metal profile deck; as a backer for spraymaterial.

1. Hilti CP 677 Speed Plugs2. Hilti CP 767 Speed Strips

H. Intumescent sealants for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed byhigh heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexiblecable or cable bundles and plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant




I. Foams, intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexiblecable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant2. Hilti CP 620 Expanding Fire Foam

3. Hilti CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant4. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant

J. Non curing, re-penetrable intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials foruse with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick2. Hilti CP 658T / CP 656 Firestop Plug

K. Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic andspecified nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad

L. Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustibleplastic pipe (closed and open piping systems), the following products areacceptable:

1. Hilti CP 643N Firestop Collar2. Hilti CP 644 Firestop Collar3. Hilti CP 648-E / CP 648-S Wrap Strips

M. Materials used for complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays,multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the followingproducts are acceptable:

2. Hilti CP 636 Cement-based Firestop Mortar3. Hilti CP 637 Gypsum-based Firestop Mortar4. Hilti CP 657 Firestop Flexible Bricks

5. Hilti CP 620 Expanding Fire Foam

N. Non curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrationsmade to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electricalbusways in raceways, the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti CP 657 Fire Flexible Bricks

2. Hilti CP 675T Firestop BoardO. Sealants and Spray materials used for openings between structurally separate

sections (Expansion Joints) of walls and floors, the following products areacceptable:

1. Hilti CFS SP WB Speed Spray2. Hilti CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant5. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant6. Hilti CP 604 Self-Leveling Firestop Sealant

P. For blank openings made in fire-rated wall or floor assemblies, where futurepenetration of pipes, conduits, or cables is expected, the following products are

acceptable:

1. Hilti CP 657 Fire Flexible Bricks




2. Hilti CP 658T Firestop Plug

Q. Provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E814 which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.

R. Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work isto be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timelycompletion.

1. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for

application of materials.

2. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt,grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and anyother substances that may affect proper adhesion.

3. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacentsurfaces by firestopping materials.

4. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature andhumidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping.

7. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location and proper selection of cast-in-place Firestop Devices with trade responsiblefor the work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete.

B. Responsible trades to provide adequate spacing of field run pipes to allow forinstallation of cast-in-place firestop devices without interferences.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL FireResistance Directory or Omega Point Laboratories Directory.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions forinstallation of through-penetration and construction joint materials.

1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air andwater resistant seal.

2. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and dampermanufacturer prior to installation of UL firestop systems that mighthamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work.




3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before

concealing or enclosing areas.

B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable codeauthorities.

C. Inspection of through-penetration firestopping shall be performed inaccordance with ASTM E 2174, ―Standard Practice for On -Site Inspection ofInstalled Fire Stops‖ or other recognized standard.

D. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused bycutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by othertrades.

3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, cleancondition.

B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess firestopmaterials and soiling as work progresses.




SECTION 28: FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Section, apply to workspecified in this section.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity offire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread offlame, smoke, and hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floorassemblies.

1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION

Only tested and listed firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows:

A. Safing slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and perimeter curtain walls.

B. Openings between structurally separate sections of wall or floors.

C. Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies.

D. Expansion joints in walls and floors.

1.04 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS

A. Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required toproperly execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progressof the work of other sections, including:

1. Cast-In-Place Concrete2. Masonry Work3. Through-penetration Firestop Systems4. Joint Sealers5. Glazed Curtain Wall6. Lath and Plaster7. Gypsum Drywall Systems

1.05 REFERENCES

A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Fire Resistance Directory, Volume II,updated annually:

1. Joint Systems (XHBN)2. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems (XHDG)3. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXRH)4. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW)5. Forming Materials (XHKU)

B. Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (OPL) Listed Products Directory, Volume II,updated annually:

1. Fire Resistant Joint Systems

C. ASTM E 1966, ―Standard Test Method for Fire -Resistive Joint Systems‖




D. ASTM E 1399, ―Test Method for Cyclic Movement and Measuring the Minimumand Maximum Joint Width of Architectural Joint Systems‖

E. ASTM E 84, ―Standa rd Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics ofBuilding Materials‖

F. ASTM E 2174, ―Standard Practice for On -Site Inspection of Installed FireStops‖

G. ASTM E 2307, ―Standard Test Method for Determining the Fire Endurance ofPerimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test Apparatus‖

H. ANSI/UL 2079, ―Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems‖ I. International Firestop Council Recommended (IFC) Guidelines for Evaluating

Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments

J. All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC.

K. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code


A. A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-siteduring initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractorpersonnel in proper selection and installation procedures. This will be done permanufacturer's written recommendations published in their literature anddrawing details.

B. Firestop System installation shall meet requirements of ASTM E 1966 and/or ANSI/UL 2079 tested and listed assemblies that provide fire-resistance ratingsnot less than that of the construction in which the joint occurs.

C. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governingcodes having local jurisdiction.

D. Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearingpartitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consultthe structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.

E. For those firestop applications that exist for which no tested and listed systemis available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived fromsimilar tested and listed system designs or other tests will be submitted to localauthorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation.Engineering judgment drawings shall follow requirements set forth by theInternational Firestop Council.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data foreach material including the composition and limitations, documentation oftested and listed firestop systems to be used and manufacturer's installationinstructions to comply with Section 1300.

B. Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and drawing detailswhen no tested and listed system is available for an application. Engineering

judgment shall include both project name and contractor‘s name who will installfirestop system as described in drawing.

C. Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job-site.

1.08 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS




A. Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwisequalified by the firestopping manufacturer as having been provided thenec essary training to install manufacturer‘s products per specifiedrequirements. A manufacturer‘s willingness to sell its firestopping products tothe Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself

confer qualification on the buyer.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopenedcontainers, identified with brand, type, and UL or OPL label, where applicable.

B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allowminimum storage time at job-site.

C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage incompliance with manufacturer's requirements, including temperaturerestrictions.

D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described inmaterial safety data sheets as applicable.

E. Do not use damaged or expired materials.


A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.

B. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating iteminstallation but prior to covering or concealing of openings.

C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correctunsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.

D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials whentemperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations forinstallation printed on product label and product data sheet.

E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestoppingmaterials from contaminating any adjacent surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with eachother and substrates forming joints under conditions of service and application,as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and fieldexperience.

B. Provide components for each fire-resistive joint system that are needed toinstall fill material. Use only components specified by the firestoppingmanufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designatedfire-resistance-rated systems.


A. Subject to compliance with joint systems (XHBN) listed in Volume II of the UL




Fire Resistance Directory or OPL Listed Products Directory; provide productsof the following manufacturers as identified below:

1. Hilti – Emirates L.L.CPO Box : 11051 ,Dubai, U.A.E.TEL: 800-44584, 048854445, FAX: 048854405

Web site: www.hilti.ae

2. Provide products from the above acceptable manufacturer; nosubstitutions will be accepted.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Use only firestop products that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E1966 and/or ANSI/UL 2079 for specific rated construction conditionsconforming to construction assembly type, movement capability, spacingrequirements, and fire-resistance-rating involved for each separate instance.

B. Sealants for use with fire-resistance-rated construction joints, the followingproducts are acceptable:

1. Hilti CP 672 Speed Spray or equivalent.2. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant or equivalent.3. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant or equivalent.4. Hilti CP 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant or equivalent.

C. Sealants for use as part of a Perimeter Fire Barrier System between fire-resistance-rated floors and exterior wall assemblies, the following products areacceptable:

1. Hilti CP 672 Speed Spray or equivalent.

2. Hilti CP 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant or equivalent.

D. Pre-formed mineral wool designed to fit flutes of metal profile deck and gapbetween top of wall and metal deck profile; use as a backer for spraymaterial.

3. Hilti CP 777 Speed Plugs or equivalent.4. Hilti CP 767 Speed Strips or equivalent.

E. Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by ASTM E1966 and/or ANSI/UL 2079 which is equal to the fire-resistance ratings of theconstruction in which the joint occurs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work isto be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timelycompletion.

1. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt,grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any

other substances that may affect proper adhesion.

2. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent




SECTION 29: PLANTING

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 Scope

1.1.1 The scope of this section includes the preparation of planted areas and the supply,planting, protection and maintenance of trees, shrubs, vines, groundcover plants andgrass of the species and size shown on the drawings. The section covers theprovision of qualified labor, equipment, and material necessary to carry out alloperations required for landscaping herein specified and shall be read in conjunctionwith all other relevant sections of the Specification.

1.2 Quality Standards

1.2.1 The following British Standards are applicable:

BS 3936 - Part 1:1992 Nursery Stock. Part 1. Specification for Trees and ShrubsBS 4428-1989 Code of Practice for General Landscape Operations

1.3 Submittals

1.3.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant information and certificates formaterials to be used for this Contract for approval. Such submittals shall include, butnot be limited to the following:

a) Shop Drawings The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of the planting plans and details to theConsultant for review and action.

b) Product DataSubmit manufacturers certified data analysis of all standard products, includingfertilizers, soil amendments, herbicides, pesticides, fungicides, showingdescription of ingredients, and recommendations for usage and application ratesfor each material to be used.

c) Samples- Samples of all materials to be used in this contract shall be submitted for

approval. The approved samples shall be the quality standard for the materialand its placement.

- All plant material shall be approved for inspection at the site nursery from whereit is sourced, prior to planting.

- The Landscape Consultant shall reserve the right to reject any plant materialdeemed unacceptable which shall then be replaced with approved specimens

d) Certifications & Quality Control - A certified analysis by an approved laboratory for non-standard products (soil,

compost).- Certificates confirming the origin, size and age of all plant material- Phytosanitary certificates for all imported plant material.- Turf: submit certification from the grower for the type and trueness to the

grass variety or strain.




Appendix 1: Schedule of Site Offices and Facilities

APPENDIX “ 1“

SCHEDULE OF SITE OFFICES AND FACILITIES

The office requirements on this contract are as follows:

RoomNo. Description No. of

Rooms

Total Area in m 2 Size ofRoom Room FurniturePer

roomTotalArea

1Managerial Staff (withappropriate size privatetoilet)

1 17 17 4.2 x 4 m

Computer – 1, TV Projector – 1, Chair – 1, Table – 1,

Visitors Chair – 2, Sofa Set – 3, Filing Cabinet – 2

2Executive Staff (withappropriate size privatetoilet)

2 17 34 4.2 x 4 mComputer – 2, Chair – 2,Table – 2, Visitors Chair – 4,Filing Cabinet – 2

3 Staff Room 2 17 34 4.2 x 4 mComputer – 2, Chair – 2,Table – 2, Visitors Chair – 4,Filing Cabinet – 2

4 Reception 1 17 17 4.2 x 4 mComputer – 2, Chair – 2,Table – 2, Visitors Chair – 4,Filing Cabinet – 4

5 Sample Room 1 17 17 4.2 x 4 m

6 Pantry 2 3.8 7.6 1.9 x 2 m

7 Toilet 3 3.2 9.6 1.6 x 2 m

8 Meeting Room 1 26 26 6.4 x 4 mTV Projector – 1, Chair – 25,Table – 6, Sofa Set – 4,Filing Cabinet – 4




Appendix 2: No Objection Certificates (NOC)

- Affection plan

- Nakheel Preliminary approval

- Nakheel Revalidated Preliminary Approval

- DEWA Elec. NOC

- DEWA Water NOC

- DU NOC

- Infrastructure NOC

- Lootah Gas NOC

- Trakhees Preliminary Approval

- Trakhees Revalidated Preliminary Approval



Ref: IC3-B-37-SNO34140-114063 -13-UP Date: 03-10- 2013

M/s. M.E. Engineering ConsultantsP.O. BOX: 119487DubaiE-Mail: [email protected]

Development : NakheelCommunity: International city / Warsan Fourth 624Plot No : IC3-B-37Project ID : P12664Project Type : ResidentialBuilding Description : Proposed (B+G+5 floors) Residential Building + Swimming pool at 1st floorLessee : M/s. Jassim Faisal M. T. Al Thani

Subject: Concept Design Approval

Reference submittal for concept design approval for the above mentioned plot via your letter ref: ME/1673/13-378 dated 24.09.2013 Received in Trakhees-CED on 30.09.2013.

We hereby have No objection on submitted concept design to Civil Engineering Department in compliance withthe DCR.

General Conditions:

CED review is not extended to green building regulations.

This Concept Design NOC is valid for six months from the date of issue.

Yours faithfully,

Eng. Fatema Al ShehhiManager – Architectural Engineering

(HK )

Design concept approval is limited only to conceptual stage and no construction activities shall beexecuted.

Any changes occurring subsequent to the concept design approval prior to obtaining Building Permitrequires further approval from CED - TRAKHEES.

All changes / amendments on concept approval require Master Developer approval prior to submittingapplication for revision.

All outstanding comments if any shall be incorporated prior to final submission for Building Permit .

All new Trakhees regulations and design guidelines shall be adapted to the concept approval unlessBuilding Permit has been obtained for this project.






Ref: NOC-IC3-B37 -SNO37583-118576-14-UP Date: 14-04- 2014

M/s. M. E. ENGINEERING CONSULTANTSDubai, U.A.E

Attention: The Manger E-mail: [email protected]

Development : NakheelCommunity: International city / Warsan Fourth 624Plot No : IC3-B-37Project ID : P12664Project Type : ResidentialBuilding Description : Proposed (B+G+5 floors) Residential Building + Swimming pool at 1st floorLessee : M/s. Jassim Faisal M. T. Al Thani

Subject: Concept Design Revalidation

Dear Sir;

Reference submittal for concept design approval for the above mentioned plot via your letter ref: ME/1471/14-378received in Trakhees-CED/Architectural section on 07.04.2014. We hereby have approved with comments on submittedconcept design to Civil Engineering Division in compliance with the DCR & below conditions.

General Conditions:

Design concept approval is limited only to conceptual stage and no construction activities shall beexecuted.

Any changes occurring subsequent to the concept design approval prior to obtaining BuildingPermit.

All changes / amendments on concept approval require Master Developer approval prior to

submitting application for revision. All outstanding comments shall be incorporated prior to final submission for Building Permit. All new Trakhees regulations and design guidelines shall be adapted to the concept approval

unless Building Permit has been obtained for this project. CED review is not extended to green building regulations

This Concept Design NOC is valid for six months from the date of issue.

Yours faithfully,

Eng. Fatema Al ShehhiManager – Architectural Engineering

(HK )

Cc: M file








Appendix 3: List of Approved Suppliers

LIST OF APPROVED ARCHITECTURAL/CIVIL PRODUCTS, MANUFACTURERS &SUPPLIERS

LIST OF MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS

GENERAL NOTES:

ALL REFERENCES WITHIN THE SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS OF THIS CONTRACT TO TRADENAMES OF PRODUCTS, MANUFACTURERS AND TRADE MARKS ARE INTENDED AS DEFINITIONOF MINIMUM STANDARD OF WORK REQUIRED UNDER THIS CONTRACT. THE CONTRACTORMAY USE OTHER MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT OR FITTINGS WHICH FULFIL THE FOLLOWINGREQUIREMENTS PROVIDED IT IS NOTIFIED AT TENDER STAGE:

A. BE EQUAL OR SUPERIOR IN QUALITY TO THE SPECIFIED ITEM.

B. DOES NOT ENTAIL CHANGES IN CONSTRUCTION DETAILS OF RELATED WORK.

C. IS ACCEPTABLE IN CONSTRUCTION OF THE REQUIRED DESIGN AND ARTISTICINTENT.

D. DOES NOT INVOLVE ANY ADDITIONAL COST TO THE EMPLOYER.

E. BE TO ENGINEER'S APPROVAL.

ANY CLAUSES IN THE SPECIFICATION, WHICH RELATE TO WORK OR MATERIALS NOTREQUIRED BY THE WORKS, SHALL BE DEEMED NOT TO APPLY.

CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT FOR ENGINEER APPROVAL ANY SUPPLIER WHO IS SUPPLYINGMATERIALS REQUIRED BY THE DESIGN DRAWINGS / SPECIFICATIONS AND NOT LISTED INTHIS DOCUMENT.




Item Manufacturer/Product Local Agent/Representative Email / Web Details

1 De-watering Specialist/Sub-Contractor

a) Khansaheb Sykes, SharjahTel: 06-5343453Fax: 06-5343908

b) National De-watering &Drainage ServicesDubaiTel: 04-3333123

Fax: 04-3331876

c) Al Naboodah-WJGroundwater JVP.O. Box 49204, DubaiTel: 04-8855254Fax: 04-8855257

Or Approved Equivalent

a) Email:[email protected]

b) Email:[email protected]

c) www.wj-me.com Email: [email protected]

2 Anti-Termite Treatment

a) Agricultural Materials Co.P.O.Box 474334, DubaiTel: 04-8847752Fax: 04-8847753P.O.Box 2954, AUHTel: 02-6260640Fax: 02-6260688

b) Unimar Pest ControlP.O. Box 60771, DubaiTel: 04-3244332Fax: 04-3244331

c) Middle East Agripest, DubaiTel: 04-3388226Fax: 04-3388785

d) Fardan Agricultural Est., P.O.Box 5151, DubaiTel: 04-2216534Fax: 04-2216535

e) National Pest Cont. P.O.Box31592, DubaiTel: 04-3242342Fax: 04-3242347

f) Universal Pest Rid Est.,Tel: 04-3518786Fax: 04-3519367

g) Arabian Agricultural Eng.Est., P.O.Box 9119, DxbTel: 04-2666446Fax: 04-2695242



b) www.unimarcorp.com Email:[email protected]

c) Email:[email protected]

d) Email:[email protected]

e) www.natpest.com Email:

f) [email protected]

g) www.aaee-uae.com Email:[email protected]

3

Microsilica

a) Elkem Microsilicaa) Arabian Trading Est.

P.O. Box 5945, RAKTel: 07-2665677Fax: 07-2665688P.O. Box 233266, DubaiTel: 04-2399610Fax: 04-2399620






http://www.wj-me.com/







http://www.unimarcorp.com/








http://www.natpest.com/






http://www.aaee-uae.com/
























b) Pachiney b) Cemex Topmix,P.O. Box 37900, DubaiTel: 04-3470433Fax: 04-3470470


b) www.cemex.com Email: [email protected]

4 GGBS

a) Cemex Falcon,P.O. Box 37900, DubaiTel: 04-3470427Fax: 04-3471713

b) National Cement Co.,P.O. Box 4041, DubaiTel: 04-3388885Fax: 04-3388886

c) Sharjah Cement Co.P.O. Box 2083, SharjahTel: 06-5684681

Fax: 06-5683171

d) Gulf Concrete & BlockP.O.Box 159, RAKTel: 07-2221414Fax: 07-2221167

07-2220833


a) www.cemex.com Email: [email protected]

b) www.nationalcement.ae Email:[email protected]

c) www.sharjahcement.com Email: [email protected]

d) Email:www.gcbreadymix.ae

5

Water Proofing Additives

a) Ipanex

b) Pudlo

c) Conplast

a) Specialized Industries, P.OBox 1083, SharjahTel: 06-5630748Fax: 06-5635364

b) David Ball Middle East Ltd.,P.O. Box 8240, SharjahTel: 06-5575096Fax: 06-5575097

c) Al Gurg Fosroc,P.O.Box 657, DubaiTel: 04-2858606Fax: 04-2854188



Mr. Nizar (Exec. Manager)050-5676903



7 Readymix Concrete

a) Readymix Gulf,P.O Box 52942, DubaiTel: 04-3413730

04-3474123Fax: 04-3474552

b) Arabian MixP.O. Box 158, DubaiTel: 04-3381731Fax: 04-3381243

04-3502196

c) CemexTop Mix, DubaiTel: 04-3470427Fax: 04-3470740

d) Conmix Ltd., DubaiTel: 04-3472225Fax: 04-3472180

a) www.Email:[email protected]

b) www.al-ghurair.com Email:

[email protected]

c) www.cemex.com

d) www.conmix.com

http://www.cemex.com/










http://www.nationalcement.ae/




http://www.sharjahcement.com/




http://www.gcbreadymix.ae/










http://www.al-ghurair.com/






http://www.conmix.com/






















e) Unimix, DubaiTel: 04-3387816Fax: 04-3387735

f) S.S.Lootha Ready MixP.O. Box 553, DubaiTel: 04-2672233Fax: 04-2673594

g) Austrian Arabian Ready MixConcreteP.O. Box 261187, DubaiTel: 04-8802327Fax: 04-8802328

h) Unibeton Ready MixP.O. Box 38197, DubaiTel: 04-8802600Fax: 04-8802299

i) SafemixP.O. Box 33949, DubaiTel: 04-8801788Fax: 04-8801789

j) Gulf Concrete & BlockP.O. Box 159, RAKTel: 07-2221414Fax: 07-2221167

07-2220833

k) Xtramix Concrete SolutionsL.L.C.P.O. Box 32020, AUHTel: 02-5511118Fax: 02-5511425


e) Email:[email protected]

f) www.ssloothagroup.com Email:[email protected]

g) Email:[email protected]

h) www.unibetonreadymix.com

Email: [email protected]

i) www.dubaireadymix.com Mr. Khalid FoodaMobile: 050-5675023

j) www.gcbreadymix.ae

k) Email:[email protected]

8

Water stops

a) Fosroc

b) Servicised

c) Greenstreak (USA)

a) Al Gurg Fosroc,P.O. Box 657, DubaiTel: 04-2858606Fax: 04-2854188

b) Sultan Bin Rashid,(SULTACO),P.O. Box 3402, DubaiTel: 04-3385929Fax: 04-3391842

c) Prestige EngineeringSpecialties Co. LLCP.O. Box 4618, AUHTel: 02-6219910Fax: 02-6219920



b) www.sultaco.ae Email: [email protected]


9 Reinforcement Steel

a) Emirates Iron & SteelFactory,P.O. Box 9022, AUHTel: 02-5511187Fax: 02-5515113

b) Saudi Steel

a) www.esi-steel.com Email: [email protected]

b)



http://www.ssloothagroup.com/






http://www.unibetonreadymix.com/







http://www.dubaireadymix.com/








http://www.sultaco.ae/







http://www.esi-steel.com/

























Tel: 04-8865620Fax: 04-8865621


[email protected]

12

SBS WaterproofingMembrane

(Also refer to Item No. 26below )

a) BEAM EngineeringP.O. Box 5135, SharjahTel: 06-5592665Fax: 06-5596680

b) CKK Middle EastP.O. Box 6589,DubaiTel: 04-2824085Fax: 04-2825365

c) Al Nahda ContractingP.O. Box 1053,SharjahTel: 06-5332015Fax: 06-5331425



b) www.ckkme.com Email: [email protected]

c)Email: [email protected]

13 Polyethylene Sheets

a) GECO Chemical Co. P.O.Box 1145, SharjahTel: 06-5346467Fax: 06-5342244

b) Kangaroo Plastics,P.O. Box 50912, DubaiTel: 04-2660588

04-8804700Fax: 04-2692658

04-8804702

c) CosmoplastP.O. Box 6032, SharjahTel: 06-5331264Fax: 06-5331917

d) Sadco – SharjahTel: 06-5331419

04-8873788Fax: 06-5333002

e) Dubai InternationalReinforced PlasticsP.O. Box 2202, DubaiTel: 04-2858080Fax: 04-2850956

f) Fujairah Plastic FactoriesP.O. Box 20614, SharjahTel: 06-5423690Fax: 06-5423688

g) Dubai Plastic FactoriesP.O. Box 22487, AjmanTel: 06-7433976Fax: 06-7436079




c) www.cosmoplast.com

Email:[email protected]

d) Email:

e) www.dirp.cc Email: [email protected]

f) www.fujairahplastic.com Email:

[email protected]

g)Email: [email protected]

14

Bituminous Painta) Mastertop 420 a) BASF Chemicals Co.

P.O.Box 37127, Dxb

Tel: 04-8090800Fax: 04-8851130

a) www.basf-cc.ae Email:





http://www.ckkme.com/












http://www.cosmoplast.com/




http://www.dirp.cc/

http://www.dirp.cc/




http://www.fujairahplastic.com/







http://www.basf-cc.ae/







http://www.dirp.cc/














b) Cormix RBE

c) Lavatex RBE

d) Nitoproof

b) Cormix Middle EastP.O.Box DubaiTel: 04-3374484Fax: 04-3347104

c) Falcon Chemical Ltd.P.O. Box 2924, DubaiTel: 04-8801444Fax: 04-8801717

d) Al Gurg Fosroc,P.O. Box 657, DubaiTel: 04-2858606Fax: 04-2854188


b) Existing and originated inThailand, no supplierfound in emirates.

c) www.falconchemicals.com


d)Email: [email protected]

15 Pre-Cast Concrete/PCCladding Panels

a) Fibrex Co. LLCPO Box 462Tel 02-5511462Fax 02-5513331

b) Emirates PrecastConstruction Est., DubaiTel: 04-8802111Fax: 04-8802999

c) Al Muraikhi Contr. And TrgEst., Abu DhabiTel: 02-6770590

Fax: 02-6725475

d) Concrete TechnologyP.O. Box 31950, DubaiTel: 04-8801777Fax: 04-8801666

e) United Precast ConcreteLLC., DubaiTel: 04-3474440Fax: 04-3474746

f) Juma Al Majid East Ltd.,P.O. Box 3762, DubaiTel: 04-3477555Fax: 04-3477888

g) Gulf Precast Concrete Co.P.O. Box19302, DubaiTel: 04- 8851033Fax: 04- 8851016


a) [email protected]


c) Email:

d) www.concretech.ae Email: [email protected]


f) Email: [email protected]

g) www.gulfprecast.ae Email: [email protected]

16

Floating Floors & InertialBases

a) Kinetics NoiseControl Inc. (USA)

b) Christie-N-Grey(UK)

c) Mason IndustriesINC. (USA)

a) Kinetics Middle Est Ltd.P.O. Box 37670, DubaiTel: 04-8857361Fax: 04-8857362

b) Royal Gulf LLC, DubaiTel: 04-3935383Fax: 04-3938056

c) Energy International

P.O. Box 3562, SharjahTel: 06-5343477Fax: 06-5343756

a) www.kineticsnoise.com Email: [email protected]

b) Email:

c) www.energyintl.com


http://www.falconchemicals.com/












http://www.concretech.ae/









http://www.gulfprecast.ae/





http://www.kineticsnoise.com/





http://www.energyintl.com/
























17 Gunniting / Shotcreting

a) Tuleila Heat InsulationP.O. Box 7232, SharjahTel: 06-5552959Fax: 06-5591640

b) Al Swiss Group of Co., P.O.Box 6704, SharjahTel: 06-5563123Fax: 06-5564123


a) www.tuleila.com Email:[email protected]

b) www.kkjgroup.com Email:

18 Precast / Pre-stressed /PostTensioned Concrete

a) Drawish Haddad PrestressedConcrete Co., DubaiTel: 04-3326707Fax: 04-3313904

b) Freyssinet Gulf,

P.O Box 36211, DubaiTel: 04-2094900Fax: 04-2094910

c) Australian PrestressingServices (APS),P.O. Box 26882, DubaiTel: 04-2677997Fax: 04-2677055


a) Email:

b) www.freyssinet.com



19 Cement Concrete Blocks

a) Juma Al Majid,P.O. Box 3762, Dubai

Tel: 04-3477555Fax: 04-3477888

b) EMCON,P.O. Box 62942, DubaiTel: 04-3473400Fax: 04-3473402

c) National Concrete Products,P.O. Box 158, DubaiTel: 04-3382886Fax: 04-3502196

d) DAFCO Ready MixP.O. Box 515, SharjahTel: 06-5584666Fax: 06-5377328

e) Apex Concrete Products,P.O. Box 53370, DubaiTel: 04-3470833Fax: 04-3470822

f) Phoenix Concrete Products,DubaiTel: 04-3389868Fax: 04-3389156

g) Jebel Ali Cement Products

Factory,P.O. Box 52985, DubaiTel: 04-8802696

a) Email: [email protected]


c)


e) www.apexgulf.com Email: [email protected]

f) www.phoenixdubai.com

g) www.jacement.com


http://www.tuleila.com/




http://www.kkjgroup.com/


http://www.freyssinet.com/












http://www.apexgulf.com/





http://www.phoenixdubai.com/


http://www.jacement.com/






















i) Obaid Al Jassim BuildingContracting LLCP.O. Box 73524, DubaiTel: 04-8803806Fax: 04-8803807


i) Email:[email protected]

21

Accessories/Sundry itemsfor Block works(Metal beads, laths, wallstarters, Straps, ArchFormers, Wall movement

joint Systems)

a) TMI

b) METEX

c) CATNIC,Corus UK Limited,

d) EXPAMET BuildingProduct,

Ballyfermot,, Dublin.

a) Technical Metal Ind.PO Box 41558,AUHTel: 02-5502025Fax: 02-5502024

b) Metal Expansion FactoryPO Box 5374, DubaiTel: 04-8992444Fax: 04-8992455

c) Mac Al GurgPO Box 672, Dubai

Tel: 04-2661291Fax: 04-2691067PO Box 46997, AUHTel: 02-6741171Fax: 02-6720025

d) Emirates Specialties Co.PO Box 3880, DubaiTel: 04-3470767

06-5420220Fax: 04-3470765


a) www.tmi-co.com Email: [email protected]

b) www.gentex.ae Email: [email protected]

c) www.macalgurg.com Email:

[email protected]

d) www.esco.ae Email: [email protected]

22

Fire – Stop

a) Nullifire FireProtection

b) Dow Corning (USA)

c) Hilti

d) Tremco

e) 3M

a) A.P.S. Trading Division,DubaiTel: 04-3372877Fax: 04-3377389

b) Emirates Specialties Co. LLCPO Box 3880, DubaiTel: 04-3470767

06-5420220Fax: 04-3470765

c) Hilti Emirates LLCP.O. Box 11051, DubaiTel: 80044584Fax: 04-8854405

d) Tremco Ltd. (ME)P.O. Box 3034, DubaiTel: 04-3470460Fax: 04-3470242

e) 3M Gulf Ltd.,P.O. Box 20191, DubaiTel: 04-3670777Fax: 04-3670998



b) www.esco.ae Email: [email protected]

c) [email protected] Email:

[email protected]

d) www.stonecor.com Email: [email protected]

e) www.3m.com Email: [email protected]

23

Foam Concrete

a) Foamcem

a) Al Nahda Cont. & Trad.


a) Email:

[email protected]



http://www.tmi-co.com/





http://www.gentex.ae/





http://www.macalgurg.com/




http://www.esco.ae/

http://www.esco.ae/






http://www.esco.ae/

http://www.esco.ae/




http://www.mepconsultant.com/




http://www.stonecor.com/





http://www.3m.com/

http://www.3m.com/








http://www.3m.com/






http://www.esco.ae/



http://www.esco.ae/











b) Isocrete Ltd.

c) Confoam of BCR(UK)

b) Al Shirawi Cont. & Trad.,P.O. Box 33539, DubaiTel: 04-3335935Fax: 04-3338898

c) Emirates Specialties Co. LLCPO Box 3880, DubaiTel: 04-3470767

06-5420220Fax: 04-3470765


b) www.alshirawi.com Email: [email protected]

c) www.esco.ae Email: [email protected]

24

Filter Membrane

a) Terram by I.C.I.(UK)

b) Typar by Du Pont

c) Polyfelt (Austria)

a) GECO Chemical Co. Ltd.P.O.Box 1145, SharjahTel: 06-5346467Fax: 06-5342234

b) Al Nahda Cont. & Trad.P.O. Box 1053, Sharjah

Tel: 06-5332015Fax: 06-5331425


06-5420220Fax: 04-3470765





24a

Methyl Methacrylate(MMA) Water ProofingMembrane

(a) Stirling Lloyd a) Stirling Lloyd -GULF Concreting ProductsP.O.Box 43010, Abu DhabiTel: 02-6273998Fax: 02-6273994

a) www.gcpuae.com Email: [email protected]

25

APP Bituminous WaterProofing Membrane

a) Polybit

b) Unigum ofDerbigum (Italy)

c) Polygum Turbo ofAtab (Belguim)

d) Rhoflex (Italy)

e) Ruberit (Holand)

a) Western InternationalP.O. Box 73820, DubaiTel: 04-3285261Fax 04-3285262

b) Al Nahda Cont. & Trad.P.O. Box 1053, SharjahTel: 06-5332015Fax: 06-5331425

c) Protect Middle Est.P.O. Box 15778, DubaiTel: 04-2651184

02-6126999Fax: 04-2692823

d) BEAM EngineeringP.O. Box 5135, SharjahTel: 06-5592665Fax: 06-5596680

e) CKK Mid. East Est.,P.O. Box 6589, Dubai

a) www.western.ae Email:[email protected]




e) www.ckkme.com Email: [email protected]

http://www.alshirawi.com/





http://www.esco.ae/

http://www.esco.ae/









http://www.esco.ae/

http://www.esco.ae/




http://www.gcpuae.com/




http://www.western.ae/

























http://www.esco.ae/





http://www.esco.ae/






f) Ekoguard

g) Imiplast

h) Duplas

Tel: 04-2824085Fax: 04-2825365

f) Emirates Specialties Co. LLCP.O. Box 3880, DubaiTel: 04-3470767

06-5420220Fax: 04-3470765

g) Imperbit,P.O. Box 33150, DubaiTel: 04-8801616Fax: 04-8801661

h) Duproof LLCP.O. Box 74334, DubaiTel: 04-8851212Fax: 04-8851313


f) www.esco.ae Email: [email protected]

g) www.imperbit.ae Email:

[email protected]

h) www.duproof.com Email:[email protected]

26

SBS Bituminous Water

Proofing Membrane

a) Polybit

b) Copolene OfDerbigum (Italy)

c) Parafor Solo FF ofSiplast (France)

d) Axter Force ofAxter (France)

e) Cintaflex 2000(Holand)

f) Felxigum of Atab(Italy)

g) Imper Flex 200

h) Dulas


b) Al Nahda Cont. & Trad.P.O. Box 1053, SharjahTel: 06-5332015Fax: 06-5331425

c) AMC ProtectionP.O. Box 15578, DubaiTel: 04-3416617Fax: 04-3416618

d) BEAM EngineeringP.O. Box 5135, SharjahTel: 06-5592665Fax: 06-5596680

e) CKK Mid. East Est.,P.O. Box 6589, DubaiTel: 04-2824085Fax: 04-2825365

f) Protect Middle Est.P.O. Box 15778, DubaiTel: 04-2651184

02-6126999Fax: 04-2692823

g) Emirates Specialties Co. LLCP.O. Box 3880, DubaiTel: 04-3470767

06-5420220Fax: 04-3470765

h) Duproof LLCP.O. Box 74334, DubaiTel: 04-8851212Fax: 04-8851313



c) www.amc-protection.net Email: [email protected] [email protected]


e) www.ckkme.com Email: [email protected]

f) Email:[email protected]

g) www.esco.ae Email: [email protected]

h) www.duproof.com Email:[email protected]

http://www.esco.ae/

http://www.esco.ae/




http://www.imperbit.ae/




http://www.duproof.com/










http://www.amc-protection.net/
















http://www.esco.ae/

http://www.esco.ae/











http://www.esco.ae/

















http://www.esco.ae/




27

Protection Board forWaterproofing membrane

a) Polybit

b) Protection Courseof seal tight, W.R.Meadows

c) Texmastic Int. Inc.(USA)

d) Axter

e) Cartonal

f) Protectar


b) Al Nahda ContractingP.O. Box 1053,SharjahTel: 06-5332015Fax: 06-5331425


06-5420220Fax: 04-3470765

d) BEAM EngineeringP.O. Box 5135, Sharjah

Tel: 06-5592665Fax: 06-5596680

e) Souki Trade, DubaiTel/Fax: 04-3605859

f) Emirates Specialties Co. LLCPO Box 3880, DubaiTel: 04-3470767

06-5420220Fax: 04-3470765






e) Email:Mr. Henry(Manager)

Mobile: 050-8849148

f) www.esco.ae Email: [email protected]

28

Extruded Polystyreneboards

a) Isoboard ND ofIsofoam

b) Roofmate by Dow(Saudi Arabia)

c) Esscofoam ofKuwait

Only Civil defenceapproved Fire Resistantproduct to be used

a) Unifoam, SharjahTel: 06-5338170Fax: 06-5338169

b) Cloisall Chemical Co.P.O. Box 3366, DubaiTel: 04-3258877

02-6264111Fax: 04-3258484

02-6264229

c) Teejan Gen Trd. LLCEsscofoamP.O. Box 60970, DubaiTel: 04-2674367Fax: 04-2671518


a)


c) www.teejan.ae Email: [email protected]

29

Expanded Polystyreneboards

a) STYROFOAM.

b) ESCOFOAM

Only Civil defense

approved Fire Resistantproduct to be used

a) Arabian Chemicals InsulationCo. Ltd.P.O. Box 18667, DubaiTel: 04-8861233Fax: 04-8861234

b) Teejan Gen Trd. LLCEsscofoamP.O. Box 60970, Dubai

Tel: 04-2674367Fax: 04-2671518Or Approved Equivalent

a) www.eajb.com Email: [email protected]

b) www.teejan.ae Email: [email protected]







http://www.esco.ae/

http://www.esco.ae/






http://www.esco.ae/

http://www.esco.ae/






http://www.teejan.ae/




http://www.eajb.com/


















http://www.esco.ae/



http://www.esco.ae/







30

Rock Wool /Glass woolInsulation

a) Fujairah rockwool

b) Foam Glass

Only Civil defenseapproved Fire Resistantproduct to be used

a) Fujairah Rockwool FactoryPO Box 211, FujairahTel: 09-2222297Fax: 09-2222573

b) Pittsburgh Corning Europe P.O. Box 213345Dubai - UAE

Tel: 04-4347140Fax: 04-4327109


www.rockwoolfujairah.ae Email: [email protected]

[email protected]

31

Water Tank Waterproofing

a) XYPEX

b) Nitocote EP405from FOSROC

a) Specialized Industries, P.OBox 1083, SharjahTel: 06-5630748Fax: 06-5635364

b) Al Gurg Fosroc,P.O. Box 657, DubaiTel: 04-2858606Fax: 04-2854188


a) Email:[email protected] Mr. Nizar (Exec. Manager)0505676903


32

Liquid waterproofingmembrane & Waterproofing wet areas

a) Duraroof byUniroof (UK)

b) Liquiseal byCarlisle

c) CIM-800 by (UK)

d) Tremproof-60 ofTremco (UK)

e) Polytex-UR byPolybit

f) Nitoproof 600 fromFOSROC

a) Al Nahda ContractingP.O. Box 1053,SharjahTel: 06-5332015Fax: 06-5331425

b) Al Nahda Contracting

P.O. Box 1053,SharjahTel: 06-5332015Fax: 06-5331425

c) BEAM EngineeringP.O. Box 5135, SharjahTel: 06-5592665Fax: 06-5596680


e) BEAM EngineeringP.O. Box 5135, SharjahTel: 06-5592665Fax: 06-5596680

f) Al Gurg Fosroc,P.O. Box 657, DubaiTel: 04-2858606Fax: 04-2854188



b) Email:

[email protected]


d) www.stonecor.com Email:[email protected]



33

Built – up Membrane RoofCoverings

a) BITUFA

Waterproofing B.V.

The Netherlands

a) Western International,P.O. Box 73820, DubaiTel: 04-3285261

Fax: 04-3285262

b) BEAM Engineering

a) www.western.ae Email: [email protected]

b) Email:

http://www.rockwoolfujairah.ae/















































b) AXTER

c) SIPLAST


c) SIPLAST GCC(AMC Protection)P.O. Box 47275, AUHTel: 02-6222820Fax: 02-6222830


[email protected]

c) www.amc-protection.com Email:[email protected]

34

Thermal & Moistureprotection System (Roof)

a) Combo Roof System

a) Roof Care Co. L.L.CP.O. Box 47383, DubaiTel : 04-2679641Fax: 04-2679642P.O. Box 54087, AUHTel : 02-5587668Fax: 02-5581211

a) www.roof-care.com Email:[email protected]

35

Vehicular Traffic Deck

Coating system

a) Flowcrete

b) Decseal System

c) Trafficguard UR

d) Mastertop 1330

e) CCW 5123 ofCarlisle Coatingand Waterproofing

f) Mameco Int. USA(Vulkem TrafficDeck Coating

system)

g) 3M Contractor

a) F lowcrete Middle East FZCOThe Flooring TechnologyCentre 18th Floor, Suite1806, JAFZA View 19PO Box 17641, Jebel Ali FreeZone Dubai, UAEMr. Vik VithlaniTel: +971 (4) 8864728Fax : +971 (4) 8864582Mobile: +971 (50) 7081421

b) Stirling Lloyd PolychemUnion Bank , King Street,KNUTSFORD, CheshireWA16 6EF,Tel: +44 01565 633111,Fax:+44 01565 633555Website:www.stirlinglloyd.comMr. Daniel Griffiths+971 50 8371036+44 (0) 7966 689 473

c) Al Gurg Fosroc,P.O. Box 657, DubaiTel: 04-2858606Fax: 04-2854188

d) BASF Chemicals Co.P.O. Box 37127, DubaiTel: 04-8090800Fax: 04-8851130

e) Al Nahda ContractingP.O. Box 1053,SharjahTel: 06-5332015Fax: 06-5331425

f) Schomburg ConstructionChemicals,


a)Email :[email protected]

b) Email :[email protected]@stirlinglloyd.com


d) www.basf-cc.ae Email:


f) Email:



http://www.amc-protection.com/




http://www.roof-care.com/


























Products (Scotch-Clad CoatingSystem)

g) Tricon Trd. & ContractingP.O. Box 754, SharjahTel: 06-5331301Fax: 06-5337971



36

Acrylic Base Glass FibreReiforced Trafficable Gel

a) Trafficguard(U.S.A.)

b) Tretodeck ofTremco (UK)

c) Scotchclad 5893FC

a) Al Nahda ContractingP.O. Box 1053,SharjahTel: 06-5332015Fax: 06-5331425

b) Utmost Building MaterialP.O. Box 45159, AUHTel: 02-6448222Fax: 02-6447700P.O. Box 55014, DubaiTel: 04-3553883Fax: 04-3553776

c) 3M Gulf Ltd.,P.O. Box 20191, DubaiTel: 04-3670777Fax: 04-3670998



b) www.utmostgrp.com Email:[email protected]

c) www.3m.com Email: [email protected]

37 GRP Products

a) Arabian Profile Ltd. GRCDivision,P.O. Box 3195, SharjahTel: 06-5432624Fax: 06-5432334

b) Dubai International

Reinforced PlasticsP.O. Box 2202, DubaiTel: 04-2858080Fax: 04-2850956

c) Prefab Building Ind.P.O. Box 122585, DubaiTel: 04-3330012Fax: 04-3333219

d) JANACO InternationalP.O. Box 5782, DubaiTel: 04-3516010Fax: 04-3516011

e) Terrazzo Ltd.P.O. Box 5934, SharjahTel: 06-5333609Fax: 06-5333058

f) ExtracoP.O. Box 6174, SharjahTel: 06-5432538Fax: 06-5221381

g) Fibre Flex Co.P.O. Box 70705, AUHTel: 02-5515222Fax: 02-5511154

h) Notredame Fibreglass & Ind.Marbles Est.


b) www.dirp.cc



d) www.janacointl.com Email:

[email protected]

e) www.terrrazoltd.com Email: [email protected]

f) www.extraco.ae Email: [email protected]

g) www.fiberflexuae.ae Email: [email protected]

h) Email:[email protected]





http://www.utmostgrp.com/




http://www.3m.com/

http://www.3m.com/






http://www.dirp.cc/

http://www.dirp.cc/






http://www.janacointl.com/




http://www.terrrazoltd.com/





http://www.extraco.ae/





http://www.fiberflexuae.ae/


















http://www.dirp.cc/



http://www.3m.com/









i) Fibrex Co.P.O. Box 462, AUHTel: 02-5511462Fax: 02-5513331


i) www.fibrex.ae Email: [email protected]

38

Liquid Applied FaçadeDamp roofing

a) Adeprimaire bySiplast

b) Sibelasto of SIBA

c) SBS BituminousMembrane

d) Bitunil, Sika,Soprema

a) AMC ProtectionP.O. Box 15578, DubaiTel: 04-3416617Fax: 04-3416618

b) Al Nahda ContractingP.O. Box 1053,SharjahTel: 06-5332015Fax: 06-5331425

c) M B TTel: 04-8818123Fax: 04-8818755

d) Grace ServicesDubai, UAETel: 04-3374484Fax:04-3347104

e) Al Gurg Fosroc,P.O. Box 657, DubaiTel: 04-2858606Fax: 04-2854188

f) BEAM EngineeringP.O. Box 5135, SharjahTel: 06-5592665Fax: 06-5596680

g) CKK Mid. East Est.,P.O. Box 6589, DubaiTel: 04-2824085Fax: 04-2825365

h) Al Nahda ContractingP.O. Box 1053,SharjahTel: 06-5332015Fax: 06-5331425


a) www.amc-protection.net Email:[email protected]

[email protected]


c) Email:

d) Email:



g) www.ckkme.com Email: [email protected] [email protected]


39 Timber Joinery, Doors &Cupboards

a) ABANOS Furniture Industries& DecorationP.O. Box 114480, DubaiTel: 04-8996111Fax: 04-8859966

b) Leader FurnitureP.O. Box 52706, DubaiTel: 04-3330143Fax: 04-3330153

c) Haseeb Rasoul Co. FZC.


a) www.abanos.ae Email: [email protected]

b) www.leadersfurniture.ae Email:[email protected]

c) www.haseebrasoul.ae


http://www.fibrex.ae/

























http://www.abanos.ae/





http://www.leadersfurniture.ae/




http://www.haseebrasoul.ae/



























d) Romeo DesignP.O. Box 19810,DubaiTel: 04-8803773

07-2589353Fax: 04-8803774

04-3744041

e) ETA JoineryP.O. Box 5239, DubaiTel: 04-3400214Fax: 04-3400896

f) Al Habtoor CarpentryP.O. Box 74266, DubaiTel: 04-3474015Fax: 04-3473479

g) Ajman Korea FurnitureP.O. Box 631, AjmanTel: 06-7489191

Fax: 06-7489676

h) D & H Door & HardwareP.O. Box 49459, DubaiTel: 04-2668095Fax: 04-2668096

i) Mughal Wood WorksP.O. Box 853, SharjahTel: 06-5333347Fax: 06-5331847

j) EldiarP.O. Box 35077, AUHTel: 02-6814100Fax: 02-6816556

02-6818399

k) Laing O‘ Rourke Al Naboodah-JoineryP.O. Box 121895, DubaiTel: 04-3472475

04-3393939Fax: 04-3393955

l) Emirates DevelopmentIndustry Co.P.O. Box 44014, AUHTel: 02-5507999

02-6763982Fax: 02-5507997

m) Federal Building Ind.P.O. Box 282427, DubaiTel: 04-3475119Fax: 04-3471432

n) Khansaheb Joinery Div.P.O. Box 2716, SharjahTel: 06-5340479

04-2857251Fax: 06-5340489

04-2857539

o) Alpha StarP.O. Box 80955, Dubai

d) www.romeo-interiors.com

e) www.alphastarwoodjoinery.com


f) www.hlginteriors.com Email: [email protected]

g) Email:[email protected] [email protected]


i) www.mughalwood.com Email:[email protected]

j) www.eldiar.com Email:[email protected]

k) Email: [email protected]

l) Email:[email protected]

m) www.awrostamani.com Email:

n) www.khansaheb.ae Email: [email protected]

o) Email:[email protected]

http://www.romeo-interiors.com/




http://www.alphastarwoodjoinery.com/







http://www.hlginteriors.com/











http://www.mughalwood.com/




http://www.eldiar.com/








http://www.awrostamani.com/


http://www.khansaheb.ae/






























Tel: 04-3307263Fax: 04-3306242

p) Al Shafar InteriorsP.O. Box 13164, DubaiTel: 04-8853273Fax: 04-8853272

q) Ugarit FurnitureP.O. Box 286, DubaiTel: 04-3405551Fax: 04-3405552


p) www.alshafarinteriors.com


q) Email:[email protected]

40

Architectural Ironmongery

a) TESA SPAIN

b) OGRO, Germany

Newman Tonks, UK

c) Euro Level

d) Dryad Simplan, UKHP +

e) Columbo (italy)

f) UNION

g) VBH

h) Glutz

i) James GibbonsFormat

j) KABA

a) TESA Middle EastP.O. Box 54682, DubaiTel: 04-2045701Fax: 04- 2045702

b) Haroon Co.


c) Silver Shore Trdg. Co.,P.O. Box 1881, DubaiTel: 04-2628880Fax: 04-2627775

d) Al Kamda General Trdg.P.O. Box 4427, DubaiTel: 04-2664200Fax: 04-2662960

e) Al Omran TradingP.O. Box 5212, SharjahTel: 06-5336977

06-5624860Fax: 06-5330294

f) Al Moajil TradingP.O. Box 117414, DubaiTel: 04-3355587Fax: 04-3342703

g) VBH Middle East FzcoP.O. Box 17994, DubaiTel: 04-8870822Fax: 04-8870833

h) D & H Door & HardwareP.O. Box 49459, DubaiTel: 04-2668095Fax: 04-2668096

i) Coast to coast Gen. TradingLLC.P.O. Box 38437, DubaiTel: 04-8852818Fax: 04-8852819

j) Kaba FZE

P.O. Box 341038, DubaiTel: 04-5015636Fax: 04-5015637


b) www.haroonco.com



d) www.alkamda.com Email:

[email protected]


f) www.almoajilhardware.com




i) Email:

j) www.kaba.com


http://www.alshafarinteriors.com/











http://www.haroonco.com/






http://www.alkamda.com/






http://www.almoajilhardware.com/











http://www.kaba.com/



























PC Rate


41

Natural Stone SlabCladding /FeaturesProprietary MechanicalFixing system (Crimping)

a) ABL industriesFRANCE

b) HALFEN LtdDunstable, Beds - LU5 4TP

c) Fisher FixingSystems

Hilhercroft Industrial Est.

a) Hilti Inc.P.O. Box 11051, DubaiTel: 04-8060300Fax: 04-8854404

b) EurolinkTel: 04-2622924Fax: 04-2685338



-

42

Aluminum Works & CurtainWalling

a) Schuco

b) ESC

c) Reynaers

d) Vistawall

e) Technal

f) Folcra

g) Hartmann

h) Installux Aluminum

i) Al Abbar

a) ALICO Aluminum & LightIndustries Co


b) ESC Aluminium SystemsHP001,IntercontinentalResidential, Marsa Plaza,Dubai Festival city DubaiTel: +971 (4) 2515656Fax: +971 (4) 2515800

c) Reynaers Middle Eastwww.reynaers.comTel : +973 (17) 877266

Fax : +973 (17) 877299Mobile : +971 (55) 1025956

d) Leaders Aluminum & GlassIndustriesP.O. Box 23222, SharjahTel: 06-5345543Fax: 06-5345336

e) Union Industries INC.P.O. Box 820, DubaiTel: 04-3381715Fax: 04-3382516

f) Folcra Beach IndustriesP.O. Box 46536, AUHTel: 02-5510888Fax: 02-5511512

g) Thomas Bennett GulfP.O. Box 11545, DubaiTel: 04-3381919

04-8121960Fax: 04-3381101

04-8848059

h) Alumco LLCP.O. Box 49668, DubaiTel: 04-8851415

Fax: 04-8851416

i) Al Abbar Aluminum

a) www.alicouae.com Email:

[email protected]




e) www.unionindustriesllc.com



g) www.tbgdubai.com Email:[email protected]

h) www.alumco.ae Email:[email protected]




http://www.alicouae.com/






http://www.unionindustriesllc.com/








http://www.tbgdubai.com/




http://www.alumco.ae/
























43 Curtain WallingConsultants & Testing

a) Thomas Bell-Wright Int.ConsultantsP.O. Box 266385, DubaiTel: 04-3332692Fax: 04-3332693

b) GHD Global Pty Ltd.P.O. Box 45921, AUHTel: 02-6968700Fax: 02-4472915

c) Bureau Veritas Int.P.O. Box 9110, DubaiTel: 04-3453560

02-6444920

Fax: 04-3452391


a) Email:[email protected] www.bell-wright.com

b) www.ghd.com Email: [email protected]

c) www.bureauveritas.com Email:[email protected]

44

Curtain Walling (Out DoorWood Covering System).

a) Parklex 1000

a) PARKLEX Middle East,P.O. Box 293776, DubaiTel: 04-6091419Fax: 04-6091423



45

Structural GlassAssemblies(Curtain Walling SpiderFixed System)

a) Seele

b) Pilkington PlanarGlazing System

a) Al Abbar AluminumP.O. Box 1626, DubaiTel: 04-3331362

Fax: 04-3331283b) Juma Al Majid East Ltd., P.O.

Box 3762, DubaiTel: 04-3477555Fax: 04-3477888



b)

46

Metal profile/Flat SheetCladding / Covering(Fire Rated AluminumComposite Panels)

a) Al-Coplla

b) Renobond (PEPanels)

c) Alucobond A2

d) ETA (US Make)

a) Leaders Aluminum & GlassIndustriesP.O. Box 23222, SharjahTel: 06-5345343Fax: 06-5345336

b) ALICO Aluminum & LightIndustries CoP.O. Box 6011, SharjahTel: 06-5582444Fax: 06-5384999

c) ETA – MELCOP.O. 71058, DubaiTel: 04-2359595Fax: 04-2725121

d) United AluminumP.O. Box 283435, Dubai

Tel: 04-8858066Fax: 04-8855389


b) www.alicouae.com Email:[email protected]





http://www.bell-wright.com/


http://www.ghd.com/

http://www.ghd.com/




http://www.bureauveritas.com/




























http://www.ghd.com/






e) Alubond

f) Alucobond

g) Britol

Only Civil defenceapproved material to used

e) Ali Moosa & Sons Contracting(Aluminum Division)P.O. Box 22484, SharjahTel: 06-5311533

06-5311444Fax: 06-5311522

06-5311135

f) Bin Lahej ContractingMaintenance (Aluminum)P.O. Box 11781, DubaiTel: 04-3970016Fax: 04-3971558

g) Bosco AluminumP.O. Box 31897, DubaiTel: 04-2862305Fax: 04-2862306P.O. Box 32211, RAKTel: 07-2446629Fax: 07-2446879

h) Zebian AluminumP.O. Box 5818, SharjahTel: 06-5432540Fax: 06-5432491


e) www.ams.ae Email: [email protected]

f) www.mmlahej.com Email:

g) www.boscogrp.com Email:[email protected]


47

Steel Doors & Steel Frames

Note: List steel doors /Frames suppliers is forguidance. Fire rated steeldoors will be accepted onlyif approved by Ministry ofInterior Dubai – CivilDefence

a) i) Curries (USA)Apex (USA)

b) Martin Roberts(UK)

Guardian (UK)

c) Al Kuhaimi MetalDoors (SaudiArabia)

d) Corgard, Dubai

e) CECO DoorProducts

f) Metalco (SaudiArabia)

a) Bin Ghurair Trading LLCP.O. Box 14225, DubaiTel: 04-8802008Fax: 04-8801700

b) PrometalP.O. Box 37765, DubaiTel: 04-8804888Fax: 04-8804884

c) Rimal Int‘l Trading P.O. Box 35175, DubaiTel: 04-2660150Fax: 04-2660157

d) Ram Metal IndustriesP.O. Box 50182, DubaiTel: 04-3472210Fax: 04-3473865

e) TASK FZE LLCP.O. Box 7919, SharjahTel: 06-5572786Fax: 06-5572411

f) D & H Door & HardwareP.O. Box 49459, DubaiTel: 04-2668095Fax: 04-2668096

g) Bin Dasmal Doors Est.,P.O. Box 5389, DubaiTel: 04-8067600Fax: 04-8067601

h) Bakhit DoorsP.O. Box 6405, DubaiTel: 04-2994126

a) www.mei-uae.com Email:[email protected]

b) www.prometal.ae Email:[email protected]

c) www.alkuhaima.ae Email: [email protected]

d) www.rammetal.com Email:[email protected]

e) www.taskfzc.com Email: [email protected]


g) www.bindasmal.com Email:[email protected]

h) www.bakhitdoors.com Email:[email protected]

http://www.ams.ae/

http://www.ams.ae/




http://www.mmlahej.com/


http://www.boscogrp.com/






http://www.mei-uae.com/




http://www.prometal.ae/




http://www.alkuhaima.ae/





http://www.rammetal.com/




http://www.taskfzc.com/







http://www.bindasmal.com/




http://www.bakhitdoors.com/
























http://www.ams.ae/




g) Daybar (USA)

h) Ambico Canada

Fax: 04-2994616

i) Al Waheedh Metal Doors &WindowsP.O. Box 46638, DubaiTel: 04-3514361Fax: 04-3550322

j) Lakshmi Metal Tech LLCPO Box 119867, DubaiTel 050 9204011Fax 04-3386272

k) Door Systems Inc.2413 S. Broadway St. Sata

Ana. CA, 92707, USATel +1 714 2857100Fax +1 714 2587171



j) www.trinityholdings.com Email:

[email protected]

k) www.doorsysinc.com Email:

[email protected] [email protected]

48

Aluminum Strip/SheetCovering/ Flashings(Standing Seam RoofCladding)

a) Tiger Profile

b) ZIPLOCK

c) KAL-ZIP

a) Tiger Profiles & InsualtionLLCPO Box 23499Tel 06-5338449Fax 06-5336673

b) Rigidal Industries LLCP.O. Box 60493, DubaiTel: 04-8854232Fax: 04-8854223

c) Tiger Steel IndustriesP.O. Box 3208, DubaiTel: 04-2671015Fax: 04-2671248


a) www.tigerprofiles.com

b) www.rigidal.com Email:[email protected]


49

Access Panels

a) Nystrom

b) Profab

c) Frost

d) Cierra

a) Mac Al Gurg BuildersMerchants,P.O. Box 46997, AUHTel: 02-6741171

04-2661291Fax: 02-6720025

04-2691067

b) Majid Bukatara BuildingMaterial LLCP.O. Box 50897, DubaiTel: 04-3371710Fax: 04-3371999

c) Mac Al Gurg BuildersMerchants,P.O. Box 46997, AUHTel: 02-6741171

04-2661291Fax: 02-6720025

04-2691067

d) JANACO International


a) www.macalgurg.com Email:

[email protected]


c) www.macalgurg.com Email:

[email protected]

d) www.janacointl.com



http://www.trinityholdings.com/




http://www.doorsysinc.com/






http://www.tigerprofiles.com/


http://www.rigidal.com/








































e) KHS – Austria

f) Super – Alpro

g) Cendrex (Canada)

e) Al Majaz Trading,P.O. Box 26268, SharjahTel: 06-5591940Fax: 06-5591941

f) Al Falah Building Materials &Trdg. Co.P.O. Box 75908, DubaiTel: 04-3807355Fax: 04-3807366

g) Best Products Trdg. Co,P.O. Box DubaiTel: 04-2856742Fax: 04-2856743



f) www.falahco.com Email: [email protected] [email protected]

g) This company number isfor Al JamashiConstructions

50

Fire Hose Reel & LandingValve Cupboard Doors

a) Watrous (FC FrostLtd.)

a) Mac Al Gurg BuildersMerchants,

P.O. Box 46997, AUHTel: 02-674117104-2661291

Fax: 02-672002504-2691067

b) Dafoos Fire Protection TechServiceP.O. Box 50891, DubaiTel: 04-2694099

04-3471388Fax: 04-2694088

04-3471390

c) New Age Co. LLCP.O. Box 4396, DubaiTel: 04-3573500Fax: 04-3573700



[email protected]

b) www.dafoos.com Email: [email protected]

c) www.newage.ae Email:

[email protected]

51

Glass

a) Glaverbel

b) VIRACON,VISTEON-FORD

Pilkington (North American)

c) EMICOOL

d) Guardian Glass

e) Saint Gobain

a) Gutal TradingP.O. Box 12881, DubaiTel: 04-2680477Fax: 04-2629236

b) INTRACO (UAE) Ltd.P.O. Box 16895, DubaiTel: 04-8814333Fax: 04-8813320

c) Emirates Glass,P.O. Box 29769, DubaiTel: 04-3471515Fax: 04-3471440

d) Asia Guard, DubaiTel: 04-3411410

e) MerintP.O. 29339, DubaiTel: 04-3583565Fax: 04-3584575


a) www.gutal.com Email: [email protected]

b) www.intracousa.com Email:[email protected]

c) www.emiratesglass.com Email:

d) Email:

e) www.merint.com Email: [email protected]

52Automatic Glazed Doors

GEZE Middle East FZE [email protected]



http://www.falahco.com/











http://www.dafoos.com/





http://www.newage.ae/




http://www.gutal.com/





http://www.intracousa.com/




http://www.emiratesglass.com/


http://www.merint.com/




























GEZE

Dorma Gulf,

3rd Floor - 301Tecom, Al Barsha, DubaiTel 04- 8833112Fax 04- 8833240

Dorma Controls FZEP.O. Box 17268, Jebel Ali FzcTel: 04-8020400Fax: 04-8869101

04-8869100


www.dorma-gulf.com


53 Structural Steel Works

a) Emirates Building System(EBS)P.O. Box 31396, DubaiTel: 04-8851122Fax: 04-8851211

b) Amana Contracting & SteelBuilding Co.


c) Rasana Eng. Ind.P.O. Box 992, SharjahTel: 06-5360890Fax: 06-5360891

d) Galadari Eng. Work Ltd.P.O. Box 355, DubaiTel: 04-2667318Fax: 04-2662151

e) Tiger Steel IndustriesP.O. Box 3208, DubaiTel: 04-2671015Fax: 04-2671248

f) ETAP.O. Box 5239, DubaiTel: 04-3471022Fax: 04-3471077

g) Cleveland Bridge &Engineering MEP.O. Box 16765, DubaiTel: 04-8835551Fax: 04-8835416

h) Eversendai EngineeringP.O. Box 29537, DubaiTel: 04-2673738Fax: 04-2673663

i) Murray & Roberts ContractorsME LLCP.O. Box 30023, DubaiTel: 04-3728500Fax: 04-3211011

j) Excel Industrial Co. Ltd.,P.O. Box 1196, Ajman

Tel: 06-7430320Fax: 06-743107406-7435745

a) www.ebsl.com Email: [email protected]

b) www.amanabuildings.com

c) www.rasanaeng.ae Email:[email protected]



f) www.etamech.com Email: [email protected]


h) www.eversendai.com Email:[email protected]

i) www.murrob.com Email: [email protected]

j) www.excel-uae.com Email:

[email protected]

http://www.dorma-gulf.com/




http://www.ebsl.com/





http://www.amanabuildings.com/




http://www.rasanaeng.ae/








http://www.etamech.com/








http://www.eversendai.com/




http://www.murrob.com/





http://www.excel-uae.com/



























k) Arabian International Est.P.O. Box 1514, AjmanTel: 06-7421397Fax: 06-7421490



54 Plaster, Render ,Roughcast Coating

a) ConmixP.O. Box 5936,SharjahTel: 06-5314155

04-3472225Fax: 06-5314332

04-3472180

b) Terraco UAE Ltd Co.P.O Box 1672, UAQTel: 06-7662425Fax: 06-7663929


a) www.conmix.com Email:

[email protected]

b) www.terraco.com Email:

[email protected]

55

Plaster Accessories, Mesh,

Angle Beads Stop Beads,Etc.GI/SS

a) Catnic

b) Expamet

c) Metex

d) Corner Core (UK)

e) TMI

f) SFSP

g) Renderplast

a) Mac Al Gurg BuildersMerchants,

P.O. Box 46997, AUHTel: 02-6741171

04-2661291Fax: 02-6720025

04-2691067


06-5420220Fax: 04-3470765

c) Metal Expansion Factory,P.O. Box 5374, DubaiTel: 04-8992444Fax: 04-8992455

d) Al Semsam Bldg. Mat.,P.O. Box 325, DubaiTel: 04-2698464Fax: 04-2696673

e) Technical Metal Ind.P.O. Box 41558, AUHTel: 02-5502025Fax: 02-5502024

f) Issam Kabbani Tradings(Unitech)P.O. Box 37911, DubaiTel: 04-8847275

04-2856031Fax: 04-8847278

g) Majid Bukatara Bldg. Mat.P.O. Box 50897, DubaiTel: 04-3371710Fax: 04-3371999



[email protected]


c) www.gentex.ae Email: [email protected]

d) www.algurg.com Email:

[email protected]

e) www.tmi-co.com Email: [email protected]



56 Light Wight Concrete a) ConmixP.O. Box 5936,SharjahTel: 06-5314155

a) www.conmix.com Email:[email protected]







http://www.terraco.com/








http://www.esco.ae/

http://www.esco.ae/









http://www.algurg.com/




























http://www.esco.ae/











04-3472225Fax: 06-5314332

04-3472180


57

Soduim SilicateFloor Hardner

a) DPH

b) Master Top

c) Tuffseal

d) Nitofloor Lithurin

e) BCR Liquid DustProofer & HardnerConcrete

a) Cormix Middle East DubaiTel: 04-3374484Fax: 04-3347104

b) BASF Chemicals Co.P.O. Box 37127, DxbTel: 04-8090800Fax: 04-8851130

c) Falcon Chemical Ltd.P.O. Box 2924, DubaiTel: 04-8801444Fax: 04-8801717

d) Al Gurg Fosroc,P.O. Box 657, Dubai

Tel: 04-2858606Fax: 04-2854188

e) Emirates Specialties Co. LLCPO Box 3880, DubaiTel: 04-3470767

06-5420220Fax: 04-3470765


a) Not existing, maybeincorrect spelling mightbe Conmix also

b) www.basf-cc.ae Email:

c) www.falconchemicals.com


d) Email: [email protected]

e) www.esco.ae Email: [email protected]

58

Levelling Compounds

a) Rezex R511

b) Nitoflor leveltopGP

c) Master Top 503

d) BCR LevellingCompound fromBCR (UK)

a) Cormix Middle East DubaiTel: 04-3374484Fax: 04-3347104

b) ARDEX Middle East FzeP.O. Box 262746, Jebel Ali,DubaiTel: 04-8137844Fax: 04-8137814


d) BASF Chemicals Co.P.O. Box 37127, DubaiTel: 04-8090800Fax: 04-8851130

e) Emirates Specialties Co. LLCPO Box 3880, DubaiTel: 04-3470767

06-5420220Fax: 04-3470765


a)

b) www.ardex.co.uk Email:

[email protected]

c) Email: [email protected]

d) www.basf-cc.ae Email:

e) www.esco.ae Email: [email protected]

59

Epoxy Resin Based CoatingSystem

a) Flowcrete

a) F lowcrete Middle East FZCOThe Flooring Technology

Centre 18th Floor, Suite1806, JAFZA View 19PO Box 17641, Jebel Ali Free

a) Email :[email protected]

m












http://www.esco.ae/

http://www.esco.ae/




http://www.ardex.co.uk/









http://www.esco.ae/

http://www.esco.ae/










http://www.esco.ae/






http://www.esco.ae/









b) Mastertop 1210Plus

c) Nitoflor FC- 150

d) Sikaguard 62

Zone Dubai, UAEMr. Vik VithlaniTel: +971 (4) 8864728Fax : +971 (4) 8864582Mobile: +971 (50) 7081421

b) BASF Chemicals Co.P.O. Box 37127, DubaiTel: 04-8090800Fax: 04-8851130


d) GEAP International,P.O. Box 5192, Dubai

Tel: 04-2859450Fax: 04-2857498

e) FOSROC Int‘l. Ltd. P.O. Box 657, DubaiTel: 04-2039699Fax: 04-2854188P.O. Box 27971, AUHTel: 02-6731779Fax: 02-6731449


b) www.basf-cc.ae Email:


d) www.geapgroup.com Email:

e) www.fosroc.com

Email: [email protected] [email protected]

60 Stone / Marble Granite

a) Al Naboodah Gypsum &Marble productsP.O. Box 20423, DubaiTel: 04-2673344Fax: 04-2673026

b) Al Habtoor MarblesP.O. Box 74266, DubaiTel: 04-2859100Fax: 04-2859 103

c) Carrara Mid East IndustrialCo. (LLC)P.O. Box 3565, DubaiTel: 04-2858277Fax: 04-2859774

d) Terrazzo Ltd.P.O. Box 5934, SharjahTel: 06-5333609Fax: 06-5333058


a) www.alnaboodah.com Email: [email protected]

b) www.hlginteriors.com Email: [email protected]

c) www.carrara-me.com Email:[email protected]

d) www.terrazoltd.com Email: [email protected]

61

Ceramic/PorcelainTiles/Glazed Tiles a) Nexus International LLC


b) Al Falah Building Materials &Trdg. Co.P.O. Box 75908, Dubai

Tel: 04-3807355Fax: 04-3807366

a) www.nexusintl.com Email:

[email protected]

b) www.falahco.com Email: [email protected] [email protected]






http://www.geapgroup.com/


http://www.fosroc.com/







http://www.alnaboodah.com/










http://www.carrara-me.com/




http://www.terrazoltd.com/





http://www.nexusintl.com/

































Iris, GRANITI of Italy

Granitto

c) Trade House Ltd.P.O. Box 1829, SharjahTel: 06-5593745Fax: 06-5596357

d) Italco InternationalP.O. Box 16240, DubaiTel: 04-2853135Fax: 04-2857444

e) RAK CeramicsP.O. Box 4714, RAKTel: 07-2445046Fax: 07-2445270

f) Nama Trading Co. LLCP.O. Box 6045, DubaiTel: 04-3497474Fax: 04-3497472

g) Al Khaleej Ceramics


h) Darwish TradingP.O. Box 22363, SharjahTel: 06-5337008Fax: 06-5337959

i) Peninsula Technical SuppliesP.O. Box 44978, AUHTel: 02-6426453Fax: 02-6426569

j) Al Falah Building Materials &Trdg. Co.P.O. Box 75908, DubaiTel: 04-3807355Fax: 04-3807366

j) Al Khaleej CeramicsPO Box 14230,DubaiTel: 04-8801888Fax: 04-8801686


c) www.tradehouseltd.com Email:

[email protected]

d) www.italco.ae Email:[email protected]

e) www.rakceramics.com Email: [email protected]

f) www.namatrading.com Email:[email protected]

g) www.grannitto.com

Email: N/A

h) www.darwishgroup.com Email: [email protected]


j) www.falahco.com Email:[email protected] [email protected]

k) www.grannitto.com Email:

http://www.tradehouseltd.com/




http://www.italco.ae/




http://www.rakceramics.com/





http://www.namatrading.com/




http://www.grannitto.com/


http://www.darwishgroup.com/


































62

Adhesive & Grout for floorand Wall Tiling

a) MAPEI

b) BAL NorcrosAdesives MiddleEast

Saudia Arabia

c) LaticreteInternational INC,USA

d) Nicobond

a) IBS MapeiBuilding No.5, 2nd Floor,Green Community - DubaiInvestment Park DubaiTel +971 4 8156666Fax +971 4 8156655

b) Alshaya Trading Co.P.O. Box 1277, DubaiTel: 04-6074100

04-2629100Fax: 04-2692165

c) Laticrete International MiddleEastP.O. Box 86028, RAKTel: 07-2446396Fax: 07-2445915

d) Al Falah Building Materials &Trdg. Co.P.O. Box 75908, DubaiTel: 04-3807355Fax: 04-3807366


a) www.mapei.ae Email : [email protected]

b) www.alshayatrading.com Email:[email protected]

c) www.laticreterak.com Email:[email protected]

d) www.falahco.com

Email:[email protected] [email protected]

63 Terrazzo Tiling

a) Terrazzo Ltd.P.O. Box 5934, SharjahTel: 06-5333609Fax: 06-5333058


a) www.terrazoltd.com Email: [email protected]

64

Gypsum Tile Ceilinga) Lindner

b) Danogips

c) British Gypsum

a) Lindner-Depa Interiors L.L.CP.O. Box 211950, DubaiTel: 04-88412135Fax: 04-8841970

b) Ideal Technical Service,P.O. Box 30957, DubaiTel: 04-3335245Fax: 04-3335244

c) Prefab Building Ind.P.O. Box 122585, DubaiTel: 04-3330012Fax: 04-3333219

d) Projects & Supplies LLCP.O. Box 11191, DubaiTel: 04-2898828Fax: 04-2898829

e) Danogips Middle EastP.O. Box 533255, DubaiTel: 04-8812281Fax: 04-8812151

f) DECO Emirates Est.P.O. Box 19238, Dubai

Tel: 04-8854660Fax: 04-8854305

a) info(at)lindnerdepa.ae




e) Email:www.danoline.com

f) www.decoemirates.com Email:

[email protected]

http://www.mapei.ae/





http://www.alshayatrading.com/




http://www.laticreterak.com/






















http://www.danoline.com/


http://www.decoemirates.com/

























h) Knauf

i) Boral

g) Al Naboodah Gypsum &Marble productsP.O. Box 20423, DubaiTel: 04-2673344Fax: 04-2673026

h) Knauf LLCP.O. Box 112871, DubaiTel: 04-3377170Fax: 04-3349659

i) Boral ME,P.O. Box 61547, DubaiTel: 04-3339666Fax: 04-3336028


g) www.alnaboodah.com Email: [email protected]

h) www.knauf.ae Email: [email protected]

i) www.boral.com Email: [email protected]

65

Calcuim silicateCeilings

a) Supalux from Cape

Boards & PromatLtd. (UK)

b) Promina fromPromat (onlyEuropean origin)

c) Armstrong

d) Trilite

a) Mac Al GurgPO Box 672, Dubai


b) Ideal Technical Service,P.O. Box 30957, DubaiTel: 04-3335245Fax: 04-3335244

c) Speedwell DécorP.O. Box 42, DubaiTel: 04-3390111Fax: 04-3381617

d) Best Products Trd. Co.,P.O. Box DubaiTel: 04-2856742Fax: 04-2856743



[email protected]



d) This company numberis belongs to jawashiconstructions

66

Cement Boards/Tile

a) Everite by Nutec

c) Maranit

a) Arab Technical Est.P.O. Box 19812, DubaiTel: 04-8853313Fax: 04-8853315

b) Oceanic Gen. Trdg. LLC.,P.O. Box 2101, DubaiTel: 04-3936855Fax: 04-3936844

c) JANACO InternationalP.O. Box 5782, DubaiTel: 04-3516010Fax: 04-3516011


a) www.ate.ae Email: [email protected]

b) www.ogtllc.ae Email: [email protected]

c) www.janacointl.com Email:

[email protected]






http://www.knauf.ae/





http://www.boral.com/













http://www.ate.ae/

http://www.ate.ae/




http://www.ogtllc.ae/














http://www.ate.ae/














67

Thermal InsulationCladding

a) ECO THERM

a) Terraco UAE Ltd.P.O. Box 10218, DubaiTel: 04-3262699Fax: 04-3262733


a) www.terraco.com Email:[email protected]

68

Paints (Internal, External &Thermoplastic)

a) Jotun

b) National

c) Caparol

d) Kansai

e) Berger

f) Wall Glaze

g) Hempel

h) Crown

i) Sigma

j) Dulux

k) BNP

a) Jotun U.A.E., LLCP.O. Box DubaiTel: 04-3395000Fax: 04-3380666

b) National PaintsP.O. Box 5822, SharjahTel: 06-5340111Fax: 06-5340222

c) Caparol LLC.,P.O. Box 62182, DubaiTel: 04-3473538Fax: 04-3474256

d) Al Omran TradingP.O. Box 5212, SharjahTel: 06-5336977

06-5624860Fax: 06-5330294

e) Berger Paints EmiratesP.O. Box 27524, DubaiTel: 04-3391000Fax: 04-3391322

f) Cloisall Chemical Co.

P.O. Box 3366, DubaiTel: 04-325887702-6264111

Fax: 04-325848402-6264229

g) Hempel‘s Marine Paints P.O. Box 2000, SharjahTel: 06-5310140Fax: 06-5310141

h) Hussain Trading Ent. P.O.Box 7466, DubaiTel: 04-2249494Fax: 04-3378229

i) Sigma Paints S.A. Ltd., P.O.Box 52781, DubaiTel: 04-8856700Fax: 04-8856033

j) Al Gurg Leigh‘s Paints,P.O. Box 22334, SharjahTel: 06-5343919Fax: 06-5343983

k) Royal Paints,P.O. Box SharjahTel: 06-5775876Fax: 06-5774876

a) www.jotun.com/me Email: [email protected]

b) www.national-paints.com Email:

[email protected]

c) www.caparol.ae Email: [email protected]


e) www.bergeronline.com Email:[email protected]

f) Email:

[email protected]

g) www.hempel.com Email: [email protected]

h) Email:

i) www.sigmapaints.com Email:

[email protected]

j) www.ahltuae.com Email: [email protected]

k) Email:





http://www.jotun.com/me





http://www.national-paints.com/




http://www.caparol.ae/







http://www.bergeronline.com/






http://www.hempel.com/





http://www.sigmapaints.com/




http://www.ahltuae.com/


























l) SIPCOl) Caitel Building Technology,

P.O. Box DubaiTel: 04-3391844Fax: 04-3391855


l) Email:

69

Anti-Fungus Paint

a) DNTa) Royal Paints,

P.O. Box SharjahTel: 06-5775876Fax: 06-5774876


70

Woodwork and MetalworkPaint

a) Jotun Paint

b) NC Putty


b) National Paints



a) www.jotun.com/me Email: [email protected]

b) www.national-

paints.com Email:[email protected]

71

Powder Coating

a) Jotun PowderCoating


b) Arabian Profile Co Ltd.P.O. Box 3195, SharjahTel: 06-5432624

Fax: 06-5432334c) Sipco Specialist Products

P.O. Box 16111, RAKTel: 07-2046419

04-3391844Fax: 07-2041010

d) Al Tela‘a Technical IndustriesCo.P.O. Box 23426, DubaiTel: 04-3384996Fax: 04-3385002


a) www.jotun.com/meEmail: [email protected]


c) www.sipcospb.com Email:[email protected]

d) www.altela.comEmail: [email protected]

72

Sealants

a) TREMCO, Slough,USA

b) Dow Corning

a) Tremco Ltd. (ME)P.O. Box 3034, DubaiTel: 04-3470460Fax: 04-3470242


06-5420220Fax: 04-3470765

c) Sipco Specialist ProductP.O. Box 16111, RAK

Tel: 07-204641904-3391844

Fax: 07-2041010

a) www.stonecor.com Email:[email protected]


c) www.sipcospb.com Email:

[email protected]

















http://www.sipcospb.com/





http://www.altela.com/








http://www.esco.ae/

http://www.esco.ae/













http://www.esco.ae/




















73

Fire Retardant Treatment

a) Sadoline, Denmarka) Zain Al Abedin Al Khajah


b) Dicotech LLCP.O. Box 33327, DubaiTel: 04-3471581Fax: 04-3470580

c) Fire Tech Services (FTS)P.O. Box DubaiTel: 04-2214213Fax: 04- 2212919


a) www.zainkaja.com Email:[email protected]



74

Sanitary Ware, Fittings and

Accessories

a) Roca

b) BradleyCorporation

c) Dyson Airblade

d) Ideal Standard

e) American Standard

f) Kohler

g) Duravit

h) Grohe

i) Bobrick

a) Rahma Abdulla Al ShamsiP.O. Box 4067, DubaiTel: 04-2666429Fax: 04-2693407

b)

c)

d) Sultan Bin Rashid,(SULTACO),P.O. Box 3402, Dubai

Tel: 04-3385929Fax: 04-3391842

e) Hammam Trading Co.PO Box 9289, DubaiTel: 04-2665210Fax: 04-2712910

f) United Supplies EstP.O. Box 26020, DubaiTel: 04-2687755Fax: 04-2688656

g) Faraidooni Trading CoP.O. Box 3, DubaiTel: 04-2222947Fax: 04-2214660

h) Alshaya Trading Co.P.O. Box 1277, DubaiTel: 04-6074100

04-2629100Fax: 04-2692165

i) Mac Al GurgPO Box 672, DubaiTel: 04-2661291Fax: 04-2691067PO Box 46997, AUH

Tel: 02-6741171Fax: 02-6720025


b) www.bradleycorp.com

c) www.dysonairblade.com

d) www.sultaco.ae Email:[email protected]

e) www.al-majid.com Email: [email protected]

f) www.hassan-abul.com Email:

[email protected]


h) www.alshayatrading.com Email:

i) www.macalgurg.com Email:[email protected]

http://www.zainkaja.com/










http://www.bradleycorp.com/


http://www.dysonairblade.com/






http://www.al-majid.com/





http://www.hassan-abul.com/
































j) Watrous

k) Ottone Meloda

l) Jacob Delafon

m) Twyfords, UK

n) TOTO

o) RAK

j) Khalid Al Mohaisen TradingP.O. Box 3522, DubaiTel: 04-2665536Fax: 04-2668770

k) Al Ghandi BuildingMaterials Co.P.O. Box 1034, DubaiTel: 04-2660045Fax: 04-2685233

l) Faraidooni Trading CoP.O. Box 3, DubaiTel: 04-2222947Fax: 04-2214660

m) Al Futtaim EngineeringP.O. Box 159, DubaiTel: 04-2650999Fax: 04-2650676

n) RAK CeramicsP.O. Box 4714, RAKTel: 07-2445046Fax: 07-2445270


j) www.almohaisin.com Email:[email protected]



m) www.al-futtaim.com Email:[email protected]

n) www.rakceramics.com Email: [email protected]

75 Balustrades

a) Al Abbar AluminumP.O. Box 1626, DubaiTel: 04-3331362Fax: 04-3331283

b) ALICO Aluminum & LightIndustries CoP.O. Box 6011, SharjahTel: 06-5582444Fax: 06-5384999

c) Thomas Bennett GulfP.O. Box 11545, DubaiTel: 04-3381919

04-8121960Fax: 04-3381101

04-8848059

d) Becon AluminumP.O. Box 35487, SharjahTel: 06-5319223Fax: 06-5319224

e) Al Tela‘a Technical IndustriesCo.P.O. Box 23426, DubaiTel: 04-3384996Fax: 04-3385002



b) www.alicouae.com Email:[email protected]

c) www.tbgdubai.com Email: [email protected]


e) www.altela.com Email:[email protected]

76

Façade Cleaning Systema) Transwill a) TRANSWILL ENGINEERING

L.L.C.P.O. BOX 231725, DUBAIUNITED ARAB EMIRATES

Tel: +971 4 34 23 880Fax: +971 4 34 23 881

a) www.transwill.com

Email: [email protected]@eim.ae

http://www.almohaisin.com/








http://www.al-futtaim.com/



















































b) Propa Floors (UK)

c) Tate Access Floors(UK)

d) PAF (UK) CBI-Italy

e) USG

f) Lindner Norit(Germany)

g) MERO Floorsystem

Tel: 02-5551855Fax: 02-5551755

b) Floors Carpet- Contractors,P.O. Box 8762, DubaiTel: 04-2945888Fax: 04-2957081

c) Gulf Computer SupportSystem LLCP.O. Box 13131, DubaiTel: 04-2959191Fax: 04-2959914

d) Bin Khalaf Trdg.P.O.Box19217, Al AinTel: 03-7212077Fax: 03-7212088P.O. Box 206, AUHTel: 02-6791774Fax: 02-

e) USG Middle East Trdg.,(Juman Al Khaleej Gen)P.O. Box 125473, DubaiTel: 04-2954443Fax: 04-2954566

f) Federal Bldg.Industries,P.O. Box 282427, DubaiTel: 04-3475119Fax: 04-3471432

g) Mideast Data SystemP.O. Box 8361, DubaiTel: 04-3355215Fax: 04-3350665



c) www.gcss.ae Email: [email protected]

d) Email:

e) Email: [email protected]

f) www.awrbuildingindustries.com


g) www.mds.ae Email: [email protected]

79

Corner Guards & Bumpersa) BALCO Inc. (USA)

b) Intrad of PJP Trdg.Ltd. (UK) (fixedwith adhesive)

c) Melba (UK)

d) Wilks Products(UK)

e) Arden(USA)

f) Pauling (USA)

a) Emirates Specialties Co. LLCPO Box 3880, DubaiTel: 04-3470767

06-5420220Fax: 04-3470765

b) Al Majaz Trading,P.O. Box 26268, SharjahTel: 06-5591940Fax: 06-5591941

c) JANACO InternationalP.O. Box 5782, DubaiTel: 04-3516010Fax: 04-3516011

d) Peninsula Technical SuppliesP.O. Box 44978, AUHTel: 02-6426453Fax: 02-6426569

e) Ismat Rubber Products,P.O. Box 23974, SharjahTel: 06-5345881

Fax: 06-5345883

f) Construction Specialized

a) www.esco.ae Email: [email protected]


c) www.janacointl.com Email:

[email protected]


e) www.ismatgroup.com




http://www.gcss.ae/

http://www.gcss.ae/






http://www.awrbuildingindustries.com/







http://www.mds.ae/

http://www.mds.ae/




http://www.esco.ae/

http://www.esco.ae/












http://www.ismatgroup.com/











http://www.esco.ae/


http://www.mds.ae/






http://www.gcss.ae/





g) Local

h) Acrowyn

Middle East LLCP.O. Box 9260, DubaiTel: 04-3312167Fax: 04-3315023



80

Speed Reduction Ramps

a) Johnstone SafetyInternational, UK

b) Melba ProductsLtd., UK.

a) Tulip Trading Co. LLCP.O. Box 25732, DubaiTel: 04-3476300Fax: 04-3476343

b) Shreeji Trading Co. LLCP.O. Box 2839, DubaiTel: 04-2282221Fax: 04-2283397


a) www.tulipsafety.com Email: [email protected]


81

Toilets Cubicles

a) Schafer (Solid

Core)

b) Vimsa

c) Kupan

d) Clip (France)(Solid Laminated)

e) Saniclips (France)

f) BB4 Speed

g) Trespa

h) Perstop

i) Loggere

a) Al Kamda General Trdg.P.O. Box 4427, Dubai

Tel: 04-2664200Fax: 04-2662960

b) Al Kamda General Trdg.P.O. Box 4427, DubaiTel: 04-2664200Fax: 04-2662960

c) Sultan Bin Rashid,(SULTACO),P.O. Box 3402, DubaiTel: 04-3385929Fax: 04-3391842

d) Mediterranean BuildingMaterials Est. (MBM)P.O. Box 37151, DubaiTel: 04-3211032Fax: 04-3211513

e) Mediterranean BuildingMaterials Est. (MBM)P.O. Box 37151, DubaiTel: 04-3211032Fax: 04-3211513

f) Mac Al GurgPO Box 672, DubaiTel: 04-2661291Fax: 04-2691067PO Box 46997, AUHTel: 02-6741171Fax: 02-6720025

g) Gibca Furniture Ind. Co.P.O. Box 20923, AjmanTel: 06-7436888Fax: 06-7436903

h) ETAP.O. Box 5239, DubaiTel: 04-3471022Fax: 04-3471077

i) JANACO InternationalP.O. Box 5782, Dubai

a) www.alkamda.com Email: [email protected]

b) www.alkamda.com Email: [email protected]

c) www.sultaco.ae Email:

[email protected]

d) www.mbmauh.ae Email:[email protected]

e) www.mbmauh.ae Email:[email protected]

f) www.macalgurg.com Email:[email protected]

g) www.gfiuae.com Email: [email protected]

h) www.etamech.com Email: [email protected]

i) www.janacointl.com Email:



http://www.tulipsafety.com/





















http://www.mbmauh.ae/












http://www.gfiuae.com/




































j) Bobrick(Soild Core & Metal)

k) Domo (Germany)(Solid Core & Metal)

l) General PartitionsManufacturingCorp.

(Solid Core & Metal)

Tel: 04-3516010Fax: 04-3516011

j) Alshaya Trading Co.P.O. Box 1277, DubaiTel: 04-6074100

04-2629100Fax: 04-2692165

k) Al Habtoor InteriorsP.O. Box 74266, DubaiTel: 04-3474015Fax: 04-3473479

l) Aseel Marbles BuildingMaterialsP.O. Box 113771, DubaiTel: 06-5350035Fax: 06-5350039


[email protected]

j) www.alshayatrading.com Email:

k) www.hlginteriors.com Email: [email protected]

www.aseelmarble.comEmail: [email protected]

82 Signs / Notices

a) Joseph Advertising &MarketingP.O. Box 80298, DubaiTel: 04-8803277Fax: 04-8803166

b) Special Project DesignP.O. Box 11072, DubaiTel: 04-3381919Fax: 04-2861902

c) Emirates Neon LLCP.O. Box 5975, SharjahTel: 06-5337222Fax: 06-5331748

d) Axon Business SystemP.O. Box 3419, DubaiTel: 04-2660380Fax: 04-2693591

e) Arabian AdvertisingP.O. Box DubaiTel: 04-2233740


a) www.josephgroup.ae Email:

[email protected]

b) Email:


d) www.axon.ae Email: [email protected]

e) This number belongs toother company

83 Concert Edging Kerbs &Channels

a) Juma Al Majid East Ltd., P.O.Box 3762, DubaiTel: 04-3477555Fax: 04-3477888

b) ConcentP.O. Box 136, DubaiTel: 04-3472011Fax: 04-3472957



b) www.consentblock.com Email:[email protected]

84 Concrete Paving Blocks

a) Juma Al Majid East Ltd., P.O.Box 3762, Dubai

Tel: 04-3477555Fax: 04-3477888














http://www.josephgroup.ae/






http://www.axon.ae/

http://www.axon.ae/






http://www.consentblock.com/











http://www.axon.ae/












b) Consent,P.O. Box 136, DubaiTel: 04-3472011Fax: 04-3472957


b) www.consentblock.com Email:[email protected]

85 Soft landscaping

a) Oasis DreamsP.O. Box 42897, DubaiTel: 04-3401734Fax: 04-3401735

b) Al Murooj Tr. SwimmingPools & LandscapingP.O. Box 67313, SharjahTel: 06-5236899Fax: 06-5236840

c) Orient Irrigation ServicesP.O. Box 10581, Dubai

Tel: 04-2691985Fax: 04-2693655

d) Desert Landscape Co.P.O. Box 37579, DubaiTel: 04-3404440Fax: 04-3404441

e) Al Bayader Irrigation &ContractingP.O. Box 50169, DubaiTel: 04-2822990Fax: 04-2825440

f) Akar Technical ServicesP.O. Box 14652, DubaiTel: 04-2963955Fax: 04-2963954

g) Gulf Landscape & IrrigationSystem LLCP.O. Box 31926, DubaiTel: 04-8105571Fax: 04-8859079


a) www.oasisdreams.ae Email:[email protected]


c) www.orientirrigation.com Email:

[email protected]

d) www.desertgroup.ae Email:[email protected]


f) www.akartech.com Email:[email protected]

g) www.gulflandscape.com Email:[email protected]

86Specialist Sub-Contractorsfor Swimming Pool andJacuzzi

a) Oasis DreamsP.O. Box 42897, DubaiTel: 04-3401734Fax: 04-3401735

b) Al Murooj Tr. SwimmingPools & LandscapingP.O. Box 67313, SharjahTel: 06-5236899Fax: 06-5236840

c) United Technology & TradingCo.P.O. Box 5697, DubaiTel: 04-3494666

04-2241551Fax: 04-3494646

a) www.oasisdreams.ae Email:[email protected]


c) www.poolsuae.com Email:[email protected]





http://www.oasisdreams.ae/







http://www.orientirrigation.com/




http://www.desertgroup.ae/







http://www.akartech.com/




http://www.gulflandscape.com/











http://www.poolsuae.com/





























d) Bel Hasa Projects LLCP.O. Box 5102, DubaiTel: 04-3331445Fax: 04-3336018

e) Waterman LLCP.O. Box 15832, DubaiTel: 04-2204488Fax: 04-2207448

f) Al Basti & Muktha LLCP.O. Box 2393, DubaiTel: 04-3439444Fax: 04-3439445

g) Sports Village (FS)P.O. Box 19140, DubaiTel: 04-2825444Fax: 04-2824364



e) www.waterman.ae Email:[email protected]

f) www.abmgroup.ae Email:[email protected]


87 Combo Roofing

a) Desert RoofingP.O. Box 185, DubaiTel: 04-3331165Fax: 04-3331427

b) CKK Mid. East Est.,P.O. Box 6589, DubaiTel: 04-2824085Fax: 04-2825365

c) Roof Care Co. L.L.CP.O. Box 47383, DubaiTel : 04-2679641Fax: 04-2679642P.O. Box 54087, AUHTel : 02-5587668Fax: 02-5581211

d) Al Shirawi Cont. & Trad.,P.O. Box 33539, DubaiTel: 04-3335935Fax: 04-3338898


b) www.ckkme.com Email: [email protected]

c) www.roof-care.com Email:

[email protected]

d) www.alshirawi.com Email: [email protected]

88

Gypsum Board

(b) False Ceiling

(c) Vinyl backedceiling

(d) Calcium SilicateBoard

a) Speedwell DécorP.O. Box 42, DubaiTel: 04-3390111Fax: 04-3381617

b) Colour CoatsP.O. Box 7413, DubaiTel: 04-2248050Fax:04-2217954

c) Wisdom Building MatP.O. Box 87238, DubaiTel: 04-2676460Fax: 04-2676095

d) Arabian Star Bldg. Mat.P.O. Box 37120, Sharjah

Tel: 06-5430882Fax: 06-5430883







http://www.waterman.ae/




http://www.abmgroup.ae/




















































89 Aluminum Glazed Doors &Windows

a) United AluminumP.O. Box 283435, DubaiTel: 04-8855399Fax: 04-8855389

b) Ali Moosa & Sons Contracting(Aluminum Division)P.O. Box 22484, SharjahTel: 06-5311533

06-5311444Fax: 06-5311522

06-5311135

c) Bin Lahej ContractingMaintenance (Aluminum)P.O. Box 11781, DubaiTel: 04-3970016Fax: 04-397158

d) Bosco Aluminum

P.O. Box 31897, DubaiTel: 04-2862305Fax: 04-2862306P.O. Box 32211, RAKTel: 07-2446629

e) Zebian AluminumP.O. Box 5818, SharjahTel: 06-5432540Fax: 06-5432491

a) www.ualdubai.com Email: [email protected]

b) www.ams.ae Email: [email protected]

c) www.mmlahej.com Email:

d) www.boscogrp.com



90

Fire Proof Steel Door(a) Ceco Door

(b) McKeon Door

(c) Ambico

(d) Door Systems Inc.

(e) Lakshmi MetalTech LLC

a) Ceco Door

b) McKeon Door

c) Ambico

d) Door Systems Inc.2413 S. Broadway St. Sata

Ana. CA, 92707, USATel +1 714 2857100Fax +1 714 2587171

e) Lakshmi Metal Tech LLCPO Box 119867, DubaiTel 050 9204011Fax 04-3386272



b) www.mckeondoor.com

c) www.ambico.com

d) www.doorsysinc.com Email:

[email protected] [email protected]

e) www.trinityholdings.com


91

Kitchen Cabinet

(a) Post formed shutter

a) Shafiq DagherP.O. Box 657, SharjahTel: 06-5436419Fax: 06-5436215

b) Orient House KitchenP.O. Box 93584, SharjahTel: 06-5350596Fax: 06-5350597P.O. Box 93584, DubaiTel: 04-2716022

Fax: 04-2719639

c) Princess Palace Furniture



c) Email:

http://www.ualdubai.com/





http://www.ams.ae/

http://www.ams.ae/













http://www.mckeondoor.com/


http://www.ambico.com/




































http://www.ams.ae/






FactoryP.O. Box 20643, DubaiTel: 04-2672853Fax: 04-2672401

d) Laing O‘ Rourke AlNaboodah-JoineryP.O. Box 121895, DubaiTel: 04-3472475

04-3393939Fax: 04-3393955

e) SCOM Middle East

f) Ajman Korea FurnitureP.O. Box 631, AjmanTel: 06-748919Fax: 06-7489676

[email protected]


e) Email:

f) Email:[email protected] [email protected]

92

Wardrobes

(a) Post formed shutter

a) Shafiq Dagher


b) Orient House KitchenP.O. Box 93584, SharjahTel: 06-5350596Fax: 06-5350597P.O. Box 93584, DubaiTel: 04-2716022Fax: 04-2719639

c) Princess Palace FurnitureFactoryP.O. Box 20643, DubaiTel: 04-2672853Fax: 04-2672401

d) Laing O‘ Rourke AlNaboodah-JoineryP.O. Box 121895, DubaiTel: 04-3472475

04-3393939Fax: 04-3393955

e) SCOM Middle East

f) Ajman Korea FurnitureP.O. Box 631, AjmanTel: 06-7489191Fax: 06-7489676

a) Email:

[email protected]




e) Email:

f) Email:[email protected] [email protected]

93

Bathroom Vanities

(a) Post Formed Shuttersa) Orient House Kitchen

P.O. Box 93584, SharjahTel: 06-5350596Fax: 06-5350597P.O. Box 93584, DubaiTel: 04-2716022Fax: 04-2719639

b) Princess Palace FurnitureFactory











































c) Laing O‘ Rourke AlNaboodah-JoineryP.O. Box 121895, DubaiTel: 04-3472475

04-3393939

d) SCOM Middle East

e) Ajman Korea FurnitureP.O. Box 631, AjmanTel: 06-7489191Fax: 06-7489676


d) Email:

e) Email:[email protected] [email protected]

94 Cementious Tile Grouta) RAK Ceramics

P.O. Box 4714, RAKTel: 07-2445046Fax: 07-2445270

a) www.rakceramics.com Email:[email protected]

95 Tile Glue

a) Laticrete RAK Co. LLC

P.O. Box 86028, RAKTel: 07-244 6396Fax: 07-244 5915

a) www.laticrete.com


96 Internal Paint & AntiCarbonation

a) RAK CeramicsP.O. Box 4714, RAKTel: 07-2445046Fax: 07-2445270

a) www.rakceramics.com Email:[email protected]

97 Spray Plaster to Ceiling

a) Altek International FzeP.O. Box 65736, DubaiTel: 04-3124030

Fax: 04-3124031b) Spray Tek Contracting


c) Hi-Tech Mech. WorksP.O. Box 8054, DubaiTel: 04-3384433Fax: 04-3384959

a) www.altek.ae Email: [email protected]


c) www.hitechgroupuae.com Email: [email protected]

98

Wall/Column Guards/Speed Humps

(a) Ocean RubberIndustries

(b) Hira Industries

a) Ocean Rubber Ind.P.O. Box 6607, SharjahTel: 06-5344110Fax: 06-5344220

b) Hira Industries LLCP.O. Box 50673, DubaiTel: 04-8848414Fax: 04-8848434

a) www.oceanrubber.com Email: [email protected]

b) www.rhira.com Email:[email protected]

99 Aluminum

a) ESC Aluminium SystemP.O. Box 85564, DubaiTel: 04-2515656Fax: 04-2515800

b) Reynaers Middle East WLLP.O. Box 54245, BahrainTel: +973 17877266

a) www.esc700.com Email:[email protected]

b) www.reynaers.com Email:info@[email protected]











http://www.laticrete.com/









http://www.altek.ae/







http://www.hitechgroupuae.com/





http://www.oceanrubber.com/





http://www.rhira.com/




http://www.esc700.com/




http://www.reynaers.com/


mailto:info@[email protected]



























Fax: +973 17877299

c) United AluminumP.O. Box 283435, DubaiTel: 04-8858066Fax: 04-8855389

d) Alumetal LLCP.O. Box 37884, DubaiTel: 04-3404866Fax: 04-3404877

e) Arabian AluminumP.O. Box 22438, SharjahTel: 06-5334485Fax: 06-5334351

f) Bosco AluminumP.O. Box 31897, DubaiTel: 04-2862305Fax: 04-2862306

P.O. Box 32211, RAKTel: 07-244662Fax: 07-2446879

e) Ali Moosa & SonsContracting (AluminumDivision)P.O. Box 22484, SharjahTel: 06-5311533

06-5311444Fax: 06-5311522

06-5311135

f) Buhaira Aluminum & GlassServiceP.O. Box 40632, SharjahTel. 06-5368027Fax:

c) www.ualdubai.com Email: [email protected]


e) www.arabcouae.com Email:

[email protected]

f) www.boscogrp.com Email:[email protected]

g) www.ams.ae Email: [email protected]

h) Email:

100

Carpark Barriers(a) Came

(b) Fedral APD

(c) Royal Gate

(d) Bin Dasmal Door

(e) Kazarooni Gen.Trading Co. LLC

(a) Came

(b) Fedral APD

(c) Royal Gate AutomaticBarriers LLCDubaiTel: 04-2687687

(d) Bin Dasmal Door Est.P.O. Box 5389, DubaiTel: 04-8067600Fax: 04-8067601

(e) Kazarooni General TradingCo. LLCP.O. Box 2812, DubaiTel: 04-2286373Fax: 04-2271837

d) www.bindasmal.com Email:[email protected]

e) www.kazarooni.net Email: [email protected]

101

Refuse Disposal System(a) Chub Trading

(b) Ostermier

a) Chub Trading

b) Ostermeier Fze.P.O. Box 61378, DubaiTel: 04-2828233

a) Email:

b) www.ostermeierfze.ae Email: [email protected]








http://www.arabcouae.com/








http://www.ams.ae/

http://www.ams.ae/








http://www.kazarooni.net/





http://www.ostermeierfze.ae/












http://www.ams.ae/











(c) Mohd TayyebKhoory & Sons

(d) StandardFabrication

Fax: 04-2828232

c) Mohd Tayyeb Khoory & SonsP.O. Box 4664, DubaiTel: 04-3476999Fax: 04-3479929

d) Standard FabricationP.O. Box 7432, DubaiTel: 04-3331818Fax: 04-3331320

c) www.mgkhoory.com Email: [email protected]


102

Building Maintenance

(a) AESA Eurogondolas

(b) UNIT

a) ETA – MELCOP.O. 71058, DubaiTel: 04-2359595Fax: 04-2725121

b) Power Machines LLCP.O. Box 35364, DubaiTel: 04-3331519

Fax: 04-3331027

c) EW Cox ME LLCP.O. Box 33654, DubaiTel: 04-5118200Fax: 04-5118300

d) Xsplatforms Middle East,P.O. Box 16873, DubaiTel: 04-8872488Fax: 04-8872499


b) www.powermachinesllc.com

Email:

[email protected]

c) www.coxgomyl.com Email:

[email protected]

d) www.xsplatforms.com Email: [email protected]

103

Lifts(a) Kone

(b) Mitsubishi

(c) Otis

(d) Arabian Elevators(LG)

(e) Thyssen Krupp

(f) Schindler

a) KONE (Middle East) LLC

P.O. Box: 21474 DubaiTel 04-2221393Fax 04-2226292

b) ETA-Mitsubishi ElevatorP.O. Box 3967, AUHTel: 02-6767597Fax: 02-6717180P.O. 71058, DubaiTel: 04-2359595Fax: 04-2725121

c) Otis LLCP.O. Box 8626, DubaiTel: 04-3371074Fax: 04-3377460

d) Arabian Elevators (LG)P.O. Box 26031, SharjahTel: 06-5739920Fax: 06-5730962

e) Thyssen Krupp ElevatorP.O. Box 27278, DubaiTel: 04-2865277Fax: 04-2865489

f) Schindler UAEP.O. Box 115117,DubaiTel: 04-3819191

Fax: 04-3490561P.O. Box 38250, AUHTel: 02-6282955


om

b) Email:[email protected] [email protected]


d) www.aeec-hyundai.com Email:

[email protected]

e) www.thyssenkrupp-elevator.com


f) www.schindler.com.sa Email:

[email protected]

http://www.mgkhoory.com/









http://www.powermachinesllc.com/






http://www.coxgomyl.com/




http://www.xsplatforms.com/















http://www.aeec-hyundai.com/




http://www.thyssenkrupp-elevator.com/






http://www.schindler.com.sa/






























d) Ajman Korea FurnitureP.O. Box 631, AjmanTel: 06-7489191Fax: 06-7489676

d) Email:[email protected] [email protected]

107

Building Installation

(a) Foam Plastic BoardInsulation

a) Roof Care Co. L.L.CP.O. Box 47383, DubaiTel : 04-2679641Fax: 04-2679642P.O. Box 54087, AUHTel : 02-5587668Fax: 02-5581211

b) Pearl Insulation MaterialIndustries LLCP.O. Box 8375, DubaiTel: 04-3338398Fax: 04-3332407

c) Star Adhesive & ResinIndustries Factory LLCP.O. Box 26551, SharjahTel: 06-7673033Fax: 06-7673022

a) www.roof-care.com Email:

[email protected]

b) www.bayer.com Email:[email protected]

c) www.star-uae.com Email: [email protected]

108

a) Stag Wool Fiber RockWoolfibre

a) Fibrex Co.P.O. Box 462, AUHTel: 02-5511462Fax: 02-5513331

b) Thermafiber

c) Owens Corning

a) www.fibrex.ae Email: [email protected]

b) Email:

c) Email:

109

a) Glass Fibre BlanketInsulation

a) CSR Building Materials Ltd.

b) Johns Manvilla

c) Owens Corning

a) Email:

b) Email:

c) Email:

110

Fire Stop System

(a) Hilti Inc

(b) Johns Manvile

(c) 3M Fire ProtectionProducts Division

(d) Tremco Incorp

a) Hilti Inc.P.O. Box 11051, DubaiTel: 04-8060300Fax: 04-8854404

b) Johns Manville

c) 3M Gulf Ltd.P.O. Box 20191, DubaiTel: 04-3670777Fax: 04-3670599



b) Email:

c) www.3mgulf.com Email: [email protected]

d) www.stonecore.com Email:[email protected]

111

Joint Sealants

(a) Latex Joint Sealant

a) Petrotech Enterprises

LLC (Bostik)P.O. Box 5311, DubaiTel: 04-2622211

a) www.petrotechgroup.org










http://www.bayer.com/




http://www.star-uae.com/












http://www.3mgulf.com/





http://www.stonecore.com/




http://www.petrotechgroup.org/

























(b) Acoustical JointSealant

(c) Silicon Sealant

Fax: 04-2622233

b) Pecore Corp.

c) Tremco Ltd. (ME)P.O. Box 3034, DubaiTel: 04-3470460Fax: 04-3470242

d) USG Middle East Trdg.,(Juman Al Khaleej Gen)P.O. Box 125473, DubaiTel: 04-2954443Fax: 04-2954566

e) Dow Corning Corporation

f) GE Advanced MaterialsP.O. Box 11549, DubaiTel: 04-4296161Fax: 04-4296105

b) Email:

c) www.stonecor.com Email:

[email protected]


e) Email:

f) www.ge.com Email: [email protected]

108 Thermite Control

a) Bayer CorporationP.O. Box 262369, DubaiTel: 04-8817773Fax: 04-8814323

b) Dow Agro Science LLCP.O. Box 16943, DubaiTel: 04-332886Fax: 04-3123660

c) Arabian AgriculturalEngineering EstP.O. Box 9119, DubaiTel: 04- 2666446Fax: 04- 2695242

a) www.bayer.com Email: [email protected]

b) www.dowmiddleast.com Email:[email protected]

c) www.aaee-uae.com Email:[email protected]

109

Concrete AdmixturesConcrete Repair and CuringCompound

(a) FOSROC

(b) FEB Middle East

(c) Degussa

a) FOSROC Int‘l. Ltd. P.O. Box 657, DubaiTel: 04-2039699Fax: 04-2854188P.O. Box 27971, AUHTel: 02-6731779Fax: 02-6731449

b) FEB Middle EastP.O. Box 5558, SharjahTel: 06-5345123Fax: 06-5345066

e) BASF Chemicals Co.(Degussa Middle East)P.O. Box 37127, DubaiTel: 04-8090800Fax: 04-8851130

a) www.fosroc.com Email: [email protected] [email protected]

b) Email:www.mbt-middleeast.com

c) www.basf-cc.ae Email:

110Concrete Pavers,Interlocking,Tiles & Kerbstone

a) CONSENT L.L.C PO Box 136 DubaiTel 04-3472011Fax 04-3472957

[email protected]

111Accessories for Block workand Plasterwork a) Mac Al Gurg (Catnic)

PO Box 672, Dubaia) www.macalgurg.com

Email:







http://www.ge.com/

http://www.ge.com/




http://www.dowmiddleast.com/





















http://www.mbt-middleeast.com/
























http://www.ge.com/







(a) Catnic (Al Gurg)

(b) Issam Kabbani

(c) Emirates Specialties


b) Issam Kabbani Tradings(Unitech)P.O. Box 37911, DubaiTel: 04-8847275

04-2856031Fax: 04-8847278


06-5420220Fax: 04-3470765

[email protected]



112 Architectural Terracotta

a) Hunter Douglas


a) www.hunterdouglascontr

act.com Email: [email protected]

113 Aluminum Aero Foils

a) Hunter DouglasP.O. Box 17283, DubaiTel: 04-8131800Fax: 04-8863301

a) www.hunterdouglascontr act.com


114 Steel Fibers for ConcreteSlab on Grade BEKAERT (Dramix), OR EQUAL

115 Composite Slab Decking

Tiger Steel Industries


[email protected]

116

Movable / Foldable walls

Panelfold

Skyfold

Dorma Moveo

a) Mediterranean BuildingMaterialP.O. Box 37151, DubaiTel: 04-3211032Fax: 04-3211513

b) Gibca LimitedP.O. Box 289, SharjahTel: 06-5333333Fax: 06-5333444

c) DORMA Gulf Door ControlsFZEP.O. Box 17268, DubaiTel: 04-8020400Fax: 04-8869101

[email protected]

www.skyfold.com Email: [email protected]

[email protected]

117

Lab casework andfumehood

Bedcolab

a) www.bedcolab.com

118 MEP Contractors

a) Trans GulfP.O Box 2432, Dubai, UAETel : +971 4 884 8753Fax : +971 4 884 8463

a) www.transgulfdubai.com Email:[email protected]

Limit : 5 Million to 500 MillionDirhams





http://www.esco.ae/

http://www.esco.ae/




http://www.hunterdouglascontract.com/


















http://www.skyfold.com/





http://www.bedcolab.com/


http://www.transgulfdubai.com/



















http://www.esco.ae/






b) Bilt Middle EastP.O. Box. 2393Dubai - U.A.E.Tel : 04-3439798Fax : 04-3439445

c) Emirates Trading Agency LLCP.O. Box. 5239Dubai - U.A.E.Tel.: +971 4 3185111Fax: +971 4 3386301

d) BK Gulf LLCPO Box 10079,Dubai, United Arab Emirates.Tel : +971 4 880 1606Fax : +971 4 880 1603

e) Drake & Scull International PJSC P.O. Box 65794 Dubai, UAETel: +971 4 8112300

Fax: +971 4 8112315

f) AL SHIRAWI ELECTRICAL &MECHANICAL ENGINEERINGCO. LLC.P.O. Box 33539 Dubai, UAETel: +971 4 3337644Fax: +971 4 3338898

g) Macair LLC, P.O. Box 24689, Dubai, UAET: +971 4 501 4800F: +971 4 330 6430

h) Streamline Electro MechanicalContracting LLCP.O. Box 14749 Dubai, UAETel: +971 4 2838414Fax: +971 4 2588838

i) Menasco Mechanical ContractingP.O. Box. 19086Dubai - U.A.E.Tel.: +971 4 2611164/7Fax: +971 4 2611696

j) Solico Contracting Co. LLC, P.O. Box 47548, Dubai, UAET: +971 4 3337644F: +971 4 3338898

k) Al Arabia Electro MechanicalP.O. Box 60204, Dubai, UAET: +971 4 2851145F: +971 4 2857890

l) GECO Mechanical & ElectricalContracting LLCP.O. Box 1150 Sharjah, UAE

Tel: +971 6 5138111Fax: +971 6 5138450

b) www.bilt.ae Email : [email protected]

Limit : 40 Million to 330 MillionDirhams

c) www.etamne.com Email: [email protected]

Limit : 100,000 to 2 BillionDirhams

d) www.bkgulf.com Email : [email protected]

e) www.drakescull.comEmail :[email protected]

m

f) www.alshirawi.com/engineering


g)



j) Email:[email protected]

k) Email: [email protected]

[email protected]


119 Fire Fighting

a) National Fire FightingManufacturing FZCO

P.O. Box 17014 Dubai, UAETel: +971 4 8151111Fax: +971 4 8151222

a) www.naffco.com Email:[email protected]

http://www.bilt.ae/

http://www.bilt.ae/




http://www.etamne.com/





http://www.bkgulf.com/





http://www.drakescull.com/





http://www.alshirawi.com/engineering






















http://www.naffco.com/




















http://www.drakescull.com/






http://www.bilt.ae/




Appendix 4: Soil Test Report



ي ح م أل ن اد ـ

Hassan Al AmirSoil Anal sis

E- mail:[email protected]

UAE – Dubai – P.O. Box 510, Dubai ر ة د510.. – د – Tel 04 – 341 6086 Fax 04 – 341 6096 04 – 6096341آ04 – 6086341ن

(Document No. SR01, Issue No. 01, Rev. No. 0 - Issued on 16.02.2013 ) Report Ref. No. HASA/100613/30 16 Page 1 of 42

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONREPORT

Project Residential Building (B + G + 5)

on Plot No. IC3-B-37

atINTERNATIONAL CITY- PHASE 3

DUBAI

For Owner

Mr. Jamal M.M. (Yasin Abuhijleh)

ConsultantM.E. Engineering Consultants

Report Ref. No. HASA/100613/3016 Rev. No. 0

DUBAI

JANUARY 2014








Report Ref. No. : HASA/100613/3016M/s. M.E.Engineering Consultants.Rev. No. : 0

P.O. Box 119487, Dubai – UAE. Date : 14 th JANUARY 2014

Subject : Geotechnical Investigation Report

Project : Residential Building (B + G + 5)

Plot No. : IC3-B-37

Location : INTERNATIONAL CITY- PHASE 3 – DUBAI

Site Owner : Mr. Jamal M.M. (Yasin Abuhijleh)

Consultant : M.E. Engineering Consultants

Contractor : NP

Dear Sir,

It is much pleasure for us to submit the final geotechnical investigation report for the project

mentioned above.

We hope that the information included cover all geotechnical issues related to the foundation of the

project. For any further inquiry, please do not hesitate to contact us and we are looking forward to

continued cooperation.

Very truly yours,

Engr. Muhammad Sarwar

Geotechnical Manager








TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................................... 52. AIMS AND SCOPE OF WORK................................................................................................ 53. PROJECT AND SITE DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................... 54. EXPLORATION PROGRAM AND BORING TECHNIQUES................................................. 5

4. 1. Standard Penetration Test (SPT) ........................................................................................ 64. 2. Groundwater Table Measuring........................................................................................... 6

5. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND GROUNDWATER ........................................................ 66. LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM................................................................................... 7

6. 1. Chemical Analysis ............................................................................................................. 76. 2. Soil Classification Tests..................................................................................................... 76. 3. Unconfined Compressive Strength Test......................................................................... ..... 7

7. DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS.......................................................................... 77.1 Foundation Type, Depth & Bearing Capacity..................................................................... 77.2 Excavation......................................................................................................................... 87.3 Soil Parameters.................................................................................................................. 87.4 Groundwater Control ......................................................................................................... 87.5 Backfill Materials & Compaction....................................................................................... 97.6 Concrete Design For Foundation Purposes......................................................................... 9

8. GENERAL COMMENTS AND LIMITATIONS .................................................................... 10APPENDIX A................................................................................................................................. 13Plate 1. Site Plan....................................................................................................................... 14Plate 2. Boreholes Location ...................................................................................................... 15APPENDIX B (FIELD RESULTS) ................................................................................................. 16Plate 3. Borehole Log for Borehole No. 1 ................................................................................. 18

Plate 4. Borehole Log for Borehole No. 2 ................................................................................. 20Plate 5. Borehole Log for Borehole No. 3 ................................................................................. 22APPENDIX C (LABORATORY TEST RESULTS)........................................................................ 23Plate 6. Particle Size Distribution for Borehole No. 1 & 3......................................................... 24Plate 7. Chemical Test Results.................................................................................................. 25APPENDIX D (CORE SPECIMEN PHOTOS) ............................................................................... 26Plate 8. Core Specimen from BH 1 (Depth 2.0m ~ 10.0m)....................................................... 27Plate 9. Core Specimen from BH 1 (Depth 10.0m ~ 18.0m)..................................................... 28Plate 10. Core Specimen from BH 2 (Depth 2.50m ~ 11.0m)..................................................... 29Plate 11. Core Specimen from BH 2 (Depth 12.5m ~ 18.0m)..................................................... 30Plate 12. Core Specimen from BH 3 (Depth 2.50m ~ 11.0m)..................................................... 31Plate 13. Core Specimen from BH 3 (Depth 11.0m ~ 18.0m)..................................................... 32

APPENDIX E (USEFUL INFORMATION) ................................................................................... 33Percussion Boring Method .............................................................................................................. 34Rotary Drilling Method................................................................................................................... 34Standard Penetration Test (SPT)...................................................................................................... 35Groundwater Table Measuring ........................................................................................................ 36Particle Size Distribution................................................................................................................. 36Rock Strength Classification (BS 5930: 1999).............. ................................................................... 37








Unconfined Compressive Strength Test........................................................................................... 37CIRIA Special Publication 31.......................................................................................................... 38

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE REPORT*.................... ............................................ 40LIST OF SYMBOLS USED IN THE REPORT* ............................................................................ 41REFERENCES............................................................................................................................ 42








1. INTRODUCTION

Hassan Al Amir Soil Analysis Laboratory was commissioned by M/s. M.E. Engineering Consultants

to perform a geotechnical investigation report for the proposed construction of Residential Building

(B + G + 5) for owner Mr. Jamal M.M. (Yasin Abuhijleh), on Plot No. IC3-B-37, at

INTERNATIONAL CITY- PHASE 3, Dubai, United Arab Emirates.

The investigation has been based on a HASA proposal (TEMP/200513/01) dated 20 th MAY 2013,

and subsequent approval by M/s. M.E. Engineering Consultants on 10 th JUNE 2013. The work has

been performed in general accordance with British Standard BS 5930: 1999, “Code of practice for

site investigations”.

2. AIMS AND SCOPE OF WORK

The aim of this study is to evaluate the subsurface conditions at the site and develop the essential

criteria and parameters required to use in foundation design and construction for the proposed

project. The investigation will provide the structure engineer with the main criteria for design of all

structure members below the ground surface.

3. PROJECT AND SITE DESCRIPTION

The proposed project is Residential Building (B + G + 5) and the structure is mainly from reinforced

concrete and different types of partitions.Plate1 in appendix A of this report shows the site plan as introduced from the client and Plate 2

shows the boreholes location as specified by the client.

• At the time of site investigation the site consists of piles of sandy material and the borehole

locations were marked by the client as represented in the site plan.

• The site is not leveled and its level is approximately 0.0m ~ +1.4m to the temporary benchmark

(TBM) established at the average level of the adjacent asphalt road at the time of finishing the

boreholes.

4. EXPLORATION PROGRAM AND BORING TECHNIQUES

The program of fieldwork consisted of drilling three (3) boreholes to depths of 18.0m by rotary

boring method using 100mm (4-inches) casing as shown in appendix E of this report.

Boreholes drilling and sampling at various depths were carried out according to BS 5930 : 1999.








The boreholes locations were set out in accordance with the instructions of the client’s representative

and is shown in the site plan presented as Plate 2 in appendix A of this report.

The fieldwork was carried out under the close supervision of an experienced geotechnical engineer.

The borehole logs are presented in appendix B of this report.

4. 1. Standard Penetration Test (SPT)

Standard Penetration Tests (SPTs) were conducted regularly at 0.5m intervals up to 2.5m and there

after 1.0m intervals up to the end of boring in accordance with the drilling procedure specified in BS

5930: 1999.

SPTs were conducted in accordance with British Standard BS 1377 part 9 : 1990 Cl. 3.3. See more

details in appendix E of this report.

4. 2. Groundwater Table Measuring

The groundwater table was measured using Electric Contact Meter (Dip Meter), Type: KLL. Electric

Contact Meters (Dip Meters) are a portable, used for quick, easy, reliable instruments for measuring

the water level and total depth in boreholes. See more details in appendix E of this report.

It has to be noticed that the groundwater table level is affected by seasonal and tidal changes as well

as dewatering in the adjacent areas.

5. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND GROUNDWATER

The subsurface conditions as revealed from the boreholes indicated that:• The site is underlain by layer of dense to very dense, light brown, slightly silty, fine SAND

with light reddish brown sand and rare cemented sand pieces from depth 1.8m & 2.0m to

depths 2.0m & 2.5m below existing ground level.

• From depths 2.0m & 2.5m to depths (8.5m, 8.0m and 7.2m) there was a layer of very weak

to moderately weak, light reddish brown, slightly to moderately weathered, very thinly

bedded, fine to medium grained, gypsiferous SANDSTONE interbeded with conglomeratic

sandstone .

• From depths (8.5m, 8.0m and 7.2m) to depth 18.0m (End of Boring) there was a layer of

weak to moderately weak, light pinkish to off white creamish, moderately weathered, fine to

medium grained, CALCISILTITE interbeded with conglomeratic calcisiltite.

• The groundwater table was encountered at 4.0m ~ 4.1m depth below the temporary

benchmark (TBM) established at the average level of the adjacent asphalt road at the time of








finishing the boreholes.

6. LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM

All extracted samples were brought to the laboratory for further examination and studies. Some

selected soil samples subjected to physical and chemical tests all in accordance with applicable

standard methods as following:

6. 1. Chemical Analysis

Chemical analysis was carried out according to BS 1377 part 3: 1990: AMD 9028: 1996 on selected

one soil sample and one water sample, which extracted from the boreholes and the results, are shown

in appendix C of this report.

6. 2. Soil Classification TestsThe particle size distribution was carried out according to BS 1377 part 2: 1990 Cl. 9.2, AMD 9027 :

1996. The classification of soil based on the particle size distribution in the table shown in appendix

D of this report. The results for the analysis on two specimens at different depths are shown in the

appendix C of this report.

6. 3. Unconfined Compressive Strength Test

Some of the samples extracted from the boreholes are core specimens. The unconfined compressive

strength was carried out on some selected core specimens according to ASTM D 7012-10, ASTM D

4543-08 and the results are shown in borehole log in appendix B of this report.

7. DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS

7.1 Foundation Type, Depth & Bearing Capacity

Based on the encountered substrata, field, laboratory tests and the empirical equations developed by

Terzhagi and Peck, Meyerhof and modified by Bowles and taking in to consideration a safety factor 3

against shear failure of the soil. The following must be considered:

Depth ofExcavation,

m

SoilReplacement,

m

FoundationLevel,

m

Allowable

BearingCapacity,kN/m2

Modulusof Sub-grade

Reaction,kN/m3

Type of Foundation

4.0 0.25 3.75 400 24,000 Raft Foundation

Levels are from temporary bench mark (TBM) established on the average level of the adjacent asphalt road.








• Bottom of excavation must be compacted to at least 95% of the modified proctor maximum dry

density of soil using a heavy roller.

• Soil replacement shall be approved granular road base material and must be compacted to at

least 98% of the modified proctor maximum dry density using a heavy roller.

• The expected total settlement for raft foundation will be ≤50mm, this should not cause any

problem.

• When excavating to foundation level, care should be taken not to disturb strata underlying

formation level otherwise settlements in excess of those quoted above could occur. If any

disturbance does occur, or if any soft spots or gypsiferous materials are encountered, the

material should be removed and replaced by selected approved granular fill, which should be properly compacted before the foundations are constructed.

7.2 Excavation

Excavation for foundation will take place through the existing soil formation up to the specified

depths of excavation, which is mentioned above. The following will be considered:

• The excavation works should be carried out in accordance with good construction practice, such

as BS 6031: 1981 “Code of Practice for Earthworks” or a similar recognized standard.

• Temporary or permanent retaining structures may be constructed around the building line.

7.3 Soil ParametersRetaining walls will be required as a part of basement structure and possibly as temporary works. The

following soil parameters are recommended for the design of retaining structures based on the

standard penetration test (SPT) values:

Depth from TBM, m 0.0 ~ 4.0Average Bulk Density, γ, kN/m 18.0Average Angle of shearing resistance, φo 34Average Coefficient of active earth pressure, K a 0.28Average Coefficient of passive earth pressure, K p 3.54Average Coefficient of earth pressure at rest, K o 0.44

7.4 Groundwater Control

The groundwater table has encountered at 4.0m ~ 4.1m depth from the temporary benchmark (TBM)

established at the average level of the adjacent asphalt road at the time of finishing the boreholes ,

variations in groundwater table are anticipated due to seasonal and tidal changes as well as

dewatering in the adjacent areas. Therefore, reconfirmation is recommended prior to any works








related to the groundwater regime.

7.5 Backfill Materials & Compaction

The following notes must be considered as appropriate when applicable:

• The bottom of excavation/excavation surface must be compacted to at least 95% of the modified

proctor maximum dry density of soil using a heavy roller.

• Backfill material should not contain any roots, construction debris, deleterious material.

• Recommended engineering fill material shall comply with the following specifications:

Type of soil : Inorganic and free draining with no more than trace amounts of organic matter,gypsum or other salts.

Particle size : 50mm max.Fines content : 15% max.Gradation : Well graded

• Structural backfill should be performed in horizontal layers of thickness 150mm to 250mm

Compaction should be performed in each layer to reach the required degree mentioned in this

report. This is applicable for slabs on grade and asphalt pavements as well.

• The excavated materials can not be used for structural fill without testing but can be used as

common fill provided it is not supporting any structure, i.e. around the building or somewhere

else.

7.6 Concrete Design For Foundation Purposes

Based on the chemical tests performed in our laboratory shown in appendix C of this report and

(Figure 6 & Table 13) of CIRIA Special Publication 31 (The CIRIA Guide to Concrete Construction

in the Gulf Region published by the Construction Industry Research and Information Association,

London 1984) shown in appendix D of this report which considers both sulphate and chloride

contamination of soils and groundwater in various exposure conditions and is not restricted just to

sub-surface concrete, it is considered that this site would be classed as having significant

contamination of chloride salts only. On this basis it is considered that Exposure Condition d(iii)

would apply, for which it is recommended that OPC or an ASTM type (I) usually have high C 3A

content and ASTM type (II) usually has medium C 3A content to be used in a mix meeting the

following criteria:

Minimum cement content for 20mm aggregates 320 to 400 kg/m 3

Maximum water : cement ratio 0.50 to 0.42








Minimum cover for reinforcement 40mm to 50mm

In addition it is recommended that the surface of all concrete in contact with the soil should be

covered with a suitable waterproof membrane or coating. However, prior to finalizing and adopting a

mix design, appropriate consultation with the structural engineer is advised.

8. GENERAL COMMENTS AND LIMITATIONS

The following points must be considered in conjunction with this report:

• As mentioned in the report the boreholes made were of 100/150mm in diameter. The

information received from the limited number and the diameter of boreholes may not represent

the entire site and may not reveal all the weak layers or conditions especially when they are

localized. Hence, no responsibility can be borne for conditions not revealed by boreholes made

on the site. In case of any such findings, we shall be contacted immediately to arrange a site

visit by a geotechnical engineer to make an on site study of such conditions after which

recommendations if it is deemed necessary will be revised.

• The borehole logs and related information represent subsurface conditions only at the specific

locations and times where sampling was conducted. Any lines designating the changes between

soil and/ or rock layers represent approximate boundaries. The transition between deposits /

strata may be gradual or may occur between recovered samples.

• The recommendations and discussions given in this report are based on the subsurface

conditions encountered during the site investigation work and on the results of the field and

laboratory testing on samples obtained from the limited number of boreholes. There may be,

however conditions pertaining to the site which has not been in to account due to the limited

number of boreholes.

• Precautions should be taken to prevent any ingress of water into more silty horizons both during

and after construction, otherwise settlement in excess of those quoted in this report could occur.

•

At the time of construction it shall be made sure that the excavation levels for foundations are atleast 0.3m above the groundwater table so that compaction process at the excavated level can be

properly carried out to the required degree mentioned in our report. In case of any difficulty in

achieving proper compaction, a 250mm layer thick granular fill material shall be placed and

compacted to the required degree of compaction.








• While carrying out dewatering, it shall be ensured that no excessive settlement is caused to the

nearby structures and the process shall be carried out in stages. Moreover, suitable precautions

have to be taken especially in areas with weak strata.

• Where the construction area levels are less than the proposed foundation level, filling below the

foundation level shall be carried out in layers not exceeding 250mm and each layer shall be

compacted to at least 95% of the modified proctor maximum dry density of the soil in case of

fine material or to 98% in case of granular fill (road base). The compaction percentages attained

shall be confirmed by carrying out insitu density tests for each compacted layer. For backfills

up to 1.0m, plate load test shall be carried out to confirm the efficiency of the backfill. In case

of the backfill exceeds 1.0m, cone penetration test (CPT) shall be carried out to confirm the

same.

• Before pouring the concrete, the ground surface at foundation level should be free of any loose

stone fragments and dirt.

• In case of any hard strata like the sandstone, siltstone or other rock types, use of a special

excavators for excavations of such strata shall be considered.

• For excavations deeper than 2.0m, suitable side protections have to be ensured so that the

excavation shall not pause a threat to the personnel working on the site or cause any damage to

nearby existing buildings or roads.• In case there is an existing structure, which is waiting for demolition, and the soil investigation

has to be carried out outside the existing structure it is advisable to sink one or two more

boreholes after demolition to confirm the bearing pressure.

• Suitable slopes shall be used to drain storm and wastewater away from the proposed building.

• The recommendations given in this report need not considered as a final and binding. These

recommendations may be altered (where the soil parameters permit) depending on the design

requirements and by agreement with the geotechnical engineer.

• All earth works including bottom of excavation inspection, site filling and the specified tests

prior to and during construction shall be carried out under the supervision of a qualified

geotechnical engineer.

• The tests and experiments for the quality control on soil, construction materials, and concrete

must be considered, followed up and approved by HASA laboratory.








• HASA laboratory shall be contacted to carry out compaction or other tests if recommended in

our report at random locations selected by us in which case only a letter of confirmation can be

issued for the safe bearing capacity and foundation levels.

_______________________________ ______________________

_____________

Engr. Mary Genifer C. SambadeGeotechnical Engineer

Engr. Muhammad SarwarGeotechnical Manager








APPENDIX A

SITE PLAN PLATE 1

BOREHOLES LOCATION PLATE 2








Plate 1. Site Plan








Plate 2. Boreholes Location








APPENDIX B (FIELD RESULTS)

BOREHOLE LOGS PLATE 3 TO 5








BOREHOLE LOG – BH No. 1Date of drilling started : 5 JANUARY 2014 BH Dia., mm : 100Report Ref. No. : HASA/100613/3016 Core Dia., mm : 76

Plot No. – Location : IC3-B-37 – INTERNATIONAL CITY- PHASE 3 Core barrel : HWFClient : M.E.Engineering Consultants Bit type : DiamondCoordinates : E: N: Flush type : BentoniteDrilling method : Rotary Casing depth, m : 2.0Remarks : TBM(0.0) established at average level of adjacent asphalt road BH Elevation, m : 0.0 from TBM

49

44

>50>100

29

25

17/20-

20

19

33100/85

25

16

1925/95

0.50

0.95

1.45

1.822.00

3.5

5.0

6.5

8.0

9.5

10.0

0.0

0.50

1.0

1.51.82

2.0

3.5

5.0

6.5

8.0

9.5

1 B

2 S

3 S

4 S5 SC

6 C

7 C

8 C

9 C

10 C

11 C

Dense to very dense, light brown,slightly silty, fine SAND with light

reddish brown sand and rare cementedsand pieces from 1.80m depth.

93{87}(73)

100{90}(87)

93{93}(90)

90{87}(53)

93{90}(90)

100{100}(100)

11.91

10.62

4.1

2.0

Very weak to moderately weak, lightreddish brown, slightly to moderatelyweathered, very thinly bedded, fine to

medium grained, gypsiferousSANDSTONE interbeded with

conglomeratic sandstone.

8.5

Weak to moderately weak, light pinkish to off white creamish,moderately weathered, fine to

medium grained, CALCISILTITE.








Continued: BOREHOLE LOG – BH No. 1Date of drilling started : 5 JANUARY 2014 BH Dia., mm : 100Report Ref. No. : HASA/100613/3016 Core Dia., mm : 76

Plot No. – Location : IC3-B-37 – INTERNATIONAL CITY- PHASE 3 Core barrel : HWFClient : M.E. Engineering Consultants Bit type : DiamondCoordinates : E: N: Flush type : BentoniteDrilling method : Rotary Casing depth, m : 2.0Remarks : TBM(0.0) established at average level of adjacent asphalt road BH Elevation, m : 0.0 from TBM

Plate 3. Borehole Log for Borehole No. 1 Logged by: MS

11.5

13.0

14.5

16.0

17.5

18.0

10.0

11.5

13.0

14.5

16.0

17.5

12 C

13 C

14 C

15 C

16 C

17 C

100{90}(60)

93{90}(53)

97{87}(40)

90

{90}(87)

100{97}(47)

100{100}(100)

10.85

4.08

End of boring @ 18.0m depth. 18.0

06.01.2014

Weak to moderately weak, light pinkish to off white creamish,

moderately weathered, fine to mediumgrained, CALCISILTITE.








BOREHOLE LOG – BH No. 2Date of drilling started : 01 JANUARY 2014 BH Dia., mm : 100Report Ref. No. : HASA/100613/3016 Core Dia., mm : 76

Plot No. – Location : IC3-B-37 – INTERNATIONAL CITY- PHASE 3 Core barrel : HWFClient : M.E. Engineering Consultants Bit type : DiamondCoordinates : E: N: Flush type : BentoniteDrilling method : Percussion(0.0m ~2.5m) & Rotary (2.5m to 18.0m) Casing depth, m : 2.50Remarks : TBM(0.0) established at average level of adjacent asphalt road BH Elevation, m : +0.25 from TBM

35

39

47

>50>100

19

22

26

24/50-

16

17

21

26100/65

10

12

15

1925/85

0.50

0.95

1.45

1.95

2.352.50

3.5

5.0

6.5

8.0

9.5

11.0

0.0

0.50

1.0

1.5

2.02.35

2.5

3.5

5.0

6.5

8.0

9.5

1 B

2 S

3 S

4 S

5 S6 SC

7 C

8 C

9 C

10 C

11C

12 C


reddish brown sand and rare cementedsand pieces from 2.0m depth.

90{80}(28)

100{95}(78)

90{87}(67)

90{87}(77)

93{93}(93)

100{97}(97)

1.23

1.10

4.35

2.5

Very weak to moderately weak,light reddish brown, slightly to

moderately weathered, very thinly bedded, fine to medium grained,

gypsiferous SANDSTONEinterbeded with conglomeratic

sandstone.

8.0

Weak to moderately weak, lightreddish to light brownish off white,

moderately weathered, fine tomedium grained, calcisiltitic

CONGLOMERATE interbededwith calcisiltite from 16.0m to

18.0m depth.








BOREHOLE LOG – BH No. 3Date of drilling started : 30 DECEMBER 2013 BH Dia., mm : 100Report Ref. No. : HASA/100613/3016 Core Dia., mm : 76

Plot No. – Location : IC3-B-37 – INTERNATIONAL CITY- PHASE 3 Core barrel : HWFClient : M.E.Engineering Consultants Bit type : DiamondCoordinates : E: N: Flush type : BentoniteDrilling method : Percussion(0.0m ~2.5m) & Rotary (2.5m to 18.0m) Casing depth, m : 2.5Remarks : TBM(0.0) established at average level of adjacent asphalt road BH Elevation, m : +0.5 from TBM

35

41

50

>50

>100

20

24

30

25/100

-

15

17

20

25

100/10

10

12

15

18

25/90

0.50

0.95

1.45

1.95

2.40

2.50

3.50

5.0

6.5

8.0

9.5

11.0

0.0

0.50

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.40

2.50

3.50

5.0

6.5

8.0

9.5

1 B

2 S

3 S

4 S

5 S

6 SC

7 C

8 C

11 C

12 C

13 C

14 C


reddish brown sand and rare cementedsand pieces from 2.0m depth

100{100}(80)

90{67}(51)

90{77}(73)

100{100}(100)

100

{90}(90)

1.80

1.03

4.5

Very weak to moderately weak, light brown, slightly to moderately

weathered, thickly laminated to thinly bedded, fine to medium grained,

gypsiferous SANDSTONE interbededwith conglomeratic sandstone.

2.5

7.2


moderately weathered, fine to mediumgrained, CALCISILTITE interbedded

with conglomeratic calcisiltite.








Continued: BOREHOLE LOG – BH No. 3Date of drilling started : 30 DECEMBER 2013 BH Dia., mm : 100Report Ref. No. : HASA/100613/3016 Core Dia., mm : 76

Plot No. – Location : IC3-B-37 – INTERNATIONAL CITY- PHASE 3 Core barrel : HWFClient : M.E.Engineering Consultants Bit type : DiamondCoordinates : E: N: Flush type : BentoniteDrilling method : Rotary Casing depth, m : 2.5Remarks : TBM(0.0) established at average level of adjacent asphalt road BH Elevation, m : +0.5 from TBM

Plate 5. Borehole Log for Borehole No. 3 Logged by: MS

12.5

14.0

15.5

17.0

18.0

11.0

12.5

14.0

15.5

17.0

15 C

16 C

17 C

18 C

19 C

91{77}(51)

91{73}

(67)

93{87}(53)

92{87}(87)

93{83}(63)

100{90}(50)

12.06

10.48

End of boring @ 18.0m depth. 18.0

01.01.2014


moderately weathered, fine to mediumgrained, CALCISILTITE interbedded

with conglomeratic calcisiltite.








APPENDIX C (LABORATORY TEST RESULTS)

PARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION PLATE 6

CHEMICAL TEST RESULTS PLATE 7








BH 1 - 1.0 : 1.45 m depthSample Description: Light brown, slight ly silty , fine SAND

010203040

5060708090

10 0

0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100

Seive Size, mm

P e r c e n

t a g e o g

P a s s i n g ,

%

BH 1- 1.0 : 1.45 m depth

Fine Medium Coarse

SAND

Fine Medium Coarse

GRAVEL

Fine Medium Coarse

SILTCOBLECLAY

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.002 0.006 0.02

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.002 0.006 0.02

BH 3 - 1.50 : 1.95 m depthSample Descriptio n: brown, slight ly silty , fine SAND

0102030405060708090

100

0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100

Seive Size, mm

P e r c e n

t a g e o g

P a s s i n g ,

%

BH 3 - 1.5 : 1.95 m de pth

Fine Medium Coarse

SAND

Fine Medium Coarse

GRAVEL

Fine Medium Coarse

SILT

COBL

ECLAY

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.002 0.006 0.02

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.0020.006

0.02

Fine Medium Coarse

SAND

Fine Medium Coarse

GRAVEL

Fine Medium Coarse

SILT

COBL

ECLAY

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.002 0.006 0.02

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.0020.006

0.02

Fine Medium Coarse

SAND

Fine Medium Coarse

GRAVEL

Fine Medium Coarse

SILT

COBL

ECLAY

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.002 0.006 0.02

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.0020.006

0.02

Fine Medium Coarse

SAND

Fine Medium Coarse

GRAVEL

Fine Medium Coarse

SILT

COBL

ECLAY

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.002 0.006 0.02

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.0020.006

0.02

Fine Medium Coarse

SAND

Fine Medium Coarse

GRAVEL

Fine Medium Coarse

SILT

COBL

ECLAY

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.002 0.006 0.02

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.0020.006

0.02

Fine Medium Coarse

SAND

Fine Medium Coarse

GRAVEL

Fine Medium Coarse

SILT

COBL

ECLAY

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.002 0.006 0.02

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.0020.006

0.02

Fine Medium Coarse

SAND

Fine Medium Coarse

GRAVEL

Fine Medium Coarse

SILT

COBL

ECLAY

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.002 0.006 0.02

2.00.06 0.20 0.60 60.06.0 20.00.0020.006

0.02

PARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION

Date of test started : 05 JANUARY 2014

Date of test finished : 07 JANUARY 2014Test method : BS 1377 Part 2: 1990: AMD 9027:

1996: Cl. 9.2 (wet sieving)Report Ref. No. : HASA/100613/3016 Sample prep. method : BS: 1377 Part 2: 1990: Cl 9.2.3.Plot No. – Location : IC3-B-37 – INTERNATIONAL CITY Tested by : OUClient : M.E. Engineering Consultants Checked by : MG

Plate 6. Particle Size Distribution for Borehole No. 1 & 3








CHEMICAL TEST RESULTS

Date of test started : 06 JANUARY 2014 Sampled by : HASA LAB

Date of test finished : 07 JANUARY 2014 Sampled brought in by : HASA LABReport Ref. No. : HASA/100613/3016 Sampling Method : BS 5930: 1999 Cl. 22Plot No. – Location : IC3-B-37 – INTERNATIONAL CITY- PHASE 3 Tested by : MKClient : M.E. Engineering Consultants Checked by : GS

Borehole No. Sample Depth, m pH

ValueChloride Content asCl in acid soluble, %

Sulphate Content as So4 in2 : 1 water/soil extract, g/l

Test method: BS 1377: Part 3: 1990 Cl: 9 Cl: 7.3 Cl: 5.3 & 5.52 Soil 2.35 : 2.50 8.2 0.15 0.50

Borehole No. Sample Depth, m pH

ValueChloride Content as

Cl, % Sulphate Content as So4, g/l

Test method: BS 1377: Part 3: 1990 Cl: 9 Cl: 7.2 Cl: 5.4 & 5.53 Groundwater - 8.3 0.01 0.38

Remarks: NoneTest method variation: Commercial buffer solution used for pH meter calibration.

Plate 7. Chemical Test Results








APPENDIX D (CORE SPECIMEN PHOTOS)

CORE SPECIMEN PHOTOS PLATE 8 to 13








Plate 8. Core Specimen from BH 1 (Depth 2.0m ~ 10.0m)








APPENDIX E (USEFUL INFORMATION)








Percussion Boring Method

• The boring drilling machine consists of derrick, a power unit and winch carrying a light steel cable (wire)

which passes through pulley on top of the derrick.

• The percussion tool is attached by the cable.

• The borehole is advanced by the percussive action of the tool, which is raised and dropped by means of the

winch unit.

• The percussion tool is shell (bailer) for cohesion-less soils. It is heavy steel tube fitted with a flap or clack

valve at the lower end.

Rotary Drilling Method

• Rotary drilling rig is operated by hydraulic system with (3 to 4-inches) cutting bit as drilling tool or core

barrel with 3-inches diameter which is attached to the lower end of string of hollow drilling rods.

• The drilling tool may be either a cutting bit or a coring bit based on the subsurface conditions of the layers

or the formation.

• The coring bit had been fixed at the lower end of a core barrel, which in turn is carried by drilling rods.

• Drilling mud/circulation fluid, which is a mix of water and bentonite pumped down through the hollow

rods and passes under pressure generated by trash pump through narrow holes in the bit or barrel.

• The drilling fluid (mud) cools, lubricates the drilling rods and carries the loose debris (cuttings) to the

surface through the annulus between the rods and the sides of the hole.• The circulation fluid also introduces some supports to the sides of the holes when no casings are used.

• There are two forms of rotary drilling, open-hole drilling and core drilling. The details are as following:

• Open-hole drilling

The open-hole drilling method is generally used in soils, and very weak to weak rocks, uses cutting bit to

break down all the material within the diameter of the hole. Open-hole drilling can be used, only, as a means

of advancing the hole, the drilling rods can then be removed to allow tube samples to be taken or in-situ tests

to be carried out.

• Core drilling

Core drilling is suitable for rocks and hard clays, the bit cuts an annular hole in the material and an intact core

enters the barrel, to be removed as a sample. However, the natural water content of the material is liable to be

increased due to contact with drilling fluid. Typical core diameters used are 2-inches and 3-inches.








Standard Penetration Test (SPT)

Standard Penetration Test was conducted according to BS 1377 part 9 : 1990 Cl. 3.3.

Standard Penetration Test (SPT) is performed in soil formation using split-barrel sampler. The sampler

consists of a drive shoe at the bottom, a split barrel in the middle and a coupling at the top. The split barrel in

the middle has inside and outside diameter of 35mm and 51mm respectively. The split-barrel sampler is

attached to drive rod and then lowered to the bottom of the borehole. The sampler is driven into the soil by

means of a hammer weighing 63.5kg and falls freely from a height of 760mm. The number of blows required

for driving the sampler through three 150mm intervals is recorded. The sum of the number of blows required

for driving the last two 150mm intervals is referred to as standard penetration number, N.

This test used mainly in sands and it can also be used in gravels or gravelly sand in which case the drive shoe

may be replaced by a solid 60o cone, but when this accessory is used in any type of ground the result should bereported separately from standard test using open drive shoe and with preface SPT ©

The table below presents the relative densities and angle of shearing resistance for granular soils correlated to

the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) N values.

(BS 5930 : 1999) & (The Mechanics of Engineering Soils (Capper & Cassie)).

Relative density classification Very Loose Loose Medium Dense Very Dense

SPT, N 0 - 4 4 - 10 10 - 30 30 - 50 > 50

Angle of shearing resistance, φ < 29o 29 o - 30 o 30 o - 35 o 35 o - 40 o > 40 o

The table below presents the consistency of cohesive soils correlated to undrained shear strength.

(BS 5930 : 1999).

Consistency of clay Very Soft Soft Firm Stiff Very Stiff Hard

Undrained shear strength,kN/m2

< 20 20 – 40 40 – 75 75 – 150 150 – 300 > 300

The table below presents the consistency of clay and approximate correlation to the Standard Penetration Test

(SPT) N values. (Principles of Soil Mechanics (Terzaghi & Peck)).

Consistency of clay Very Soft Soft Firm Stiff Very Stiff Hard

SPT, N < 2 2 - 4 4 - 8 8 - 15 15 - 30 > 30

Undrained shear strength,kN/m2

< 25 25 – 50 50 – 100 100 – 200 200 – 400 > 400








Groundwater Table Measuring

The groundwater table was measured using Electric Contact Meter (Dip Meter), Type: KLL. Electric Contact

Meters (Dip Meters) are a portable, used for quick, easy, reliable instruments for measuring the water level and

total depth in boreholes, wells, observation pipes, reservoirs, as well as for the control of pumping tests. As

soon as the electrode of the measuring probe touches the water surface, the signal lamp and on the instrument

lights up and audible signal indicates. The water level can be read from the measuring tape in meters (m) and

centimeters (cm). In most cases, the groundwater table level is confirmed by measuring the level using the

traditional methods.

Particle Size Distribution

The Particle Size Distribution (Sieve Analysis) was conducted according to BS 1377 Part 2 : 1990: Cl. 9.2. andthe classification of soil based on the particle sizes shown in the table below.

Classification Size, mmClay < 0.002Silt 0.002 to 0.06

Fine Sand 0.06 to 0.20Medium Sand 0.20 to 0.6Coarse Sand 0.60 to 2.0Fine Gravel 2.0 to 6.0

Medium Gravel 6.0 to 20.0

Coarse Gravel 20.0 to 60.0Cobbles 60.0 to 200.0Boulders > 200.0








CIRIA Special Publication 31








LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE REPORT*

ASTM : American Society of Testing and MaterialsBGL : Below Ground LevelBH : BoreholeBS : British StandardCPT : Cone Penetration TestDr : Relative DensityDia. : DiameterEGSL : Existing Ground Surface LevelGs : Specific GravityHASA : Hassan Al Amir Soil AnalysisK a : Coefficient of Active Earth PressureK o : Coefficient of Earth Pressure at RestK p : Coefficient of Passive Earth Pressurek s : Modulus of Subgrade ReactionLL : Liquid Limitm : Mass NA : Not ApplicablePL : Plastic LimitPSD : Particle Size DistributionSL : Shrinkage LimitSPT : Standard Penetration TestSPT © : SPT with Solid ConeTBM : Temporary Bench MarkWc : Water Contentγ : Bulk Densityγdry : Dry Density

γSat : Saturated Densityφ : Angle of Shearing Resistanceτ : Shear Strength of Soil

For borehole log :

D : Disturbed SampleU : Undisturbed SampleB : Bulk Disturbed SampleS : SPT with split spoon samplerSC : SPT with solid coneC : Core RunGW : Groundwater

GS : Ground Surface N : Standard Penetration Test NumberUCS : Unconfined Compressive StrengthTCR : Total Core Recovery, %SCR : Solid Core Recovery, %RQD : Rock Quality Designation, %

* Some of above abbreviations may not encountered in the report






LIST OF SYMBOLS USED IN THE REPORT*

Fill Clay

Silt

Sand Gravel

Boulders and Cobles

Marl Chalk

SOILS

ROCKS